JP6659971B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of terminating a second section having a case of informing a player of an advantageous operation mode based on a value relating to a difference number.

  2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of providing an advantageous section and terminating the advantageous section when reaching a maximum of 1500 games or payouts of 3000 sheets (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 6112524

However, in the above-described conventional technology, when the advantageous section is set to a maximum of 1500 games or payouts of 3000 sheets, the advantageous section and the AT become uniform.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a second section having a case of notifying a player of an advantageous operation mode can be completed without being limited to a maximum of 1500 games or payout of 3000 sheets. It is.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means. Note that the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is indicated by parentheses.
The present invention (the thirty-first embodiment)
As a game section,
A first section (normal section) that does not notify the player of an advantageous operation mode (the order of pressing the correct answer of the stop switch 42);
A second section (advantage section) having a case of notifying the player of an advantageous operation mode,
The values for total difference number in the second section comprising a storable predetermined storage unit (difference counter),
In predetermined game of the second section, the values for difference numbers in the predetermined game ( "value related to the difference between the number of" and. Or less identical to the value obtained by subtracting the bet number of game media from the grant number of game media in one game when.) and the predetermined result obtained by adding the values for the total difference numbers stored in the storage means is a positive value, stored in the predetermined storage means based on the value relating to the difference between the number of predetermined game a value for the total difference between the number is set to be updated,
In particular game of the second section, when the result obtained by adding the values for the total difference number stored in the predetermined storage unit with the value relating to the difference between the number of specific game negative value, the predetermined storage specified value means (0 (H)) and can be stored,
Based on the value relating to the total difference number in the second section, characterized in that to enable completion of the second section.

According to the present invention, since the second section can be ended based on the value regarding the total difference number , "when the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) or during the advantageous section, When the number of payouts reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000), the second section can be ended without being bound by the end condition.
In addition, it is possible to update the value relating to the total difference number in the second section based on the specified value.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing control of the slot machine in the embodiment. It is a figure which shows a storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, an acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, etc. 6A and 6B are diagrams illustrating a main control board accommodated in a board case, wherein FIG. 7A illustrates Example 1 and FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 4 is a view showing a display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, a positional relationship between reels, an effective line, and the like. It is a figure (1) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the payout number, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and the pressing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition device, its winning combination, and the order of pushing. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure showing a pushing order instruction number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of a push order instruction number, an advantageous push order, and a display content. It is a figure showing an effect group number table. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the transition of RT. It is a figure showing a lighting process of an advantageous section display LED. 6 is a timing chart (Examples 1 and 2) showing a processing flow of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of the push order instruction | indication information by the acquisition number display LED, and notification of the correct answer push order by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding an advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the total number of payouts. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation. It is a figure which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory. It is a figure (modification example) which is a part of RWM and shows the storage area regarding the number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the frequency | count of a game etc. using a register. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 1 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example 3 in steps S109 to S114 of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process which updates the frequency | count of a game etc., without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the calculation processing of an advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining information displayed on a management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on the storage number display LED. It is a figure showing an example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a base unit 1 of the slot machine 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a main control board housed in a board case according to the second embodiment, in which (a) illustrates Example 1 and (b) illustrates Example 2. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 1) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 2) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 3) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 4) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 5) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 6) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 7) on the main control board side according to the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 8) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (Example 9) on the main control board side in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing (example 10) on the main control board side in a 3rd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 1) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a process (example 2) on the sub-control board side in the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example (example 1-example 4) of the image display of the image display device by a sub control board regarding the addition in AT (Example 3). It is a figure explaining increase of the number of AT games, change of production, etc. in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of an external signal in a 4th embodiment. 14 is a time chart (example 3) of an external signal in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing RT shift in example 1 of a 5th embodiment. 15 is a time chart showing a relationship between an RT shift and an AT in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing example 2 ((a)-(c)) of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing RT shift in a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of replay D group drawn by RT3 in a 6th embodiment, a winning combination, and the pressing order and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows example 1 and example 2 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 3 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 4 and example 5 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in a 9th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of an 11th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of an 11th embodiment. 30 is a time chart illustrating an ending effect and the like in a twelfth embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (2) of a 13th embodiment. 30 is a time chart showing an extension of an advantageous section in a fourteenth embodiment. 30 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an advantageous section and a freeze in a fifteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (1) in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a), (b) showing Example 1 and (c) showing Example 2 , (D) shows Example 3, and (e) shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number conversion in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows Example 3, (e) ) Shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the description of "DEFB", (c) shows Example 1, and (d) shows Example 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number lottery data definition in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (1) in a 16th embodiment. FIG. 80 is a view illustrating an all RT common lottery table (2) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (3) in the sixteenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 80. (A) is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (4) in 16th Embodiment, It is a figure following FIG. 81, (b) is a figure which shows the non-RT time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 40C is a diagram showing an RT1 lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT2 lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the RT3 lottery table in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT4 time lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 1BBA time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure showing the 1BBB lottery table in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device numbers etc. in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of internal lottery 1 in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of lottery judgment in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of condition device number set 1 in a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of a condition device number etc. in a modification of a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing at the time of all the reels stop in a modification of a 16th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 2 in the modification of a 16th embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (3) in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows the example 1, (c) shows the example 2, (d) shows the winning number conversion data definition. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 17th Embodiment, (b) shows the example 1, (c) shows the example 2, (d) shows the all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (6) in the seventeenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 94 (d). FIG. 95 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (7) in the seventeenth embodiment, and is a view following FIG. 95. (A) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 1, (c) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 2, (D) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 3, (e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and (f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device numbers etc. in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 3 in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of two-step lottery in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the processing of the lottery without a setting difference in a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of a 17th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 4 in the modification of a 17th embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number lottery data definition in 18th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (8) in an 18th embodiment. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating the all RT common lottery table (9) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is a diagram following FIG. 105. FIG. 107 is a view illustrating the all RT common lottery table (10) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is subsequent to FIG. 106. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating the all RT common lottery table (11) in the eighteenth embodiment, which is a diagram following FIG. 107. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition equipment numbers etc. in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of an advantageous section number acquisition in an 18th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 5 in an 18th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing winning number conversion and advantageous section shift determination data definition, and (c) is Example 1. , (D) show Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (12) in a 19th embodiment. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (13) in the nineteenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 114. It is a figure showing the all RT common lottery table (14) in the nineteenth embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 115. (A) is a figure which shows the advantage area shift determination random number table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows the description of "DEFW", (c) shows example 1, (d) shows example 2 . It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing of condition device number etc. in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of internal lottery 2 in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 6 in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of an advantageous section shift lottery in a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of a 19th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing of condition device number set 7 in the modification of a 19th embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a more detailed configuration of a main CPU, a ROM, and an RWM in a twentieth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing various LEDs on a display board in a 20th embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows the management information display LED in 20th Embodiment more concretely. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating details of a digit and a segment in the twentieth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a data table stored in a ROM. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 5 provided on a main control board in the twentieth embodiment (a reference example is also shown). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a main control board in a twentieth embodiment. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a main control board in a twentieth embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing electric signal wiring on a display substrate in a twentieth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in a 20th embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). 9 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by a main control board (main CPU). It is a flow chart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in a 20th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 20th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows restoration impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2). FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an output port in a twenty-first embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit and segment in 21st Embodiment. (B) is a figure showing the LED display counter of a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in a 21st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 21st embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the various LED on the display board in a 22nd embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows the management information display LED in 22nd Embodiment more specifically. (C) is a figure which shows the set value display LED in 22nd Embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a digit and a segment in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an output port according to a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a main control board in a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a main control board in a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a display substrate in a twenty-second embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the twenty-second embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a flow chart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in a 22nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 22nd embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 6 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the twenty-third embodiment. (B) is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating output ports 2 to 7 in a twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between digits and segments in a twenty-fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing Example 1 of the LED display counter in the 24th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in a 24th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 24th embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a numeral table (1) in a twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a numerical table (2) at the time of non-RT in a 25th embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) at the time of RT1 in a twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) at the time of RT2 in a twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) at RT3 in a twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 51 is a view showing a numerical table (2) at RT4 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) at the time of 1BBA operation in a twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing the number table (2) at the time of 1BBB operation in a 25th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an advantageous section shift at the time of a rare role election in the first embodiment and whether or not the advantageous section display LED is lit, and (b) is an advantageous section shift at the rare role election in the twenty-fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED lighting. It is a figure showing a 1BB winning probability for every set value in a 25th embodiment, and an advantageous section shift probability at the time of 1BB winning. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the instruction function operation processing in a 25th embodiment. 30 is a time chart showing an example of activating an instruction function at the time of the first push order bell winning after shifting to an advantageous section having no instruction game section in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In the 25th embodiment, a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning the special role before the operation of the first instruction function after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section. is there. In the 25th embodiment, it is a time chart which shows an example which activates an instruction function at the time of the first push order bell election after satisfying once instruction operation conditions in an advantageous section which does not have an instruction game section. In the 25th embodiment, it is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special combination before satisfying the instruction operation condition once in an advantageous section having no instruction game section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in the advantageous section having no designated game section, after the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted (after the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”), the instruction function is performed at the time of pushing the bell. It is a time chart which shows an example which is operated and ends an advantageous section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in the advantageous section having no designated game section, by winning the special role before the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed (before the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”), It is a time chart which shows the example which cancels operation of an instruction function. Information on the RWM to be cleared in the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (first initialization processing) in the twenty-fifth embodiment, information on the RWM to be retained even after the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, and It is a figure showing information on RWM cleared in initialization processing (2nd initialization processing). (A) shows a modification of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not the advantageous section shift and the advantageous section display LED are turned on when the rare role is elected in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (A) shows a modification of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not the advantageous section shift and the advantageous section display LED are turned on when the rare role is elected in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (A) shows a modification of the number table (1) in FIG. 160, and (b) shows whether or not the advantageous section shift and the advantageous section display LED are turned on when the rare role is elected in FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. It is a figure showing the management information displayed by the management information display LED in a 26th embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a storage area (1) of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a storage area (2) of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing the blinking display condition of the identification seg and the ratio seg in the 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a program start (M_PRG_START) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) in a 26th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the payout number update in 26th Embodiment. (B) is a flowchart showing waiting for an interrupt (C_INTR_WAIT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the interruption processing (I_INTR) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game number count (S_GAME_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows count up (S_CNT_UP) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section game number of times (S_ATGAME_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-payouts count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET) in the 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-distribution-of-accessories number (S_BNSPAY_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-distributions-of-continuous-accessories number (S_RBPAY_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) stored in a ROM, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific ROM storage area (address and data). FIG. It is a flow chart which shows ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows blinking request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in a 26th embodiment. It is a figure showing the blinking / non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blinking bit inspection frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). It is a flow chart which shows ratio setting processing (S_RATE_SET) in a 27th embodiment (1). It is a flow chart which shows ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in a 27th embodiment (1). It is a flow chart which shows ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in a 27th embodiment (1). It is a flow chart which shows ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in a 27th embodiment (1). It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in the 27th embodiment (2). It is a flowchart which shows the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) in a 27th embodiment (2). It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in a 27th embodiment (3). It is a flowchart which shows the ratio at power-on (S_CAL_PWON) in a 27th embodiment (3). It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in the 27th embodiment (3). FIG. 202 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the processing after step S2400 in FIG. 202 (a modification of the twenty-sixth embodiment). FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in a use area of the RWM in a twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing LED segment tables 1 and 2 stored in a use area of a ROM according to a twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing data and addresses of LED segment tables 1 and 2 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing addresses of a pressing order instruction number table in a twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a medal payout number update process in a twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in the twenty-eighth embodiment. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which “88” (setting is being changed) is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and (2) is a display showing “= 1” (first left stop) on the acquired number display LED. (3) is a diagram showing a state in which “dE” (front door open) is displayed on the acquired number display LED, and (4) is a diagram showing “E1” ( It is a figure which shows the state which displayed the power-off recovery error), (5) shows the state which displayed the storage number "50" on the storage number display LED, and displayed the acquisition number "9" on the acquisition number display LED. FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in a use area of the RWM in a twenty-ninth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among set value data, set value display data, and set value display in a twenty-ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in a 29th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting value display data set processing in a 29th embodiment. (1) is a diagram showing a state in which set values "1" to "6" are displayed on digit 4, and (2) is a display of "= 1" (first left stop) on the acquisition number display LED. It is a figure which shows a state, and (3) is a figure which shows the state which displayed acquired number "9" on the acquired number display LED. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the pushing order instruction | indication number, the pushing order instruction | indication information, and the advantageous pushing order in the modification of a 28th and 29th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between segments A to G and bits 0 to 6 according to modifications of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments. It is a figure which shows the display of a push order instruction | indication number, display data, a digit, and an advantageous push order in the modification of 28th and 29th embodiments. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between next operation instruction information, display data, display of digits, and a stop switch to be operated next in the modified examples of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship of the display of the condition apparatus number, the display data, the digit, and the advantageous pushing order in the modification of the 28th and 29th embodiments about the condition apparatus numbers 11-22. It is a flow chart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the modification of the 29th embodiment. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a storage area of the RWM according to the thirtieth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing in a 30th embodiment. 244 is a flowchart showing a game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701. 245 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724 in FIG. 245. 246 is a flowchart illustrating 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742 in FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746. 244 is a flowchart illustrating an advantageous section type update in step S2703 in FIG. 244. 244 is a flowchart illustrating a pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704 in FIG. 244. 250 is a flowchart showing updating of a maximum payout notification flag in step S2793 in FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing a game end check process (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705 in FIG. 244. 252 is a flowchart illustrating an advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG. 252. FIG. 40 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value in the thirty-first embodiment, wherein (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In the 31st embodiment, it is a figure (slump flag) which shows the relationship between a difference number counter value and an advantageous area, (a) shows the example 1 and (b) shows the example 2. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a storage area of the RWM 53 related to the thirty-first embodiment. In the thirty-first embodiment, (a) Example 1 is a diagram showing a calculation method based on the assumption that the number of automatic bets is not the payout number, and (b) Example 2 is a view based on the idea that the number of automatic bets is the payout number. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a calculation method. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the update timing of the difference counter value in the thirty-first embodiment, wherein (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. In the 31st embodiment, it is a figure explaining the relation between the calculation of the difference number counter value and the number of bytes of each data. (A) Example 1 shows a case where the calculation is performed as in example 1 of FIG. b) Example 2 shows a case where the calculation is performed as in Example 2 of FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a relationship between a difference counter value and a sub display in the thirty-first embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification mode is changed in the thirty-first embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
“RT” means that the type (number) of the condition device (1BB, replay, small role) to be drawn and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state. Shifting from RT to another RT means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be drawn varies. Therefore, the winning probability for each type of replay in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and it is possible that the winning probability for each type of replay is the same for one RT and another RT. Absent. However, the sum of the replay winning probabilities may be the same for one RT and another RT.

The RT includes a non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 in the present embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to “RT0”. Therefore, in this specification, "RT" includes non-RT.
In this embodiment, the non-internal portion is set to non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3, and the internal portion is set to RT4. The types (numbers) of replays to be drawn and the winning probabilities are different between non-internal and internal.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RT during the special game. In the present embodiment, in each of the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation, at least one replay lottery is performed.
The "role" means a target of a lottery. In the present embodiment, a condition device is randomly selected, and the condition device is set to include at least one role. Therefore, when one of the condition devices is won, at least one role is won (there is at least one winning role).

The condition devices selected by lottery include a "accessory condition device" that includes any of the "special roles (casings)" and a "winning and replay condition device" that includes either the small role or the replay. .
The “accessory condition device” includes any of special combinations. When a special role is won, SB (Single Bonus), RB (Type 1 Special Role; Regular Bonus), CB (Type 2 Special Role; Challenge Bonus), which are devices that facilitate winning of a small role, 1BB (a first-class continuous actuation device; a first-type big bonus) and 2BB (a second-class continuous actuation device; a second-type big bonus) are activated.

Here, the first-class accessory continuous operating device (1BB) refers to a device that can continuously operate the first-class special accessory (RB).
Similarly, the second-class accessory continuous operation device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating a second-class special accessory (CB).
In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special combination, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either one of two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the ending condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
In this embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the “winning and replay condition device” includes either a small role or a replay that does not carry the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the “accessory condition device” includes any of RB, 1BB, and 2BB that can carry the winning information after the next game, and any of SB and CB that does not carry the winning information after the next game. In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) that can carry the winning information after the next game is provided.

When the winning information is won for the special equipment condition device that includes one of the special roles that can be carried over after the next game, the special role winning information until the symbol combination corresponding to that special role stops on the activated line Carry over to the next game.
Then, a game that has not won the bonus information condition device including any of the special roles that can carry the winning information after the next game is referred to as “non-internal”. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected special role has not yet stopped on the activated line, that is, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the selected special role has been stopped, that is, the game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over to “inside” That. In the present embodiment, a game that has won the accessory condition apparatus is included in “non-inside”, but a game that has won the accessory condition apparatus may be included in “inside”.

  The “advantageous operation mode” of the stop switch means an operation mode in which a hand with a large number of payouts wins in a game in which an advantage / disadvantage occurs in a game result (combination of symbols stopped on an active line) by an operation mode of the stop switch. Or, an operation mode in which a hand that does not shift (promote) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT wins. The “advantageous operation mode” is also referred to as a correct operation mode.

The “operation mode” is a concept indicating the order of pressing the stop switches and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the active line).
In the present embodiment, the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game at the time of winning the pressing order bell (small win B group, small win C group), overlapping replay (replay B group, replay C group) ) Equivalent to the game at the time of winning.

Further, when the push order bell is won, when the stop switch is operated in the correct answer push order, the bell (small role) to be won is changed to the higher-level bell (of the overlapping winning bell group (small role group), A bell (small win), in which the combination of the symbols such as the most small wins is displayed most advantageously for the player, may be called.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the wrong push order when the push order bell is won, there is a case where the cheap bell wins or a case where the role is missed according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stop appearance (combination of symbols on the active line; also referred to as “spill eye”) displayed when a role is missed is referred to as a “pattern symbol” and has pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, at the time of replay overlap winning (winning of the replay B group and the replay C group), different symbol combinations are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switch. )).
In this case, the push order for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player, for example, the combination of symbols that shift to RT with a higher replay winning probability or the combination of symbols that maintain RT with higher replay winning probability, is set to “correct answer”. Push order "or" promotion push order ".
On the other hand, the push order in which the symbol combination that shifts from the RT that is advantageous to the player (for example, the RT with a high replay winning probability) to the unfavorable RT (for example, the RT with a low replay winning probability) is stopped and displayed as “incorrect” Push order "or" fall (demotion) push order ".

The “instruction function” means a function of displaying (notifying) the above-mentioned “advantageous operation mode” to the player.
In other words, the “pointing function” refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the “instruction function” is a device that facilitates winning of a small role, the “instruction function” displays a correct answer pressing order for winning the correct answer pressing order (higher-level bell) when the pressing order bell is won. This does not include displaying a correct answer pressing order for winning an advantageous replay (a replay for shifting to an advantageous RT or a replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of replay overlapping winning.

In the following embodiments, the “instruction function” refers to a function that displays “advantageous operation mode” to the player, and the “instruction function activation” indicates that the correct answer push order is displayed when the push order bell is won. , And displaying the correct push order for winning an advantageous replay when replay overlap winning.
Showing the "instruction" content to the player is "display", and notifying the player of the instruction content is "notification". Therefore, the “instruction function” is both a “display function” and a “notification function”.
Further, "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but no penalty is imposed on the player for not complying with "instruction". However, if the correct answer push order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not followed, a higher-order bell may not be won when the push order bell is won, or an unfavorable replay may be won when the replay overlap wins.

The “instruction function operation game” refers to a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (a small role group B, a small role group C, a replay B group, a replay C group). In the game) won in the group), the game in which the instruction function is activated is meant. For this reason, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may also be referred to as a notification game.
Further, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not operated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes a “normal section”, a “standby section”, and an “advantage section”.
First, the “normal section” is a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number or a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct answer pressing order), which will be described later. This is a game section in which transmission to the board is prohibited and does not affect the performance of the instruction function at all (does not activate the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function cannot be operated and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode cannot be displayed. However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (role), it is possible to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section (lottery or the like).
In the normal section, since the indicating function must not be operated, it is not possible to display the pressing order indicating information on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by an image display device electrically connected to the sub-control board described later.

In the case of making a transition decision to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association (linking) with the winning condition device.
Here, the decision to shift to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition device means that the lottery of the condition apparatus is determined at the same time as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and that the specific condition apparatus is won. , A lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is separately performed.

  In the present embodiment, it is set so as to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device. The length of the advantageous section to be determined (winned) (the number of games) differs depending on the winning condition device. For example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when winning 1BB described later, the initial value is counted from the end of the 1BB game and becomes an advantageous section of 50 games, and when the small section E1 alone is won. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, there may be an advantageous section in which only one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role group C, the replay B group, and the replay C group) is executed. is there.

Furthermore, in determining transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning condition apparatus, a condition apparatus that can be determined to transition to the advantageous section (separately, when performing a lottery to determine whether to transition to the advantageous section, , A condition device that is a condition for performing a lottery) is set so as to be a condition device that does not have a setting difference in winning probability.
Here, the "set value" is to determine the degree of advantage of the player, and the higher (or lower) the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the expected value of the payout is, the higher the set value is). ) Is set. The setting values are provided, for example, in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6.
The “condition device that has no difference in the winning probabilities (common to the settings)” refers to a condition device in which the winning probabilities are the same in all the settings.

  In addition, it is only `` possible '' to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability. However, this does not mean that it is necessary to always make a transition to an advantageous section or to carry out a lottery for transition to an advantageous section. Of course, even when the condition apparatus having no setting difference in the winning probability is won, it is possible to make no determination regarding the advantageous section.

  On the other hand, "a condition device having a setting difference in the winning probabilities (for each setting)" indicates that the winning probabilities are not the same in all settings. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probabilities are different for all setting values, the case where the winning probabilities of some setting values are different from the winning probabilities of some other setting values (for example, the winning probabilities of the settings 1 to 5). Is “x” and the winning probability of the setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”, etc.).

Further, the “advantageous section” is a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction content is displayed on the main control board. Only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the (advantageous operation mode) can be identified, it refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be activated), and a game section in which an advantageous operation mode can be displayed (may be displayed). The game in the advantageous section may be referred to as a reportable game. Conversely, a game in the normal section and a game in the standby section may be referred to as an unreportable game.
However, the sub-control board cannot output an effect contrary to the content of the instruction given by the main control board or the signal related to the received instruction function.

  Then, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the maximum payout number (“9”) corresponding to the specified number (“3”) in the game in which the instruction function operation game can be executed (when the accessory is not operated) can be obtained. In a game that has been won in the condition device (group of small wins B) having an advantageous operation mode, at least one or more games are instructed to indicate the operation mode of the stop switch in which the role (small win 01) relating to the maximum payout number wins. It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small hand B group and a small hand C group are provided as a so-called push order bell condition device.
In the small win B group, the small win 01, which is a nine-prize win, always wins when the push order is correct, and the one win can win (may be missed) when the push win is incorrect.
On the other hand, in the small win C group, the small win 02, which is the three-prong win, always wins when the push order is correct, and the one win always wins when the push win is incorrect.

The game at the time of executing the instruction function operation game is when the accessory is not operated (normal game), and the prescribed number (the number of medals to be inserted) in the normal game is “3”.
Further, when the prescribed number is “3”, the maximum payout number is “9” (at the time of winning the small part 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, by operating the instruction function at the time of winning the condition device (small win B group) in which the small win 01 can win, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small win 01 is determined. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

Further, during the advantageous section, in a game that has won the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may be always activated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, even if the game has won the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, the instruction function may not be operated.

Furthermore, the “standby section” refers to a game section when the transition to the advantageous section has not yet been made after the decision to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, a transition may be made from the normal section to the advantageous section, or from the normal section to the standby section, and further from this standby section to the advantageous section. Note that the transition from the advantageous section to the standby section cannot be performed, and the transition always to the normal section after the end of the advantageous section. The standby section can be shifted only when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special role. In the game in which the symbol combination is displayed, the game must be completed. Of course, the game may end before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is displayed.
Also, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the instruction function on the main control board or transmit a signal relating to the instruction function to the sub-control board. In the case where the instruction function is operated on the main control board and a signal relating to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub-control board, the condition is that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of the present embodiment, one execution of the instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role group C, the replay B group, and the replay C group) is executed, and a case of executing a predetermined number of games is executed. Having.
In the advantageous section in which the predetermined number of games are executed, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically activated.
In addition, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, but, for example, to perform an end (punk) lottery at a predetermined timing, and to terminate the advantageous section when this lottery is won. You may.

Alternatively, simply shifting to the advantageous section does not satisfy the execution condition of the instruction function operation game, and determines whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game by lottery or the like on the condition that it is in the advantageous section, When it is determined to execute the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game may be executed until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.
Also, during the advantageous section, a determination (lottery or the like) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section.
In addition, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and when the upper limit number of games is reached, the advantageous section is always terminated at that time even if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is present (limiter). Operation), and shifts to the normal section.

  Furthermore, when the maximum number of games has been reached, the condition device (small win B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number ("9") is not or has not been won. Even if the player (small win 01) related to the maximum payout number has never instructed the operation mode of the stop switch to win, the advantageous section always ends at that time (limiter operation), and the normal Move to the section.

As described above, although the contents partially overlap with the above, the advantageous sections in the present embodiment are determined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (even when it is determined at the same time as the lottery of the condition device) must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section must not differ depending on the set value.
b) Additional lottery in an advantageous section (even when determined without performing lottery) must not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on a winning condition device, it must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference.

c) Special role in the normal section (meaning special role that carries over the winning. The same applies in this paragraph.) During the inside of the special section or during the operation of the special role, the lottery of the transition to the advantageous section (may be determined simultaneously with the lottery of the condition device). ) Must not be performed. In addition, during the special role, even in the advantageous section, the additional lottery of the advantageous section (may be determined without performing the lottery) must not be performed. Furthermore, if a special condition is included in the advantageous section and a condition device having a setting difference is won, and the special combination is activated, the additional lottery of the advantageous section during the special combination is activated (determined without performing the lottery). Also).
Here, conventionally, it is common to perform the AT lottery even after the inside is completed, so even if the inside is performed, the player waits for the AT win while maintaining the inside without receiving a special role. It was possible. However, recently, it is desirable that the lottery of the AT not be performed inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined that when a special role is won in the normal section and the inside is inside, it is not allowed to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section in the inside. In addition, if a special role is won during an advantageous section and the player is in the inside, it is determined that the advantageous section must not be added in the inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the game is shifted from the next game to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, the bet for the next game is possible). ), It is necessary to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section from the next game (lighting of a lamp indicating that the section is an advantageous section).
Here, conventionally, when the player wins the AT, it is general to exhaust a certain number of games (via a precursor) after the player wins the AT and before the player is notified of the AT winning. Was. Also, for example, in the case of drawing an AT based on the winning of a rare role, if the player loses the rare role in the game, the player wins the rare role and the AT is drawn based on the rare role. Therefore, even if the player has won the AT by winning the rare role, the game may be stopped before the AT winning is notified. Thereafter, when another player plays the game on the platform, there is a problem that the other person may enjoy the benefit of the AT (assigned by the previous player). However, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the fact that the next game is an advantageous section is displayed until the advantageous section starts (in this embodiment, until the next game can be bet) in principle. Therefore, the above problem does not occur.
As described above, in the related art, the AT winning is notified after the winning of the AT (particularly, after passing through the precursor of the AT), whereas in the present embodiment, in principle, the betting of the next game is possible. The difference is that the display indicates that it is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Further, the conventional AT winning notification is merely performed as a part of the effect, but is displayed to the player as an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp indicating an advantageous section). Lighting) is performed in order to solve the above-described problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to a ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections (normal section + standby section + advantage section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games in all the game sections is “1000” and the number of games in the advantageous section therebetween is “700”, the advantageous section ratio is “70%”.
As will be described later, the advantageous section ratio is displayed in the present embodiment, and the displayed advantageous section ratio is a numerical value obtained by performing a calculation and rounding down decimal places.

The pull-in rate (PB) is a probability that a desired symbol to be stopped on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line from the moment when the stop switch is operated until the reel stops (maximum number of moving frames). Show.
If the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the active line (up to the active line). The inability to perform the pull-in is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment when the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the fact that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) on the active line is described as “PB”. = 1 ".

"PB = 1" has a case where the role is such that all reels are the same and a case where only such a specific (part of) reel is so.
In the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is set to “4”, and when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, “PB = 1” and exceeds 5 symbols (6 symbols or more). When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1” is obtained. In particular, the number of symbols on the reel of this embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at five symbol intervals, the symbol becomes "PB = 1".

When the game progresses as “N−1” game eyes, “N” game eyes, “N + 1” game eyes,... (“N” is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is “N” games. When it is an eye, the game of the “N” game eye is referred to as “this game”. Also, the game of the “N−1” game eye is referred to as “previous game”.
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as “next game”.

The payout ratio is a value calculated from the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out / the number of inserted medals. When the value is “1”, the current state is maintained, and when the value exceeds “1”, the number of medals increases. In this state, when the number is less than “1”, the number of medals decreases.
Further, the “medal payout expected number” is calculated by the sum of “winning probability of winning times × number of payouts” for all winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

  Furthermore, the “difference number” is a value calculated by “medal payout number (actually paid out medal number or expected medal payout number) −medal insertion number”. When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, The difference number exceeds “0”, and when the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number becomes less than “0”.

“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to three when the accessory is not operated (during normal game). On the other hand, during the operation of the accessory (1BB), the number of bets that can be played (specified number) is set to two. In order to bet a medal, an actual medal is cared in from a medal insertion slot, or a bet switch is operated to bet a stored medal.
Note that the “game medium” is a medal in the present embodiment, but, for example, in the case of an enclosed game machine, electronic information is used as a game medium. It is to be noted that “electronic information” means, for example, that when money (banknote) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by a gaming machine. Can be stored in a gaming machine as a game medium for performing the game.
In addition, the display of the accessory ratio, which will be described later, can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to a ball-and-ball game machine. Therefore, the “game medium” includes not only medals but also game balls. It is.

  “Storing” is different from the above “betting” and means crediting medals inside the slot machine 10. The term “storage” may be used in a sense including a bet, but in the present specification, the term “storage” is used in a sense that does not include a “bet”. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the game state or the like. When a small part wins and medals are paid out, medals are stored. In addition, when the medals are maintained and inserted through the medal insertion slot, if the maximum number has already been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when a medal is care-inserted from the medal insertion slot, there is a case where a bet is placed and a case where the bet is stored.

  Note that "paying out" a medal to the player by the slot machine 10 and "acquiring" a medal by the player are equivalent. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the slot machine 10 side, it is "payout of medals", and from the viewpoint of the player side, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, there is a case where it is referred to as "payout (number)" (for example, the payout means 67) and a case where it is referred to as "acquisition (number)" (for example, the acquired number display LED 78), both of which have the same meaning.

In this specification, a numerical value suffixed with “B” at the end (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a numerical value suffixed with "H" means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating “16” in decimal is expressed as “00010000 (B)” in binary, and is expressed as “10 (H)” in hexadecimal. Numerical values indicating decimal numbers are described as “16 (D)” as necessary.
However, when it is clear which of a binary number, a decimal number, and a hexadecimal number, the suffixes “B”, “D”, and “H” may be omitted.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as typical control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (this does not mean that only the one shown in FIG. 1 is provided).

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 and a peripheral device for game progress including an operation switch such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection for inputting a signal from an operation switch or the like, and the output port 52 is a connection for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow whose signal from the peripheral device is directed to the main control board 50, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow directed from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary to display management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50 and executes a program necessary for the progress of a game, performs calculations, and the like. Is executed.
The main CPU 55 has a built-in register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, and the like) are provided.

The MPU including the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the registers is mounted on the main control board 50. It should be noted that the RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. Note that the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided externally, in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and a closing sensor 44, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, the medal is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening. I do. On the other hand, when the insertion of the medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped and the winning of the combination is completed) during the game, the insertion of the medal is not permitted. I do. That is, the blocker 45 permits medal insertion at least when a game is not played.

  Further on the downstream side of the blocker 45, an input sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided. Therefore, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is configured to be detected by the passage sensor 43a and further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

As shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch 46 as operation switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum or specified) medals are provided.
The present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

  The prescribed number of the present embodiment is set to three when the accessory is not activated and two when the accessory is activated. However, if the 1-bet switch 40a is operated (pressed) twice, two medals will be given. Can be inserted, and three medals can be inserted when operated (pressed) three times. Further, during the operation of the accessory, two medals (specified number) can be inserted at a time by operating the 3-bet switch 40b.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, right) reels 31 and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. In FIG. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another separate board (such as a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

  On the display board 75, a stored number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided near operation switches operated by the player, and are provided at positions where the player can always visually recognize them. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 are provided as in display substrates 75A, 75B,. , Any one of the LEDs 76 to 78 may be provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the stored number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquired number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
In FIG. 2, a display board 75 (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is arranged below the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquisition number display LED 78 and inside the slot machine 10. ing.

The stored number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and includes a digit 1 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying a lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, the “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, particularly includes a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point; a dot-shaped LED for displaying a decimal point). Have been.
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display board 75 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4. In this embodiment, nine digits are provided, and the other digits are provided on the main control board. 60 (the details will be described later).

The stored number display LED 76 displays the number of stored medals, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are bet or stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more coins are inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is up to three, the medals are bet and are not stored. When medals are further maintained, medals are stored inside the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored cards reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if medals are provisioned through the medal insertion slot 43, the medals prepared by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout port.

  Here, when a role with a medal payout (excluding replay) wins and a medal corresponding to the role is paid out, priority is given to the fact that the medal is actually paid out from the payout port, and the medal is paid out inside the slot machine 10. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored coins before winning is "10", when the winning of nine coins wins, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from "10" to "19".

  Furthermore, when the number of stored pieces exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning, the portion exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored coins is “47” before the winning of the role, and nine medals are paid out by the winning of the nine role, three are stored and the stored number becomes “50”, which exceeds “50”. Six cards are paid out from the payout port.

  Further, at the time of winning the replay, medals are not stored and paid out, and the medals of the number betted in the game are automatically betted for the replay. For example, when the game is performed with three bets (three) and a replay is won, three medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the winning of the replay is the insertion of a medal for performing a replay, even if a settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medal cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules on Approval of Gaming Machines and Verification of Type” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “rules”), when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay stops on the activated line, the condition device related to the replay is It is interpreted as an operation and not a "winning". However, in the present application (the present specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the winning combinations (replaying winning combination), and the stop of the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replay on the activated line is referred to as “replay winning”.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by a segment DP of digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be turned on during the advantageous section. Therefore, the player can determine at a glance whether or not he / she is currently staying in the advantageous section by checking the lighting / off state of the advantageous section display LED 77.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located near the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when the player ends the game and has a stored medal (for example, when “10” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), the player operates the settlement switch 46. The fact that the vehicle is not in the advantageous section can be easily confirmed by turning off the advantageous section display LED 77. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable in principle. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game against the will of the player despite the fact that it is during the advantageous section (or the next game from the advantageous section).

Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 displaying an upper digit and a digit 4 displaying a lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays two digits, like the stored number display LED 76.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is “00”. For example, when a nine-prize win as described later wins and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes: From "00" to "09".
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled so as to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as “0”.

The acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an error number “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves to display an acquired number, an error content, and an advantageous operation mode by operating the instruction function. The notification of the advantageous pressing order when the instruction function is activated is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of an instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is “notification of the pressing order”. Called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous pushing order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Further, information such as “= 1” in FIG. 20, for example, which is the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the indicating function, is referred to as “push order indicating information”. That is, by the operation of the instruction function, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control board 50 is housed and sealed in a transparent board case 16 due to its security. The main control board 50 cannot be accessed unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is destroyed (the board case 16 cannot be opened). In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50 </ b> A and 50 </ b> B) are shown so as to be seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. Note that the caulked portion 16a may be referred to as a sealing member.

On the board case 16, stickers indicating the certification of the proper main control board 50, the serial number, the opening record of the caulking portion 16a, and the like are stuck, but the seals may obstruct the view. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on main control board 50 so as not to exist.
The digit 5 is a set value display LED 73, which displays the current set value when checking the setting or changing the setting. Note that the set value display LED 73 does not necessarily need to be mounted on the main control board 50, and may be used, for example, as the back side of the front door, or as the stored number display LED 76 or the acquired number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. The management information display LED 74 is provided, for example, in one digit housing in FIG.
It is preferable to design the size of width m1 × length n ≧ 36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design the size of width m2 × length n ÷ 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in Example 1 of (a), the number of the main control board 50 is one, but the number is not limited to this, and as in Example 2 of (b), the main control Alternatively, each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control board 50 is composed of a plurality of separate boards, it is necessary to house the entire board in the board case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control board 50 is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B, and a connector is provided on each of the main control boards 50A and 50B, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector that can directly connect the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and a harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42 (b) described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, while the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B also functions as a display board on which the management information display LED 74 is mounted.

  Further, the management information display LEDs 74 are arranged such that, for example, digits 6 and 7 are arranged in an upper row, as in Example 2 of FIG. , And digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven bar-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP, and the segments A to G (seven) constitute a so-called seven-segment. .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, in digit 1, segments A to G constitute the upper 7-segment of stored number display LED 76, and segment DP is unused.
In the digit 2, the segments A to G constitute the lower 7 digits of the stored number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, each of the segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes 7-segment of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

  Further, of the digit 5, the segments A to G constitute the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED which is turned on during the setting change. That is, when only the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73 is lit, the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7-segment and the segment DP are lit, the setting is being changed. Note that the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that is turned on when the set value is determined during the setting change.

  The segments 6 to 9 constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 6 and 7 display the information type of the management information. Segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in segments 6 and 7 in the management information. Segments DP of digits 6 to 9 are unused. However, when turning on the management information display LED 74, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Also, by lighting the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundaries between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified and the confirmation can be facilitated.

FIG. 4 shows a configuration diagram of the segment data. For example, when "0" is displayed in digit 1, segments A to F are turned on and segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".
Further, when "1" is displayed on digit 2 and segments B, C, and DP are turned on during the advantageous section, the segment data is "100000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (8th bit) of the segment data of digit 2 to “0” or “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or turned on. Thus, by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of digit 2 is “0” or “1”, it is possible to determine whether or not the segment is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, a motor 32 and the like of a symbol display device are electrically connected to a main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in this embodiment) for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reel 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control unit 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 operated when stopping the left reel 31 is a left stop switch 42. When the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and has an outer peripheral surface to which a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether the reel 31 has rotated once, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35 from a payout opening, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. The sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been serviced and received from the medal insertion slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a “chute portion”).
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the one payout sensor 37. Have been. Then, based on the timing at which the pair of payout sensors 37 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medal has been correctly paid out.

For example, if the signals of both payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that the medal is clogged.

The power switch 11 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated clockwise (90 degrees) to the right, and is turned on when a setting is confirmed or a setting is changed.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing the set value. For example, each time the operation is performed once during the setting change, the set value is incremented by “1”. In the present embodiment, the setting values are from setting 1 to setting 6. During setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is changed from “1” → “2” →. Switches from "1" to. During the setting change, any one of the set values is displayed. When the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed set value is determined.

When the power switch 11 is turned on while the reset switch 14 is turned on, a reset, that is, an initialization process is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when a front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects an open / closed state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external centralized terminal board 100 is output from a part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) via the external centralized terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous section signal), an external signal indicating an error occurring in the slot machine 10 or occurrence of power cutoff, and an opening of a front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and the like are provided.

In FIG. 1, a sub-control board 80 controls selection and output of effects (information) during a game and during a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (a control command transmitting means 71 described later) communicates with the sub-control board 80 in one direction by parallel communication. Transmits the information (control command) necessary for the output of the effect.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 50.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for the effect are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores, as effect data, programs for performing a lottery relating to the effect, various data, and the like.

  The effect lamps 21 are made of, for example, LEDs or the like, and are turned on in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 21 includes a back lamp and a reel 31 arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 to illuminate the symbols (three symbols vertically continuous from the display window 17) displayed on the reel 31 from behind. , A fluorescent lamp that illuminates the symbol on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp that is arranged on the front face of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won, and the like.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like. During the game, various effect images (correct answer order, effects corresponding to the lottery result of the condition device, etc.), The game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired games, the number of acquired games, and the like in the advantageous section) and the like are displayed.
The cross key 24 and the menu button 25 are used to display information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code which is a game history of the player), and to change various settings by a hall manager (store manager, etc.). It is used when doing.

Subsequently, the combination of the symbols, the combination of symbols, and the like of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the present embodiment. FIG. 5 also shows the symbol numbers. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with the symbol number 0 is "Bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In the figure, "blank" does not mean that no symbol is displayed at all, and a predetermined symbol corresponding to "blank" is displayed.
Note that “Bell A”, “Bell B”, and “Bell C” are similar in appearance but different from each other.

FIG. 6A shows a display window (transparent window) 17 provided on a front door (front door, not shown) of the slot machine 10, a positional relationship between the reels 31, and an effective line (a symbol line). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating display lines for displaying combinations.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three vertically continuous symbols can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, the symbols are arranged so that a total of nine symbols (frames) can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The number at the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

FIG. 6B illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this specification. In this specification, the symbol positions at the time of stoppage which can be seen from the display window 17 for each reel 31 are referred to as “upper row”, “middle row”, and “lower row” in order from the top. , "Middle left," and "bottom left."
Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, effective lines are set for nine symbols that can be seen from the display window 17.

  Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a symbol combination when the reel 31 is stopped, and is a symbol combination line (display line). When the combination stops on the line, the winning line of the combination is obtained. In the present embodiment, one effective line (a straight line passing through "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines are invalid lines. I have.

  An invalid line is a line that is not set as an active line among the symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations is stopped on that line, a profit is given according to the combination. This is a line in which (medal payout, etc.) is not performed. That is, the invalid line is a line that is not a target for the formation of the symbol combination in the first place.

  In addition, conventionally, there is known a slot machine in which the number of valid lines differs according to the number of inserted medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the number of valid lines is set to one, when the number of inserted medals is two, the number of valid lines is set to three, and when the number of inserted medals is three, the number of valid lines is set to five. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and in all games, one of the medals shown in FIG. There is no variation in the number of valid lines due to the number of inserted medals. Therefore, in this specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG.

  7 to 12 are diagrams illustrating combinations of types, combinations of payout numbers, and the like, of combinations (eg, combinations included in a condition device selected by the combination selection unit 61 described later) in the present embodiment. FIG. 12 shows pattern symbols 01 to 03 (numbers "101" to "03") as combinations of symbols which are not combinations but are displayed when the winning combination is missed when a specific condition device is won. "120").

Roles of the present embodiment are roughly divided into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
Then, a combination of symbols corresponding to each combination, the number of payouts at the time of winning, and the like are determined. When all the reels 31 stop, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (the winning combination wins; the same applies hereinafter), and the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning the special combination is set to zero. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  7 to 12, "specified number 3" displayed for the number of payouts and the like indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 3 (when the accessory is not operated, that is, the number of thrown-in cards during a normal game). , "Specified number 2" indicates the number of payouts and the like when the specified number is 2 (when the accessory is activated, that is, the number of cards inserted during a special game). For example, the replay 01 of the number “3” indicates that the replay is performed with the specified number of three cards, and the “−” of the specified number two indicates that the lottery is not performed.

In FIG. 7, the numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special roles (gears). In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special combination, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special role is a role to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When the player wins 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the game shifts from the next game to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game (operation of the accessory).
During the 1BB game (when the accessory is activated), since the payout rate is set to exceed “1”, a medal acquisition can be expected more than when the accessory is not activated, which is an advantageous game for the player. .

In addition, the replay (re-playing role) is a role that enables the re-playing in which the number of medals inserted in the current game is maintained (medals are automatically bet).
The replay of the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”) as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that, when a prize is won at a specific RT, transfer to another RT. Therefore, these replays are also called transition replays.

More specifically, when the replay 02 wins in RT2, the game is shifted from the next game to RT3 (RT advantageous to the player). For this reason, replay 02 is also referred to as promotion replay.
When the replay 03 wins at RT3, the game is shifted from the next game to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than the previous RT). For this reason, the replay 03 is also called a fall (demotion) replay.

  In addition, the replays 04 and 05 are used as control replays for the purpose of increasing the number of condition devices by overlappingly winning a plurality of replays. In the present embodiment, in the condition devices described later, This is a replay included in replay B2, B3, C2, C3, or E. When the replay B2, B3, C2, or C3 is won, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay does not stop on the active line.

Further, the replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rare replays, and are included in a replay E of the condition apparatus described later. At the time of the replay E winning in the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.
Replay 06 is a replay selected by lot during the 1BB operation, and is included in replay D of the condition apparatus described later. At the time of winning the replay D during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.

The small wins have small wins 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”) as shown in FIGS. 7 to 11. The small wins 01 and 02 are small wins (small wins corresponding to the high-end bell) which are won in the correct push order when the push order bell is won as described later. Further, the small wins 03 to 34 are small wins (small wins corresponding to Yasume Bell) that can be awarded (PB # 1) in the wrong push order when the push order bell is won.
Furthermore, the small wins 35 to 38 are rare small wins (small wins corresponding to watermelons or cherries).
Furthermore, the small wins 39 and 40 are small wins in which the prescribed number is two, that is, a winning can be achieved only when the accessory is activated.

  As described above, the pattern designs 01 to 03 are not the winning combinations themselves, but appear when the winning combinations are missed (when the winning combinations are not won) at the time of the incorrect answer of the pushing order at the time of the winning of the pushing order bell. It is a combination of symbols. Further, when the combination of the symbols is stopped at an effective line at a specific RT (non-RT, RT1, or RT3 in the present embodiment), the pattern is shifted to the RT (to RT2 in the present embodiment). It is a combination. In the present embodiment, when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won), the pattern designs 01 to 03 always appear when the winning combination is incorrect in the pressing order at the time of winning the small combination B group. However, another combination of symbols (not the role itself) may appear.

In each of the above-mentioned roles, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the activated line in the game won as the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The handover carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When 1BB is won, in a game until 1BB wins, control is performed so that the winning information of 1BB is carried over after the next game.

  On the other hand, the winning of 1BB is carried over, while the small wins and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when a small combination or a replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. In other words, in the game in which the winning combination is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game. , The right to win the elected role will be extinguished.

  When starting the game, the player inserts medals stored in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or cares and inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (care bet). When the start switch 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 and controls the driving of all the motors 32 so that all the reels are controlled. 31 is controlled to rotate. When the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this manner, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed in the vertical direction.

  Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, a reel control means 65 described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 and responds to the role lottery result of the role lottery means 61. Thus, the stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning of the winning combination), the payout of the medal corresponding to the winning winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are exemplifications, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (decision, selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
The “winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a combination lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, or the like.

  The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generating means (a hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. There is provided determination means for determining whether or not the condition device has been won and for determining the winning condition device.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number that is counted by a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) seconds and keeps counting from one cycle of “0” to “65535” as long as the slot machine 10 is powered on. Keep counting.

  The random number extracting means extracts the random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination unit determines the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit with a condition device lottery table described later. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of the winning and replay condition device number “1” (replay A), it is determined that replay A has been won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices selected by the lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combination included in each condition device.
In the following description, the condition devices are mainly described, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pressing order and the operation timing of the stop switch 42 at the time of winning each condition device are described in the reel control means 65. I do.

As described above, the condition device of the present embodiment does not carry the winning information to the next game, and the `` gear item condition device '', which is a condition device that includes any of special roles that can carry the winning information to the next game. It is a "winning and replay condition device" which is a condition device including either a small role or a replay.
The winning of the accessory condition apparatus corresponds to 1BB winning in the present embodiment, and includes the accessory condition apparatus numbers “1” and “2”.
The accessory condition device number “0” corresponds to non-winning of a special role, the accessory condition device number “1” corresponds to 1BBA winning, and the accessory condition device number “2” corresponds to 1BBB winning. Equivalent to.

Further, for example, when the replay A is won, the accessory condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device numbers are “1”.
On the other hand, when 1BBA is won alone, the accessory condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case where 1BB and small win are overlapped. For example, when 1BBA and small win D are overlapped, the bonus condition device number is “1”, the winning and replay condition device numbers. Becomes “26”.
Note that when 1BB and small win or replay are repeatedly won, the winning of the small win or replay is given priority in this game (the priority order can be set arbitrarily). In addition, the winning of the small role or the replay is valid only in the current game, so that the winning is not carried over to the next game, but the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game unless a prize is won.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to a non-winning of a combination (so-called loss).
Replay A of condition device number “1” is a single win of replay 01. At the time of the replay A winning, the replay 01 wins regardless of the pressing order (in any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), and replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”) Are referred to as “replay group C”). Each of the replays is an overlap winning of a plurality of types of replays, and is an overlapping winning including at least one of replay 01 and replay 02. Then, the type of the replay to be won is set to be different according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number “2”, the replay 02 wins in the pressing order of the first left stop, and the replay 01 wins other than the first left stop (middle or right first stop).

In the case of the replay overlapping winning, the replay (replaying game) wins regardless of the pushing order, so that there is no concept of higher / lower medal payout and the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 in the RT2, the RT is promoted (shifted from the RT2 to the RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the first left stop. On the other hand, other than the first left stop, the replay 01 is won to maintain the RT2.
Further, when the replay C1 is won in the RT3, the RT3 is maintained by causing the replay 01 to win at the first left stop. On the other hand, in the cases other than the first left stop, the RT is dropped (relegated) (transition from RT3 to RT2) by winning Replay 03.

Replay D of the condition device number “8” is a single win of replay 06. At the time of Replay D winning, Replay 06 wins regardless of the order of pressing.
Similarly, the replay E of the condition device number “9” is an overlap winning of the replays 04 and 05. When the replay E is won, the replay 04 or 05 wins regardless of the pushing order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as a rare replay. In particular, in the present embodiment, if the lottery is drawn at RT1 and the replay E is won during RT1 and during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, an additional lottery may be performed without necessarily performing the additional.

In FIG. 14, the small win A having the condition device number “10” is mounted on a so-called common bell, and the small win 01 is independently won. Then, at the time of winning the small part A, the small part 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
14 to 15, the small wins B1 to B12 of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win B group") correspond to a so-called pushing order bell. , A small win 01 (9-bell, 9-play) and at least one of the small wins 03 to 34 (1 win).

  At the time of winning these condition devices, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, if the correct answer is the pressing order, the small win 01 which is a higher-level bell (9 bells, 9 wins) with "PB = 1" wins. On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect pressing order, the small part 03 which is the low-end bell (one piece) according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated). There is a case where No. to No. 34 wins, and a case where no small combination wins (a case where a pattern symbol is displayed by dropping).

In FIG. 16, small units C1 to C3 of condition device numbers "23" to "25" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small win C group") are so-called pushes, similarly to the above-described small win B group. This corresponds to the order bell, and is a double winning including a small combination 02 (3 bells, 3 combination) and small combinations 03 to 10 (1 combination).
At the time of winning these condition devices, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, if the correct answer is the pressing order, a small win 02 which is a higher-level bell (3 bells, 3 wins) with "PB = 1" wins. On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect pushing order, any one of the small wins 03 to 10 which is the low-end bell (one copy) wins with “PB = 1”. Therefore, unlike the time of winning of the small win B group, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (missing) when the small win C group is won. The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where no small role wins.

At the time of winning the small role group B, 9 coins are paid out when the high-bell wins, so when the answer is correct, 3 ins (input number) and 9 outs (payout number) are 9 and the difference in this game The number is “+6”. Therefore, the medal count increases when the push order is correct, and decreases when the push order is incorrect (the payout count is 1 or 0).
On the other hand, the small part C group pays out three cards at the time of winning the high-level bell, so at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order, three in (input number) and three out (payout number) are obtained. Is “± 0”. Therefore, when the push order is correct, the number of medals is maintained at the current level, and when the push order is incorrect (the payout number is one), the medal number decreases.

  It should be noted that the reason why both the push order bell that pays out nine sheets and the push order bell that pays out three sheets in the correct answer push order is provided in order to adjust the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the pressing order is incorrect when the small role B group is won, the probability of winning a single role is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol. Is displayed (there is no payout when the pattern symbol is displayed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the pressing order is incorrect in the small part C group winning, one winning combination is won with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells having different payout numbers for the correct answer and the incorrect answer for the push order and appropriately setting the winning probability, the payout rate can be set in an appropriate range. become.

The small combination D of the condition device number “26” corresponds to a rare small combination (watermelon). The small win D is the single winning of the small win 35 and is set to “PB $ 1”.
The small combination E1 of the condition device number “27” and the small combination E2 of the condition device number “28” correspond to the rare small combination (cherry), similarly to the small combination D1. The small win E1 is a double win of the small wins 36 and 38, and the small win E2 is a double win including the small wins 37 in addition to the small wins 36 and 38. At the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, the two roles (small role 36 or 38) win regardless of the pushing order.

The small combination F of the condition device number “29” is a combination drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a double winning of the small combinations 01 to 39. At the time of winning the small part F, the small part 39, which is a ten-piece part, wins with "PB = 1".
The small combination G of the condition device number “30” is a combination which is drawn only during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), and is a single combination 40 small winning. At the time of winning the small part G, the small part 40 of nine pieces wins with "PB = 1".

  FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show the winning probability determined by the lottery table when the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and show the number of the character condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT. FIG. Dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 by “65536” gives the winning probability. For example, the number of 1BBA to be independently elected is set to “20” and “10” (total “30”) in each of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is “30/65536”.

FIG. 17 is a numerical table of the condition devices common to the settings and which can be determined to shift to the advantageous section, or execute the additional of the advantageous section (or can perform the additional lottery).
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, that setting 1 to setting 6 have the same numerical value.
Then, when the condition device common to the settings is won, it is always possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section (decide to add in the advantageous section) or to decide whether to shift to the advantageous section ( Whether or not to add during the advantageous section) may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a condition apparatus that determines to shift to the advantageous section (decision to add during the advantageous section) and a condition apparatus that determines not to shift to the advantageous section (decision not to add during the advantageous section) It may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to the settings shown in FIG. 17 includes a condition device that determines to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device that determines not to shift to the advantageous section. Further, during the advantageous section, the condition apparatus that always determines to add the advantageous section is set.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “意味” means that it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “×” means that it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, “区間” means that the advantageous section is decided to be added, and “×” means that the advantageous section is decided not to be added.
In FIG. 17, “「 ”determines to shift to the advantageous section, and“ △ ”determines to add the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may mean that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, and “△” may mean that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add an advantageous section.

FIG. 18 shows condition devices and their numbers that are not determined to shift to the advantageous section and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition apparatus that determines to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited only to the winning of the condition apparatus shown in FIG. In the winning, none of them decides to shift to the advantageous section and does not decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, the setting numbers of the setting 1 and the setting 6 are representatively illustrated. However, in actuality, as described above, the setting value has six stages of the setting 1 to the setting 6, The number for each value is defined.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the condition apparatus including 1BBA or 1BBB is drawn only in the non-internal state, the drawing is performed in non-RT and RT1 to RT3. In addition, 1BBA and 1BBB have a case where they are won alone and a case where they are overlapped with the small role D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a case where it wins alone. The condition device including 1BBA or 1BBB that has been drawn at RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small role D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the total number of small wins of the small role D at RT4 is “580” to “585” in total, and the total number of small wins of the small role E1 at RT4 is “1030” in total, The total number of small wins of the small win E2 in RT4 is “310” to “370” in total.
In addition, 1BBB is set as a winning combination when a condition device having a setting difference is won, and it is determined to shift to an advantageous section or to add an advantageous section based on the winning of 1BBB. Never.

Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, the replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1. Then, when the player wins the replay E at this RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set not to appear in another RT, the replay E is randomly selected only in RT1.
Further, the small wins D and E1 are drawn only when the accessory is not activated, and are not drawn when the accessory is activated.
On the other hand, the small wins F and G are not drawn when the accessory is not activated, but are drawn only when the accessory is activated.

  In addition, in FIG. 17, the total number of entries in the single winning of 1BBA is “30”, but in the present embodiment, the entry number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and It is divided into the numeral "10" which is determined not to shift. In other words, in the case of 1BBA single winning, if the number of “20” is won, if the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is also won at the same time. On the other hand, in the case where 1BBA is independently elected, if the number of “10” is elected, the advantageous section is not elected.

Further, when 1BBA is independently won during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is added to either the number “20” or the number “10”.
Similarly, the number of wins for the small role E1 alone is “1000” in total, but in the present embodiment, the number “250” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and the advantageous section Are determined to be not set to "750".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning number of the small role E1 alone is set to one digit “1000” (not divided into the number “250” and the number “750”), when the small role E1 is won. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by a separate lottery. For example, a decision may be made to shift to an advantageous section with a probability of 25%, but not to a transition to an advantageous section with a probability of 75%. As described above, the number to be won in the advantageous section and the number to not be won in the advantageous section may be provided from the beginning, but the number itself is set to one value. A lottery (two-stage lottery) may be performed.
Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of RT4 (inside the inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even at the time of winning the small role D or E1, when RT4 is reached, it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when 1BBB alone wins and 1BBB and small win D overlap win, neither of them determines the advantageous section. However, as will be described later, after the operation of 1BBB is completed (after shifting to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small winning combination E2 has a case where it wins repeatedly with 1BBB and a case where it wins alone, but neither makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small win E1 is won, both the single win of the small win E1 and the overlapping win with 1BBA may be determined regarding the advantageous section.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the condition devices of the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group have the same setting, but are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are added during the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, not limited to the examples of FIGS. 17 and 18, at the time of winning of the condition apparatus for these replays, it is determined to shift to an advantageous section (including lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in the replay A, the replay B group, and the replay C group, the numbers are slightly different between the setting 1 and the setting 6 (for example, by “1”), and the replay A, the replay B group, The replay C group may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, replay A is randomly selected at all RTs when the accessory is not operated. The replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group all have a setting difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6, but the numbers are the same in all RTs.

In addition, as shown in the table of “special combination and small combination” in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the setting 6 has a higher winning probability of 1BB and the small combination. Therefore, in this regard, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the table of “Replay”, the winning probability of replay is highest in RT3. Then, in the advantageous section, since it is set so as to basically stay at RT3, not only the number of medals is increased by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the pushing order bell, but also the medal is reduced little by the replay winning. .

Further, the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group are all set in the condition apparatus having the setting difference. Here, the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small combination A is “250”, and the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 of the small combination B group (entire) is “240 (20 × 12). ". Therefore, the small number difference of the small part A is larger than that of the small part B group. Thus, by setting the number of small wins A having no winning difference in accordance with the pressing order to a larger value, a difference in payout rate according to the set value can be reliably provided.
Further, the combination of symbols that can be won when the small role A is won and the combination of symbols that can be won when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won are set to be the same (described later). The set value cannot be inferred by counting the number of wins (winnings).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning the small win B group is set higher than the probability of winning the small win C group. Here, when the specified number is three, the maximum number of payouts is nine, and during the advantageous section, at least one instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts with three specified number) is performed. Need to be executed several times. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once at the time of winning the small win B group. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small win B group to be higher than the winning probability of the small win C group, one instruction function operation game (wins for the small win C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) (Excluding the played game), it is possible to reduce the expected value of the number of games in the advantageous section that ends only with the game. Furthermore, even if the advantageous section is completed by executing the predetermined number of games, it is less likely that the advantageous section cannot be completed because the small role B group has never been won during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each winning based on the lottery result by the winning lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for every combination. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the role included in the condition device is turned on (the winning flag is set).

For example, in the non-internal middle game, when the player wins the replay B1, the two winning flags of the replay 01 and the replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-internal middle game, when the small part B1 is won, the small part 01, the small part 03, the small part 10, the small part 11, the small part 18, the small part 19, the small part 19, and the small part included in the condition device. The seven winning flags of the role 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.

Furthermore, as described above, the winning of the small role and replay other than 1BB is not carried over, so even if the small role or the replay is won in the current game and the winning flag of these roles is turned on, the current game ends. Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, when 1BB is won in the game this time, and once the winning flag relating to the won 1BB is turned on, the on state is maintained until the 1BB wins, It is turned off when 1BB wins.

  Further, for example, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins 1BBA and small win D in duplicate, the winning flag of the small win 35 corresponding to 1BBA and small win D is turned on, and there is no case where both wins are won in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1BBA does not win, the winning flag of 1BBA is maintained and the winning flag of small win 35 is turned off regardless of whether or not the small win 35 has won.

Furthermore, for example, when 1BBA is won alone by the role lottery means 61, the 1BBA winning flag is turned on in the current game, and when 1BBA is not won in the current game, the 1BBA winning flag is kept on. .
Further, when the small game A1 is won in the next game, the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned on in addition to the 1BBA which has been carried over. If the 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, the 1BBA is won. Is maintained, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 selects a pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the role lottery means 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number table.
In any of the advantageous section and the normal section, the pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 may select the pushing order instruction number, but is not limited to this. For example, only during the advantageous section, The selection of the pressing order instruction number may be performed. In such a case, the pressing order instruction number is always “A0” during the normal section.
The transmission of the selected push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 can be performed only during the advantageous section (excluding transmitting the push order instruction number “A0” during the normal section). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selecting means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique pressing order instruction number. For example, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay A is “A0”, and the pressing order instruction number corresponding to replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction numbers include “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order instruction number, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. The pushing order instruction number “A0” does not have a pushing order that is advantageous to the player (the pushing order has no advantage / disadvantage, that is, the pushing order does not matter).
Each of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” has a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, the advantageous pushing order corresponding to the pushing order designation number “A2” is the middle first stop.

The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 02 (the pressing order for promoting the RT).
The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order designation number in the replay C group is set to the pressing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination B group is set to the pressing order for winning the small combination 01 (9).
The pressing order corresponding to the pressing order instruction number in the small combination C group is set to the pressing order in which the small combination 02 (three) is won.

  In FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is Is shown. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7-segment), respectively. When "=" is displayed, the segments D and G in FIG. 4 among the seven segments are turned on (see FIG. 26 described later). When the push order instruction number is “A0”, there may be no display (no segments are lit).

Furthermore, "display content 2" indicates the content displayed under the control of the sub-control board 80. In the present embodiment, the display order is the correct answer pressing order displayed on the image display device 23.
The “operation of the instruction function” means a display using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and the display by the control of the sub-control board 80 corresponds to the “operation of the instruction function” of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when the winning and replay condition device “11” is won during the advantageous section, the push order instruction number “A1” is selected, and the activation of the instruction function causes the acquisition number display LED 78 to display “= 1”. You. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image such as "1 ○○" that the player can understand that the left first stop is performed.

In FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small part A is as follows.
At the time of winning the small part A, since the small part 01 wins regardless of the pushing order, there is no advantageous pushing order. However, during the advantageous section, any one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy pressing order instruction number. The selectivity is "1/3". By setting in this way, when the small role A is won in the advantageous section, the indicating function is operated and the pressing order indicating information is displayed. As a result, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small win A or the small win B group in the game. This setting is made for the following reason.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small role A is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. Therefore, it is possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small win 01 wins the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such a capture, at the time of winning the small win A in the advantageous section, the indicating function is operated to display the dummy pressing order indicating information. Of course, by counting the number of times the small role 01 wins in the game in which the instruction function is activated, it is not possible to infer the set value, but the number of times the small role 01 wins in the game in which the instruction function is not activated. Requires a larger number of trials than when estimating a set value.

Further, in FIG. 19, the pressing order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small roles E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, at the time of winning the small win E1 in the advantageous section, the additional advantage section is added. However, as described above, if the player wins 1BB during the advantageous section and enters the inside, the additional section is not added. For this reason, in the advantageous section and inside (in the game section in which the additional of the advantageous section is not performed), the small combination E1 is won, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination E1 (the combination of the symbols that is expected to be added to the advantageous section) When a certain middle stage cherry stops, there is a possibility that the player may be given an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small part E1 is won in the advantageous section and inside, the push order instruction number "A3" is selected, the instruction function is operated, and "Right first stop" is displayed.

  When the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop at the time of winning the small role E1, the so-called middle cherry is not stopped as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small role E1. In addition, since the payout number of each of the small wins 36 and 38 that can be won when the small win E1 is won is two, even if the right first stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in the present embodiment, the upper limit is set within 1500 games. Therefore, even if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is present, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally.
In such a case, if the player wins the small role E1 and displays the middle cherries when the game is close to the 1500 game in the advantageous section, for example, the player expects to add the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, even if the small role E1 is won, the middle cherry is not displayed as in the case of winning inside. Activate the indicating function to display the right first stop.

At the time of winning the small role E2, as shown in FIG. 18, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, when the small role E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, the middle cherry may be displayed. Therefore, when the middle cherries are displayed at the time of 1400 games or more from the inside or from the start of the advantageous section, there is a possibility that a misunderstanding may be given to the player. Display the first stop, right.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. At the time of winning the small role E2, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed in the first place, the operation of the above-described instruction function may not be performed, and the middle cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
As a result of the lottery of the condition device, the winning and replay condition device number itself that has been won may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in the present embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device numbers themselves are not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 cannot know the winning and replay condition device numbers won in the current game.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the effect group number selected in the game this time, the sub-control board 80 can select and output the effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect group number table.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group is set to “5”. The effect group numbers corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”.

Therefore, as a result of the lottery of the condition device, when the main control board 50 wins the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number. Then, the information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is “5”, the sub-control board 80 knows that the player has won one of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group in the current game. it can. Thereby, it is possible to output the winning effect of the bell.

  However, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the information indicating that the rendering group number “5” has been won, or when the player has won one of the small wins B in the game, for example, the correct answer is pushed. I can't tell the order. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction number corresponding to the correct answer push order is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous section, but is not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 may output as an effect the fact that the player has won the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group, and the correct push order corresponding to the push order instruction number. it can. On the other hand, during the normal section or the standby section, the sub-control board 80 only produces the effect that the player has won one of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group (bell), Cannot be output as an effect.

  Even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, different effects can be output due to the different effect group numbers. For example, the pressing order instruction number when winning the replay B1 is “A1” (first left), and the pressing order instruction number when winning the small role C1 is “A1” (first left). In each case, the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number “2” is transmitted, and when the small role C1 is won, the effect group number “5” is transmitted. For this reason, when the effect group number “2” is transmitted, it is possible to notify the correct answer pressing order using, for example, blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number “5” is transmitted, for example, It is possible to report the correct answer pressing order by using the yellow color indicating the order.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a rotation start command of the reel 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. To control. Further, after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game, and determines the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the motor 32 is driven. The control is performed so that the reel 31 is stopped at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control unit 65 determines a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination (combination for which the winning flag is on) within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled so as to be able to stop on the activated line, and the reel 31 is controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (combination with the winning flag turned off) on the activated line. .

Here, “within the range of the stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 actually stops or the rotation amount of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Within the range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the stop of the reel 31 is set to four frames.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “Replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left stage (on the effective line), the four frames ahead, that is, the fifth “bell” The pattern up to "B" can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols No. 1 (bitter stop) to No. 5 (four frames slip) can be stopped at the lower left.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and the maximum number of moving frames can be set to four from the symbol next to the symbol located on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first “Replay” of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left, the next symbol, that is, the second “blank”, The pattern up to No. 6 "Replay", which is the pattern four frames ahead, is a pattern that can be stopped at the lower left. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols Nos. 2 to 6 are symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol located on the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is four.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled so as to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol related to the winning combination does not stop on a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is controlled to stop until the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of the symbol 31, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to be stopped on the activated line (kick-off stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles have been won, priorities of roles to be won are determined in advance in accordance with the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, and according to the predetermined priority, The drawing stop control of the symbol with the highest priority is performed.

Further, the reel control unit 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. When the stop switch 42 is operated by the player, the reel control unit 65 detects which of the left, middle, and right stop switches 42 has been operated.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By determining this signal, the reel control unit 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Further, the reel control means 65 includes a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Replay" in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the lower left stage (on the effective line), the stop position determination table indicates what information is displayed. The stop position is determined in advance such that the movement of only the symbol is controlled (at what speed) and the symbol of the number is stopped at the lower left.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, in all the reels 31, four "replays" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “replay” of all the reels 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Similarly, on the left reel 31, either one of “bell A” and “bell B” is arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
In the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “bell C” of the middle reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four of "bell A" and "bell B" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, four "cherry" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, “Cherry” on the right reel 31 is in the “PB = 1” arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four of either "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the middle reel 31, four of either "blue 7" or "cherry" are arranged at five symbol intervals. As a result, the arrangement of these two symbols is “PB = 1”.
Similarly, on the right reel 31, four of any one of "black 7", "blue 7", "blank", or "red 7" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thus, the “PB = 1” arrangement is obtained by adding these four symbols.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "Cherry" is arranged in the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and thus is not in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, for “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 are arranged in “PB ≠ 1”, and the right reel 31 is arranged in “PB = 1”.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and winning of the replay condition device will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a game when a winning combination is not won, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations does not stop on the active line.

  The replay A table is used at the time of the replay A winning (single winning of the replay 01), and is controlled so that the replay 01 is stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. 31 stop positions. The symbols on the reels 31 relating to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 described later are arranged in “PB = 1” on all the reels 31. Therefore, at the time of the replay winning, the replay that has always been won (when a plurality of replays have been repeatedly won, any replay that has been repeatedly won) always wins.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 02 is stopped on the activated line, and the first left stop At other times (when the push order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 01 on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game using the replay B1 table, at the first left stop, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, the “replay” stops at the upper left.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, the “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage. At the time of the third right stop, "Cherry" is stopped at the upper right. In this case, the “replay” stops at the lower right. As a result, “black 7 / watermelon” − “replay” − “cherry” stops on the activated line, and the replay 02 wins. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” stop in “upper left”, “middle middle”, and “lower right”.

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, during the middle first stop, “blue 7” or “cherry” is stopped at the middle middle stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, the “replay” is stopped in the upper middle section. Thereafter, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, the “replay” stops at the upper left.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, “Replay” is stopped at the upper right (“PB = 1”). As a result, “black 7 / watermelon” − “blue 7 / cherry” − “replay” is stopped on the activated line, and the replay 01 wins. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” are stopped in “upper left”, “middle upper”, and “upper right”.

In a game in which the replay B1 table is used, the same control is performed at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the middle first stop.
Further, the replay B2 table at the time of winning the replay B2 and the replay B3 table at the time of the winning of the replay B3 are controlled in the same manner as described above to win the replay 02 when the pushing order is correct and to win the replay 01 when the pushing order is incorrect.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the replay 01 is stopped on the active line, and the first left stop. At other times (when the pressing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the replay 03 is stopped on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control for stopping the replay 01 on the active line at the first left stop is the same as that of the replay B1 table, and thus the description is omitted.
In the game using the replay C1 table, at the time of the first middle stop, the “replay” is stopped at the middle middle stage (“PB = 1”). Thereafter, when the left reel 31 stops, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, “replay” stops at the middle left. When the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon” is stopped at the upper right stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, the “replay” stops at the middle right. As a result, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" are stopped on the activated line, and a prize of Replay 03 is won. Further, “replay”, “replay”, and “replay” stop in “middle left” − “middle middle” − “middle right”.

In a game in which the replay C1 table is used, the same control is performed at the time of the first right stop as at the time of the middle first stop.
Further, the replay C2 table at the time of winning the replay C2 and the replay C3 table at the time of the winning of the replay C3 are controlled by the same control as described above, so that the replay 01 is awarded when the pushing order is correct, and the replay 03 is awarded when the pushing order is incorrect. .

The replay D table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay D, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that the replay 06 is stopped on the activated line regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. It is determined. Replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
Further, the replay E table is used in the game at the time of winning the replay E, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the replay 04 or 05 is stopped on the activated line. 31 stop positions. In this case, either “Replay 04” or “05” can be stopped by “PB = 1”.

  The small win A table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win A, and the reel 31 is stopped so as to stop the small win 01 on the activated line irrespective of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. The stop position is determined. The combination of symbols of the small role 01 is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell C” − “replay”, and “PB = 1” on all reels 31. When "Black 7 / watermelon" stops at the lower left, "Bell A / Bell B" stops at the middle left. Furthermore, when “Replay” stops at the upper right, “Bell A / Bell B” stops at the middle right. Therefore, at the time of the winning of the small role 01, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stop at "Middle Left"-"Middle Middle"-"Middle Right".

  The small win B1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small win 01 is stopped on the activated line. Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), one piece of the winning combination (one of the small roles 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 at the time of the small role B1 winning) is included. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the reel 31 is stopped at an active line or one of the pattern symbols 01 to 03 is stopped.

The first left stop (when the push order is correct) in the game using the small win B1 table is the same as that of the small win A table, and thus the description is omitted.
When the following small win B2 table to small win B12 table are used, the same stop control as that of the small win A table is performed when the pressing order is correct.
Thus, when the small part A wins and the small part B group wins, at the time of the correct push order, the small part 01 always wins, and "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage""Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stop. Therefore, even if the small part 01 wins in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small part A has been won or whether the pressing order in the small part B group has been won is correct.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small part A is won, if the instruction function is operated by the dummy as described above, it is determined whether the small part A is won or the small part B group is won. I do not know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning number of the small win A, so that it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of winnings of the small win A. However, if the stop rolls are the same when the small role A is won and when the push order is correct when the small role B group is won, only the winning number of the small role A cannot be counted. Can not be guessed.

In a game using the small win B1 table, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, at the time of winning the small win B1, as shown in FIG. 14, seven wins of the small wins 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small wins with different payout numbers are repeatedly won.
As a first priority, when all of the symbols (of the relevant reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped on the activated line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to “stop all the symbols constituting the winning symbol combination in the activated line” (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the “number priority” is set as the second priority. ”Or“ number priority ”, the reel 31 is controlled to stop.
Here, the "number priority" means that the symbols on the reel 31 constituting the combination of the symbols with the largest payout number among the combinations of symbols that have been repeatedly won are preferentially stopped (pulled in) on the activated line. Say. For this reason, at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 corresponds to the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts (9).
On the other hand, “number priority” means that the symbols on the reel 31 are stopped on the activated line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the activated line is maximized.

  For example, when the small win B1 is won and the first stop is the middle stop, all of the middle reels 31 related to the winning hand cannot be simultaneously stopped on the active line. This is because there are a plurality of types of symbols of the winning small reel 31 and only one activated line, so that only one type of symbol can be stopped on the activated line.

Therefore, at the time of winning the small win B group, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are stopped and controlled by the number priority when the pressing order is incorrect. When the reels are stopped and controlled with the number priority, the small win 01 (9 wins) is configured to be able to win one win without winning (there is a case where the win is missed).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42, such as giving priority to the number of sheets in a specific pressing order (correct answering order in this embodiment) and giving priority to the number in another pressing order (incorrect answering order in this embodiment). Priority or number priority is performed according to.

In the above example, when priority is given to the number at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrectly answered), if either "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the active line, it stops at the active line. The number of possible symbol combinations is two, which is the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 11 can win. “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the middle reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols, so when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either “Bell A” or “Bell B” is always stopped. Can be done.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small win 03 or 11 can be awarded at this time.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, “Bell A” is arranged at No. 15 and No. 0, and “Bell C” is arranged at No. 18. Therefore, when the symbols of the left reel 31 are the eleventh to nineteenth and the zeroth at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, “Bell A” or “Bell C” can be stopped at the activated line, If the number is 1 to 10, "Bell A" or "Bell C" cannot be stopped at the active line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), “Bell A” or “Bell C” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. In particular, in this embodiment, since "bell A" can be stopped without stopping "bell C", the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated are numbered 11 to 19 and 0. , "Bell A" is always stopped at the active line.
In addition, as described above, when "Bell A" is stopped without stopping "Bell C", when a winning combination is missed at the time of the third stop, a pattern symbol described later can be displayed. This is because pattern symbols cannot be displayed if "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the "bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so that one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon” among the pattern symbols of which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”. Since “PB = 1” for “Black 7” or “Watermelon” of the left reel 31 in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating". .
Further, if "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating" before the third stop on the right, "Bell A" can be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Bell A is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13, "Bell A" is stopped. The “bell A” cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" are obtained, and the small role 03 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", if "Bell A" cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Cherry" is changed to the active line. Stop ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “bell A” − “bell A” − “cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell A” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, it is assumed that "Bell B" is stopped in the activated line at the time of the first stop during the winning of the small role B1 (when the pushing order is incorrect). In this case, the small win 10 or 18 can be awarded at this time.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7" which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 18 in the activated line. As shown in FIG. 5, on the left reel 31, “Bell B” is arranged at No. 5 and No. 10, and “Red 7” is arranged at No. 7. For this reason, when the symbols of the left reel 31 are the first to tenth symbols at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, “Bell B” or “Red 7” can be stopped at the active line. In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" cannot be stopped at the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming for a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. In particular, in this embodiment, since "Bell B" can be stopped without stopping "Red 7", when the design of the left reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10 Always stops "Bell B" on the active line.

  On the other hand, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 stops, control is performed so that any one of the pattern symbols is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern design in which the design of the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since “PB = 1” for “Black 7” or “Watermelon” of the left reel 31 in the sum of the two symbols, any one of these symbols can always be stopped.

Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop and the left second stop, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating". .
Furthermore, if "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Rotating" before the third stop on the right, "Bell B" can be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. Bell B "is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop “Bell B” on the active line, the pattern of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 14 to No. 18 or No. 19 to No. 3. In this case, "bell B" can be stopped, and "bell B" cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops on the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" are obtained, and the small combination 10 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", if "bell B" cannot be stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is switched to the activated line. Stop ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “bell B” − “bell B” − “cherry”, and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the activated line is “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “bell A / bell B”, and the pattern symbol 01 stops.

As described above, at the time of the first stop in the middle of the small role B1 winning, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol related to the single role with "PB = 1", and the left and right reels 31 / 2 ”can be stopped at a probability of one sheet. Further, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-piece combination, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-copies: Win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stop with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 10)
Will be one of

Next, a description will be given of the case of the right first stop at the time of winning the small part B1. When priority is given to the number when stopping the right reel 31, if either "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the activated line is two. It becomes the maximum. For example, if "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small win 03 or 19 can be won. “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols, so that when the right reel 31 stops, “Bell A” or “Bell B” can always be stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that “Bell A” is stopped on the activated line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small win 03 or 19 can be won at this time.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C", which is a symbol related to the small role 03 or 19, on the activated line. Here, similarly to the above, priority is given to stopping "bell A". “Bell A” can be stopped with a probability of “１ ／”. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A". .
Further, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" before the middle third stop, when "bell A" can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Bell A is stopped. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "Bell A" on the active line, if the symbol of the active line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 5 to No. 14, "Bell A" is stopped. The “bell A” cannot be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell A” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell A" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" are obtained, and the small role 03 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of “bell A” − “rotating” − “bell A”, if “bell A” cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, “blue 7” or “cherry” Is stopped at the active line ("PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols). Thus, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped on the activated line (“PB = 1”). ). Thus, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the active line.

It is also assumed that “bell B” has been stopped on the activated line at the time of the first stop of the right reel 31. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be awarded at this time.
Next, when stopping the left reel 31, giving priority to stopping "Bell B" or "Red 7", which is a symbol related to the small role 10 or 26, on the activated line. Here, priority is given to stopping "Bell B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped (“PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B". .
Further, if "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell B" before the middle third stop, and "Bell B" can be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, Bell B "is stopped. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, “Bell B” stops at the active line with a probability of “１ ／”. When "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" are obtained, and the small part 10 wins.

On the other hand, in the case of “Bell B” − “Rotating” − “Bell B”, if “Bell B” cannot be stopped on the activated line when the middle reel 31 stops, “Blue 7” or “Cherry” Is stopped at the active line ("PB = 1" in the sum of the two symbols). Thus, the pattern symbol 02 stops on the active line.
In the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the activated line ("PB = 1"). ). Thus, the pattern symbol 01 stops on the active line.

As described above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one sheet role with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 / 2 ”can be stopped at a probability of one. Further, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to the one-piece combination, the pattern symbol can be stopped at any time. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B1 (when the push order is incorrect),
1-copies: Win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stop with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 10)
Will be one of
The winning rate and the stop rate of the pattern symbol are the same as those at the time of the first stop in the middle.
Therefore, when the small win B1 is won, the small win 01 is won with "PB = 1" at the first left stop (when the push order is correct). On the other hand, at the time of the first stop in the middle or right (when the push order is incorrectly answered), in each case, one winning combination wins with a probability of "1/4" and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of "3/4". .

At the time of winning the small part B2, the small part B2 table is provided similarly to the case of the small part B1 winning. Winning roles included when winning the small role B2,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 04: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first first stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the left stop. Here, when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" can be stopped, so "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

If "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when stopping right and "bell B" can be stopped. As a result, a winning combination of the small role 04 is obtained. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, when "Red 7" can be stopped, "Bell B" can be stopped. Therefore, "Bell B" is stopped without stopping "Red 7". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell A" is stopped when stopping "bell A" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 09 is won. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the active line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, when “Red 7” can be stopped, “Bell B” can be stopped, so “Bell B” is stopped without stopping “Red 7”. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

If "Bell B"-"Rotating"-"Bell A", "Bell B" is stopped at the time of intermediate stop, if "Bell B" can be stopped. As a result, a small part 09 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" can be stopped, so "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" is stopped at the time of intermediate stop if "bell A" can be stopped. As a result, a winning combination of the small role 04 is obtained. If the "bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of winning the small role B2, when the push order is incorrect,
1-copies: Win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stop with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Small role 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (Small role 09)
Will be one of

At the time of winning the small win B3, a small win B3 table is provided similarly to the win of the small win B1. The winning role included when winning the small role B3,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first stop in the middle, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped without stopping "red 7" in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

If "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell B" is stopped when stopping "Bell B" is possible at the right stop. Thereby, a small part 08 wins. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C" in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell A" is stopped at the time of right stop if "bell A" can be stopped. As a result, a small part 05 wins. If "Bell A" cannot be stopped at the right stop, "Cherry" is stopped. As a result, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role B2 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped at the active line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

If "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible during intermediate stop. As a result, a small part 05 wins. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" is stopped when the intermediate stop can stop "bell A". Thereby, a small part 08 wins. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of winning the small role B3, when the push order is incorrect,
1-copies: Win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stop with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (Small role 08)
Will be one of

The small win B4 table is provided for the small win B4 as well as the small win B1 win. Winning roles included when winning the small role B4,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 pieces)
Small part 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small role 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first stop in the middle (when the push order is incorrect), “Bell A” or “Bell B” is stopped at the activated line by priority on the number.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the time of the first stop, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7". Stop "Bell B". If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

If "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Rotating", "Bell A" is stopped at the right stop if "Bell A" can be stopped. As a result, a small part 07 wins. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the time of the first middle stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible at the right stop. As a result, a small part 06 is won. If “Bell B” cannot be stopped at the right stop, “Cherry” is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 03 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “bell B” − “rotating”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the right stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small part B4 (when the pushing order is incorrectly answered), "Bell A" or "Bell B" is stopped on the activated line due to the number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, "Bell B" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell B” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

If "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" is stopped at the time of intermediate stop if "bell A" can be stopped. As a result, a small part 07 wins. If "bell A" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when “black 7 / watermelon” − “rotating” − “bell A”, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

  Next, it is assumed that “Bell B” is stopped at the first right stop. In this case, when stopping left, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped in the same manner as described above. If “bell A” cannot be stopped, “black 7 / watermelon” is stopped. Therefore, it is either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

If "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell B" is stopped when stopping "bell B" is possible during intermediate stop. As a result, a small part 06 is won. If "Bell B" cannot be stopped during the middle stop, "Blue 7 / Cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern symbol 02 stops.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of middle stop. As a result, the pattern symbol 01 stops.

From the above, at the time of winning the small role B4, when the push order is incorrect,
1-copies: Win with a probability of 1/4 Pattern pattern: Stop with a probability of 3/4
Furthermore, at the time of winning one piece,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (Small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (Small role 07)
Will be one of

Hereinafter, a detailed description of the small win B5 table to the small win B12 table at the time of winning the small wins B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small win B5 table used at the time of winning the small win B5, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the push order correct answer, and the small win 03 or the small win with a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. The role 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. In other words, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B1 is won.
In the small win B6 table used at the time of winning the small win B6, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop, which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win 04 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small win B7 table used at the time of winning the small win B7, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop during the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. 05 or small win 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B3 is won.
Further, in the small win B8 table used at the time of winning the small win B8, the small win 01 wins at the time of the first stop which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B4 is won.

In the small win B9 table used at the time of winning the small win B9, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small win 03 or the small win has a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. The role 10 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. In other words, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B1 is won.
In the small win B10 table used at the time of winning the small win B10, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop, which is the correct answer of the pushing order, and the small win 04 has a probability of “１ ／” when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 09 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small win B11 table used at the time of winning the small win B11, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop when the push order is correct, and the small win has a probability of “１ ／” when the push order is incorrect. 05 or small win 08 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B3 is won.
Further, in the small win B12 table used at the time of winning the small win B12, the small win 01 wins at the right first stop which is the correct answer in the pushing order, and the small win 06 has a probability of "1/4" when the pushing order is incorrect. Alternatively, the small role 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops at a probability of “3/4”. That is, the small win that can be won when the push order is incorrect is the same as when the small win B4 is won.

  As is clear from the above, one winning combination that can be won when the pressing order is incorrect in the winning of the small win B group is small win 03 to small win 10. Therefore, small wins other than those described above included in each condition device do not win. The setting in this way relates to a single winning combination that can be won at the time of winning a small winning combination C group described later.

  The small win C1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win C1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, at the first left stop (when the push order is correct), the small win 02 is stopped on the activated line. Except at the time of the first stop (when the push order is incorrect), one of the winning combinations (or any of the minors 03 to 10 when the small role C1 is won) is stopped on the activated line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  At the time of winning the small win C1 (the same applies to the small wins C2 and C3 described later), when the push order is correct, the small win 02 (three wins) is awarded by priority to the number of sheets as in the win of the small win B group. Control. As shown in FIG. 7, the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role 02 is “bell A / bell B” − “blue 7 / cherry” − “watermelon”, and “PB = 1” for all reels 31. . Therefore, it is possible to always win the small win 02 when the pushing order is correct.

  Further, at the time of winning the small win C1, when the push order is incorrect (in the middle or right first stop), control is performed such that one winning combination (small wins 03 to 10) wins with priority on the number. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols of "bell A" or "bell B" for each reel 31. Further, among the combinations of the symbols of the small combinations 03 to 10, in any of the reels 31, there are four "bell A" and four "bell B", and any one of "bell A" or "bell B" Even if stopped, the condition of number priority is satisfied. In particular, when the small combination C2 and the small combination C3 are won, the small combination 21 and the small combination 22, respectively, are included. Even if these small combinations are included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of the symbol having the number priority. In all the reels 31, “Bell A” or “Bell B” is “PB = 1” in the sum of the two symbols. Therefore, any of the small wins 03 to 10 can be always won.

  As described above, at the time of winning the small part C1, when the pushing order is correct, the small part 02 (three pieces) wins (“PB = 1”), and when the pushing order is incorrect, one of the small parts 03 to 10 (1) The winning combination) wins (“PB = 1”), and the dropout (stop of the pattern design) as in the case of winning the small winning combination B does not occur.

  The small win C2 table and the small win C3 table used when the small win C2 wins and the small win C3 win respectively are the same as the small win C1 table. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small role C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct answer pressing order, and when the small role C3 is won, the right first stop is the correct answer pressing order. The stop control for winning the small win 02 or the small wins 03 to 10 is the same as that at the time of winning the small win C1, and therefore the description is omitted.

  Therefore, a single role (Small Role 03 to 10) that can be stopped when the pushing order is incorrect when the small role B group is won, and a single role that can be stopped when the pushing order is incorrect when the Small Role C group is won ( The small roles 03 to 10) are the same. Thus, it is not possible to judge whether the player has won the small win B group or the small win C group in the game just by watching the winning combinations of the small wins 03 to 10.

  The small win D table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win D, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 35 stops on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small win D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. As shown in FIG. 9, the combination of the symbols of the small combination 35 is "watermelon". “Watermelon” has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement on the left and middle reels 31 and a “PB = 1” arrangement on the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small win D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when “watermelon” stops at the active line, “watermelon” stops at the active line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the “watermelon” does not stop on the active line, the “watermelon” does not stop on the active line and the small role 35 is missed.

  The small win E1 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win E1, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the small win 36 or 38 stops at the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, so-called middle cherry stop mode (so that “Cherry” stops in the middle left corner). The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

  The winning of the small role E1 includes the small roles 36 and 38 (and further includes the small role 37 at the time of the small role E2 winning, which will be described later). The number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by an arbitrary predetermined stop control. For this reason, control is performed such that the winning of the small role 36 is prioritized when the left or middle first stop is performed, and the winning of the small role 38 is prioritized when the right first stop is performed.

  In FIG. 5, "Cherry" of the left reel 31 is No. 3, No. 8, and No. 13 ("PB @ 1"). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left, "Blank" or "Red 7" is stopped in the active line at the bottom left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol related to the small role 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the seventh "Red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first stop on the left ("Cherry" stop at the left middle stage), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, select one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” (“PB = 1)) is stopped at the active line. As a result, a small part 36 wins.
Also, when the second or twelfth “blank” is stopped at the lower left stage when the left reel 31 is stopped (the “cherry” stop at the left middle stage), the same as above, when the middle reel 31 is stopped. “Blue 7” or “Cherry” is stopped at the activated line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, any of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7”, or “Blank” is stopped at the activated line. . As a result, a small part 36 wins.

At the time of the middle first stop, stop control is performed in the same manner as described above. Therefore, the middle and right reels 31 have the symbol “PB = 1” and the symbol related to the small role 36 stops, and the left reel 31 has a case where “red 7” or “blank” stops and a case where it does not stop ( "PB @ 1").
However, if "red 7" or "blank" cannot be stopped at the lower left stage during the first stop at the left or middle, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped. “Bell A” or “Bell B” can be stopped at “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank", and the small role 38 wins.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small win E1 table is used, the winning of the small win 38 is prioritized during the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" stops, and the small role 38 wins with "PB = 1". .
Further, at the time of the first right stop, even if “Cherry” can be stopped at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, “Cherry” is not stopped at the left middle stage, and “Bell A” or “Bell” is displayed at the lower left stage. B "(in this case," Cherry "is not stopped in the middle left stage).

The small win E2 table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win E1, and the reel 31 or the small win 37 (or the small win 37) is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, so that the reel 31 is stopped. The stop position is determined.
Therefore, the small win E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small win E1 table, so that the same stop position determination table can be used.

  Alternatively, in the case of the first stop on the left, only when the “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped at the lower left stage (when the middle stage cherry is stopped), “replay” is set to the active line for the middle reel 31. The right reel 31 may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, or “blank” may be stopped. Thereby, the small role 37 wins. If the stop control is performed in this way, the stop control can determine whether the small stage E1 has been won or the small stage E2 has been won when the middle cherry is stopped.

The small win F table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win F, and the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any of the small wins 01 to 39 is stopped on the active line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. It is determined.
In the present embodiment, the small win F is drawn only during the 1BB operation.
In addition, the small combination F table performs stop control with priority on the number of sheets regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42. Thereby, the small role 39 is always won. In the left reel 31, since the two symbols “Cherry” and “Bell C” are arranged in “PB = 1”, the small role 39 wins with “PB = 1”.

  The small win G table is used in the game at the time of winning the small win G, and determines the stop position of the reel 31 so as to stop the small win 40 on the activated line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. . Since the small wins 40 are composed of a combination of symbols arranged in “PB = 1” for all reels 31, the small wins 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when the bonus condition device number “1” has been won (1BBA alone has been won) or when 1BBA has been won before the previous game and the current game has not been won. Within the range, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is stopped at the activated line, and the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31 is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to combinations other than 1BBA is not stopped at the activated line. It is something.
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "red 7" on all the reels 31 (PB # 1), "red 7" cannot be stopped on the activated line without being pushed.

Similarly, the 1BBB table is used when the game when the character condition device number “2” is won (1BBB alone) or when the 1BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 is used. In the range of the stop control, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBB is stopped on the activated line, and the symbol combination at the time of stopping the reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to a combination other than 1BBB is not stopped on the activated line. The combination is determined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all the reels 31 similarly to 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” cannot be stopped on the activated line without being pressed.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small role or the replay are overlapped, or in the game in which the 1BB is won before the previous game and the small game or the replay is won in the current game, the following stop control is performed. Is mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line, and if both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the winning small Stop control which gives priority to stopping a symbol or a replay symbol on an activated line is given. The stop control for stopping both the 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line is until the second stop. At the third stopping time, the control is performed such that 1BB or the small winning combination or the replay is won. Role does not win.
Secondly, priority is given to stopping both the winning 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay symbol on the activated line. If both symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line, the winning 1BB is selected. (Prior to the above) stop control giving priority to stopping the symbol of the symbol on the activated line.

  Thirdly, while giving priority to stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, when stopping the winning small role or replay symbol on the activated line, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the winning symbol of 1BB on the activated line, stop control for stopping at that position is exemplified.

  When 1BB (“PB ≠ 1”) and the small role or replay of “PB = 1” are repeatedly won (when they are simultaneously won), the winning 1BB symbol and the small role or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both the symbol and the activated line on the activated line, and it is also possible to perform control such that only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the replay symbol is stopped on the activated line. Accordingly, since the small wins E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small wins E1 and E2 are respectively obtained when the 1BBA and the small win E1 overlap in the present embodiment or when the 1BBB and the small win E2 overlap win. It is also possible to execute a stop control for winning.

The description returns to FIG.
The winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols on the reel 31 stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations (whether any winning combination has been won). No). The winning determination means 66 determines a symbol on the pay line by detecting, for example, an angle when the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations by the winning determination unit 66, and when the winning combination is achieved. In accordance with the winning combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player, or processing such as credit addition is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed so that the number of medals inserted in the current game is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied at the time of stopping each game and all the reels 31. If it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, the RT control means 68 controls to perform the RT transition. Things.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of this embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA operation (1BBA game), and 1BBB operation (1BBB game). As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the type (number) of condition devices to be drawn and the probability of winning are different for each RT.

  In the present embodiment, the transition timing of the RT is set at the time of the stop display of the symbol combination or at the time of the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, at the time of all the stops (when all the reels 31 are stopped). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbols stop when all the reels 31 are stopped during RT1, the RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 at the time of all the stops. The transition from non-RT, RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be performed based on the winning of 1BB, or may be performed based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game that has won 1BB. Is also good. In the present embodiment, the game shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game that has won 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3. The inside middle game corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, the slot machine 10 is basically controlled so as to stay at RT3 as a control, but when the player presses the stop switch 42 in a wrong order, the player may stay at RT2. is there. In the case of an advantageous section in which the game is completed with only one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small role group C, the replay group B, and the replay group C), it is not necessary to stay in the RT3. That is, at RT2, one instruction function operation game (excluding the game won in the small win C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed, and the advantageous section may be ended. Of course, you may make it basically stay at RT3.

In non-RT and non-internal middle games of RT1 to RT3, lottery of the accessory condition apparatus is performed. When 1BB is won in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB is won in the game that has won 1BB, the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB is started at the time of all stoppages of the game this time, and in this case, the game does not go through RT4 (internal middle game).

RT4 is continued until the winning 1BB wins. When determining that 1BBA or 1BBB has been won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game) or 1BBB operation (1BBB game), respectively.
When the 1BBA operation is being performed, the operation is continued until the 1BBA operation end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the 1BBA operation end condition is set when the number of payouts exceeds 150.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game and 1BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the 1BBA operation end condition. Is determined to be satisfied, and control is performed so as to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation. When the operation shifts during the 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation end condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the end condition of the 1BBB operation is set to pay out more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not each game has paid out more than 200 medals. Control is performed so as to shift to RT1 from the next game.

  Note that the count of 150 or 200 sheets during 1BB operation does not include replay. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, the player may win the replay D, but the automatic bet at the time of winning the replay is not counted as the payout number. Therefore, the number of games during 1BB operation increases as the replay D is won. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of the replay D during 1BBA operation is set to be 10 times as large as that during 1BBB operation, so the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation. It becomes larger than the expected value of the number of games played.

During the operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, the RB is continuously operated as described above. The RB ends when either one of two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Also, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small role E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. The payout number when the small part E2 is won and the small part 36 or 38 wins is two. As a result, the setting 6 has a greater number of games before reaching the end condition (more than 150 cards) during the 1BBA operation than the setting 1. Therefore, during the 1BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expected value of winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, and the probability that the advantageous section is added is increased. Details on this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  When the RWM 53 is initialized, a game is started from a non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while the winning of 1BB is carried over, the winning of 1BB is also maintained (carried over).

In non-RT, the RT control means 68 continues non-RT until a pattern symbol is displayed. In non-RT, the small win B group is drawn, and if one of the small win B groups is won and the winning small win is missed, a pattern symbol is displayed. When a pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT, the RT control means 68 determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and transitions to RT2 from the next game.
At RT1, similarly to non-RT, RT1 is maintained until a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2.

RT2 is the RT with the highest stay rate in the normal section. At RT2, when the player wins the replay B group and wins the replay 02, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the replay C group is won, and the replay 03 continues until a prize is won. At RT3, when the pattern symbol is displayed or when the replay 03 wins, it is determined that the RT transition condition is satisfied, and the next game shifts to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and non-inside), most of the time travels between RT2 and RT3, but the staying rate of RT2 is the highest in probability. As described above, when 1BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the next game shifts to RT4 (internal) as described above.

  In the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, if the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, the instruction function is performed at the time of winning the replay C group in order to maintain RT3. To display a correct answer pressing order for winning the replay 01. This prevents falling to RT2. In addition, at the time of winning the small part B group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small part 01 is displayed. Similarly, at the time of winning the small part C group, by operating the instruction function, the correct answer pressing order for winning the small part 02 is displayed.

On the other hand, when the game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer is to activate the instruction function at the time of the replay B group winning while activating the instruction function as described above, thereby winning the replay 02. The pressing order is displayed, and control is performed so as to shift to RT3.
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but until the pattern symbol is displayed, the instruction function is performed. Is not activated in a game in which is enabled (for example, at the time of winning the small role B group), and waits until a pattern symbol is displayed. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed on the non-RT or RT1, and when the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (including the standby section), a determination as to whether or not to end the advantageous section, an addition in the advantageous section, an operation control of the instruction function, and the like. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section in the advantageous section and the non-internal middle game.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is determined in the lottery by the role lottery means 61 when a specific condition device is won, as shown in FIG. Decide to transition. In addition, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to the inside of the non-inside, and it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section from the normal section during the inside.

Further, as described above, when deciding to shift to the advantageous section according to the winning combination lottery result (the winning condition device), the winning of the condition device having a setting difference cannot be used as a condition.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there may be a case where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed on condition that the condition device having the common setting is won.

  As shown in FIG. 17, for example, when 1BBA is won alone, there are cases where it is determined to shift to the advantageous section and cases where it is not determined to shift. When a random number value included in the range of the set number “20” is extracted from the set number “30” allocated to the single winning of 1BBA, it is determined that the operation is shifted to the advantageous section, and the set number “10” is set. When the random value included in the range is extracted, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section. "1BBA + Small win D", "1BBA + Small win E1", and the single win of the small win E1 are the same as above.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added in any case. When these condition devices are won, it is also possible to perform an additional lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section, or to determine whether or not to perform an additional lottery. However, in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the addition of the advantageous section is uniformly performed.

When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, an advantageous section having a predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the end condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, end conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of difference, the number of wins of the small role B group, the number of times of operation of the instruction function, etc.) may be determined. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition apparatus shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the processing shifts to an advantageous section in which the end condition is set as follows.
Specifically, for example, it is possible to determine as follows.
1BBA single winning (number "20"): the initial value counts after the end of 1BB game and shifts to an advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small role D overlapping winning (number "5"): initial value is 1BB Count after the end of the game and move to the 250-game advantage section 1BBA + Small win E1 duplicate win (number set to "20"): Initial value counts after the 1BB game ends and moves to the 200-game advantage section Small When role D alone is won (number of "50"): the initial value is 150 game advantage sections. When small role E1 is alone (number of "250"): the initial value is 100 game advantage sections or one small role. Any of the advantageous sections that are completed by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (any one of the advantageous sections may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, out of the number “250”, the number is included in the range of the number “120”). When a random value is extracted, the initial value is 10 (If the random number value included in the range of the number "130" is extracted as the advantageous section of the 0 game, the advantageous section may end with the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small role B group winning.)

Since the winning probability of the small role D is lower than the winning probability of the small role E1, the number of games in the advantageous section at the time of the small role D winning is reduced by a small amount in order to give a premier feeling when the small role D is won. It is set more than when winning role E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small role D.
Also, when the condition apparatus shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA alone is won, the number of games in the advantageous section is added by “30”, and when the small role E1 alone is won (number “250”). ) Adds the number of games by "50", and when the small part E1 is elected alone (number "750"), adds the number of games by "20", and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small win E1 alone is won, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “１ ／” (250 out of the total number “1000”). I do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small role E2 is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries. However, the probability of the decision to shift to the advantageous section when the middle cherries appear is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, the player can be given the impression that there is a setting difference.
Note that, contrary to the present embodiment, the single winning probability of the small role E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the probability of the appearance of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability of the transition to the advantageous section when the middle cherry appears.
In addition, during the advantageous section, when the small role E1 alone is won, the advantageous section is always added. On the other hand, when the small win E2 alone is won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of the middle cherries. However, the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle cherries appear is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 6. Therefore, the player can be given the impression that there is a setting difference despite the fact that there is no setting difference in the probability of adding an advantageous section.

In addition, 1BBA is a special combination having the same winning number setting (except when 1BBA and small winning combination D are duplicated), and 1BBB is a special combination having a difference in the winning number setting.
In this case, when the 1BBA common to the settings is won during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is in operation, it is possible to add the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBA. On the other hand, it is determined that when 1BBB having a setting difference during the advantageous section is won and the 1BBB is operating, it is not possible to add the advantageous section during the operation of 1BBB. It is determined that if 1BBA and small winning combination D having a setting difference during the advantageous section are over-winned and the 1BBA is in operation, the addition of the advantageous section cannot be performed during the operation of 1BBA.

On the other hand, when the setting 1 and the setting 6 are compared during the 1BBA operation, the winning probability of the small role A is lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1 and the winning probability of the small role E2 is 1 in the setting 6. Higher than. For this reason, since the operation end condition of 1BBA is set to payout exceeding 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if the setting is made to add an advantageous section at the time of the replay D winning, the expected value of the number of wins for the replay D during 1BBA operation is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the higher the setting, the higher the setting. Advantageous sections can be easily added.

Furthermore, during 1BBA operation, when the number of games reaches a predetermined number, it may be set so as to add an advantageous section.
As described above, during the 1BBA operation, the expected value of the number of games played during the 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
As described above, the 1BBA operation end condition is set to a case where more than 150 payouts have been paid out. On the other hand, the expected number of payouts per game during the 1BBA operation is about “8.664” for setting 1, and about “8.557” for setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of games at which the number of payouts reaches 150 is about “17.3” in setting 1 and about “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, if the number of games reaches the 18th game, for example, during the 1BBA operation, if it is determined to add the advantageous section unconditionally, the higher the set value, the more easily the advantageous section is added. be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1BBA operation, it may be set so that the advantageous section is added every time a certain number of games elapses. Also in this case, the higher the set value, the more easily the advantageous section can be added.

On the other hand, since 1BBB is a special role having a setting difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during 1BBB operation.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, after the operation of 1BBA is completed, the operation shifts to non-RT, and when the operation shifts to non-RT, stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and when the pattern symbol is displayed. Shifts to RT2. That is, after the end of the operation of 1BBA, it does not go through RT1.

  On the other hand, after the operation of 1BBB is completed, the process shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until a pattern symbol is displayed. At RT1, the replay E is selected by lottery. As shown in FIG. 17, if the RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after the 1BBB operation is completed, the additional probability of the advantageous section is higher than after the 1BBA operation is completed. Then, if the number of added games in the advantageous section at the time of the replay E winning is set to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance between the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation.

  When the game shifts to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, the pattern function is not activated in the game in which the instruction function can be activated (for example, when winning the small role B group) until the pattern symbol is displayed. Wait until appears. Then, when the pattern symbol is displayed at RT1 and the process shifts to RT2, the instruction function is activated. When shifting to RT1 while maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small part B group, and the small part 01 wins a prize, and the pattern (unless there is a pressing order mistake). No symbol is displayed. Therefore, when the process shifts to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to keep staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. Not until the end of the advantageous section, but until the predetermined number of games, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role group B, and after the predetermined number of games, the game in which the instruction function can be activated until the pattern symbol is displayed ( For example, at the time of winning the small role B group), the instruction function may not be operated, and the control may wait until the pattern symbol is displayed.

Further, when it is determined that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the advantageous section control means 69 controls so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until a predetermined timing comes, and the other than the advantageous section (normally). (The section or the standby section), the control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.
First, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 determines that the game has been decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the game (when all reels 31 are stopped and there is a payout, The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game (after the payout) becomes possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 (the settlement processing operation) becomes possible when the player has a reserved medal. To control.

Secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped until the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped. Control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Therefore, if the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including the special role, for example, the special role is a special role that carries the winning information to the next game, such as 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (only when a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, if the special role is a special role that does not carry the winning information to the next game, the winning is valid only for the game that has been won such as SB or CB. As in the case where the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the above, the advantageous section display LED 77 needs to be turned on until the medal insertion (bet) of the next game becomes possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as timings at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game should be shifted to the advantageous section, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is first set to “from the time of determining to shift to the advantageous section, Until the reel 31 stops and the payout is made (after the payout of medals), medals for the next game can be inserted (bet) and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). ) ", The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the start of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing it after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when it is determined that the small win E1 (single) is won and the transition to the advantageous section is made based on the win of the small win E1, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that does not include 1BB that can carry over the winning information after the next game, it is always applied.

Second, when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed. By then, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is displayed, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 are over-winned, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the over-win, the advantage section display is performed by the time the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on. Therefore, up to the moment when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing such as timing 1 may be used before that (for example, when a standby section is not provided).

  Therefore, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is uniformly displayed. In such a case, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be set to be turned on. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role is made, the decision is made to uniformly transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device not including the special role. As before, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like.
In addition, when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, other than the timing 1 and the timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game that has won the special role, when the start switch 41 is operated, at least a part of the reel 31 is rotating, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the role is won). It may be.

  In this case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends in the next game of the game selected as the special combination). In addition, when the start switch 41 is operated in a game in which it is possible to win the special role after the next game of the game which has won the special role, at least a part of the rotation of the reels 31 is performed. It may be the middle time, the time when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), or the like. In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section starts (the standby section ends with the game in which the special role can be won). ).

Here, for example, when the small win E1 is won, the 59th “red 7”-“cherry”-“red 7” (FIG. 9) in the small win 36 can be stopped. Then, it is assumed that "red 7"-"rotating"-"red 7" is stopped as a result of pinching in the game at the time of 1BBA winning. Next, when the player aimed at "Cherry" when the middle reel 31 was stopped, but "Cherry" did not stop on the activated line (kick-off control was performed), the small role E1 was won in the game. You can see that it is not. Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player knows that 1BBA has been independently won, and the 1BBA symbol is displayed in the next game of the game at the time of 1BBA winning. Can be pushed. That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a 1BBA winning notification. This is because it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section at the time of loss (at the time of non-winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, for example, there is a tendency that after performing a continuous effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not 1BB has been won), the 1BB winning notification is performed, but the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such a continuous production would be useless.
Therefore, when it is determined that the winning information is shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins. It was made to have.

On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small win E1”, if priority is given to winning of the small win E1 in the game, 1BBA does not win in the game.
On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning of the small role E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (because a standby section cannot be provided). ).
Therefore, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + small win E1”, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BBA wins, the small win E1 At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, so that the player knows that 1BBA has not been won.

  Therefore, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1BBA + Small win E1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), The case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has elapsed (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided. Which one to adopt is, for example, sorted according to the set number at the time of winning “1BBA + Small win E1”, or is an advantageous section at the time of winning “1BBA + Small win E1” (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section). A lottery (two-stage lottery) for determining whether or not to immediately turn on the display LED 77 (whether or not to provide a standby section) is given. As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1BBA has not been repeatedly won, and it is possible to continuously excite the player's sense of expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small win E1 is set to “PB = 1”, so that the small win E1 is always set to “1BBA + small win E1” or the small win E1 alone. The small role E1 (small role 36 or 38) wins the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 to “PB」 1 ”. Then, when the small win included in the condition device of the small win E1 is set to “PB」 1 ”, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section at the time of winning“ 1BBA + small win E1 ”, the small win E1 At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. However, when the small win E1 does not win, it is possible to control that the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the predetermined timing has elapsed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and when it is determined that the winning information is to be shifted to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special role that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always provided by a predetermined timing. May be turned on (always at timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be always turned on even after a predetermined timing has passed (as shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section when the small win D alone is won and when the small win E1 is independently won, the advantageous section display LED 77 needs to be turned on by a predetermined timing (a standby section is provided). ), So it is a so-called immediate notification, and cannot excite the player's expectations.
Therefore, as described above, at the time of winning the small win E1 alone, there are two advantageous sections that continue until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and an advantageous section that ends by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small win B group win. Provide a type. Then, after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, until the first small win B group wins, an effect that fuels the expectation (as an end result, whether or not the advantageous section continues until the predetermined number of games is consumed). If the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to keep the player's expectations high. This is because, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it is not known at the time when the advantageous section continues until the predetermined section has been exhausted.

In addition, even when the small role E1 is won alone, when the transition to the advantageous section is not made, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up in the first place. Absent.
In addition, at the time of winning of the above condition device, instead of setting one win of the small win B group (one instruction function operation game) or a predetermined number of games, an instruction function at the time of win of the small win B group is set. Can be determined by lottery, for example, within a range of 1 to 50 times.

  As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from “0” to “1”. Since the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by performing an OR operation on the previous segment data and “10000000” is stored as new data in the RWM 53. As a result, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to segment DP becomes “1”.

Further, as described above, the digit of the present embodiment includes a total of nine digits 1 to 9, and a method for lighting these digits includes controlling as follows.
The main control board 50 executes an “interruption process” every 2.235 ms in parallel with this main process, in addition to the “(game progress) main process” which is a process to repeat a game. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, drive control of the reel 31, transmission processing of an external signal, and the like are performed. In the present embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed on the digits 1 to 9 in which one digit is turned on for each interruption process. For example, in this interrupt processing, only digit 1 is turned on, and in the next interrupt processing, digit 2 is turned on. By repeating this, one digit is turned on at a rate of one in nine interruption processes. Not limited to such dynamic lighting, static lighting in which a signal line is connected for each digit may be performed.

  Therefore, when it is time to light the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes due to the interrupt processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

  In a game in which the instruction function is to be activated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 operates the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Press order instruction information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small part B1 is won, the pressing order instruction information “= 1” corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to “operation of the instruction function” in the present embodiment.

During the advantageous section, the instruction function operation game becomes
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small role C group is won (when the small role B group is won, the pattern function is displayed, so the instruction function is not activated.)
2) RT2: At the time of the replay B group election, at the time of the small role B group election, and at the time of the small role C group election. 3) RT3: At the time of the replay C group election, at the time of the small role election B group election, and at the time of the small role C group election. .

Further, as described above, when the small role A is won, the instruction function is operated as a dummy. At the time of winning of the small role A, the small role 01 wins regardless of the pushing order. Therefore, even if any of the pushing orders is designated, there is no disadvantage to the player. Will not harm the fairness of
Specifically, at the time of winning the small part A, selecting one of the pressing order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like is exemplified.

  Further, when the player wins the small role E1 while approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle cherry from appearing when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small win E1 is elected, and the advantageous section is not added when the small win E2 is elected. Therefore, the small section E2 during the advantageous section is always elected. Displaying the right first stop so that the middle cherry is not displayed. In particular, when the small win E1 in the advantageous section is elected, the advantageous section is always added, so that the display of the middle cherry can give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added. Therefore, if it is not desired to display the middle cherries in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small role E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  Further, for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached (when the advantageous section cannot be added), in order to prevent the middle cherry from being displayed, either the winning of the small role E1 or the winning of the small role E2 is performed. Also, the first right stop is displayed by operating the instruction function, and the middle cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. For this reason, for example, when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section becomes “1400 games” or more and the player wins the small role E1 (and E2), the first right stop is displayed by operating the indicating function. .
Note that, as described above, the “operation of the instruction function” in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle cherry is avoided. The display of the pressing order is also included in the "operation of the indicating function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order may be performed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous section counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games relating to the advantageous section (see FIG. 1).
When determining to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of games (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, the count value is decremented every time one game is consumed, and when the count value becomes “0”, the advantageous section ends. Note that the decrement may be performed from the game that has shifted to the advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games determined at that time (for example, “100”), after the end of the 1BB game. An initial value may be set.
Further, when an advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined that the advantageous section is to be added, and when the number of added games is "30", the count value is changed from "55" to "55". 85 ”. Then, every time one game is consumed, "84", "83",... Are decremented by one game.

  When the 1BBA operation is being performed (excluding the one based on the overlapping winning of 1BBA and the small role D), the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued, but when the 1BBB operation is being performed, the advantageous section counter 69a is operated. The counting by is interrupted. The reason for this setting is that, in the present embodiment, the addition of the advantageous section can be executed during the 1BBA operation (excluding the one based on the overlapping winning of the 1BBA and the small role D). Since no addition is performed, the above setting is made in order to balance the two (so that the player during 1BBB operation during the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than during 1BBBA operation). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued during the operation of either 1BBA or 1BBB, or the advantageous section counter may be continued during the operation of either 1BBA or 1BBB. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside), respectively. When 1BB is won or when it is notified that 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even if the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is interrupted when the player wins 1BB, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is not changed until it is notified that the player has won 1BB. Alternatively, the game may be decremented by one game.

In addition, in the normal section, there is a case where a condition device including 1BB is won (for example, an overlap winning of 1BBA and the small role E1), and a transition to an advantageous section is made based on the winning of the condition device. In this case, the standby section is started from the next game (only when a standby section is provided), and the inside of 1BB is set.
On the other hand, when the condition apparatus in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won, the condition section is in the advantageous section and inside 1BB, and the addition of the advantageous section is not performed in 1BB inside the advantageous section.

Therefore, in the normal section, if the player has won the condition device including 1BB and has shifted to the standby section, and has not yet shifted to the advantageous section, a longer provoking effect (informs whether or not the player has won 1BB). It is considered that it is not disadvantageous for the player to output such an effect (for example, a continuous effect over a plurality of games). This is because, during the standby section, since there is no advantage section, the count (decrement) by the advantage section counter 69a and the count (decrement) of the upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the condition apparatus in which the 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won and the inside becomes inside, even after the inside becomes inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b to be described later are performed. Is counted (decremented). In this case, since an additional advantageous section cannot be added, it is preferable that the 1BB winning be notified early without performing an unnecessarily long stir-up effect.
More specifically, for example, the average number of games of the former fanning effect is set to four games, and the average number of games of the latter fanning effect is set to two games.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small win E1 is solely won and a transition is made to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of one small win B group win, the advantageous section counter 69a counts in the present embodiment. Do not set a value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small win B group is won. Then, when the player wins the small role B group and activates the instruction function, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section in the current game is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended.

  When the number of times of operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small part B group is previously provided as an end condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small part B group is provided. “1” may be set. Then, once the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.

By providing an advantageous section flag or the like and setting it to “ON” during the advantageous section, it can be determined whether or not the current game is an advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 serves as an advantageous section flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section in the current game is satisfied, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”, the eighth bit in the digit data of the segment data of the digit 2 is set to “0”. Is performed.

  If it is decided to win the small win E1 alone and shift to the advantageous zone, the game shifts to the advantageous zone in which the number of games is fixed, or by the activation of the instruction function at the time of one small win B group win. A lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section that ends (a so-called fake-like advantageous section). Here, how the probability is assigned to the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small role E1 alone and decide to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect for stimulating which advantageous section has been shifted is output. (You may continue until you win the small role B group). Next, when the small role B group is won, if the instruction function is activated in the game, and if the advantageous section is terminated by one activation of the instruction function, the advantageous section is terminated with the current game (the advantageous section). The section display LED 77 is turned off). On the other hand, when shifting to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small win B group is won before the predetermined number of games is played from the start of the advantageous section.

  Further, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting when the advantageous section is started (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, or sets "1500" at the start of the advantageous section), and thereafter, the upper limit counter 69b performs the advantageous operation. Until the section ends, the count value is decremented by "1" for each game without interrupting the count in any case. Also, for example, the counting is continued even during the 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous section counter 69a. Note that the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value by “1” from “0” for each game.

  Then, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is a value exceeding “0”, the advantageous section controller 69 sets the advantageous section in this game to ( Forced) is completed (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is updated to “0”), and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off (the 8th bit in the digit 2 segment data is updated to “0”). As described above, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b has the highest priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes “0”, the advantageous section ends even if the 1BB operation is being performed.

Also, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least once the instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts when the specified number is three). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once at the time of winning of the small win B group. Even if the instruction function operation game has not been executed at the time of the winning of the group, or even if it has never been won in the small role B group, the advantageous section is (forced) ended in the current game and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, the number of remaining games or the number of digested games may be displayed on the image display device 23 with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b.

In FIG. 1, an external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal to the external centralized terminal board 100. The external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, the end of 1BB operation, and the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game and game end check process, and updates the external signal control number at the time of the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes a different value according to the start of an advantageous section, the end of an advantageous section, the start of 1BB operation, and the end of 1BB operation.

  Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. Then, after updating the external signal flag, the external signal transmitting means 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. When this external signal is input to the external centralized terminal board 100, it is transmitted to the hall computer 200. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 1-bit data of 8 bits. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Further, the first control command is data indicating a type of the control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. Further, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it is “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, the two-byte data "00110011/00000001"("/" indicates the space between the first control command and the second control command and is not actually present) obtained by combining them is an RT control command. Is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, the first control command is the type data, and the second control command is the RWM53, as in the case of the RT. Is the data stored in.

  The control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub-control board 80. This is because, for example, when the pushing order bell is won, the correct answering pushing order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device numbers due to improper conduct. On the other hand, there is no possibility of the above-mentioned misconduct regarding the accessory condition apparatus number. Therefore, for example, when the 1BBA has been won, the accessory condition device number “1” is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

When the player wins the condition device having the correct pushing order during the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pushing order is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, at the time of winning the condition device in the advantageous section that does not have the correct pushing order, the acquisition of the pushing order instruction number and the storage in the RWM 53 are not performed. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after the clear is “A0”. Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except during the winning of the condition device having the correct answer push order in the advantageous section.
Further, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct answer pressing order is won, the pressing order instruction number is not obtained or stored in the RWM 53.

Then, at the time of winning the condition device having the correct answering push order in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 sends the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80.
The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information of “A0” as the pressing order instruction number except during the winning of the condition device having the correct pressing order in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when it is not during the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 does not transmit the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. Note that when it is not in the advantageous section, the control command transmitting means 71 may uniformly transmit the pushing order instruction number of “A0”. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as an RT number, a pressing order instruction number, an effect group number, and an accessory condition device number. Based on the command, at what timing (when the start switch 41 or each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what kind of effect is output (how to turn on, blink, or turn off the lamp 21) , What kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22, and what kind of image is to be displayed on the image display device 23) are determined by lottery.

  Then, the effect output control means 91 controls the outputs of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation or the advantageous section, the acquired number, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games) and the like are displayed as images. Further, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct answer pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when the player wins the small role B1 in the game during the advantageous section and receives the control command corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, the correct answer is “left first stop” or “1-O”. For example, the content which the player can easily know the correct push order, such as "-O", is notified. Note that, when the push order instruction number of “A0” is received during the advantageous section, the push order is not notified.

  Furthermore, the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device was actually won, but it can be said that rough control information is included. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number “5” is received, the sub-control board 80 cannot know which of the small combination A, the small combination B, or the small combination C has been won. . However, it can be known as to which of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group has been won. Therefore, it is possible to output an effect such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp in "yellow" which is a color corresponding to "bell".

Here, when the small role A is won, the small role 01 always wins, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switch. It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before is operated.
On the other hand, when the small win B group or the small win C group is won during the normal section, a bell (yellow) effect may be performed when the winning of the small win 01 is determined, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the second stop switch 42 or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

However, if the output timing of the effect at the time of winning the small part A and the output timing of the effect at the time of the small part B group or the small part C group winning are different, the small part A Since it is possible to determine whether the winning combination or the small combination B group or the small combination C group is won, it is possible to count the number of wins of the small combination A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small role A is won in the normal section, the output of the bell effect is started at the same timing as when the push order is correct in the small role B group or the small role C group, for example, immediately after the first stop switch 42 is operated. In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to determine which of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when any of the small win A, the small win B group, or the small win C group is won, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . In this way, the effect group numbers of the small win A, the small win B group, and the small win C group are set to be the same ("5"), and the sub-control board 80 that has received the direct play group number has, for example, a first stop switch. If the effect is designed to be output at the timing immediately after the operation of 42, the effect group numbers of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group are different (“5” to “7”). Design that is more efficient than the previous case (in the latter case, when an effect group number of any of "5" to "7" is received, an effect is output at the timing immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example). Must be designed so that the efficiency is low).

24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control commands for the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number, and the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function (on the main side). 2 is a time chart showing notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 (notification on the sub side). 24 and 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
24 and 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined. Also, during the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a control command of the pressing order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the accessory condition device number to the sub control board 80. If the sub-control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, during the advantageous section, the main control board 50 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number by operating the instruction function.

  In “Example 1” of FIG. 24, when the push order instruction number is determined, first, the instruction function is operated by the main control board 50 to display the push order instruction information. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the accessory condition apparatus number are transmitted. Next, the sub-control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the accessory condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  When the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices (first stop) as in the present embodiment, the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated by the image display device 23 to notify the correct answer pressing order. Until the end. On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is a so-called six selection, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is performed until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. As in the present embodiment, even when the correct answer pressing order is so-called three choices, the correct answer pressing order may be continuously notified until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, and the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 ends. It goes without saying that effects other than the correct pushing order, for example, display of an image (character display or the like) unique to the advantageous section are continued.

Further, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the acquired number display LED 78 is performed until the winning determination is performed on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct answering order is three choices as in the present embodiment, the indication of the ordering information may be displayed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquired number display LED 78 after the display of the push order instruction information is “00” (the upper digit and the lower digit indicate “0”), “* 0” (the upper digit is turned off (*), and the lower digit is “ 0 is displayed), "**" (the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off), "-" (the upper digit and the lower digit both turn on only the segment G), and the like.

  In “Example 2” of FIG. 24, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80, the activation of the instruction function causes the acquired number display LED 78 to display the pressing order instruction information. The number and the accessory condition device number are transmitted. After receiving the effect group number and the accessory condition apparatus number, the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order.

  In “Example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the accessory condition apparatus number, the sub control board 80 determines the correct pressing order on the image display device 23. Then, at the moment (or immediately before) when the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed, the main control board 50 displays the pushing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function. In the above Examples 1 and 2, the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed at a timing earlier than the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub-control board 80. . On the other hand, in Example 3, the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the activation of the instruction function (display of the push-order instruction information) by the main control board 50.

  In “Example 4” of FIG. 25, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of the push order instruction information) and the notification of the correct push order by the sub-control board 80 are performed at substantially the same timing. . In the case of controlling in this way, for example, the instruction function is activated after a lapse of “N” ms after transmitting the push order instruction number or the accessory condition apparatus number from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order instruction The display of the information is started), and the sub-control board 80 controls to start the notification of the correct answering order after the elapse of “N” ms after receiving the pushing order instruction number or the accessory condition apparatus number. It is mentioned.

24 and 25 show four examples, it is preferable that the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) be performed after the start switch 41 is operated and before the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed. . It is preferable that the sub-control board 80 informs the pressing order after the main control board 50 activates the instruction function. With this setting, the main control board 50 transmits an erroneous push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 reports a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the pressing order instruction information is already displayed by the main control board 80, the player notices an error in the notification by the sub control board 80, and the player may not be disadvantaged. Absent.
The operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 is performed until the winning determination, but may be performed until the third reel 31 stops.

  Subsequently, the operation of the indicating function (display of the pressing order instruction information) and the case of notifying the correct pressing order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from the top to the bottom in the figure), the display of the acquired number display LED 78, and an example of notification of the image display device 23. Note that the example in FIG. 26 is a timing corresponding to “Example 1” in FIG.

In the instruction function operation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 activates the instruction function and displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. In the example of FIG. 26, an example in which the small win B1 is won is shown. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 displays the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct answer pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which “1OO” is displayed.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when the answer is in the correct order, the image display device 23 produces an effect indicating that the order is the correct answer. Is output (correct answer production). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display in the correct pressing order is deleted.
In the present embodiment, since the pressing order correct answer / incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification about the correct pressing order (image display) is terminated. When the selection is six, it is possible to keep informing the correct push order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  In the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of the push order instruction information) is continued until a winning determination is made (the same applies to Example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, when the incorrect answering order is entered, the operation of the indicating function (display of the acquired number display LED 78) may be ended similarly to the notification of the correct answering order by the image display device 23. . Also, as in the present embodiment, when the correct answer pressing order is three choices, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, an instruction is issued (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order). The operation of the function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable that the operation of the instruction function be terminated after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the pressing order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, needless to say, the operation of the instruction function may be ended at the same time as the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

It should be noted that, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the image display device 23 may continue to report the correct pressing order.
However, if the pressing order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 stop, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small role 01 wins and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 indicates that nine medals have been paid out from the display “= 1” of the pressing order instruction information. It changes to “09” as shown. When one winning combination is won due to a pressing order error or the like, "01" is displayed, and when a winning combination is missed, "00" (or "**") is displayed. Note that, from the display of the pressing order instruction information “= 1” to the display of the medal payout number “09”, “= 1” → “00” (“00” is displayed to temporarily reset the display. ) → “09” may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper and lower digits are turned off to reset the display once) → “09”.
Further, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or puts the medals in order to bet medals, the display contents are changed to “00” in order to clear the contents of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. (May be "**").

In FIG. 1, a management information control unit 72 is a unit that controls (stores, calculates, displays, etc.) the management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is:
(1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative)
(2) Ratio of consecutive characters (6000 games (15 sets total))
(3) Characters ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Ratio of consecutive characters (cumulative)
(5) Ratio of official goods (cumulative)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, the "advantageous section ratio (stay ratio in the advantageous section)" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the entire game section (normal section + standby section + advantaged section). Percentage). For example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is "7000" in the game section having the number of games of "10000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)".
In the present embodiment, one set is set to “400” game times. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, “6000” game times is defined as “total”, and each ratio at “6000” game times is calculated.

  Furthermore, the “total” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, is counted for at least “175000” or more game times. When the total is less than "175000" games, the cumulative value is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when it is "175000" or more games, the total is displayed by lighting display. Even after the total number of games reaches “175000” or more, the cumulative total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit value) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

The “continuous bonus ratio” refers to a ratio of the number of medals acquired when the first-class special bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “the number of obtained medals during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of obtained medals is indicated.
For example, when the number of obtained medals in the number of games of “6000” is “2000”, and among them, the number of obtained medals when the “first-class special role (RB)” is activated is “500”, “ The object ratio (6000 games) "is" 25 (%) ".

Further, the “principal ratio” indicates a ratio of the number of medals acquired when the accessory is activated to the total number of medals acquired. Here, the "casing" refers to a special bonus of the second kind (CB), 2BB (continuous actuation device of the second category, CB is continuously operated), SB, in addition to the special bonus of the first category. (Single bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, the accessory ratio has the same value as the continuous accessory ratio.

  FIGS. 27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) are diagrams showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, a 4-digit numerical value starting with “F” indicates the address of the RWM 53. A buffer (storage area) for 1-byte (8-bit) data is provided for each address.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data relating to an advantageous section. As information on the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of an advantageous section game number corresponding value, a total number of games, and an advantageous section ratio. The storage area for the value of the number of advantageous section games is 4 bytes (“F004” to “F001”), and the storage area for the total number of games is 3 bytes (“F007” to “F005”). Is 1 byte (“F008”).

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is consumed.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, each time one game is consumed, the value of the number of times of the advantageous section game is multiplied by 100 (referred to as “advantageous section game number corresponding value”) so as to be updated. For this reason, a storage area of 3 bytes is provided for the total number of games, and a storage area of 4 bytes is provided for the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

In the present embodiment, an object is to store at least “175000” times or more as the total number of games. This is for displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio when the total number of games is “175000” or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in a binary number, it can be stored in three bytes of "24" digits.

Also, assuming that all of the total number of games “175000 (D)” is an advantageous section, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “175000 × 100” (D), which is “25 digits” in binary. , Three bytes of "24" digits are not enough, but four bytes of "32" digits can be stored.
For the above reasons, the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous sections is 4 bytes.

It should be noted that the total number of games is incremented by “1” for each game, but is not limited to this, and a value other than “1” (a value corresponding to the total number of games) is added. Is also good.
On the other hand, since the maximum value of the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)”, the value is a binary number of “7” digits, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 1 byte.

When the total number of games continues to be updated for each game and the number of games, when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, “FFFFFF (H)”, approximately 16.78 million in decimal) At this point, the counting ends, and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
The value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “+100” added for each game during the advantageous section, but the value of the total number of games becomes 3 bytes full even if all games are assumed to be advantageous sections. It is possible to count up to. Then, when the counting of the total number of games is completed, the counting of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is also completed.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by “advantageous section game number corresponding value / total number of games” (as will be described later, subtraction is not actually performed but division is not performed). Since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is 100 times the number of advantageous section games, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of the present embodiment uses an assembler, cannot handle a decimal point, and cannot perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes. Allows calculation.
In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio stores an integer, and the fractional part is rounded down. For example, when the total number of games is “1100 (D)” and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is “56000 (D)”, the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, and “F008” includes “ 00110010 (B) ”is stored.

  Also, the advantageous section ratio can be updated every game, but, for example, when there is a display request of the advantageous section ratio, the advantageous section ratio is calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total number of games, It may be stored in “F008”. Then, a decimal number based on the value stored in “F008” is displayed as an advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a buffer that stores data on the total number of payouts. When a medal is paid out by winning a small role, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas (01 to 15 sets) each including 2-byte data (for example, “F012 (upper digit)” and “F011 (lower digit)”).
Each 2-byte data stores the number of payouts for 400 games. For example, when a winning combination of nine is awarded and nine payouts are made, "9 (D)" is added to the total number of payouts.
Here, in the slot machine according to the rules, the maximum payout number in one game is set to be “15” or less, and assuming that 15 payouts are made in each game, “400” games are obtained in 400 games. Becomes Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in a binary number, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Further, when a payout is made from the first game to the 400th game, the payout number is stored in the 01th set (“F012” and “F011”). From the next 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the 02th set (“F014” and “F013”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

Further, a storage area (3 bytes) of the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 payouts have been made in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but since "90000 (D)" is a 17-digit binary number, It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, the total number of payouts in the number of games less than 6000 games is stored in “F031” to “F02F”.
When the 6000th game is reached, the number of payouts for the number of 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (each 2 bytes), so the total number of payouts for the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is also obtained. In addition, the total value is 6000 games.
Next, when the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 2-byte data (“F012” and “F011”) of the 01th set is cleared, and the total number of payouts from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is stored in this buffer. Go. In addition, from the 6000 game to the 6399 game, the total payout number (3 byte data) of the total of 15 sets is maintained without being changed.

When the addition to the 01-set 2-byte data is completed, the total payout number of 15 sets is calculated (adding each 2-byte data from the 01-th set to the 15-th set). The calculated total payout number of 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above, at the 6401th game and thereafter, when the game shifts to the 6401th game, the 02th set of 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") is cleared, and the 6401th game to the 6800th game are stored in this buffer. The total payout number up to is stored.
In the above method, the total payout amount of the 15 sets is updated every 400 games. When all the 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout amount of the 15 sets is calculated. It may be updated to that value.

The total number of payouts (total) (“F034” to “F032”) is a 3-byte storage area for storing the total number of payouts. The reason why the total number of payouts is obtained is to calculate the respective ratios (such as the later-described continuous bonus item operation ratio) when the number of games is 175,000 or more. However, the total number of payouts is kept stored after the elapse of 175,000 games, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of the three bytes reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 155,000 medals have been paid out for each game of 175,000 times, the number is 22 in a binary number, and can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a buffer of the RWM 53 that stores data on the number of payouts related to the continuous bonus item.
As shown in FIG. 29, there is provided a ring buffer provided with 15 storage areas consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01th set is “F043 (most significant digit)” to “F041 (least significant digit)”. .

Each 3-byte data stores a value obtained by multiplying the number of paid-out medals at the time of the continuous accessory operation by 100 (referred to as a “paid-out number corresponding value”). For example, when 10 winning combinations are won and 10 winnings are paid out when the continuous winning combination is activated, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
Note that storing the value multiplied by 100 instead of the value of the number of payouts is the same as the value corresponding to the number of times of the advantageous section game. This is for the purpose of calculation.

Further, in each 3-byte data, a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of operating the continuous character during 400 games is stored. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a number of payouts at the time of the continuous accessory operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01st set (“F043” to “F041”). I do. From the next 401th game to the 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 02th set (“F046” to “F044”).
In this way, 400 games are set as one set, and the values are stored in different buffers for each set.
Assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in a row of 400 games, the payout number corresponding value is "600000 (D)", which is 20 digits in a binary number. Can be stored.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the continuous bonus actuation of a total of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (“F070” to “F06E”). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, payout number correspondence values between 6000 games.
Assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in the 6000 game, the payout number corresponding value is "9000000 (D)", which is 24 digits in a binary number. It can be stored.

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the number-of-payout-corresponding-number-of-payments-for-continuous-cassette-actuation operation with less than 6000 games. Then, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the payout number corresponding value between the 400 games is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (each 3 bytes). In addition, the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the continuous bonus actuation of the total of 15 sets (6000 games) is a total value for 6000 games.
When the game shifts to the 6001 game, the 3-byte data of the 01st set (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the number of payouts at the time of the continuous character operation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is cleared in this buffer. The corresponding values are stored. From the 6000th game to the 6399th game, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15 consecutive sets is maintained without being changed.

  Then, when the three-byte data of the 01 set is determined and the 6400 game game is determined, a total of 15 sets corresponding to the payout number at the time of the continuous character actuation for the 15 sets is calculated (each 3-byte data of the 01 th set to the 15 th set is calculated). Addition), and the calculated value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15 consecutive sets is updated.

Similarly to the above, when the game shifts to the 6401 game after the 6401 game, the 3-byte data of the 02th set (“F046” to “F044”) is cleared, and the 6401 game to the 6800 game are stored in this buffer. Up to this point, the 3-byte data of the 02th set is updated.
In addition, in the above method, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the 15th set is updated every 400 games. The value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory may be calculated and updated.

The cumulative number of consecutive payouts corresponding to the number of consecutive bonuses (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative number of payouts corresponding to the number of consecutive bonuses during the operation of the consecutive bonuses. This is for calculating the continuous accessory operation ratio when the number is 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative value of the number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the continuous character continues to be stored after the 175,000 game has elapsed, and the update is terminated when the storage capacity of 4 bytes reaches the upper limit (4 bytes full).
If it is assumed that 15 medals are continuously paid out in each game, each game "1500 (D)" continues to be added, so that 4 bytes can store up to about 2.86 million games.

  In addition, the continuous bonus item operation ratio (6000 games) (“F075”) is “continuous bonus item operation payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (“ F070 ”to“ F06E ”) / total number of paid out 6000 games (FIG. 28). The buffer stores the values of “F031” to “F02F”.

Further, the continuous bonus character operation ratio (cumulative) (“F076”) is calculated as “cumulative continuous bonus material payout amount corresponding value (“ F074 ”to“ F071 ”) / total total payout number (“ F034 ”in FIG. 28). ) To “F032”).
The above ratio stores up to the maximum value “100 (D)” in decimal, so that it can be stored in one byte.
It is also possible to update the continuous role actor ratio (6000 games) and the continuous role actor ratio (cumulative total) for each game. For example, calculation is performed when there is a display request for these ratios. Alternatively, the calculation result may be stored in each storage area (“F075” or “F076”), and the value may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a buffer of the RWM 53 that stores data relating to the number of payouts of the special items. As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 30 and FIG. 29, a buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the bonus, as well as the buffer for storing the payout number corresponding value of the continuous bonus, is provided. The buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the bonus has the same configuration as the buffer for storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the continuous bonus.

In other words, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing each 3-byte data as a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory, and a value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory, which is a total of 6000 games (15 sets) It has a 3-byte buffer for storing and a 4-byte buffer for storing a total value of the number of coins to be paid when the accessory is activated. Further, two types of buffers (1 byte) for storing the operating ratio of the accessory are provided, one for 6000 games and the other for accumulation.
The method of storing in these buffers is the same as in the case of the operation of the continuous accessory, and a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, since the continuous bonus item corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, if a medal is paid out during the 1BB operation, the medal is stored in the continuous bonus item operation payout number corresponding value shown in FIG.
In addition, when a medal is paid out during the operation of all the bonuses including the consecutive bonuses, the bonus is stored in the value corresponding to the number of payouts when the bonus is activated shown in FIG. 30.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous accessory, is provided as the accessory, so in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. Are the same as the values stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a modification of the ring buffer. In this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3 bytes for each of the 01st set to the 15th set is provided, and the total value of the 15 sets is stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating the total value of 15 sets is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, the payout number corresponding value is stored in three bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from the first game to the 6000th game, as in FIG. 29.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the value corresponding to the total payout number from the first game to the 6000th game, the calculation is performed by adding each 3-byte data of 01 set to 15 sets.

Next, values corresponding to the number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the 16th set of 3-byte buffers (“F070” to “F06E”).
When the game reaches the 6401 game, the 01-set three-byte data (“F043” to “F041”) is cleared, and the payout number corresponding value from the 6401 game to the 6800 game becomes the 01-set 3-byte data. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value of the total of 6000 games (15 sets) between the 6401 game items and the 6800 game items, the 3-byte data of 02 sets to 16 sets are added and calculated.
Further, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts of 6000 games (15 sets) is calculated at the time of the 6800 game, the 3-byte data of 1 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.
In this way, among the 16 sets, the 3-byte buffer of any one set is set as the currently updated 3-byte buffer, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout number corresponding value of the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Also, in the initialization of the predetermined storage area when the setting is changed (when the RAM is cleared), the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is an exception to the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. You. Here, in order to shift to the setting change mode, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 11 while the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Can be migrated. The above-described initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change is executed before the set value can be changed based on the operation of the setting switch 13 (setting change mode).

However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the data is initialized when the error is recovered. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized and is maintained.
Here, the “unrecoverable error” refers to a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed. For example,
1) When the read set value is not in the range of the settings 1 to 6 (abnormal set value),
2) As a result of determining the stop symbol, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed (a symbol combination error),
3) Abnormal update of random numbers determined for each interrupt process,
4) When the power-off recovery data is not a normal value.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. This clears the predetermined range of the RWM 53 (data of each buffer, set value information, RT information, and winning condition device information in FIGS. 27 to 30). Then, the set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.

On the other hand, the “recoverable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11. For example, there are a medal clogging error, a medal retention error, a medal incorrect passing error, an abnormality of the passage sensor 43a, an abnormality of the insertion sensor 44, an abnormality of the payout sensor 37, and an abnormal medal insertion error.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error processing is displayed and the main processing is stopped. When the hall clerk performs an error clearing operation (eliminating the error factor) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is cleared. If it is determined that the error has been resolved, the process is restarted.

Subsequently, the updating process of the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number will be described. In the following flowcharts of FIGS. 32 to 37, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is abbreviated as “value corresponding to advantageous section”.
FIG. 32 is an example of updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games using a register. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of a portion surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of the portion surrounded by a dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 of a part. FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games and the total number of games are updated without using a register.

  FIG. 32 is executed at the end of each game, for example, at the end of the game. In the method using registers, the chip of this embodiment can use A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) at the time of calculation. In particular, since the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (“F004” to “F001”) is 4 bytes, and the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) is 3 bytes, the total is 7 bytes, which is usable. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte of the total number of games (the data of “F007” in FIG. 27) is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes (the data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, the lower two bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game count lower 2 byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding “1” in step S105. For example, if the data of the lower 2 bytes is “FFFF (H)” before the start of this flowchart, overflow occurs due to the addition of “1” in step S105 (the flag register (F register built in the main CPU 55). ) Becomes "1"). If it is determined that overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step S107. If it is determined that overflow does not occur (carry flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S109. After adding “1” in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether or not an overflow has occurred. Therefore, at the time of step S106, the DE register value when the overflow occurs is “0”. It has become.
In this embodiment, the “0” bit of the F register (flag register) is set as the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry-down or a carry-over (also referred to as a carry-over) occurs due to an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the total game count upper byte register, that is, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, the “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in the present embodiment is counted by 3 bytes, when the 3 bytes are full, specifically, when the value becomes “FFFFFF (H)”, no further addition is possible. Is determined to have reached the upper limit. After adding “1” to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit has been reached when an overflow actually occurs in the A register value (when the carry flag = “1”). is there. It can be rephrased as when the A register value is “0” (when the zero flag is “1”). When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games in the present embodiment becomes full of 3 bytes and becomes approximately 16.78 million decimal numbers, the total number of games is not added any more. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed for each game, but for each game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds from step S106 or step S108 to step S109, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. It is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section and determining whether the advantageous section flag is on or off. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not the eighth bit of the segment data of digit 2 is “1”. It is.
If it is determined in step S109 that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110. If it is determined that the vehicle is not in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S114 without updating the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games.

  In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2 byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, since “100 (D)” is added at a time, overflow occurs in two bytes only when “100 (D)” is added to “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))”. )) Is added to become “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. If it is determined that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112. If it is determined that overflow does not occur, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, "1" is added to the upper two-byte register of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written in “F004” to “F001” in FIG. As a result, the advantageous section game number corresponding value (RWM53) is updated. In the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written in “F007” to “F005” in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not become 4 bytes full before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full. As described above, the total number of games can be counted about 167.8 million times, but assuming that all of the total number of games is an advantageous section, even if the value of about 167.8 million is multiplied by 100, This is because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, in step S112, even if "1" is added to the upper two-byte register value of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, correct calculation processing can be realized without determining whether overflow has occurred. And simplification of the arithmetic processing can be realized.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in the register and the calculation is executed. When it is determined in step S108 that the total number of games has reached the upper limit, the total number of games is The process according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in the RWM 53, that is, the 3-byte data stored in “F007” to “F005” of the RWM 53 remains “FFFFFF (H)”, and before and after the start of this flowchart. No change occurs in the data of the total number of games.

Next, a specific example of the processing of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. 32 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps during this period. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

When the process proceeds to step S121 after step S112, the value of the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to “F004” and “F003” in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to “F002” and “F001” in FIG.
Next, in step S123, the total number of games is updated by 3 bytes at a time. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written in “F007”, “F006”, and “F005” in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a specific example 2 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 34, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
When the process proceeds to step S131 after step S112, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated by 4 bytes at a time. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are written in “F004”, “F003”, “F002”, and “F001” in FIG. 27, respectively. Then, when the process proceeds to step S123, similarly to the specific example 1, the total number of games is updated collectively by 3 bytes.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 35, if “No” is determined in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step in FIG. 35 is the same as in FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that the process proceeds to step S131 even when it is determined in step S109 that it is not during the advantageous section, and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is updated. That is, in this case, although the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games is not added by “100 (D)”, in FIG. 32, based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in steps S103 and S104. 27, "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 described above are examples in which the total game frequency and the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value are updated (used) through the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 shows an example in which the value corresponding to the total number of games and the number of advantageous section games is updated without going through a register.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, “1” is added to the lower two bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, in FIG. 27, “1” is added to the data of “F006” and “F005”.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005", it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1". The determination may be made based on whether or not the data of “F006” and “F005” has become “0000 (H)”. If it is determined that overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203. If it is determined that overflow does not occur, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, “1” is added to the upper one byte of the total number of games played. Specifically, “1” is added to the data of “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is that adding "1" in step S203 causes overflow in "F007", and determines whether the carry flag has become "1" and determines whether the carry flag has become "1". It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that it may be determined whether or not the data of “F007” has become “0 (H)”, and if the data has become “0 (H)”, it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. When it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and when it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper one byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, an overflow also occurs in the upper 1 byte in the addition in step S203 and the result is “0 (H)”. By subtracting “1” from this value, The data before adding “1” is returned to “FF (H)”.
Next, proceeding to step S206, "1" is also subtracted from the lower two bytes of the total number of games. Accordingly, the values of “F006” and “F005” become “FFFF (H)”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. When it is determined that the game is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to the present flowchart ends because there is no need to update the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, “100 (D)” is added to the lower two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, ie, “F002” and “F001” in FIG. Here, since the assembler cannot directly add the value of “100 (D)” to the RWM 53, first, the data of “F002” and “F001” are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" are updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

  In the next step S209, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the calculation in step S208. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become “1”, and when the carry flag has become “1”, it is determined that an overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that an overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that an overflow has not occurred, the process according to this flowchart ends. In step S210, “1” is added to the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, ie, “F004” and “F003” in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of times of game and the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games are stored, in order to calculate the ratio of advantageous section, simply use the value of “number of advantageous section game times / total number of games”. Can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, a chip that satisfies the rules can only perform calculations using two bytes, and cannot execute a division of a numerical value of two bytes or more. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games = x and the total number of games = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
by = c (> 0)
cy = d (<0)
As described above, as a result of repeating the subtraction of the total number of games y, the number of times “> 0 (greater than“ 0 ”)” is “3”, and the quotient of “x ÷ y” is “3”. It can be calculated that there is. Then, in the present embodiment, the fraction below the decimal point is rounded down, so the advantageous section ratio is calculated as “3” in the above example.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section ratio calculation process.
First, in step S301, the data of the RWM 53 is acquired in the register. As described above, seven registers A, B, C, D, E, H, and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of “F001” to “F007” shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: Stores data of “F007” D register: Stores data of “F006” E register: Stores data of “F005” B register: Stores data of “F004” C register: Stores data of “F003” H register: Stores data of “F002” L register: Stores data of “F001”

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, in which the advantageous section ratio (RWM53) is initialized. In this process, the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 is cleared (to “0”).
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, where the lower byte is subtracted. In this process, the data stored in the DE register (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games) is subtracted from the data stored in the HL register (lower 2 bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games), and the operation result is calculated. Store in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S304, and it is determined whether a carry-down has occurred. As a result of the operation in step S303 (the result of subtracting the DE register value from the HL register value), when the carry flag has not been raised (when the carry flag ≠ “1”), it is determined to be “No”.
If it is determined that the carry flag is raised (there is a carry), the process proceeds to step S305, and if it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, that is, the BC register value is “0”. If it is "0", subsequent subtraction cannot be performed, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the operation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the value of the A register (the upper one byte of the total number of games) is subtracted from the value of the BC register (the upper two bytes of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous games), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result in step S307 is less than “0”, that is, whether the carry flag is set by the calculation in step S307. When the carry flag is set, "Yes" is determined in step S308, and no further subtraction is possible, so that the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (advantageous section ratio) stored in “F008” is stored in the HL register, and “1” is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to step S311, and the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above processing (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total number of games is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio is incremented by "1" for each subtraction. Therefore, after the processing in FIG. 37, the advantageous section ratio calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value stored in “F001” to “F007” and the total number of games is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, each time the processing of steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is performed once, the advantageous section ratio is incremented by “1”. That is, the number of executions (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is an advantageous section ratio.

  In the above description, the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games (the value obtained by multiplying the number of advantageous section games by 100) and the total number of games is calculated and defined as the advantageous section ratio (%). By repeating (subtraction), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the accessory ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are calculated. be able to.

  More specifically, the value of the number of consecutive payouts during the operation of the 6000 games (15 sets) (“F070” to “F06E” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts of the 6000 games (15 sets) (FIG. 28) , "F031" to "F02F"), and by repeating the same subtraction as above, the quotient of "the value of the number of consecutive payouts at the time of activation of the 6000 game / the total number of payouts of the 6000 game" is calculated. The value is stored as “F075” in FIG. 29 as the continuous accessory operation ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, based on the total number of consecutive payouts corresponding to the number of consecutive payouts (“F074” to “F071” in FIG. 29) and the total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28), “ The quotient of “cumulative number of consecutive payouts at the time of the operation of the consecutive bonuses ÷ total number of payouts of the cumulative total” is calculated, and the value is stored in “F076” in FIG. 29 as the continuous bonuses operation ratio (cumulative).

  Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the actor's operation of the 6000 game (“F0B0” to “F0AE” in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of the 6000 game (“F031” to “F02F” in FIG. 28) Calculate the quotient of “a value corresponding to the number of payouts of the 6000 game during the operation of the accessory” ÷ the total number of payouts of the 6000 game ”, and store that value as“ accessory operation ratio (6000 game) ”in“ F0B5 ”in FIG. .

  In addition, the total number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory (“F0B4” to “F0B1” in FIG. 30) and the total number of payouts (“F034” to “F032” in FIG. 28) are used to calculate the “total”. Calculate the quotient of the value corresponding to the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the accessory / the total number of payouts of the total, and store the value as the accessory operation ratio (total) in “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the “advantageous section ratio”, the “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, the “principal ratio (6000 games (15 sets))”, and the “continuous bonuses” calculated as described above. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of "ratio (cumulative)" and "accessory ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by an information type and a numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Note that the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these pieces of information. Other pieces of information may be displayed, or some of the pieces of information shown in FIG. Only the information may be displayed. Further, the display is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason why the management information is displayed as described above is as follows.
For amusement machines, those that have passed the type test specified by the Wind Management Law are allowed to install a hall. Here, in the type test, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio when the 6000 game is executed must not exceed a predetermined value (70% for the role ratio and 60% for the continuous ratio). There are certain rules.
In addition, at the time of the type test, a document stating the average value of the ratio of bonuses and the ratio of consecutive bonuses of the applied gaming machine is to be attached. May be required).

In this case, the clerk of the hall or a third party can easily confirm whether or not the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specification as the compatible gaming machine (whether or not it has been fraudulent). It is desired to.
For example, a gaming machine with a numerical value that deviates from the compatible gaming machine may be different from the compatible gaming machine.In this case, the manufacturer should request the manufacturer to confirm the gaming machine. Thus, fraud and the like can be confirmed at an early stage.
Therefore, if a function of calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily and surely check whether or not the management information is matched.

  In the present embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (the door switch 15 is turned on), the setting key is inserted, and the setting key is turned 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is so-called setting confirmation. For this reason, the set value display LED 73 displays the current set value. During setting confirmation, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated, since it is different from during setting change.

Then, in this embodiment, if the setting switch 13 is pressed once during the setting confirmation, the “advantageous section ratio” is displayed in the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. First, digits 6 and 7 display information types. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “U7”. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the advantageous section ratio is “50 (%)”, and “50” is displayed on digits 7 and 8. Therefore, “U750” is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
When the numerical value of the management information is displayed, it is expressed in decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of “continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is set to “45”. (%) ".
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of "gear of interest ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and the type of this information is displayed as "y7". In this example, the ratio is set to "60 (%)". ) ".

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of “continuous accessory ratio (total)” is displayed, and “A6” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “48 (%)”. it's shown.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display of the “accessory ratio (cumulative)” is displayed, and “A7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “52 (%)”. it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display returns to the initial display and the advantageous section “U750” is displayed.
The display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 has not been operated for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the first display, the advantageous section ratio “U750”, is displayed.

Further, while the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the management information is continuously displayed (the digits 6 to 9 are continuously lit), and the closing of the front door is detected by the door switch 15. At this time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on. When the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on only when the opening of the front door is detected, the advantageous section “U750” may be displayed.

Also, regardless of whether the opening of the front door by the door switch 15 is detected or not, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, about every 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is 1500 interrupts) 38), the display contents described in FIG. 38 may be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information in which the ratio depends on the set value such as the continuous character ratio.
On the other hand, while the hall is open (when the player can play), the possibility of opening the front door is high.
a) An error that occurs when the medal in the hopper 35 is determined to be empty,
b) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have stayed in the medal selector,
c) an error that occurs when it is determined that medals have stayed in the payout port of the hopper 35,
d) An error that occurs when the hopper 35 is full of medals (the sub-housing provided next to the hopper 35 and for storing medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full). Error belonging to an error).

When such an error occurs, if the person involved in the hall opens the front door, the player may be able to see the management information and guess the set value. In order to solve such a problem, when all the errors a) to d) or at least one of the errors a) to d) occur, the lighting display by the management information display LED 74 is not performed. It is desirable to be configured so as to be turned off. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described errors a) to d), and it is possible to configure so that the lighting display by the management information display LED 74 is not performed even when other errors occur.
In addition, when the above-mentioned irrecoverable error occurs, the credibility of the management information to be displayed is suspected, and after the irrecoverable error is cleared, the data that is the basis of the management information to be displayed is cleared. Therefore, it is desirable not to display.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, a door opening error always occurs. You can display the information.

The information types “U7”, “y6”, “y7”, “A6”, and “A7” are examples, and an arbitrary display is performed using a two-digit alphabet, a symbol, a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
Further, in the above example, the numerical value example is different between the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio, but when only the continuous accessory is provided as in the present embodiment, the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio have the same value. Becomes

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the mode is shifted to the management information display mode and “U7 (advantage section) Is read, and displayed on digits 6 and 7. More specifically, if “U7” is displayed, the segment data is “00111110 (B)” and “00100111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying a numerical value, for example, in the case of an advantageous section ratio, the data of “F008” in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is “50 (D)”, the data stored in “F008” is “00110010”. When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)”.

  Also, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read, and it is determined whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio flashes. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is lit and displayed. As described above, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached “175000 games”.

As a specific example of blinking display, for example, display is performed in a pattern in which light-off and light-up are repeated at intervals of “0.5 seconds”, and light-off time is repeated “0.5 seconds” and light-up time is repeated “1 second”. Display in a pattern. Compared to the case where the light-off time and the light-on time are set to the same time, when the light-on time is longer than the light-off time, the display time of the management information can be longer and the illumination of the hall or the like is dim. The visibility can be improved even under the circumstances.
Since the display pattern may be made different so that it is possible to determine whether or not the game has reached the "175000" game, not only the blinking or the lighting but also the display of the information type "U7" may be changed to "U7"(" A display different from “175000” game or more, for example, “U1” (less than “175000” game) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the game is less than "175000", "U7" may be displayed by blinking, and the numerical value may be displayed by lighting.

In the same manner as described above, when displaying the continuous role ratio (6000 games) and the role ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games does not reach the “6000” game, the continuous role ratio and the The numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the “6000” game, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, in the case of displaying the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. Then, it is determined whether or not the game has reached the “6000” game, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

Further, similarly, when displaying the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the character ratio (cumulative), if the total number of games does not reach the "175000" game, the continuous character ratio (cumulative) and the cumulative character ratio (cumulative), respectively. The numerical value of the ratio (cumulative) of the accessory is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical values of the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are illuminated.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total), the value of the total number of games (“F007” to “F005”) in FIG. 27 is read and the “175000” game is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display pattern has been reached, and the display pattern is changed according to the result.

In particular, by displaying the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio in a distinguishable manner (e.g., different display modes) as to whether or not the number is 6000 games or more and 175,000 games or more. Has the following advantages.
For example, when judging whether or not an unauthorized gaming machine is based on management information on the currently displayed advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio, and bonus ratio, the management information indicates how many times the game has been played. , It is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous section ratio was 55 (%) at the time of applying for the model of the gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the advantageous section ratio in the 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the advantageous section ratio is 175,000 games or more and the advantageous section ratio is 80 (%), the determination as to whether or not the illegal section is illegal is different. . It is sufficiently possible that the value of the advantageous section ratio in the 1000 games has not converged yet. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio in the 175,000 game is a value for a sufficient number of games, and it is considered that the value converges. Therefore, the latter can be determined to have a high possibility of fraud.

Thus, even if the values are the same, as the number of games increases, the numerical value converges to the design value, so if the number of games and the numerical value are combined to determine whether or not the gaming machine is illegal, More accurate judgment can be made.
As described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the display is blinking, and when the total number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display is lit. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the number of games has reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be blinking.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, the management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. With this setting, there is no need to separately provide the digits 6 to 9, so that the cost can be reduced.

FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the stored number display LED 76.
The example of FIG. 39 shows an example having nine medals as credits. Therefore, initially, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “09”.
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, the display of the stored number display LED 76 does not change (because the door open error is displayed by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

  Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the stored number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next time, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating “continuous bonus ratio (6000 games)”. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value “45” of the “continuous bonus ratio (6000 game)” is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "y6" and "45" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, the arrow is shown so as to shift from the display of “50” to the display of “y6”. Of course (the same applies to other figures).

  Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y6” or “45” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y7” indicating that the ratio is “government ratio (6000 games)”, When the predetermined time has elapsed, a numerical value “60” of “combination ratio (6000 games)” is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "y7" and "60" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “y7” or “60” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A6” indicating “continuous agent ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous accessory ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Further, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed while “A6” or “48” is displayed, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A7” indicating that it is the “accessory ratio (cumulative)”. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "52" of the "accessory ratio (cumulative)" is displayed. Then, as described above, when this state is left, "A7" and "52" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed in this state, the display returns to the initial display of the advantageous section ratios “U7” and “50”.
When the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off during the display as described above, the display is switched to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example in which management information is displayed using the acquired number display LED 78.
The example of FIG. 40 shows an example in which “09” is displayed as the acquired number.
When the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. Accordingly, “dE” indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating that it is the advantageous section ratio. Then, when a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50” which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are alternately displayed every two seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, when the front door is closed and the door switch 15 is turned off, "dE", which is the error content, is displayed again (the door open error is not eliminated only by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate the error display, an error release operation is performed. For example, an error is released by inserting a door key into a key hole provided in a front door and turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error canceling operation is performed in this manner, the acquired number “09” before “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 again.

  In the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, when the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) and the accessory ratio (6000 games) are less than the total number of games “6000”, at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks. indicate. Similarly, when the continuous accessory ratio (total) and the accessory ratio (total) are less than the total number of games "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is blinked.

<Second embodiment>
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (or the main control board 50B when divided into the main control boards 50A and 50B) is always turned on. , In a lighting state.
When constantly lit, there are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38. For example, updating the management information to be displayed every 5 seconds is mentioned. Specifically, “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “y645” (displayed for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) →. It is mentioned. A digit extinguishing time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base 1 of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 41, illustration of the front door is omitted. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base unit 1 using the “front door opening / closing axis” (the left side in the figure) as a support axis in FIG. 41. Although FIG. 41 is used in the description of the second embodiment, the structure of the first embodiment is the same as that of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including the power switch 11, a medal payout device including the hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31, and the like are accommodated in the base unit 1.
The sub-control board 80 is mounted on the left side surface on the inner side of the base unit 1. On the other hand, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 housed inside the board case 16 are attached to the inner rear surface of the base 1. Furthermore, the board case 16 and the main control board 50 are mounted above the symbol display device, so that when the front door is opened, the state of the caulked portion 16a of the board case 16 can be easily confirmed visually. For this purpose, it is mounted at a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
Therefore, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed relatively easily.

In the specifications of the slot machine 10, in addition to the system in which the medals in the hopper 35 are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, the hall clerk opens the front door every time the hopper 35 runs out of medals. A method of supplying medals to the hopper 35 is known.
However, since the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 when the front door is opened, the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the ratio of the advantageous section of the table where the player is currently playing, the ratio of the consecutive bonuses, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Thus, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but is not easily seen by the player.

FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating the board case 16 and the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which the main control board 50 is composed of one, and Example 2 of (b) is composed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that it is arranged as close to the left side as possible when viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, the opening / closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure. , It is difficult for the player to see.

  In the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. The management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but is located to the left in the board case 16.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the interval (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. In FIG. 42, when the position of the management information display LED 74 is set to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. 42 (similarly in FIG. 3), the caulking portion 16a Is the right end of the board case 16.
In this way, even if the caulking portion 16a is destroyed and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 may be damaged or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is destroyed. Can be more effectively prevented.

  The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the board case 16 is opened. In addition to the caulking portion 16a, a body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the game machine and the board case 16 is provided. You may have. At this time, when the board case 16 is removed from the gaming machine, it is necessary to break the caulking portion of the main body. Also in this case, similarly to the caulking portion 16a, the position where the main body caulking portion is provided is the first position in order to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or damaged when the main body caulking portion is broken. When the position is the position (for example, the upper end of the board case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is set at the second position (for example, the lower part, the right part with respect to the center of the main control board 50) away from the first position. Or the left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16a and / or the main body caulking portion is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent the management information display LED 74 from being damaged. it can.
Although the position of the caulking portion 16a is set at the right end, the position is not limited to this. For example, the swaging portion 16a may be designed as the upper end. At this time, since the management information display LED 74 is a lower part, a right part, or a left part with respect to the center of the main control board 50, the management information display LED 74 is erroneously damaged when the caulking part 16a is broken. Or breakage can be prevented.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said Embodiment, For example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1500 times, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts is 3,000, the difference is 2,000, and the instruction function operation game (when the small part B group is won). It is also possible to set using variables other than the total number of games, such as 100 games. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions, such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) Although the advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the stored number display LED 76, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated indicator (such as an LED) for displaying whether or not the section is an advantageous section may be provided. However, as in the above embodiment, if the existing LED can cover the cost, the cost can be reduced.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub-control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. For this reason, the lamp for displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It cannot be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp that displays an advantageous section as long as it is a lamp that is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured from the segment DP of the digit 2 in the stored number display LED 76, but may be configured from the segment DP of the digit 4 in the acquired number display LED 78, for example.

  Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated in order to display the game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging the advantageous section display LED near the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player aware at the end of the game that the player is in the advantageous section. For example, even if a stored number display LED 76 (segment DP of digit 2 is set as an advantageous section display LED 77) or an acquired number display LED 78 (a segment DP of digit 4 is set as an advantageous section display LED 77) near the menu button 25. Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous zone display LED 77 near the settlement switch 46. Further, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the menu button 25 becomes operable, so that the player does not notice the shift to the advantageous section without the menu button 25. (Displaying the game history (two-dimensional code)) can be prevented.

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and the power switch 11 is turned on again, the advantageous section control means 69 turns on / off the power supply. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when the store closes with the advantageous section display LED 77 turned on in the hall, or when it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business on the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value). It is mentioned. By performing the setting change, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data (data of the advantageous section) of the stored number display LED 76 is also initialized. ".

  (4) During the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in a game that has won the condition device capable of operating the instruction function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not always necessary to activate the instruction function even if the game is a condition device that can activate the instruction function during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the operation of the instruction function is “possible”. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, and the number of games of the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed by the determined number of games. Is also good. Then, even if the number of games ends, if the continuation condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous section and determine the number of games to execute the instruction function operation game again by lottery or the like. It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is determined based on winning in each game or a specific condition device (for example, a common setting such as a single winning of the small role D or the small role E1). To decide.

(5) In the present embodiment, the value obtained by multiplying the number of games by 100 is stored as the advantageous section number of games corresponding value. Similarly, the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of the continuous accessory operation and the value corresponding to the payout number at the time of the accessory operation each store a value obtained by multiplying the payout number by 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the calculation method (CPU used) of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio, the number of games per se and the number of payouts per se can be stored without being multiplied by 100. It is not necessarily limited to storing the value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, the value of the total number of games stores the number of games per se, but is not limited to this, and depending on computational convenience, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a value multiplied by a predetermined value (total number of games) (A value corresponding to the number of times) may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are calculated, the data of the storage area in which the number of games itself and the payout number itself are stored is multiplied by 100, and the above-described subtraction process is repeatedly executed. By performing the processing (for example, FIG. 37), the calculation can be performed.

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous character operation ratio, and the character operation ratio are calculated for each game or for each predetermined number of games, regardless of whether the management information is displayed, and are stored in predetermined regions of the RWM 53, respectively. You may leave. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory actuation ratio, and the accessory actuation ratio are calculated when the management information is displayed (when there is a display request), the calculation results are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, and the calculation is performed. The result may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch, for example, a bet switch 40, or a switch dedicated to display management information may be separately provided.
In the present embodiment, the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are provided separately. However, it is conceivable that the setting switch and the reset switch are constituted by one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, the management information can be displayed by operating the setting change / reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in the present embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by operating the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the mode is shifted to the management information display mode on condition that no error occurs.
For example, if a medal staying error in the medal selector has occurred among the recoverable errors, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is removed.

  In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed. That is, after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases his / her hand from the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and the display of the management information may be terminated when the operator releases the setting switch 13. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is first pressed, “U750”, which is the first management information, is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display ends (digits 6 to 6). 9 is turned off). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, "y645", which is the second management information, is displayed. However, when the setting switch 13 is released, the display can be controlled to end. When the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as above can be performed.

As described above, there are various variations on which switch is used to display the management information and how the operation of the switch displaying the management information is related to the display pattern (display time). However, the present invention is not limited to those shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, the display pattern of the management information is as follows.
a) a display pattern for constantly displaying management information b) a pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) a front door opened and a predetermined switch D) A pattern in which the management information is displayed when the user operates the button d) A pattern in which the front door is opened, the setting key is inserted to turn on the setting key switch 12, and the management information is displayed when a predetermined switch is operated. Can be
However, when the operation for shifting to the setting change mode is performed and the operation shifts to the setting change mode, the operation is not shifted to the management information display mode, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the count of the total number of games is executed until the count value of the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be terminated even if the storage capacity has not reached the upper limit.
Further, when the total number of games reaches a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and the counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The same applies to the total number of payouts.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed such that the advantageous section ratio is equal to or less than “70” (%). For this reason, it is not assumed that the advantageous section ratio in the market exceeds “70” (%). However, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) cannot be denied, for example, when a goto action or the like is performed. Therefore, for example, the data value of “F008” storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds “70 (D)”, some warning is output or the display of the advantageous section ratio is performed. That is to make it different from the normal time (display that it is abnormal). For example, in the display of the information type “U7” of the advantageous section ratio, there is a method of alternately flashing the upper digit “U” and the lower digit “7” at high speed.

Similarly, when the design value upper limit is set to, for example, “60 (%)” for the continuous character ratio and the character ratio, if the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, some value is set. A method of outputting a warning or displaying the information type in the same manner as described above may be used.
Alternatively, information on the advantageous section ratio or the like is transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmitting means 70, and for example, when the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%), information relating to a warning may be transmitted. No.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to be equal to or less than "70" (%) for all game sections, the other sections can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than “1/32”.
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the indicating function may be always activated when the condition device capable of operating the indicating function is won. The instruction function may be activated when a lottery for activating the function is won. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, whether to set the advantageous section to always activate the instruction function, or to set the advantageous section to activate the instruction function only when the lottery for deciding whether to activate the instruction function is won. , Lottery or the like.

  Further, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (the end of the advantageous section) may be performed when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted at the transition to the advantageous section, or the number of games may not be determined. Alternatively, a transition (fall) lottery from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the lottery is won, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be performed. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, control is performed such that the advantageous section is unconditionally terminated and the normal section is started.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of two digits, for example. When the setting switch 13 is pressed, for example, as shown in the examples of FIGS. 39 and 40, an information type “U7” is displayed, a numerical value “50” is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and thereafter, a predetermined time is displayed. "U7" and "50" may be alternately and repeatedly displayed every time the time elapses.

(12) As the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are calculated by truncating decimals, accurate values are not necessarily displayed. In this sense, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio respectively correspond to (equivalent to) the advantageous section ratio, a value corresponding to (equivalent to) the continuous bonus agent ratio, and a corresponding (equivalent) accessory ratio. ).
In addition, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are not limited to numerical values rounded down to the decimal point, but are rounded down to the decimal point, rounded up to the decimal point, and the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value converted to “10” increments.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of the symbols stopped on the active line is the same when the small win E1 is won and when the small win E2 is won. For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle stop is stopped, the stop appearance of the middle cherry (winning of the small role 36) becomes possible, and at the time of the first stop right, the stop appearance where the middle cherry does not appear. (Small role 38 prize). Therefore, it was not possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and E2 was won, regardless of the presence or absence of the middle cherry.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle cherries do not appear, the stop roll may be changed instead.
For example, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the left or middle first stop is made, the middle cherry is made to appear, and when the middle cherry is made, the player determines which of the small roles E1 or E2 has been won. Make it impossible.

  On the other hand, at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, when the right first stop is performed, the middle cherry is controlled so as not to appear as described above, and instead of the middle cherry, the small cherry E1 or E2 is not played. The appearance of a stop roll that allows the player to determine which one has been won can be mentioned.

Specifically, for example, control is performed as follows.
First, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36 and 41 (the small win 41 is newly added).
At the time of the first left or middle stop at the time of winning the small role E1 or E2, the small role 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped, and at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small role E1, the small role 38 is stopped. On the other hand, the small role 41 is stopped at the first right stop when the small role E2 is won.

  The combination of the symbols of the small role 41 is, for example, "bell A / bell B"-"replay"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank". As a result, the symbols on the middle reel 31 differ between when the small win 38 is stopped and when the small win 41 is stopped. When the small win 38 stops, the “replay” does not stop on the middle reel 31, but when the small win 41 stops, the “replay” always stops on the middle reel 31. As a result, it is possible to determine the winning of the small win 38 (small win E1) or the small win 41 (small win E2).

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small role 38 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small role E1 is won, and the small role 41 is stopped when the middle cherry is not stopped when the small role E2 is won. You may. In this way, it is possible to determine which of the small wins E1 and the small wins E2 has been won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped, even at the left or middle first stop.

In addition, for example, the following method can be used.
The small wins included in the winning of the small win E1 are the small wins 36 and 38 as in the above embodiment. Also, the small wins included in the winning of the small win E2 are the small wins 36, the small wins 37 and 38 as in the above embodiment. At the time of the left or middle first stop at the time of winning the small part E1 or E2, the small part 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped. At the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small part E1, the small part 38 is operated by the operation timing of the stop switch 42. At the time of the first right stop in the small win E2 winning, the small win 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
Then, when the small win 38 is missed at the time of winning the small win E1 or E2, a combination of different symbols is stopped. In this way, it may be possible to determine whether the small win E1 or E2 has been won.

  (14) When winning the 1BBA + small role E1 and lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 until a predetermined timing of the next game comes, an effect (such as a continuous effect) of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is not output. Is preferred. This is because the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, so that the player knows that the game has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output a continuous production of whether or not a 1BBA (special role) has been won. In addition, when it is determined that the player wins 1BBA + small win E1 and shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after a predetermined timing (see FIG. At timing 2) indicated by 23, the advantage section display LED 77 is turned on until the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small part E1 has won, so that the small part E1 is independently elected and enters the advantageous section. Since it can be seen that it has been decided to shift, in such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like that fuels whether or not 1BB has been won.

(15) In the present embodiment, when the pressing order is incorrect in the small role group B winning, one winning combination can be won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of small wins that can win a prize at the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order when winning the small win B group may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the drop-out rate at the time of incorrect answer in the pressing order at the time of winning the small role B group is set to 75%, but is not limited to this, and various settings such as 50% can be set.
Further, even when the pressing order is incorrect in the small part C group winning, the winning combination can be set to be dropped with a certain probability as in the small part B group winning.

(16) In the above embodiment, during the 1BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) of the setting 6 is set to be larger than that of the setting 1, and for example, when the number of games during the 1BBA operation reaches a predetermined number, it is advantageous. Added section addition.
However, conversely to the above, during the 1BBA operation, by increasing the winning probability of the small win A of the setting 6 and lowering the winning probability of the small winning E2 with respect to the setting 1 with respect to the setting 1, the setting 6 has a smaller game. The number of times (expected value) may be used. In this case, for example, when the operation of 1BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), an additional advantageous section may be added.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is determined that a condition device that does not include a special combination that can carry over the winning, for example, when the small combination E1 is independently elected, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantage is set by a predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing described in the above embodiment, and various settings can be made. For example, in the game at the time of winning the small role E1, when the winning determination is completed, when the medal is paid out in the game, when the payout of the medal is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although this does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the replay has been won, the automatic bet is terminated based on the winning in the replay, or the next game (re-game) is started. For example, when the switch 41 is operated, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

(18) When "1BBA + Small win E1" is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the left or middle first stop, the small win 36 can be won, and the middle cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small role E1, the middle cherries can appear. When the 1BBA winning flag is also raised, the middle cherries do not appear in any pushing order (all the small roles 38 are won). Stop control may be performed as follows.
When controlled in this way, there is a demerit that the middle cherries cannot be displayed and the player cannot be instigated even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when "1BBA + Small win E1" is won.

On the other hand, even when the player wins the small win E1 alone after the inside of the 1BBA, the winning flag that stands is “1BBA + small win E1”, so that the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in the interior, even if the player wins the small role E1 and learns the middle tier cherry after knowing that the player is in the interior, I get the impression that I wasted money. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, so that it is not necessary to give the player the impression that he / she has lost money.

In particular, as a combination of symbols of the small role 38, there is "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" (FIG. 11). The pattern 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B" is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above symbols of the small role 38 to appear, it is possible to make it look like a drop-off when the small role B group is won (not a rare role).
The same applies to the case where the player wins "1BBA + Small Winner E2", is inside the 1BBB, wins the small win E1 alone, or goes inside the 1BBB, and wins the small win E2 alone. It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, the non-RT and RT1 have the same replay winning probability (the number is "8978"). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of the RT1 replay may be set higher than the winning probability of the non-RT replay.

  (20) In the present embodiment, the process is shifted to RT1 after the end of the 1BBB operation, and a replay E lottery is performed at RT1, and an advantageous section is added by winning the replay E. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when shifting to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section to an additional specialization zone (a state where the frequency of addition is high, and a state where the number of additional games is large). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, and the additional specialization zone is continued until the process shifts to RT2. Every time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of the replay E), the addition of the advantageous section is executed. Is also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, the RT after the end of the 1BBA operation is set to non-RT, and the RT after the end of the 1BBB operation is set to RT1. However, instead of shifting to a different RT as described above, the same RT may be shifted. For example, it may be shifted to non-RT after the end of 1BBB operation. In this case, after the end of the 1BBB operation in the advantageous section, it is possible to add the advantageous section to the special zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 games and the cumulative total), and the accessory ratio (6000 games and the cumulative total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, for example, a payout rate.
As a calculation method of the payout rate, for example, the following method can be used.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" / "Total number of games excluding replays after replay winning"
b) "(Total number of payouts + number of replay winnings x 3) x 100" / "total number of games"
When a) is adopted, each buffer for storing “total payout number × 100” and “total number of games excluding replays after a replay winning” is provided. When b) is adopted, a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning number × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that buffers for “total payout number × 100” and “replay winning number × 300” may be separately provided, and the values of both may be added.

In addition, “3” of “the number of times of replay winning × 3” means the number of bets of the game when the replay wins. For example, when the number of bets fluctuates depending on a game state or the like, the value is not limited to “3”, but may be a value (for example, “2” or “1”) bet on the game when a replay wins. There may be games to play.
In addition, a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, and the number of replay winnings itself (or “the number of replay winnings × the value bet on the game when the replay wins”) may be provided. When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 before calculation.

Further, as for the calculation methods of a) and b), a method of repeating the subtraction is adopted as in the above-described calculation method.
Then, the payout rate is displayed as one of the management information, and if the payout rate is compared with the payout rate in design, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine. Further, also in this case, if the lighting mode is made different depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more or 175,000 games or more, it is more accurate whether the game machine is a fraudulent game machine. Can be determined.
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as “P.” and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. Is used to display the payout rate (a three-digit numerical value).

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter and may be an increment counter. Here, adopting an increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes “1500” in the case of the increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. Initialized value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, the number of games of the instruction function operation game (when the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role group B), and the like. The value at the time of initialization is optimally “0”. Further, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 that store parameters to be initialized are continuous. Specifically, for example, “F100”, “F101”, “F102”,...

This is similar to the initialization process of the RWM 53 accompanying the setting change, and the initialization can be performed by repeatedly performing the process of putting “0” in the address of the RWM 53 within a predetermined range while shifting the address by one. This is because it can be executed in a simplified process. Note that the parameters that are cleared by setting the advantageous section to the upper limit value are also initialized when the setting is changed.
Note that the address of the RWM 53 that stores parameters to be initialized is regularly assigned (for example, “F100”, “F102”, “F104”,...), And “0” is assigned to the address. Even when initialization is performed by repeatedly performing the process of inserting the address while shifting the address by a predetermined value (in the above case, “2”), a simplified process can be executed.

Here, when the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter and the count value is “0”, it may be “0” due to the initialization, or the advantageous section may have the upper limit value (1500 game play). ) Is not known from the count value. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous section is determined based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not the upper limit is set (a predetermined area of the RWM 53 is stored). Must be performed on the basis of the stored information).
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is an increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and if it is "1500", it can be determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the upper limit only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) The update of the data of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 and the processing of FIGS. 32, 36, and 37 are executed at the end of each game, more specifically, after the winning determination processing. .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is continuously displayed, the same management information (for example, the advantageous section ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times during one game. .
Then, it is conceivable to calculate the advantageous section ratio or the like each time it is displayed.
As described above, the same management information (eg, advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times during one game.
(25) The above-described embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

Subsequently, a third embodiment and the subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The “instruction game section” refers to a game section in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section.
The “instructed game section” is similar to a conventional AT (abbreviation of “assist time”; “ART” when an AT is executed at an RT having a high replay winning probability). In the following description, the “instructed game section” will be referred to as “AT” as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function operation game" refers to a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, at the time of the replay B group winning, the replay C group winning, and the small role B group winning of the embodiment. , And when the small role C group is won, the instruction function is always activated.
Note that the AT of the present embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (high replay probability), and thus is basically "ART". However, the AT may fall to RT2 due to a mistake in the operation of the stop switch by the player. Even if the vehicle falls from RT3 to RT2, AT is continued. Further, there is a case where the AT is executed at RT other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, an AT at a non-high replay probability RT such as RT3 is not strictly "ART". Further, when the vehicle falls from RT3 to RT2 during the AT, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay B group, so that the instruction function is operated to display the correct answer order in order to return to RT3.

On the other hand, "increased the execution frequency" means that the instruction function is not activated at "100%", for example, at 95% when the small role group B or small group C is elected. Is a concept that includes
As will be described later, during the designated game period, at the time of winning the small role B group, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, the instruction function may be activated. In such a case, it does not mean that the instruction function is always activated, and therefore the provision is made that the execution frequency is increased.

As described above, the designated game section is a game section in which the designated function operation game is executed. Therefore, it is necessary that the designated game section be an advantageous section as a premise. Therefore, the designated game section is always an advantageous section, and the designated game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section are sometimes collectively referred to as “non-advantaged section”). There is no.
In addition, the start and end of the designated game section can be arbitrarily set. For example, the designated game section may be started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is started, the designated game section is not immediately started, and the designated game section is started when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied in the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the end condition of the indicated game section may be determined at the start of the indicated game section, or the end condition may not be determined at the start of the indicated game section.
In the case where the termination condition of the designated game section is determined before the start of the designated game section, the designated game section may be extended after the designated game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) for determining the designated game section can be cited. For example, firstly, the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the designated game section, the number of games in the designated game section is set to, for example, “50” games or “100” games.

  Second, there is a case where the end condition of the designated game section is set by the number of payouts. If set in this way, the end condition is the same as in the special game. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to, for example, “the number of payouts exceeds 300”.

Thirdly, setting the end condition of the designated game section by the difference number of sheets is mentioned. Specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to “the difference number exceeds 200”.
Fourth, the end condition of the designated game section may be set by the number of times of operation of the designated function at the time of winning the small combination B group and the small combination C group (or the small combination B group only). More specifically, the end condition of the designated game section is set to “the number of times the designated function is activated at the time of winning the small combination B group and the small combination C group is 50 times”. Terminating the designated game section.

When the designated game section is extended in the designated game section determined as described above, the parameters defining the designated game section are changed (also referred to as “extension”, “addition”, and “addition”).
For example, in the designated game section of 100 games, the designated game section is extended at the 50th game, and when the number of games added is 30 games, the remaining number of games in the designated game section is changed from 50 games to 80 games. Be changed.
Similarly to the above, when the designated game section is set by the number of payouts, the number of payouts, or the number of times the designated function is activated, when extending the designated game section, values to be added to these parameters are determined, and the remaining parameters are determined. The added value is added (added).

Further, the designated game section (AT) may be started and ended based on the transition of the game state.
Here, the “game state” includes a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the RT (lottery state) described above. That is, the gaming state is a concept including both the lottery state and the control state.
The “control state” is a game state that can be determined independently of the RT (as described later, there may be a control state linked to the RT).
Examples of the control state include concepts such as precursor, CZ (abbreviation of “chance zone”), AT, and normal. More specifically, as a control state performed in the advantageous section, a state in which the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) is high (high-probability state) or low (low-probability state), or a designated game section (AT). As the control state, there are various control states in consideration of playability, such as a state in which the additional winning probability of the designated game section (AT) is high (an additional specialization zone or the like) and a low state.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, the control state is changed from “normal” to “ahead” at the same time as the shift to the advantageous section. The precursor includes a case where the transition to CZ (promotion) and a case where the transition to normal (fall) occur. If the condition for shifting to CZ is met during the precursor, the process shifts to CZ, and if the condition for shifting to normal is satisfied, the process shifts to normal.
Further, when shifting to CZ, there is a case of shifting (promoting) to AT and a case of shifting (falling) to a precursor or normal. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the process shifts to the AT, and when the condition for shifting to the precursor or the normal is satisfied, the process shifts to the precursor or the normal, respectively.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the AT is performed, when performing the same RT transition (FIG. 22) as in the first embodiment, the control is performed so as to stay at the RT3. For example, when it is determined to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the correct answer pressing order for shifting to RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed. Further, after shifting to RT3, in order to prevent the player from falling from RT3, at the time of winning the replay C group, the correct answer pressing order for maintaining RT3 by operating the instruction function is displayed.

In addition, for example, a finite RT is provided, and an AT is set during staying at the finite RT. In this case, the AT ends when transitioning from the finite RT to another RT.
The “finite RT” means that the player stays at the RT until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, satisfies the end condition of the RT and shifts to another RT.
For example, when shifting to the finite RT after the end of the special game, the AT may be executed at the finite RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted by the finite RT, the process proceeds to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and the AT, that is, the designated game section and the advantageous section are completed.
Further, in the case where the special combination is elected and a transition is made to RT4 (internal RT) as in the first embodiment, for example, when the special combination during the limited RT is elected, the RT transition may be performed. In this case, the finite RT is ended by the winning of the special role, and after the end of the special game, it can be started from a predetermined RT different from the finite RT (for example, a non-RT in FIG. 59).
On the other hand, in the case of the specification that does not shift to RT by winning the special role, even if the special role is won during the limited RT, the limited RT does not end, and after the end of the special game, the game is being executed until then. It is possible to restart from the middle of the finite RT.

  In addition, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, whether or not to activate the indicating function is optional. However, since it is during AT that the indicating function is always or frequently operated, the indicating function is not operated as much as during AT during a precursor or CZ. During the aura or during the CZ, the instruction function may be activated at a small rate, or the instruction function may be activated only once. Note that in a specification in which a transition from a normal section to an advantageous section is made and a transition is made from normal to an aura, and before the transition from the aura to a CZ or AT, the vehicle may fall to a normal (ordinary section), the precursor or the CZ (the advantageous section) is used. During the section), it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once.

In particular, when a transition is made to the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated at the time of the first small role B group winning in order to early achieve "execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section". .
Further, since the AT is assumed to be an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, the AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when the game has the remaining number of games in the AT, and reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games, the advantageous section and the AT are ended.

The “freeze” is to delay the progress of the game by temporarily suspending the game for a predetermined period, for example, receiving a medal, receiving an operation of the bet switch 40, and receiving an operation of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. (Reception of the operation of stopping the reel 31). Such a freeze may be performed, and various effects may be output during the freeze period.
The freeze is executed, for example, at the end of the AT. On the other hand, after the shift to the advantageous section, if only CZ is executed (when AT is not executed), no freeze is executed. Therefore, there is a case where the freeze is executed and a case where the freeze is not executed at the end of the advantageous section after shifting to the advantageous section.

<Third embodiment>
The third embodiment is characterized in that the number of AT games can be added.
As described above, there are various parameters of the AT, but in the third embodiment, the termination condition of the AT is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Also, examples 1 (FIG. 53) and 2 (FIG. 54) will be described as the processing on the sub-control board 80 side.
In the following example, the AT starts at the same time as the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of the AT. That is, "AT = advantageous section" is set.
However, as in the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment to be described later, it is a matter of course that there is a case where the zone is a non-AT period (for example, a precursor, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc.) although it is an advantageous section. (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Further, in Examples 1 to 10 below, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous section counter, and the like are provided (in all examples, these three counters are not always provided).
Note that, in the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 (Example 1) to 52 (Example 10), the same processes are denoted by the same step numbers. The description of the same step numbers as those already described is omitted as appropriate.
The count value of the counter is abbreviated as “counter value”.
Furthermore, “clearing” the counter value means initializing the counter value (setting the counter value to “0” in the increment counter).

In the third embodiment, when the player wins a condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment during the AT, the number of games played by the AT is added. The number of games to be added may be determined in advance in accordance with the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the condition device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when the small part E1 of the number “250” is won, the number of additional games is determined to be “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). It is mentioned. In addition, when the small role E1 of the number “750” is won, the number of additional games may be determined to be “30” (50%), “50” (30%), or “100” (20%). Can be
Also, regardless of the above example, the number of additional games to be added to the AT may be determined in advance based on the control state and the condition device, or the number of additional games to be added to the AT may be randomly selected based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, for example, even when the same condition device is won, the number of additional games determined or drawn by the control state being executed can be made different.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” as described above, and the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500 games, as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the maximum AT is also 1500 games.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the number of games played by the AT is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) number of games played by the AT is added according to the winning condition device.
In the case where the number of AT games is added, the total number of AT games (meaning the sum of the number of AT digested games and the number of remaining games; the same applies hereinafter) is unlimited regardless of whether or not it exceeds “1500”. There is a case where the additional is executed and a case where the additional exceeding “1500” is not executed.
Even if the total number of AT games exceeds "1500" as a result of adding the number of AT games, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to "1500".

Furthermore, when the number of games is added during the AT, from the beginning to the end, a method of executing the addition under the same condition, and making the addition harder as the upper limit of the 1500 games is approached (the expected value of the number of additions becomes smaller) ) Methods. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of games played by the AT is, for example, “100” and no additional equipment is performed, when the first condition device to be added is elected, for example, 80 The additional number “100” is selected with a probability of%, but when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1000” or more, if the same condition device as above is won, for example, an additional 80% is added. This is the case when the number “50” is selected.
Also in the case of such control, there are a case where the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” and a case where the addition is stopped.
Further, when the addition is continued even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds "1500", a method of storing the value even when the value exceeds "1500" is stored. Is a method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (Example 1) below is an example in which even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total number of games), the addition is executed without any limitation (added to the counter).
FIGS. 44 (Example 2) to FIG. 46 (Example 4) are examples in which the additional game is not executed (not added to the counter) when the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. In this case, when the additional lottery itself is not executed and when the additional lottery itself is executed, after the additional lottery, it is determined whether or not the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. There is a case where the additional lottery result is cleared. In FIG. 44 (example 2) to FIG. 46 (example 4), the latter is adopted.

In addition, when it is decided to add, a freeze may occur. This is because a freeze is generated and an additional effect (the number of games to be added) is output during the freeze.
However, if it is determined that the number of games is to be added and a freeze is generated, the additional number is cleared because the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”. That is not done.
For this reason, for example, after winning the condition apparatus to be added in the current game and performing an additional lottery, it is decided to add, and after it is determined that the additional number is added to the remaining number of games of the AT, For example, in the next game, there is a control for generating a freeze together with an additional effect.

  Furthermore, FIG. 47 (Example 5) to FIG. 49 (Example 7) show that when the total number of games of the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when it approaches the upper limit “1500”), the expected value of the additional number is reduced. Here is an example. Here, when the expected value of the additional number is reduced, lowering the winning probability of the additional number, reducing the additional number, and executing both of them are mentioned.

Further, FIG. 50 (Example 8) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) show that when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1000” or more (that is, when it approaches the upper limit “1500”), the winning combination (winning condition device) This is an example in which a lottery is performed with a lower grade. Here, “reducing the grade of the winning combination” is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, a small win E1 with a set number of “250” and a small win E1 with a set number of “750” are provided as condition devices to be added to the lottery. It is assumed that
Here, the small win E1 with the numeral “250” is a condition device that is less likely to win because of the smaller number of the small wins E1 with the numeral “750”. In such a case, the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 with the set number "250" is won is x1, and the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 with the set number "750" is won is x2 ( x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the additional number, a method of providing a plurality of types of lottery tables in advance and changing the lottery table used in the additional lottery is adopted.

When the total number of games played by the AT is less than “1000”, when the player wins the small part E1 of the set number “250”, the lottery is performed by adding the expected value x1, and the small part E1 of the set number “750” is won. At times, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
Next, when the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, both when the small part E1 with the number “250” is won and when the small part E1 with the number “750” is won, An additional lottery is performed with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small combination E1 with the set number “250” is won, the grade is reduced to the small combination E1 with the set number “750” and the additional lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, when the player wins the small role E1 of the set number “250”, an extra lottery is performed with the expected value x2, and the small role E1 of the set number “750” is performed. At the time of winning, an additional lottery may be performed with an expected value x3 (x3 <x2).
The expected values x1 to x3 are assumed to be values exceeding “0”, but may be, for example, “0”. The additional lottery for the expected value of the additional number “0” includes, for example, setting the winning probability of the additional addition to “0”, or winning in the additional number “0” although the winning itself is performed in the additional lottery. .

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small part E1 is x11 and the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small part D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total number of games played by the AT is less than "1000", when the small part E1 is won, an additional lottery is performed with the expected value x11, and when the small part D is elected, the additional lottery is performed with the expected value x12. .
Next, in the case where the total number of games played by the AT is “1000” or more, when the small win E1 is won, the small win D is replaced with the expected value x12 and a lottery is performed.
Note that even if the winning combination is replaced with a lower-grade winning combination in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself is not changed.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total number of games of the AT at which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to “1000”. However, the threshold value is not limited to this, and is not limited to “500”, “800”, “1200”. , "1300", "1400", etc., can be set variously according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating Example 1 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digestive games during AT and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit game number “1500” of the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, at the start of the AT, “100” is assigned as an initial value (the number of games). Therefore, at the start of AT, "100" is set in the AT counter. Then, each game is decremented by "1" (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value "1500" at the start of the AT. Then, each game is decremented by "1" (decrement counter).
As described above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the AT termination condition is satisfied.
Note that if 1BB is won during the AT, the AT counter is not updated until the 1BB game ends (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter updates the game every time even during the 1BB game. That is, the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, so that after the 1BB ends, the AT counter value is restarted from the AT counter value at the time of the 1BB winning.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the eighth bit in the segment data of digit 2, and is set to “1” during the advantageous section, and is set to “0” when not in the advantageous section. Is set.

  In FIG. 43A, in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs a command transmission process to the sub control board 80 at the time of starting a game. This process is a process shown in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S402, in which control when the start switch 41 is operated is executed. In step S402, it is continuously detected whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is executed. This processing is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, the “addition” is an addition of the AT game number. Therefore, when the game is not in the AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but the non-AT), the additional lottery in step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery in step S404 is a process shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won, an additional lottery of the AT is executed.
It is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability are determined in a lottery table described later.

Next, proceeding to step S405, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in FIG.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, a variable updating process is performed as a process at the end of the game. This processing is the processing shown in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding to step S401 in FIG. 43 (a), the game start command transmission process in FIG. 43 (b) is executed.
First, in step S411, an AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. As the value of the advantageous section flag, “1” is transmitted when the section is in the advantageous section, and “0” is transmitted when the section is not in the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. By the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters of the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the value of the advantageous section flag to the sub control board 80.

When proceeding to step S404 in FIG. 43 (a), an additional lottery is executed in FIG. 43 (c).
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. This lottery table is stored in the ROM 54 in advance, and defines an additional number corresponding to a winning combination and its winning probability. Specifically, for example, when the small number E1 alone has won the number "250" at the time of winning alone, the probability of determining the additional number to be "50" is 60%, and the probability of determining the additional number to be "40" is as follows. For example, it may be set to 40%. In addition, when the small number E1 alone wins the number “750”, the probability of determining the additional number to be “30” is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the additional number to be “20” is set to 50%. It is mentioned. For other condition devices, the winning probability and the additional number are determined.

  In the next step S422, additional lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result of the lottery in step S422 (the determined additional number) is added to the AT counter value. For example, if the AT counter value so far is "50" (the number of remaining games) and the added number is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S405 of FIG. 43A, the command transmission at the time of start switch operation of FIG. 43D is executed.
Here, in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, at the start of the game, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. If it is not decided to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of AT games is to be added, the updated AT counter value is transmitted in step S431. After receiving the AT counter value in step S411, the sub-control board 80 receives the AT counter value stored in the sub-control board 80 in step S431 when the AT counter value is received again in step S431. Rewrite with the AT counter value.
Before the step S431, it is determined whether or not the AT is added in the game, and only when the AT is added, the AT counter value is transmitted for the second time in the game in the step S431. Is also good.

When the process proceeds to step S407 in FIG. 43A, the variable updating process in FIG.
First, in step S441, "1" is subtracted from the AT counter value. Next, the process proceeds to step S442, in which the upper limit counter value is decremented by "1". In the next step S443, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. When it is determined to be “0” (that is, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit “1500”), the process proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether the AT counter value is “0” and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining number of games of the AT is “0”.
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more, for example, an instruction function operation counter or an instruction function operation flag may be provided.
The instruction function operation counter can be, for example, an increment counter that adds “1” each time the instruction function is activated. If the counter value is “1” or more, the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is It can be determined that the value is “1” or more.

  The instruction function operation flag is turned off when the instruction function operation game is never executed after executing the advantageous section and the AT, and is turned on (and thereafter) when the first instruction function operation game is executed. Is a flag. When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more.

  As described in the first embodiment, when the game shifts to the advantageous section, at least once, the instruction function operation game (the winning of the role with the largest payout number among the games having the advantageous pushing order of the stop switch 42) is performed. The game of the time. In the first embodiment, the game at the time of winning the small role group B. The same applies to the following.), The advantageous section cannot be ended. As described above, executing the instruction function operation game at least once during the advantageous section has priority over the AT termination condition.

  However, when the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 without executing the instruction function operation game, the advantageous section can be ended (refer to an eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69) described later). ). Therefore, in the example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”. If the upper limit counter value is “0”, the advantageous section and the AT are determined without performing the determination in step S444. To end.

  In step S444, when it is determined that the AT counter value is “0” and the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is “1” or more, since the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S445. move on. On the other hand, when “No” is determined in the step S444, the processing according to the flowchart is ended (the AT and the advantageous section are continued in the next game).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, the process proceeds to step S446, where the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). The process further proceeds to step S447 to clear the value of the advantageous section flag (set to “0”). As described above, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating Example 2 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side. In the example 2 of FIG. 44, as the counter, an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an additional counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) are provided. . Further, an advantageous section flag is provided as in Example 1.
The add-on counter adds the added number every time the number of games is added during the AT.

44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 in FIG.
In addition, in the additional lottery process of FIG. 44C, after the additional lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to “1400”. That is, "100" is set as the initial value of the number of games played by the AT, and when the number of added games of the AT reaches "1400", the total number of games played by the AT becomes "1500" in total, and the upper limit of the advantageous section is set. To reach. For this reason, it is set so as not to add more than the number of games “1400”.

If it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number ("1400"), even if the additional number is determined in the lottery in step S422, the additional number is added. Instead, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the result of the lottery in step S422 (the determined additional number) is added to the additional counter value. The processing of the next step S423 is the same as in the above-described example 1. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before the additional lottery = “50”, the additional counter value = “200”, and the determined additional number is “30”, the AT counter value after the additional is “80”, the additional The counter value is “230”.

In addition, in the command transmission processing at the time of operating the start switch in FIG. 6D, the additional counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in step S461. In the first example, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the second example, the additional counter value is transmitted. When the additional counter value reaches “1400”, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the additional operation has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.
Further, in FIG. 29E, steps S441 to S447 are the same as those in FIG. 43 (Example 1). After step S447, the process proceeds to step S471 to clear the additional counter value. This is for clearing all parameters related to the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 3 of FIG. 45, as a counter, an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and adds “1” each time the AT is played for one game) and an additional counter (an initial value “100”) , Increment counter) and an upper limit counter (same as in Example 1). Furthermore, the specified number is set to “1500” which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In FIG. 9C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processing as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the additional counter value has exceeded a prescribed number ("1500"). The fact that the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number “1500” means in Example 3 that the total number of games played by the AT has exceeded “1500”. Therefore, when the additional counter value exceeds the prescribed number "1500", even if the additional number is determined in step S422, the additional number is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is equal to or smaller than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S423 (addition of an additional number to the AT counter value) shown in Example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games during the AT.

FIG. 40D shows the same processing as that of FIG. 44 (Example 2).
Further, in FIG. 11E, in step S481, "1" is added to the AT counter value. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. In the next steps S442 and S443, the same processing as in Example 1 is performed. In the next step S482, it is determined whether the AT counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of games played by the AT is equal to or greater than the number of games added, it is determined that the conditions for ending the AT and the advantageous section are satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. Then, when the number of AT games reaches “100” without adding any number of AT games, the AT counter value becomes “100”, the additional counter value becomes “100”, and the “AT counter value” .Gtoreq.addition counter value ". If “Yes” is determined in step S482, the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined to be “No”, since the conditions for terminating the advantageous section and the AT are not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is “1” or more. If it is equal to or more than “1”, the condition for terminating the advantageous section and the AT is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not equal to or more than “1”, the processing according to this flowchart ends because the next game also continues the AT and the advantageous section.
The processing after step S445 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating Example 4 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is an additional counter (increment counter set to an initial value “100”), an advantageous section counter (set to an initial value “0”), and during AT and during the advantageous section, An increment counter that increments by “1”.
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games played is counted by the advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous section counter of Example 4 has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of Example 3.
Further, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous section counter also serves as the upper limit counter. The prescribed number is “1500” as in Example 3.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
In FIG. 8B, when step S401 is started, an advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub-control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, where the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub-control board 50, as in Example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 11E, in step S501, “1” is added to the advantageous section counter value. In the next step S502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is “1500” or more. If it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", it means that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, and the process proceeds to step S504 to end the advantageous section and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section counter value is not equal to or greater than "1500", the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. As in step S482 of FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the advantageous section counter value becomes equal to or greater than the additional counter value, it means that the AT has no remaining number of games. If “Yes” is determined in step S503, the process proceeds to step S483, and if “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart ends (the next game also continues the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is a process similar to that of FIG. 45 (example 3). If “Yes” is determined in step S483, the process proceeds to step S504. If “No” is determined, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The following steps S447 and S471 are the same processing as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Example 5 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is an AT counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “100” and decrements by “1” during AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “0” is set and added). An increment counter that adds an additional number for each game, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “1500” and is decremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000”.

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
Also, in FIG. 9C, two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the additional number. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, ultra-high accuracy, high accuracy, normal, low accuracy, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability of adding the number of games of the AT is set to the normal probability or the high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of games played by the AT is added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
Not limited to this, the lottery table A may have the expected value of the additional number set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Further, by combining both, the lottery table A has a high additional winning probability and the expected value of the additional number is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low additional winning probability and the expected value of the additional number. It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 13C, first, in step S511, a lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a prescribed number ("1000"). When it is determined that the additional counter value is not equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and when it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this processing, when the added number is less than "1000", the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the added number is "1000" or more, the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the easiness of addition is changed with the addition number “1000” as a threshold.
The processing after step S422 is the same processing as in FIG. 44 (example) 2. FIGS. 29D and 27E show the same processing as that in FIG.

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing Example 6 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is an AT counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and adds “1” at a time during AT), and an additional counter (an initial value “100” is set and added). An increment counter that adds an additional number for each game, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter that is set to an initial value “1500” and is decremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).

The example 6 of FIG. 48 and the example 5 of FIG. 47 are different in the following points.
Since the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value “0”, as in FIG. 45 (Example 3), the additional number is not added to the AT counter when an additional lottery is performed.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In addition, in FIG. 48 (c), after the additional lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, the additional number is added to the additional counter value, and the process according to this flowchart ends (step S423 in FIG. 47 (Example 5)). No processing is done).
FIG. 29D shows the same processing as that in FIG. 47 (Example 5). FIG. 29E shows the same processing as that in FIG. 45 (Example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating Example 7 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter and is an additional counter (set to an initial value “100” and increments the additional number each time it is added, as in FIG. 46 (Example 4)). Counter) and an upper limit counter (an increment counter that is set to an initial value “0” and is incremented by “1” every game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also plays a role of an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of times of playing the AT).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processing as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). FIG. 47C shows the same processing as that in FIG. 48 (Example 6).
Further, in FIG. 11E, in step S521, “1” is added to the upper limit counter value. Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is “1500” or more. If it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", the process proceeds to step S446 to end the advantageous section and the AT because the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached.

  On the other hand, when “No” is determined in step S522, the process proceeds to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether or not the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds each game “1” during the advantageous section, while the additional counter is a counter that adds an additional number as an initial value “100”. When “≧ addition counter value”, it means that there is no remaining number of games of AT. When "Yes" is determined in step S523, the process proceeds to step S483, and when "No" is determined, the processing according to this flowchart ends because the AT is continued in the next game.

In step S483, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been executed one or more times. If the instruction function operation game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S446 to end the advantageous section and the AT. On the other hand, if “No” is determined in the step S483, the AT is continued in the next game, so that the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The processing of steps S446, S447, and S471 is the same processing as in FIG. 47 (Example 3). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating Example 8 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 in FIG. 50, the counter includes an AT counter, an additional counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 44 (Example 2). The specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In the example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery in step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and the condition device group set processing is performed. The other processing of (a) is the same processing as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
FIG. 47B shows the same processing as that in FIG. 44 (Example 2).

FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the condition device group setting process in step S531.
First, in step S541, “0” is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number assigned to each of the plurality of condition devices to be subjected to an additional lottery among a plurality of condition devices to be drawn in the internal lottery, and assigned to each group.

In this example, two “0” and “1” are illustrated as the condition device group numbers. Further, a lottery table for additional lottery is provided for each condition device group number.
Further, the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “0” is referred to as a lottery table A, and the lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number “1” is referred to as a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the additional number is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the added number when the small part E1 is independently elected is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the added number when the small part D is elected is set to “x2”. It is assumed that it is. Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the expected value of the additional number is higher at the time of winning the small part E1 than at the time of winning the small part D).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small combination D is won, the lottery table B is set because the condition device group number is “1”. On the other hand, when the small win E1 is won, the lottery table A is set because the condition device group number is “0”.
Then, the expected value of the added number when performing the additional lottery using the lottery table A is “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when performing the additional lottery using the lottery table B is “x2”. .

The description returns to FIG.
When the condition device group number “0” is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S542, it is determined whether or not the additional counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number ("1000"). When it is determined that the number is not equal to or more than the specified number, the processing according to the present flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the additional counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number “1” is set. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally “1”, and thus remains “1”. On the other hand, when the small role E1 is won, the condition device group number “0” is set in principle, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more, the condition device group number “1” is reset. Set.

In the additional lottery shown in FIG. 14D, first, in step S551, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the condition device group number is “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the condition device group number is “1”. You. Subsequent processing in step S422 and subsequent steps are the same as those in FIG. 44 (example 2).
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are the same processes as (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (Example 2), respectively.

  In the above example, two types of condition device group numbers, “0” and “1”, are described, but three or more types may be provided. For example, the expected value of the additional number is “x1> x2> x3”, and if the additional counter value is less than “1000”, a lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used, and the additional counter value is “1000” or more and less than “1200”. For example, a lottery table of the expected value “x2” is used, and a lottery table of the expected value “x3” is used when the additional counter value is “1200” or more.

  In this manner, in FIG. 50 (Example 8), when the small win E1 is won, an additional lottery is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small win E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more. Will be added to correspond to the expected value of the small role D, and a lottery will be performed. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value of the advantageous section “1500”, the winning combination is lowered and an additional lottery is performed.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing Example 9 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 in FIG. 51, the counter includes the same AT counter, additional counter, and upper limit counter as those in FIG. 45 (Example 3). The specified number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
In FIG. 51, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 45 (Example 3), respectively. Processing.
In FIG. 51, the process (c) is the same as the process (c) in FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 51, the processing of (d) is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8) in that step S423 is not included. Other processes are the same as those in (d) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 10 of the control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 10 in FIG. 52, the counter includes an additional counter and an upper limit counter similar to those in FIG. 49 (Example 7) (there is no AT counter). Also, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (Example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes of (a), (b), (e), and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d), and (e) of FIG. 49 (Example 7), respectively. Processing.
Also, in FIG. 52, the process of (c) is the same process as (c) of FIG. 50 (Example 8).
Furthermore, in FIG. 52, the processing of (d) is the same processing as in FIG. 51 (Example 9).

Although FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) have been described above, basically, an AT counter that counts the number of AT games played, an additional counter that counts an added number of AT games played, An upper limit counter (advantageous section counter) for counting the upper limit “1500” of the section is provided.
Also, these counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter need not be provided as in FIG. 46 (Example 4) or FIG. 49 (Example 7). In this case, the number of AT games is substantially counted by another counter.
Further, in Examples 1 to 10 described above, additional lottery is performed according to the winning condition device. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

In addition, when performing an additional lottery, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), the additional number may be determined regardless of the additional number up to now.
On the other hand, when performing the additional lottery, the additional number may be determined in consideration of the additional number up to the present, as shown in FIG. 47 (Example 5) or FIG. 50 (Example 8).
"Considering the additional number" means that the larger the additional number, the smaller the additional number in the subsequent additional lottery (the smaller the expected value of the additional number). This makes it possible to moderate the rate of increase in the number of additions with the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), it is also possible to execute the addition indefinitely. If the addition is executed indefinitely, for example, the remaining number of games of the AT may become “2000”, “3000”, or the like. However, even if the number of games reaches such a value, the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section is prioritized (step S443 in FIG. 43E), and the AT ends at that time.

However, in the case where the additional number of AT games is executed indefinitely as shown in FIG. 43 (Example 1), if the additional number is reported to the player as it is, the additional number exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500” in the advantageous section is added. The number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the player can play the game exceeding the upper limit number of games “1500”.
Accordingly, the sub-control board 80 performs various controls as described below with respect to the notification of the number of AT games and the number of additions, in response to the above points.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example 1 of the control processing relating to the advantageous section and the AT on the sub-control board 80 side and the addition.
53A illustrates a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, taking FIG. 43 (Example 1) as an example, processing for receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG. 43D is executed.
In the above Examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted, but in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53A, in step S601, a process of receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, a process of receiving an additional number ((b) in the figure) is executed. In the next step S603, an advantageous section flag reception process is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, a process ((d) in the figure) of receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

When the process proceeds to step S602, the process in FIG.
First, in step S611, the received additional number is added to the additional counter. This additional counter is provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Next, the process proceeds to step S612, and it is determined whether or not the additional counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is set to “1500”. Therefore, in this example, similarly to FIG. 45 (Example 3), when the additional counter value exceeds “1500”, it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached. If it is determined in step S612 that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number ("1500"), the process proceeds to step S613. If it is determined that the added counter value is equal to or less than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, "1" is set to the additional effect suppression flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the “additional effect suppression flag” is used to output no additional effect when the additional number is already “1500”, and to output the additional effect when the additional number is “1500” or less. , A flag for making the determination.
In step S614, the added number in the game is stored (in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When the process proceeds to step S604, the process of (c) in the figure is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not the game has an additional number. This determination is made by determining whether or not the added number stored in step S614 is “0”. When it is determined that there is an additional number, the process proceeds to step S622, and when it is determined that there is no additional number, the process proceeds to step S625.
In step S622, it is determined whether or not the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. When it is determined to be “1”, the process proceeds to step S623, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect without an additional effect is selected. That is, even if the additional number has reached the prescribed number ("1500") and the additional lottery has been won in the game, the additional number cannot be increased, so that the additional effect is controlled so as not to be output. The effect selected here outputs a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, at the time of replay winning, an effect suggesting replay winning (blue or the like)). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S622 and the process proceeds to step S624, an effect with an additional effect can be selected. For example, an effect of notifying all or a part of the number of additions in the game is given. In addition, in the game in which the number of additions is determined, it is not always necessary to select an effect with an additional effect. Is also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that there is no additional number in the game and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As described above, the normal effect includes outputting the effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game, as described above. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a second example of the control processing relating to the advantageous section and the AT on the sub-control board 80 side and the addition.
In the example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving a payout suppression flag is executed. Here, the payout suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80. When the flag is "1", it means that an additional effect is suppressed, and " When it is "0", it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the payout suppression flag “1” is transmitted from the main control board 50, the command is an instruction to suppress the additional effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in FIG. 53B, the sub-control board 80 sets the additional effect suppression flag. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, whether or not the additional effect is to be suppressed is determined by the main control board 60, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as a payout suppression flag.

As a method in which the main control board 50 transmits the payout suppression flag, for example, the following method is used.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, in FIG. 44 (c), when it is determined “Yes” in step S451, the payout suppression flag provided on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44D, after step S461, a payout suppression flag is transmitted.

In Example 2 of FIG. 54, steps other than Step S631 and Step S632 are the same as in Example 1 of FIG. 53.
In step S631, the processing of FIG.
First, in step S641, when a payout suppression flag is received, it is determined whether or not its value is “1”. If it is determined to be “1”, the process proceeds to step S642, and if it is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S642, the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is set to "1", and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S643, “0” is set to the additional effect suppression flag, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the received ball output suppression flag is “1”, the additional effect suppression flag on the sub control board 80 side is set to “1”, and when the received ball output suppression flag is “0”, the additional effect suppression flag To “0”. Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54 (c), as in FIG. 53 (Example 1), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the additional counter value has exceeded the prescribed number, so the additional number is added to the additional counter in step S611, and In step S614, the added number is stored.
The effect group number receiving process in (d) in the figure is the same process as in FIG. 53 (Example 1).

  When the sub-control board 80 outputs an additional effect, for example, when the additional number determined in the game is “200”, all of the additional numbers (“200”) in the effect of the game may be notified. However, in a plurality of games (for example, continuous production) including the above-mentioned game, it is also possible to notify in small increments (divide and notify the additional number). Specifically, when the added number in the game is "200", the added number "100" is notified in the game, "50" is notified in the next game, and "50" in the next game. And the like.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of image display on the image display device 23 by the sub-control board 80 with respect to the addition during the AT, and is a diagram illustrating Examples 1 to 4.
First, in Example 1, "digestion G (meaning" the number of AT digestion games ") 1200" and "remaining G (meaning" the remaining number of AT games ") 300 are displayed on the image display device 23 before the addition. "Is displayed. Therefore, since “AT digestion game count + remaining game count = 1500”, the executable AT game count has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are added internally (for example, this means a case like step S423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the display change of the number of additions and effects related to additions are performed. Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition is the same as the display before the addition.

In addition, it goes without saying that “500” may be added to the counter (AT counter, additional counter, etc.) provided on the sub control board 80 side when adding 500 games. The number of AT games and the number of additions may be managed by a real value managed by a counter, and only the display may be performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub-control board 80 side.
Alternatively, even if 500 games are added, the counter may not be updated.
By controlling the image display as in Example 1, it is possible to suppress an effect related to unnecessary addition.

  Example 2 is a case where the AT game is 1200 games and the remaining game number is 200 games, and when 500 games are added internally, the remaining game number is a correct value (remaining game number after addition). This is an example of switching to another display without displaying the parentheses. In Example 2, the number of remaining games is displayed as “celebration” or “congratulations”. In addition, a display such as "?"

  In Example 2, when the sum of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of the AT is equal to or less than “1500”, the remaining number of games is displayed. If the number exceeds "1500", the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp it. Since the display of the remaining number of games of the AT is changed from a specific numerical value to a display other than the numerical value, the player can know that the additional game has been performed. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the remaining number of games in the AT, the player cannot grasp the remaining number of games in the AT.

In addition, before adding, in the case of AT digestion game number of "1200" and remaining game number of "200", when "500" is added, the remaining game number of AT may be set to "700" on the counter. Or "300".
If the display of the remaining number of games of the AT is "celebration" or "congratulations", and if the specification is such that the AT will continue up to the upper limit of 1500 times, "1500-AT digestion game" By calculating the “number of times”, the remaining number of games of the AT can be grasped.
In addition, the display of "celebration" or "congratulation" informs the player that the total number of games played in the AT has exceeded "1500" and indicates that no further additions will be made. Becomes

  Example 3 shows an example in which “500” is added in the case where the number of AT games is “1200” and the remaining number of games is “200”, as in Example 2. Then, in Example 3, the remaining game count of the AT (not shown in FIG. 55) is “+100” and is “300”. That is, by adding this time, the total number of games played by the AT has reached “1500”.

In Example 3, when the total number of games played by the AT becomes “1500” or more, the display of both the number of games played and the number of remaining games played by the AT is stopped and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect is to continue at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of AT digestion games reaches “1500”. When the final video of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of digestion games of the AT reaches “1500”, the final image is continuously displayed, or the process returns to the beginning of the ending effect and repeats the image. Method.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of notifying the player that no additional number of games will be added.

In Example 4, as shown in Example 2, when only the number of digested games of the AT is displayed and the remaining number of games is displayed as “celebration” or the like, as described above, the player determines the remaining number of ATs. Although the number of games cannot be grasped, for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT becomes “10”, game information indicating that the AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games, such as “the game will end with 10 more games”, is given. To display. Note that the “remaining 10 games” shown in Example 4 is an example, and the number of remaining games to start displaying the game information is arbitrary. By displaying game information indicating that the number of games played by the AT does not exceed "1500", the player can know the remaining number of games played by the AT.
Note that Example 4 can be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

In addition, in the case where an additional game exceeding 1500 games has occurred, the additional performance itself may be displayed as “congratulations” or “celebration”.
Furthermore, when an additional game exceeding 1500 games has occurred, a privilege image that can be displayed only when an extra game exceeding 1500 games has occurred may be displayed.
Further, “occurrence of additional game exceeding 1500 games” may be set as a mission in the Mythro game. For example, when "addition of more than 1500 games" is generated a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the mission has been achieved, and a certain privilege is given to the player.

As described above, even if an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game cannot be executed, but instead, a privilege (profit) for preventing a decrease in the motivation of the player is set. Preferably.
In particular, in the event of an additional game exceeding 1500 games, it is assumed that the rare role is won. However, when the rare role is won, no effect is output because the total number of games is "1500" or more. It is unnatural to not do it.
Note that the “mythro game” is, for example, as described in paragraph number “0680” of “JP-A-2006-104442”.

FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating how effects and the like change with an increase in the number of AT games in the third embodiment.
Note that in the third embodiment, since “AT = advantageous section”, the acquired number continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). Then, in the example of FIG. 56, for simplification of the graph, the AT is continued from the number of games of “0G” to “1500G”, and the number of acquired games continues to increase.
FIG. 56 (a) shows the relationship between the number of AT games and the effect.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of acquired games. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of digestion games of the AT (advantage section) becomes “1200”, as shown in Example 2 of FIG.

When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, the AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section, even if the AT has the remaining number of games at that time.
In addition, the additional effect is performed up to 1200 games, but when an additional effect is won for 500 games, no additional effect for the winning is performed. In addition, even if the player is elected for further addition thereafter, no additional production is performed.

  On the other hand, the effect regarding the AT during the AT is continued until the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Also, the display of the AT digestion game count and the remaining game count is performed up to the 1200 game, but at the time of winning the additional 500 game at the 1200th game, the display of the AT remaining game count as in Example 2 of FIG. 55, or the display of both the number of AT digestion games and the number of remaining games is stopped as in Example 3 in FIG. 55, and another display (such as “celebration” shown in Example 2 in FIG. Ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example (shown by a solid line in the figure) in which (1) an additional lottery probability is gradually lowered as the AT game count is exhausted when the AT continues "1500" games, and (2). It is a figure which shows the example (indicated by the dotted line in the figure) where the instruction frequency is gradually reduced.
In the above (1), as shown in FIG. 47C, for example, the lottery table A is used until the number of AT games is less than "1000" games, and when the number of AT games becomes "1000" or more, the lottery table B is used. Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), an additional lottery is performed in a grade corresponding to the winning combination until the number of AT games is less than “1000” games, but the number of “1000” games or more is obtained. At this time, it corresponds to an example of lowering the grade of the winning combination and performing an additional lottery.

  In the example of (1), when the number of AT games is less than “500” games, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of AT games is equal to or more than “500” and less than “1000” games, the additional lottery probability is set to the normal probability. When the game is “1000” or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability. In addition, even if the addition probability of the AT is gradually reduced with the exhaustion of the number of games, as long as the AT has the remaining number of games, the rate of increase in the number of acquired games with respect to the number of games does not change. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example of (2), the instruction frequency is controlled so as to gradually decrease in accordance with the exhaustion of the number of AT games.
Here, the “instruction frequency” refers to how often the instruction function is activated when the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell) is won during the AT (the correct answer push order is determined). Or display). For example, when the number of AT games is less than "500" games, the instruction frequency is set to 100% (instruction frequency "high"). When the number of AT games is "500" or more and less than "1000" games, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction frequency). If the frequency is "medium" and the game is "1000" or more, the instruction frequency may be set to 80% (the instruction frequency is "low").

For example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (a 90% probability of winning) is performed for the small role B group or the small role C group (push order bell) as to whether or not to activate the instruction function. When the lottery is won, the instruction function is activated.
In addition, when the instruction frequency is less than 100%, if the replay overlap winning for promoting or maintaining the RT is performed, the correct answer pressing order may be always instructed, or the same as the pressing order bell winning. The frequency may determine whether or not to instruct.

If the instruction function is not activated at the time of replay overlapping winning, the player may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), this is a case where replay 03 is displayed at the time of winning the replay C group during RT3 and falls to RT2.
Also, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed on RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the pressing order bell, the vehicle may fall to a disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually reduced as the number of AT games is exhausted, the number of cases where the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won gradually increases. And it is hard to increase. FIG. 56B (2) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, “AT = advantageous section” is set.
On the other hand, as in the above-described first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described later, there are cases where the section is an advantageous section but is a non-AT period (a sign, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc .; the same applies hereinafter). Having of course.
For example, there is a case in which an advantageous section is started, AT is started after the above-mentioned non-AT period “n” game is executed, and then AT is started.
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already consumed “n” games.
In this case, when the number of digestion games and the like are displayed as an image as shown in FIG. 55, the number of digestion games in an advantageous section including a part or all of “n” games is displayed (Example 1), and “ The “n” game is reflected in an internal counter (such as the upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 and the like), but the image is not displayed (Example 2).
In the case of Example 1, the specification is such that the number of digestion games in a part or all of the advantageous section other than the AT is displayed to the player. In the case of Example 2, the specification indicates that only the number of digestion games of the AT is displayed to the player. Become.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 1, a) the case where only the number of digested games in the advantageous section is displayed (the number of digested games in AT is not displayed) and b) both the number of digested games in the advantageous section and the number of digested games in AT are displayed Display.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), for example, when the number of games is less than “500”, the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of games is “500” or more and less than “1000”, the additional lottery is performed. The probability was set to the normal probability, and the additional lottery probability was set to the low probability when the number of games was "1000" or more.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that the AT starts after the transition to the advantageous section and the non-AT period of 600 games.
In addition, when the instruction function operation game is hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. Become. Then, when the AT is started from the 600 game, a graph (upper right corner) in which the acquired number starts to increase after the 600 game is reached.

  In the above example, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games, so the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is 900 games. Therefore, if this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, if the number of AT digestion games is less than "300", the additional lottery probability is set to a high probability, and if the number of AT digestion games is "300" or more and less than "600", the extra lottery is selected. Assuming that the probability is the normal probability, and the number of AT digestion games is “600” or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Further, similarly to the above, when the AT is started after the non-AT period of 600 games after the transition to the advantageous section, for example, in “(c) Additional lottery” in FIG. If it is greater than or equal to ("Yes" in step S451), setting the lottery table B may be mentioned.
Here, the specified number is set to “600”, as described above, when the maximum remaining number of games in the advantageous section at the start of the AT is “900” games, and “2/3” of the number of games has been consumed. Is set as a threshold.
As described above, when the advantageous section is not necessarily the AT, for example, when the AT is not started at the start of the advantageous section and the AT is started after a predetermined number of games, the expected additional value (additional lottery probability or the like) is set to the AT game. When changing based on the number of times played, it is necessary to make a setting in consideration of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 includes an external signal transmitting unit 70, and supplies an external signal to the external centralized terminal board 100 (sometimes referred to as “outer end”). Send The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized by what external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
The BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA, 1BBB, or the like in the first embodiment, and the BB game is a 1BBA game, a 1BBB game, or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example 1 (upper part) and an example 2 (lower part) of a time chart of an external signal according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing Example 3 of the time chart of the external signal.
In the examples of FIGS. 57 and 58, an external signal 1 indicating that the BB is operating (during the BB game) and an external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being performed are output as the external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal indicating that the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a signal that is turned on when either the AT or the special game is satisfied). It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT starts at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and ends at the same time as the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the AT is not necessarily started immediately even when the advantageous section is started. For example, the AT is started when the start condition of the AT is satisfied during the advantageous section. However, the point that the advantageous section ends when the AT ends is the same as in the third embodiment.

In Example 1 of FIG. 57, the AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section. When the AT is started, the external signal 2 indicating the AT signal is turned on. Then, it is assumed that the player wins the BB during the AT and starts the BB game. With the start of the BB game, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is being performed is turned on. Note that the AT is suspended based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is restarted after the BB game ends. However, the external signal 2 is kept on during the BB game.
When the BB game ends, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. With the end of the AT, the advantageous section also ends (the advantageous section display LED 77 turns off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section are completed before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games.
When the game reaches the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended even if the remaining number of games of the AT is present at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, the point that the AT is started after a predetermined number of games has elapsed after the start of the advantageous section is the same as in Example 1. Further, the point that the game is shifted to the BB game during the AT is the same as in the first example. Example 2 is an example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the BB game. Therefore, when the condition for ending the advantageous section has been reached, the BB game has not been ended yet. Then, after the ending condition of the advantageous section has elapsed, the BB game has ended.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is being performed and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is being performed are kept on until the end of the BB game. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. It should be noted that since the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, since the AT is executed in the advantageous section, the AT ends with the end of the advantageous section.
As described above, in the example 2, the AT ends when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the output of the external signal 2 from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As an example of satisfying the condition for terminating the advantageous section during the BB game as in Example 2, for example, first, the number of AT games is set in advance at the start of the AT, and the number of games is determined to be during the BB game. There is also a case where the value is subtracted even if the Second, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 game) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when the number of games played by the AT is set to "50" and the AT is started, and when the game shifts to the BB game during the AT, the counting of the number of games played by the AT is interrupted. However, the count of the upper limit "1500" game of the advantageous section is continued even during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which AT is started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, similarly to Example 1 in FIG. When the AT starts, the external signal 2 turns on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (the game does not shift to BB game).
Example 3 is an example in which the number of games is added during the AT, and the remaining number of games of the AT is reached even when the upper limit of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games. Even when the remaining number of games of the AT is reached at the time of reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, the external signal 2 is turned off when reaching the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  If the special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section and the 1500-game of the advantageous section is completed while the special section is still inside the special section, the special section is won and the transition is made during the special game. It is not possible to output an effect such as "How many times is the special game inside?" This is because the data relating to the advantageous section is reset when the 1500 game in the advantageous section is reached. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) is continuing even during the special game.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data on the advantageous section stored on the main control board 50 side is cleared, but the data on the advantageous section stored on the sub-control board 80 side (transmitted from the main control board 50). Data stored based on the incoming command) may be cleared or not cleared.
If the game is not cleared, it is possible to display a numerical value exceeding "1500" for the number of games in the advantageous section during the special game.
In the case where the special role is won just before the end of the advantageous section, if an effect such as an ending effect has been output, the ending effect may be stopped and the winning of the special role may be immediately notified.

<Fifth embodiment>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is terminated with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following examples 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section starts at the same time as the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation, it is an advantageous section.
At both the end of the 1BBA operation and the end of the 1BBB operation, the operation shifts to non-RT (this is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT keeps the advantage zone. In the non-RT mode, the replay A alone is not selected and the replay C group is selected (as in the case of the RT3 of the first embodiment). At the time of winning the replay C group, the instruction function is not operated. Therefore, the replay 01 or the replay 03 wins by the operation (luck) of the stop switch 42 by the player. When the replay 01 wins, the process proceeds to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when the replay 03 wins, the process proceeds to RT2.

Note that when the player wins the replay C group in the non-RT, the instruction function does not always have to be activated, and the instruction function may always be activated (the pressing order for winning the replay 01 is displayed). Alternatively, whether or not to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the replay C group may be determined by lottery.
Alternatively, when shifting to non-RT based on the end of 1BBA operation, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay C group, and when shifting to non-RT based on the end of 1BBB operation, the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the replay C group. May not be operated, and so on.

RT5 is a finite RT and continues 50 games. When 50 games are consumed at RT5, the process shifts to RT2.
Then, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is an advantageous section and AT is executed. On the other hand, when a transition is made from non-RT or RT5 to RT2, a normal section (non-AT) is set.
For this reason, when the replay 01 wins in the non-RT (advantage section and non-AT), the game shifts from the next game to RT5 and executes the advantageous section and AT (50 games). Then, when the 50 games have been consumed, the process shifts to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
On the other hand, when the replay 03 wins in the non-RT (advantage section and non-AT), the process shifts from the next game to RT2 (normal section and non-AT).
Then, in RT2, the lottery of the advantageous section and the AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the above-mentioned RT shift and AT. (A) has shown the example which shifted to AT. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which the player wins 1BB at RT2 and shifts to 1BB game without going through RT4 (inside). When the game shifts from RT2 to 1BB game, an advantageous section starts. When the 1BB game is over, the routine shifts to non-RT. When the replay 01 wins in this non-RT, the routine shifts to RT5. At RT5, an AT of 50 games is executed. When the AT of 50 games is completed, the advantageous section and the AT are completed, and the process proceeds to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 3B, the 1BB game is completed and the game shifts to the non-RT, and the replay 03 wins the non-RT. In this case, the process does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2, and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the start and end of the advantageous section and the AT are determined by RT (lottery state) or a control state controlled and managed by the main control board 50 (regardless of whether the RTs are different or the same). In the example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the advantageous section and the AT are started by the RT transition, and the advantageous section and the AT are ended by the RT transition.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and AT are started by the transition of the control state, and the advantageous section and AT are ended by the transition of the control state.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes control states of State 1 to State 3. In this example, state 1 and state 2 are advantageous sections, and state 3 is a normal section.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly states when the two-way movement is performed between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a precursor or a retraction period after the end of AT, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery of the advantageous section is executed. The lottery of the advantageous section is, for example, the same as that shown in the first embodiment. Then, in the state 3, a win is made to the advantageous section, and when the state shifts to the advantageous section, the state shifts to the precursor of the state 2. Therefore, when a transition is made to the precursor, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period before the start of the AT. For example, the number of games of the precursor is determined at the time of transition from the state 3 to the state 2, and the precursor of the state 2 stays until the number of games is consumed. I do. The indication function does not operate during the warning. Then, when the number of games in the state 2 (the precursor) is exhausted, the state is shifted from the next game to the AT in the state 1. During state 1 (AT), the indicating function operates.

The state 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied. The number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed, for example, “50”, or may be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the termination condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the state shifts to the state 2 withdrawal period of the AT. In this retraction period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, “20” games).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied during the state 2 period (withdrawal period) (for example, when the rare role is won, or when the AT lottery executed when the rare role is won, for example), the state 1 ( AT). On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the withdrawal period of state 2, the state shifts to state 3 of normal. Then, the advantageous section ends at the same time as the transition to the state 3, and the transition to the normal section is made.
As described above, the normal state, which is the state 3, is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous sections. When the state transitions to the advantageous section, depending on whether the transition condition is satisfied, Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT retraction period).

  In the example of FIG. 61A, it is also possible to set an upper limit for the number of times of AT transition. For example, when the upper limit number of ATs is set to "5", after the end of the fifth AT, the state is shifted from the state 1 to the state 3 without shifting to the AT withdrawal period (state 2). Then, it is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61B has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
Usually, it is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during normal times, a shift lottery to the advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment and the like, and when an advantageous section is won, the game is shifted to the advantageous section from the next game and a precursor is started. The precursor is a maximum of 32 games (the number of games of the precursor is determined by lottery). Then, after the game number of the precursor has been consumed, the process shifts to CZ. The CZ is executed until the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied or the termination condition for the CZ is satisfied. When the condition for shifting to AT is satisfied during CZ, the process shifts to AT. When the condition for terminating the CZ is satisfied before the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the process shifts to normal.

Specifically, as conditions for shifting to the AT during the CZ, for example, (a) when the transfer lottery according to the winning combination is won, (b) when the transfer lottery performed for each game regardless of the winning combination, (C) when a predetermined specific role is won, (d) when the predetermined number of times of winning of the specific role exceeds a predetermined number, (e) when a transition is made to a specific RT, (f) a predetermined RT Various transition conditions according to the game characteristics, such as when a special role is won, can be determined.
Similarly, the conditions for ending the CZ are (a) when the condition for shifting to the AT is not satisfied during the CZ, (b) when a specific falling role is won, (c) for each game regardless of the winning role. Various end conditions according to the game characteristics can be determined, for example, when the player wins a falling lottery to be performed.
Further, the condition for shifting to the AT in the CZ and the condition for terminating the CZ may be set as conditions opposite to each other.

  AT is executed in the same manner as in (a). When the termination condition of the AT is satisfied, the process shifts to CZ. The CZ after the end of the AT is positioned in the retraction period of the above (a). If the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, the transition to the AT can be made. However, if the condition for ending the CZ is satisfied without satisfying the condition for the transition to the AT, the transition is made to normal. At the same time as the transition to the normal mode, the advantageous section is terminated, and the procedure shifts to the normal section.

The instruction function operation game is executed during the AT in principle. However, during the state 2 in FIG. 61 (a), or during the CZ or the precursor in FIG. 61 (b), it is also an advantageous section. It is possible to execute an operation game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute the instruction function operation game at least once after shifting to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. The game won as the role B group may be an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), among the 32 games of the precursor, the game first won as the small win B group is set as the instruction function operation game.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having a normal, precursor, CZ, and AT control state similarly to FIG. 61 (b). However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which it was not possible to shift to AT is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the state shifts from the normal state to the precursor state, the state shifts to the CZ after a predetermined number of games (maximum 32 games). If the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the process shifts to the AT as shown in (b). However, when the condition for ending the CZ is satisfied before the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games) ) Digestion) moves to the withdrawal period. In the pullback period, the transfer lottery to the CZ is performed again, and when the condition for the transfer to the CZ is satisfied before the condition for the transfer to the normal (for example, the predetermined number of games (32 games) is completed), the process shifts to the CZ ( In the figure, (c) shows an example in which the process has shifted to CZ again (successful retraction).

  Then, during the CZ, as described above, the transfer lottery to the AT is performed, but if the end condition of the CZ is satisfied before the condition for the transfer to the AT is satisfied, the process returns to the pullback period again. In the example of (c) in the figure, in the second withdrawal period, before the condition for shifting to CZ is satisfied, the end condition of CZ (for example, the digestion of the predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (withdrawal failure), This is an example of a transition to normal.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section are controlled in accordance with the transition to the RT, and the AT or the like can be executed freely during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, a plurality of control states not related to RT are provided, and a control state corresponding to normal is set as a normal section. During this normal time, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is performed. The state is shifted to one of the control states corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, the predetermined number of games is exhausted), and the control is shifted to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section, or the advantageous section is terminated. A transition is made to a control state corresponding to a normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when executing AT, if AT is executed at RT having a high replay probability, ART can be executed. Therefore, for example, when realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated at the time of the replay B group winning in the RT2, and the replay 02 is activated. Displaying the pressing order to be displayed, and shifting to RT3.

As described above, by arbitrarily determining the end condition of the advantageous section, a plurality of control states (a precursor, CZ, AT) can be freely designed. Further, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, and it is also possible to combine all of them. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of ending conditions in one advantageous section, so that a wider range of playability can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60A shows that the advantageous section ends when the number of RT5 games executed during the advantageous section reaches 50 games.
The example in FIG. 60B shows that the advantageous section is ended by the transition from the non-RT to the RT2 due to the display of the replay 03 during the non-RT. In other words, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “extending 50 games at RT5” and “transition from non-RT to RT2” are set as the end conditions of the advantageous section. In other words, the non-RT is positioned like a CZ that is promoted to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). In a broad concept, the specification is such that an advantageous section is terminated when a specific RT shift is triggered.

Further, in the example of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the normal section are shifted according to the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61A, the state 1 and the state 2 (a precursor or AT withdrawal period) are advantageous sections, and the state 3 is set to a normal section. The transition from the state 3 to the state 1 or the state 2 starts the advantageous section, and the transition from the state 1 or the state 2 to the state 3 ends the advantageous section.
Similarly, in the examples of FIGS. 61 (b) and (c), the normal state of the control state is a normal section, and the precursor, CZ, and AT of the control state are advantageous sections. Then, the transition from normal to the precursor, CZ, or AT starts the advantageous section, and the transition from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal ends the advantageous section.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, the normal state is the normal section, but if the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section will be executed. However, AT is not performed on the precursor or CZ even in the advantageous section, and the AT transition condition must be satisfied by the precursor or CZ in order to execute the AT. On the other hand, even if the vehicle falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or falls from CZ during the withdrawal period (a precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples can be given.
(1) An example in which a first finite RT (20 games) and a second finite RT (60 games) are provided, and the end condition of the advantageous section is set to use the first finite RT or the second finite RT. For example, by setting the end condition of the non-RT in the advantageous section, the transition to the first finite RT of the 20 games and the transition to the second finite RT of the 60 games are provided, so that the profit for the player is provided. Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn at a non-RT in an advantageous section, and a symbol combination that shifts to the first finite RT or a symbol combination that shifts to the second finite RT is displayed according to a pressing order at the time of the specific replay winning. Let it. Then, at the time of the specific replay winning, by shifting to the first finite RT of 20 games or the second finite RT of 60 games in accordance with the pressing order operated by the player, about 3 It is possible to provide a gaming ability capable of generating a double profit difference.

Further, at the time of the specific replay winning during non-RT, the pressing order may be notified to the player by the main control board 50. In this case, a specification for determining which of the first finite RT and the second finite RT should be notified of the pressing order in consideration of the winning combination and the game situation before the specific replay winning during non-RT is considered. Can be At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may be either one having a setting difference or one having no setting difference.
Further, the termination condition of the advantageous section may be set to only the digestion of the first finite RT, and may be set so as not to end the advantageous section in the digestion of the second finite RT. Thereby, when the transition from the non-RT to the second finite RT of the 60 games is performed, the advantageous section is not ended even after the 60 games are consumed, and the transition to the non-RT is performed again. It is conceivable to have a game that loops the game.

  In this case, when shifting from non-RT to the first finite RT, the advantageous section ends when the finite RT of 20 games is consumed, but when shifting from non-RT to the second finite RT, the finite RT of 60 games is After digesting the RT, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to shift from the non-RT to the second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add an advantageous section by winning a role having a setting difference during the advantageous section. However, in the case of such a game, it is assumed that there is a setting difference in a specific replay. However, there is no problem because it has only a role as a transition role to a finite RT having different numbers of games. In this way, by devising the conditions for ending the advantageous section, the winning combination having a setting difference can be added to the substantial 20 games or 60 games (transition of the 20 games to the first limited RT or the second game of the 60 games). (Transition to finite RT) can be realized.

(2) Example in which the end condition of the advantageous section is set to the end of CZ or the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game By setting such an end condition of the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section The CZ of a maximum of 32 games is executed, and the condition for clearing the CZ is determined as the special role winning. Then, if 32 games are consumed without winning a special combination during the CZ, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the special role is won during the CZ, after the special game is completed, the game is shifted to the non-RT. In the non-RT, the specific replay is randomly selected as in the example of the above (1), and the push at the time of the specific replay winning is performed. In accordance with the order, a symbol combination that shifts to RT1 or a symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed.

  Then, "the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game" is set as the end condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the process shifts to RT1 in the pressing order at the time of winning the specific replay, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, when the non-RT shifts to RT2 after the end of the special game, AT is started. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, it is possible to notify the pressing order to shift to RT2 when the specific replay having no setting difference is won. This means that the special role won during the CZ is not limited to a special role having no setting difference, but may be a special role having a setting difference. A game that can be given an AT substantially by winning the special role regardless of the setting difference during the CZ during the advantageous section (specification won during non-RT after the end of the special game) In the replay, it is possible to realize the pressing order in which the symbol combination that shifts to RT2 is displayed).

Further, in the above examples (1) and (2), RT is used as the control state, but various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), two types of finite RTs (first finite RT and second finite RT) having different numbers of games and a non-RT are employed, but these are referred to as a gaming state 1, a gaming state 2, and a gaming state. State 3 may be replaced. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during an advantageous section and is the above-mentioned CZ, AT, or the like, but does not change the replay winning probability unlike RT.
By this replacement, the gaming state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, the gaming state 2 of 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and the gaming state 3 of the 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section can be achieved. . Further, since the transition conditions are not limited as in the case of the RT (for example, a specific symbol combination is displayed, a special role is won, a special role is won, the special game is completed, the number of games is consumed, etc.), various conditions can be freely set. Can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, in the gaming state 1 in the advantageous section, conditions such as "to win a bell five times within 20 games", "to win a bell three consecutive games" and the like. Can be designed so as to shift to the gaming state 2 when the above is achieved.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, during the advantageous section and the AT, when approaching the upper limit 1500 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends before reaching the upper limit 1500 games, and the comparative advantage after the end of the advantageous section. By providing a situation in which the section and the AT can be easily won, it is possible to repeatedly execute the advantageous section where the upper limit number of games is not reached and the AT. As a result, it is possible to create an advantageous section that executes up to the upper limit of 1500 games and a state that is more advantageous than AT.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the transition to RT in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the sixth embodiment has an RT6. RT6 is a finite RT, and ends when 50 games are consumed.
RT6 can be shifted only from RT3. Further, after the end of RT6, the process shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except the inside (RT4), the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. In addition, the lottery for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed irrespective of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being linked to the winning of the condition apparatus having no setting difference. The winning probability is "1/32" for all RTs.

  After the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation are completed, the user has the right to execute the AT. After the operation of 1BBA is completed, the operation shifts to non-RT. After the operation of 1BBB is completed, the operation shifts to RT1. When a pattern symbol is displayed on the non-RT or RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. After that, RT2 and RT3 are switched back and forth (in this case, it is assumed that a rare case of accidentally shifting from RT3 to RT6 is not considered).

  In the above, in the non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3, the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is executed with the winning probability of “1/32”. Therefore, when the player wins the transfer lottery to the advantageous section, 1BBA operation or 1BBB is performed. In a situation where the user has the right to execute the AT based on the operation, the advantageous section and the AT are started. Note that the AT can be executed on the condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to activate the instruction function). Even if the AT shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB, it is advantageous. Before winning the section, the AT does not start even if it has the right of the AT.

  When the advantageous section and the AT are started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the small role B group until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is for displaying the pattern design and shifting to RT2 as soon as possible. The instruction function is activated when the small role group C wins. After shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, the instruction function is activated in both the small win B group and small win C group wins. Further, at the time of winning the replay B group in RT2, the instruction function is operated so as to shift to RT3. Thus, the AT is executed until the end condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, at RT3, a replay D group is randomly selected instead of the replay C group. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the type of the replay D group randomly selected in RT3, the winning combination, and the pressing order and the display combination, and corresponds to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The replay D group includes replays D1 to D3, and replays D1 to D3 include replay 01, replay 03, and replay 06, respectively.
When one of the replay D groups is elected, replay 01 wins in one pressing order, replay 03 wins in another pressing order, and replay 06 wins in another pressing order. Is set to win.

Here, RT3 is maintained when replay 01 is displayed at RT3, and falls to RT2 when replay 02 is displayed, as in the replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when the replay 06 wins at RT3, the process proceeds to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the lottery of the replay 06 is not performed during the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, the replay 06 is included only in the replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, if the player stays at RT3, is an advantageous section and is AT, and if the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, and wins the replay D group, the player wins replay 01. The pressing order to be maintained, that is, the pressing order for maintaining RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when the user stays at RT3, is an advantageous section and is AT, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more, ie, when the remaining advantageous section becomes “100” or less. In the subsequent games that have won the replay D group, the order in which the replay 06 is won is displayed by operating the instruction function.

As a result, in this game, Replay 06 wins, so that the next game shifts to RT6. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set in the advantageous section and the end condition of the AT. Therefore, the transition to RT6 ends the advantageous section and the AT.
As described above, since the replay D group is an overlap winning of the replay that has a possibility of shifting the RT, it is desirable that there is no setting difference (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the replay D group). It does not prevent you from doing so).

RT6 is a finite RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games are consumed in RT6, it is determined that the termination condition of RT6 is satisfied, and the process shifts to non-RT.
Further, as described above, at RT6, as in other RTs, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of “1/32”. Then, when an advantageous section is won at RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. That is, when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more in RT3 and the process shifts to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT are finished, and “winning the lottery in the advantageous section in RT6” is executed (restarted) of the AT. ) Condition is set.
In RT6, the winning probability of the advantageous section is “1/32” and the number of games is “50”. Therefore, the probability of winning the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won at RT6, the next game will be an advantageous section and the AT execution condition will be satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started during the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, that is, while staying at RT6. Alternatively, the AT may be started from the non-RT when shifting to the non-RT, or the AT may be started after shifting from the non-RT to RT2. Here, for simplicity of explanation, it is assumed that AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, when the advantageous section and the AT are simultaneously started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, the continuation of the AT is provided up to the limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Can be. Even in a control state such as a precursor or CZ performed during an advantageous section, the counting of 1500 games in the advantageous section is performed, so that the AT is compared with the gaming ability in which the AT is performed through such a control state. It can be executed for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, the process moves to non-RT. The non-RT continues until the pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. If the lottery in the advantageous section is won at RT6, the instruction to activate the instruction function and shift to RT3 at the time of the replay B group winning is displayed at RT2.

When the player wins the AT at RT6, the process proceeds to RT3 and the AT is executed while maintaining the RT3. The AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the AT ends the predetermined number of games, the AT ends and the advantageous section ends, and the next game shifts to the normal section.
Note that an initial value of the number of games played by the AT is determined at the time of winning the AT, and the number of games added by the above-described addition during the execution of the AT. Then, during the execution of the AT, if it becomes 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, the process shifts to RT6 as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of “1/32” also at RT2 and RT3. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with a probability of “1/32” even when staying at any RT except the RT4, and when the lottery of the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game. Move to

In RT2 and RT3, if only the transition to the advantageous section is made, the instruction function is activated when the first small win B group wins. This satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section of "at least one execution of the instruction function operation game", so that the advantageous section is terminated in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 or RT3 (normal section) that does not pass through the 1BBA game or 1BBB game, an advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of “1/32”, and when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game. When the instruction function operation game (one small role B group winning) is executed once in the section, the transition from the next game to the normal section is repeated.
The invention is not limited to this, and when the game shifts to the advantageous section, the game may continue for a predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games), and may shift to the normal section after the predetermined number of games has been consumed. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in a predetermined number of games.

In addition, in the case of RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal), an AT lottery is executed separately. When the player wins the AT lottery, he has the right to execute the AT. For example, when the small role E1 shown in the first embodiment is won, the user has the right to execute the AT. Alternatively, when the small role E1 is won, it may be determined by a lottery whether or not to grant the right to execute the AT, and when the lottery is won, the right to execute the AT may be granted.
The number of games played by the AT is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, as shown in the third embodiment, an additional lottery is performed to add the number of games played.

Further, if the game that has won the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. Note that the AT may be started from the next game of the game that has won the AT, or as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started via the precursor or the CZ. After the AT is started, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 in the same manner as described above (ART). If the AT is continuing even after the transition to the advantageous section and the game becomes 1400 or more, the transition to RT6 is made in the same manner as described above.
On the other hand, if the game that has won the AT is a normal section, the player has the right to execute the AT and waits to win the advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section is won, the AT is executed thereafter.

In addition, when performing the AT lottery as described above while staying at RT2 or RT3, it is possible to set the start condition of AT by passing through RT6.
Therefore, the RT2 or RT3 grants “the right to execute AT” based on the winning of the small role E1 or the like. If this right is won, if it is not an advantageous section, wait for the winning of the advantageous section. If it is an advantageous section or if it is an advantageous section, activate the indicating function, and if it is RT2, replay B group The pressing order to shift to RT3 at the time of winning is displayed. Further, when it is RT3, the pressing order for shifting to RT6 when the replay D group is won is displayed. When the process proceeds to RT6, the advantageous section ends as described above. Then, when an advantageous section is won between the 50 games of RT6, the start condition of the AT is satisfied. The flow after the AT start condition is satisfied at RT6 is the same as described above.

  The lottery of the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and the specific section having the winning probability of “1/32” may be selected at all RTs, and the advantageous section may be started based on the winning of the specific section. . Note that the specific combination in this case is a combination having no setting difference as described in the first embodiment.

The sixth embodiment described above has the following features (including effects) when rearranged.
(1) Before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game), the advantageous section is intentionally ended and the state is shifted to the re-lottery state of the advantageous section, so that the 1500 game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is effectively achieved. It is possible to execute an advantageous section beyond that. For example, a game such as “advantageous section (1200 game) → non-advantaged section (50 game) → advantaged section (1200 game)” is possible.
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the condition for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the time of transition from RT3 to RT6, but during the 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is reduced. High advantageous conditions can be maintained.
(2) In addition, at normal times, a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32" for each game. In particular, as an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, an opportunity to make a transition having no setting difference is required. However, in both RT6 and normal times, the lottery to the advantageous section is always performed with a winning probability of “1/32”. , It can be realized.

Furthermore, depending on the design, as in the third embodiment, “start of AT = start of advantageous section” can be set, so that 1500 games, which is the maximum number of games in the advantageous section, are fully used, for example, 1500 games. AT can be realized (except when the AT is started when the special role is won).
(3) When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT by referring to the RT being executed. The transfer lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of each game "1/32". When winning this transfer lottery, refer to the RT (RT6 or not) staying at the time of the win. Thus, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute AT when shifting to the advantageous section.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500” as a result of adding the number of games during the AT, the advantage is provided to the player. It is characterized in that the greater the number of times of additions in which the number of games exceeds "1500" is performed, the more the advantage is brought to the player.

In the seventh embodiment, an “exceeding 1500 counter” is provided which counts the number of times that the total number of games in the AT exceeds “1500” due to the addition during the AT. At the start of the advantageous section and the AT, the counter value exceeding 1500 is “0”.
Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (Example 2) of the third embodiment, when the additional lottery is performed and the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the determined additional number is added. It shall be cleared without adding.

  Therefore, when the total number of games played by the AT is equal to or less than "1500", the counter exceeding 1500 remains "0". Here, for example, if it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the additional number exceeds the specified number, the "counter exceeding 1500" changes from "0" to "1". Similarly, if it is further determined in step S451 in FIG. 44B that the additional number exceeds the specified number, the "counter exceeding 1500" is changed from "1" to "2". In this way, every time an additional game is performed in which the total number of games of the AT exceeds “1500”, the counter exceeding 1500 is incremented.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after starting the advantageous section and the AT, the game at the time of winning the first small win B group activates the instruction function. Thereafter, when the counter exceeding 1500 is "0", that is, when the total number of games of the AT does not exceed "1500" by the additional lottery, whether or not to activate the instruction function at the time of winning the small part B group. Whether or not is determined by lottery.
Here, the ratio at which the instruction function is activated when the small win B group is won is referred to as an “instruction function activation rate”.

  The instruction function activation rate when the value of the counter exceeding 1500 is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and during the AT, at the time of winning the small part B group, for example, a lottery for determining whether to activate the instruction function (a lottery to win at 95%) is performed. As a result, the indicating function operates with a probability of 95%, and the indicating function does not operate with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is activated is 100% and the winning rate of the small role B group when the instruction function is not activated is "1/3", the instruction function activation rate is 95%. , The winning rate of the small role B group is about 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that as a result of the addition during the AT, the total number of AT games has exceeded “1500”. Then, it is assumed that the counter exceeding 1500 has become “1”. Here, the instruction function operation rate when the value of the counter exceeding 1500 is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 97.5%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 2.5%.

Thereafter, as a result of further addition, when the total number of AT games once again exceeds “1500”, the counter exceeding 1500 becomes “2”. In this case, the instruction function operation rate is set to “98.75%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small role B group is won, the instruction function is activated with a probability of 98.75%, and the instruction function is not activated with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, the instruction function activation rate = “95”, “97.5”, “98.75” for the counter value exceeding 1500 = “0”, “1”, “2”,. , ...

  With the above setting, the more the number of AT games exceeds "1500", that is, the more the counter value exceeds 1500, the larger the instruction function activation rate approaches 100%. Here, even if the total number of games of the AT exceeds "1500", the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually "1500". It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when an additional game is performed in which the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the game is more advantageous to the player than before the additional game is performed (the expected number of acquired cards). Value is increased).

<Eighth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment, the winning of a BB having no setting difference in the winning probabilities (in the first embodiment, for example, a single winning of 1BBA, an overlapping winning of 1BBA and small role D, an overlapping of 1BBA and small role E1) When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning, the advantageous section is started thereafter. Also, there is a case where the AT is started after the BB game ends.
Further, examples of the end of the advantageous section include the following Examples 1 to 5.
(1) Example in which the advantageous section ends before 1BB game ends (Example 1)
(2) Example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (Example 2)
(3) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT starts after the 1BB game ends, and the advantageous section ends at the end of the AT (Example 3).
(4) When the 1BB game ends, the advantageous section does not end, and after the predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) has elapsed from the end of the 1BB game, the advantageous section ends (Example 4).
(5) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, the AT is started after a lapse of a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) from the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section ends at the end of the AT (Example 5).
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined which of Examples 1 to 5 to end the advantageous section. Of course, it is not necessary to determine from among the five examples 1 to 5; for example, it may be determined from the three examples 1 to 3, or from the two examples 2 and 3. May be.

FIGS. 64 to 66 are time charts showing Examples 1 to 5 described above.
Example 1 in FIG. 64 is an example in which after winning 1BBA, the advantageous section starts from the start of the 1BBA game (at the time of 1BBA operation). The start timing of this advantageous section is at the start of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, from the start of the next game of the game that has won 1BBA, to the start of the next game of the game that has won 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing as long as it is before the start of the first game of the 1BBA game). Further, as described in the first embodiment, when starting the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
In addition, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game, but the AT is not started because the 1BBA is operating (in the first example, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

In Example 1, the advantageous section ends before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, at the end of the last game of the last game of the 1BBA game, or at the start of the last game of the 1BBA game.
Further, in Example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. As in the first embodiment, the continuous production is a series of productions over a plurality of games (a production that gives an expectation of whether or not the AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game). At the end of the continuous production, After the end of the 1BBA game, an effect is output to notify the player whether to start the AT. The advantageous section ends when the continuous effect ends.

Therefore, in Example 1, during the last game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous effect is terminated (finally, the fact that AT is not started), and at the end of the game in which the continuous effect is ended, or When the effect ends, the advantageous section ends. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it is determined to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, a rare role (for example, small role D) is won during the 1BBA game, When the condition for extending the advantageous section (also referred to as a condition for changing the advantageous section; the same applies hereinafter) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not terminated before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 1 to Example 3.

  Example 2 in FIG. 64 is an example in which the end time of the 1BBA game and the end time of the advantageous section are matched. In Example 2, similar to Example 1, a continuous effect is started in the middle of the 1BBA game, and at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), the 1BBA game is performed. Is notified whether or not the AT game is started after the end of the game. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of the 1BBA game, the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous production, it is notified that AT is not started.

If the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game) as in Examples 1 and 2, the advantageous section ends even if the instruction function operation game is not performed once. It is possible. This is because many medals have already been acquired during the special game (1BBA game), and there is no need to extend the end of the advantageous section just to perform the instruction function operation game once. Rather, prolonging may increase player dissatisfaction.
Also, as in Example 1, when the 1BBA game is started, the advantageous section is extended at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section extension condition is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when the rare role is won), the advantageous section may not be ended at the end of the 1BBA game, and may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the end of the advantageous section may be changed from Example 2 to Example 3.

In Example 3 in FIG. 65, similar to Example 2, a continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example in which the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the game of the last game of the 1BBA game (the last stop switch 42 may be operated, etc.), it is notified that the AT is started after the end of the 1BBA game. Then, the AT is started from the next game of the last game of the 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start the AT immediately after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the next game of the game that has won one of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT.
Note that the AT ends when an AT ending condition such as a predetermined number of games has been exhausted, and the advantageous section ends at the same time when the AT ends. However, even after the AT is completed, the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

  At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not known whether the above is Example 1, Example 2, or Example 3; however, at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated, so that it is possible to shift to the advantageous section. When it is determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (determined to shift to the advantageous section) at the start of the 1BBA game, or is not lit (the advantageous section), as in the case of always being made as in Example 3. It is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous game performance that excites the expectation only by the fact that the game does not shift to the above, and to excite the player's expectation during the 1BBA game.

  In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the advantageous section is continued after the end of the 1BBA game, and the continuous effect is started after the end of the 1BBA game, and in the continuous effect, whether or not the AT is to be started (whether the advantageous section is continued) This is an example of notifying whether or not to do so. After the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and Example 4 shows an example in which five consecutive effects are played. Of course, the continuous production may be any game. Then, it is notified whether or not to start the AT in the last game of the continuous production. Example 4 shows an example in which the AT is not started. Then, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous effect. Of course, the continuous effect may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from the next and subsequent games and the like.

Thus, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed for 5 games during the normal game (game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”.
Here, based on the winning of the BB, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game (of course, not necessarily at the same time), the BB game ends. Later, when ending the advantageous section in several games, control may be performed as follows.

(1) If the small role B group is never won during the five games, the advantageous section is terminated without executing the instruction function operation game.
(2) When the small win B group is won during the five games, the instruction function operation game is executed in that game.
(3) Even if the small win B group is won during the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If the player does not win the small role B group in any of the five games, the advantageous section is extended until the small role B group is first won, and the instruction is given when the small role B group is first won. The function operation game is executed, and the advantageous section ends in the game.
Any of the above controls may be used.
As described above, the control of (1) to (3) may seem unfavorable because it is necessary to “execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section”. As described above, when the BB game is performed during the advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section is performed only for performing the instruction function operation game once. This is because there is no need to extend it. Rather, prolonging may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, the case where an instruction is given (executing the instruction function operation game) during five games is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

In Example 5 of FIG. 66, similarly to Example 4, the advantageous section is continued after the end of the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, a continuous effect is started, and whether or not the AT is started in the continuous effect is determined. This is an example of notifying. And in Example 5, it is notified that AT is started in the last game of the continuous production. Then, the AT is started from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, the AT does not have to be started from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the game that has shifted to RT3, the next game of the game that has shifted to RT3, or the next game of the game that has been won in any of the replay B groups. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT.
At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not known whether the above is Example 4 or Example 5. However, at the start of the 1BBA game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Therefore, during the 1BBA game and after the 1BB game ends. It is possible to fuel the player's expectation.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not the AT is executed (Examples 1 to 5) and the initial number of games of the AT are before the start of the 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of the 1BBA game. At times, it may be determined by lottery or the like, or it may be determined whether or not to execute the AT based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. For example, when 1BBA is won, it is determined to be Example 1, Example 2, or Example 4, and it is determined whether or not to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the condition device won during the 1BBA game. . Further, for example, when "1BBA + Small win E1" in the first embodiment is won, the AT may be determined (Example 3 or Example 5).
Furthermore, whether or not to execute the AT and the initial number of games of the AT may be determined based on the conditions satisfied during the 1BBA game. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), during the 1BBA game or during the AT, the number of AT games may be added based on the winning of the condition apparatus.
Further, at the start of the 1BBA game, it is determined as in Example 4, but during the 1BBA game, or after the end of the 1BBA game, during the continuous production period of 5 games, when the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, (When the rare role is won) may be changed to Example 5 (executing AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game is determined depending on whether or not the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When determining whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as in Example 2 of FIG. Then, when it is determined to execute the AT during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the AT is executed after the 1BBA game is completed and the advantageous section is continued.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the ninth embodiment, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination (for example, 1BBA), when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section) is determined. Yes, particularly, the advantageous section is started from a game in which the winning special role can be won.
In the ninth embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the condition apparatus including the special combination (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the condition device including the special combination is won and the shift to the advantageous section is made, the betting state and the payment possible state in the next game of the winning game are determined. By this time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, or until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination stops (or the bet can be made in the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the state and the state in which the settlement can be performed).

The advantageous section is started at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated) or the first game of the special game (for example, the 1BBA game) which has been won as the condition device including the special combination (at the start of the first game). (When the start switch 41 is operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination, there is a range in the start timing.
The ninth embodiment is characterized in that when a condition device including a special combination is won, and when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from a game in which the special combination can be won. I do.

Therefore, for example, in the first embodiment, for example, when 1 BBA is independently won, 1 BBA can be won in the game, and the advantageous section starts from the game.
On the other hand, when the player wins “1BBA + Small win E1”, the winning of the small win E1 is prioritized in the game and the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BBA cannot be stopped, so that the advantageous section starts in the game. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game that has been won as “1BBA + Small win E1”, the winning of the small win E1 has priority over 1BBA, and the small win E1 is “PB = 1”. 1BBA will not win. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when "1BBA + Small win D" is won, priority is given to winning of the small win D in the game, but the small win 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small win D is "PB @ 1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the symbol (“watermelon”) relating to the small role 35 cannot be stopped and the timing at which the symbol (“red 7”) relating to 1BBA can be stopped, 1 BBA is performed in the game. Winning is possible. For example, in FIG. 5, this is a case where the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle first stop is set and the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position where both the 1BBA and the small combination 35 can be stopped, giving priority to stopping the design related to the small combination 35. For example, this is a case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the first stop on the right can be made to stop both the second “Red 7” and the fifth “watermelon” on the active line.
On the other hand, at the first left stop, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the seventh “red 7” can be stopped at the active line, the fourth or ninth “watermelon” is stopped at the active line. Is given priority, so that the number 7 “red 7” does not stop at the active line.
For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above timing, the stop control that does not stop the seventh "red 7" on the effective line is executed. Thereby, the game at the time of winning “1BBA + Small Winner D” in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to “game that can win 1BBA”. Of course, if the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the middle “first stop” can be performed and the third “red 7” can be stopped on the active line, 1 BBA can be won in the game. May be a winning game ".

  In the case where the condition device including the special role is won and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, if the game does not correspond to a game in which the special role can be won, in the lottery of the condition device in the next game, for example, If the winning is not achieved, the special role that has been won will be able to win a prize, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, the lottery of the condition device is performed, and the lottery is not won. Therefore, the advantageous section immediately after the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the condition device is performed. (At the same time or immediately before that, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on).

On the other hand, in the next game, for example, a small role or a replay is won, and the winning of the small role or the replay won in the game is prioritized. As a result, in a game in which the special role cannot be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Further, for example, in a game in which a special role is carried over, if a small role of “PB」 1 ”is won and the small role cannot be won, in a game in which the special role carrying over the winning can be won. In the same manner as when the above-mentioned “1BBA + Small Winner D” is won, the game does not start the advantageous section. Of course, in a game in which a special role that has been won can win a prize, an advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a view for explaining the flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. The example of FIG. 67 illustrates an example in which “1BBA + Small Winner E1” is won in the “N” game, and 1BBA is won in the “N + 3” game.
First, when “1BBA + Small Winner E1” is won in the “N” game, only the small win E1 can win in the game, and 1BBA cannot win, so that the advantageous section does not start in the game.

  Next, after the “N + 1” game, the winning of 1 BBA is carried over. In the “N + 1” game, an example in which the replay A is won is shown. At the time of the replay A winning, the replay 01 wins with “PB = 1” and the 1BBA carrying over the winning cannot win, so that the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game item, an example is shown in which the lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA which has been won can be won. Therefore, the advantageous section starts from the “N + 2” game. Here, at the start of the “N + 2” game, that is, based on the fact that the start switch 41 has been operated and the lottery of the condition device has been performed, it has been determined that the lottery has not been won (1BBA can be won). Since the section is started, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also started when the start switch 41 is operated.

  The player who wins 1BBA in the “N + 2” game eye can eliminate the wasteful number of times of the game played during the advantageous section. As described above, the player who has won the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game eye is an internal middle game in which extras and the like (including a lottery on whether to execute the AT in the eighth embodiment) cannot be performed, It is not necessary to start an advantageous section. Further, as described above, the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is set in the advantageous section, and if the advantageous section starts in the inside middle game, the maximum advantageous number that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game. The number of games in the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the inside medium game. For example, when 10 games are played in the inside game and 1 game is played in the game in which 1BBA is won, and 16 games are played in the 1BBA game, only 1473 games are played in the advantageous section at the maximum after the 1BBA game is completed. Can't do it.

  However, the player who has won 1BBA in the “N + 2” game has no amount consumed in the internal medium game (0 games in the internal game, 1 game in the game in which 1BBA is won, and 16 games in the 1BBA game). In the game after the end of the 1BBA game, a maximum of 1483 games can be played in the advantageous section), so that the player who could not win the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game item can be played. , May be advantageous. On the other hand, a player who could not win 1 BBA in the “N + 2” game eye will continue the inside middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1BBA cannot be won in the “N + 2” game item.

  Further, in the “N + 3” game item, similarly to the “N + 2” game item, an example is shown in which the lottery of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, 1BBA which has been won can be won. Then, an example in which 1BBA can be won in the “N + 3” game item is shown. Thus, the 1BBA game is started from the “N + 4” game.

Here, for example, if the advantageous section is set to start uniformly from the start of the 1BBA game, the number of games varies depending on the skill of the player's pressing from the time of winning the 1BBA to winning (medal consumption). Although there is a difference in the number of cards), there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the skill of the player (whether or not the player has noticed the winning of the special role, or when the player knows the winning of the special role, becomes the special role without a mistake in the eyesight). Depending on whether or not the corresponding combination of symbols has been pushed so as to stop on the activated line), the number of wasted games in the advantageous section fluctuates.

For example, if the special combination can be won in the first game in which the special combination can be awarded, the advantageous section will not be wasted in the internal middle game after the advantageous section is started.
On the other hand, in the first game in which the special role can be won, if the special role cannot be won due to a failure to push, etc., the game in which the special role can be won again after the next game. You need to wait until. However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special combination can be won, the advantageous section is wasted during that time.
In this way, the actual number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games after the end of the special game) can be varied according to the skill of the player.

As a modified example of the ninth embodiment, for example, the following example is given.
(Modification 1)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section as soon as the game that has exhausted the number of games, the next game, or when the special game starts (the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped). .
(Modification 2)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role (or when shifting to the standby section), the number of games until shifting to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the earlier of the game that has exhausted the number of games or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special role can be won.

(Modification 3)
Even in the case where the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special combination can win, the end condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of the special combination, an advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed after the end of the special game is won. In this case, for the 50 games AT after the end of the special game, the 50 games are counted at the same time as the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the winning special combination can win, the 50 games of the AT start counting at the same time as the start of the AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the count of the game “1500”, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is performed from the first game in which the winning special role can win. In this way, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the number of games in the AT is added), the skill of the player is affected.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when the player wins the condition device including the special combination and is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is started from the game in which the special combination can be won. The advantageous section may be started from the next game of the game in which the special role can be awarded (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the time the bettable state and the state in which the settlement can be performed in the next game). ). In this way, when the special role is won in the first game in which the special role can be won, the game in which the special role is won is not counted as a game in the advantageous section, so that the player May be even more advantageous than an unskilled player.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game that has been won for a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of a special role (1BBA), or a continuous effect (the special role (special role ( (1BBA) is an effect that inspires whether or not a winning is achieved, and an effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has been won for the last game may be output. Of course, a game that has won a condition device (for example, small role E1) that does not include the winning of the special role (1BBA), or a continuous production (special role (1BBA)) from the next game to a plurality of games (for example, three games) is won. It is an effect that fuels whether or not the player is playing, and it is necessary to output an effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has not been won in the last game.

  Then, when a continuous effect is output (in particular, before the effect indicating that the special role (1BBA) has been won) is performed, for example, two games when a continuous effect over the next game and three games is output When 1BBA can be won in the eyes (that is, “N + 2” game eyes), the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit for the game, which indicates that the player has won 1BBA. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1BBA has been won may be output. If it is the last game of the continuous production, the continuous production may be output as it is, or a production indicating that 1BBA has been won may be outputted instead of the continuous production.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which a continuous effect is output, even if 1BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on. Specifically, a game that has been won in a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of the special role (1BBA), or a predetermined number of games (equal to or more than the number of games that output a continuous effect) from the next game During the period, even if the special role (1BBA) can be won, the advantageous section is not started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on), but after a predetermined number of games, the special role (1BBA) can be initially won. When this happens, the advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned on).

<Tenth embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when the 1BBA is won during the execution of the AT (that is, during the advantageous section) and the game shifts to the 1BBA game, after the 1BBA game ends, the game shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to the AT). Sometimes, the additional number of AT games (that is, the number of games in the advantageous section) can be added.
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when the AT is being executed in RT3 (for example, when it is determined that the shift to the 100 game AT (that is, the advantageous section) is made at the time of winning the small part E1 and the AT is being executed), Assume that 1 BBA has been won (either 1 BBA alone or 1 BBA and small win E1). When 1BBA is won, if 1BBA does not win in the game, the process shifts to RT4 (inside). When 1BBA is won, the game shifts to 1BBA operation (1BBA game). When the end condition during 1BBA operation (1BBA game) is satisfied, the routine shifts to non-RT.

  When the 1BBA game ends and the game shifts to non-RT, the AT is restarted from that point, or the AT is being prepared (for example, any of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, and the replay B group). The AT is restarted from the next game of the crab-winning game, etc. For this reason, during the preparation of the AT, it is preferable to at least activate the instruction function for shifting to RT3 even before starting the AT. Of course, it is an advantageous section during AT preparation.) When the AT is set to be started from that point, when the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT, the process shifts to RT2. When one of the replay B groups is won at RT2, the instruction function is operated to display a pressing order in which the replay 02 is won. When Replay 02 wins in RT2, the process moves to RT3. Then, the AT is continued while maintaining the RT3. If the setting is made during AT preparation up to RT2, the AT is basically resumed after shifting to RT3.

  Here, based on the transition from RT2 to RT3, the additional number of AT games (that is, the advantageous section) can be added. This addition may be performed at all times, or may be determined by lottery. As an opportunity for the addition, the replay B group is elected (that is, it is added even if the transition from RT2 to RT3 is not performed. Of course, when the AT is being prepared, the AT may be started from this point). Preferred), winning the replay 02, and shifting from RT2 to RT3.

  In addition, in the tenth embodiment, it is possible to execute the extra based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via non-RT after the end of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1BBA winning, execution of 1BBA game, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, storage using a flag can be mentioned. Then, when shifting from RT2 to RT3 (may be when the replay B group wins or replay 02 wins), it is determined whether or not the flag is on, and it is determined that the flag is on. It is possible to add the number of AT games to the condition. In addition, when an additional or an additional lottery is executed, the flag is changed from on to off.

  As described above, if it is determined whether or not the vehicle can be added by using the flag, for example, a state in which RT2 and RT3 are only moved back and forth (simply, during AT execution, the pushing order is missed, and the operation is shifted to RT2. At the time of transition to RT3 again), since the flag is off, there is no addition when transitioning from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example. However, even if 1BBB, that is, a condition device including a special role having a setting difference is won, it can be executed as long as it is added as described above.
Similarly to the above, the winning of 1BBB, the execution of 1BBB game, or the stay of RT1 are stored in the flag. Then, after the 1BBB game is over, a transition is made from RT1 to RT2, and further to RT3 (when a replay B group is won or a replay 02 wins), an extra run can be executed. . Thus, even when the player wins 1BBB having a setting difference that cannot be added during the winning or during the BB game (when the game shifts to the 1BBB game), the player can be expected to be added. Can be.

In addition, the addition may be performed based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, the addition may be made possible based on the winning of the small role B group in the non-RT or RT1, the display of the pattern symbol, or the transition from the non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the transition to non-RT also takes place when the RWM 53 is initialized. However, the above-mentioned flag is turned off with the initialization of the RWM 53, so the transition from non-RT to RT2 and further from RT2 to RT3. Even if it does, no extra is executed. In addition, in the first place, the addition is not executed in the normal section.
Further, when the player wins 1BBA or 1BBB during the execution of AT and shifts to RT4 (internal), the number of AT games played at RT4 is not added.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, the process shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process shifts to RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following method is also possible.
After the end of the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BBB game, the process is shifted to RT5 (new addition). Then, at RT5, a condition device that is a multiple winning of a plurality of replays is randomly selected, the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern symbol. In addition, settings are made so as not to shift from non-RT, RT2 or RT3 to RT5.
In this manner, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the winning of the condition device at RT5, the display of a predetermined replay, the winning of the small role B group at RT5, and the pattern design are displayed. Or the transition from RT5 to RT3), the additional number of AT games can be executed, and the flag as described above does not need to be provided.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single win of the small win E1, a small win E1 (number of “250”), which shifts to an advantageous section when winning in the normal section, is won in the normal section. Also, a small winning combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when any of the small wins E1 wins in the normal section, the section shifts to the advantageous section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small win E1 with the set number “250” is referred to as “small win E1a”, and the small win E1 with the set number “750” is referred to as “small win E1b”.
Further, the small role E2, 1BBA and the small role E2 have been deleted.
By doing so, in the game in which the small role 36 has won, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is always made (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by then).

Further, the advantageous section when the small role E1b is won is an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be ended only by executing the instruction function operation game once (for example, the instruction function operation game is completed once and the game is ended in 5 games). is there. Such an advantageous section may be referred to as an AT gaseous sign among the AT signs.
On the other hand, the advantageous section at the time of winning the small role E1a is an advantageous section in which the AT is executed after the AT omen, and the number of games is after the AT omen (by the way, the AT omen is one time of the instruction function operation game). (After the execution, the game is terminated with 5 games). Note that the count of the 50 games may be started immediately after the AT sign, may be started at the time of transition to RT3 (or the next game), or may be started at the time of winning the replay B group (or the next game). , Or may be started by staying at RT3 (or the next game). Furthermore, during the 50 games, when a condition device (small win B group, small win C group, replay B group, or replay C group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  Also, tentatively, there is a small win E1 (number of "250") that shifts to the advantageous section, a small win E1 (number of "750") that does not shift to the advantageous section, and a small win E2 that does not shift to the advantageous section. When the player wins the small role E1 (number of “250”) shifting to the advantageous section, when shifting to the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games can be executed, the small portion 36 wins the winning game or the next game. However, there is no point in outputting a continuous effect for increasing the player's expectation as in the related art. This is because whether or not to shift to the advantageous section can be determined by checking whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. The eleventh embodiment is conceived to output a continuous effect for increasing the expectation of a player as in the related art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing an advantageous section and the like at the time of winning the small win E1b (example 1) and the small win E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small win E1b is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on). Then, it waits until the small role B group is won. After the start of the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display an advantageous pressing order in the game that has won the first small win B group (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of the instruction function operation game, a continuous effect is output (even during the continuous effect, the AT sign is in progress). Of course, a continuous effect may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, five consecutive games are executed. Then, in the fifth game, an effect is output as to whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues thereafter. At the time of winning the small role E1b, since the advantageous section (AT precursor) can be completed by one instruction function operation game, the advantageous section (AT precursor) is completed in the game in which the continuous production is completed, and the game shifts to the normal section. .
In addition, when the player wins the small role B group during the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game may be executed. However, in this embodiment, the instruction function operation game is not executed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small part E1a is won, the advantageous section starts (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on), and the instruction function operation game is executed in the first game won in the small part B group. A continuous effect (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when winning the small role E1b). Then, at the time of winning the small role E1a, an effect meaning that the advantageous section (AT) is continued after the fifth game of the continuous effect is output. Then, the AT is started from the next game after the end of the continuous effect.
In addition, when the small combination B group is won during the five games during the continuous production, the instruction function operation game is not executed as in the case of the small combination E1b winning. Of course, when the small-function part B is selected and the instruction function-operating game is executed during the five games in the continuous production after the small-effect part E1b is elected, the small-effect part E1a is elected. It is preferable to execute the instruction function operation game even when the small win B group is won during the five games during the continuous production of. This is because when the small part E1b is elected and when the small part E1a is elected, the instruction function operation game is executed / not executed during the continuous production. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT).

Here, at the time of winning the small part E1a, it is determined that the AT of 50 games is executed. Alternatively, the advantageous section (AT with no AT precursor) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (the next game at the time of winning the small role E1a). Alternatively, after the shift to the advantageous section, the first instruction function operation game may be counted as 50 games as the first game (the AT game indicates the previous game of this game, and the AT is started from this game).
Further, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game won as the winning combination (replay B group including replay 02) that can be shifted to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22). If the next game that has won the replay that can be shifted to a specific RT is 50 games from the next game, the pressing order for shifting to the specific RT is notified in the game that has been selected as the replay B group. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game won in the replay B group (even if the replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of the 50th game from the next game is executed. Become. Thus, it is possible to prevent a capture or the like in which the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Further, in the specification in which the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game won as the small win E1a, if the small win E1a is won while staying at the specific RT, another RT from the specific RT is performed. Notification for maintaining a specific RT when a winning combination (pattern design 01-03 or replay 03 that can display replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) is won. May be performed. Then, the counting of the AT may be started from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is performed, or a predetermined game after the notification in order to maintain the specific RT (the next game may be performed). ). By setting in this manner, the number of games that are once transferred to another RT and then transferred to a specific RT again can be reduced, so that it is advantageous up to the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). The opportunity to give a game can be increased.

In the above example, in each of the small wins E1a and the small wins E1b, the continuous production is set to 5 games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first instruction function operation game or the next game is executed by the 50 game AT. (1 game) which outputs an effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50 games, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, at the time of winning the small win E1b (the number of "750"), it is set as an advantageous section (AT after the AT warning) where the AT of 50 games is executed after the AT warning, and at the time of winning the small winning E1a (the number of "250"). It may be an advantageous section (AT precursor) in which the game can be completed by the second instruction function operation game.

Further, when the small win E1a is won, the number of games “m” of the AT is determined, and when the small win E1a and the small win E1b are won, the number of games “n” before the first instruction function operation game can be executed is determined. Determined by lottery. When the number of games "n" is determined, the instruction function is not activated until the number of games "n" elapses, even when the small role B group is won. After the elapse of the number of games "n", the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small win B group.
In addition, when the determined number of games “n” includes, for example, “n1” and “n2” (n1 <n2), and when the determined number of games of the AT is “m1” at the time of winning the small role E1a, In the case of "n1", "n2" may be easily determined when the determined number of games of the AT is "m2" which is larger than "m1". Also, “n1” may be easily determined even when the small role E1b is won. Further, at the time of winning of the small role E1a, “n1” may be more easily determined at the time of winning of the small role E1b than at the time of the determined number of games of the AT being “m1”.
In this way, after the transition to the advantageous section, the longer the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the larger number of AT games is determined, You can expect. Of course, the shorter the number of games “n” until the first instruction function operation game is executed, the higher the possibility that the number of games of the larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a continuous effect is output from the next game at the time of winning the first small win B group. This is because, as in the related art, a continuous effect is simply output from the next game of the game that has been won as the small role E1a or the small role E1b (the continuous performance is performed in five games). In the advantageous section (AT) when the small role E1a is won, the AT after the AT sign (the AT sign ends in 5 games) may be assumed to end in 50 games. Even if it is assumed that the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning E1b ends in five games, unless the instruction function operation game is executed at least once during the five games, the fifth game of the continuous effect is performed. This is because there is a possibility that inconvenience such as the end of the advantageous section (AT precursor) may not occur even though the effect indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is not continued is output thereafter.

  In addition, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b ends with one instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed at the fifth game of the continuous effect. However, there is a possibility that an advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of the continuous production, or that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production. Because there is. Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b ends in five games after executing the instruction function operation game once, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of the continuous effect. This is because it is not always the case, and there is a possibility that an inconvenience such that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end even after the fifth game of the continuous production may occur.

However, the advantageous section (AT) at the time of winning the small role E1a is that the AT after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) ends with the 50 games, If the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning the small role E1b is assumed to be completed by one instruction function operation game, the continuous production starts from the game which started the advantageous section at any time. The continuous production is continued until the first small role B group is won, and when the first small role B group is won, the indicating function is activated, and in the game or the next game, the advantageous section (AT ) May be notified.
In this case, the number of games until the first small role B group wins is indeterminate, so that an effect image indicating that a continuous effect used in a game in which the continuous effect is continued is continued, and an advantageous section An effect image indicating that (AT) is not continued and an effect image indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is continued may be prepared, and a continuous effect may be output.
In addition, during the advantageous section (AT precursor) based on the winning of the small role E1b (for example, during a continuous production), when the small role E1a (small role E1b is acceptable) is won, the AT of 50 games is performed after the AT precursor. (Continuation of the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Examples 3 and 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small role E1 is won, the continuous effect is not output until the first small role B group win, and the continuous effect is output from the next game at the time of the small role B group win.
In contrast, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output a continuous effect until the first small role B group wins, for example, when the small role E1 wins, and starts from the next game when the small role B group wins. This is an example in which a continuous effect is not output, and an advantageous section which ends when the AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when the small role E1 is won is started. Of course, the condition for terminating the advantageous section in Example 3 is not limited to this, and the AT of 30 games (the number of games is free) is executed after the AT sign (by the way, the AT sign may end with 5 games). Alternatively, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied. Of course, an advantageous section with different end conditions may be started when the small win E1a is won and when the small win E1b is won.

  Further, when the small role E1 is won, there may be a case where the advantageous section is started and a case where the advantageous section is not started. In the example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous section, the small section B group is never won by the time until the first set advantageous section end condition (for example, executing the AT of 30 games) is reached. This is an example. If the small win B group is won before the end condition of the advantageous section is reached and the instruction function operation game is executed, as shown by the two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when the 30 game AT is executed), the advantageous section ends.

  On the other hand, when the condition for ending the advantageous section has been reached and the instruction function operation game has not been executed even once (such as when the small role B group has never been won), then the small role B At least the advantageous section will be extended until the group is won and the instruction function operation game is executed. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, an example is shown in which the advantageous section is extended, then the instruction function operation game is executed (by winning the small win B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. Note that, in Example 3, the advantageous section is ended less than 1500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in Example 4 of FIG. 69, since the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is not executed once (without winning the small role B group), and the upper limit of the advantageous section is 1500. This is an example in which a game has been reached. In other words, the end condition of the advantageous section has been reached, but when the advantageous section has been extended, the upper limit has been reached, or there is an addition in the advantageous section. This is an example of when the vehicle has arrived.
In the rare case such as Example 4, unlike the case of Example 3, even if the instruction function operation game is not executed even once, the advantageous section ends when the upper limit is reached. This means that “when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game) is reached, the advantageous section is finished” rather than “at least one instruction function operation game is executed during the advantageous section”. To do that. This is because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if the player wins a rare role such as the small role E1 during that time, the advantage section is not obtained. It is possible to add extra (of course, it is not necessary), but as in Example 4, when the upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, the rare role won during that time , Because it is not possible to add an advantageous section to the player, the normal section is more advantageous for the player. (If the player wins the rare role during the normal section, a new advantageous section starts. Because there is).

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantageous section is continued up to the upper limit of 1500 games (for example, when the small part E1 or the like is elected and added, etc. are performed during the started advantageous section, and it is determined that the advantageous section is continued). Or when the 1BB game or the like is performed during an advantageous section, for example, when it is determined that the game is to be continued, for example, from the 1450th game (when the upper limit is approached). This is a feature (the ending effect is output in the same manner as in Example 3 in FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the 1450 game, and various settings such as the 1400 game and the 1470 game can be set.
The ending effect starts from the 1450th game and ends at the 1500th game. Here, the “ending effect” is, for example, a moving image, also referred to as a movie image, which is not divided for each game (not an image switched for each unit game, but a moving image whose time is determined in advance). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, the player can see the end of the game in exactly 50 games (game in which the advantageous section ends). When the process reaches the end, the process is repeated from the beginning or the last image is displayed as a still image. As described above, it is preferable that the ending effect is set to a length that can be seen to the end before the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays in the shortest time. At the end of the ending effect (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals obtained in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals obtained and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) are displayed. indicate. Of course, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total acquired number), the difference between the acquired total medal number and the inserted total medal number (total acquired difference number), and the total number of games (1,500 games) are ending effects. May be displayed not as the last but also as another effect that is output thereafter (such as an effect that is output during a freeze executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)). .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450 game, the ending effect is ended at the 1500 game, and the advantageous period is ended in the advantageous section.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB in the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section, and a 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, it has not reached the 1450 game eye in the advantageous section. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect starts from the 1450th game, and the ending effect ends at the 1500th game (the ending effect ends with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, FIG. 70B shows an example in which, in the advantageous section, after the ending effect starts from the 1450 game, 1BB is won at the 1490 game, and the 1BB game is executed. Then, an example is shown in which the end time of the 1BB game has exceeded the 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends with 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). Incidentally, no freeze is executed even when the advantageous section is ended. Therefore, the advantageous section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the end of the advantageous section (the normal section).

  In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). This is because, when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached when the 1BB game is not being performed as in (a), the advantage is output at the end of the ending effect or during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section. It is necessary to display the total number of games in the section, the total number of acquired pieces, and the like (particularly, the number of AT sets executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games in the AT, the total number of pieces acquired in the AT, and the like). On the other hand, when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game as in (b), the 1BB game is executed thereafter (this is a normal section), and the ending effect ends at this point. In such a manner, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the advantageous section, and the effect output during the freeze is to display the total number of games and the total number of acquired pieces in the advantageous section by 1BB. This is because it is not preferable because it also hinders the game.

  In the first place, when ending the 1BB game, a freeze is executed at the end of the effect during the 1BB game or at the end of the 1BB game, and in the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games during the 1BB game and the total Since the acquired number is displayed, in the case of (b), even when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this time and the 1BB game is ended. The ending effect is ended, and a freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect or at the end of the 1BB game. In the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number of acquired games, etc. (especially , The number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played during the AT, the total number of acquired games during the AT, etc.) are considered preferable. .

  Also, since the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is a 1BB game in the normal section, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, etc. in the advantageous section (strictly, executed in the advantageous section) If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games during AT, or the total number of acquired items during AT, it is better not to include the total number of games or the total number of acquired items during that period (normal section and during 1BB game). It is good, but if not strictly concerned with the display, the display may also include the total number of games and the total number obtained during that time (in the normal section and during the 1BB game). When the content is included and displayed, the player is more satisfied. For example, although the advantageous section can be executed only up to 1500 games, the display is more than 1500 games, so there is a sense of satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the 1BB game are displayed together with the ending effect, or the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the advantageous section (particularly, the advantageous section) , The total number of AT games, the total number of acquired games during AT, etc.) is displayed during the 1BB game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Will also continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (Example 3), when the ending effect is output, the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired during the 1BB game, the total number of games and the total number of cards acquired in the advantageous section, and the like (particularly, When the set number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games during the AT, the total number of acquired pieces in the AT, etc.) are not displayed, during the 1BB game after the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, those Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set so that even if the player plays in the shortest time, the game can be viewed to the end by the game in which the advantageous section ends. Repeating from the beginning or displaying the last image as a still image), but also outputting the ending effect after the end of the advantageous section as in the example of (b), repeating the ending effect from the beginning, or The last image of the ending effect may be continuously displayed as a still image.
The ending effect does not switch images for each unit game (divides for each game), but a moving image whose time is determined in advance, a moving image that is divided for a predetermined number of games, a still image that is not divided for each game, or It may be any of still images and the like, which are divided for each predetermined number of games.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT shift as in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 22 is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment has the following features.
(1) The winning probabilities of the condition devices (the replay B group, the replay C group, and the small role B group) related to the RT transition do not have a setting difference.
(2) At the non-RT or at the RT2 shifted from the RT1, the advantageous section is added (possible) based on the winning in the replay B group. On the other hand, in the case of transition from RT3 to RT2, when the transition is made from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of replay A is set to have a difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a numeral table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device of “small win D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in the present embodiment, the small win D has a setting difference. ). Also in the thirteenth embodiment, the same number table (1) as that in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (the number table of the small combination D is not provided).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small role B group and display a pattern symbol. Here, in order to display the pattern symbol, it is necessary to win the small win B group. Then, when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small role B group, the ease of shifting from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 differs depending on the setting value (the ease of shifting from RT3 to RT2 also differs). ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability of the small win B group does not have a setting difference between the non-RT and the RT1. In the example of FIG. 71, the set numbers of the small wins B1 to B12 are set to “770” for all the settings in common (not limited to this value). In order to make the appearance rates of the small wins B1 to B12 the same, all the small wins B1 to B12 have the same number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the numbers of replays B1 to B3 are all “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the replay C group is drawn by lot only at RT3, and the numbers of replays C1 to C3 are all “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when RT2 is shifted from non-RT or RT1, when the replay B group is won (may be displayed when replay 02 is displayed or when shifting from RT2 to RT3), an additional advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition of the advantageous section may be always added, or may be determined by lottery as to whether or not to be added. Also, the number of additional games may be a fixed number of predetermined games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that “addition of an advantageous section” can be replaced with “addition of AT” in all embodiments. For example, when the special role is won during the AT (for example, when the remaining number of games of the AT is "5") and the non-RT or RT2 shifted from the RT1 after finishing the special game and the replay B group is won, An additional lottery is executed to increase the remaining number of games in the AT, and when this lottery is won, the remaining number of games in the AT can be increased (for example, the remaining number of games in the AT game can be set to “25”).

It should be noted that the addition of the advantageous section at the time of the replay B group winning in the non-RT or the RT2 shifted from the RT1 is similar to the above-described tenth embodiment.
In the thirteenth embodiment, since the replay B group is a condition device having no difference in the winning probability (number), it is possible to add an advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from having a difference in the addition probability.
Further, similarly to the tenth embodiment, when the process shifts from RT3 to RT2, the player wins the replay B group at that RT2 (even if the replay 02 is displayed or the process shifts from RT2 to RT3). , Do not execute the addition of the advantageous section.
Further, at the time of winning of the replay B group in the RT2, the RT2 is maintained or the process shifts to the RT3. Therefore, the replay B group is a condition device to which RT can be transferred. Since the replay B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT2 to RT3 (easiness of shifting).

  At the time of winning of the replay C group in RT3, RT3 is maintained or the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the replay C group is a condition device to which RT can be transferred. Since the replay group C is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to prevent the setting probability from changing from RT3 to RT2 (easiness of shifting).

Similarly, when the player wins the small win B group in the non-RT, RT1, or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, the small win B group is a condition device that can transfer RT. The small role B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, so that there is no setting difference in the probability (easiness of shifting) from non-RT, RT1, RT3 to RT2. can do.
Note that the small win C group does not correspond to a condition device to which RT can be transferred, and thus may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the condition device that enables the transfer of the RT (the condition device related to the RT transfer) does not have the setting difference in the winning probability so that the RT transfer rate is not affected by the setting difference. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) that shifts based on the winning of the special role is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probabilities of “1BBA + Small Winner E2”, 1BBB, and “1BBB + Small Winning D” have a set difference, but shift to RT4 (internal ) Is an exception (may be affected by the setting difference). This is because RT4 (inside the inside) shifts based on the winning of the special role, and does not shift according to the player's pressing order, and therefore has a different property from the above. Furthermore, RT4 (inside the inside) is intended to stay for a short period of time until 1BB is won, and therefore has a different property from that described above. Further, RT4 (inside the interior) cannot determine the transition to the advantageous section even during the normal section, and cannot add to the advantageous section even during the advantageous section. This is because there is no difference in the setting between the transition probability and the addition probability.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, there is a setting difference in the winning probability (number) of replay A. Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift at the time of the replay A winning, even if a setting difference is provided, the RT shift rate is not affected. As described above, the higher the winning probability of the replay A, the higher the probability of performing the replay. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including the replay, the higher the win probability of the replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
In the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of replay A is set higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. For this reason, the non-winning probability (probability of losing) can be made lower in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so that the payout rate can be increased accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single win of the small win E1, a small win E1 (number of “250”) which shifts to an advantageous section when winning in the normal section is won in the normal section. Also provided a small role E1 (number "750") which does not shift to the advantageous section. For example, when the small part E1 of the number “250” is won, the advantageous section in which the AT of 50 games is executed (the counting of the 50 games may be started immediately, and when shifting to RT3 (or the next game) ), May be started when the replay B group is won (or the next game), or may be started by staying at RT3 (or the next game). It is assumed that a transition is made (in addition, the above-described various advantageous section end conditions may be applied). Even with the same 50 game AT, a medal is newly inserted when the winning probability of replay A is high (low winning probability is low) than when the winning probability of replay A is low (high non-winning probability). Since there is no need to (consume), the payout rate increases accordingly. In this way, even if there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to make a setting difference in the payout rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, the small role D is a condition device having no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition apparatus has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the number of payouts when the small win D is won and the small win 35 (watermelon) wins is set to 15 (5 in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small win D is the small win with the maximum payout number among the small wins.

  In addition, since the small win 35 related to the small win D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small win 35 cannot be won unless it is pushed. For this reason, for example, at the time of winning the small part D, an effect indicating that the small part D has been won may be outputted, such as giving a green notification. Here, when the winning combination of “PB # 1” wins the condition device that enables the winning, outputting an effect indicating the winning is not “operation of the instruction function”. Although it is true that there is a case where the small win 35 wins or a case where the small win does not win at the timing of the eye-catching, the small win 35 does not lose any time regardless of whether the small win D is elected or not. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a role that can always win. In this point, unlike the small win B group of the present invention, the small win differs in the winning rate depending on whether or not the instruction function is activated. For example, if the operation is always performed on the left first to win the small win 01 when the small win B1 is won, the small win 01 cannot be won when the small win B5 is won.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the fourth, ninth, or fourteenth “watermelon” in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 8th or 13th “watermelon” can be stopped at the active line (the right reel 31 can be at any timing since “watermelon” is “PB = 1”) The small role 35 can always be awarded (without any notification).
In the present invention, there is no role of “PB ≠ 1” other than the small role 35 (not including the incorrect answer in the pushing order at the time of winning the small role B group), so each game is stopped at the above timing. If the switch 42 is operated, the small win 35 will not be missed.
As described above, the game at the time of winning the small role D does not correspond to the "game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the present invention.

As a result, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the indicating function at the time of winning the condition device which is the maximum payout by operating the indicating function at least once during the advantageous section. The condition device which is the maximum payout is not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small role E1 (two payout sheets) is provided as a condition device having no setting difference.

As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small role D: There is a setting difference (15 payouts)
Winning probability of small role group B: No difference in setting (when the push order is correct, the number of payouts is 9)
Winning probability of small role E1: No difference (2 payouts)
And the relationship between the number of payouts is
Small role D> Small role group B (when the answer is correct)> Small role E1
Becomes

  If the game at the time of winning the small role D is set to correspond to the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention (the small winning combination having a different winning rate depending on whether the instruction function is activated or not). In this case), the “condition device that provides the maximum payout due to the activation of the instruction function” becomes the small win D instead of the small win B group. In such a case, the winning probability of the small win D is low, so that it may frequently occur that the small win D is not won before the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (the advantageous section cannot be ended but the advantageous section is to be ended). However, if the winning probability of the small role D is increased (if it is higher than the winning probability of the small role group B), there is a high possibility that the small role D and 1BBB are duplicated and won (rare role). (Mostly in the case of the single winning of the small role D, because there is no expectation of the overlapping winning with 1BBB).

For this reason, the number of payouts when the small win D wins must be made smaller than the number of payouts when the pressing order of the small win B group is correct. Then, even if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small win D, the payout rate does not change much (the payout rate greatly changes because the small win with a large number of payouts has the setting difference). Because that would be the case). However, if the winning probability of the small win B group having a large number of payouts at the time of the correct answer in the pushing order has a setting difference, then the setting difference will appear in the ease of the RT shift.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the payout rate differs according to the set value using the small winning combination D having a large payout number (the payout rate increases as the setting is higher (the payout rate increases according to the set value). Change)), and the RT transition can be prevented from being affected by the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small win D is “PB ≠ 1”. For example, if “watermelon” is arranged in “PB = 1” for all the reels 31 (regardless of the player's eyes), (Regardless of skill).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the small win D has a case where the small win is overlapped with 1BBB, so that the higher the setting, the easier the small win 35 appears, and when the small win 35 appears, the 1BBB is expected to be won. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is won when the small role 35 appears is “20/520” = “0.038 (about 3.8% )), And when the set value is set to “6”, the probability that 1 BBB is won when the small role 35 appears is “25/625” = “0.040 (about 4.0%) ) ". Therefore, when the small role 35 appears, the higher the set value is, the higher the possibility of winning the 1BBB is high. Therefore, an element for estimating the set value is provided to the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is increased. You can also.

  As can be said in all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 71, it is free to change a portion indicated by “O” to “X”, and to “X”. It is free to change the location to “」 ”unless the condition device has no setting difference and is won only at a specific RT (RT4, during 1BBA game, not during 1BBB game), and“ × ” It is free to change the part marked with “△” into a condition unit if there is no setting difference.

<14th embodiment>
In the fourteenth embodiment, when a condition for changing the end condition of the advantageous section (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied after the start of the advantageous section and before the end of the advantageous section (before reaching the end condition). Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, at the start of an advantageous section (for example, when the previous game was won in the small role D in the first embodiment, etc.), if the number of games (initial value) of the advantageous section was 30 games, the advantage was provided during the advantageous section. When the condition for extending the section (for example, the winning of the small win E1 in the first embodiment) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but other end conditions of the various advantageous sections described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In Example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function operation game is executed in the game at the time of winning the first small win B group. In Example 1, the number of games played in the initially set advantageous section is set to 30 games. Example 1 shows an example in which during the 30 games, the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied and the number of games is increased by “50”. If the extension condition is not satisfied during the first 30 games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game, as indicated by the two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, if at least one instruction function operation game is being executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if the player does not win the small role B group at all, ie, 1 The advantageous section can be ended without executing the instruction function operation game. This is because one instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, in Example 2, similarly to Example 1, the number of games in the initially set advantageous section is 30 games, and during this 30 games, the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and 50 games are extended. An example is shown.
In Example 2, in the first 30 games and the extended 50 games (80 games in total), the small role B group was never won (that is, the instruction function operation game was never executed). It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (it has reached 80 games), the advantageous section is not ended.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when the small win B group is won during the extended 50 games and the instruction function operation game is executed (two-dot chain line A in the figure), the advantageous section is the extended 50 games. (Two-dot chain line B in the figure).
On the other hand, when the game has not been executed even once since the start of the advantageous section, ie, the total 80 games, ie, when the advantageous section has not been started, it waits for the small role B group to be won, and when the small role B group is won, the command function is activated. Perform the game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 games, and the number of extended games is set to 50 games. However, in these advantageous sections, the gaseous AT precursor (for example, CZ or AT If the transition condition is not satisfied, the game ends with 32 games (the number of games is free), or the game ends with one (the number of games is free) instruction function operation game, etc. Even if it is not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free), it becomes an AT of 50 games (the number of games is free, the start timing of counting the number of games may be the various timings described above), etc.) , CZ (for example, if the transition condition to AT is not satisfied, the game ends with 10 games (the number of games is free), or the game ends with one (the number of games is free), and the game is terminated. Omen In all, if the transition condition to the AT is easily satisfied, the AT (if the extension condition is not satisfied, 30 games (the number of games is free, the timing for starting the counting of the games may apply the various timings described above). , Etc.).

  For example, at the start of the advantageous section, the game shifts to CZ (corresponding to the game “30” in FIG. 72). If the condition for shifting to AT (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied during this CZ, AT (“50”) is satisfied. (Corresponding to the extension of the game) (extending the condition for ending the advantageous section). On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the AT is not satisfied during the CZ, the advantageous section is ended when the condition for ending the CZ is satisfied, and the mode shifts to the normal section (normal for CZ, AT, etc.) (eg, 1, two-dot chain line).

Furthermore, in addition to the above,
(1) The first advantageous section is set to CZ (for example, ending with 30 games), and if the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, CZ having a longer number of games (adding "20" to the number of games) ).
(2) The first advantageous section is referred to as an "advantageous section (gasse AT precursor or CZ) ending after a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of the instruction function operation game", and is an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, the winning of the small role E1), CZ (the predetermined number of games or the game in which the instruction function operation game is completed at the predetermined number of times), Or, it is changed to AT (one that ends with a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is referred to as an "advantageous section (gasse AT sign or CZ) which ends with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) of the instruction function operation game", and is an advantageous section until the first instruction function operation game is executed. If the extension condition (extension condition or CZ shift condition) is satisfied, the “advantageous section (gasset AT precursor or CZ) that ends with a plurality of (eg, three) instruction function operation games a predetermined number or more times” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is an AT of 30 games, and if the condition for extending the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to an AT of 100 games (the number of games added is "70").
And the like.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games in the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function operation game is executed only at the time of winning the first small role B group, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is performed in the small role B group. , It is not necessary to execute the instruction function operation game.
On the other hand, during the CZ (during 30 games), two or more instruction function operation games may be executed.
Further, even when the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, if the instruction function operation game has already been executed once during the CZ, the instruction function operation game will not be executed in the subsequent AT. You may. In addition, the same applies when the condition for shifting to CZ or AT is satisfied during the gaseous AT precursor. In other words, it is only necessary to execute one instruction function operation game from the start of the advantageous section to the end thereof.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized in that a freeze is executed and a stop is not executed when the advantageous section ends.
FIG. 73 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an advantageous section and a freeze in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous section is to be executed (for example, when winning the small role E1), the CZ is started at the beginning of the advantageous section. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the AT is started after the end of the CZ. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some may start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, while others may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, in the first CZ (advantageous section), the condition for shifting to AT is not satisfied, and the advantageous section ends only with CZ. In the next CZ (advantageous section), an example in which the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied, the AT is executed after the CZ ends, and the AT and the advantageous section end. When the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ, the CZ may be immediately terminated and the AT may be executed, or the AT may be executed until the CZ is terminated (this means that the AT is executed). Not limited to the embodiment).
Although not shown in FIG. 73, even when the game ends with only CZ, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game because the game has shifted to the advantageous zone.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when the first CZ ends (when AT is not executed after the CZ ends and the advantageous section is ended), no freeze is executed (two-dot chain line in the figure). On the other hand, when shifting from CZ to AT, a freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantaged section).
At the time of freeze, at least the total number of games played by the AT and the total number of acquired games are displayed as images. Of course, the information including the total number of games and the total number of acquired games in the CZ may be displayed as an image, and when shifting from the CZ to the AT via the AT precursor, during the CZ and / or during the AT precursor. What includes the total number of games and the total number of acquired games may be displayed as an image.

In this way, it is determined in advance what advantageous section is to execute the freeze at the end and what advantageous section is to execute the freeze at the end.
For example, as expected values such as the total number of games played and the total number of cards acquired in the advantageous section, the first ending condition (for example, the ending of the advantageous section only with CZ (can be a gaseous AT sign)) and the expected value more than the first ending condition Has a large second end condition (for example, when executing AT after CZ, or when executing only AT), and when ending the advantageous section with the first end condition, the freeze is not executed and the advantageous section is not executed. Is terminated under the second termination condition, a freeze is executed. This is because the freeze is executed until the expected values such as the total number of games and the total number of acquired pieces in the advantageous section are small (for example, 10 games as the total number of games and 12 pieces of the total number of acquired games). This is because there is a high possibility that the player's disappointment will increase (the interest will decrease) if the images and the total acquired number are displayed as images.
Even in the advantageous section, unlike the AT, there are those which do not aim to give many medals to the player (increase the total number of acquired coins), such as the gaseous AT sign, the AT sign, and CZ. It is not preferable to execute the freeze uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  The determination as to whether or not to execute the freeze includes, for example, providing a freeze flag. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ, but turns on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If the freeze flag is on, the freeze is executed. If the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. Immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed. When the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag is provided. It may be initialized.

By controlling in this way, it is possible to prevent the freeze from being executed at the end of an advantageous section that does not bring much benefit to the player, such as when the advantageous section is started but ended only with CZ.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) specifying the type of the advantageous section (CZ, gaseous AT sign, AT sign, AT, etc.), or “0” to “4” including the normal section, etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is CZ, “2” is a gaseous AT sign, “3” is an AT sign, “4” is an AT, etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section or immediately before the end of the advantageous section, this information may be determined and the freeze may be executed.

  The freeze is not limited to one time. For example, when the AT executes 50 games as one break, a freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if the AT is 100 games), and during the execution of the freeze, the AT continues after the next game. Outputting an effect of whether or not to perform. In addition, for every 50 games, the total number of games and the total number of acquired games at that time are displayed as an image, and an effect as if the advantageous section ends (AT of 50 games) can be output.

When the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 games during the execution of the AT, a freeze is executed, and during the freeze, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of acquired games, and the like are displayed as images. .
Also in this case, if the CZ or the AT precursor is executed before the AT is executed, the image including the total number of games played and / or the total acquired number during the CZ and / or the AT precursor is displayed. Good.
In addition, even when the game reaches the upper limit of the advantageous section of 1500 game while executing the CZ or the AT precursor, the freeze is executed, and during the freeze, during the advantageous section (part of the advantageous section such as CZ). Alternatively, the total number of games, the total number of acquired games, and the like may be displayed as images.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when reaching 1500 game which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during 1BB operation (for example, 1BB operates during execution of AT, and during 1BB operation, For example, when the player reaches the 1500 game, the player does not execute the freeze when the player reaches the 1500 game (since the player is in the 1BB game), and executes the freeze at the end of the 1BB game. The total number of acquired images is displayed as an image.).
When the freeze is executed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the freeze is completed. Of course, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off before the freeze is executed, or the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned off during the freeze. The timing of initialization is the same as the timing of turning off the advantageous section display LED 77.

In FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends only with CZ and a condition device in which it is determined that both CZ and AT are executed. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small win E1 alone with the set number “750” is elected, an advantageous section ending only with CZ is set as an advantageous section. Is performed. With this setting, it is possible to determine to execute the AT without performing the lottery to determine whether or not the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied during the CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be performed during the CZ to determine whether or not the condition for shifting to the AT is satisfied (the lottery may be performed only during an advantageous section that ends only with the CZ). Further, it is also possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute AT from several games before the end of CZ. Also in this case, whether or not to execute the freeze is as described above.

The third to fifteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 50 may be any as long as the sub-control board 80 transmits parameters necessary for display during the advantageous section (AT) (number of digested games, number of remaining games, number of additional games, number of acquired games, number of times of instruction function operation, etc.). .

(2) In FIG. 43 to FIG. 52, parameters (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) related to the number of games are transmitted in order to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the acquired number (for example, 3000), information on each game and the acquired number is transmitted.
In addition, each game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is during the advantageous section and information indicating that it is during the AT, and counts the number of games of the advantageous section and the AT to the sub control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub-control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, the lottery tables A and B are provided as the lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery used according to whether or not the threshold is equal to or more than the specified number “1000”. Switched tables. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Further, the threshold value is exemplified by the specified number “1000”, but is not limited to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different expected values to be added. When the specified number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used. When the specified number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used. When the specified number is 1000 or more and less than 1300. Can use the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Example 1 to Example 3 in FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, it is unique when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit. Although the information was displayed, it is not limited to these Examples 1 to 3,
a) A display that allows a player to identify that the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit. b) A display different from the display before the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit is performed. The display contents are not limited to the display contents of Examples 1 to 3.

  (5) In Example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games of the AT exceeds 1500 games due to addition, the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed. The information on the number of digested games and the number of remaining games is not changed, such as changing the display font of the remaining number of games, changing the character size, changing the display color, etc. May inform the player that the total number of games of the AT has exceeded 1500 games.

  (6) In the example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantageous section (AT) is running short, a display such as “Ends in 10 more games” is displayed, but at the start of the advantageous section (AT). , "This advantageous section (AT) cannot be played for more than 1500 games" or the like.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, in the case of a slot machine in which the advantageous section and the AT do not match, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, using two external signals, it is possible to transmit an external signal capable of distinguishing between “non-advantageous section (non-AT)”, “advantageous section and non-AT”, and “advantageous section and AT”.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won immediately before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, and the BB game is started when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after the upper limit is reached (for example, When it is the 1501th game from the start of the section, the BB game is started in the non-advantaged section, only the external signal 1 (BB) is turned on, and the external signal 2 (AT) is turned off (advantage section and AT To end).
In addition, when the end of the BB game is at the time of reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately before reaching the upper limit (for example, 1499 games from the start of the advantageous section), the BB game ends at the end of the BB game. Turning off the external signal 2 (AT) at the same time as turning off the signal 1 (BB) (ending the advantageous section and AT).

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, the control state controlled by the main control board 50 is exemplified by AT, CZ, precursor, and normal. However, for example, an additional specialization zone that shifts when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide. The additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, the predetermined number of games is exhausted or the predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times. During that period, each time a condition device (for example, a small combination B group) to be added is won. , And the number of games played by the AT.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, in the example of (a) in FIG. 61, when the AT (state 1) ends, the process is shifted to the AT withdrawal period (state 2), and the AT cannot be pulled back in this state 2. Was changed to normal (state 3). In the example of (b), the AT is shifted to the CZ after the end of the AT, and when the AT cannot be pulled back in the CZ, the shift is made to the normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after the end of CZ, the process is shifted to the CZ withdrawal period, and when the CZ cannot be pulled back during this CZ withdrawal period, the process is shifted to normal.
However, the above state transition is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in FIG. 61A, after the end of the AT (state 1), the process may be shifted to the normal state (state 3) without going through the AT pullback period (state 2).
In FIG. 61 (b), the transition may be normal → CZ → AT, or the transition may be normal → sign → AT. After the end of the AT, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or the transition may be made from AT to precursor (CZ withdrawal period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), it may be possible to shift from normal to CZ without going through the precursor. Furthermore, the process may be shifted from CZ to normal without going through the withdrawal period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the output of the continuous effect is started at the same time as the start of the 1BBA game. The effect of whether to start or not may be continuously output.
Further, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and an effect may be output in the first half of the 1BBA game to finally inform whether or not to start the AT. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of the AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output during the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effect is not always necessary. For this reason, whether to output a continuous effect is optional. Further, for example, it is also possible to output an effect of whether or not to continue the advantageous section for only one game.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the condition device including the special combination, for example, the instruction function may be activated at the time of winning the small combination B group at RT4 (inside). . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds “1”. In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from (at the start of RT4, which is the next game of the game won as the special combination).
On the other hand, if the instruction function is not activated even after the transition to RT4, the advantageous section may be started by the time the special game starts.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, the winning probability of the additional lottery of the AT in the main control board 50 is designed to be low, or the additional effect in the sub control board 80 is suppressed. As a result, even if the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, it is possible to make the player less discouraged as much as possible.
As another method, there is a method of changing the execution probability of a freeze effect based on the number of execution games in the advantageous section and the like so as to minimize discouragement of the player. For example, in FIG. 17, when the player wins the small role E1 of the number “250”, the number of additional games is “50” (50%), “100” (40%), or “200” (10%). It is set so that the higher the number of added games, the higher the possibility that the freeze effect is executed.

In such specifications, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), if “200” is determined as the number of games to be added, a freeze effect is produced with a probability X (including 100%). When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X when “200” is determined as the number of additional games.
With this configuration, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section is approaching, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be reduced, and the player can be prevented from being excessively fanned by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is executed.
(14) Each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to being implemented alone, and a plurality of embodiments can be appropriately combined and implemented.

<Sixteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the present embodiment, there are “advantageous sections 1” and “advantageous sections 2” as advantageous sections. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous game state that does not have the right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is selected. After that, the system moves to ART.

In addition, although the contents partially overlap with the first embodiment, the meanings of the terms in the present embodiment are as follows.
The “condition device” is a lottery target composed of one or more roles. When one condition device is won, a winning combination included in the condition device is won.
A condition device related to a special combination (combination; bonus) is called a “accessory condition device”, a condition device related to a small combination is called a “winning condition device”, and a condition device related to a replay is called a “replay condition device”. . Further, the winning condition device and the replay condition device are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device”.

The “condition device number” is a number for identifying a condition device, and is defined for each condition device.
The number for identifying the accessory condition device is referred to as “accessory condition device number”, the number for identifying the winning condition device is referred to as “winning condition device number”, and the number for identifying the replay condition device is referred to as “reward condition device number”. This is referred to as “replay condition device number”. Further, the winning condition device number and the replay condition device number are collectively referred to as “winning and replay condition device number”.
The “winning number” is a number determined based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means. One winning number is determined based on one random value.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is a means for performing a lottery (determination or selection) of the condition device (winning role). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device lottery (decision or selection) means, a winning role lottery (decision or selection) means, or the like.
The lottery selecting means 61 includes a random number generating means and a random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number generated by the random number generating means, as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, the winning combination lottery means 61 includes a winning number determining means for determining a winning number based on the random number value obtained by the random number obtaining means, and a condition device for determining the condition device number based on the determined winning number. Number determination means.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). For example, a range from “0” to “65535” is defined as one cycle, and a counter that performs one count in 200 n (nano) seconds is provided, and the count value of this counter can be a random number. This counter keeps counting random numbers while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. This is the same as in the first embodiment.

The random number acquisition unit acquires the random number generated by the random number generation unit when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. This is the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the random number acquiring means acquires (latches) a random number value from the counter and stores (stores) it in the random number value register.
Here, the random number value register is a register built in the main CPU 55, and is a register that cannot be written from a program and can be read only.
When the program reads the random number value stored in the random value register, the random value register is cleared.

The winning number determining means determines a winning number based on the random number value obtained by the random number obtaining means.
In the present embodiment, the winning number determination means corresponds to an internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 described later and a lottery determination process in FIG. 88.
The condition device number determining means determines the condition device number based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means.
In the present embodiment, the condition device number determination means corresponds to the processing of condition device number set 1 in FIG. 89 described later.

FIG. 74A is a diagram showing a winning number definition (1) in the present embodiment. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the present embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a).
The winning number definition defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (b), “@NB_REP_A EQU 1; Replay A condition device number” means that “$ NB_REP_A” indicates “Replay A condition device number”, and “Replay A condition device number” indicates “1”. Means that the winning number corresponding to “@NB_REP_A” is “1”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “1”, the “replay A condition device” is independently won. The winning numbers “2” to “9” are the same as the winning number “1”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), "@NB_WIN_A EQU 10; Small win A condition device number" means that "@NB_WIN_A" indicates "Small win A condition device number", and "Small win A condition device number". This means that the “number” is “10” and that the winning number corresponding to “@NB_WIN_A” is “10”.
When the winning number is determined to be “10”, the “small win A condition device” is independently won. The winning numbers “11” to “30” are the same as the winning number “10”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “@ BBA_WIN_E2 EKU 31; 1BBA + Small Role E2 Duplicate Win” means that “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates “duplicate win of 1BBA and Small Win E2”, and “$ BBA_WIN_E2”. Means that the winning number corresponding to "."
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “31”, the “1BBA condition device” and the “small win E2 condition device” are repeatedly won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), “@BBB EQU 32; 1BBB single winning” means that “$ BBB” indicates “1BBB single winning”, and the winning number corresponding to “$ BBB” is “ No. 32 ”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “32”, the “1BBB condition device” is independently won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), “$ BBA EQU 34; 1BBA single winning + additional” means that “$ BBA” indicates “1BBA single winning and additional advantageous zone”, “$ BBA” Means that the winning number corresponding to is No. “34”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “34”, it is determined that the “1 BBA condition device” is independently won and that the number of games in the advantageous section is added.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), “@ AT1_BBA_WD EQU 44; 1BBA + Small Winning D Duplicate Winning + Advantage Section 1” means that “@ AT1_BBA_WD” is “1BBA and small win D overlapping win and advantageous section 1”. Means that the winning number corresponding to “@ AT1_BBA_WD” is “44”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “44”, it is determined that the “1BBA condition device” and the “small win D condition device” are duplicated and that the transition to the advantageous section 1 is made.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “52”. Then, the winning number determining means determines any one of the numerical values “0” to “52” as the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the winning numbers “1” to “9” correspond to the replay condition device numbers “1” to “9”, respectively, and the winning numbers “10” to “9”. The number “30” corresponds to the winning condition device numbers “10” to “30”, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers "31" to "33" are used for the single winning of the accessory condition device or the overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Correspondingly, the winning numbers "34" to "42" correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, the winning numbers "43" to "47" correspond to the shift to the advantageous section 1, and the winning number " Numbers 48 to 52 correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 2.

In the present embodiment, if the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42" during the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is added, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, if the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42" in the case where the ART is executed during the advantageous section, the game in which the ART can be executed during the advantageous section is uniformly or by lottery. The number may be increased.

Further, for example, in a case where a gassed game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit but the right to enter the ART is not performed) is being executed during the advantageous section, the winning number is “34” or more. When the number is determined to be "42", the right to shift to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

Note that "when the winning number is determined to be" 34 "to" 42 "" means that the winning number is determined to be any of "34" to "42".
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the content of change in the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition.
The winning number conversion data definition defines the definition of data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 76 (b), "@NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@ BBA_WIN_E2". Means that
As shown in FIG. 75A, “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "conversion start number", the condition device number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table.

As shown in FIG. 76 (c), “@NB_TRNS_AT EQU @ AT1_BBA; advantageous section conversion start number” corresponds to “@NB_TRNS_AT” indicating “advantageous section conversion start number” and “@NB_TRNS_AT”. It means that the value is “@ AT1_BBA”.
As shown in FIG. 75A, “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the “advantageous section conversion start number”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 (determined to shift).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), "@ NB_1BBA EQU 1; 1BBA condition device number" means that "@ NB_1BBA" indicates "1BBA condition device number", and the value corresponding to "@ NB_1BBA" is It means “1”. In other words, this means that “1BBA condition device number” is “1”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), “@ NB_AT1 EQU 1; advantageous section number 1” means that “@ NB_AT1” indicates “advantaged section number 1”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_AT1” is “ 1 ".

FIG. 77A shows a winning number conversion table.
The winning number conversion table is a table that defines data to be used when determining the condition device number from the winning number, and is stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.
As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” to “52”, the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. Used to determine the condition device number and the advantageous section number.
Here, "DEFB" is a pseudo-instruction in assembly language "securing a 1-byte (8-bit) area in a memory and storing data therein".
When a plurality of data items are separated by commas in the DEFB line, a plurality of 1-byte areas are secured in the memory in address order, and each data area separated by commas is sequentially stored in each secured area. It means to do.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), "DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2, 0; winning number 31" stores "@ NB_1BBA" at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and stores address # This means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored in ## 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)) and "0" is stored in address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “$ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”.
Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "28" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address #### (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ## 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number Address #### 2 (address 1602 (H)) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address #### to address #### 2 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

As shown in FIG. 77 (d), "DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0, 0; winning number 32" stores "@ NB_1BBB" in address ## 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)), and stores the address. This means that "0" is stored in #### 4 (for example, address 1604 (H)) and "0" is stored in address #### 5 (for example, address 1605 (H)).
As shown in FIG. 76A, “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”.
Therefore, "2" is stored in the address ### 3.

That is,
Address #### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ## 4 (address 1604 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number Address #### 5 (address 1605 (H)) ) 0: Advantageous section number.
Each data stored from address ### 3 to address ### 5 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition.
The winning number lottery data definition defines the data used when determining the winning number from the random number value in the lottery determination.
The “winning number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes winning number data.
“Winning number data” is data indicating a winning number determined in the lottery determination.

Then, “$ LT_NUM EQU 10000000B; winning number identifier” means that “$ LT_NUM” indicates the “winning number identifier”, and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_NUM” is “10000000 (B)”.
Also, “@BT_NUM EQU 7” indicates that the bit corresponding to the winning number identifier is “bit 7”, and when the bit 7 is “1”, the winning number identifier is on, and the bit 7 is “0”. In some cases, it means that the winning number identifier is off.

“Repeat number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes repeat number data.
The “repetition number data” is data indicating the number of times of repeating the hit / fail determination processing in the lottery determination.
Then, “$ LT_LOP EQU 01000000B; repetition number identifier” means that “$ LT_LOP” indicates “repetition number identifier”, and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_LOP” is “01000000 (B)”.
Also, “＠BT_LOP EQU 6” indicates that the bit corresponding to the repetition number identifier is “bit 6”, the repetition number identifier is on when bit 6 is “1”, and “0” when bit 6 is “0”. Means that the repetition number identifier is off.

The “identifier by setting value” is an identifier indicating that probability data is determined for each setting value.
The “probability data” is data indicating a winning range of the entire range of random numbers.
Accordingly, the winning probability = “probability data / total range of random numbers”.
For example, when the entire range of random numbers is “65536” and the probability data is “125”, the winning probability is “125/65536”.
Note that the probability data may also be referred to as a determination value, determination data, a number, or a number data.

"@LT_RNK EQU 00100000B; identifier by setting value" means that "@LT_RNK" indicates "identifier by setting value", and that data corresponding to "@LT_RNK" is "00100000 (B)". I do.
In addition, “@BT_LOP EQU 5” indicates that the bit corresponding to the identifier for each set value is “bit 5”, and when bit 5 is “1”, the identifier for each set value is on, and bit 5 is “0”. Means that the repetition number identifier is off.

"2 byte data identifier" is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 2 byte data.
Then, “$ LT_WRD EQU 00000000B; 2-byte data identifier” means that “$ LT_WRD” is a “2-byte data identifier”, and that data corresponding to “$ LT_WRD” is “00010000 (B)”. I do.
The bit corresponding to the 2-byte data identifier is “bit 4” in “$ BT_WRD EQU 4”, and when the bit 4 is “1”, the 2-byte data identifier is on and the bit 4 is “0”. Means that the 2-byte data identifier is off.

“1 byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 1 byte data.
"@LT_BYT EQU 00001000B; 1-byte data identifier" means that "@LT_BYT" is a "1-byte data identifier" and that data corresponding to "@LT_BYT" is "00001000 (B)". I do.
The bit corresponding to the 1-byte data identifier is “bit 3” in “@BT_BYT EQU 3”, and when the bit 3 is “1”, the 1-byte data identifier is on and the bit 3 is “0”. Means that the 1-byte data identifier is off.

The “judgment end identifier” is an identifier indicating that the lottery judgment is to be ended.
“$ LT_END EQU 00H” means that “$ LT_END” is a “judgment end identifier” and that the data corresponding to “$ LT_END” is “00H”.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an all RT common lottery table (1). FIG. 80 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (2), which is a view following FIG. 79. FIG. 81 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (3), which is a view following FIG. Further, FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (4), and is a diagram following FIG. 81.

FIG. 82B is a diagram showing a non-RT time lottery table. FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing an RT1 lottery table. FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing an RT2 lottery table. FIG. 83B is a diagram showing an RT3 lottery table. FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing an RT4 lottery table. Further, FIG. 84B is a diagram showing a 1BBA lottery table. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a 1BBB lottery table.
These lottery tables are used in an internal lottery (a lottery for determining a winning number from a random number) and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.

  The common RT lottery table is commonly used for non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. That is, the all-RT common lottery table is a lottery table used to determine a winning number regardless of the RT state, except when 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) is activated. Means Furthermore, the non-RT lottery table is used in non-RT, the RT1 lottery table is used in RT1, the RT2 lottery table is used in RT2, and the RT3 lottery. The table is used in RT3, and the RT4 lottery table is used in RT4.

At the time of non-RT, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", then, a lottery determination is performed using the non-RT time lottery table.
On the other hand, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, if the winning number is determined to be a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery ends without using the non-RT time lottery table.
Although the details will be described later, the fact that the winning number is “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that the winning number is not determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that
Also, the fact that the winning number becomes a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that one of the winning numbers is determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table. Means that.

At RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, a lottery determination is first performed using the all RT common lottery table, as in the non-RT time. At this time, if the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", then, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table corresponding to the RT.
On the other hand, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, if the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery ends without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. .
At 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and at 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table.

“TBL_LOT_DAT1” in FIG. 79 indicates an all RT common lottery table.
In addition, when the all RT common lottery table is set as the lottery table, first, a determination is made using “1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data”. At this time, if a winning is made, the winning number is determined to be “$ BBA_WIN_E2” (= “31”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning is not determined by using the “1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data”, then a success / failure determination is made using the “1BBB condition device lottery data”.

In addition, a win / fail determination is performed using “1BBB condition device lottery data”. At this time, if a win is made, the winning number is determined to be “31 + 1” (= “32”), and the lottery determination ends.
On the other hand, if the winning / non-winning determination using “1BBB condition device lottery data” results in a non-winning, then the success / failure determination is performed using “1BBB + small win D condition device lottery data”.
When winning number data is included, as in “1BBA + Small win E2 condition device lottery data”, the winning / non-permission judgment is performed using the winning number data.
Further, when the winning number data is not included as in “1BBB condition device lottery data”, the current winning / losing is determined by using the data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous winning / failing determination. Make a decision.

As described above, when the winning number data becomes a serial number, data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous winning / non-winning determination can be used for the current winning / non-winning determination. Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.
When the winning number data does not become a serial number, the winning number data is determined in the lottery table, and the winning / non-performing judgment is performed using the winning number data. Or return), an appropriate lottery result can be obtained.

The same applies to “1BBB + Small win D condition device lottery data” and “1BBB small device E2 condition device lottery data” and “1BBB condition device lottery data”.
Then, when it reaches “determination end” without being determined as a win in the win / fail determination, the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table ends.

In FIG. 79, “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2; winning number identifier; + winning number data” is obtained by performing an OR operation on “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2” to obtain “1BBA + minor role. This is stored in the first row of "E2 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “$ LT_NUM” indicates a winning number identifier, and its value is “10000000 (B)”.
As shown in FIG. 75 (a), “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates a winning number corresponding to 1BBA + small-prize role E2 duplicate winning, and its value is “31” (“00011111 (B)” in binary). is there.

Further, when "@LT_NUM" and "@ BBA_WIN_E2" are OR-operated,
10000000 (B): @LT_NUM
00011111 (B): @ BBA_WIN_E2
10011111 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, "DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2" indicates that "10011111 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thereby, the winning number identifier and the winning number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
The comment “; winning number identifier ;; + winning number data” indicates that the data includes the winning number identifier and the winning number data.
When bit 7 is “1”, such as “10011111 (B)”, it is determined that the winning number identifier is ON, and it is determined that the data includes winning number data. Bit 6 is used as winning number data.

In FIG. 79, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier ;; This is stored in the second line of "Small win E2 condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
“$ LT_RNK” indicates an identifier for each set value, and its value is “00100000 (B)”.

Further, when "@LT_BYT" and "@LT_RNK" are ORed,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00100000 (B): @LT_RNK
00101000 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK" indicates that "00101000 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the set value-specific identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Further, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier;

When the probability data is 1 byte, the data in which the 1-byte data identifier is turned on (bit 3 is set to “1”) is stored. When the probability data is 2 bytes, the 2-byte data identifier is turned on. (Bit 4 is set to “1”).
As described above, data in which one of the 1-byte data identifier and the 2-byte data identifier is turned on is stored, and data in which both the 1-byte data identifier and the 2-byte data identifier are turned on is not stored.
When probability data is determined for each set value, data in which the identifier for each set value is turned on (bit 5 is set to “1”) is stored, and common probability data is determined for all set values. At this time, data in which the set value identifier is turned off (bit 5 is set to “0”) is stored.

As described above, when the probability data is different in the settings 1 to 6, the probability data for each set value is determined in the lottery table, and the data in which the set value-specific identifier is turned on is stored. Thereby, the lottery of the winning number can be performed with a different probability for each set value.
When the probability data is common to the settings 1 to 6, one piece of probability data is determined in the lottery table, and data in which the identifier for each set value is turned off is stored. As a result, only one piece of probability data needs to be determined in the lottery table, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In addition, “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” in FIG. 79 indicates that “10” (“00001010 (B)” in binary) is stored as probability data used in setting 1. Is shown.
Actually, the probability data is set for each of the setting values of setting 1 to setting 6, but in FIG. 79, the probability data of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively shown, and the probability data of setting 2 to setting 5 Illustration of data is omitted. In FIG. 79, ":" means that illustration of the probability data of the settings 2 to 5 is omitted. The same applies to the lottery tables after FIG.

Then, which of the 1-byte data identifier or the 2-byte data identifier is on, whether the setting value-specific identifier is on or off, and based on the setting value when the setting value-specific identifier is on, The address of the probability data to be used is calculated (designated), and a determination is made using the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address.
A method for acquiring the probability data will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the information regarding the setting value is stored in a predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53.
Further, as the information regarding the set value, any one of “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”.
When "0" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 73, and "5" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK". , “6” is displayed on the set value display LED 73.

That is, when “N” (N is an integer) is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”, the control is performed by the main control board 50 so that “N + 1” is displayed on the set value display LED 73. You.
Therefore, the description regarding the set value such as the set value “1” and the set value “6” is a numerical value displayed on the set value display LED 73 and is not necessarily the information stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”. Is not limited.
Of course, the specification may be such that any one of “1” to “6” is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” as information related to the set value.

In FIG. 81, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier;; + repetition number data” is obtained by ORing “@LT_LOP” with “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary). This shows that the data obtained by the calculation is stored in the first line of “Small win B1 condition device lottery data to small win B12 condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_LOP” indicates a repetition number identifier, and its value is “01000000 (B)”.

When OR operation is performed on “を LT_LOP” and “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary),
01000000 (B): @LT_LOP
0000100 (B): 12 (D)
001001100 (B): Data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” indicates that “010011100 (B)” is stored in a predetermined one-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thus, the repeat number identifier and the repeat number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 5 indicate the number of repetitions data, and bit 6 indicates the number of repetitions identifier.
Further, the comment "; repeat count identifier;; + repeat count data" indicates that the data includes a repeat count identifier and repeat count data.
When bit 6 is “1”, such as “010011100 (B)”, it is determined that the repeat number identifier is ON, and it is determined that the data includes the repeat number data. Bit 5 is used as repetition count data.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like.
In step S1001, the main CPU 55 continues to determine whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated in a state where a specified number of game media have been bet (betting). When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S1002.
In step S1002, the main CPU 55 acquires (latches) a random number value from the random number generation means (counter), and stores (stores) the acquired random number value in the random number value register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1003.
In step S1003, the main CPU 55 controls the blocker 45 so that the insertion of medals is not permitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1004.

In step S1004, the main CPU 55 executes the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87). The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random number value. When the internal lottery 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1005.
In step S1005, the main CPU 55 executes the condition device number set 1 (FIG. 89). Condition device number set 1 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number. When the condition device number set 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 1 process.
The internal lottery 1 is a process for determining a winning number from a random number value. Note that the internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and the lottery determination process in FIG. 88 described later correspond to a winning number determination unit.
When the process proceeds to the internal lottery 1 in step S1004, first, in step S1011, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1012.

In step S1012, the main CPU 55 stores, in the HL register, the head address of the lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (1BBA operation, 1BBB operation, or non-operating of the accessory).
Specifically, at the time of 1BBA operation, the head address of the 1BBA lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBA) shown in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_D” in FIG. 84B is stored in the HL register.

In the 1BBB operation, the head address of the 1BBB lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1BBB) shown in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_D” in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, when the accessory is not operating, the head address of the all RT common lottery table (TBL_LOT_DAT1) shown in FIGS. 79 to 82A is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the data storage area of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Here, “_FL_ACTION” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a flag indicating the operating state of the accessory.
When the value of a predetermined bit (for example, bit 2) of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is operating, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the accessory is not operating.

Then, in step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the predetermined bit of the storage area “_FL_ACTION” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Here, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is not operating (No), and proceeds to the next step S1014.
On the other hand, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is in operation (Yes), skips steps S1014 to S1016, and proceeds to step S1017. move on.

In step S1014, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012. The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a win has been made using probability data. After executing the lottery determination, the process proceeds to the next step S1015.
When proceeding to step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win has been made in the lottery determination.
Here, at the end of the lottery determination, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register. Further, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, it indicates that the lottery is not won in the lottery determination, and the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”. Indicates that the lottery determination has been made.

Then, in step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, thereby determining whether or not the lottery determination has been won.
Here, when the value stored in the C register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery was not won in the lottery determination (No), and proceeds to the next step S1016.
On the other hand, when the value stored in the C register is other than “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery has been won (Yes), skips steps S1016 and S1017, and The process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1016, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) in the HL register.
Specifically, at the time of non-RT, the head address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) shown in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82B is stored in the HL register.

In addition, at the time of RT1, the head address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) shown in FIG. 82 (c) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82C is stored in the HL register.
RT2, RT3, and RT4 are the same as the non-RT and RT1.
When the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to the next step S1017.

In step S1017, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012 or S1016.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1012. When the accessory is not activated, if the lottery determination in step S1014 results in non-winning, in step S1016 The lottery determination is performed using the set lottery table. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, when the accessory is not operated (when “No” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed at least once in step S1014, and the lottery determination is performed at most twice in steps S1014 and S1017. .
On the other hand, when the accessory is activated (when “Yes” in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed only once in step S1017.

In addition, when the accessory is not operated, in step S1014, the first lottery determination is performed using the all-RT common lottery table. Is used to make a second lottery determination.
As described above, for any of the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 condition devices having the same winning probability, the probability data is defined in the all-RT common lottery table. As a result, the lottery table can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery determination process.
The lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a win has been made using probability data.
When proceeding to the lottery determination in step S1014 or S1017, first, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number identifier is on (data including the winning number identifier).
Here, at the start of the lottery determination process, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the operating state of the accessory is stored in the HL register (step S1012 in FIG. 87). For example, when the accessory is not operating, the HL register stores an address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG.

When bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the winning number identifier is on, and when bit 7 is “0”, the winning number identifier is off. Indicates that
In step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, so that the winning number identifier is on (including the winning number identifier). Data).

Here, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1022.
On the other hand, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1022, and proceeds to step S1022. The process proceeds to S1023.
If “No” in the step S1021, the main CPU 55 maintains the value of the C register. At this time, the value stored in the C register is, for example, a value updated in step S1028 described later. Further, the value stored in the C register is determined as a winning number when it is determined that the winning (Yes) is made in step S1027 described later.

In step S1022, the main CPU 55 acquires winning number data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores the data in the C register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUMOR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is “10011111 (B)”.
In “10011111 (B)”, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of “10011111 (B)” to “0” and stores “00011111 (B)” in the C register as winning number data.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, the value of the HL register (address of the data for lottery) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1023.

In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the repetition number identifier is ON (data including the repetition number identifier).
Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the repetition number identifier is on, and when bit 6 is “0”, the repetition number identifier is off. Indicates that there is.
In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, so that the repetition number identifier is on (including the repetition number identifier). Data).

Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1024.
On the other hand, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is not on (No), skips step S1024, and proceeds to step S1024. Proceed to S1025.
If “No” in the step S1023, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the B register. Note that “1” set in the B register at this time indicates that the number of times of rejection determination (the number of repetitions) is one.

In step S1024, the main CPU 55 obtains repetition count data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to “0” and stores the data in the B register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” in FIG. 81 is “010011100 (B)”.
In addition, in “01001100 (B)”, bits 0 to 5 indicate the number-of-repetitions data, and bit 6 indicates the number-of-repetitions identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of “001001100 (B)” to “0” and stores “000001100 (B)” in the B register as repetition count data. In other words, data indicating that the repetition is performed 12 times is stored in the B register.
Also, "0" is stored in the A register as an initial value.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thereby, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating the number of bytes of the probability data, and an identifier (setting) indicating whether the probability data differs according to the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the value-specific identifier is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1025.

In step S1025, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first saves the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register in the stack area of the RWM 53.
Next, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register. As a result, the B register has an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting value) indicating whether the probability data differs according to the set value. (Another identifier) is stored.

Thereafter, “1” is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the start address of the storage area where the probability data is stored.
Then, based on the data stored in the B register (data indicating whether the probability data is 1-byte data or 2-byte data and whether the probability data differs depending on the set value), Is calculated (designated), probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is obtained from the lottery table, and stored in the HL register or the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Here, a method of acquiring probability data will be described in more detail.
As described above, in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 (set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”), any one of “0” to “5” is stored as information on the set value.
In the A register, "0" is stored as an initial value.

Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is off The value of the A register ("0") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the A register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is on Since the identifier for each set value is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any one of "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
Thereafter, the value of the A register (“N”) is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

Also, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “5” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 20; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the A register is the same as in Example 1.

Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier for each set value is OFF, the value of the A register ("0") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Is further added to the value of the A register ("0") to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 2-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the HL register.

Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is on Since the identifier for each set value is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register. As a result, "N" (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any one of "0" to "5") is stored in the A register.
Further, the value of the A register ("N") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value, and the value of the A register ("N") is further added thereto, thereby obtaining a new HL register. Value. That is, adding the value of the A register (“N”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register is repeated twice.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1000; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

When “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “10” is added to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area where the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1250; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as the address of the probability data, and the probability data corresponding to this address is obtained from the lottery table.
Note that storing the acquired probability data in the HL register is the same as in Example 3.

  As described above, the head address (address of the first probability data) of the storage area in which the probability data is stored is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the A register is used as an offset value in the HL register. The probability data corresponding to the set value is obtained by adding to the value of.

Here, when the set value identifier is off, the initial value (“0”) stored in the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
When the set value-specific identifier is on, the value of the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK” is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register as an offset value.
Thus, the process can be shared between the case where the probability data is common to all the set values and the case where the probability data differs depending on the set values, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When the probability data is one-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register once, and when the probability data is two-byte data, the value of the A register is added to the HL register twice.
Thus, the process of calculating (designating) the address of the probability data can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 55 makes a determination as to whether or not it is successful.
Here, when performing the lottery determination using the probability data of the 2-byte data and the random number, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the HL register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new DE register value. .
When performing the lottery determination using the probability data of 1-byte data and the random number, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the A register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new DE register value.
Thus, the value of the DE register is updated.
As described above, the DE register stores the random number value (Step S1011 in FIG. 87). Then, in step S1026, the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.

After that, the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 are restored.
Thereby, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating the number of bytes of the probability data, and an identifier (setting) indicating whether the probability data differs according to the set value. This indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the value-specific identifier is stored. The value in the B register indicates the number of repetitions, and the value in the C register indicates the winning number.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning has been achieved.
Here, when the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register so that the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a borrow occurs), “1” is set to the carry flag of the flag register. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1".
In step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether the carry flag is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the winning is achieved.

Here, when the carry flag is not set to “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that no win has been made (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning has been achieved (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing of this flowchart.
Further, when “Yes” in step S1027, the value stored in the C register indicates the winning number determined in the lottery determination.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 55 updates the winning number data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the C register to obtain a new value of the C register. That is, the value of the C register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.
In step S1029, the main CPU 55 updates the repetition count data.
More specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. That is, the value of the B register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1030.

In step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, it indicates that the number of repetitions has been completed. When the value of the B register is not “0” (greater than “0”), the number of repetitions has been completed. Indicates no.
Then, in step S1030, main CPU 55 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1031.
On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

If “No” in the step S1030, in order to maintain the value of the HL register, the success / failure determination in the step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time.
As described above, since the same probability data as the previous time is determined to be used repeatedly, the same probability data does not need to be repeatedly defined in the lottery table, so that the use amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In step S1031, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the next lottery data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 updates the value of the HL register according to the following Examples 1) to 4).
Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each set value is off "1 + 1" (= "2") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on Add “6 + 1” (= “7”) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, add “1 × 2 + 1” (= “3”) to the value of the HL register to obtain the new value of the HL register. I do.
Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on, add “6 × 2 + 1” (= “13”) to the value of the HL register to obtain the value of the new HL register. I do.

As described above, in step S1026, the value of the HL register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 is restored.
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1031, the value of the HL register is an identifier (1 byte data identifier or 2 byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and whether the probability data differs according to the set value. It shows the address of a storage area in which data including an identifier (identifier for each set value) indicating whether or not the data is stored is stored.

When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, the 1BBA condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79) is used. The number of bytes of the probability data is 1 byte.
Therefore, by adding “2” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small win D condition device in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). This indicates the start address of the storage area of the lottery data (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of “DEFB @ LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier” is stored).

When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on, the lottery data (for example, 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) The number of bytes of the probability data in (data) is 6 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “7” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the 1BBB condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79). ) Of the storage area (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier ;; + identifier by setting value” is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, the small win D condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) is used. The number of bytes of the probability data in (data) is 2 bytes.
Therefore, by adding “3” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the small win E1 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). For example, the address of the storage area where the data of “DEFB @ LT_WRD; 2-byte data identifier” is stored is indicated.

Further, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value-specific identifier is on, the lottery data (for example, the small combination A condition device lottery data in the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81). ) Is 12 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "13" to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register becomes the next lottery data (for example, the small win B1 to the small win in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81). This indicates the start address of the storage area of the B12 condition device lottery data (for example, the address of the storage area in which the data of "DEFB @ LT_LOOPOR12; repeat number identifier" is stored).

In the next step S1032, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is a determination end identifier (“00 (H)”).
Here, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the identifier is the determination end identifier (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033.
On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is not “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that the data is not a determination end identifier (No), and returns to step S1021.

In the next step S1033, the main CPU 55 sets non-winning data.
Here, at the time of proceeding to step S1033, the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)” (determination end identifier). Then, in step S1033, the main CPU 55 stores “00 (H)” which is data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register as non-winning data. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

At the end of this flowchart (lottery determination), the value stored in the C register indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.
When the process proceeds to step S1033, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is “00 (H)”. In this case, the winning is not made (the condition device is not won).

In this way, by setting the data of the determination end identifier indicating the end of the lottery determination process to “00 (H)”, if no condition device is won in the lottery determination process, the non-winning The winning number “0” indicating (losing) is stored in the C register, and this flowchart ends. Note that the winning numbers less than “31” match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In other words, by acquiring the data of the determination end identifier without newly setting the winning number indicating the non-winning, the winning number indicating the non-winning can be stored in the C register.
On the other hand, if “Yes” in step S1027, the value stored in the C register at the end of this flowchart is other than “00 (H)”. In this case, one of the condition devices is won (determined as a winning number other than “0”).

  Here, for example, like the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device, a lottery result (also referred to as a push order small hand) having a different degree of advantage (number of payouts) depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42 or Unlike the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device, the lottery result accompanied by the RT shift depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 does not bias the advantage degree or the ratio of the RT shift depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is preferable to do so. That is, it is preferable that the appearance frequency of the correct answer is not biased depending on the pressing order.

For this reason, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that advantageous operation modes corresponding to the type of the lottery result (condition device) are equal in each operation mode. That is, it is preferable to determine the same probability data so that the appearance frequency of the correct answer becomes equal in each pressing order.
In such a case, the number of repetitions is determined, and the lottery determination is performed by repeatedly using the same probability data, thereby reducing the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table and equalizing the appearance frequency of the correct answer in each pressing order. Therefore, a greater effect can be exhibited.

Further, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table.
Then, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the relevant condition devices (for example, the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device, or the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition) With respect to the devices, the consecutive winning numbers (the winning numbers of the small win B1 condition device to the small win B12 condition device are from "12" to "22", and the winning numbers of the replay B1 condition device to the replay B3 condition device are "2" The number "4" can be obtained from the number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers less than “31” match the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In addition, at least in the normal section, the winning and replay condition device number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 but is transmitted as the effect group number.
In such a case, consecutive winning numbers (for example, from "12" to "22") are obtained for related condition devices (for example, from small win B1 condition device to small win B12 condition device). By doing so, when performing the process of converting the winning number into the effect group number, it is possible to determine the effect group number by determining to which range the acquired winning number belongs.
For this reason, it is not necessary to have a table for determining which of the effect group numbers the acquired winning numbers are, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 can be further reduced.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 1.
The condition device number set 1 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number. The processing of the condition device number set 1 corresponds to a condition device number determination unit.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 1 in step S1005, first, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is smaller than the conversion start number.

Here, at the start of the processing of the condition device number set 1, the value indicating the internal lottery 1 and the winning number determined by the lottery determination is stored in the C register.
In step S1041, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “$ NB_TRNS” indicates the conversion start number, and its value is “$ BBA_WIN_E2”. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), “$ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates an overlap winning of 1BBA and the small role E2, and its value is “31”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “31”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “31” from the value of the A register, and when carry occurs due to the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1042 to S1046. Then, the process proceeds to step S1047.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1042.
In step S1041, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1042, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores an operation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 3 in the HL register.
Here, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” indicates the head address of the winning number conversion table (FIG. 77A).
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Further, as described above, “$ NB_TRNS” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 3
= "1600 (H)"-"5D (H)"
= “15A3 (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15A3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15C3 (H)” (first time)
“15C3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E3 (H)” (second time)
"15E3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1603 (H)" (the third time)
Becomes
As a result, the "address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “$ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). Also, this data indicates "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the C register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the value of the C register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1604 (H)”.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1604 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. This data indicates "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the A register. As a result, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. After that, the value of the A register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.

After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1605 (H)”. After that, the value of the HL register is maintained until this flowchart (condition device number set 1) ends.
When the value of the HL register is “1605 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Also, this data indicates “advantaged section number” (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_BNS” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the accessory condition device number.
Further, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the character condition apparatus has not been won, and when the value is other than “0”, it indicates that the character condition apparatus has been won.

Furthermore, the previous game is a non-internal game, and when the player wins the accessory condition device in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory item condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1046 described later.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination included in the winning combination condition device stops on the activated line, the main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (sets it to “0”).

For this reason, the previous game is a non-internal game, and when winning the accessory condition device in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in step S1043.
If the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” in step S1043, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination included in the winning accessory condition device that has won the accessory condition device before the previous game and is included in the winning accessory condition device. Means that has not yet stopped on the active line. That is, it means that the game is an inside game in which the winning information of the special role is carried over.

Then, in step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the character condition apparatus has been won. That is, it is determined whether or not the inside is inside.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory condition device has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1044.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has been won, skips steps S1044 to S1046, and proceeds to step S1047. Proceed to.

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_AT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the advantageous section number.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that no winning has been won (determined to shift), and when “1”, it indicates that the winning has been won in advantageous section 1, When it is “2”, it indicates that the player has won the advantageous section 2.

Furthermore, the last game is a game of the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045 described later.
Further, based on the winning of the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, the processing shifts to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and thereafter, when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 ends and returns to the normal section, the main CPU 55 The value of “_NB_CND_AT” is cleared (set to “0”).

For this reason, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” in step S1044.
When the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” in step S1044, the player wins the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 before the previous game, and proceeds to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 based on the winning. Means that has not finished yet. In other words, it means that the game is in the standby section, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

Then, in step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the winning section 1 or 2 has been won. I do.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1045.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 has been won, skips step S1045, and proceeds to step S1045. Proceed to S1046.

In step S1045, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1045, the value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.

In step S1046, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1047, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1041 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1041 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1042, the A register stores a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number”. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1047 after step S1042, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, when the process proceeds to step S1047, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

“_NB_CND_NOR” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a winning and replay condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, and when “No” in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047 after step S1042. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
The main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” (to “0”) at the end of the game or before the start switch 41 can be operated in the next game.

As described above, in the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” before the timing of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046). (Step S1043).
By this, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether or not it is inside, it is determined whether or not it is inside (whether it has won the accessory condition device in this game or has won the accessory condition device before the previous game). ) Can be determined, so that the usage of the RWM 53 can be reduced accordingly.

In condition device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1043). When it is determined that the value is “0”, the advantageous section number is set to “_NB_CND_AT”. It is stored (step S1044), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046), and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” (step S1047).
In this way, it is possible to determine to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 without requiring complicated processing in the game that has been won by the accessory condition apparatus.

In the game, when the winning number is determined to be “31” to “36”, “43” to “45”, or “48” to “50”, the accessory condition apparatus Will be elected.
In this case, if it is determined in step S1043 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the process proceeds to step S1044, so that the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1043 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so that the values of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the values of “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained. Will be done.

Thus, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”. At this time, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” are maintained.
Thus, it is possible to appropriately process the winning of the accessory condition apparatus and the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, in the game, when the winning number is determined to be “43” to “47”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), and the winning number is changed to “48” to “52”. When the number is determined to be the first, it is won (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 2.
In this case, if it is determined in step S1044 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1044 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, step S1045 is skipped, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.

As described above, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated, and when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, “_NB_CND_AT” Maintain the value of.
This makes it possible to appropriately process the determination to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In the present embodiment, the process of storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1044) or the process of storing the accessory condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046) are performed. The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” were maintained.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by storing (overwriting) the same advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” or storing (overwriting) the same character condition apparatus number in “_NB_CND_BNS”, the “_NB_CND_BNS” The value or the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained.

Further, in the present game, when the winning number is determined to be less than “31”, “Yes” is determined in step S1041, and the process proceeds to step S1047. At this time, the winning number is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1047, the value of the A register is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” as a winning and replay condition device number.
That is, when the winning number is less than “31”, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”.

Then, only when the winning number is equal to or greater than “31”, the condition device number is determined from the winning number by using the winning number conversion table that defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number.
For this reason, for the number less than “31”, the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number does not have to be defined in the winning number conversion table, so that the usage amount of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the equipment condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. , A control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be executed.

Furthermore, the winning numbers “43” to “52” are treated as those for performing the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantage numbers are also obtained. A lottery regarding the addition of a section may be executed.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery for adding an advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of Sixteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the sixteenth embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 1 of the sixteenth embodiment, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”.
On the other hand, in condition device number set 2 of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and thereafter, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number and the like in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1051.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1051, the condition device number set 2 (FIG. 92) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Further, in step S1006, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process proceeds to step S1052, and the process for stopping all the reels (FIG. 91) is executed.
Then, in step S1052, when the process for stopping all reels is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing at the time of stopping all reels in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
The all-reel-stopped process is a process of controlling the turning on / off of the internal flag indicating that the winning information of the special combination has been carried over after the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to the all reels stop processing of step S1052, first, in step S1061, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the active line.

Here, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the active line (Yes), the process skips steps S1062 and S1063 and proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not stopped on the activated line (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1062.

In step S1062, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the winning item condition device has been won.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has been won, and proceeds to the next step S1063.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the character condition apparatus has not been won, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

In step S1063, the main CPU 55 turns on the internal medium flag.
Here, “_FL_PRD_LOT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores an internal medium flag.
The "internal flag" is a flag indicating that the game is an internal game in which the winning information of the special combination is carried over.
Furthermore, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.

Then, in step S1063, the main CPU 55 stores “FF (H)” in the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S1064, the main CPU 55 clears the internal medium flag.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1065.
In step S1065, the main CPU 55 clears the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 2.
The condition device number set 2 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 2 in step S1051, first in step S1071, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1071 are the same as those in step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1072 to S1074 and proceeds to step S1075.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1072.
In step S1071, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting “31” from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1072, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the “accessory condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1072, a value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In the condition device number set 2, the value of the C register (winning number) is used in steps S1071 and S1076, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1072.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1072 is the same as that in step S1042 in FIG.

In step S1073, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1073 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the flow advances to the next step S1074.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1073 that the accessory condition apparatus number is other than “0” (No), the process skips step S1074 and proceeds to step S1075.

In step S1074, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1074, the E register stores a value indicating the accessory condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1075, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1071 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1072, the A register stores a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number”. Therefore, also when the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1075, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

  As described above, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when the answer is “Yes” in step S1071 and proceeds to step S1075, and when the result is “No” in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075 via step S1072. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1076, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1076, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1076, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” indicates an advantageous section conversion start number, and its value is “$ AT1_BBA”. Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ AT1_BBA” indicates a single winning of 1BBA and a winning of the advantageous section 1, and its value is “38”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when carry is generated by the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips steps S1077 to S1079. Then, the process according to the flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or greater than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1077.

In step S1077, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1077 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1078.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1078 and S1079 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
Specifically, in step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 is “FF (H)”, thereby determining whether or not the internal medium flag is on. Judge.
Here, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is on, skips step S1079, and executes the processing according to this flowchart. finish.
On the other hand, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the internal medium flag is off, and proceeds to the next step S1079.

In step S1079, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1079, the value indicating the address of the advantageous section number is stored in the HL register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1073), and if it is determined that the value is “0” (Yes), the accessory device condition device number Is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1074), and then the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 2, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, in this game, It is not possible to determine whether the game has been won or whether the game has been won before the last game.

Therefore, in condition apparatus number set 2, in step S1078 before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, whether or not the internal medium flag is ON (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”) Is determined to determine whether the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or whether the player has won the accessory condition device before the previous game.
Then, when the internal medium flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), it is determined that the bonus condition device has been won in the current game, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079). ).

Here, in the condition device number set 2, in step S1072, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1074, the value of the E register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1075, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1074, the accessory condition device number is not lost. Even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1075, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.

Further, in step S1076, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and thereafter, “＠NB_TRNS_AT” (= “43”) is subtracted from the value of the A register, so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. It is determined whether or not.
Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1076, there is no problem in the process of storing the advantageous section number.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, after step S1074, the E register can be used for another process. Similarly, after step S1075, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1076, the C register can be used for other processing.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

In the condition device number set 2, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is ON (whether or not the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”). It was determined whether the device was won or whether the character condition device was won before the previous game.
However, it is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the process moves to RT4 during the inside. For this reason, for example, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not the corresponding RT4 is inside, so that the player has won the accessory condition device in the current game or has won the accessory condition device before the previous game. May be determined.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (3) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (3) in FIG. 93 (a) indicates the winning number definition for the winning numbers "31" to "42".
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), "$ BBA EQU 38; 1BBA single winning + transfer lottery" means that "$ BBA" indicates "1BBA single winning" and "execution of transfer lottery". Means that the winning number corresponding to "" is the number "38".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38", the "1BBA condition device" is solely won, and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, or to the type of the advantageous section from the normal section The transfer lottery that determines whether to perform the transfer can be executed.
Note that there are advantageous sections 1 and 2 as advantageous section types. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (deciding to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous gaming state having no right to shift to the ART, and when winning in the advantageous section 2, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is determined. After that, the system moves to ART.

As shown in FIG. 93 (c), “$ BBA_WD EQU 39; 1BBA + Small Winning D Duplicate Winning + Transition Lottery” means that “$ BBA_WD” is “1BBA and Small Winning D Duplicate Winning” and “Execution of Transfer Lottery”. Means that the winning number corresponding to “$ BBA_WD” is “39”.
When the winning number is determined to be “39”, the “1BBA condition device” and the “small winning combination D condition device” are repeatedly won, and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section is determined. A shift lottery that determines which type of advantageous section to shift to can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 93 (a), in this embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “42”. Then, the winning number determination means determines any one of the numerical values of “0” to “42” as the winning number.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” to “33” indicate that the winning condition device is independently won, or the winning condition device and the prize and replay condition device are used. The winning numbers "34" to "37" correspond to the addition of an advantageous section, and the winning numbers "38" to "42" correspond to the execution of the transfer lottery. .

Note that the winning numbers “38” to “42” may also correspond to the addition of the advantageous section. When the winning number is determined to be "38" to "42", the transfer lottery may be executed and the addition of the advantageous section may be executed.
“When the winning number is determined to be“ 38 ”to“ 42 ”” means that the winning number is determined to be any of “38” to “42”.
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section and the change content of the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 93 (d) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS" indicates "conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS" is "@ BBA_WIN_E2". Means that As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the “conversion start number”, the winning number conversion table is used to convert the winning number from the winning number condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number. Is acquired (stored).

Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@NB_TRNS_UP EQU @ RE; additional conversion start number" means that "@NB_TRNS_UP" indicates "additional conversion start number", and the value corresponding to "@NB_TRNS_UP" is It means "@RE". As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ RE” = “34”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_UP” = “$ RE” = “34”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the "addition conversion start number", there is a case where an advantageous section is added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), "$ NB_TRNS_AT EQU $ BBA; advantageous section conversion start number" corresponds to "@NB_TRNS_AT" indicating "advantageous section conversion start number" and "@NB_TRNS_AT". It means that the value is “$ BBA”. As shown in FIG. 93A, “$ BBA” = “38”. Therefore, “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or greater than the "advantageous section conversion start number", a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section may be executed.

FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” to “42”, the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address #### (for example, address 1600 (H)) and stores address #### 1 (for example, address 1601 (H)) means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “$ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "28" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address ### 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ### 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address #### and the address #### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 94 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, 0; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and stores address #### 3. (Eg, address 1603 (H)) means that "0" is stored. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Therefore, "2" is stored in the address #### 2.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address #### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".
Note that the winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 94 (d), FIG. 95, and FIG. 96 are diagrams showing an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the all-RT common lottery table (6), which is a diagram following FIG. 94 (d). FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the all-RT common lottery table (7), which is a diagram following FIG. 95.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 97 (a) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery address table. FIG. 97 (b) shows the two-stage lottery table 1, FIG. 97 (c) shows the two-stage lottery table 2, and FIG. 97 (d) shows the two-stage lottery table 3. 97 (e) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 4, and FIG. 97 (f) is a diagram showing the two-stage lottery table 5.
Here, the two-stage lottery address table and the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are used in the later-described two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and the lottery without setting difference in FIG. ing. In the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. That is, the shift lottery that determines whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section corresponds to a two-stage lottery and a lottery without a setting difference.

The two-stage lottery address table defines which of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is used.
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the winning number is determined to be “38”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT1” (two-stage lottery table 1) is used.
Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” (two-stage lottery table 2) is used. When the winning number is determined to be “40”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT3” (two-stage). The lottery table 3) is used.
When the winning number is determined to be "41", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT4" (two-stage lottery table 4) is used. When the winning number is determined to be "42", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT5" (two-stage lottery) is used. Table 5) is used.

The two-stage lottery table 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "38", and defines winning data and probability data.
“DEFB 2; winning data” on the first line indicates that the winning data is “2”.
“DEFB 85; probability data (winning data 2)” in the second line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when the winning is performed using this probability data, the winning data is “2”. Is determined.

“DEFB 85; probability data (winning data 1)” on the third line indicates that “85” is defined as the probability data, and when the winning is performed using this probability data, the winning data is “1”. Is determined.
“; // DEFB 86; probability data (winning data 0)” on the fourth line is a comment indicating that the probability that the winning data is determined to be “0” is “86/256”. Is not remembered as
The two-stage lottery tables 2 to 5 are the same as the two-stage lottery table 1.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1101.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1101, the condition device number set 3 (FIG. 99) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Then, in step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 3.
The condition device number set 3 is a process of determining (acquiring, storing, and determining) a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When the process proceeds to the condition device number set 3 in step S1101, first, in step S1111, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1111 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1112 to S1118 and proceeds to step S1119.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1112.
In step S1111, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1112, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores an operation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 2 in the HL register.
For example, “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS” = “$ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 2
= "1600 (H)"-"3E (H)"
= “15C2 (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “32”.
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15C2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15E2 (H)” (first time)
“15E2 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “1602 (H)” (second time)
Becomes
Thereby, “the address of the condition device number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

In other words, the address stored in the HL register (“15C2 (H)” in the present embodiment) is used as a reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as an offset value (in the present embodiment, stored in the A register). By setting the value obtained by doubling the winning number as an offset value), it is possible to calculate (designate) an address in which the condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored.
Here, the value of the A register is added twice (the value obtained by doubling the winning number is set as the offset value) is that two data (data indicating the accessory condition apparatus number, And two pieces of data indicating the winning and replay condition device numbers) are stored in the winning number conversion table.

  Note that, as in the sixteenth embodiment, three data (data indicating a bonus condition device number, data indicating a winning and replay condition device number, and data indicating an advantageous section number) for one winning number. When stored in the winning number conversion table, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored by adding the value of the A register three times (the value obtained by multiplying the winning number by 3 is used as the offset value). Address can be calculated (specified).

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the E register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1602 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “$ NB_1BBB” (= “2”). This data also indicates the "accessory condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the E register. As a result, "2" indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register. Thereafter, the value of the E register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 3) ends.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1603 (H)”.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register.
In the condition device number set 3, the value (winning number) of the C register is used in steps S1111 and S1115, so that the value (winning number) of the C register is not destroyed in step S1112.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Further, this data indicates "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the D register. As a result, “0” indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register. Thereafter, the value of the D register is maintained until the present flowchart (condition device number set 3) ends.

In step S1042 in FIG. 89, the value indicating the “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
In the condition device number set 3, the A register is used in step S1115 described later. Therefore, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is not lost before the winning and replay condition device number is stored in step S1119 described later.

In step S1113, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game is Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.
Of course, other information such as an RT number may be referred to determine whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.

Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1113 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition apparatus number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1114.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the accessory condition apparatus number is other than “0” (No), the process skips steps S1114 to S1117 and proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1114, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1114 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1115.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1115, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1115, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1115, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “$ NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when carry occurs due to the subtraction, determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes), and skips step S1116. The process proceeds to step S1117.
On the other hand, when the carry does not occur due to the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or more than the advantageous section conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1116.
In step S1115, it is determined whether a carry has occurred by subtracting "38" from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

When proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery ends, the process proceeds to the next step S1117.
In step S1117, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1117, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the E register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In the next step S1118, the main CPU 55 moves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, in step S1112, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. Therefore, when proceeding to step S1118 via step S1112, the value of the D register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1118, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register.
Then, in step S1118, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the D register in the A register.

In the next step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1111 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1111 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.

Also, when the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
Then, in step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, in step S1118, the value of the D register (indicating the winning and replay condition device number) is stored in the A register.
As described above, the winning and replay conditions are determined when “Yes” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, and when “No” is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119. The process of storing the device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of the two-stage lottery process.
The two-stage lottery is a process of acquiring an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the two-stage lottery in step S1116, first, in step S1121, the main CPU 55 sets a two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, first, the main CPU 55 stores the calculation result of “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” in the HL register.

Here, “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” indicates the start address of the two-stage lottery address table (FIG. 97A).
For example, “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” = “1700 (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and (d), “$ NB_TRNS_AT” = “$ BBA” = “38”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1700 (H)"-"38 (D)"
= "1700 (H)"-"26 (H)"
= “16DA (H)”
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register (winning number) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value.
As described above, in step S1115 of FIG. 99, “38” is subtracted from the value (winning number) of the A register to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. Keep without. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”. Therefore, even when the processing proceeds to step S1121, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

For example, assume that the value (winning number) of the A register is “39”.
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“16DA (H)” + “27 (H)” = “1701 (H)”
Becomes

In other words, the address indicated by the HL register (“16DA (H)” in the present embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value, thereby obtaining the “winning number” corresponding to the determined winning number. It is possible to calculate (specify) the address of “address specification data”.
The “address designation data” is data stored in the two-stage lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5.

“DEFB TBL — 2NDAT_LOT1− ＄; winning number 38” on the two-stage lottery address table of FIG. 97A is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the two-stage lottery table 1.
Similarly, “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2- −; winning number 39” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 2, and “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT3- ＄; winning number 40” is 2 This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the stage lottery table 3.
“DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT4-４; winning number 41” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table 4, and “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT5- ＄; winning number 42” is two-stage. This is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the lottery table 5.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)”, the data (address designation data) corresponding to this address is “DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2- −; winning number 39” as shown in FIG. It is.

Here, "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 (FIG. 97 (c)).
For example, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” = “1708 (H)”.
"@" Indicates the current address. As described above, the current address is “1701 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the A register is
"TBL_2NDAT_LOT2"-"＄"
= "1708 (H)"-"1701 (H)"
= "7 (H)"
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
When the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)” and the value of the A register is “7 (H)”, the value of the new HL register is
"1701 (H)" + "7 (H)"
= "1708 (H)"
Becomes

The value of the HL register “1708 (H)” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table used in the next lottery without setting difference in step S1122.
The address “1708 (H)” indicates the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 in FIG. 97 (c).
Thus, in step S1121, a two-stage lottery table is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1122.

When proceeding to step S1122, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery without setting difference (FIG. 101). When the lottery without setting difference ends, the process proceeds to the next step S1123.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the winning value in the lottery without setting difference as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1123, the A register stores the winning value in the lottery without setting difference.
Then, in step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 as an advantageous section number. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, advantages of calculating (designating) the top address of the two-stage lottery table using the two-stage lottery address table include the following.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 (b) to (f), the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 each store (store) 3-byte data.
Therefore, the head address (“1705 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 1 and the head address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 are three bytes apart.

Similarly, the head address (“1708 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 2 and the head address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 are three bytes apart.
The head address (“170B (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 3 and the head address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 are three bytes apart.
Further, the head address (“170E (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 4 and the head address (“1711 (H)”) of the two-stage lottery table 5 are three bytes apart.

In such a case, for example, "@ 72_H" which is a value obtained by tripled "@NB_TRNS_AT"("26(H)") from the head address ("1705 (H)") of the two-stage lottery table 1. )) To calculate “1693 (H)”, and store this in the HL register as a reference address. The reason why "@NB_TRNS_AT" is tripled is that the data stored in each two-stage lottery table is 3 bytes. When N-byte data is stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, "@NB_TRNS_AT" is multiplied by N.
Then, the address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is calculated (designated) by adding a value obtained by multiplying the winning number data stored in the A register by three times to the reference address. Can also. When N-byte data is stored in each of the two-stage lottery tables, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the winning number by N is added.

That is, the calculation result of “1705 (H)” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” × 3 is stored in the HL register as a reference address.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“1705 (H)” − “@ NB_TRNS_AT” × 3
= "1705 (H)"-"26 (H)" x 3
= "1693 (H)"
Becomes

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, assume that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is “39”.
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1693 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16 BA (H)" (first time)
"16BA (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16E1 (H)" (second time)
"16E1 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "1708 (H)" (the third time)
Becomes
As a result, the "address of the condition device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

However, in the development stage of the slot machine 10, the contents of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 may be changed.
For example, in the two-stage lottery table 1, the winning probability of the advantageous section number "1" may be set to 0% and the winning probability of the advantageous section number "2" may be set to 100%.
In this case, in the two-stage lottery table 1, since the number of advantageous section numbers to be won is one, the intervals between the top addresses of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 are not three bytes at a time.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), by providing a two-stage lottery address table for designating the start address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number, the two-stage lottery can be performed in the development stage of the slot machine 10. Even if the intervals between the head addresses of the tables 1 to 5 are not equal, the head address of the two-stage lottery table can be designated, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with a specification change.

Further, the start address of the corresponding two-stage lottery table can be designated from the determined winning number without using the two-stage lottery address table.
However, in this case, in step S1121 of FIG. 100, first, it is determined whether or not the winning number is “38”, and when it is determined to be “38”, the start address of the two-stage lottery table 1 is determined. If "1705 (H)" is designated and it is determined that the number is not "38", then it is determined whether or not the winning number is "39".

When it is determined that the winning number is “39”, “1708 (H)” which is the head address of the two-stage lottery table 2 is designated, and when it is determined that it is not “39”, It is determined whether or not the winning number is “40”.
Such processing is repeated until the start address of the two-stage lottery table corresponding to the winning number is designated.

Therefore, the processing until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated becomes longer.
Also, a program for designating the start address of the two-stage lottery table is required.
On the other hand, if the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated by using the two-stage lottery address table, the processing until the start address of the two-stage lottery table is designated can be shortened, and the start of the two-stage lottery table can be shortened. Since it is not necessary to define a program for specifying an address, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process without a setting difference.
The lottery without setting difference is a process of determining an advantageous section number based on the two-stage lottery table set in step S1121 of FIG.
When the process proceeds to the lottery without setting difference in step S1122, first, in step S1131, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
In the present embodiment, a counter is provided which counts the range from “0” to “255” as one cycle. Then, the main CPU 55 acquires a 1-byte random number value from this counter for lottery without setting difference, and stores it in the A register.
Note that the lower 1 byte of the 2-byte counter may be obtained as a random value.

When proceeding to the next step S1132, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores data in which the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is set to “0” in the B register. At this time, the data itself corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is data before bit 7 is set to “0”.
Here, in the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 of FIGS. 97 (b) to (f), “2 (D)” is defined as the winning data.

However, when the winning data is determined as “2”, “10000010 (B)” can be defined as the winning data.
Similarly, when the winning data is determined to be “1”, “10000001 (B)” can be defined as the winning data.
In this case, of the 8-bit data, bits 0 to 6 indicate winning data, and bit 7 indicates “winning determined data”.
The “winning confirmation data” is data indicating that the winning data is decided as a winning value.

When proceeding to the next step S1133, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not winning determination data is included.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”.
If the bit 7 is "1", it is determined that the winning determination data is included (Yes), and the process skips steps S1134 to S1138 and proceeds to step S1139. As a result, of the 8-bit data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, bits 0 to 6 (winning data) are determined as the winning value.
On the other hand, when the bit 7 is “0”, it is determined that the winning determination data is not included (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1134.

In step S1134, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the two-stage lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the probability data.
When the process proceeds to the next step S1135, the main CPU 55 makes a determination as to whether or not it is successful.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the value of the A register, and stores the result of the subtraction in the HL register.

When proceeding to the next step S1136, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a winning has been achieved.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not carry has occurred due to the subtraction in step S1135.
Here, when a carry occurs due to the subtraction, it is determined that the winning has occurred (Yes), and the process skips steps S1137 and S1138 and proceeds to step S1139.
On the other hand, when no carry occurs due to the subtraction, it is determined that no winning has been made (No), and the flow proceeds to the next step S1137.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the winning data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register.
In the next step S1138, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning data is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.

If it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1134.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1139.
In step S1139, the main CPU 55 acquires the winning data as a winning value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the A register. In this way, the winning data is stored in the A register as a winning value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, “No” is determined in step S1111 of FIG. 99. Therefore, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference (shift lottery) can be executed.
In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99; when the advantageous section number is stored), steps S1115 and S1116 are performed. Since the process skips and proceeds to step S1117, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
This makes it possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Note that when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. The only difference is that the lottery relating to the transition (two-step lottery and lottery without setting difference) is not executed.
Then, even when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”), the addition of the advantageous section (the game state during the advantageous section is the player) It is possible to execute the lottery for changing the performance so as to be advantageous to the player or including adding the number of games of the AT in the advantageous section.

In the case where the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (the advantageous section number is (When it is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. As a result, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even in this case, the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

Further, as described above, when the internal lottery 1 and the winning number determined by the lottery determination are the numbers "38" to "42", the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (when “No” in step S1113 of FIG. 99; when the accessory condition device number is stored), steps S1114 to S1114 are performed. Since step S1117 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1118, the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed.
This makes it possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “42”, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (the accessory condition apparatus) When the number is stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 in FIG. 99 to execute the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference. In this case, step S1123 in FIG. 100 is skipped. As a result, the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained.
Even in this case, the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the usage amount of the RWM 55 without requiring complicated processing.

  In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “38” to “40”, the winning of the character condition apparatus is performed, and the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed. Become. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117).

Furthermore, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning condition device and the winning condition device are overlapped, and there is no two-stage lottery and setting difference. The lottery can be executed. In this case, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116), and thereafter, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1117), and the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” (step S1117). Step S1118).
Thereby, in the game won in the accessory condition apparatus, it is possible to execute the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section without requiring complicated processing.

<Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the seventeenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 3 of the seventeenth embodiment, a two-stage lottery is performed, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”. The replay condition device number was stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 4 of the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. A two-stage lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number and the like in a modification of the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1052 is the same as that of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1141.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1141, the condition device number set 4 (FIG. 103) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 4.
The condition device number set 4 is a process of determining a condition device number and an advantageous section number from a winning number.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 4 in step S1141, first, in step S1151, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1151 are the same as those in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1152 to S1154 and proceeds to step S1155.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1152.
In step S1151, "31" is subtracted from the value (winning number) of the A register to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1152, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1152, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1152 is the same as that in step S1112 in FIG.

  In the condition device number set 3 of FIG. 99, before storing the winning and replay condition device number in step S1119, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the A register in step S1115. For this reason, in order to prevent the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number from being lost, in step S1112, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the D register instead of the A register.

In step S1153, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1153 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
Then, in step S1153, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1153 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), step S1154 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1155.

In step S1154, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number, and in the next step S1155, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1154 are the same as those in step S1074 in FIG. 92, and the specific contents of the processing in step S1155 are the same as those in step S1075 in FIG.

  The winning and replay condition device number is set to “_NB_CND_NOR” when “Yes” in step S1151 and proceeds to step S1155, and when “No” in step S1151 and proceeds to step S1155 after step S1152. Can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1156, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1156 are the same as those in step S1115 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1157 to S1116 are skipped, and the processing in this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1157.

When proceeding to step S1157, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1157 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1158 and S1116 are skipped, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the flow advances to the next step S1158.

In step S1158, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
The specific contents of the processing in step S1158 are the same as those in step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is ON, step S1116 is skipped, and the processing in this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1158 that the internal medium flag is off, the process advances to next step S1116.

When proceeding to step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-stage lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-stage lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The contents of the two-stage lottery process in step S1116 are the same as in the seventeenth embodiment.

As described above, in the condition device number set 4, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are “38” to “40”, the accessory condition device is won, and 2 The stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference can be executed.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ If it is other than “0” (“No” in step S1153), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1154 is skipped).

In addition, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “39” or “40”, the winning of the character condition apparatus and the winning condition apparatus is a double win, and there is no difference between the two-stage lottery and the setting. The lottery can be executed.
In this case, according to the value of “_NB_CND_BNS”, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained, and then the winning condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” ( Step S1155).

Thereafter, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (when “No” in step S1158), a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference (transition lottery) are executed (step S1116), and the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” Is "FF (H)" (when "Yes" in step S1158), the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference are not executed (step S1116 is skipped).
Thereby, in the game won in the accessory condition apparatus, it is possible to execute the processing relating to the shift to the advantageous section without requiring complicated processing.

In condition device number set 4, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (“Yes” in step S1153), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), Thereafter, a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 4, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, in this game, It is impossible to determine whether the device has been won or whether the device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1158 before executing the two-stage lottery and the lottery without setting difference, it is determined whether or not the internal medium flag is ON, and thus the character condition device is won in this game. It is determined whether or not the player has won the accessory condition apparatus before the previous game.
Then, when the inside inside flag is off, it is determined that the character condition apparatus has been won in the current game, and a two-stage lottery and a lottery without setting difference are executed (step S1116).

In the condition device number set 4, in step S1152, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1154, the value of the E register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1155, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1154, the accessory condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1155, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.

Also, in step S1156, the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and thereafter, “＠NB_TRNS_AT” (= “38”) is subtracted from the value of the A register, so that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number. It is determined whether or not.
As described above, in the condition device number set 4, after step S1154, the E register can be used for another process. Similarly, after step S1155, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1156, the C register can be used for other processing.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

  Also, in condition device number set 4, in step S1158, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is ON, thereby determining whether the character condition device has been won in the current game or the character condition device in the previous game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by determining whether or not the corresponding RT4 is in the inside, it is determined whether or not the character condition device has been won in the game this time, or the character condition device before the previous game. May be determined.

  In the present embodiment, the two-stage lottery and the lottery with no setting difference have been described as the shift lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. For example, at the start of the current game, “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) is stored. Even if a value other than “0” is stored, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, or the game of the AT in the advantageous section is added) (Including adding the number of times), and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the equipment condition device number) is “0”, the winning number is determined to be “37”. , A control process of storing “2” in “_NB_CND_AT” may be executed.
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery regarding the addition of an advantageous section is performed based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be executed.

Furthermore, the winning numbers “38” to “42” were treated as those for performing the transfer lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section. However, even when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section, the advantageous section May be executed.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery for adding an advantageous section is not executed.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.
The definition of the winning numbers for the winning numbers “31” to “42” is the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion data definition is the same as the winning number conversion data definition of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (d).
Further, the winning number conversion table is the same as the winning number conversion table of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number lottery data definition in the present embodiment.
The winning number identifier, the repetition number identifier, the identifier for each set value, the 2-byte data identifier, the 1-byte data identifier, and the determination end identifier are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
“Advantage section number 1 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the winning section 1 has been won (determined to shift).

The “advantage section number 2 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the winning section 2 has been won (determined to shift).
The advantageous section number 1 identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are collectively referred to as “advantage section number identifier”.
"Advantage section number mask data" is data for masking (to "0") bit data (bit 3 to bit 7) corresponding to an identifier other than the advantage section number identifier.

Then, “$ LT_AT1 EQU 00000001B; advantageous section number 1 identifier” means that “$ LT_AT1” indicates “advantage section number 1 identifier”, and that data corresponding to “$ LT_AT1” is “00000001 (B)”. Means
In addition, “$ LT_AT2 EQU 00000010B; advantageous section number 2 identifier” means that “$ LT_AT2” indicates “advantage section number 2 identifier”, and that data corresponding to “$ LT_AT2” is “00000010 (B)”. Means
Furthermore, “@MSK_AT EQU 00000111B; advantageous section number mask data” indicates that “@MSK_AT” indicates “advantageous section number mask data”, and data corresponding to “@MSK_AT” is “00000111 (B)”. Means that.

FIG. 105 to FIG. 108 are diagrams illustrating an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 105 is a view showing the all RT common lottery table (8). FIG. 106 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (9), which is a view following FIG. 105. FIG. 107 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (10), which is a view following FIG. 106. FIG. 108 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (11), which is a view following FIG. 107.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Here, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier ;; + advantage section number 1 identifier" in FIG. 106 is data obtained by performing an OR operation on "@LT_BYT" and "@ LT_AT1". This is stored in the second row of “1BBA condition device lottery data”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 104A, “$ LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), “$ LT_AT1” indicates an advantageous section number 1 identifier, and its value is “00000001 (B)”.

Further, when "@LT_BYT" and "@ LT_AT1" are OR-operated,
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00000001 (B): @ LT_AT1
00000010 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1" indicates that "000010001 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
The comment "; 1 byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier" indicates that the data includes a 1 byte data identifier and an advantageous section number 1 identifier.

Further, when AND operation is performed on “000000101 (B)” and “@MSK_AT”,
00001001 (B): LT_BYT OR LT_AT1
00000111 (B): @MSK_AT
00000001 (B): Data after AND operation.
As a result, “00000001 (B)” = “$ LT_AT1” (advantage section number 1 identifier) can be obtained.

When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 1 is won, data including the 2-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning section 2 is won, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

In addition, the decision to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must be linked to a condition device having no setting difference. That is, the probability of shifting to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must not differ depending on the set value.
Therefore, one 8-bit data including the set value-specific identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.
Similarly, one 8-bit data including the set value-specific identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.

"1BBA condition device lottery data" is defined in the all RT common lottery table (8) of FIG. 105, and "1BBA condition device lottery data" is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (9) of FIG. In addition, "1BBA condition device lottery data" is also defined in the all RT common lottery table (10) of FIG.
Here, when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. In this case, if it is determined that the winning is determined in the winning / rejecting determination, the winning number is determined to be “38”, but since the advantageous section number identifier is not determined, the winning is not performed in the advantageous section.

Also, when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. If it is determined at this time that the winning is determined, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is determined.
Further, when the “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used, “$ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. If it is determined at this time that the winning is determined, the winning number is determined to be "38" and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 2 is won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the all-RT common lottery table associates the winning number data “38” with the probability data “10” and does not associate the advantageous section number identifier with the 1BBA condition device lottery data ( 105), 1BBA condition apparatus lottery data (FIG. 106) in which the winning number data “38”, the probability data “10”, and the advantageous section number 1 identifier are associated, the winning number data “38”, and the probability data “10”. And the 1BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 107) in which the identifier is associated with the advantageous section number 2 identifier.
That is, a plurality of pieces of probability data are defined corresponding to one piece of winning number data. Then, among the plurality of pieces of probability data corresponding to one winning number data, one piece of probability data is associated with data indicating that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is performed. The probability data is not associated with data indicating that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed.

For this reason, as described above, even if the winning number is determined to be the same “38” (the single BBA condition device is independently won), when the winning section is not won and the winning section 1 There is a time when a win is made and a time when a win is made in the advantageous section 2.
“1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, “Small win D condition device lottery data”, and “Small win E1 condition device lottery data” also include “ 1BBA condition device lottery data ".

In FIG. 105, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand E1 condition device lottery data”, “small hand D condition device lottery data”, And "Small win E1 condition device lottery data", a set of non-winning data in an advantageous section is defined.
Further, in FIG. 106, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small hand E1 condition device lottery data”, “small hand D condition device lottery data” , And "Small Winner E1 Conditional Device Lottery Data", those that win in the advantageous section 1 are defined as a group.

Further, in FIG. 107, “1BBA condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small win D condition device lottery data”, “1BBA + small win E1 condition device lottery data”, “small win D condition device lottery data”, In addition, with respect to “small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a set of winning data in the advantageous section 2 is defined as a group.
As described above, “a group of lottery data that is not won in the advantageous section” → “a group of lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 1” → “a group of lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 2”. By defining data in the lottery table, it is only necessary to determine the winning number data in "1BBA condition device lottery data", so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

Specifically, the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” in the present embodiment are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
In other words, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA single winning” is “38”, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA + small win D overlapping winning” is “39”, and corresponds to “1BBA + small winning E1 overlapping winning”. The winning number is “40”, the winning number corresponding to “Small win D alone win” is “41”, and the win number corresponding to “Small win E1 single win” is “42”.

As described above, the corresponding winning numbers are consecutive from “1BBA single winning” to “small win E1 single winning”.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 105, if “$ BBA” (= “38”) is determined as the winning number data for “1 BBA condition device lottery data”, “1 BBA + small role D condition device lottery data” As for “data”, a value (“39”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“38”) of “1BBA condition device lottery data” can be used as winning number data.

Similarly, as for “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“39”) of “1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data” (“ 40 ") can be the winning number data.
In addition, as for “Small win D condition device lottery data”, a value (“41”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“40”) of “1BBA + Small win E1 condition device lottery data” ) Can be the winning number data.
Furthermore, as for “Small win E1 condition device lottery data”, a value (“42”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“41”) of “Small win D condition device lottery data” Can be the winning number data.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if the winning number data is determined only for “1 BBA condition device lottery data”, “1 BBA + small win D condition device lottery data” and “1 BBA + small win E1 condition device lottery data” With regard to "data", "small win D condition device lottery data", and "small win E1 condition device lottery data", it is not necessary to determine the winning number data. Can be.
The “1BBA condition device lottery data” from “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 and the “1BBA condition device lottery data” from FIG. 107 “1BBA condition device lottery data” are also shown in FIG. 105 is the same as the “1BBA condition device lottery data” to “small win E1 condition device lottery data”.

In addition, for example, “1BBA condition device lottery data that is not won in the advantageous section” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 1” → “1BBA condition device lottery data that is won in the advantageous section 2” ", Data may be set in the lottery table.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

Specifically, for example,
; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1 byte data identifier DEFB 10; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA; winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of "1BBA condition device lottery data" can be continuously determined.

Then, for example,
1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
; Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 5; Probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 2; probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA + Small win D condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUMOR @BBA_WD; Winning number data identifier
+ Winning number data DEFB @LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2; 1 byte data identifier
; + Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 3; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of “1BBA + small winning combination D condition device lottery data” can be continuously determined.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table increases accordingly.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the eighteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In this embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1201.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1201, the advantageous section number is acquired (FIG. 110), and the process proceeds to step S1202.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S1202, the condition device number set 5 (FIG. 111) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the player operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous section number acquisition process.
The advantageous section number acquisition is processing for acquiring an advantageous section number from data defined in the lottery table.
When the process proceeds to the advantageous section number acquisition in step S1201, first in step S1211, the main CPU 55 acquires data corresponding to the winning number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the data on the lottery table used in the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87) and the lottery determination (FIG. 88).

For example, it is assumed that when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 105 is used, it is determined that the winning is determined in the win / fail determination. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT” is stored in the HL register.
In addition, it is assumed that when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, it is determined that the winning is determined in the win / fail determination. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR OR LT_AT1”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that a win is determined in the win / fail determination when “1BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2”.
Further, it is assumed that the process proceeds to “judgment end” in FIG. In this case, when the process proceeds to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END”.

Then, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the B register.
For example, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT” in FIG. 105 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYT” = “00001000 (B)” is stored in the B register.
When the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1” in FIG. 106 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT1” = “00001001 (B)” is stored in the B register. .

Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2” in FIG. 107 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYTOR @ LT_AT2” = “0000001010 (B)” is stored in the B register. I do.
Further, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END” in FIG. 108 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_END” = “00 (H)” is stored in the B register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1212.

In step S1212, the main CPU 55 generates an advantageous section number from the acquired data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 performs an AND operation on the data in the B register and “$ MSK_AT” (advantage section number mask data = “00000111 (B)”), and transfers the obtained data to a new B register. Data.

For example, when the data in the B register is “00001000 (B)”, “00000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00001000 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “0000000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
When the data of the B register is “000000101 (B)”, “00000001 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “000000101 (B)” and “000000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000001 (B)” (= “＠ LT_AT1”: advantageous section number 1) is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning is made to the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift).

  Furthermore, when the data of the B register is “0000001010 (B)”, “00000010 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “0000001010 (B)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “00000010 (B)” (= “$ LT_AT2”: advantageous section number 2) is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning is made to the advantageous section 2 (determined to shift).

Further, when the data of the B register is “00 (H)”, “00000000 (B)” is obtained by performing an AND operation on “00 (H)” and “00000111 (B)”. Then, the obtained “0000000000 (B)” is stored in the B register. In this case, the winning section is not won.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In the present embodiment, when the winning number is determined to be any of the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination, the advantageous section number acquisition of FIG. 110 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1212, and the advantageous section number is generated. , Stored in the B register.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing of condition device number set 5.
Upon proceeding to condition device number set 5 in step S1202, first in step S1221, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1221 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1222 to S1226 and proceeds to step S1227.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1222.
In step S1221, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the value is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1222, the main CPU 55 acquires a condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 in FIG. 99, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the E register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1222, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Otherwise, the specific processing in step S1222 is the same as that in step S1112 in FIG.

In step S1223, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game is Is determined to be a game inside the bonus.

The specific processing in step S1223 is the same as that in step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1224.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1223 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), the process skips steps S1224 to S1226 and proceeds to step S1227.

In step S1224, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in a normal section.
When “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53, it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and when “1” is stored, the current game is in the advantageous section 1 When it is determined that the game is a game and “2” is stored, it is determined that the current game is a game in the advantageous section 2.

The specific processing in step S1224 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1225.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), step S1225 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1226.

When proceeding to step S1225, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S125, the value indicating the advantageous section number is stored in the B register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.

In step S1226, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, the value indicating the accessory condition apparatus number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored.

In step S1227, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1221 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, when the determination at step S1221 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1222, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1227 after step S1222, the value of the A register indicates the “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1227, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.

In this manner, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1221 and proceeds to step S1227, and when “No” in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227 after step S1222. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
Further, under the condition that “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (4) in FIG. 112 (a) shows the winning number definition for the winning numbers “31” to “36”.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 112 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from “1” to “36”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” and “35” correspond to the single winning of the accessory condition device, and the winning numbers “32” to “34”. The numbers “36” and “36” correspond to overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device.

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing winning number conversion and advantageous section shift determination data definition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 112 (c), “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1 EQU 167 + ＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section 1 shift determination random number” corresponds to “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” indicating “advantage section 1 shift determination random number” and “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1”. Means that the value to be performed is “167 + ＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2”.
Also, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
Therefore, “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” = “167 + 178” = “345”.

As shown in FIG. 112 (d), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2 EQU 178; random number for judging transition to advantageous section 2” indicates that “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” indicates “random number for judging transition to advantageous section 2”, and a value corresponding to “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2”. Is “178”. That is, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
The advantageous section 1 shift determination random number and the advantageous section 2 shift determination random number are collectively referred to as “advantageous section shift determination random numbers”.

FIG. 113 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 113 (a), when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are "31" to "36", the winning number conversion table corresponds to the determined winning numbers from the determined winning numbers. It is used when determining the "accessory condition device number" and the "winning and replay condition device number".

  As shown in FIG. 113B, “DEFB @ NB_1BBA, 0; winning number 31” stores “@ NB_1BBA” at address ## 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)) and stores address ## 1 (Eg, address 1601 (H)) means that “0” is stored. As shown in FIG. 112B, “$ NB_1BBA” = “1”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ####, and "0" is stored in the address ####.

That is,
Address ### 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Accessory condition device number Address ### 1 (address 1601 (H)) 0: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address #### and the address #### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c), “DEFB @ NB_1BBB, @NB_WIN_D; winning number 32” stores “@ NB_1BBB” in address ## 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and stores address #### 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)) means that "@NB_WIN_D" is stored. As shown in FIG. 112B, “$ NB_1BBB” = “2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 74, “@NB_WIN_D” = “26”. Therefore, "2" is stored in address #### 2, and "26" is stored in address #### 3.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: Accessory condition device number Address ### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 26: Winning and replay condition device number
Each data stored in the address ## 2 and the address #### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG.
FIG. 114, FIG. 115, and FIG. 116 are diagrams illustrating an all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (12). FIG. 115 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (13), which is a view following FIG. 114. FIG. 116 is a view showing the all-RT common lottery table (14), which is a view following FIG. 115.
The non-RT lottery table, RT1 lottery table, RT2 lottery table, RT3 lottery table, RT4 lottery table, 1BBA lottery table, and 1BBB lottery table are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the time of non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4, first, a lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", Next, a lottery determination is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)”, the internal lottery is terminated without using the lottery table corresponding to the RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the case of 1BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBA lottery table, and in the case of 1BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 117A is a diagram illustrating an advantageous section shift determination random number table.
The advantageous section shift determination random number table is used in an advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121 described later, and defines “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” as a criterion for determining that the winning section 2 has won (determined to shift). At the same time, "@ LOT_TRNS_AT1" is defined as a criterion when it is determined that a win is made in the advantageous section 1.
When the random number value obtained from the random number generation means (counter) is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178”), it is determined that the advantageous section 2 has been won, and “よ り LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345”) When it is smaller, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 is won.

Here, "DEFW" means "in an assembly language, two 1-byte (8-bit) areas are secured in memory in order of address, the lower one byte of 2-byte data is stored in the previous address, and the subsequent address is stored. Is stored in the upper byte of 2-byte data. "
As shown in FIG. 117 (c), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section number 2” is obtained by setting “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178 (D)” = “178 (D)” at address ### 0 (for example, address 1700 (H)). 00B2 (H) ”), and stores“ B2 (H) ”, which is the lower 1 byte, and stores“ 00 (H), which is the upper 1 byte of “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” at address ## 1 (eg, address 1701 (H)). )).

  As shown in FIG. 117 (d), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT1; advantageous section number 1” is obtained by adding “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345 (D)” = “345 (D)” at address ## 2 (for example, address 1702 (H)). 0159 (H) ”, which is the lower 1 byte, and stores“ 01 (H) ”as the upper 1 byte of“ @ LOT_TRNS_AT1 ”at address ## 3 (eg, address 1703 (H)). )).

That is,
Address #### (address 1700 (H)) B2 (H): lower one byte Address #### (address 1701 (H)) 00 (H): upper one byte Address #### 2 (1702 (H) Address) 59 (H): Lower 1 byte Address #### 3 (Address 1703 (H)) 01 (H): Upper 1 byte.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process for the condition device number and the like in the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the blocker 45 is controlled in step S1003 so that the insertion of medals is not permitted, the process proceeds to step S1301.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1301, internal lottery 2 (FIG. 119) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1302.
Further, when the flow proceeds to step S1302, the condition device number set 6 (FIG. 120) is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, the rotation of all reels 31 is started, and the spinning reel 31 can be stopped by the player operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 2 process.
When the process proceeds to the internal lottery 2 in step S1301, first, in step S1311, the main CPU 55 stores a random number value in “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer).
Here, “_BF_RAND” is a 2-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a random number value.
Then, when proceeding to step S1301, the main CPU 55 first stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the HL register, and then stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the storage area “_BF_RAND” of the RWM 53. "Is stored. Thereby, the random number value is stored in the random number buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1312.

When proceeding to step S1312, the main CPU 55 stores a random value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1313.
In step S1313, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (1BBA operation, 1BBB operation, or non-operation of the accessory).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1313 are the same as those in step S1012 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1314.

When proceeding to step S1314, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Further, the specific content of the process in step S1314 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1315 to S1317 and proceeds to step S1318.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1315.

In step S1315, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1316.
When proceeding to step S1316, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win has been made in the lottery determination.

The specific processing in step S1316 is the same as that in step S1015 in FIG.
If it is determined that the lottery has been won (Yes), steps S1317 and S1318 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in the lottery determination that no winning has been made (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1317.

In step S1317, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4).
The specific processing in step S1317 is the same as that in step S1016 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1318.
In step S1318, the main CPU 55 executes a lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313 or S1317. Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1313, and when the accessory is not activated, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set in step S1317. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 6.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 6 in step S1302, first in step S1321, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1321 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips step S1322 and proceeds to step S1323.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1322.
In step S1321, “31” is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, even if the value is subtracted, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

In step S1322, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1322 are the same as those in step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1323.

In step S1323, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
The specific processing in step S1323 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1324-S1327 and proceeds to step S1328.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1324.

In step S1324, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the accessory condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game inside the bonus.
Further, the specific contents of the process in step S1324 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1324 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a non-bonus game, and the process proceeds to next step S1325. .
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1324 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game inside the bonus, and step S1325 is performed. The process skips steps S1327 to S1328.

In step S1325, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in a normal section.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1325 are the same as those in step S1044 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1325 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and the flow proceeds to the next step S1326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1325 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53 (No), it is determined that the current game is a game in an advantageous section, and step S1326 is performed. Skip to step S1327.

When proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section shift lottery (FIG. 121). When the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1327.
In step S1327, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1327, a value indicating the accessory condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1328.

In step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, “Yes” is determined in step S1321, and when skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1321 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”, as shown in FIG. 74A. Stipulated. Therefore, the result of step S1321 is “Yes”, and when skipping step S1322 and proceeding to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1321, “No” is reached, and when the process proceeds to step S1322, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. For this reason, “No” is determined in step S1321, and when the process proceeds to step S1328 via step S1322, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1328, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
As described above, a prize is obtained when “Yes” is obtained in step S1321 and the process proceeds to step S1328, skipping step S1322, or when “No” is obtained in step S1321 and the process proceeds to step S1328 after step S1322. In addition, the process of storing the replay condition device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the flow of the processing of the advantageous section shift lottery.
In the advantageous section shift lottery, the random number value acquired from the random number generation means (counter), “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantage section 1 shift determination random number) and “＠ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantage section) determined in the advantageous section shift determination random number table are used. This is a process of determining whether to shift to the advantageous section 1, to shift to the advantageous section 2, or not to shift to the advantageous section based on the (2 shift determination random number).

When proceeding to the advantageous section shift lottery in step S1326, first, in step S1331, the main CPU 55 sets an initial value of the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the B register as an initial value of the number of determinations. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1332.
In step S1332, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the advantageous section shift determination random number.

Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the head address of “TBL_AT_RAND” (advantage section shift determination random number table) in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1333.
In step S1333, the main CPU 55 obtains a random value.
Specifically, at the point of time proceeding to step S1333, the storage area “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer) of the RWM 53 stores the random number value obtained from the random number generating means (counter). Then, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in “_BF_RAND” in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1334.

In step S1334, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the obtained random number value is smaller than the advantageous section shift determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts data (advantageous section shift determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from data (random number value) of the DE register, and determines whether a carry has occurred by the subtraction. I do.

Here, when it is determined that carry has occurred due to the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is smaller than the advantageous section shift determination random number (Yes), and the process skips steps S1335 to S1337 and proceeds to step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the carry has not occurred by the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is equal to or more than the advantageous section shift determination random number (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1335.
In step S1334, the data (random number shift determination random number) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is subtracted from the data (random number value) of the DE register to determine whether a carry has occurred. However, the data in the DE register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the data of the DE register indicates the “random number value”.

In step S1335, the main CPU 55 updates the address of the advantageous section shift determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, “2” is added to the value of the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1336.
In step S1336, the main CPU 55 updates the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1337.

In step S1137, main CPU 55 determines whether or not to terminate the determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the B register is “0”.
If it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1334.
Thus, the first time, the advantageous section 2 shift determination random number is subtracted from the random number value to determine whether a carry has occurred. The second time, the advantageous section 1 shift determination random number is subtracted from the random number value, and the carry is determined. It will be determined whether or not it has occurred.

In step S1338, the main CPU 55 stores the number of determinations as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. As a result, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is actuated (“No” in step S1323 of FIG. 120)) and not inside (“Yes” in step S1324). ) And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325)), an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).

In the advantageous section shift lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (advantage section 2 shift determination random number = “178”), it is determined to win (shift to the advantageous section 2). ).
That is, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is summed up from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 2 lottery data”. Then, “30” + “125” + “10” + “3” + “10” = “178”.
For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, as shown in FIG. The single winning of the role E1 condition device, the single winning of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

In the advantageous section shift lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is smaller than “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (advantage section 1 shift determination random number = “345”), it is determined to win (shift to the advantageous section 1). ).
However, as described above, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, the winning is made to the advantageous section 2.
Therefore, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, the winning is given to the advantageous section 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the “probability data” is summed up from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 1 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 1 lottery data”. Then, “20” + “125” + “10” + “2” + “10” = “167”.
Furthermore, the sum of “probability data” from “small win D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small win E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” becomes “178”, which is When "167" is added to "?", It becomes "345".

  For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, as shown in FIG. The single winning of the role E1 condition device, the single winning of the 1BBA condition device, the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role D condition device, or the overlapping winning of the 1BBA condition device and the small role E1 condition device.

Further, the all RT common lottery table is commonly used in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. When this all RT common lottery table is used, the small hand D condition device A single win, a single win of the small win E1 condition device, a single win of the 1BBA condition device, a double win of the 1BBA condition device and the small win D condition device, or a double win of the 1BBA condition device and the small win E1 condition device.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, although the replay condition device has non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 with different winning probabilities, the random number value obtained from the random number generation means falls within the range of “0” to “344”. The condition device that wins when belonging is the same whether it is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. For example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game. Even if the game is performed, the addition of an advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section) The lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
Further, under the condition that “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of the nineteenth embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the nineteenth embodiment is different from the nineteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 6 of the nineteenth embodiment, an advantageous section shift lottery is performed, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”. Then, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and a prize is won. And the replay condition device number are stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 7 of the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”. An advantageous section transfer lottery is performed and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the flow of a lottery process for a condition device number and the like in a modification of the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1301 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment, and step S1052 is the same as in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the internal lottery 2 is executed in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1341.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1341, the condition device number set 7 (FIG. 123) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the flow of the process of the condition device number set 7.
When proceeding to the condition device number set 7 in step S1341, first in step S1351, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
The specific processing in step S1351 is the same as that in step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1352 to S1354 and proceeds to step S1355.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is equal to or larger than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1352.
In step S1351, it is determined whether carry has occurred by subtracting "31" from the value (winning number) of the A register. However, even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated. That is, even after the subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the “winning number”.

When proceeding to step S1352, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1352 are the same as those in step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1323.

In step S1353, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory condition device number is “0”.
Further, the specific contents of the processing in step S1353 are the same as those in step S1043 in FIG.
Then, in step S1353, when it is determined that the accessory condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1353 that the accessory condition device number is other than “0” (No), the process skips step S1354 and proceeds to step S1355.

In step S1354, the main CPU 55 stores the accessory condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1354, the C register stores a value indicating the accessory condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. Thus, the accessory condition device number is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S1355.

In step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, “Yes” is determined in step S1351, and when skipping step S1352 and proceeding to step S1355, the value indicating the “winning number” is stored in the A register. When “Yes” is obtained in step S1351 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74A, “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”. Stipulated. For this reason, “Yes” is determined in step S1351, and when skipping step S1352 and proceeding to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1351, the result is "No", and when the process proceeds to step S1352, the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Therefore, the result of step S1351 is “No”, and when the process proceeds to step S1355 via step S1352, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.
As described above, at the time of proceeding to step S1355, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored.
In this manner, the winning and replay condition device numbers are determined when “Yes” in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355, and when “No” in step S1351 and the process proceeds to step S1355. The processing stored in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be shared, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

When proceeding to step S1356, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
The specific processing in step S1356 is the same as that in step S1013 in FIG.
When it is determined that the accessory is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1357.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the accessory is in operation (Yes), steps S1357 to S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

When proceeding to step S1357, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the internal medium flag is on.
The specific content of the process in step S1357 is the same as that in step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is OFF (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1358.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1357 that the internal medium flag is ON (Yes), steps S1358 and S1326 are skipped, and the processing in this flowchart ends.

In step S1358, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section number is “0”.
The specific processing in step S1358 is the same as that in step S1044 in FIG.
Then, in step S1358, when it is determined that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the advantageous section shift lottery in step S1326 (FIG. 121).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), the advantageous section shift lottery (FIG. 121) in step S1326 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. .

When proceeding to step S1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section shift lottery (FIG. 121). When the advantageous section shift lottery ends, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Note that the content of the advantageous section shift lottery process in step S1326 is the same as in the nineteenth embodiment.

Here, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are the numbers "31" to "36", the accessory condition device is won.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (“Yes” in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1354), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “ If it is other than “0” (“No” in step S1353), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1354 is skipped).

In the condition device number set 7, when the accessory is activated (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is not “0”), the internal medium flag is on (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”). When there is, and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is not “0”), the advantageous section shift lottery is not executed (step S1326 is skipped).
When the accessory is not operating (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”), the internal medium flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), and the advantageous section number is When it is “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”), an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).
This makes it possible to execute the processing relating to the advantageous section shift lottery without requiring complicated processing.

In the condition device number set 7, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination is “31” to “36”, which is the winning of the accessory condition device, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” Is "0" (when "Yes" in step S1353), the accessory condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and thereafter, the advantageous section shift lottery is executed (step S1326).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 7, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before executing the advantageous section shift lottery, the winning condition device is won in this game. It is not possible to judge whether the game has been won in the accessory condition apparatus before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1357 before executing the advantageous section shift lottery, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is turned on to determine whether the character condition device has been won in the current game or the last time. It is determined whether or not the character condition apparatus has been won before the game.
Then, when the inside medium flag is off, it is determined that the character condition apparatus has been won in the current game, and an advantageous section shift lottery is executed (step S1326).

  In the condition device number set 7, in step S1352, the value indicating the "accessory condition device number" is stored in the C register, and the value indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1354, the value of the C register (accessory condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and in step S1355, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in “_NB_CND_NOR”.

Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1354, the accessory condition device number is not lost. Even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1355, winning and replaying are performed. The condition device number will not be lost.
Therefore, in condition device number set 7, the C register can be used for other processing after step S1354, and the A register can be used for other processing after step S1355. it can.
As another process, for example, an additional lottery in an AT (instructed game section) in an advantageous section can be mentioned.

In the condition device number set 7, in step S1357, it is determined whether or not the inside medium flag is turned on to determine whether or not the character condition device has been won in the current game or the character condition device has been won before the previous game. It was decided whether or not.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in step S1357, by determining whether or not the corresponding RT4 is inside, whether or not the character condition device has been won in the current game or the character condition device before the previous game is determined. You may judge whether or not you have won.

Furthermore, in condition device number set 7, the accessory is inactive ("No" in step S1356), the inside medium flag is off ("No" in step S1357), and the advantageous section number is "0". ("Yes" in step S1358), the advantageous section shift lottery was executed (step S1326).
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is operating, when the inside inside flag is on, and when the advantageous section number is not “0”, the advantageous section shift lottery may be executed. In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained) by skipping step S1338 in FIG. 121.

As described above, the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, two types of the advantageous sections 1 and 2 are provided as the advantageous sections. In the normal section, it is determined whether to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2. Then, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (deciding to shift), the game state is shifted to the gaseous game state that does not have the right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, the gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is shifted. After a sign), he moved to ART. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, only one type of advantageous section may be used, and in a normal section, whether or not to shift to an advantageous section may be determined.
Then, when winning (determining to shift) to an advantageous section, the game may be uniformly shifted to an advantageous section of 1500 games which is the upper limit.
In this case, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is, for example, “00000000 (B)” in a normal section and “00000001 (B)” in an advantageous section. Thus, it is possible to manage the normal section or the advantageous section with 1-bit data.

Further, in the game of the advantageous section, a condition of falling into the normal section (for example, that the number of executed games of the ART has reached a specific value, that the player has won the falling lottery, that the predetermined number of games has been executed, etc.) is satisfied. In such a case, a transition to the normal section may be made.
Further, for example, three types of the advantageous sections 1 to 3 may be provided as the advantageous sections, and in the normal section, it may be determined which of the advantageous sections 1 to 3 is to be shifted. And if it wins in the advantageous section 1, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 500 games, if it is won in the advantageous section 2, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 1000 games, and if it is won in the advantageous section 3, it will be shifted to an advantageous section of 1500 games. Is also good.

(2) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of games in the advantageous section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the ART is executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is determined, the number of games that can execute the ART during the advantageous section is increased uniformly or by lottery. May be.

Further, for example, in a case where a gas game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit but the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) is being executed during the advantageous section, the winning corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is performed. When the number is determined, the right to shift to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the game state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed so as to be advantageous to the player.

(3) In the normal section, when the winner is won (determined to shift) to the advantageous section, the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section, or the next game may be shifted to the standby section, and thereafter, the standby section May be shifted to an advantageous section.
That is, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, “winning in the advantageous section” is not limited to shifting from the next game to the advantageous section, but shifting from the next game to the standby section, and then starting from the standby section. This is a concept including shifting to an advantageous section.
When the transition from the normal section to the standby section is performed, information indicating that the section is the standby section is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the transition from the standby section to the advantageous section is performed, the information indicating that the section is the advantageous section is stored. May be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

(4) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is in operation, and when “0”, the accessory is not in operation. That was shown.
Further, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition apparatus has not been won, and when the value is other than “0”, it indicates that the accessory condition apparatus has been won.
Furthermore, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that no winning has been made to the advantageous section (determined to shift), and when “1”, it indicates that the winning has been made to the advantageous section 1. , "2" indicates that the player has won the advantageous section 2.

Further, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the internal medium flag is off.
However, when the accessory is activated or when the accessory is not activated, the value is not limited to being indicated by the value “1” / “0” of the bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” and can be set as appropriate.
Similarly, the winning / non-winning of the accessory condition apparatus, the winning / non-winning of the advantageous section, and the on / off of the inside flag are not limited to the above-described modes, and can be appropriately set.

(5) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, a one-byte storage area on the RWM 53 is reserved as “_NB_CND_AT”. However, the storage area for storing the advantageous section number is not limited to the one-byte storage area.
As described above, for example, there is only one type of advantageous section, and it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section. In this case, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the one-byte storage area on the RWM 53 can be used as a storage area for storing the advantageous section number. That is, the 1-bit storage area may be a storage area for storing information indicating that the advantageous section number or the current game section is an advantageous section.

Similarly, “_NB_CND_BNS” is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
For example, in a 1-byte storage area on RWM 53, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) is used as a storage area for storing an advantageous section number, and a predetermined bit (for example, bit 1) is stored for storing a character condition apparatus number. It can be an area.
As a result, the usage of the RWM 53 by the program can be reduced.

  (6) In the sixteenth embodiment, when it is determined in step S1043 of FIG. 89 that a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, and “_NB_CND_BNS” is skipped. And the value of “_NB_CND_AT” was maintained. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" and "00000001 (B)" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", "00000001 (B)" is overwritten in "_NB_CND_BNS" and The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained by overwriting “_NB_CND_AT” with “00000001 (B)”.
As described above, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained, the same value is overwritten, not only when the value is maintained by skipping (not updating). May be maintained.

  (7) In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a). In the seventeenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a). Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, the winning numbers are determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 112 (a). These have the following regularities, and thus have the following effects.

  A. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for the winning numbers less than “31”, the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to be the same, and “1” to “1” are set. No. 30 "is determined to be continuous.

As described above, by determining that the winning number smaller than the specific value (for example, “31”) is the same as the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number”, the winning determined by the lottery determination is determined. When it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the "winning number" determined in the lottery determination can be set as a "winning and replay condition device number" in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53. .
Therefore, the process of storing the “winning and replay condition device number” in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

B. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the winning numbers less than “31” are determined so that the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” coincide with each other. As shown in the drawing, the lottery result including the accessory condition device is obtained for the winning number “31” or more (the single winning of the accessory condition device, or the overlapping winning of the accessory condition device and the winning and replay condition device). ).
As described above, for the winning numbers smaller than the specific value (for example, “31”), the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined so as to match with each other. It can be set so that the lottery result including the accessory condition device is obtained.

In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value.
When it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination is stored as a “winning and replay condition device number” in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is equal to or more than the specific value, the “winning number” determined in the lottery determination is used to change the “winning condition” using the “winning number conversion table” shown in FIG. Device number "and" winning and replay condition device number ". Then, the acquired “accessory condition device number” is stored in a specific storage area (“_NB_CND_BNS”) of the RWM 53, and the obtained “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in a predetermined storage area (“_NB_CND_NOR”) of the RWM 53. ).

In this way, by determining the winning number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number and the winning number which is a lottery result including the accessory condition device based on the specific value, the winning number of the specific value or more is determined. Only the winning number conversion table needs to be determined, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.
Also, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than a specific value, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning number requires a winning number conversion table, so that the program Can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  Further, by determining one winning number based on one random number value by a lottery determination, a lottery result that becomes a single winning of the winning and replay condition device, a lottery result that becomes a single winning of the accessory condition device, and It is possible to obtain a lottery result in which the bonus condition device and the winning and replay condition device are overlapped. Therefore, the lottery determination process (the process of determining the winning number from the random number value) can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

C. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers "34" to "42", it is determined that the processing relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed.
Further, in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers “43” to “52”, it is determined that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed. However, when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "52" in the advantageous section, it may be determined that the process relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed.

  In addition, the addition of the advantageous section means that the number of games in the advantageous section is added (added or increased), and when the ART is executed during the advantageous section, the number of games of the ART in the advantageous section is added (addition, addition, increase). Increase), or during an advantageous section, when performing a gassing game (a game state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, although the player does not have the right to shift to the ART), shifts to the ART during the advantageous section. This is a concept that includes

In this way, by determining that a process relating to adding an advantageous section can be executed for a winning number equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “34”), if the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. If it is determined that there is, a process related to adding an advantageous section can be executed.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a process relating to adding an advantageous section, thereby simplifying the program. Therefore, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

D. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers "43" to "52", it is determined that the processing relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be executed. ing.
Also, when winning in the advantageous section 1 (determined to shift), the game state shifts to a gaseous game state that does not have the right to shift to the ART, and when the advantageous section 2 is won, a gaming state (ART of the ART) capable of shifting to the ART is selected. After the sign, move to ART.

In this manner, by determining that the processing related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be executed for the winning number equal to or more than the specified value (for example, “43”), the winning number determined in the lottery determination is determined. When it is determined that the difference is equal to or more than the specified value, a process related to a shift from the normal section to the advantageous section can be executed.
Therefore, by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than the specified value, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the process related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, Since the program can be simplified, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  (8) In the 16th to 19th embodiments, except for the 1BB operation, regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4), first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. 79 to 79). A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", the lottery determination is next performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.

Specifically, at the time of non-RT, the lottery determination is performed using the non-RT time lottery table (FIG. 82 (b)), and at the time of RT1, the lottery determination is performed using the RT1 time lottery table (FIG. 82 (c)). Was.
At RT2, a lottery determination is performed using the RT2 lottery table (FIG. 83A), at RT3, a lottery determination is performed using the RT3 lottery table (FIG. 83B), and at RT4, RT4 is performed. A lottery determination was made using the hour lottery table (FIG. 84 (a)).

In this regard, for example, an RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) shown below is provided, and the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is calculated (designated) using the RT state-based lottery address table. be able to.
TBL_LOT_RTTBL:
DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-＄; lottery table at non-RT time DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-＄; lottery table at RT1 DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-＄; lottery table at RT2 DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-＄;

Here, the lottery address table for each RT state can be stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50, for example.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT0” indicates the head address of the non-RT-time lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1” indicates the head address of the RT1-time lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2” indicates the start address of the RT2 lottery table, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” indicates the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4” indicates the start address of the RT4 lottery table.

"@" Indicates the current address.
Therefore, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄” indicates a difference (data number, byte number) from the current address to the head address of the non-RT time lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1− ＄” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2− ＄” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT2 lottery table. .
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- −” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- −” indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT4 lottery table.

Further, information on the RT state can be stored in a predetermined storage area (RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”) of RWM 53, for example.
Further, any one of “0” to “4” is stored in “_NB_RT” as information on the RT state.
Specifically, “0” is stored in “_NB_RT” during non-RT, and “1” is stored in “_NB_RT” during RT1.
At RT2, “2” is stored in “_NB_RT”, at RT3, “3” is stored in “_NB_RT”, and at RT4, “4” is stored in “_NB_RT”.

The calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be performed as described below.
First, “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” is stored in the HL register. Thus, the head address of the RT state-based lottery address table is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” is stored in the A register. Thus, the value indicating the RT state is stored in the A register.

Next, the value of the A register (the value indicating the RT state) is added to the value of the HL register (the head address of the RT state-based lottery address table) to obtain a new HL register value. As a result, the address of the “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.
Here, the “address designation data” is data stored in the RT state-based lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the head address of the non-RT time lottery table to the RT4 time lottery table. .
Specifically, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the head address of the non-RT time lottery table.

Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1- −” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT1 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- −” is calculating (designating) the start address of the RT2 lottery table. Addressing data to be used.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-ＲＴ” is address designation data for calculating (designating) the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- −” calculates (designates) the start address of the RT4 lottery table. Data for addressing.

Next, data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. As a result, "address designation data" corresponding to the RT state is stored in the A register.
Next, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Thereby, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state is stored in the HL register.

Here, the start address of the RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) is set to “1500 (H)”. In this case, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT0− ＄; non-RT time lottery table” is also “1500 (H)”.
Further, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-１; RT1 lottery table” is set to “1501 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- ＄; RT2 lottery table” is set to “1502 (H)”.
Further, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- ＄; RT3 lottery table” is set to “1503 (H)”, and the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- ＄; RT4 lottery table” is set to “1504 (H)”.

The head address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) is set to “1505 (H)”.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), since the non-RT time lottery table stores 5 bytes of data, the start address of the RT1 time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) is “1505 (H)”. + “5 (H)” = “150A (H)”.
As shown in FIG. 82 (c), the RT1 lottery table stores 9-byte data. Therefore, the start address of the RT2 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT2) is “150A (H)” + “9 (H)” = “1513 (H)”.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83A, 9-byte data is stored in the RT2 lottery table. Therefore, the start address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3) is “1513 (H)” + “9 (H)” = “151C (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the RT3 lottery table stores 10-byte data. Therefore, the start address of the RT4 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT4) is “151C (H)” + “A (H)” = “1526 (H)”.

Hereinafter, the calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state will be described in more detail by taking RT3 as an example.
First, the head address of “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” = “1500 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” = “3 (H)” is stored in the A register.
Next, the value “3 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1500 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value “1503 (H)” of the HL register.

Next, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- −” corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is stored in the A register.
Here, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” = “151C (H)”.
When the value of the HL register is “1503 (H)”, “＄” = “1503 (H)”.
Therefore, the value stored at the address corresponding to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register is “19 (H)” (= “151C (H)” − “1503 (H)”). “19 (H)” is the value of the A register.

Next, the value of the A register “19 (H)” is added to the value of the HL register “1503 (H)” to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Here, “1503 (H)” + “19 (H)” = “151C (H)”.
Therefore, the value of the new HL register is “151C (H)”.
The value “151C (H)” of the HL register indicates the start address of the RT3 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3).
In this manner, the start address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state can be calculated (designated) based on the RT state-based lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) and the value of the RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”.

Note that the RT state-based lottery address table determines which of the lottery tables (non-RT-time lottery table to RT4-time lottery table) to be used according to the RT state is used. "Address designation data" for calculating (designating) the head address of the lottery table is defined.
Therefore, the RT state-based lottery address table may also be referred to as an “address designation data selection table” or an “address designation data table”.

The two-stage lottery address table of the seventeenth embodiment determines which one of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5 is to be used, and calculates (designates) the top address of the two-stage lottery tables 1 to 5. "Address designation data" is defined.
For this reason, the two-stage lottery address table may also be referred to as an “address designation data selection table” or an “address designation data table” in the same manner as the RT state lottery address table.

Instead of using the RT state-based lottery address table, the head address of the lottery table corresponding to the RT state can be specified from the value indicating the RT state.
However, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “0”. When it is determined that the value is “0”, “1505 (H)” which is the head address of the non-RT time lottery table is determined. Is specified, and it is determined that the value is not "0", then it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is "1".

When it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "1", "150A (H)" which is the head address of the RT1 lottery table is designated. , Is determined whether the value indicating the RT state is “2”.
Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "2", "1513 (H)" which is the head address of the RT2 lottery table is designated. Next, it is determined whether or not the value indicating the RT state is “3”.

Further, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "3", "151C (H)" which is the head address of the RT3 lottery table is designated. "1526 (H)" which is the head address of the lottery table is designated.
Since such a process is performed, the process until the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated becomes longer.
Also, a program for designating the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is required.

  On the other hand, when the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated using the RT state-based lottery address table, the processing until the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is designated can be shortened. In addition, since it is not necessary to define a program for designating the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(9) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, except for the 1BB operation, regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4), first, all RT common lottery tables (for example, FIGS. 79 to 79). A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", the lottery determination is next performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, except for the 1BB operation, first, the lottery determination may be performed using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state. Then, in the lottery determination using the lottery table corresponding to the RT state, if the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", then the lottery determination may be performed using the all RT common lottery table. .

(10) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game, the lottery regarding the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed. When a win was made (determined to shift to an advantageous section), a value other than “0” was stored in “_NB_CND_AT”. That is, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, even if a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” at the start of the current game, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the game state in the advantageous section is advantageous to the player, A lottery may be performed for the game (including adding the number of games played by the AT in the advantageous section), and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, in a situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the accessory condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed for adding an advantageous section. .
Further, under the condition that “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, a lottery regarding addition of an advantageous section is executed, and “2” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. May be executed.
When the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called “inside”), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

(11) For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the lottery data relating to the accessory condition apparatus (1BBA, 1BBB, etc.) is defined in the all RT common lottery table.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery data relating to the accessory condition apparatus may not be defined in the all RT common lottery table, but may be determined only in the lottery table corresponding to the RT state.
More specifically, since the RT4 lottery table is a lottery table used in RT4 (inside), the lottery data relating to the accessory condition apparatus is not defined in the all RT common lottery table and the RT4 lottery table. Only the RT1 lottery table, the RT2 lottery table, and the RT3 lottery table may be determined.

(12) For example, when the probability data differs for each set value, it is preferable to make the number of bytes of each probability data uniform.
For example, in the 1BBA + small win E2 condition device lottery data of the all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the probability data differs for each set value. Each of the probability data is set to one byte.
In addition, in the small combination A condition device lottery data of the all RT common lottery table (3) in FIG. 81, the probability data differs for each set value. Each of the probability data is set to 2 bytes.

As described above, when the probability data is different for each set value, each probability data is set to 1 byte or 2 bytes, and the 1-byte probability data and the 2-byte probability data are mixed. Not set to
As a result, the lottery determination process can be simplified, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(13) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the range of “0” to “65535” is defined as one cycle, and a counter that counts one every 200 n (nano) seconds is provided. The count value of this counter is used as a random value. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value obtained by calculating (for example, adding or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, another random value or a specific value) to the count value obtained from the counter may be used as the random value. Good.

(14) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the carry flag is turned on (“1”) by storing the random number value in the predetermined register and subtracting the probability data from the value of the predetermined register ( It was determined whether or not a carry occurred), and when the carry flag was turned on, it was determined that the game was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to determine whether the carry flag is turned on by storing a random number value in a predetermined register and adding probability data to the value of the predetermined register. Good.

Then, when the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the winning has occurred.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is not turned on, the value obtained by adding the probability data to the value of the predetermined register is stored as a new value of the predetermined register. That is, the value of the predetermined register is updated. Thereafter, the determination whether the carry flag is turned on by adding new probability data to the updated value of the predetermined register is repeated until the carry flag is turned on.
As described above, determining whether or not a winning has been performed based on the value stored in the predetermined register and the probability data may be referred to as a comparison operation.

(15) How to Determine Winning Number, How to Determine Conditional Device Number, Correspondence between Winning Number and Conditional Device Number, Correspondence between Conditional Device Number and Conditional Device (Winning Combination) as shown in the 16th to 19th embodiments Relationship, type of condition device (winning part) corresponding to the winning number, correspondence between the winning number and probability data, probability data for winning (deciding to shift) to an advantageous section, winning (shifting to an advantageous section) ), And the winning numbers that will be won (decided to be added) in the addition of the advantageous section are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.
For example, when the player wins the 1BBA condition apparatus, the player wins (determines to shift) to the advantageous section with a probability of 100%. For example, when the player wins a predetermined winning number, the player wins the advantageous section with a probability of 100%. In this way, probability data and the like can be determined.

(16) In the flowcharts described in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings. If the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing is changed. Is also possible.
(17) In the sixteenth and nineteenth embodiments, the lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described. However, the lottery other than the lottery related to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (for example, the lottery of the hand, Lottery, AT lottery, RT transfer lottery) are also applicable.
(18) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the slot machine 10 has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a ball game machine, a sealed game machine, and the like.
(19) The sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Subsequently, twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described.
The twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments relate to lighting control of LEDs such as the management information display LED 74.
FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a more detailed configuration of the main CPU 55, the ROM 54, and the RWM 53 in the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, a main CPU 55, a RWM 53, and a ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter, simply referred to as “chip”) is mounted on the main control board 50, and the main A CPU 55 is provided. Further, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and the built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. The addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are continuous.

The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to “16 KB or less” in the present embodiment, and has a use area with a capacity of “7.5 KB or less” and other use areas. Further, the used area has a control area with a capacity of “4.5 KB or less” and a data area with a capacity of “3.0 KB or less”.
Here, the “usage area” refers to a storage area in which information other than information necessary for preventing unauthorized remodeling and other changes is stored or to be stored (the same applies to the ROM 54 and the RWM 53).
The “control area” indicates a storage area other than the data area in the used area, and stores various programs executed by the main control unit 50. The control area may be referred to as a “program area”.
Furthermore, the “data area” refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or to be stored in the used area, and data used when executing the program is stored.

Further, "out of use area" includes a control area and a data area, similarly to the use area. The control area of the use area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the use area may be referred to as a second control area. In the control area (second control area) outside the use area, a program that is not related to the progress of the game (for example, a program used at the time of a test, a program for preventing fraud, etc.) is stored. This will be described later.
The storage capacity of the RWM 53 is “1,024K or less” in the present embodiment, and has a used area with a capacity of “512 KB or less” and an outside of the other used area.
Both the use area and the outside of the use area include a work area and a stack area. In a use area of the RWM 53, an LED display counter and the like described later are stored.

Further, as shown in FIG. 124, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the area outside the used area.
Further, the RWM 53 includes an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the area outside the used area.
Further, of the storage area of the entire internal memory, an area other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 includes an internal register area, an unused area, and the like.
As described above, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, the A register to the L register, the transmission register, and the like.

  FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the twentieth embodiment more specifically. . FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 2 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram corresponding to the management information display LED 74 shown in FIG. 3 (a) of the first embodiment. .

In FIG. 125 (A), in the twentieth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a stored number display LED 76 composed of a digit 1 (upper digit) and a digit 2 (lower digit), and a digit 3 (upper digit) And an acquired number display LED 78 comprising a digit 4 (lower digit).
However, unlike the first embodiment, each of the digits 1 to 4 uses a 7-segment display without a dot segment (segment DP (hereinafter simply referred to as “segment P”). 2, the segment P of the digit 2 does not constitute the advantageous section display LED 77. In the twentieth embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is provided separately and independently. In this regard, the description is omitted.

Further, seven LEDs are mounted on the display substrate 75, and these seven LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79.
First, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only one bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are turned on. When three medals are bet, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are turned on.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 can be operated. Therefore, it does not light in a state in which a medal is not bet (or replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights when a medal can be inserted. In other words, it lights up before the game is over and medals for shifting to the next game are inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Note that, even after the replay is activated, the light is turned on when betting is possible according to the stored number of sheets.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay wins. When an automatic bet is made based on a win in the replay, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.
The effect display LED 79g is an LED used to display various effects, and may also be used as an adjustment display LED (an LED that lights up during the adjustment process).

In FIG. 125 (B), the four digits 6 to 9 used for the management information display LED 74 are different from the above-mentioned digits 1 to 4 and are all seven-segment displays provided with dot segments (segments P). Digits 6 to 9 are the same as those in the first embodiment in that they display the information type upper, information type lower, numerical upper, and numerical lower, respectively.
The segment P of the digit 7 (lower information type) functions as a digit division display LED. The digit division display LED is used to clarify the division between the information type and the numerical value.

  The segment P of the digit 6, digit 8, and digit 9 is an LED that is turned on when an unrecoverable error occurs. Unlike the digits 1 to 4, the segments 6 to 9 are provided with the segments P. When the segments are physically provided as described above, it is required to light them at any timing. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, control is performed so that all the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 are turned on.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the details of digits and segments in the twentieth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 4 in the first embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment, as described above, the 7-seg itself of digits 1 to 4 is composed of segments A to G, and is not provided with a dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of the digits 1, 3, and 4 constitutes any one of the above-mentioned status display LEDs 79. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, a segment P of digit 1 constitutes a game start LED 79d.
The segment P of the digit 3 constitutes a make-up display LED 79e.
Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.

Although not shown, in the twentieth embodiment, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) uses a seven-segment display having no dot segment (segment P), like the digits 1 to 4. The segment P of the digit 5 constitutes the effect display LED 79g.
The segment P of the digit 2 is unused in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 are as described above.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a data table stored in the ROM 54. The data table is a table for storing display data and display offset data when the digits 1 to 9 are turned on.
As shown in FIG. 127, the data table includes a data table in the used area stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 (in FIG. 124, an address “1200H〜”) and a data area outside the used area of the ROM 54 (see FIG. 124, an out-of-use area data table stored at an address “2300H”.

The in-use area data table includes an LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and an LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2).
The LED segment table 1 is a table for storing display data (English character data) used when displaying error information on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4).
The LED segment table 2 is a table for storing data for displaying “=” when displaying numeric display data and pressing order instruction information.
In FIG. 127, "DEFB" indicates that 1-byte (8-bit) data is stored in the assembler language.

In FIG. 127, for example, the “C” display data is “00111001B”. That is, the segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lighted)”, and the segments B, C, and G are “0 (off, lighted off)”. Therefore, in FIG. 126, when the segments A, D, E, and F are turned on, “C” is displayed by 7 segments.
The “=” display data is “01001000B”. That is, in FIG. 126, the segments D and G become “1 (ON; lighting)”, the central and lower horizontal segments light, and “=” is displayed by 7-segment.

  The LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are stored at consecutive addresses. For example, assuming that the head address of the “C” display data is “1811”, each display data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811”. In this case, the head address of the LED segment table 2 is “1816”, and the display data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from “1816”.

Thus, each display data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811”. Similarly, each display data of the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1816”.
For example, when the display data of the LED segment table 2 is read, the head address “1816” is specified, and when the content to be displayed is “5”, the address obtained by adding the offset value “5” to the head address “1816” That is, if the data of “181B” is read, the display data of “5” can be read.

On the other hand, the out-of-use area data table is a data table storing data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and includes an identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) and a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA). ). The identification segment offset table and the ratio display segment data table are stored at consecutive addresses as in the LED segment tables 1 and 2 described above.
Note that “identification segment” is used as an abbreviation for “information type”.

Also, in the identification segment of the twentieth embodiment, the English characters and the numerical values are set in reverse to the information types shown in FIG.
In particular,
Advantageous section ratio: U7 → 7U
Consecutive character ratio (6000 games): y6 → 6y
Character ratio (6000 games): y7 → 7y
Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative): A6 → 6A
Character ratio (cumulative): A7 → 7A
And

For example, the display offset data of “7U” indicating the identification segment of the advantageous section ratio is “07AH” as shown in FIG. 127, but “7” indicates the offset value of the upper digit (digit 6; 1000 digits). , “A” indicate the offset value of the lower digit (digit 7; 100 digits). Further, the offset value here indicates an offset value from the head address of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value “7” specifies “7” display data (for ratio), and the offset value “A” specifies “U” display data.
The display data is made different to distinguish “7” displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) from “7” displayed on the digits 1 to 5. “7” displayed in digits 6 to 9 is data set to turn on segment F in FIG. 126 (the fifth bit is set to “1”).

As described above, except for the display data “7”, the numerical display data is the same data as the LED segment table 2. Nevertheless, the data is stored separately in the in-use area data table and the out-of-use area data table for the following reasons.
Controlling the lighting display of the stored number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2), the acquired number (or error) display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is control performed in the use area. For this reason, data for control performed in the use area is stored in a data area in the use area.
In contrast, controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) is control performed outside the use area. For this reason, data for control performed outside the use area is stored in a data area outside the use area.

FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating output ports 2 to 5 provided on the main control board 50 and signals in the twentieth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the left column is the twentieth embodiment, and the right column is also described as “Reference Example” before the present invention.
Note that the “reference example” is an example in which digits 6 to 9 are not provided, and is an example described for comparison with the twentieth embodiment, and means a known technique or a well-known technique for the present invention. Not something.
Although FIG. 128 shows output ports 2 to 5 as output ports, more output ports are actually provided. Illustration of other output ports is omitted (the same applies to the drawings of output ports of other embodiments).
As shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an input port 51 and an output port 52.

The input ports 51 include, for example, input ports 0 to 2 (actually, other input ports are also provided).
The input port 0 is a port to which signals of the settlement switch 46, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are input.
The input port 1 is a port to which signals of the passage sensor 43a, the setting key switch 12, the setting switch 13, the reset switch 14, the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39 and the like are input.
Furthermore, a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), a signal from the input sensor 44, a signal from the payout sensor 37, and the like are input to the input port 2.

  As information processing for progressing the game, a main process to be performed once per game is provided. In the main processing, the inserted medals are detected, and a prize-winning processing is performed after all the reels 31 have stopped.

  During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited, and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is executed (FIG. 133; I_INTR described later). In the interrupt process, a process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S1407 in FIG. 133) is executed, and after the execution of the process, the process of returning to the main process is periodically performed again. The interval of the interruption time is 2.235 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interruption processing at an interval of 2.235 ms.

  Then, based on the acquired data, for each of the input ports 0 to 2, the level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), the rising data of the input port (the last interrupt was OFF, and the current interrupt is ON) The data that indicates which bit is the data that has been changed) and the falling data of the input port (data that indicates which bit is the data that was turned on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt) And memorize. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

As the output port, for example, output ports 0 to 10 are provided. FIG. 128 shows output ports 2 to 5 related to the twentieth embodiment among these output ports.
The feature of the output port of the twentieth embodiment is that there are two output ports (digit ports) for transmitting digit signals (output ports 2 and 4) and one output port (segment port) for transmitting segment signals. (Output port 3).

First, the output port 2 is a port for outputting three bet display signals and digits 1 to 5 signals. The 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are signals for turning on the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c, respectively.
The digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal are drive signals of the digit 1 to the digit 5, respectively.
For example, when the signal of “011111001” is output from the output port 2, it means that the drive signals of digits 1 to 4 and the 1-bet display signal have been output.

The output port 3 is a port that outputs a segment A signal to a segment P signal. For example, as shown in FIG. 127, when "0" is displayed, "00111111" is output.
The segment signal of the output port 3 is a segment signal that also serves as all of the digits 1 to 9.
The output port 4 is a port for outputting a drive signal of a digit 6 signal (D0) to a digit 9 signal (D3).
Therefore, a signal output from the output port 2 or 4 determines which digit is lit, and a signal output from the output port 3 determines which segment is lit.

  Here, the output port of the present embodiment can output signals of two consecutive output ports (each one byte, a total of two bytes) at a time. For this reason, the signals of the output ports 2 and 3 can be output simultaneously, and the signals of the output ports 3 and 4 can be output simultaneously. For this reason, the output port 2 and the output port 4 are set as the ports for outputting the digit 1 to 5 signals and the digit 6 to 9 signals, respectively, and the output port 3 between them is set as the port for outputting the segment signal. .

  Thus, for example, when outputting a signal indicating digit 1 as “1”, the signal output from output port 2 is “00001000 (assuming that signals other than digit 1 signal are“ 0 ”)” and output port The signal output from No. 3 is “00000110”. Therefore, “00001000/00000110” (“/” indicates a boundary between the signal output from the output port 2 and the signal output from the output port 3) is output from the output ports 2 and 3.

From the output port 5, an external (outer end) signal to the external central terminal board 100 is output. In the present embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (the hall computer 200, a data counter installed in the hall, and the like) via the external centralized terminal board 100. More specifically, for example, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that a specific special game is being performed, an external signal 4 indicating an error occurring in the slot machine 10 or occurrence of power cut, a slot, etc. An external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving the data strobe signal, the sub-control board 80 controls the sub-control data signal to be acquired from a buffer provided on the sub-control board 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
From the output ports other than the output ports 2 to 5 described above, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number), a sub-control data signal, a test signal, and the like. Is output.

129 to 131 are circuit diagrams illustrating wiring of electric signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, the digits 1 to 9, and the status display LED 79.
FIGS. 129 and 130 show wiring of electric signals on the main control board 50, and FIG. 131 shows wiring of electric signals on the display board 75.
As shown in FIG. 125, digits 1 and 2 forming the stored number display LED 76, digits 3 and 4 forming the acquired number display LED 78, and seven status display LEDs 79 are mounted on a display substrate 75. I have. On the other hand, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) and the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) are mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, a main CPU 55 and three ICs (IC2, IC3 and IC4) are mounted on the main control board 50. The main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs other than these three, but is not shown in the present embodiment.
The output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the IC2 to IC4 continues until the input of the clock input terminal changes from on to off.

IC2 is an IC for controlling the bet display signal and the digit 1 to 5 signals, and IC3 is an IC for controlling the segment signal. The IC 4 is an IC for controlling the digit 6 to 9 signals.
IC2 to IC4 each have a clock signal input terminal. On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has XCS2, XCS3, and XCS4 output terminals, the XCS2 output terminal is connected to the clock input terminal of IC2, the XCS3 output terminal is connected to the clock input terminal of IC3, and the XCS4 output terminal is connected. And the clock input terminal of IC4.

Further, the main CPU 55 has D0 to D7 output terminals. Then, the D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC2 and the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC 3 are connected respectively.
Further, the D0 to D3 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0 to D3 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected respectively. The D4 to D7 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected to the ground.

IC2 has an output port 2 (see FIG. 128) composed of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. A 1-bet display signal line to a 3-bet display signal line are output from the D0 to D2 output terminals, respectively. In FIG. 131, the 1-bet display signal line (terminal 16) and the 2-bet display signal line (17 No. 3 terminal) and a 3-bet display signal line (No. 18 terminal).
Among the output ports 2, digit 1 signal lines to digit 5 signal lines are output from the D3 to D7 output terminals, respectively, and these five signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75 (terminals 3 to 7 in FIG. 131). And the digit 5 signal line is connected to the drive signal line of the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) mounted on the main control board 50.

The IC3 has an output port 3 (see FIG. 128) including D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. Then, a segment A signal line to a segment P signal line are respectively output from the D0 to D7 output terminals, and these signal lines are firstly connected to the respective segments A to P of the digit 5, and secondly, to the digit Thirdly, it is connected to the segments A to P of FIGS. 6 to 9 (FIG. 130), and thirdly, to the display substrate 75 (the eighth to fifteenth terminals in FIG. 131).
Further, the IC 4 has an output port 4 (see FIG. 128) composed of D0 to D3 output terminals, and D0 to D3 input terminals and D0 to D3 output terminals respectively correspond. As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4 are unused (NC).

Then, digit 6 signal lines to digit 9 signal lines are output from the D0 to D3 output terminals, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the drive signal lines of digits 6 to 9, respectively.
In FIG. 129, for example, a signal line output from the D0 to D2 output terminals of the output port 2 and a signal line output from the D0 to D7 of the output port 3 are connected to the digit and the display substrate 75 via a transistor and a resistor, respectively. Although connected, these transistors and resistors are not shown in FIG.

In FIG. 130, the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 6 to 9, respectively.
Digits 6 to 9 each have eight LEDs (LEDs constituting segments A to G and P). The LEDs constituting the segments A to G and P of the digits 6 to 9 are connected to the segments A to G and P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 131, the display substrate 75 is provided with digits 1 to 4. Output terminals (3rd to 6th terminals) of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to the respective drive signal lines of the digits 1 to 4.
Each of the digits 1 to 4 has seven LEDs (LEDs constituting the segments A to G), similarly to the digit 5 described above. The LEDs of the segments A to G of the digits 1 to 4 are connected to the output terminals (terminals 8 to 14) of the segment A to G signal lines, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the display substrate 75 has seven LEDs (see FIG. 125) constituting the status display LED 79, specifically, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, and a 3-bet display LED 79c. , A game start display LED 79d, an insertion display LED 79e, a replay display LED 79f, and an effect display LED 79g.

Four of the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are connected to the output terminal (terminal 15) of the segment P signal line.
Further, the game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal (terminal 3) of the digit 1 signal line, the insertion display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal (terminal 5) of the digit 3 signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the digit 4 signal. The effect display LED 79g is connected to the output terminal of the digit 5 signal line (terminal 7).

  As shown in FIG. 131, the output terminals (the 16th to 18th terminals) of the 1st to 3rd bet display signal lines on the display board 75 are connected to the 1st to 3rd bet display LEDs 79a to 79c, respectively. I have. Further, a + 5V power supply voltage terminal (terminal No. 1 and terminal No. 2) of the display substrate 75 and 1-bet to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are connected.

  In the above configuration, in FIG. 129, the main CPU 55 normally applies a high-level (approximately 5 V; hereinafter the same) voltage to the XCS2 to XCS4 output terminals, and changes from a high level to a low level (almost zero V). The same applies hereinafter) (the voltage is changed by a switch (circuit) provided in the main CPU 55). For example, when driving (selecting or specifying) IC2, the XCS2 output terminal is activated. As a result, the active signal (chip select signal) is output from the XCS2 output terminal and is input to the clock input terminal of IC2. As a result, the IC 2 enters a driving state (also referred to as a selected state or a designated state). When the XCS3 and XCS4 output terminals are activated in the same manner as above, the IC3 and IC4 are driven, respectively.

A low-level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and a high-level voltage is applied when outputting data (data signal) of “1”.
For example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively. At this moment, when the XCS2 output terminal is active, Is input to its D0 input terminal.

  Furthermore, a high-level voltage is normally applied to the output port 2 of the IC 2, and a low-level voltage is applied to an output terminal corresponding to the input terminal to which the data signal has been input. For example, a data signal of "1" is output from the D7 output terminal of the main CPU 55. At this moment, when the XCS2 output terminal is active, the data signal is input to the D7 input terminal of the IC2. Then, when the D7 output terminal of the IC2 is set to a low level, a current can flow through the LEDs of the segments A to G of the digit 5.

Furthermore, while outputting a data signal of "1" from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and activating the XCS3 output terminal, the data signals are input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC3.
Normally, a high-level voltage is applied to the output port 3 of the IC 3. When a high-level voltage is applied, in FIG. 129, the circuits subsequent to the transistor (not shown) are in a high impedance state (neither low nor high).

When the D0 and D1 output terminals of the IC3 are set to low level, a current flows from the emitter of the transistor connected to the high level (+5 V) to the collector due to a change in the current between the emitter and the base, and flows to the segment A and B signal lines. Electric current flows.
Therefore, as described above, when the D7 output terminal of the IC2 is set to the low level and current can flow through each LED of the segments A to G of the digit 5, D0 and D1 of the IC3 as described above. When the output terminal is set to a low level, a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are turned on.

  In other words, although a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines of all the digits, since a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits other than the digit 5, no potential difference occurs, and the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 Are not turned on. That is, the current flows only to the digit 5 to which about 0 V is applied, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are turned on.

Also, for example, the D3 output terminal (digit 1 signal) of IC2 is set to low level.
Further, when the D7 output terminal (segment P signal) of the IC 3 is set to a low level, a current flows from the emitter connected to the high level to the collector with a change in the current between the emitter and the base, and a current flows to the segment P signal line. As a result, in FIG. 131, the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

  In other words, although a current flows through the segment P signal lines of all the digits, a voltage of about 5 V is also applied to the digits other than the digit 1, so that no potential difference occurs and the digit other than the digit 1 is associated with the digit other than the digit 1. The put-in display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are not turned on. That is, the current flows only to the digit 1 to which about 0 V is applied, and the game start display LED 79d associated with the digit 1 is turned on.

Further, a low-level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC2. When a high-level voltage is applied to any of the D0 to D2 output terminals of the IC2, current flows from the collector of the transistor to the emitter, and the collector side of the transistor becomes low.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131, a high-level voltage is always applied to the power supply voltage terminals (terminals 1 and 2) connected to the upstream side of the 1-bet to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c. I have. Therefore, in FIG. 129, for example, when the D0 output terminal of the IC2 is set to the high level, the 16th terminal of the 1-bet display signal is set to the low level in FIG. I do.

In the present embodiment, only one of the digits 1 to 9 is set to be lit. Here, in order to enable lighting of all the digits individually, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each digit and for each segment. However, such a setting increases the number of wires, increases the cost, and increases the assembly burden.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, for example, in the case of a segment A signal, if the circuit configuration is connected to the segment A signals of all digits 1 to 9, the number of wirings can be reduced.

Even with the circuit configuration of the present embodiment, if the digit to be lit is sequentially switched for each interrupt process, there is practically no difference from the state in which all the digits are lit simultaneously (simultaneously lit by human eyes). As if you were doing it).
In addition, if the LEDs to be turned on are different for each interruption process, power consumption can be suppressed and burn-in of the LEDs can be suppressed.
Further, the brightness can be increased by repeating the point light emission as compared with the LED that is constantly lit.

FIG. 132 (A) is a diagram showing a relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in the twentieth embodiment.
FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the interrupt process is executed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process.
On the other hand, a storage area for the LED display counter is provided at a predetermined address in the usage area of the RWM 53. The LED display counter is 1-byte data, and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt.

  The LED display counter of the twentieth embodiment takes a value of “00000001” as an initial value. Then, an update is performed to shift the bit “1” one digit to the left for each interruption process. When this update is continued and the interrupt changes from “8” to “9” in FIG. 132, the bit “1” overflows to “00000000”. When the LED display counter value becomes “00000000”, initialization processing of the LED display counter is executed in the next interrupt processing. This initialization process is to set the D0 bit to “1”, that is, to set the LED display counter to “00000001”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, the update is continuously updated in the order of “1” → “2” →... → “9” → “1” →. For this reason, the LED display counter is a counter of nine interrupts in one cycle.

  First, when the LED display counter value is “00000001”, the output signals are the 1-bet display signal and the digit 6 signal, and therefore the lighting targets are the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 (this At this point, an LED display request flag described below is not considered (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000001”, a signal of “00000001” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 1-bet display signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 6 signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 can be turned on.

  In FIG. 132, “in use area” and “out of use area” are indicated by programs and data for controlling lighting of 1-bet to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c and digits 1 to 5. Is stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and the program and data for controlling the lighting of the digits 6 to 9 are stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. The inside and outside of the used area are displayed separately.

Similarly, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000010”, a signal of “00000010” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 2-bet display signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 7 signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 2-bet display LED 79b and the digit 7 can be turned on. When the digit 7 is turned on, the segment P (digit division display LED) is always turned on.
For the digits 6, 8, and 9 other than the digit 7, the segment P is not turned on in the interrupt processing. The segment P of these digits is turned on at the time of an unrecoverable error in which interrupt processing is prohibited (the details of this point will be described later).

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000100”, a signal of “00000100” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 3-bet display signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 8 signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 3-bet display LED 79c and the digit 8 can be turned on.
In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00001000”, a signal of “00001000” is output only from the output port 2 (there is no output from the output port 4). As a result, the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 1 and the game start display LED 79d corresponding to the segment P of the digit 1 can be turned on.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00010000”, a signal of “00010000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 2 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, digit 2 can be turned on. There is no LED assigned to segment P of digit 2 (FIG. 126).
Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00100000”, a signal of “00100000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 3 and the insertion indication LED 79e corresponding to the segment P of the digit 3 can be turned on.

In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “01000000”, a signal of “01000000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, a digit 4 signal is output from the D6 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the digit 4 and the replay display LED 79f corresponding to the segment P of the digit 4 can be turned on.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “10000000”, a signal of “10000000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, a digit 5 signal is output from the D7 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the effect indicator LED 79g corresponding to the digit 5 and the segment P of the digit 5 can be turned on.

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000000”, a signal of “00001000” is output only from the output port 4 (there is no output from the output port 2). As a result, the digit 9 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the digit 9 can be turned on.
The LED display counter is 8-bit data. If 9 digits are managed by the 8-bit data, one digit cannot be assigned to each bit, and one bit is insufficient. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the LED display counter is “0”, the output timing of the digit 9 signal is set.

The LED display request flag shown in FIG. 132 (B) is a flag indicating which LED has a lighting request, and is a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53 as 1-byte data of 8 bits (D0 to D7). Is stored.
Digits 1 to 5 and 6 to 8 corresponding to each bit of the LED display request flag are set to the same bit as the LED display counter. The D0 to D2 bits of the LED display request flag correspond to 1 to 3 bets.
There is no bit corresponding to digit 9 in the LED display request flag. This is because, as described above, a bit corresponding to digit 9 cannot be provided.

In the LED display request flag, for example, during normal times (during game play and game standby), the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is turned off, and 1 to 3 bets and digits 1 to 4, 6 to 8 can be turned on. Therefore, it becomes “0111111111”. Bit "1" of the LED display request flag indicates that lighting is possible, and bit "0" indicates that lighting is not possible.
During the setting change, the D7 bit is set to "1" because the set value is displayed on the digit 5, and the D3 and D4 bits are set to "0" to hide the digits 1 and 2 (the stored number display LED 76). Bits D5 and D6 are set to "1" on digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) to indicate "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Therefore, the LED display request flag during the setting change is “11100000B”.

  Further, during the setting confirmation, the set value is displayed on the digit 5 in the same manner as during the setting change, so that the D7 bit becomes "1". Further, "8" is displayed on the digits 1 to 4. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “11111000B”.

When LED display control ("I_LED_OUT" described later) is actually performed in the interrupt processing, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and a digit signal is output corresponding to the operation result ( Digit on).
For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), in the case of interruption “4”, the LED display counter is “00001000”, and if that time is normal, the LED display request counter becomes “01111111”. Therefore, when both are AND-operated, the result is "00001000", and the signal output at the time of the interrupt processing is only the digit 1 signal (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76).
Also, in the case of interruption "8", the LED display counter is "10000000", and if the time is normal, the LED display request counter becomes "01111111". Therefore, when an AND operation is performed on both, the result is “00000000”, and there is no signal output during the interrupt processing.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 at a period of 2.235 ms (but not limited to this) in parallel with the main processing.
First, when the processing shifts to the interrupt processing of step S1401, in step S1402, processing of saving register values and prohibiting duplicate interrupts is performed as initial processing. Here, in order to use the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Further, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. The reason for this is that, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power-off processing.

In the next step S1403, it is determined whether or not a power-off is detected. Here, when a power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value by a voltage monitoring device (power supply detection circuit) (not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a power supply detection signal is provided to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port. Is input, it is detected whether or not the signal has been input.
When the power-off is detected, the process proceeds to the power-off process in step S1419, and when it is determined that the power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S1405, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process for subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed is mentioned.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1406 to perform LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 134). Here, the process is to turn on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10. Details of this processing will be described later.

  The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. In the case of a non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main processing as described later. The LED display control is performed every time.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1407, where the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, and the like have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data (level data, rising data, (Falling data) is generated and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

  In the next step S1408, it is determined whether or not the set value is within a normal range. Here, the setting value data stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether the setting value range is within the normal range (whether within the range of “1” to “6”). If it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1409. If it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S1420, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 2 (FIG. 137 described later). In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and the fact that the error is “E6” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, a recoverable error and a non-recoverable error will be described.
The recoverable error is an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power, and includes, for example, a medal in the hopper 35, a front door open error, and a medal jam error.
On the other hand, a non-recoverable error is an error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. Specific examples of the non-recoverable error include the following. However, the present invention is not limited to these non-recoverable errors.
“E1” error: when it is determined that the recovery from power-off is not normal “E5” error: when it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped “E6” error: step S1408 When it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, "E7" error: when it is determined in step S1410 that a random number error has occurred

Further, in this embodiment, the E1 error and the E5 error are referred to as a non-recoverable error 1, and the E6 error and the E7 error are referred to as a non-recoverable error 2.
A program for determining the unrecoverable error 1 is stored in the used area. Further, a program (SS ERROR_STOP1 shown in FIG. 136, which will be described later) when an unrecoverable error 1 occurs is stored in the control area in the use area of the ROM 54. For this reason, this processing is also referred to as in-use area processing.
On the other hand, the program for determining the unrecoverable error 2 is stored outside the use area. A program for executing steps S1408 and S1410 in the above-described interrupt processing corresponds to this. Further, a program process (SS_ERROR_STOP2 in FIG. 137 described later) when the unrecoverable error 2 occurs is stored in a control area of the ROM 54 outside the used area. Therefore, this processing is also referred to as out-of-use-area processing.

Return to the description of the flowchart.
In step S1409, a check process of a built-in random number is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormal clock frequency of the random number for the lottery is detected (for example, when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on.
The process advances to step S1410 to determine whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is ON). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process advances to step S1411 to determine whether the error has occurred. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1420 and shifts to the non-recoverable error process 2. The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S1411, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of the reels 31 (left, middle, and right), and includes a stop, a constant speed, an acceleration, a deceleration, a deceleration start, and a standby according to the operation state. Upon completion of the drive control of the reel 31, the process proceeds to step S1412, and a port output process is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the (reel) motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S1413, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether there is any abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S1414, control command transmission processing is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (a non-transmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that point (if the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt processing coming next to that point), this step S1414 is executed. Transmits a control command to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S1415, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S1416, by writing (setting) data to the output port 5, an external signal is output (signal transmission to the external centralized terminal board 100).
Next, the process proceeds to step S1417 to perform a random number update process. In the next step S1418, the register value saved in step S1402 is restored, and the next interruption is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As shown in the above processing, the turning on / off of the stored number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the status display LED 79 (79a to 79g), and the set value display LED 73 is controlled by the interruption processing every 2.235 ms.
Further, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that, in the case of the non-recoverable error processing, the interrupt processing is not performed (the interrupt processing is interrupted until the normal recovery).
The non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80) and the like. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is prohibited.
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when the unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not sent to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S1406 of FIG.
First, in step S1431, the output ports 2 and 3 are turned off. The output port 2 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the segment A to segment P signals. By outputting “00000000” to these output ports 2 and 3, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily not performed. Thus, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from being simultaneously lit and seen (covered and displayed) even for a moment (afterimage prevention).

  In the next step S1432, as in step S1431, the output port 4 is turned off. The output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal. By outputting “00000000” also to the output port 4, the output of the management information display LED 74 is temporarily not performed. Thereby, the same effect (afterimage prevention) as described above is exerted.

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is updated. Updating the LED display counter is a process of shifting the bit “1” one digit to the left. The updated value is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1434.
In step S1434, it is determined whether the LED display counter has been updated nine times. Here, when the LED display counter before the update is “00000000”, it is determined that the update has been performed nine times. If the LED display counter before the update is “00000000”, the process proceeds to step S1435. On the other hand, when the LED display counter is not “00000000”, the flow proceeds to step S1436.

In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter value is set to “00000001” and stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1436, an LED display counter and an LED display request flag are obtained. The LED display counter and the LED display request flag are both stored at predetermined addresses of the RWM 53. Then, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1437 to perform a segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed this time. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the LED display request flag value and the LED display counter value, and data of the LED that is turned on this time is created.

For example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
Becomes
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
Becomes
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Further, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

The process advances to step S1438 to determine whether or not the A register value (the value obtained by performing an AND operation on the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value) is “0”. When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S1456. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S1439.
In step S1439, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at the address indicating the error display data in the RWM 53, and the process of reading the data and storing it in the B register is executed.
In the next step S1440, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is “TBL_SEG_DATA2” shown in FIG. 127 and is stored in the used area of the ROM 54. The head address of this data is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1441 to acquire set value display data. Here, the current set value stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, the process proceeds to step S1442, and it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is "1" ("10000000B"). If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a setting value display request, and the flow advances to step S1455. If it is determined that there is no setting value display request, the process advances to step S1443.

In step S1443, the stored number data stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, an upper digit offset is obtained. This process is a process of executing an operation of dividing the stored number data acquired in step S1443 by “10 (decimal number)”, storing the quotient value in the A register, and storing the surplus value in the C register.
In the next step S1445, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the stored number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”, and if “1”, “Yes” is determined. I do. When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1455, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1446.

  In step S1446, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digit of the stored number. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”, and if “1”, “Yes” is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S1454. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digit of the stored number, the process advances to step S147.

  In step S147, display data during setting change, acquired number data, or a pressing order instruction number is acquired and stored in the A register. In this process, the acquired number data stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. At the timing of displaying the acquired number, the predetermined address stores the acquired number data, and at the timing of displaying the pressing order instruction number during ART, the pressing order instruction number is stored at the predetermined address. I have. Further, when the setting is being changed, data indicating “8” is stored.

  In the next step S1448, it is determined whether or not an error is displayed. In this process, it is determined whether the B register value is “0”, and when it is “0”, “No” is determined. When it is determined in step S1448 that an error is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1450. If it is determined that an error is being displayed, the flow advances to step S1449.

In step S1449, the LED segment table 1 ("TBL_SEG_DATA1" in FIG. 127) is set. This process executes a process of storing the head address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1450 to acquire an offset for the upper digit. In this process, if no error has occurred, an operation of dividing the acquired number data or the push order instruction number stored in the A register at this time by "10 (decimal number)" is executed, and the quotient is calculated. The result is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the C register. On the other hand, when an error occurs, an operation of dividing the B register value by "10 (decimal number)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S1451, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D5 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”. Judge. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1455, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1452.

  In step S1452, it is determined whether there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78. This processing determines whether the D6 bit (bit corresponding to digit 4) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. to decide. When it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1454, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, bet signal data is obtained. This process is a process of performing an AND operation on the LED display counter and the bet amount display data, and acquiring the operation result.
Here, the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and is as follows.
0 bets: 0000000000B
One bet: 00000001B
When two bets: 00000011B
When three bets are placed: 00000111B
Therefore, for example, when the LED display counter value is “00000100B” and the bet number display data is “00000111B”, AND operation of both results in “00000100B”, and D2 bit (a bit corresponding to the 3-bet display LED) becomes Data “1” is created. Then, the process proceeds to step S1456.

If "Yes" in step S1446 or "Yes" in step S1452, and the flow advances to step S1454, an offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1455 to acquire segment output data. In this process, the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 1) and the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data) are added and correspond to the address after the addition. This is a process of storing data in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816H (before addition)
A register value = 1H
HL register value = 1817H (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): “1” display data.
When the pressing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data, “=” display data is obtained.

Next, the flow advances to step S1456 to determine whether or not there is a display request for the segment P. Here, data indicating ON / OFF of the status display LEDs 79d to 79g is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Specifically, it is as follows.
D0 bit: not used D1 bit: not used D2 bit: not used D3 bit: "1" when game start is possible, other "0"
D4 bit: unused D5 bit: "1" when medal can be inserted, other "0"
D6 bit: "1" when replay winning, other "0"
D7 bit: "1" when effect display is possible, other "0"
The relationship between the bit and the status display LED 79 is the same as that shown in FIG.

  This data is read and stored in the A register, an AND operation is performed on the value and the value (LED display counter) stored in the E register, and when the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request. . When it is determined that there is a segment P display request, the process proceeds to step S1457, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1458.

  In step S1457, segment P output data is set. This process is to set the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data (display data) stored in the D register to “1”. Next, proceeding to step S1458, the LED digit and the segment signal are output from the output ports 2 and 3. Specifically, data (digit data) stored in the E register is output from the output port 2, and data (segment data) stored in the D register is output from the output port 3. Then, the flow shifts to the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1449.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in step S1449.
The “ratio” is an abbreviation of management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the present embodiment, and is displayed by digits 6 to 9.
The interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 and the LED display control program shown in FIG. 134 are stored in the use area of the ROM 54. On the other hand, the program of the ratio display processing of FIG. 135 is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
In FIG. 134, in the LED display control which is a program within the use area, when the process proceeds to step S1458, the process proceeds to a ratio display process which is a program outside the use region. When the ratio display process is completed, the program returns to the program of FIG. It returns and ends LED display control (step S1460).

  As described above, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the program stored in the use area of the ROM 54, whereas the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is executed by the program stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. This is because the lighting control of the digits 1 to 5 is executed by the program in the use area, and the lighting control of the digits 6 to 9 (management information (ratio)) is executed by the program outside the use area. As shown in FIG. 127, data used in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is also stored in the data area in the use area of the ROM 54, and data used in the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is stored in the ROM 54. It is stored in a data area outside the used area.

In FIG. 135, in step S1471, an LED display counter is obtained. This process is the same as the process of acquiring the LED display counter in step S1436. The obtained LED display counter is stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter value stored in the D register and “11111000”. If the AND operation result is not “0”, it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the process according to this flowchart ends (ie, to return to the process in the used area, the process proceeds to step S1460 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, if the AND operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the flow advances to step S1473.

In particular,
LED display counter value: 00010000 (digit 2 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00010000 (≠ “0”) → No request for ratio display.
Or,
LED display counter value: 00000001 (digit 6 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00000000 → request for ratio display.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter value stored in the D register is “0”. If it is determined to be “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1474, and if it is not “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (single digit) display request is set.
Here, the management information display LED 74 displays four digits with digits 6 to 9, as shown in FIG. 125 (B).
Digit 9 place: Ratio (single digit)
Digit 8 place: ratio (10 digits)
Digit 7 place: Ratio (100 digits)
Digit 6 place: ratio (1000 digits)
Called.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the D0 bit of the LED display counter is “1”, the digit 6 signal becomes “1”, and when the D1 bit is “1”, the digit 7 signal becomes “1”, and D2 When the bit is "1", it becomes a digit 8 signal "1". When the LED display counter is "0", the digit 9 signal is on.
However, since 9 digits 1 to 9 are managed by an 8-bit LED display counter, even if the digit 9 signal is on, all bits become "0" and the data corresponds to digit 9. This does not become data in which the bit to be set to “1”. Therefore, when the LED display counter is "00000000B" (when the digit 9 signal is on), digit data "00001000B" in which the D3 bit is set to "1" is created to allocate the digit 9 signal to the D3 bit. . In step S1474, this process is executed, and this digit data is stored as "00001000B" in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1471 or S1474, digit data in which one of the digit 6 (D0) to digit 9 (D3) signals is "1" (ON) is stored in the D register.

In the next step S1475, a ratio display number is obtained. Here, the ratio display numbers refer to the numbers “1” to “5” shown in FIG. Since the switching display is executed at predetermined time intervals from the advantageous section ratio of “1” to the ratio of the bonus item of “5” (cumulative), in this interruption, it is determined which management information of which number is to be displayed. get. The obtained ratio display number is stored in the E register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1476 to set an identification segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the identification segment offset table (“TBL_SEGID_DATA” in FIG. 127) in the HL register. In a next step S1277, an identification segment offset value is obtained. Specifically, this is a process of reading an offset value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register in step S1475 from the identification segment offset table. For example, when the ratio display number is “1”, the display offset data is “7U”, and the offset value at this time is “07AH”. The display offset data when the ratio display number is "2" is "6y", and the offset value at this time is "06BH". This identification offset value is obtained and stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1478, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request of digit 6) for the ratio (1000 digits). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000001”, and if the operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if not, it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (1000 digits), the flow proceeds to step S1482; otherwise, the flow proceeds to step S1479.

  In step S1479, it is determined whether there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits) (a display request for digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. Specifically, for example, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000010”, and if the operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if not, it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1480.

The process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no display request for the ratio (1000 digits) and the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no display request for the identification segment (information type). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is acquired. Here, the “ratio data” corresponds to the advantageous section ratio “50 (%)” in the example of FIG. 38, for example.
In this step S1480, a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is obtained. For example, when the ratio display number obtained in step S1475 is “1”, ratio data of the advantageous section ratio is obtained. The method of acquiring the ratio data is the same as in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

Next, the flow advances to step S1481 to determine whether there is a display request for the ratio (one digit) (display request for digit 9). This process is to determine whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the D register value and “00000100”, and if the operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1482.
Note that when there is no display request for the ratio (one digit) in step S1481, it means that there is a display request for the ratio (10 digits).

By the above processing, when there is a display request of the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a display request of the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, an upper digit offset is set. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1479) or the ratio data (step S1480). Then, a process of storing the upper digit in the A register and the lower digit in the C register is executed. For example, assuming that the identification segment offset value “07AH” of the advantageous section ratio is stored in the A register, a process of storing “7” in the A register and storing “A” in the C register is executed.
When "50" is stored as the ratio data in the A register, a process of storing "5" in the A register and storing "0" in the C register is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1483.

In the next step S1483, a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This processing is for storing the head address of the ratio display segment data table in FIG. 127 in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S1484 to acquire segment output data. In this process, the value stored in the HL register (the head address of the ratio display segment data table) and the value stored in the A register are added, and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is added. This is a process of storing in the E register.

Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 1810H (before addition; head address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5H
If
HL register value = 1815H (after addition)
E register value = 01101101B: "5" display data.

Next, the flow advances to step S1485 to determine whether or not the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when the digits 6 to 9 are displayed, the segment P (dot) of the digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a display request of the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that the segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a display request for the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no display request for the segment P.
Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, and if it is not “1”. Judge that there is no display request for the segment P.
If it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since the segment P corresponds to D7 bits of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 is OR-operated with “10000000”, the operation result is acquired, and Remember.
In the next step S1487, a segment signal is output from the output port 3 and a digit signal is output from the output port 4 to output a digit signal and a segment signal. At this point, the data corresponding to the digit signal is stored in the D register, and the data corresponding to the segment signal is stored in the E register. The port 4 outputs the D register value.
After execution of step S1487, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. That is, the process proceeds to step S1460, and the LED display control ends.

Subsequently, the non-recoverable error processing will be described. In the present embodiment, the non-recoverable error processing includes a non-recoverable error processing 1 and a non-recoverable error processing 2.
As described above, the types of non-recoverable errors are not limited to the errors exemplified here.
“E1” error: when it is determined that the recovery from power-off is not normal “E5” error: when it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred when the reel 31 is stopped “E6” error: step S1408 , When it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, "E7" error: when it is determined in step S1410 that a random number error has occurred.

  Then, no matter which unrecoverable error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, "E" is displayed on digit 3 and "1" is displayed on digit 4. The same message is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.

Further, it is determined that the recovery from the power-off is not normal and that the “E1” error is determined during a “program start process (stored in the used area of the ROM 54)” (not shown).
It is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred, and that an “E5” error is determined during “main processing (stored in the used area of the ROM 54)” (not shown).

  On the other hand, the “E6” error is an error when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range in step S1408 during the interrupt processing. However, the program in step S1408 (set value error (out of set value range) ) Discrimination program) is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. In FIG. 133, when the processing proceeds to step S1408, a setting value error (out of the setting value range) determination program stored outside the use area is executed, and thereafter, the processing is set to return to step S1408.

  Similarly, the “E7” error is an error when the random number value is determined to be an error in step S1410 during the interrupt processing, but the actual program in step S1410 (the random number abnormality check program) is It is stored outside the used area. When the process proceeds to step S1410, the random number abnormality check program stored outside the use area is executed, and thereafter, the process is set to return to step S1410.

If the program in the used area is determined to be a non-recoverable error, the non-recoverable error processing 1 is executed, and if the program outside the used area is determined to be a non-recoverable error, an unrecoverable error is performed. Processing 2 is executed.
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the non-recoverable error process 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2).
The program for the non-recoverable error processing 1 is stored in the used area of the ROM 54, and the program for the non-recoverable error processing 2 is stored outside the used area of the ROM 54.
In the non-recoverable error processing 1, only the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) are controlled to be turned on. On the other hand, in the non-recoverable error process 2, the segments 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78) and the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 754) are controlled to be turned on.

In FIG. 136, in step S1491, error display data (lower digits) is set. In this process, a process of storing data (01000000B) in which only digit 4 is “1” is executed in the H register. This value corresponds to data in which the D6 bit of the output port 2 is “1”.
Next, the flow advances to step S1492 to set an upper digit as error display data. In this process, a process of storing data (00100000B) in which only digit 3 is “1” in the D register is executed. This value corresponds to data in which the D5 bit of the output port 2 is “1”.

Further, in step S1492, the E register stores the segment data indicating the upper digit “E” of the unrecoverable error, that is, “01111001B”.
Before shifting to the non-recoverable error processing, the L register stores segment data indicating the lower digit of the current non-recoverable error. For example, if the current non-recoverable error is an “E1” error, the lower digit is “1”, so the segment data, that is, “00000110B” is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an E1 error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values at this point are:
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error is "1" (00100000B)
E register value: display data (01111001B) indicating the upper "E" of the unrecoverable error
H register value: Data in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is "1" (01000000B)
L register value: display data (00000110B) indicating the lower "1" of the current unrecoverable error
Becomes

In the next step S1493, an output port address to be cleared and the number of output ports are set. In the present embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the non-recoverable error processing 1 are output ports 0 to 6, and an address is set for each port. set.
In the next step S1494, the output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” (“00000000”) are output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6 by one output port. In step S1495, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of the output port 0 is “0F1H”, the address “0F2H” of the output port 1 is set as the next address.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S1496, and it is determined whether or not all output ports have been completed, that is, whether or not output ports 6 have been completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S1494, and if it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1497.

As described above, by turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the execution of the process is turned off. This can prevent burn-in of the LED, burn-in of the motor 32, and swallowing of medals. For example, if the power is cut off while the blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 remains on (the state where the medal flow path is formed) unless the process is executed (medal detection). The medal is swallowed because no processing takes place).
In addition, if the power is cut off while the excitation signal of the motor 32 is being output, the excitation signal of the motor 32 will be continuously output until the reset signal is input unless the process is executed.

  In the next step S1497, display data is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the upper digits of the error. The output port 2 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 3 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, the flow advances to step S1498 to execute standby (wait) for preventing LED flicker. Here, how much standby is performed depends on the performance of the LED, but may be set to, for example, about “0.1 ms”. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1499.
In step S1499, “0” is output from output ports 2 and 3. This process is a process for preventing an afterimage, similarly to step S1431 in FIG. 134 described above.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1500 to execute a standby (wait) for preventing flickering of the LED. This is a process for surely extinguishing the LED after outputting “0” from the output ports 2 and 3. Next, the process proceeds to step S1501, where switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This allows
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of the non-recoverable error is "1" E register value: Display data indicating the upper "E" of the non-recoverable error H register value: Lower than the non-recoverable error Data where only the digit (digit 4) is “1” L register value: Display data indicating the lower “1” of the current unrecoverable error <After replacement>
D register value: Data in which only the lower digit (digit 4) of the unrecoverable error is “1” E register value: Display data indicating the lower “1” of the current unrecoverable error H register value: Unrecoverable error Data where only the upper digit (digit 3) is “1” L register value: display data indicating the upper “E” of the non-recoverable error.

The flow advances to step S1502 to output display data from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the lower digits of the error. As in step S1497, the output port 2 outputs a D register value, and the output port 3 outputs an E register value. Thus, the output port 2 outputs “01000000” in which the digit 4 signal is “1”, and the output port 3 outputs display data “00000110” indicating “1”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1503, and waits for flicker prevention. This process is the same as step S1498. Next, the process proceeds to step S1504, and outputs “0” from the output ports 2 and 3 as in step S1499. In the next step S1505, standby for flicker prevention is executed. This process is the same as step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above processing, for example, when the error is “E1”, the display of “E” by the digit 3 and the display of “1” by the digit 4 are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Note that, as described above, the LED display control (and the ratio display process) is executed within the timer interrupt process. However, at the time of a recovery impossible error, the timer interrupt process is not executed (prohibited), and is shown in FIG. As described above, the display of the unrecoverable error is executed by the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration.

Subsequently, the non-recoverable error process 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2) in FIG. 137 will be described. As described above, the non-recoverable error process 2 is a process executed when a non-recoverable error is determined by a program outside the use area of the ROM 54 (for example, an “E6” error or an “E7” error). .
In FIG. 137, the same processes as those in FIG. 136 are denoted by the same step numbers.
Steps S1491 to S1505 are the same as those in FIG.
In the non-recoverable error process 1, an error number is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (the acquired number display LED 78). On the other hand, the non-recoverable error process 2 includes a process of displaying an error number on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) and displaying predetermined information on the management information display LED 74.

  In FIG. 137, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, a process of lighting the segment P of the digit 6 is executed. Specifically, a signal of "10000000B" (only segment P is on) is output from output port 3, and a signal of "00000001B" (only digit 6 is on) is output from output port 4. Next, the process advances to step S1507 to execute a standby process for flicker prevention. This process is similar to the process in step S1498 and the like. Next, the process advances to step S1508 to output a signal of “0” from the output ports 3 and 4. This processing is similar to the processing in step S1499.

Next, the process advances to step S1509 to execute a flicker-prevention standby process. This process is the same as step S1500.
The above processing is repeated for digits 7 to 9. That is,
(1) A signal of "10000000B" (only segment P is on) is output from output port 3, and a signal whose corresponding digit is turned on ("1") is output from output port 4 (2) Flicker prevention Standby processing (3) Turn off output ports 3 and 4 (output "0")
(4) Execute standby processing for flicker prevention.
Through the above processing, the segments P of the digits 6, 7, 8, and 9 are sequentially turned on. After the process in step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
FIG. 138 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an output port according to the twenty-first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 128 according to the twentieth embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twenty-first embodiment is that, assuming that digit 5 is not provided, there is one output port (digit port) for transmitting a digit signal and an output port for transmitting a segment signal. The point is that there is one port (segment port) (output port 4).
In the twenty-first embodiment of FIG. 138, unlike the twentieth embodiment, no digit signal is assigned to the output port 2 (of course, no segment signal is assigned).

The output port 3 is set as an output port dedicated to the digit signal. Digit 1 to 4 signals and digit 6 to 9 signals are assigned to 8 bits of the output port 3.
Therefore, the digit 5 signal is not assigned to the output port 3. When the number of digits including the digit 5 is nine, if this is to be assigned to an 8-bit signal, one bit is insufficient. Therefore, the digit 5 is not provided, or when the digit 5 is provided, it is allocated to another port (for example, the output port 5), and the digits 1-4 and the signals 6-9 are allocated to one output port 3. Even when the digit 5 is provided, since the digit 5 does not need to be turned on during normal operation (other than during setting change or setting confirmation), the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to need to be turned on during normal operation Nine signals are set to be managed by one output port 3.

The output port 4 is an output port dedicated to the segment, and is the same as the output port 3 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, when the digit 5 is not provided, while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the set value is stored in the stored number display LED 76 (either digit 1 or 2) or the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3 or 4). ). In this way, it is not necessary to assign a bit dedicated to the digit 5 signal to the output port. In this case, in FIG. 138, the D5 bit of the output port 5 is an unused (empty) bit.
However, when the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is provided and the digit 5 signal is output as in the twentieth embodiment, it can be assigned to, for example, the D5 bit of the output port 5, as shown in FIG. 138. .

Also in the twenty-first embodiment, since the output port 3 for outputting the digit signal and the segment output port 4 for outputting the segment signal are continuous output ports, the digit data and the segment data (total of 2 bytes) can be output at one time. It is possible to output.
When the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is not provided, the total number of the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 is eight. Therefore, the digit can be assigned to each bit of the 8-bit data. There is an advantage that the number of output ports for outputting signals can be reduced to one, and management becomes easy.

FIG. 139 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram showing an LED display counter in the twenty-first embodiment. The example of FIG. 139 shows an example in the case where no digit 5 is provided.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the assignment of digits to segments is the same as that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 126) except that digit 5 is not provided. Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, among the status display LEDs 79, the effect display LED 79g is not provided. If the effect display LED 79g is provided, it can be assigned to the segment P of the digit 2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3B, the signal assigned to the bit of the LED display counter matches the signal assigned to the bit of the output port 3. In FIG. 9B, when the bit “1” is shifted left by one digit at the time of the interrupt following the interrupt “8”, the LED display counter becomes “0”. The LED display counter is initialized to “00000001”. As a result, the LED display counter becomes a counter in which one cycle is 8 interrupts.
Furthermore, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are not assigned to the LED display counter as in the twentieth embodiment. In the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting instead of dynamic lighting.
As described above, since the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, this data may be read periodically and a bet display signal may be constantly output from the output port 2.
Furthermore, the assignment of the segment P to the digit signal is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the circuit wiring diagrams (FIGS. 129 to 131) shown in the twentieth embodiment are omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment. In the flowcharts described below, the steps that execute the same processes as in the twentieth embodiment are given the same step numbers, and overlapping descriptions are omitted. Steps having contents different from those in the twentieth embodiment are underlined in step numbers.
First, step S1531 is a step corresponding to step S1431 in FIG. 134. Here, the output port 3 (digit port) and the output port 4 (segment port) are turned off. By outputting "00000000B" from these output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 is temporarily prevented. This is to prevent different LEDs from being simultaneously lit and seen (covered and displayed) even at a moment when switching the display of the LEDs, as in the twentieth embodiment (afterimage prevention). ).

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter is updated. Here, as described above, the processing of shifting the bit of “1” one digit to the left is executed. Next, the process proceeds to step S1532, and it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. If it is determined to be “0”, the process proceeds to step S1435, and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, a process of setting the LED display counter to “00000001” is executed.

Steps S1435 to S1446 are the same as those in FIG. 134 (the twentieth embodiment). However, in the twenty-first embodiment, there is no processing in steps S1441 and S1442 in FIG. In the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for digit 5 (set value display LED 73). In step S1533, the setting value display data is obtained.
After step S1446, the process advances to step S1533 to acquire the set value display data, the acquired number data, and the pressing order instruction number. If the setting is being changed, the set value data acquired in step S1533 is displayed in digits 3 or 4 (whichever is optional).

In the twenty-first embodiment, since the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, the processes in steps S1452 and S1453 in FIG. 134 are not performed.
In FIG. 140, if “No” is determined in step S1451, it is determined that there is a display request for the acquired lower digit (digit 4), and the flow advances to step S1454.
Further, step S1534 is a step corresponding to step S1458 in FIG. 134. Here, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1535, and proceeds to a ratio display process.
Except for the above, it is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
141 is different from FIG. 135 in that step S1473 and step S1474 are not provided. That is, after step S1472, the process proceeds to step S1475.
As shown in FIG. 139, the LED display counter of the twenty-first embodiment is a counter in which one cycle is interrupted by eight, and when the LED display counter becomes “0” as in the twentieth embodiment. Since it is not determined that there is a specific ratio display request, these steps are not required.
Except for the above, it is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

<Twenty-second embodiment>
FIG. 142 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 142 (B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-second embodiment more specifically. FIG. 29C is a diagram showing the set value display LED 73 in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 125 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment (similarly in the first embodiment), each LED is divided into digits 1 to 9, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the relationship between the digit and the LED is as follows.
Digit 1a: Upper digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 2a: Lower digit of stored number display LED 76 Digit 3a: Upper digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 4a: Lower digit of acquired number display LED 78 Digit 5a: Status display LED 79
Digit 1b: Management information display LED 74 (higher information type (1000 digits))
Digit 2b: management information display LED 74 (lower information type (100 digits))
Digit 3b: Management information display LED 74 (numerical upper digit (10 digits))
Digit 4b: Management information display LED 74 (lower digit (1 digit) of numerical value)
Digit 5b: Set value display LED 73
Furthermore, as described later, segments of digits 1a to 5a are referred to as segments 1A to 1P, and segments of digits 1b to 5b are referred to as segments 2A to 2P.

As shown in FIG. 142 (A), each of the digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display including a dot segment (segment 1P) in 7 segments (in this regard, the digits 1 to 4 in the twentieth embodiment are the same as the digit 1 to 4a). different). Therefore, in the twenty-second embodiment, the same seven-segment display can be used for digits 1a to 4a and 1b to 5b.
Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the digit 2, that is, the dot segment (segment P) of the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77. In contrast, in the twenty-second embodiment, the dot segment (segment 1P) of the digit 4a indicating the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.

In the management information display LED 74, the dot segment (segment 2P) of the digit 2b functions as a digit-segment display LED as in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the dot segments (segment 2P) of the digits 1b, 3b and 4b function as non-recoverable error display LEDs as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-second embodiment.
As described above, the segments of the digits 1a to 5a are the segments 1A to 1P, and the segments of the digits 1b to 5b are the segments 2A to 2P.

In FIG. 143, segment 1P of digits 1a to 3a is unused. On the other hand, the segment 1P of the digit 4a (digit indicating the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) is used as the advantageous section display LED 77 as described above.
Further, the digit 5a constitutes a status display LED 79, and the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 5a are, as shown in FIG.
Segment 1A: 1-bet display LED 79a
Segment 1B: 2-bet display LED 79b
Segment 1C: 3-bet display LED 79c
Segment 1D: Game start display LED 79d
Segment 1E: Insertion LED 79e
Segment 1F: Replay display LED 79f
Segment 1G: Unused Segment 1P: Unused.
Therefore, for example, when the digit 5 signal is output and the segment 1A signal is output, the 1-bet display LED 79a is turned on.
The segment 2P of the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) is not used.

FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an output port according to the twenty-second embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twenty-second embodiment is that the number of output ports for transmitting digit signals is one (output port 2) and the number of output ports for transmitting segment signals is two (output ports 3 and 4). It is.
Therefore, what is different from the twentieth embodiment described above is that the output port for transmitting the segment signal of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the segment signal of the storage number display LED 76 and the like (digits 1a to 4a) Is provided separately from the output port for transmitting the data.

  First, digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to the output port 2 for D0 to D4 bits, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of “1” is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, it is driven to both the digit 1 a (reserved number display LED 76 (upper digit)) and 1 b (management information display LED 74 (upper information type)). A signal is provided.

In output port 2, bits D5 to D7 are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for segment 1A-1P signals, and segments 1A-1P are assigned to bits D0-D7, respectively.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments 2A to 2P signals, and the segments 2A to 2P signals are respectively assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
The output port 5 is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIGS. 145 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, and the digits 1 (1a, 1b) to 5 (5a, 5b), and are diagrams of the twentieth embodiment, respectively. FIG. 131 is a diagram corresponding to FIGS.
In FIG. 145, as in FIG. 129 of the twentieth embodiment, illustration of transistors and the like is omitted.
FIGS. 145 and 146 show wiring of electric signals on the main control board 50, and FIG. 147 shows wiring of electric signals on the display board 75.

As shown in FIG. 146, on the main control board 50, a digit 5b constituting the set value display LED 73 and digits 1b to 4b constituting the management information display LED 74 are provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 147, on the display substrate 75, digits 1a and 2a constituting the stored number display LED 76, digits 3a and 4a constituting the acquired number display LED 78, and six digits constituting the digit 5a. The status display LED 79 is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 145, on the main control board 50, a main CPU 55 is provided, and IC2 to IC4 having output ports 2 to 4, respectively, are provided. The main control board 50 is actually provided with ICs other than these three, but is not shown in the present embodiment.

IC2 is an IC for controlling the digit 1 to 5 signals, and IC3 is an IC for controlling the segment 1A to 1P signals. The IC 4 is an IC for controlling the segment 2A to 2P signals.
IC2 to IC4 are each provided with a clock signal input terminal in the same manner as in the twentieth embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

Digit 1 to 5 signal lines are output from the D0 to D4 output terminals of the output port 2, respectively. One is connected to the digits 1b to 5b of the main control board 50, and the other is connected to the display board 75.
In addition, segment 1A-1P signal lines are output from the D0-D7 output terminals of the output port 3, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75.
Furthermore, segment 2A to 2P signal lines are output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the digits 1b to 5b of the main control board 50.

In FIG. 146, the digits 1 to 5 signals are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 1b to 5b, respectively.
Digits 1b to 5b are LEDs each having eight segments (segments 2A to 2G and 2P). The LEDs constituting the segments 2A to 2G and 2P of the digits 1b to 5b are connected to the segments 2A to 2G and 2P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 147, digits 1a to 5a are connected to the display substrate 75. Output terminals of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to respective drive signal lines of the digits 1a to 4a.
Each of the digits 1a to 4a is an LED having seven segments (segments 1A to 1G and 1P), like the digits 1b to 5b. The LEDs of the segments 1A to 1G of the digits 1a to 3a are connected to the output terminals of the segment 1A to 1G signal lines, respectively. Since each segment 1P of the digits 1a to 3a is unused, it is not connected to the segment 1P signal line.
On the other hand, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 4a are connected to the output terminals of the segment 1A to 1G signal lines.
Furthermore, six status display LEDs 79, specifically, 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, 3-bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, insertion display LED 79e, and replay display LED 79f are connected to the digit 5 signal line. Have been.

The 1-bet display LED 79a is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1A signal line, the 2-bet display LED 79b is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1B signal line, and the 3-bet display LED 79c is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1C signal line. I have.
The game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1D signal line, the insertion display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1E signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1F signal line.

In the above configuration, for example, when a data signal of “1” is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively. At this moment, the XCS2 output terminal is active. At this time, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of IC2.
As a result, since the digit 1 signal is output, the drive signal is supplied to both the digit 1a (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76) and the digit 1b (the upper information type of the management information display LED 74).

When the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55. At this moment, when the XCS3 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC3. As a result, since the segment 1A and 1B signals are output to the display substrate 75, current can flow through the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a.
It should be noted that even if the segment 1A and 1B signals are output, the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b are of course not turned on.

On the other hand, when the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment, when the XCS4 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC4. As a result, since the segment 2A and 2B signals are output to the digit 1b, current can flow through the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b.
It should be noted that the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a do not light up even when the segment 2A and 2B signals are output.

Also, for example, when a digit 5 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of IC2 and the segments 1A, 1B and 1C signals are output from the D0, D1 and D2 output terminals (segments 1A, 1B and 1C) of IC3, 1 bet The display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c can be turned on.
Even if the digit 5 signal is output, the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) does not light unless the segments 2A to 2G signals are output.
As described above, in the twenty-second embodiment, the nine 1-segment signal and the six status display LED 79 are composed of the digits 1 to 5 signals, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P signals, and the segments 2A to 2G and 2P signals. Control lighting.

FIG. 148 (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 148 is a view corresponding to FIG. 132 of the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 148 (A), the LED display counter of the twenty-second embodiment changes the bit “1” of the LED display counter value as the interrupt “1” → “2” →... It is updated so as to shift right by one digit. In the drawing, in the interrupt following the interrupt “5”, the LED display counter is shifted to “00000000” by one-digit right shift. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized and the LED display counter is reset. Set to “00010000”. Thereby, the LED display counter repeats the value of “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →... That is, one cycle is generated by five interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" Interruption: 00010000
"N + 1" interrupt: 00001000
“N + 2” interrupt: 00000100
"N + 3" interrupt: 00000010
"N + 4" interrupt: 00000001
“N + 5” interrupt: 00000000 → 00010000 (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000
:
Becomes

  In the twenty-second embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 148 (A), for example, when an interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000”, a digit 5 signal is output, and the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 are switched. It can be turned on. At the next interruption “2”, the LED display counter becomes “00001000”, a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED D78 and the lower digit of the management information display LED 74 can be turned on.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7B, the LED display request counter has 8 bits corresponding to the digit 1 signal in the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal in the D1 bit,..., The D4 bit corresponding to the digit 5 signal. Data. Each bit of the LED display request counter matches the bit of the output port 2.
The LED display request counter differs from the twentieth embodiment in that the D4th bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) is “1” even during normal operation. During normal times, this is for outputting the segment 1A to 1G signals of the digit 5a and lighting the status display LED 79.
In the twentieth embodiment, since one cycle is five interrupts, the time during which the LED is turned off can be shortened, and the flickering of the LED can be further reduced.

  For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (normally medium)", AND operation of both results in "00010000", and only the digit 5 signal is turned on. However, during normal operation, only the segment 1 signal is output so that the status display LED 79 can be turned on. However, the control is performed so that the segment 2 signal is not output and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is not turned on.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at an interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00010000”), the segment 2 signal is output, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) can be turned on.
During the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is “00000100”), the segment 1 signal is output for the digit 3 a (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) and “8 Is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the LED display counter generates the segment 1 signal at the interrupt timing of “00001000” (interrupt “2” in the figure), it is determined whether or not the segment is in the advantageous section. Whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section is determined, for example, by determining on / off of an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section (the advantageous section flag is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53). Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the value obtained by performing an OR operation on the generated segment 1 signal and “10000000” is output from the output port 3 as the segment 1 signal. Thus, during the advantageous section, the segment 1P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment. As described above, steps different from those in the twentieth embodiment are underlined in step numbers. Also, steps that execute the same processing as in the twentieth embodiment are given the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof are omitted.
In FIG. 149, in step S1541, the LED digit and segment 1 (output ports 2 and 3) are turned off. This process is a process common to step S1431 in FIG. 134, and is a process of outputting “00000000B” from output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S1542, segment 2 (output port 4) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting “00000000B” from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S1453, the LED display counter is updated. In the twenty-second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, an update is performed by shifting the bit “1” right by one digit.
In the next step S1544, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that the LED display counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1545, and when it is determined that the LED display counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436. .
In step S1545, an LED display counter is initialized. That is, when the LED display counter is “00000000” in the determination in step S1544, a process of setting “00010000” is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Step S1436 is the same process as in the twentieth embodiment. In the next step S1546, error display data, LED display data, and bet signal data are obtained. The acquisition of the error display data is the same as the processing in step S1439 in FIG. The LED display data is data indicating ON / OFF of the status display LED 79, and is stored at a predetermined address in a use area of the RWM 53. Specifically, the data is as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when a medal can be inserted, and "0" when a medal cannot be inserted.
D5: "1" when winning a replay, "0" when not winning a replay
D6: Not used D7: Not used

In the above data, bits D0 to D7 correspond to the segments 1A to 1P of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 143, and this value is obtained.
The bet signal data is the same as the data obtained in step S1454 in FIG.
0 bets: 00000 000
When one bet: 00000001
When two bets: 00000011
When three bets: 00000111
Is stored at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53, the value is obtained.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1547, where the LED display data and the bet signal data are combined, and data for the output port 3 is set. This process is a process of performing an OR operation on the LED display data and the bet signal data and storing the operation result.
Next, the flow advances to step S1548 to clear the segment 2 data for the output port 4. This process is a process of clearing the register for setting the segment 2 data.
Steps S1438 to S1455 are the same as those in FIG. However, FIG. 149 does not include step S1439 in FIG. This is because the error display data has already been obtained in step S1546.
If it is determined in step S1451 that there is no request to display the upper digit of the acquired number, it means that there is a request to display the lower digit of the acquired number.

After step S1455, the flow advances to step S1549 to set segment 2 data for output port 4. The data set here is segment 2 data (segments 2A to 2G) corresponding to the set value display data. This is because the digit 1b to 4b performs the lighting process in the ratio display process described later, so that the segment 2 data of the digit 1b to 4b is not set in this flowchart.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1550, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for digit 5b (set value display LED 73). Here, the display request of the digit 5b is made when the LED display counter value is “00010000” and the setting is being changed or confirmed. If it is determined that there is a display request for digit 5b, the process proceeds to step S1554, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1551.

  In step S1551, segment 1 (1A to 1G) data for the output port 3 is set. The segment 1 data for the output port 3 has been stored in a predetermined register in step S1547. Next, the flow advances to step S1552 to set data of the advantageous section display LED 77. Here, whether or not the game is in an advantageous section is determined by, for example, an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section. When it is determined that the current time is in the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in the current interrupt processing is digit 4. If the LED display counter value is “00001000”, it is determined that digit 4 is being turned on. In this case, data obtained by performing an OR operation on the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and "10000000" is set as segment 1 data for the output port 3. As a result, data that can light the segment 1P of the digit 4a is set.

Next, the flow advances to step S1553 to clear the segment 2 data for the output port 4 set in step S1549. When there is no display request of digit 5b (setting value display LED 73) (when "No" in step S1550), digit 5b is not turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S1554, where a digit signal is output from the output port 2 and a segment 1 signal is output from the output port 3. Next, proceeding to step S1555, a segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4. If the segment 2 data has been cleared in step S1553, “00000000” is output from the output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1556 to shift to a ratio display process outside the used area.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process in the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
When FIG. 150 is compared with FIG. 135, the difference is that step S1473 and step S1474 are not provided.
In step S1561, a digit signal is output from output port 2 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 4.
The other points are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating the output ports 2 to 6 in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 144 in the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, the number of output ports for transmitting digit signals is one (output port 3), and the number of output ports for transmitting segment signals is two (output ports 4 and 6). is there. .
The output port 2 of the twenty-third embodiment is a port that outputs a bet display signal and a data strobe signal.
In the twenty-second embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed by including the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c in the digit 5a. On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting similarly to the twenty-first embodiment.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 152, as described above, the twenty-third embodiment has digits 1 to 5, which are divided into digits 1a to 5a and digits 1b to 4b.
The digit 1a includes a stored number display LED 76 (upper digit) and a game start display LED 79d. The former is composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of segment 1P.
Digit 2a is composed of stored number display LED 76 (lower digit) and insertion display LED 79e, the former being composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter being composed of segment 1P.

The digit 3a includes an acquired number display LED 78 (upper digit) and a replay display LED 79f. The former is composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of segment 1P.
The digit 4a includes an acquired number display LED 78 (lower digit) and an advantageous section display LED 77. The former is composed of segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of segment 1P.
The digit 5a includes a set value display LED 73. Segment 1P of digit 5a is unused.
On the other hand, digits 1b to 4b are the same as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). The digit 5b is not provided in the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 153 (A) is a diagram showing a relationship among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal, and a segment signal in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 153 is a view corresponding to FIG. 148 of the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, an LED display counter that performs one cycle with five interrupts is used. As in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 148), the LED display counter shifts the bit “1” to the right by one digit for each interrupt, and when it becomes “0”, the initial value “00010000” at the time of the interrupt processing. ". Thus, similarly to the twenty-second embodiment, the counter performs one cycle with five interrupts.

As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the interrupt is “1”, a digit 5 signal is output, and the set value display LED 73 becomes an LED to be turned on.
When the interrupt is “2”, a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 and the lower digit of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is “3”, a digit 3 signal is output, and the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 and the upper digit of the management information display LED 74 are to be turned on.
Further, when the interrupt is “4”, a digit 2 signal is output, and the lower digits of the stored number display LED 76 and the lower information type of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
When the interrupt is “5”, a digit 1 signal is output, and the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76 and the upper information type of the management information display LED 74 are to be turned on.

  Further, as described above, among the status display LEDs 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, and are not LEDs to be lit at the time of interrupt processing. Of the status display LEDs 79, the game start display LED 79d is assigned to the upper digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED 76, and the insertion display LED 79e is assigned to the lower digit segment 1P of the stored number display LED 76. Further, the replay display LED 79f is assigned to the upper digit segment 1P of the acquired number display LED 78. Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is assigned to the lower digit segment 1P of the acquired number display LED 78 as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). Further, in the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided.

  As described above, if the status display LED 79 and the advantageous zone display LED 77 excluding the 1-bet display LED 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c are assigned to the segment 1P of the digits 1a to 4a, the LED display counter having one cycle of 5 interrupts is used. , The status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77 can be dynamically lit.

<24th embodiment>
FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating output ports 2 to 7 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided. It is characterized by.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided as in the twentieth embodiment.
Segments of digits 1 to 5 are referred to as segments 1A to 1P.
Furthermore, segments of digits 6 to 9 are referred to as segments 2A to 2P.
Note that the digit 5 may or may not be provided in the same manner as in the twenty-third embodiment. When the digit 5 is not provided, the D4 bit of the output port 3 is an empty bit. In this case, one of the digits 1 to 4 is used as the set value display LED as described above.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as in the twentieth embodiment, 1-bet display signals to 3-bet display signals are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2.
The digit port includes an output port 3 for outputting digit 1 to 5 signals and an output port 6 for outputting digit 6 to 9 signals.
The segment ports include an output port 4 for outputting segment 1A-1P signals corresponding to digits 1-5, and an output port 7 for outputting segment 2A-2P signals corresponding to digits 6-9.

Therefore, for example, when lighting digits 1 to 5, a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4.
When the digits 6 to 9 are turned on, a digit signal is output from the output port 7 and a segment 2 signal is output from the output port 6.

FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-fourth embodiment. The relationship between digits 1 to 5 and segments 1A to 1P is the same as the relationship between digits 1a to 5a and segments 1A to 1P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).
The relationship between digits 6 to 9 and segments 2A to 2P is the same as the relationship between digits 1b to 4b and segments 2A to 2P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).

FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating Example 1 of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. This LED display counter is the same as the LED display counter of the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG.
Then, for example, an interrupt “1” outputs a digit 5 signal, and an interrupt “2” outputs a digit 4 signal and a digit 9 signal. In the case of the interrupt “3”, a digit 3 signal and a digit 8 signal are output. In addition, digit 2 signal and digit 7 signal are output at interrupt “4”. Further, in the interrupt "5", a digit 1 signal and a digit 6 signal are output.

FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating Example 2 of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. In this example 2, the LED display counter 1 is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and the LED display counter 2 is provided outside the use area of the RWM 53.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter having five interrupts in one cycle.
On the other hand, the LED display counter 2 is a counter for outputting a digit 6 signal to a digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter having one cycle of four interrupts.
As described above, the LED display counter for lighting the digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting the digits 6 to 9 may be provided separately and independently. In addition, since one cycle of both LED display counters is different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different. Note that there is no particular problem even if the lighting timing is different.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment.
Note that the LED display counter is the example 1 (FIG. 156).
First, in step S1571, "0" is output from the output ports 3 and 4 to turn off the output ports 3 and 4. This is for completely turning off the digits 1 to 5 once.
Next, in step S1572, "0" is output from the output ports 6 and 7 to turn off the output ports 6 and 7. This is for completely turning off the digits 6 to 9 once.

  In step S1573, the value is updated so that bit “1” of the LED display counter is shifted right by one digit. In the next step S1574, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is “0”. When it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1436, and when it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1475. In step S1475, the LED display counter is initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 156, the value is set to “00010000”. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Steps S1436 to S1451 are the same as those in FIG. 134 (the twentieth embodiment).
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, and thus do not have the process of step S1453 in FIG.
If the determination in step S1451 is "No", it means that there is a request to display the acquired lower digit, and therefore, there is no decision branch as to whether there is a request to display the acquired lower digit, and step S1454. Proceed to. Steps S1454 to S1457 are the same as those in FIG. 133 (the twentieth embodiment).
After step S1457, the flow advances to step S1576 to output a digit (one of digits 1 to 5) signal from the output port 3 and a segment 1 signal from the output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1577.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
If it is determined in step S1472 that there is a ratio display request, the process advances to step S1475, as in the twenty-first embodiment (FIG. 141).
The processing from step S1475 to step S1486 is the same as in FIG. 135 (the twentieth embodiment). After step S1486, the flow advances to step S1581 to output a digit signal from the output port 6 and a segment 2 signal from the output port 7. Then, the process returns to step S1460 in FIG.

As described above, the twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications as described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the program for LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is stored in the used area, and the program for ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is stored outside the used area. The reason for this setting is to prevent pressure on the capacity in the used area. Therefore, if there is sufficient capacity in the used area, it is possible to store the program for the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the used area.
Similarly, the out-of-use-area data table shown in FIG. 127 can be stored in the use area.
That is, the program and data for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 do not necessarily have to be stored outside the use area.

Generally, a program for preventing unauthorized use (goto) may be stored outside the use area. Since it can be said that the display of the management information such as the advantageous section ratio is for fraud prevention, it is stored outside the use area in the above embodiment.
In addition to the above, the programs stored outside the use area include, in FIG. 133, a set value error (out of set value range) determination program used in the process of step S1408, and a random number abnormality used in the process of step S1410 in FIG. A check program, a medal selector backflow check program, and the like.

  (2) Taking the twentieth embodiment as an example, as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, for example, first, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 1 to 5) is performed, and then, ratio display processing is performed. (S_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 6 to 9) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this order. For example, after executing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) as the lighting control outside the use area, it is also possible to shift to the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) as the lighting control inside the use area.

(3) Segment P (or segment 2P) of digits 6 to 9 (digits 1b to 4b in the twenty-third embodiment) is a segment to be turned on when an unrecoverable error occurs.
However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the segment may be set to be turned on when a predetermined condition other than the non-recoverable error is satisfied. Alternatively, the segment can physically exist but be unused.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination in which “Cherry” stops at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 stops): a middle cherry is a possible lottery result (small role E1 winning). Always shifts to the advantageous section and displays the fact that it is the advantageous section by the advantageous section display LED 77.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1BBA is won, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section, and when 1BBB is won, it does not shift to the advantageous section. Further, the winning probability of 1BBA is set to be the same for all set values, and the winning probability of 1BBB is set to increase as the set value increases. Thereby, the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of winning 1BB (sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) increases as the set value decreases.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the advantageous section ends, the first initialization processing (initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, and when the set value is changed, the second initialization processing is performed. (Initialization processing at the time of setting change) is executed. In the first initialization process, the process shifts to the normal interval while maintaining the RT at the end of the advantageous interval. In the second initialization process, the process shifts to the non-RT and shifts to the normal interval. Further, in the first initialization processing and the second initialization processing, information on the advantageous section is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the process shifts to the normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the indicating function is operated at least once in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended. Also, in the advantageous section, if 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function. After shifting to the advantageous section, until the specific condition is satisfied, the instruction function is activated even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the game in which the push order bell (small win B group) is won). Do not let.

FIGS. 160 to 167 are diagrams showing the numbers of the accessory condition apparatus and the winning and replay condition apparatus for each RT, and correspond to FIGS. 17 and 18 in the first embodiment.
When the numerical values shown in FIGS. 160 to 167 are divided by “65536”, the winning probability is obtained. For example, in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA that is independently won is set to “70” in any of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the probability of winning 1 BBA alone is “70/65536”.

FIG. 160 is a numerical table of condition devices common to settings and capable of shifting to an advantageous section, and corresponds to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment.
Here, "setting common" means that there is no setting difference, that is, it means that setting 1 to setting 6 have the same number, as in the first embodiment.
In FIG. 160, in the normal section, “○” means shift to the advantageous section, “×” means not to shift to the advantageous section, and “△” in the advantageous section indicates the game of the advantageous section. As in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, it means that the number of times can be added, and "x" means that the number of games in the advantageous section is not added.

In FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, 1BBA has a time of winning alone, a time of winning with a small role D, and a time of winning with a small role E1, but in the 25th embodiment, 1BBA is Only the winner is won, and there is no case where the winning is repeated with the small role. As shown in FIG. 160, the number of entries for which 1BBA is independently won is “70” in common with the settings.
Also, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, the small role E1 has a time of winning alone and a time of overlapping winning with 1BBA, but in the 25th embodiment, the small role E1 only wins alone. , There is no case of winning a special role.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small role E1 is won, there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section. At the time of winning the role E1, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 160, the setting number of the single winning of the small win E1 is “1000” for the common setting. Then, in the normal section, when the small part E1 is won, the processing always shifts to the advantageous section.

  Further, the small combination D is divided into a number that shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section and a number that does not shift to the advantageous section from the normal section, as in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 160, the total number of single winning combinations of the small role D is “550”, of which the number of transitions from the normal section to the advantageous section is “50”, and the normal section is changed from the normal section to the advantageous section. The number not to be shifted is “500”. In other words, in the case where the small role D is solely won in the normal section, when the winning is performed with the number “50”, the process proceeds to the advantageous section. However, when the number is “500”, the winning is performed. , Does not shift to the advantageous section.

FIGS. 161 to 167 are numerical table of condition devices that do not shift to the advantageous section and do not add the advantageous section, and correspond to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, the setting numbers of the setting 1 and the setting 6 are representatively illustrated, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the setting numbers of the setting 1 to the setting 6 for each set value are illustrated.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the transition to the advantageous section or the addition of the advantageous section is limited only when the condition device shown in FIG. 160 is won. Does not shift to the advantageous section and does not add the advantageous section.

FIG. 161 illustrates the numbers of the settings 1 to 6 in the non-RT state. Similarly, FIG. 162 illustrates the setting numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at the time of RT1, FIG. 163 illustrates the setting numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at the time of RT2, and FIG. FIG. 165 illustrates the numbers of the settings 1 to 6 at RT4.
FIG. 166 illustrates the numbers of the settings 1 to 6 during the 1BBA game (at the time of 1BBA operation), and FIG. 167 illustrates the numbers of the settings 1 to 6 during the 1BBB game (at the time of 1BBB operation). Is shown.

In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, 1BBA is repeatedly won with the small win E2 with a different probability for each set value. In addition, 1BBB has a time when a single winning is performed and a time when a small winning combination D is won with a different probability for each set value.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, 1BBA only wins independently with common settings, does not win with small wins, and performs lottery with different probabilities for each set value. Not even. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, 1BBB only wins independently with different probabilities for each set value, and does not have the case of winning over with the small combination.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the numbers of the accessory condition devices and the winning and replay condition devices for each RT are determined as shown in FIGS. 160 to 167.
For this reason, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small lottery D (watermelon) is won by the role lottery means 61, a transition is made to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit (indicating that the section is an advantageous section). ) And when there is no transition to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up (does not indicate that it is an advantageous section).
On the other hand, when the small lottery E1 (middle cherry) is won by the role lottery means 61, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

In addition, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small role D and shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, when the shift to the designated game section and when not to shift to the designated game section. Having.
Further, when the small lottery E1 is won by the role lottery means 61 and the game shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the time when the game shifts to the designated game section and the time when the game does not shift to the designated game section are determined. Having.

FIG. 168 (a) is a diagram showing the shift to the advantageous section and the presence or absence of the advantageous section display LED 77 when the rare role is won according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 168 (b) is the diagram when the rare role is won in the 25th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the advantageous section and whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the first embodiment, when the small lottery E1 (middle cherries) is won by the role lottery means 61, the section shifts to an advantageous section with a probability of “250/65536”, and The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, but with a probability of “750/65536”, the section does not shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the small winning combination D (watermelon), the transition to the advantageous section is performed with the probability of “50/65536” and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. , With a probability of “500/65536”, the section does not shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up.
Here, in the game won as the small win E1, "Cherry" (i.e., "Middle Cherry") can be stopped at the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped. Further, when the small role E1 is won, there is a case where the game shifts to the designated game section thereafter. Therefore, when the middle cherry stops, the player expects a shift to the designated game section. As described above, the small win E1 is a rare win having a high degree of expectation of shifting to the designated game section.

However, when the small section E1 is elected, when the transition to the advantageous section and when not to transition to the advantageous section are provided, depending on whether the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit or not in the game won as the small section E1, the advantageous section is determined. The player knows whether or not to shift. With this, it is not possible to maintain the player's expectation of shifting to the designated game section by winning the small part E1.
On the other hand, if it is always shifted to the advantageous section at the time of winning the small win E1, and if it always shifts to the designated game section in this advantageous section, the winning of the small role E1 means shifting to the designated game section, and It becomes monotonous.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), with the probability of “1000/65536”, the small lottery E1 (middle cherries) is won by the role lottery means 61. And the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Further, by winning the small role E1 by the role lottery means 61, it shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the game shifts to the designated game section (AT) with a probability of "64/256". However, the game does not shift to the designated game section with a probability of “192/256”. As a result, the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle-stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.

  As described above, when the small role E1 (middle cherries) is won, it is known that the game always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on to shift to the advantageous section. Since it is not known whether or not the game is in progress, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for shifting to the designated game section over a plurality of games.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the small lottery D (watermelon) is won by the role lottery means 61, with a probability of “50/65536”, a transition is made to an advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Although it is lit, it does not shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light with the probability of “500/65536”.
Furthermore, when the small lottery D is won by the role lottery means 61 and a transition is made to an advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, a transition is made to the designated game section (AT) with a probability of “32/256”. Does not shift to the designated game section with a probability of “224/256”.

  As described above, at the time of winning the small win D (watermelon), it is possible to inform the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous section based on whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Further, at the time of winning the small role D, when the game shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, it is not known whether to shift to the designated game section or not. Can be given to a player over a plurality of games.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small lottery E1 (middle cherry) is won by the lottery lottery means 61, the AT determines whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) separately from the role lottery means 61. A lottery (two-stage lottery) is performed.
Furthermore, when the small part D (watermelon) is elected with the number “50”, the AT lottery is performed in the same manner as when the small part E1 is elected.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, on the main control board 50, an AT lottery counter that counts the range from “0” to “255” as one cycle is provided. Then, an AT lottery is performed using the random number value of 1 byte obtained from the AT lottery counter.

When the small lottery E1 is won, if an AT lottery is won (determined to shift to the designated game section), after the transition to the advantageous section, the designated game section is executed until the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) is consumed. When the predetermined number of games is exhausted without shifting to, the game shifts to the designated game section. That is, after the transition to the advantageous section, the game is in the middle of the forerunner (the forerunner) until the predetermined number of games is exhausted.
On the other hand, when the small win E1 is won, if the AT lottery is not won (determined not to shift to the designated game section), the advantageous section may be terminated by operating the indicating function at least once. It becomes possible. In other words, it is a so-called gaseous omen.

In addition, when the player wins the small role D with the number of “50” and wins the AT lottery, similarly to the case where the player wins the AT lottery at the time of the small portion E1 election, after shifting to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games is returned. After the omen (this omen), it enters the AT.
In addition, when the player wins the small role D with the number of "50" and is not elected by the AT lottery, similarly to the case where the AT lottery is not elected at the time of the small portion E1 election, the so-called gaseous omen. Becomes

As described above, for the role (small win E1) having a high degree of expectation of the transition to the designated game section (AT), the advantage section display LED 77 is always turned on at the time of winning, regardless of the presence or absence of the transition to the designated game section, By designing so as to perform a game (a sign or a sign) in an advantageous section, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for shifting to the designated game section over a plurality of games.
On the other hand, for the combination (small combination D) having a low degree of expectation of the transition to the designated game section (AT), it is designed to have a case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on and a case where it is not turned on at the time of winning. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations for shifting to the designated game section.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small number D is won with the number “50”, the case where the game shifts to the designated game section based on the result of the AT lottery is the same as when the small combination E1 is won. Although it is designed to have a case where it is not performed, it may be designed such that when the small number D is won with the number of “50”, the game always shifts to the designated game section.
In this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is always turned on at the time of winning, the small role E1 that can incite the transition to the designated game section in the game (the main sign or the gaseous sign) during the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning. The role with the small role D, which can immediately determine whether or not to shift to the designated game section depending on the presence or absence of lighting, becomes clearer, and a sharp playability can be designed.

FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating the 1BB winning probability and the advantageous section transition probability at the time of 1BB winning in each set value in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, there are two special roles, 1BBA and 1BBB.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1BBA is won in the normal section, the processing always shifts to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when 1BBB is won in the normal section, the game does not shift to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA winnings is set to “70” for both non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA is “70/65536” in any of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. That is, the winning probability of 1BBA is set to be the same for all set values.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, the number of 1BBB winnings is “80” when setting 1 and “2” when setting 2 in any of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Is set to “88”, setting 3 is set to “96”, setting 4 is set to “104”, setting 5 is set to “112”, and setting 6 is set to “120”.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BBB is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the number of 1BB winnings, that is, the sum of the number of 1BBA winnings and the number of 1BBB winnings, is “150” for setting 1, and “158” for setting 2. The setting is "166" for setting 3, "174" for setting 4, "182" for setting 5, and "190" for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BB (the winning probability in the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) is as shown in FIG. 169, and increases as the set value increases.

Therefore, the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning is (70 ÷ 150 × 100 ≒) “46.7”% in the case of the setting 1. Similarly, at setting 2, "44.3"%, at setting 3, "42.2"%, at setting 4, "40.2"%, and at setting 5, "38.5"%. In the case of setting 6, it becomes "36.8"%.
That is, the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning increases as the set value decreases.

Here, in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the special combination (1BB) generally increases as the set value increases.
However, when the special role is won, in addition to enabling the transition to the special game, if the transition to the advantageous section is enabled, the difference in the advantage of the player between the low setting and the high setting becomes large. There is a possibility that too much.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA that can be shifted to the advantageous section is made the same for all set values, and the winning probability of 1BBB that does not shift to the advantageous section is increased. So that it gets higher.
As a result, the winning probability of 1BB, that is, the winning probability of the sum of 1BBA and 1BBB increases as the set value increases, and the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning increases as the set value decreases. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the difference in the advantage of the player between the low setting and the high setting from becoming too large.

  Also, the winning probability of 1BB increases as the set value increases, but the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning increases as the set value decreases. Although there is no setting difference, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference in the transition probability to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the player can infer the set value from the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning. That is, an element for estimating the set value can be provided to the player.
Further, the decision not to shift to the advantageous section is originally to disappoint the player, but the higher the probability of deciding not to shift to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning, the higher the set value is. Therefore, even if it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning, the player can be expected to have a high set value, and the player can be prevented from being disappointed.

When the indicating function is operated at least once in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended. In particular, in the advantageous section which does not shift to the instruction game section (AT), the instruction function is operated at least once so that the advantageous section can be ended.
Here, “at least one activation of the instruction function” is a condition device (small win B group) capable of acquiring the maximum payout number (“9”) among the games having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42. Must be played in the game that was won.
Therefore, even if the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small role C group (maximum of three), it does not correspond to “at least one activation of the instruction function”.
Hereinafter, when the pressing order bell of the small win B group is meant, it is described as “push order bell (small win B group)”.

In addition, at least one operation of the instruction function required to enable the end of the advantageous section without the instruction game section may be referred to as “secured navi” or the like.
Further, when the special role (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, only 1BB (first-type continuous actor) is provided as a special role, and 2BB (second-type continuous actuator) is not provided. Even when 2BB is won before the activation, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.

The "one-time instruction determination flag" is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling the end of the advantageous section has been activated.
A storage area for storing the one-time instruction determination flag is provided on the RWM 53.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, “1” is stored in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one-time instruction determination flag is off, “0” is stored. .

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the flow of the instruction function operation process in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
When the process proceeds to the instruction function activation process of FIG. 170, first, in step S2001, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the pressing order bell (small win B group) has been won. If it is determined that the pushing order bell (small win B group) has been won, the process proceeds to the next step S2002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing order bell (small win B group) has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the next step S2002, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the user is staying in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the user is staying in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the next step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user is not staying in the advantageous section (it is staying in the normal section), the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2003, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the user is staying in the designated game section (AT). Here, when it is determined that the user is staying in the designated game section, the process proceeds to the next step S2004. On the other hand, when it is determined that the user is not staying in the designated game section, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, the main CPU 55 displays the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 by activating the instruction function. At this time, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2005.
In step S2005, the main CPU 55 determines whether the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Specifically, the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”), and the instruction function is activated at least once (the correct push sequence is notified at least once). ) Or a special combination (1BBA or 1BBB). Here, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step S2006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for terminating the advantageous section is not satisfied, step S2006 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2006, the main CPU 55 executes an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, information on the advantageous section, including the one-time instruction determination flag, which is stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared. Then, when the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2007, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a special combination (1BBA or 1BBB) has been won. If it is determined that the special combination has been won, the process proceeds to the next step S2008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special combination has not been won, the process skips step S2008 and proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2008, the main CPU 55 turns on the one-time instruction determination flag. Specifically, in step S2008, the main CPU 55 does not operate the instruction function, but sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.
In step S2009, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value of the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53 is “1”. Here, when it is determined that the flag is “1”, that is, the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the processing according to the present flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag is “0”, that is, the one-time instruction determination flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S2010.

In step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether a specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied.
Here, the “one-time instruction operation condition” is a condition for permitting at least one operation of the instruction function to enable the end of the advantageous section.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the “one-time instruction operation condition” is defined as “the predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) has been completed after the transition to the advantageous section”.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a digestion game number counter for counting the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is provided on the main control board 50.

  Then, in step S2010, main CPU 55 determines whether or not the count value of the digestion game number counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “15”). It is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is less than the predetermined value, it is determined that the one-time instruction operation condition is not satisfied, and the process according to the present flowchart ends.

In step S2011, the main CPU 55 displays the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 by activating the instruction function. The operation of the instruction function in step S2011 is for enabling the advantageous section to end. At this time, on the sub-control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. Then, when the instruction function is operated, the process proceeds to the next step S2012.
In step S2012, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.

FIG. 171 is a time chart illustrating an example in which the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the first pushing order bell (small win B group) after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
The advantageous section having no designated game section can be terminated if the indicating function is operated at least once or if a special combination is won before the first indicating function is operated.
As shown in FIG. 171, before the shift to the advantageous section, even if the push order bell (small win B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Then, after the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game that has been first won in the pushing order bell (small win B group). At this time, the main control board 50 turns on the instruction determination flag once, and the sub-control board 80 notifies the image display device 23 of the correct answer pressing order.

When the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on, thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on until the advantageous section ends.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won.
Then, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning the special role before the operation of the first instruction function after shifting to the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 172, before the shift to the advantageous section, even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Then, in FIG. 172, after the shift to the advantageous section, before the first win in the pushing order bell (small win B group), that is, before the first instruction function is activated, the special win is won. At this time, the instruction function is not operated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends.

When the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, the period from when the special role is won to when the prize is won is inside the game, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won.
Then, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 171 shows an example in which the instruction function is activated at the time of the first push order bell (small win B group) winning after shifting to an advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
Here, in order to be able to end the advantageous section without the indicated game section at an early stage, at the earliest possible stage after the shift to the advantageous section without the indicated game section, the pushing order bell (small win B group) is elected. Preferably, the indicating function is activated.

However, from the viewpoint of payout design, in order to pay out as many game media (medals) as possible in the advantageous section having the designated game section, payout of the game medium is suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section having no designated game section. Is preferred.
That is, the advantageous section having no designated game section is a game section in which the player does not need to pay out medals to the player at the time of winning the pushing order bell (small role B group), and performs a security navigator in the game section. To do so means that the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section having the designated game section must be set lower.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, after the transition to the advantageous section having no designated game section, until the specific condition (the one-time designated operation condition) is satisfied, the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won. The indicator function is not activated. In addition, as the “one-time instruction operation condition”, “the predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) has been exhausted after the transition to the advantageous section” is defined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172, in the advantageous section without the designated game section, if the special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section ends without activating the instruction function. It is possible to do.
For this reason, after shifting to the advantageous section having no designated game section, until the specific condition (one-time designated operation condition) is satisfied, the designated function is not activated even if the player wins the pushing order bell (small win B group). By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the special combination before the first instruction function is activated. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function, and, as a result, in the advantageous section without the instruction game section, the payout of the game medium can be suppressed as much as possible. it can.
As described above, by suppressing the payout of the game medium at unnecessary timing (advantageous section having no designated game section: omen), payout of medals can be expected at appropriate timing (designated game section: AT). Ball design becomes possible.

Further, the number of games that is less than the number of games in the advantageous section (the initial value of the advantageous section counter 69a) can be determined as the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition. For example, “32 games” can be determined as the number of games in the advantageous section, and “15 games” can be determined as the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition.
In this case, if the special combination is won before the number of games of the one-time instruction operation condition is consumed, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function.
In addition, if the player wins the push order bell (small win B group) before exhausting the number of games in the advantageous section after exhausting the number of games of the one-time instruction operation condition, the instruction function can be activated at this time. Therefore, the advantageous section can be ended at the same time as the number of games in the advantageous section has been consumed.

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example in which the indicating function is operated when the first pushing order bell (small win B group) is won after satisfying the once-instruction operating condition in the advantageous section having no indicating game section. .
As shown in FIG. 173, before shifting to the advantageous section, even if the push order bell (group of small wins B) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Also, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won until the instruction operation condition is satisfied once (the predetermined number of games is exhausted).

Then, after the instruction operation condition is satisfied once, the instruction function is activated in the game that is first won in the pushing order bell (small win B group). At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won.
Then, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 174 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special combination before satisfying the instruction operation condition once in an advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 174, before the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won. Also, even after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won until the instruction operation condition is satisfied once (the predetermined number of games is exhausted).
Then, in FIG. 174, after shifting to the advantageous section, before the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied, the special combination is won. At this time, the instruction function is not operated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends.

When the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, the period from when the special role is won to when the prize is won is inside the game, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won. In FIG. 174, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won three times, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.
Then, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

In addition, the "one-time instruction operation condition" is not limited to "the predetermined number of games has been exhausted after the shift to the advantageous section". For example, "the number of games played in the advantageous section has been exhausted (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a has become" 0 ")" can be defined as the "one-time instruction operation condition".
Here, in the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes “0”) and the instruction function is operated at least once, or If the special role is won before the first instruction function is activated, the operation can be completed.
Also, as the number of games in the advantageous section having no designated game section, for example, “32 games” can be set.

FIG. 175 shows an example in which, in the advantageous section having no designated game section, after the number of games in the advantageous section has been exhausted, the indicating function is activated when the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won, and the advantageous section is ended. It is a time chart.
As shown in FIG. 175, before the shift to the advantageous section, even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Further, even after the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won until the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, “32 games”) is exhausted.

Further, in FIG. 175, at the time when the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the instruction function is not activated and the special role is not won. Does not end.
Then, in FIG. 175, after the number of games in the advantageous section has been exhausted, the instruction function is activated in the game that has first been selected as the pushing order bell (small win B group). At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. When the instruction function is activated, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the advantageous section is ended, and the initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed, whereby the instruction is performed once. Turn off the judgment flag.
In this case, when the instruction function is activated (notification of the correct answer pressing order is performed), the advantageous section ends, so that the player plays a game while expecting that the correct answer pressing order is not notified. Can be provided.

FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning a special role before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted in the advantageous section having no designated game section.
As shown in FIG. 176, before shifting to the advantageous section, even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Further, even after the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small win B group) is won until the number of games in the advantageous section (for example, “32 games”) is exhausted.
Then, in FIG. 176, after shifting to the advantageous section, the special role is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed. At this time, the instruction function is not operated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends.

When the special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned on, and when the winning special role is won, the winning information of the special role is turned off. Furthermore, the period from when the special role is won to when the prize is won is inside the game, and the winning information of the special role is kept on.
Further, when the one-time instruction determination flag is ON, the instruction function is not activated even if the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won. In FIG. 176, when the one-time instruction determination flag is on, the pressing order bell (small win B group) is won twice, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.

In FIG. 176, since the special combination is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, when the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, when the number of games in the advantageous section is exhausted, the advantageous section is ended, and the initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section is executed, thereby turning off the one-time instruction determination flag.
As described above, by defining “one time the number of games in the advantageous section has been exhausted” as the “one-time instruction operating condition”, the probability that the advantageous section can be ended without activating the indicating function is reduced as much as possible. Can be higher.

Here, although the contents partially overlap with the first embodiment, the setting and changing of the set values will be described. The power switch 11, the setting key switch 12, and the setting switch 13 are used to set and change the set value.
Specifically, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the power switch 11 is turned off and the setting key switch 12 is turned on (the setting key is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees), the main CPU 55 changes the setting. That is, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the time of setting change. Further, the normal startup processing is not performed.
The execution timing of the RAM clear processing is not limited to the time of transition to the setting change mode (when the power switch 11 is turned on with the setting key switch 12 turned on).
For example, the RAM clearing process may be executed when the set value is determined (when the start switch 41 is turned on in the setting change mode), or when the setting key switch 12 is turned off in the setting change mode. ), The RAM clear processing may be executed.

In the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 73.
Further, in the setting change mode, every time the setting switch 13 is operated (turned on) once, the main CPU 55 changes the display of the set value by the set value display LED 73... → “1” → “2” → “ 3 ”→“ 4 ”→“ 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) in the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 determines the set value with the value displayed on the set value display LED 73. At this time, the main CPU 55 stores the set value data corresponding to the determined set value in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
For example, when the set value is “1”, the set value data “0” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). That is, when the set value is “N” (N is an integer of “1” to “6”), the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). As a result, the set value data “0” to “5” are stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).

Then, in the setting change mode, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise), a game can be performed with the changed set value.
When the setting key switch 12 is turned on from off to on (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise) while the power switch 11 is on, the main CPU 55 shifts to a setting checking mode, that is, a setting checking mode. In this way, if only the set value is checked, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 11. During the setting check, the set value at the current time is displayed on the set value display LED 73 in the same manner as during the setting change.

In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 55 executes the first initialization processing when the advantageous section ends, and executes the second initialization processing when the set value is changed.
Further, in the first initialization processing, the state shifts to the normal section while maintaining the lottery state (RT state) at the end of the advantageous section, and in the second initialization processing, a predetermined specific lottery state (non-RT) is set. The transition is made to the normal section.
Then, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, the information regarding the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the process shifts to the normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

FIG. 177 shows information on the RWM 53 that is cleared in the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (first initialization processing), information on the RWM 53 that is retained even after the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, and the initial state when the setting is changed. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing information on the RWM 53 that is cleared in the initialization processing (second initialization processing).
Information on the advantageous section is stored in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53.
The information on the advantageous section stored on the RWM 53 includes, for example, an advantageous section counter value, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, an additional counter value, an advantageous section flag, and a one-time instruction determination flag.

The advantageous section counter value indicates the number of games in the advantageous section. When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the number of games determined at that time is set as the advantageous section counter value in the advantageous section counter 69a on the RWM 53. Also, each time one game is consumed in the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter value is decremented. When the advantageous section counter value becomes “0”, the advantageous section ends.
When the number of games in the advantageous section is added to the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the advantageous section counter value.

The AT counter value indicates the number of games played in the designated game section (AT). When it is determined to shift to the designated game section, the number of games determined at that time is set as an AT counter value. Also, every time one game is consumed in the designated game section, the AT counter value is decremented. Then, when the AT counter value becomes “0”, the designated game section ends.
Also, when the number of games in the designated game section is added in the designated game section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the AT counter value.

The upper limit counter value indicates the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. At the start of the advantageous section, "1500" is set as the upper limit counter value in the upper limit counter 69b on the RWM 53. Also, each time one game is consumed in the advantageous section, the upper limit counter value is decremented. Then, when the upper limit counter value becomes “0”, the advantageous section and the designated game section are ended regardless of the advantageous section counter value and the AT counter value.
The additional counter value indicates an additional number of games in the designated game section. Every time the number of games in the designated game section is added, the added number is added to the added counter value.

The advantageous section flag is a flag indicating that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for storing the advantageous section flag is provided.
When the advantageous section flag is on, “1” is stored in the advantageous area flag storage area on the RWM 53, and when the advantageous section flag is off, “0” is stored.
Then, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag is turned on. Thereafter, the advantageous section flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends, and at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section flag is turned off.

The one-time instruction determination flag is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling the end of the advantageous section has been activated.
A storage area for storing the one-time instruction determination flag is provided on the RWM 53.
When the one-time instruction determination flag is on, “1” is stored in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one-time instruction determination flag is off, “0” is stored. .
Then, in the advantageous section, when the first instruction function is activated, or when a special combination is won before the first instruction function is activated, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned on. Thereafter, the one-time instruction determination flag is kept on until the advantageous section ends, and the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off at the end of the advantageous section.

In addition, in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53, as information other than the information on the advantageous section, for example, stored number data, set value data, RT state data, internal inside flag, accessory condition device number data, and accessory actuation A state flag and the like are stored.
The stored number data is data indicating the stored number.
On the RWM 53, a storage area for the stored number data is provided. Data indicating the stored number (for example, “15” when the stored number is 15) is stored in the storage area of the stored number data.

The setting value data is data indicating a setting value.
As described above, the setting value data is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
The RT state data is data indicating an RT state (lottery state).
Here, a storage area for RT state data (_NB_RT) is provided on the RWM 53.
In the storage area for RT state data (_NB_RT), data corresponding to RT, for example, “0” for non-RT, “1” for RT1, and so on are stored.

The inside inside flag is a flag indicating that it is a inside inside game that carries the winning information of the special combination.
Here, a storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT) for an internal medium flag is provided on the RWM 53. When the status is “internal”, “FF (H)” is stored in the internal flag storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT). When the status is not “internal”, “0” is stored.

The accessory condition device number data is data indicating the accessory condition device number, that is, the type of the winning accessory condition device (special combination).
Here, a storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) for the accessory condition device number data is provided on the RWM 53. Then, when the winning condition device has not been won, “0” is stored in the storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the winning condition device number data, and when any of the winning condition devices has been won, A value (other than “0”) corresponding to the accessory condition device number is stored.

The accessory operating state flag is a flag indicating the operating state of the accessory.
Here, on the RWM 53, a storage area (_FL_ACTION) of the accessory operation state flag is provided. When any of the accessories is activated, the bit of the storage area (_FL_ACTION) of the accessory operation state flag corresponding to the accessory is set to “1”, and when the accessory is not activated, the bit is set to “0”. Becomes

As shown in FIG. 177, at the end of the advantageous section, the main CPU 55 executes a first initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information regarding the advantageous section (such as an advantageous section counter value) is cleared, but predetermined information (such as RT state data) other than information regarding the advantageous section is cleared. Hold without.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, “clearing information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53” means that the value of the storage area on the RWM 53 is set to “0”.

Therefore, when the first initialization processing (initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section) is executed, the advantageous section counter value, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction on the RWM 53 are displayed. The values of the storage areas of the determination flags are all “0”.
On the other hand, even if the first initialization processing is executed, the storage area of the stored number data, the set value data, the RT state data, the inside flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag on the RWM 53 is stored. Is retained without being cleared.

Therefore, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is executed, the routine shifts to the normal section while maintaining the RT state at the end of the advantageous section. For example, if the user stays at RT3 at the end of the advantageous section, at the time when the advantageous section is completed and the first initialization process is executed, the routine shifts to the normal section while maintaining RT3.
The processing corresponding to the first initialization processing is also performed in the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52). For example, the processing of steps S445 to S447 in FIG. 44E corresponds to the first initialization processing.

  As shown in FIG. 177, when the setting is changed, the main CPU 55 executes a second initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information regarding the advantageous section (such as an advantageous section counter value) is cleared, and predetermined information other than the information regarding the advantageous section (such as RT state data) is also cleared. .

Therefore, when the second initialization processing (initialization processing at the time of setting change) is executed, the advantageous section counter value, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction determination on the RWM 53 are performed. The values of the flag storage areas are all “0”. In addition, the values of the storage areas of the stored number data, the set value data, the RT state data, the inside flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag on the RWM 53 are all “0”.
Therefore, when the set value is changed (including resetting of the same set value) and the second initialization process is executed, the RT state shifts to non-RT and shifts to a normal section. For example, if the user stays at RT3 before the change of the set value, when the set value is changed and the second initialization process is executed, the process shifts to the non-RT and shifts to the normal section.

Further, in both the first initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization processing executed at the time of changing the setting, the information on the advantageous section stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared.
Therefore, when the first initialization process is executed and when the second initialization process is executed, the process shifts to the normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.
The “normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state” refers to the advantageous section counter value, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. This means a normal section in which the values of the storage areas are all “0”.

Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed, or when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, the normal section changes to the advantageous section. If there is a difference in the ease of shifting to the game, there is a risk that the fairness between players will be impaired.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, both the first initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization processing executed at the time of changing the setting relate to the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area on the RWM 53. Clear information.
Thereby, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same. Also, when the advantageous section ends and the set value is changed, the normal Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among players can be ensured.
<Modification of 25th Embodiment>

Although the twenty-fifth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-stage lottery). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined condition such as a predetermined number of winnings of a predetermined role reaches a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of winnings of a predetermined role reaches a predetermined number of times after shifting to the advantageous section after winning the small role E1. Then, it may be determined to shift to the designated game section.

(2) In FIG. 160, 1BBA has a common setting and wins independently with a probability of “70/65536”. In addition, the small win E1 wins independently with a probability of “1000/65536” for the common setting, and does not have a case where the special win is duplicated with the special win. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, 1 BBA is won independently with a probability of "40/65536" for the common setting, "1 BBA + Small Role E1" is repeatedly won for the common setting with a probability of "30/65536", and "1000/65536" for the common setting. The small winning combination E1 may be independently elected with probability.

Here, when the small win E1 is won alone, the middle-stage cherry can be stopped. Also, when the “1BBA + Small Winner E1” is won twice, the middle cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small win E1 and the double winning of “1BBA + small win E1” are the lottery results in which the middle-stage cherry can be stopped.
Then, when the small win E1 is independently won, the control always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is illuminated. Also, when the “1BBA + small win E1” is repeatedly won, the advantageous section is always maintained. And the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

Further, when the small win E1 is independently won and the game shifts to the advantageous zone, the medal of the next game can be inserted (bet) and the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). In this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (timing 1 in FIG. 23).
On the other hand, when the player wins the "1BBA + Small Winner E1" and shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing, and a combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. By the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on (timing 2 in FIG. 23).
For this reason, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 may or may not be the same between when the small win E1 is solely won and when the “1BBA + small win E1” is repeatedly won.

Further, in both the case where the player wins the small win E1 and shifts to the advantageous section, and the case where the player wins the “1BBA + Small Winner E1” and shifts to the advantageous section, both when the game shifts to the designated game section, When not shifting to the game section.
Even in this case, when the lottery result that the middle cherry can be stopped can be obtained, the process always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Then, although it is known that the game will shift to the advantageous zone, it is not known whether or not to shift to the designated game zone, so that the player can be provided with a sense of expectation for shifting to the designated game zone over a plurality of games.
In addition, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section after the winning of “1BBA + Small Winner E1”, for example, at the end of the 1BBA game, whether to shift to the designated game section can be notified.

(3) FIG. 178 (a) shows a modification of the numeric table (1) of FIG. 160, and FIG. 178 (b) shows an advantageous section shift and an advantageous section transition at the time of the rare role election of FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED77 lighting.
In FIG. 160, the setting number of the single winning of the small role E1 is set to “1000” in common with the setting, and the setting number of the single winning of the small role E2 is not defined. However, in FIG. The setting number of the winning is set to “500” for the common setting, and the setting number of the single winning for the small role E2 is also set to “500” for the common setting. In addition, in FIG. 178 (a), when the small win E1 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section, and also when the small win E2 wins, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section.

Here, when the small win E1 is won alone, the middle cherry can be stopped, and when the small win E2 is independently won, the middle cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small role E1 and the single winning of the small role E2 are the lottery results in which the middle cherry can be stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), at the time of winning the small role E1, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Further, by winning the small role E1, the game shifts to the advantageous zone, and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the game shifts to the designated game zone (AT) with a probability of “128/256”. / 256 ”, and does not shift to the designated game section. As a result, the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle-stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.
At the time of winning the small role E1, whether or not to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-stage lottery).

Also, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), at the time of winning the small part E2, as in the case of winning the small part E1, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Further, by winning the small role E2, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the game does not shift to the designated game section.

In this way, when the small win E1 and the small win E2 are won, the control always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Further, at the time of winning the small role E1, there is a time when the game shifts to the designated game section and a time at which the game does not shift to the designated game section.
Even in this case, when the lottery result that the middle cherry can be stopped is obtained, it is known that the game shifts to the advantageous section, but it is not known whether or not to shift to the instruction game section. Can be provided to the player over a plurality of games.

(4) FIG. 179 (a) shows a modification of the numeric table (1) of FIG. 160, and FIG. 179 (b) shows an advantageous section shift and an advantageous section transition at the time of the rare role election of FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED77 lighting.
178 and 179, the contents of the numeric table (1) of (a) are the same, but the contents of the transition to the advantageous section and the presence or absence of the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of the rare role winning of (b) are different.

As shown in FIG. 179 (b), at the time of winning the small role E1, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
In addition, by winning the small role E1, the game shifts to the advantageous zone, and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the game shifts to the designated game zone (AT) with a probability of “64/256”. / 256 ”, and does not shift to the designated game section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), at the time of winning the small role E2, it always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Further, by winning the small win E2, the game shifts to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section (64/256) has a probability of "64/256", similarly to the win of the small win E1. AT), but does not shift to the designated game section with a probability of “192/256”. As a result, the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle-stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.
In both the small win E1 win and the small win E2 win, whether to shift to the designated game section (AT) is determined by an AT lottery (two-stage lottery).

Thus, at the time of the small role E1 winning and the small role E2 winning, it always shifts to the advantageous section and illuminates the advantageous section display LED 77, and further, at the time of the small role E1 winning and the small role E2 winning. , When to shift to the designated game section and when not to shift to the designated game section.
Even in this case, when the lottery result that the middle cherry can be stopped is obtained, it is known that the game shifts to the advantageous section, but it is not known whether or not to shift to the instruction game section. Can be provided to the player over a plurality of games.

(5) FIG. 180 (a) shows a modification of the numeral table (1) of FIG. 160, and FIG. 180 (b) shows an advantageous section shift and a rare section transition at the time of winning the rare role shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of advantageous section display LED77 lighting.
In FIG. 180 (a), the setting number of the single winning of the small role E1 is set to “250” for the common setting, and the setting number of the single winning for the small combination E2 is set to “750” for the common setting. In FIG. 180 (a), when the small win E1 is won, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section, and also when the small win E2 wins, the normal section always shifts to the advantageous section.

Also, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the small win E1 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. Even when the small win E2 wins, it always shifts to the advantageous section, And the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Furthermore, by winning the small role E1, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the game always shifts to the designated game section.
On the other hand, by winning the small role E2, the game shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the game does not shift to the designated game section.
As a result, the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle-stage cherry can be stopped is 25%.

In this way, when the small role E1 and the small role E2 are won, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. At the time of winning the role E2, the game is not shifted to the designated game section.
Even in this case, when the lottery result that the middle cherry can be stopped is obtained, it is known that the game shifts to the advantageous section, but it is not known whether or not to shift to the instruction game section. Can be provided to the player over a plurality of games.
Further, in any of the modes of FIGS. 168 (b), 178 (b), 179 (b), and 180 (b), the transition probability to the designated game section (AT) when the middle cherry stop is possible is as follows. 25%, whichever effect is adopted, the same effect can be exerted and the same impression can be given to the player.

(6) In FIGS. 161 to 164, 1BBB is independently elected, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, instead of the single winning of 1BBB, an overlapping winning of “1BBA + small win 34 (“ bell B ”−“ red 7 ”−“ red 7 ”: one sheet)” may be used.

Specifically, in FIGS. 161 to 164, the number of duplicate wins of “1 BBA + Small Winner 34” is “80” for setting 1, “88” for setting 2, and “88” for setting 3. Can be set to “96”, set to “104” for setting 4, set to “112” for setting 5, and set to “120” for setting 6.
Even in this case, the winning probability of 1BB (sum of 1BBA single winning and overlapping winning) increases as the set value increases, and the set probability of the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning decreases. According to the above.

(7) In FIG. 168 (b), at the time of winning the small role E1 (middle cherries), when a transition is made to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, there is a probability of “64/256” and the designated game section ( AT), and does not shift to the designated game section with a probability of “192/256”. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 168 (b), a shift to a chance zone (CZ) may be made instead of the designated game section (AT).

Specifically, in FIG. 168 (b), by winning the small role E1 (middle cherry), it shifts to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, there is a probability of “64/256”. , It shifts to the chance zone (CZ), and it is possible to prevent the shift to the chance zone with a probability of “192/256”.
Further, when shifting to the chance zone, there is a case where the process shifts (promotion) to the designated game section (AT) and a case where the process does not shift to the designated game section. For example, in the chance zone, if the condition for shifting to the designated game section is satisfied, the game shifts to the designated game section. If the condition for shifting to the designated game section is not satisfied, the advantageous section ends without shifting to the designated game section. Move to the normal section.

Further, the conditions for shifting from the chance zone to the designated game section include, for example, that the number of winnings of a predetermined role has reached a specified number, and that the number of winnings of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number of times. it can.
Even in this case, when the small role E1 (middle cherries) is won, it is understood that the game always shifts to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on to shift to the advantageous section. Since it is not known whether or not to perform, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for shifting to the designated game section over a plurality of games.

(8) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, “the predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) has been completed after the transition to the advantageous section” is defined as the “one-time instruction operation condition”, but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, “the predetermined combination has been won or won a predetermined number of times after the transition to the advantageous section”, specifically, “the push order bell (small combination B group) has been won or won 5 times after the transition to the advantageous section”, “advantageous” "Seven wins or a prize in the replay after the section shift" can be defined as the "one-time instruction operation condition".

  In addition, for example, “the lottery performed at a predetermined time after the shift to the advantageous section has become non-winning”, specifically, “50% probability when the push order bell (small win B group) after the shift to the advantageous section wins And that the lottery was not won in this lottery "," Every time a game is played after the transition to the advantageous section, a lottery with a 70% probability of winning is performed, and the lottery is not won. And the like may be defined as the "one-time instruction operation condition".

  Furthermore, for example, "the condition determined at the time of transition to the advantageous section was satisfied", specifically, "any of 10 games, 15 games, or 20 games was determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section and determined. That the number of games has been exhausted "," 5, 7, or 10 times are determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and then the number of wins of the push order bell (small role B group) is determined The number of times has been reached "or the like can be defined as the" one-time instruction operation condition ".

Further, for example, "The number of times the wrong play order has been reached at the time of winning the replay overlap (replay B group, replay C group) after shifting to the advantageous section has reached three times", "The freeze occurred after shifting to the advantageous section" , Etc. "can also be determined as the" one-time instruction operating condition ".
Of course, the above conditions may be combined as appropriate to determine the “one-time instruction operation condition”.

  (9) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the setting is changed, the second initialization processing (initialization processing at the time of the setting change) is executed, whereby the advantageous section counter value, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the additional value on the RWM 53 are added. The counter value, the advantageous section flag, the one-time instruction determination flag, the RT state data, the stored number data, the inside medium flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag were cleared. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, when the setting is changed, only the stored number data among the RT state data, the stored number data, the inside flag, the accessory condition device number data, and the accessory operating state flag is cleared, and the RT state data, the internal inside flag, The accessory condition device number data and the accessory operating state flag may be held without being cleared.

Here, the "information about the advantageous section" must be cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared even when the setting is changed.
Further, the "RT state data", "internal flag", "accessory condition device number data", and "accessory operation state flag" must be held without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section. At the time of change, it may be cleared or held without being cleared.

Furthermore, the "stored number data" must be held without being cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must be cleared when the setting is changed.
As described above, the “stored number data” is data on the RWM 53 that is handled differently when the advantageous section ends and when the setting is changed.

(10) In the flowchart shown in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. If the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. is there.
(11) The twenty-fifth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 shown in FIGS. 3 and 38 in the first embodiment.
FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 38 in the first embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (in the first embodiment (FIG. 38), it is displayed as “advantageous section ratio”, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, it is displayed as “advantageous section ratio”). Is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) in the order of the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), the bonus ratio (6000 times), the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the bonus ratio (total). I do.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 38), the “information type” in FIG. 38 is referred to as “identification seg”, and the “numerical value” is referred to as “ratio seg”. The identification seg corresponds to digits 6 and 7, and the "ratio seg" corresponds to digits 8 and 9.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as described in the twentieth embodiment, numbers and alphabets are replaced in the identification segment in the first embodiment (FIG. 38). When the identification segment is displayed, “dot (DP)” of digit 7 corresponding to the lower digit is turned on (dots of digits 6, 8 and 9 are not turned on).
In FIG. 181, the value of the ratio segment is the same as that in FIG.

Further, among the above-mentioned five items, in a slot machine which does not have a function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is displayed as “−−−”.
For example, first, when a character is provided with an accessory (BB, RB, CB, etc.) but is not provided with an advantageous section (for example, without providing an AT, etc., it is referred to as a so-called “normal type” having only a bonus). ), When the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as “−−−”. In other words, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, “7U.” Is displayed in the identification segment of the management information display LED 74 and “−−” is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, for example, secondly, when there is no “RB (Type 1 special character)”, there is no continuous character ratio, and therefore, when the ratio display numbers “2” and “4” are displayed, the ratio The segment is displayed as “−−”. In other words, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 times), “6y.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the management information display LED 74 and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment, and the continuous character ratio (cumulative) is displayed. At times, “6A.” Is displayed on the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and “−−” is displayed on the ratio segment.

FIGS. 182 and 183 are diagrams illustrating storage areas of the RWM 53 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment. 182 and 183 illustrate a part of the storage area used in the description of the twenty-sixth embodiment, and does not mean that the storage area is limited to the storage area illustrated in FIGS. 182 and 183.
As shown in FIG. 124 (the twentieth embodiment), the RWM 53 is divided into a use area and an outside use area, and addresses “F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” are inside the use area. The storage area after “F200 (H)” is a storage area outside the used area. In the present embodiment, “F200 (H)” to “F20F (H)” are so-called “unused areas”. The unused area is an area in which the result of the game obtained by the progress of the game is not stored, and is provided for clearly distinguishing an address in the used area from an address outside the used area. For example, it is possible to reduce access to an RWM address outside the use area when a program in the use area is executed due to a runaway of the main program or the like.

In FIG. 182, an address “F000 (H)” is a storage area for storing setting value data, and values “0” to “5” are stored as data. Data “0” is data corresponding to set value 1, data “1” is data corresponding to set value 2,..., Data “5” is data corresponding to set value 6.
The address “F001 (H)” is a storage area of the interrupt counter. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range from “0” to “65535 (D)”, and the value is updated (“+1”) every interrupt (every 2.235 ms). In the twenty-sixth embodiment, since "0" to "65535 (D)" are adopted as the values of the interrupt counters, the 2-byte addresses "F001 (H)" (lower 8 bits) and "F002 (H)" Although the upper 8 bits are used, for example, when the range of “0” to “255 (D)” is adopted, it is also possible to use only the 1-byte address “F001 (H)”.
The address “F010 (H)” is a storage area of the operation state flag, and each accessory is assigned as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, only the RB (type in which the RB operates continuously during the 1BB game) is provided as the accessory, and when the D3 bit corresponding to the RB is “1” (00001000 (B)), When the D3 bit is "0" (00000000 (B)), the operation is the non-operation of the accessory and the non-operation of the continuous accessory.
Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, when there is another accessory such as SB (for example, allocation to the D4 bit when providing the SB), CB (D1 bit), etc. It can be determined whether or not the accessory is in operation based on whether or not the bit is "1".

  The address “F018 (H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter. The LED display counter of the twenty-sixth embodiment is the same as that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display counter specifies the digit to be turned on during the interrupt processing.

The address “F019 (H)” is a storage area for storing the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is also the same as in the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display request flag is a flag for designating a digit that can be turned on during normal operation, during setting change, or during setting confirmation.
The address “F020 (H)” is a gaming section flag, and is used when determining whether the section is during a normal section, during an advantageous section, or during a standby section.
Specifically, the D0 bit corresponds to an advantageous section flag, and the D1 bit corresponds to a standby section flag. Bits D2 to D7 are unused.
Then, the game section flag is configured to be updated at the time of the game start setting (step S2172 in FIG. 188 described later).

For example, when an advantageous section is won in an “N” game item, an advantageous section starts from an “N + 1” game item. At this time,
“N” game item: game section flag “00000000 (B)”
“N + 1” game item: game section flag “00000001 (B)”
Becomes
In addition, when the player wins the advantageous section at the “N” game, enters the standby section from the “N + 1” game, and enters the advantageous section from the “N + 3” game,
“N” game item: game section flag “00000000 (B)”
“N + 1” game item: game section flag “00000010 (B)”
"N + 2" game item: game section flag "00000010 (B)"
“N + 3” game item: game section flag “00000001 (B)”
Becomes
Furthermore, when the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied with the “N + x” game item and the transition from the “N + x + 1” game item to the normal section is performed,
“N + x” game item: game section flag “00000001 (B)”
“N + x + 1” game item: game section flag “00000000 (B)”
Becomes

  The address “F024 (H)” is a storage area of the advantageous section counter. The advantageous section counter counts the number of games in the advantageous section. As in the other embodiments described above, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is set to “1500” game. In order to count "1500" at the maximum, a 2-byte storage area is provided.

  The medal payout number data storage area of the address “F040 (H)” stores the payout number when the small win has won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 described later). This is a storage area. When the small role wins, a medal payout process is executed, but one medal payout (addition of one medal to the stored number or payout of one actual medal (from the hopper 35)). Each time, “1” is subtracted. That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout processing is completed, the medal payout number data becomes “0”.

  Like the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer at the address “F041 (H)” pays out the payout when the small win wins in the game and the payout number is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 described later). This is a storage area in which the number is stored. Here, unlike the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer is not subtracted for each medal payout processing, and the value stored first is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the end of the next game. For example, when a small win of eight payouts wins in the game, “8 (H)” is stored in the medal payout number buffer, and in the next game, when no win is realized, the medal payout number buffer is stored. Is overwritten with "0".

The 400 game counter at the address “F210 (H)” is for adding the number of games with 400 games as a break. This addition is an addition that circulates from “0” to “399 (D)”, and is added by “1” for each game. For example, when "399 (D)" is stored, "1" is added to become "0".
Note that, contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value, and each game may be subtracted by "1". In this case, when the value becomes “0”, it is determined that 400 games have been executed. When “1” is subtracted from “0”, “399 (D)” is reset.

The ring buffer number of the address “F212 (H)” determines the number of the ring buffer to which the data is to be added when a medal is paid out in the game, and updates the number of paid out medals. This is for specifying the ring buffer. Specifically, any one of “0” to “14 (D)” is stored.
Addresses “F213 (H)” to “F230 (H)” are storage areas of the total payout ring buffer, and are composed of 15 addresses. Each total payout ring buffer is composed of 2 bytes. For example, the total payout ring buffer 0 includes addresses “F213 (H)” and “F214 (H)”, where the address “F213 (H)” is the lower digit and the address “F214 (H)” is the upper digit. In FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, the lowest address number is displayed for the storage area having the number of bytes of “2” or more.

The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 correspond to the fifteen ring buffers shown in FIG. 28 (first embodiment) (the addresses are different from FIG. 28). One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the number of payouts from the first game to the 400th game is stored in the addresses “F213 (H)” and “F214 (H)”, and the number of payouts from the next 401st game to the 800th game is the address “ F215 (H) "and" F216 (H) ".
Here, it is determined whether or not the 400th game is reached by referring to the 400 game counter at the address “F210 (H)”. Further, it is determined by referring to the ring buffer number at the address "F212 (H)" which ring buffer value to add (update the value) to the payout number in the game.

Then, as described above, when the total payout number from the first game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses “F213 (H)” and “F214 (H)”, The total payout number up to the 6000th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses “F22F (H)” and “F230 (H)”. Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses “F213 (H)” and “F214 (H)” is cleared, and the number of payouts of the 6001 to 6400 games Are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses “F213 (H)” and “F214 (H)”.
Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 is composed of 2 bytes. As described in the first embodiment, assuming that the maximum payout number in one game is “15” (in the first embodiment, “10” is shown as the small role 39 in FIG. Is considered in consideration of the maximum value of "1"), and the maximum number of payouts among the 400 games is 6000, so that storage is possible with a storage capacity of 2 bytes.
This point is the same for the continuous accessory delivery ring buffers 0 to 14 and the accessory delivery ring buffers 0 to 14 described later.

Addresses “F231 (H)” to “F24E (H)” are storage areas of the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14. This corresponds to the one shown in FIG. 29 (first embodiment) (the address is different from FIG. 29).
Addresses “F24F (H)” to “F26C (H)” are storage areas of the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14. This corresponds to that shown in FIG. 30 (first embodiment) (the address is different from FIG. 30).

The total game number counters at addresses “F26D (H)” to “F26F (H)” are counters for storing the number of games (total), and are composed of 3 bytes. As described in the first embodiment, since it is necessary to count “175000 (D)” games as the total number of games, the number of games is three bytes. The storage area of the total game number counter is equivalent to the storage areas “F005 (H)” to “F007 (H)” shown in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the counting is continued even if the number of games exceeds the "175000 (D)" game, and when the number of games reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)"), the counting is stopped. Detailed control on this point will be described later.

  The advantageous section game number counters at the addresses “F270 (H)” to “F272 (H)” count the number of games in the advantageous section, and are “F001 (H)” to “F001 (H)” in FIG. 27 of the first embodiment. This corresponds to “F004 (H)”. In the first embodiment, since the value obtained by multiplying the number of games in the advantageous section by “100 (D)” is stored, the storage area is set to 4 bytes. However, in the 26th embodiment, like the total game number counter, In order to add “1” per game, three bytes are used.

The total payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses “F273 (H)” to “F275 (H)” is a counter that counts the total payout number of medals during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out for each game in the 6000 game, the total is 90,000, so it is possible to count in 3 bytes (a continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter described later and an accessory) The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter.)
This counter corresponds to the counters “F02F (H)” to “F031 (H)” in FIG. 28 (first embodiment).

Similarly, the continuous payout counter (6000 times) at the addresses “F276 (H)” to “F278 (H)” is a counter that counts the number of payouts during the operation of the continuous bonus during 6,000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F06E (H)” to “F070 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
In the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by “100 (D)” is stored. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of payouts is stored (added). That is, when the payout number is one, “1” is added.
Furthermore, similarly, the accessory payout counters (6000 times) at addresses "F279 (H)" to "F27B (H)" are counters for counting the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory during 6000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F0AE (H)” to “F0B0 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).
As described above, in the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by “100 (D)” is stored. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of payouts itself is stored (added).

In the above total payout (6000 times) counter, continuous handouts payout (6000 times) counter, and handouts payout (6000 times) counter, when there is a payout at the time of continuous non-operation and at the time of non-operation of the specialty Only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added). In addition, when there is a payout when the continuous accessory is not operated and the accessory is operated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the specialty article payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter is updated. Is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during the operation of the continuous bonus, all of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the specialty article payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous valuables payout (6000 times) counter are updated.

The values of the total payout counter (6000 times), the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
The specific control will be described later with reference to a flowchart. The outline of the control is as follows.
First, when medals are paid out from the first game to the 6000 game, the total payout (6000 times) is performed depending on whether the continuous role is activated / non-activated and the role is activated / deactivated, respectively. ) Stored (added) in the counter, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, a continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) and an accessory ratio (6000 times) to be described later are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts during the 400 game times from the game before the “400 × 15-1” game (5999 games) to the “400 × 15-400” game (5600 games) is the total payout (6000). Times) are subtracted from the counter value, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, in the case of the 6000 game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213 (H) to F214 (H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213 (H) to F214 (H)) value is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.
Similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game value, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H) to F232 (H)) is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts at the time of the operation of the continuous bonus from the 6001th game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous bonus delivery ring buffer 0 and the continuous bonus delivery (6000 times) counter.
Further, similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the value of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F24F (H) to F250 (H)) is subtracted from the value of the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts during the operation of the bonus from the 6001th game to the 6400th game is added to the bonus payout ring buffer 0 and the bonus payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" games to "400" games Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" games to "800" games Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" games to "1200" games Eyes Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" games to "1600" games Total payout ring buffers 4: "1601" games to "2000" games Total payout ring buffers 5: "2001" games to "2400" Game eyes Total payout ring buffer 6: “2401” game eyes to “2800” game eyes Total payout ring buffer 7: “2801” game eyes to “3200” game eyes Total payout ring buffer 8: “3201” game eyes to “3600” "Game eyes Total payout ring buffer 9:" 3601 "game eyes to" 4000 "game eyes Total payout ring buffer 10:" 40 " 01 "game items to" 4400 "game items Total payout ring buffer 11:" 4401 "game items to" 4800 "game items Total payout ring buffer 12:" 4801 "game items to" 5200 "game items Total payout ring buffer 13: “5201” game item to “5600” game item Total payout ring buffer 14: “5601” game item to “6000” game item Total payout (6000 times) counter: “1” game item to “6000” game item

Then, assuming that the 6000 game has been completed, all the payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts for each number of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 match.
Here, assuming that the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is $ 1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = $ 1-Z1
Is performed.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Is performed.
That is, the total payout value “Z1” of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts during the number of 400 games from the time before the 5999 (400 × 15-1) game to the time before the 5600 (400 × 15−400) game is calculated. (6000 times) A process of subtracting from the value “$ 1” stored in the counter is executed.
Next, a process of clearing the value “Z1” of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the payout number during the 400 game times from before the 5999 (400 × 15-1) game to before the 5600 (400 × 15−400) game. Execute
After performing the calculation in this manner, the 6001 game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001 to 6400 games (here, it is assumed that the character has not been activated by the 6001 to 6400 games), the payout is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and It is added to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400 games have been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game items to “6400” game items Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game items to “800” game items:
Total payout ring buffer 14: “5601” game items to “6000” game items Total payout (6000 times) counter: “401” game items to “6000” game items, and “6001” game items to “6400” game items As described above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is $ 2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2,
Total payout (6000 times) counter = $ 2-Z2
And
And
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
And
After the calculation as described above, the 6401 game item is started. When there is a payout from the 6401 game item to the 6800 game item (here, it is assumed that the character does not operate by the 6401 game item to the 6800 game item), the payout is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and It is added to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above processing is repeated.

In the above description, the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described. However, the same processing as described above is performed when the accessory is activated or when the continuous accessory is activated.
Specifically, when the accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with an accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process. When the accessory is activated, as described above, any one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.
Similarly, when the continuous accessory is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with a continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the processing that was performed. Note that when the continuous accessory is activated, any one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the specialty payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the specialty article payout (6000 times) counter Updates are also performed at the same time.

The total payout (cumulative) counters of the addresses “F27C (H)” to “F27E (H)” are counters for counting the total payout number, and count at least the total payout number during the “175000 (D)” game. .
This counter corresponds to the counters of “F032 (H)” to “F034 (H)” in FIG. 28 (first embodiment).
Similarly, the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counters at the addresses “F27F (H)” to “F281 (H)” are counters for counting the cumulative number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated. At least, the number of payouts during the operation of the continuous accessory during the "175000 (D)" game is counted.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F071 (H)” to “F074 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
Similarly, the accessory payout (cumulative) counters at the addresses “F282 (H)” to “F284 (H)” are counters for counting the cumulative number of payouts when the accessory is activated. The number of payouts during the operation of the accessory during the "175000 (D)" game is counted.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F0B1 (H)” to “F0B4 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).
Note that the above-mentioned three types of payout (6000 times) counters subtract the number of payouts from before 5999 games to before 5600 games for every 400 games, but these three types of payout (total) counters subtract the value. I will not do it.

In the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by “100 (D)” is stored, so the total storage capacity is composed of 4 bytes. Is stored (added), so that it is composed of 3 bytes.
For example, assuming that there are 15 payouts per game in a 175,000 game, “175000 × 15 = 2625000” is smaller than a value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, data can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

The advantageous section ratio data of the address “F285 (H)” is a storage area for storing an advantageous section ratio indicating a ratio of the number of times of the advantageous section to the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area (advantageous section ratio) of “F008 (H)” in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
The continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data of the address “F286 (H)” is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts during the continuous bonus operation to the total number of payouts during the number of 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area “F075 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The bonus ratio (6000 times) data at the address “F287 (H)” is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts during the operation of the bonus to the total number of payouts during the number of 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of “F0B5 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Further, the continuous bonus item ratio (cumulative) data at the address “F288 (H)” is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts when the continuous bonus item is activated to the total number of payouts at the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area “F076 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The accessory ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F289 (H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the accessory to the total number of payouts at the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area “F0B6 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Next, a method of calculating the ratio and an outline of the correction of the ratio will be described (specific processing will be described later in a flowchart).
In the following example, the advantageous section ratio will be described using a decimal number. The following ratio calculation method is employed for all of the five types of ratios shown in FIG.
First, it is assumed that the total number of games is “50,000” and the number of games in the advantageous section is “13000”.
In this case, if division is used, the advantageous section ratio can be calculated as “13000/50000 = 0.26 (26%)”. In the ratio calculation according to the twenty-sixth embodiment, decimal places are rounded down. Therefore, for example, "18.9%" is set to "18%".
On the other hand, the one-chip microprocessor (FIG. 124) mounted in this embodiment cannot execute the operation of directly dividing a large value. Therefore, an operation in which division is replaced with subtraction is performed.

Here, “Y (dividend) / X (divisor)” is set.
(1) Multiply the number of advantageous section games that is the dividend Y by 10 (10 × Y). Therefore, “13000 × 10 = 1300,000”. Note that the process of multiplying by 10 is executed by a calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) described later.
(2) Subtract the divisor X “50000” from “130000”.
130000-50000 = 80000 (first subtraction)
Here, when the operation result is larger than the divisor X, the divisor X is subtracted from the operation result again, and the operation is repeated until the operation result becomes “0” or more and less than the divisor X. Then, the number of repetitions is set to “R1”.
That is,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
"R1" that satisfies is calculated.
In this example,
130000-50000 = 80000 (first subtraction)
80000-50000 = 30000 (2nd subtraction)
At this point, it is equal to or greater than “0” and less than the divisor X.
Then, the number of repetitions of the subtraction here becomes the tens place of the ratio. Assuming that the tens place of the ratio is “R1”, “R1 = 2”.

(3) Next, the remainder in the subtraction of “R1” is set as “Y ′”. That is,
10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′
And
The remainder “Y ′” is multiplied by 10 (10 × Y ′). Therefore, “30000 × 10 = 300000”.
(4) Subtract the divisor X “50000” from “300000”.
300000-50000 = 250,000 (first subtraction)
Here, similarly to the above, when the operation result is larger than the divisor X, the divisor X is subtracted from the operation result again, and the operation is repeated until the operation result becomes “0” or more and less than the divisor X. Then, the number of repetitions is set to “R2”.
That is,
0 ≦ (10 × Y′−X × R2) <X
"R2" that satisfies is calculated.
In this example,
300000-50000 = 250,000 (first subtraction)
250,000−50000 = 200000 (second subtraction)
:
50000-50000 = 0 (6th subtraction)
At this point, it is equal to or greater than “0” and less than the divisor X.
Then, the number of repetitions of the subtraction becomes the first place of the ratio. If the first place of the ratio is “R2”, then “R2 = 6”.
(5) Therefore, the ratio is “10 × R1 + R2”, which is “26”.

  When “10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′” as described above, it is determined whether or not “Y ′ = 0”, and when it is determined that “Y ′ = 0”, , "0" may be set as the ratio of ones digit, and the calculation of the ratio of ones digit may be omitted. In this case, the specific ratio is “R1” for the tens place and “0” for the ones place.

Further, when there is a relationship of “Y (dividend) = X (divisor)” (for example, when the total number of games matches the number of games in the advantageous section), “R1 = 10 (D)” is obtained by the above calculation. And “R2 = 0”, that is, the ratio is calculated as “100%”. However, as also shown in FIG. 125 (the twentieth embodiment), since the ratio seg is composed of two digits, the ratio can be displayed only up to two digits. Therefore, when the calculated ratio is "100 (D)", the ratio is changed to the correction value "99" and stored. Thus, “99” is displayed in the ratio segment.
As will be described later, when the ratio is “60” or “70” or more, it is determined that the ratio does not fall within the range of the design value, so that “100” or “99” is similarly determined. There is not much difference in the judgment of the design value.
If an attempt is made to display “100 (D)” as the ratio, an overflow occurs in the third digit, and the display content becomes “00”. When the display is “00”, it cannot be determined whether the ratio is “0%” or “100%”. Also from this viewpoint, when the calculated ratio is “100 (D)”, “99” is displayed instead of “00”.
However, in the case where the ratio seg is composed of three LEDs, when the ratio is calculated and the result is “100 (D)”, it goes without saying that “100” may be displayed in the ratio seg. .

As described above, the tens place and the ones place are each operated by subtraction, so that the number of subtractions is 20 at the maximum.
On the other hand, as shown in the first embodiment, for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section is multiplied by “100” and the total number of games is continuously subtracted from the number of games in the advantageous section multiplied by “100”, the maximum It is necessary to perform subtraction 100 times.
Therefore, in the calculation method of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the time for calculating the ratio can be significantly reduced.

Further, the ratio is not limited to the advantageous section ratio, and the other four ratios also have a 1-byte storage area. Here, when storing the ratio, of the 1-byte storage area, the upper 4 bits are set as the tens storage area of the ratio, and the lower 4 bits are set as the first storage area of the ratio.
When the ratio is calculated as “26 (D)” as in the above example, the tens place “2” becomes “10” in a binary number, and the first place “6” becomes “110 (B)” in a binary number. ) ". Therefore, “0010/0110 (B)” is stored in the address “F285 (H)” storing the advantageous section ratio. Note that “/” indicates a boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits. By storing in this way, the tens value of the ratio can be immediately obtained from the upper 4 bits, and the 1st value of the ratio can be immediately obtained from the lower 4 bits. Note that “26 (D)” is “00011010 (B)” in binary, but a predetermined calculation must be performed to find the tens place of the ratio based on this value. On the other hand, if the upper 4 bits are stored in the tens place and the lower 4 bits are stored in the 1s place as described above, the upper 4 bits “10 (B)” are displayed during the interrupt processing for displaying the ratio of the upper 4 bits. As shown in FIG. 127, the segment data can be immediately obtained using the value as an offset value.

In FIG. 183, the calculation result buffer at the address “F28A (H)” is a storage area for temporarily storing the calculation result during a ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) described later.
The count upper limit flag of the address “F28B (H)” is determined by a total game number counter (addresses “F26D (H)” to “F26F (H)”) or a total payout number (cumulative) counter (address “F27C (H)”). This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of “F27E (H)” is the upper limit value (when it is 3 bytes full, that is, when it is “FFFFFF (H)”). Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the “D0” bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games, and the “D1” bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The “D2” to “D7” bits are not used in the twenty-sixth embodiment. For example, when the total game number counter has reached the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag is “00000001 (B)”.

The payout amount upper limit buffer at the address “F28C (H)” becomes “3 bytes full” when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter and exceeds 3 bytes. Is a storage area for storing the value of.
For example, when the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is “FFFFFE (H)” and the payout number in the game is “8 (H)”, the counter value becomes “8 (H)”. ) "Causes overflow of digits. For this reason, in order to prevent the total payout (total) counter value from overflowing, a value for making the total number of bytes 3 full is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, since “FFFFFE (H)” + “1 (H)” = “FFFFFF (H)”, “1 (H)” is stored in the payout amount upper limit buffer.

A specific method for calculating the payout number upper limit buffer value is as follows.
(1) In the above example, “8 (H)” is added to “FFFFFE (H)”. As a result, overflow occurs (zero flag = “1”).
(2) When an overflow occurs (when the zero flag is “1”), “2 (H)” is subtracted from the payout number “8 (H)” in the game to obtain “6 (H)”. This value is the value after overflow (FFFFFE (H) +8 (H) = 6 (H)).
(3) “1 (H)” is added to “6 (H)” to obtain “7 (H)”.
(4) “7 (H)” obtained in (3) is subtracted from the payout number “8 (H)” in the game. As a result, it becomes "1 (H)". This “1 (H)” is the payout number upper limit buffer value.
Therefore, “FFFFFE (H)” + “1 (H)” = “FFFFFF (H)”
Becomes
If the number of payouts in the game does not exceed 3 bytes full even when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (total) counter, the number of payouts in the game is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer. For example, when the number of payouts does not exceed 3 bytes full and the payout amount in the game is “8 (H)”, “8 (H)” is stored in the payout amount upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at the address “F28D (H)” is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the identification segment and the ratio segment.
FIG. 184 is a diagram showing blinking display conditions of the identification segment and the ratio segment.
As shown in FIG. 184, in the identification segment, blinking is displayed according to whether the total number of games is less than “6000” or less than “175000”. Specifically, regarding the advantageous section ratio, the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total), when the total number of games (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000", Is controlled so that the identification segment is displayed blinking. When the total number of games (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than “6000”, the identification segment is determined for the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times). Control to blink.

The identification segment of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times) are blinkingly displayed. These ratios are originally a ratio between 6000 times, but a game less than 6000 times. When the ratio is calculated by the number of times, the display is blinked to indicate that.
Similarly, the blinking display of the identification segments of the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) is based on the fact that these ratios are originally between 175,000 games (to reduce variation). Is desirable, but if the ratio is calculated based on the number of games in less than 175,000 games, it is displayed blinking to indicate that.

Furthermore, as for the advantageous section ratio and the accessory ratio (both 6000 times and the cumulative total), when the displayed value is “70” or more, the display is blinked. Further, the continuous accessory ratio (both 6000 times and the cumulative total) blinks when the displayed value is “60” or more.
The reason for the above setting is that in the slot machine of the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio and the accessory ratio are designed to be less than "70"%, and the continuous accessory ratio is set to be less than "60"%. This is so that when the measured value is not within the range of the design value, it is notified by blinking display.

The description returns to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the advantageous section ratio blinking flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous character ratio (6000 times) blinking flag,..., The D6 bit corresponds to the 175000 times blinking flag. I have.
For example, when the calculated advantageous section ratio is “70” or more, the D0 bit of the blinking request flag becomes “1”. Further, when the calculated continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) is “70” or more, the D1 bit of the blinking request flag becomes “1”. Furthermore, when the total game frequency counter value is less than "6000", the D5 bit is "1", and when the total game frequency counter value is less than "175000", the D6 bit is "1".
For example, when the total number of games is less than “175000” (provided that it is “6000” or more) and the advantageous section ratio is “70”% or more, the value of the blinking request flag is “ 01000001 (B) ", and when the display order is" 1 "in FIG. 181, both the identification segment and the ratio segment are blinking targets.

The ratio display number of the address “F28E (H)” is a storage area for storing the ratio number displayed in the interrupt processing. Here, the “display number” indicates the display order in FIG. 181. For example, when the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt processing is the advantageous section ratio, “1 (H)” is stored in the ratio display number. Is done.
The blinking switching flag of the address “F28F (H)” is a flag for determining whether to turn on or off when the identification segment or the ratio segment is blinking displayed at the time of the interrupt processing.
In the present embodiment, when blinking is displayed, it is set so that lighting and extinguishing are repeated about every 0.3 seconds. For about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag becomes “0” (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds during lighting off, the blinking switching flag is “1” (value indicating lighting). Is set to be

The display switching time of the address “F290 (H)” is a counter that counts about 5 seconds, which is a time for displaying one ratio, and is a counter that updates “1” each time interrupt processing is performed once.
In this embodiment, the display of the advantageous section ratio (about 5 seconds) → the display of the continuity of the accessory (6000 times) (about 5 seconds) →. (Approximately 5 seconds) → Repeatedly displayed. For this reason, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether the switching time of the ratio display content has been reached.
As described above, the blinking switching time of the address “F292 (H)” is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when the identification seg and the ratio seg are blinkingly displayed. Is updated to "1".

Here, the display switching time and the blinking switching time will be described.
Assuming that the display switching time is 5.0 seconds and the blink switching time is 0.3 seconds, the blink cycle is 0.6 seconds. However, multiplying “0.6” by a natural number does not result in “5.0”. For example, it is assumed that the counting of 5.0 seconds is started at the same time when the display of any ratio is started, and the counting of 0.3 seconds is started. In this case, the elapsed time when the blinking period (0.6 seconds) becomes eight times is 4.8 seconds. Therefore, when the lighting is shifted to the next time, it reaches 5.0 seconds after a lapse of 0.2 seconds, so that the display switching time is satisfied and the display is switched to the next ratio display. Therefore, the last lighting time is 0.2 seconds. In this way, if the display switching time does not come when the blinking cycle is multiplied by a natural number, the light may be turned on or off for a moment just before the display switching time arrives.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display switching time is set so that the blink switching period is multiplied by a natural number.
As a prerequisite, it is assumed that a deviation of ± 10% or less is allowed in the display switching time of 5.0 seconds. Similarly, it is assumed that a deviation of ± 10% or less is allowed in the blinking period of 0.6 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the display switching time and the blinking display time are counted using the number of interrupts. Further, the interrupt time is “2.235” ms as described in the first embodiment.
In the above, when the cycle of the display switching time is T, the blink switching time is S (therefore, the blink cycle is “2 × S”), and the natural number is “n”,
T = 2 × n × S
Should be satisfied.
At this time,
T = 2.235 ms × 2144 = 4791.84 ms
S = 2.235 ms × 134 = 299.49 ms
If so, all are within the range of ± 10%.
Also, 134 × 16 = 2144
And satisfies that “n” is a natural number.

As described above, the display switching time is set to “2144” as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interruption. When the display switching time is “0”, it is determined that the display switching time has been reached. When it is determined that the display switching time is “0”, an initial value “2144” is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time cycles from “0” to “2144”.
Similarly, the flashing switching time is set to “134” as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. If it is “0”, the flashing switching time (switching from lighting to off) Time or the time for switching from off to on). When it is determined that the blinking switching time is “0”, an initial value “134” is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time cycles from “0” to “134”.
Further, from the above, since “n = 16”, the display switching time is reached when the blinking cycle becomes eight cycles (2 × n).
Furthermore, when any of the ratio displays is started, if the ratio display satisfies the blinking condition, the lighting is started.
More specifically, for example, when the display is started from the advantageous section ratio of the ratio display number “1” and at least one of the identification segment or the ratio segment of the advantageous section ratio satisfies the blinking display, the following flow is performed.

(1) The display of the advantageous section ratio is started and the lighting is started (at this time, the blinking switching flag is “0” (lighting)). At the start of the display of the advantageous section ratio, the counter value of the display switching time is the initial value “2144”, and the count value of the blinking switching time is the initial value “134”.
(2) When it is determined that the count value of the blinking switching time is “0”, an initial value “134” is set as the blinking switching time at the time of the interrupt processing. Further, the flashing switching flag is updated from "0" (lighting) to "1" (light off).

(3) Thereafter, when it is determined that the count value of the blinking switching time is “0”, an initial value “134” is set as the blinking switching time during the interrupt processing. Further, the flashing switching flag is updated from “1” (unlit) to “0” (lit).
(4) When it is determined that the count value of the display switching time is “0”, an initial value “2144” is set as the display switching time at the time of the interrupt processing. In addition, the initial value “134” is set to the count value of the blinking switching time, and the blinking switching flag is updated from “1” (unlit) to “0” (lit). Further, the ratio display number is updated from “1” to “2”.
(5) In the next interruption process, the display of the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) of the ratio display number “2” is started. If there is an identification seg or a ratio seg that satisfies the blinking display condition, it starts from lighting.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described based on a flowchart.
The flowchart in the twenty-sixth embodiment has the following contents.
Figure 185: Program start (M_PRG_START)
Figure 186: Setting change processing (M_RANK_SET)
Figure 187: Power return processing (M_POWER_ON)
Figure 188: Main processing (M_MAIN)
FIG. 189: (a) Update number of payouts, (b) Wait for interrupt (C_INTR_WAIT)
Figure 190: Interrupt processing (I_INTR)
Figure 191: Rate set processing (S_RATE_SET)
Figure 192: Count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK)
Figure 193: Game count (S_GAME_CNT)
Figure 194: Count up (S_CNT_UP)
Figure 195: Advantageous section game count (S_ATGAME_CNT)
Figure 196: Payout count (S_PAYOUT_CNT)
Fig. 197: Set number of payouts (S_PAYOUT_SET)
Figure 198: Ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET)
Fig. 199: Counting the number of paid out articles (S_BNSPAY_CNT)
Fig. 200: Counting the number of consecutive bonus articles (S_RBPAY_CNT)
Figure 202: Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET)
Figure 203: Calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET)
Figure 204: Ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE)
Figure 205: Update ring buffer number (S_RINGNO_SET)
Figure 206: Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY)
Figure 207: Flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH)
Figure 209: Rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME)
Figure 210: Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT)
In the following description, “data (value) stored in a register” is abbreviated as “register value”.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when the program by the main control board 50 is started.
In FIG. 185, when the program is started in step S2101, in the next step S2102, the main control board 50 initializes the register. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of a communication speed of a serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting of an interrupt type (for example, setting to a maskable interrupt, etc.), and a parity bit added to a control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.

  Next, proceeding to step S2103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off execution processing flag is stored. The power-off execution processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off execution flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2104, and when it is determined that the power-off execution process flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2104, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. More specifically, a checksum is calculated in the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used by the program) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed during the power-off processing. Here, in step S2104, the 1-byte data stored in the RWM 53 is added.
In step S2105, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 53 for which the checksum has been calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S2104 to continue the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2106.

Further, in the following processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 is initialized, in the present embodiment, the same processing is executed in the designated range of the RWM 53.
If it is determined in step S2103 that the power-off execution processing flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without performing checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

  In step S2106, main control board 50 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value and that the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 has been normally completed, the normal value is stored as power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off execution processing flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S2103), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RWM 53 checksum calculation (all ranges) in step S2104, the power-off is performed. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

  In the next step S2107, the level data of a predetermined input port is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an A register). Next, in step S2108, it is determined whether the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port. In the present embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal of the door switch 15, a signal of a setting door switch (if a setting door switch is provided), and a signal of the setting key switch 12 among the predetermined input ports. One.

Then, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front cover (housing) is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 is turned on. The setting change is permitted only when the signal is ON (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designation switches are on, the process can shift to the setting change process of step S2112. However, when at least one designation switch is not on, shifting to the setting change process of step S2112 is not permitted. .
That is, regardless of whether the signal of the door switch 15 is off (the front cover is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed), the setting key switch 12 is turned off. Since the signal cannot be turned on and the possibility of fraud is high, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S2108 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S2109, and when it is determined that all the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S2111.
In step S2109, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off return data is the data stored in the register in step S2106.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether the setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change disable flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is a flag that is disabled during a role lottery process (step S2180) to a game end check process (step S2196) to be described later. is there. If the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2111; otherwise, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112.
In this embodiment, the setting change disable flag is provided. However, if the setting change is always possible, the setting change disable flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S2110 is not required.
Further, in a 27th embodiment (2) (FIG. 216) described later, a setting change flag that is turned on when setting can be changed is provided, but such a flag may be used.

  In step S2111, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This processing is equivalent to the processing in step S2109. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process advances to step S2113 to perform power-return processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S2114 to perform a non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1; FIG. 136).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112.
First, in step S2121, a “predetermined range” is stored in a register as an initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53 (“F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off processing has been executed normally, and includes a set value data (address “F000 (H)”), a game state (for example, an RT state), The initialization range in which the flags relating to the role lottery (address “F010 (H)” etc.) are not initialized is referred to as “predetermined range”.

Next, proceeding to step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S2121 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S2123.
In step S2123, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) is set as the initialization range. Set.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2124 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2126.

  In step S2126, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved for the sake of instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S2127, where a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 (after “F200 (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and is, for example, after the address “F28E (H)” or after “F293 (H)” (initialization). The range varies depending on the specifications and the like, and is not fixed).

In the next step S2128, similarly to step S2122, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2130, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S2127 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S2129.
In step S2129, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address “F200 (H)” is set as the initialization range. Therefore, in this case, the initialization is performed including the ring buffer and the like.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2130, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (out of the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2130 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, activation setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S2102 are set. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process, and therefore, a process for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds to the process. Then, after the process of step S2133, an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that interrupt processing is not executed before “interruption activation”.
In the next step S2134, an output request set at the start of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 of the start of the setting change process.

The “output request set” is also executed in the process described below, but means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as in step S2134. . Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also means a command that is a source of a command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S2135, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This processing is for storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores the standby time in a BC register (a pair register composed of a B register composed of 8-bit 1-byte data and a C register). In this embodiment, the number of interrupts “224” (about 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of the setting change. Next, the process advances to step S2137 to execute a wait process (wait process) for 2 bytes for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupts “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each number of interrupts and the set number of interrupts becomes “0”). This standby is also called a delay process or a standby process because the main process does not proceed. During the waiting time (during the 2-byte time waiting process), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, the wait process (wait process) for two bytes in step S2137 is performed in such a manner that the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side Since the initialization process of the RWM 83 takes time, the main control board 50 executes a waiting process for two bytes. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 is still performing the initialization processing, the main control board 50 has already completed the initialization, and the processing further proceeds. It can be prevented that the progress of the control processing of 80 is not synchronized.
After execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83, and a time sufficient for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. I do. Thus, after the sub-control board 80 ends the RWM 83 initialization processing, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S2138 and the subsequent steps.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137. However, while the wait processing for two bytes is being performed in step S2137, the process does not proceed to the processes in step S2138 and thereafter (the main process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte waiting process in step S2137 ends, the process advances to step S2138 to perform display control (lighting) of the LED whose setting is being changed. Thereby, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, the LEDs (the set value display LED 73 and the acquisition number display LED 78) displayed during the setting change can be turned on. In the present embodiment, in order to display the current set value on the set value display LED 73 based on the set value data, and to display “88” on the acquired number display LED 78, the process of updating the value of the display data (the RWM 53) (Process of storing data for displaying “88” in the acquired number data).
Since the display data to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 has been initialized in step S2124, it is “0” before updating.

Next, the flow advances to step S2139 to execute an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT). This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. The reason for providing this processing will be described later. Details of this processing will be described later (FIG. 189 (b)). After the elapse of one interrupt time, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether an operation of setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 13 is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port including the setting switch 13. If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141. If it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2142.
In step S2141, the setting value data is updated. Specifically, the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When the interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.
The relationship between the operation of the setting switch 13 and the set value is the same as that described in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above processing, step S2139 (wait for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting switch 13.
For example, when the process in step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on, the setting value data is updated in step S2141 and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S2142. If not, the flow advances to step S2140 to determine whether the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on.

  After it is determined in step S2140 that the switch is on, if the interrupt processing is performed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON. As a result, the set value data continues to increase by “2” or more by operating the setting switch 13 only once. Therefore, in step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off, the process advances to step S2144 to perform LED display control (extinguish) after the setting change is completed. Specifically, first, the set value display LED 73 is turned off. Here, the LED display request flag described in the twentieth embodiment and the like is changed to a normal value. As a result, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) does not turn on (turns off) even if the interrupt process is executed thereafter. Secondly, a normal display is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. Here, in order to display “00” on the stored number display LED 76 and the obtained number display LED 78, a process of updating the values of the stored number data and the obtained number data of the RWM 53 is executed.
Thus, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, “00” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. Note that instead of displaying “00”, control may be performed so that the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2145, and similarly to step S2134, an output request set at the end of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command for terminating the setting change process and informing the sub-control board 80 of the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address “F000 (H)”) Is the process of setting. Next, proceeding to step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process proceeds to step S2147 to shift to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2113 in FIG. 185.
First, in step S2151, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, and the like) at the time of power failure when power failure occurs. Of these, it indicates the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S2152, the set value data is read, and the range of the set value data is in the normal range (whether in the range of set value 1 to set value 6), in other words, “F000 (H)”. It is determined whether or not the stored value is in the range of “0 (H)” to “5 (H)”. If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S2153. If it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an “E6” error occurs, the process proceeds to step S2164, and the unrecoverable error process 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2) 137).

In step S2153, the initialization range of the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2154, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S2153 is initialized. Here, even in an unused area, a value may be stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like. If a value is stored in the unused area, the unused area may lead to a bad act such as fraud. Therefore, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). I have.
In the next step S2155, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has been completed.
In step S2156, the AF register is saved. This processing is the same as the processing in step S2126 described above. In the next step S2157, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2158, the RWM 53 in the range set in step S2157 is initialized.
In the next step S2159, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (an unused area outside the used area) has been completed. In step S2160, the AF register is restored. This processing is the same as the processing in step S2132 described above.

In the next step S2161, a predetermined input port is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the flow advances to step S2162 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to step S2133 described above.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2163, where the power-off processing completed flag is cleared, that is, set to “0”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-described power return process, after the input port is read (step S2161), the interrupt process is activated (step S2162). The reason is as follows.
In the present embodiment, a configuration key is inserted during standby for a game so that a configuration value can be confirmed. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1”, it is determined that the checking of the setting value has been completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is turned off during the setting confirmation, and the setting key switch 12 is turned off (by removing the setting key) to turn on the power during the power cut.

In this case, the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is off by the interrupt process after the power is restored, so that the falling of the setting key switch is detected. You.
As a result, the state at the time of power-off recovery is different from the state before power-off. Specifically, the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 is “0” in a state before the power is turned off, whereas the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 is “1” when the power is restored.
Therefore, in order to prevent the state from being different before and after the power is turned off, the value of the RWM 53 of the predetermined input port is updated to the latest state when the power is turned off. Therefore, after executing a predetermined input port reading process, an interrupt process is activated.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power return processing,
(1) In the program start processing of FIG. 185, if it is determined “No” in step S2103 (when the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal), or if there is an abnormality at the time of the checksum in step S2104, step S2106 The abnormal value is stored as the return data after the power is turned off. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S2109, the process proceeds to the setting change processing (FIG. 186) in step S2112.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 186, since “No” is determined in steps S2122 and S2128, the entire range inside and outside the use area of the RWM 53 is initialized, that is, in FIG. 182 and FIG. All data after “F000 (H)” and after “F200 (H)” are initialized.
In FIG. 183, addresses up to “F293 (H)” are displayed as addresses outside the use area of the RWM 53, but actually, addresses up to “F3FF (H)” are provided (see FIG. 124). When an unrecoverable error occurs, all of the addresses "F000 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" are initialized.

(2) In the program start processing, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value, and the checksum is normally performed, and when the processing proceeds to the setting change processing, the processing proceeds to steps S2122 and S2122 in FIG. Since “Yes” is determined in S2128, the process proceeds to step S2124 and step S2130, respectively, and the designated range of the RWM 53 (within and outside of the used area) is initialized. When the setting change mode normally starts, at least the address “F28E (H)” outside the used area is initialized. In particular, in the present embodiment, the address “F28A (H)” and subsequent addresses (including “F28A (H)”) outside the used area are initialized.
Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off when the accessory ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number “3” is displayed before the setting change, and the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, In the ratio display, the display starts with the advantageous section ratio (initial ratio) corresponding to the ratio display number “1”, and the display switching time and the blinking switching time also start from the initial values.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, RWM initialization may not be performed on the ratio display number, and RWM initialization may be performed on the display switching time and the blinking switching time. Furthermore, when the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, the RWM initialization may not be performed for any of the ratio display number, the display switching time, and the blinking switching time.
In other words, the information related to the error system and the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 stored in the storage area of the RWM outside the used area are initialized, but the information related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is not initialized. It may be.

  (3) In the program start processing, when the power-off processing completed flag is determined to be a normal value, and the checksum is also normally performed, and when the setting change processing is not performed, the power supply return processing in step S2113 ( 187). In this case, in FIG. 187, if the set value is normal in step S2152, the initialization of the RWM 53 at the time of normal power-on (in the used area and outside the used area) is executed. This initialization is a process of initializing an unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, unlike when the setting is changed, for example, the power is turned off when the accessory ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number “3” is displayed, and when the power is turned on again, the power is turned off. In the ratio display after the power is turned on, the display starts with the accessory ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number “3”, and the display switching time and the blinking switching time are also restarted from the time before the power was turned off.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the RWM may be initialized including the ratio display number, as in the case of the setting change process. Alternatively, the RWM may not be initialized for the ratio display number, but the RWM may be initialized for the display switching time and the blinking switching time.
Furthermore, when the power is simply turned on, the process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 may not be performed.
As described above, when the ratio display number is initialized, the ratio display after the initialization starts from the advantageous section ratio of the ratio display number “1”. In addition, when the display switching time is initialized, in the ratio display after the initialization, the display for the first time is displayed for 5.0 seconds. Furthermore, when the blinking switching time is initialized, when the blinking is displayed in the ratio display after the initialization, the lighting is started. Thus, information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 without delay. Note that when the blink switching time is initialized, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether to start from lighting or to start from turning off (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, starting from lighting). Is set to).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) (step S2147 in FIG. 186) in the present embodiment. Then, during this main process, an interrupt process (FIG. 190) described later is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 188, in step S2171, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer indicates an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, a register value, an instruction process of a main process before an interrupt process, and the like) at the time of a power failure when a power failure occurs, The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S2172, a game start set process is performed. This processing is processing such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S2173, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time.
In the next step S2174, it is determined whether or not there is a bet medal based on the bet number read in step S2173.

If it is determined in step S2174 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2176. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on, and if it is on, a process of shifting to a setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S2176, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medal has been cleaned, determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, a process of updating soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1") a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range from “0” to “65535 (D)”. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2179. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2173. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number of the game, "No" is determined in the step S2178.

In step S2179, the process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change disable flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, and setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like.
In step S2180, the role lottery means 61 executes the role lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the lottery lottery is obtained in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations, using a role lottery table is performed.

In the next step S2181, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of the reel 31. In the next step S2183, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the lottery of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185. In step S2185, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S2186. If it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S2186, the display of the symbol is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a display error of a symbol has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2199. If it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2188. move on.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is performed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (a kicking symbol) that should not be displayed on the activated line is displayed, it is determined that the symbol is abnormal (“E5” error), and the process proceeds to step S2199. The unrecoverable error processing 1 (FIG. 136) is executed.

If it is determined in step S2187 that a display error has not occurred, and the flow advances to step S2188, a process of updating the number of payout medals is executed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 189 (a).
In the next step S2189, the payout means 67 pays out a medal corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S2190 to perform an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT). This processing is the same as the processing in step S2139 in FIG. 186. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 189 (b). In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing in steps S2190 and S2191, the interruption is prohibited immediately after the interruption.

In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This processing is the same as the processing in step S2156 in FIG. 187. Next, the process advances to step S2193 to execute a ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) (FIG. 191 described later). This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the above-mentioned use area (second program).
The ratio setting process, which will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191, is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, and the like to display five types of ratios. After proceeding to step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and interruption is permitted (restarted) in the next step S2195. In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited before execution.
Note that prohibiting the interrupt processing during the execution of the ratio setting processing is that if the interrupt processing is executed during the execution of the program outside the used area in the main processing, the program inside the used area and the program outside the used area will be interrupted. Are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the flow advances to step S2196 to perform a game end check process. In this process, a condition device (winning) flag is cleared. The process advances to step S2197 to perform an output request set at the end of the game and a control command set 1 in the next step S2198. These processes are the same as steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 186, and are the processes for setting the control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game is completed.
When the process in step S2198 ends, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 189 (a) is a flowchart showing the medal payout number update processing in step S2188 of FIG. 188.
First, in step S2211, medal payout number data is obtained. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination in step S2186 of FIG. 188, the number of medal payouts corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from a data table or the like.

  In the next step S2212, medal payout number data is stored. In this process, the medal payout number data acquired in step S2211 is saved (stored) in the address “F040 (H)” (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. Since the value of the medal payout number data is “0” at the time of the process of step S2211, a process of newly writing data is executed. For example, when winning one copy, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”. Note that whether or not to perform the process of step S2211 is optional when a winning combination having a medal payout is not won. For example, there are a method of skipping step S2211, and a method of executing the process of step S2211 and writing "0".

In the next step S2213, the medal payout number data buffer is stored. In this process, the medal payout number data acquired in step S2211 is saved (stored) in the address “F041 (H)” (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. As the value of the medal payout number data buffer remains the value written in the previous game, a process of writing (overwriting) the medal payout number (“0” when there is no medal payout) in the game is executed. .
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-described medal payout number updating process in FIG. 189 (a), the value of the medal payout number data stored in step S2212 is then changed to the medal payout (one medal) in FIG. Is decremented by "1" each time one medal is added or one medal is paid out (from the hopper 35), and becomes "0" at the end of medal payout. That is, in FIG. 188, in step S2189, when the medal payout number data is not “0”, one medal payout processing is continued, and when the medal payout number data becomes “0”, the medal payout processing ends. to decide.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer stored in step S2213 is maintained (not changed) until it is updated in the next game, that is, until the process in step S2213 is performed in the next game.

  Accordingly, in FIG. 188, in the ratio setting process of step S2193, the calculation of the ratio based on the medal payout number of the game is performed. However, after the process of step S2189, the medal payout number data is “0”. However, the medal payout number of the game cannot be read from the medal payout number data. For this reason, when only the medal payout number data is provided, it is necessary to execute the ratio setting process before the process of step S2188. On the other hand, if a medal payout number data buffer whose value is not decremented even by medal payout is provided, the medal payout number in the game can be read from the medal payout number data buffer even after the processing of step S2188. , The ratio setting process can be executed after the process of step S2188.

FIG. 189 (b) is a flowchart showing the interrupt waiting (C_INTR_WAIT) in step S2139 in FIG. 186 and step S2190 in FIG. 188.
First, in acquiring the interrupt counter value in step S2215, the interrupt counter value at the address “F001 (H)” is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in the two addresses “F001 (H)” and “F002 (H)”. However, in step S2215, the address “F001 ( H) ”is stored in the A register.

  Next, the process advances to step S2216 to determine whether or not the interrupt counter value (the value of the lower 8 bits stored in the address “F001 (H)”) has changed. Specifically, a process of subtracting the “interrupt counter value stored in the address“ F001 (H) ”” from the “A register value” is executed, and the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”). If there is, it is determined as “No”. Then, when it is determined that there has been a change, the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that there has been no change, the processing of step S2216 is continued.

In the main process of FIG. 188, if the interruption wait is executed in step S2190, the process proceeds to step S2191 after executing the interruption. Then, the next interrupt timing does not arrive until 2.235 ms has elapsed from that moment. Here, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the processing time from when the interrupt is executed in step S2190 until the process proceeds to step S2195 is set to be less than 2.235 ms. Therefore, after the interruption is executed in step S2190, the next interruption is executed in step S2195 and thereafter.
With this setting, the interrupt timing after step S2195 does not change with respect to the interrupt timing until step S2190.
On the other hand, if 2.235 ms elapses from the time when the interrupt was executed in step S2190 and before proceeding to step S2195, the interrupt timing arrives in a state where the interrupt is prohibited. In this case, after the interruption is permitted in step S2195, the interruption occurs. Therefore, the interrupt timing after step S2195 may be different from the interrupt timing before step S2190.
Also, in the main processing of FIG. 188, even when the process proceeds to step S2191 without executing the interrupt waiting of step S2190, the interrupt timing up to now may come before the interrupt is permitted in step S2195. As described above, the interrupt timing after step S2195 may be different from the interrupt timing before step S2191 as described above.

FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a modification of FIG. 133 shown in the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 190, the same processes as those in FIG. 133 are denoted by the same step numbers, and description thereof will be omitted. Further, different steps from those in FIG. 133 are assigned different step numbers, and different step numbers are underlined.
FIG. 190 is different from the flowchart of FIG. 133 in that the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 is provided. Others are the same as the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 190, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, after the output of the external signal in step S1416, the process proceeds to step S2221 to execute ratio display preparation processing. This process is a process of FIG. 206 described later, and is a process of generating a blinking request flag, updating a timer related to the ratio display, outputting segment data, and the like. The ratio display preparation process is a process executed outside the used area (second program), similarly to the above-described ratio setting process.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) in step S2193 in FIG. 188.
First, in the stack pointer evacuation in step S2231, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address “F293 (H)”).
As described above, the ratio setting process is a program executed outside the used area. Therefore, when a program outside the used area is executed, the stack pointer is saved, and the ratio set processing is executed within the used area (first program). Returns the stack pointer when returning to.

The “stack area” refers to an area of the RWM 53 in which various registers and a return address of a program can be saved (stored). The stack area holds data in a last-in first-out structure.
The “stack pointer” is one of the types of registers that hold data, and is also called an SP register. The stack pointer is for holding an address of a position recently referred to in the stack area. When data is stored in the stack area, the value of the stack pointer is increased by the amount of the data, and is decreased by that amount when the data is taken out.

For example, when the stack pointer indicates “F200 (H)”, data is saved to “F1FF (H)” in the stack area.
In particular, in the process of step S2231, after executing the ratio setting process, a "return address" indicating which program should be executed is stored in the stack area, and the stack pointer is temporarily stored in the stack pointer to obtain the return address. This is a process of storing in the storage buffer 2.

In the next step S2232, a stack pointer (out of the used area) is set. This processing is to store “F400 (H)” in the stack pointer (SP register).
The data stored in the RWM 53 can be updated in the storage area of the RWM 53 outside the used area by the processing by the program outside the used area.
In other words, the stack area in which registers and return addresses are saved by processing by programs outside the used area and the stack area in which registers and return addresses are saved by processing by programs in the used area have different addresses.
In the present embodiment, the stack area in the used area is set at addresses “F1C0 (H)” to “F1FF (H)”. The stack area outside the used area is set at addresses “F3EC (H)” to “F3FF (H)”.

In the next step S2233, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, the flow advances to step S2234 to set the upper address of the RWM 53 in the Q register. This process is a process of storing “F2 (H)” in the Q register.
This processing is performed because the addresses of the RWM 53 used in the ratio setting processing are all addresses starting with “F2 (H)”, so that the updating of the address of the RWM 53 and the like and the instruction of the reading processing can be simplified. That's why.

In the next step S2235, a counter upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 192 described later, and the count value of the total game number counter (address “F26D (H)”) and the total payout (cumulative) counter (address “F27C (H)”) reaches the upper limit. This is a process of checking whether or not the process is performed (details will be described later).
After the execution of this processing, the address (F28B (H)) of the RWM 53 that stores the total payout (total) counter value or the count upper limit flag indicating whether the total game number counter value has reached the upper limit value is set. Stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2236, and it is determined whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on. This determination is “Yes” when the D0 bit of the data (count upper limit flag) stored at the address (F28B (H)) indicated by the HL register value is “1”. When it is determined that the game number upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2239, and when it is determined that the game number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2237. In other words, when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the counting process regarding the number of games in steps S2237 and S2238 is not executed.
In step S2237, a game frequency count (S_GAME_CNT) (FIG. 193) is executed. In the next step S2238, an advantageous section game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT) (FIG. 195) is executed. The details of the processing of the game number count and the advantageous section game number count will be described later. In the game number count, processing for adding each game “1” is executed. In addition, in the advantageous section game number count, a process of adding each game “1” during the advantageous section is executed.

  In the next step S2239, the payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) (FIG. 196) is executed. Further, in the next step S2240, the number of paying out bonus articles (S_BNSPAY_CNT) (FIG. 199) is executed, and in the next step S2241, the number of paying out consecutive bonus articles (S_RBPAY_CNT) (FIG. 200) is executed. These processes are for updating the total number of payouts, the number of payouts when the accessory is activated, and the number of continuous bonuses, respectively, and will be described in detail later.

Next, the flow advances to step S2242 to update the 400 game counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the 400 game counter (F210 (H)) is stored in the HL register. Specifically, "10 (H)" is stored in the L register, and data (F2 (H)) set in the Q register (described above) is stored in the H register.
(2) “1” is added to the data stored at the address (F210 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
This addition is an addition that circulates from "0" to "399 (D)". For example, when "399 (D)" is stored, adding "1" results in "0". . As described above, the 400 game counter may be subtracted.

Next, the flow advances to step S2243 to execute ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 202). This process is a process of calculating the above-described five ratios and storing the calculated ratio at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Details of this processing will be described later.
Next, the flow advances to step S2244 to execute ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) (FIG. 205). This process determines whether 400 games have elapsed since the last update of the ring buffer number, and updates the ring buffer number when it is determined that the elapsed time has elapsed. Details of this processing will be described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2245 to restore the register. This process is a process of restoring the various registers saved in step S2233.
In the next step S2246, the stack pointer is restored. This processing is to store the stack pointer saved in step S2231, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in step S2235 in FIG.
First, in step S2251, data for the number of repetitions and a count upper limit flag are set. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored in the B register and “0” is stored in the C register. The reason why “2 (H)” is stored in the B register is that the upper limit of the two counters of the total number of games and the total payout (total) is checked in the count upper limit check. This is to set “2”.

In step S2252, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is to store “F27C (H)”, which is the address of the total payout (cumulative) counter, in the HL register.
As described above, the total payout (total) counter is composed of 3 bytes, and “F27C (H)” is the first lower byte (first digit), and “F27D (H)” is the lower 2 bytes. The first (second digit) and “F27E (H)” store the data of the first byte (third digit). Then, in this step S2252, the address “F27C (H)” of the first lower byte is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2253 to acquire the lower 2 bytes of the target counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) The result of adding "1" to the HL register value is set as the HL register value.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the D register.
(4) The result of adding “1” to the HL register value is set as the HL register value.
By these processes, the lower two bytes of the total payout (total) counter (the number of repetitions "1") or the total number of games counter (the number of repetitions "2") are stored in the DE register.
(4) Based on the operation result, the HL register stores the address where the data of the first byte of the total payout (total) counter or the total number of games counter is stored.

In the next step S2254, the upper byte of the target counter is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2255, an upper limit value check is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) “1” is added to the DE register value, and the added result is used as the DE register value. As described above, since the lower two bytes of data are stored in the DE register, if an overflow occurs when "1" is added, the carry flag becomes "1".
(2) The result of adding the value of the carry flag to the A register value is stored in the A register. When an overflow occurs in the A register as a result of this operation, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "0" as a result of the operation (1), the A register value does not change.

In the next step S2256, the data for the count upper limit flag is updated. This processing is to rotate the carry flag (CY) and the data stored in the C register to the left. Specifically, the value of the carry flag becomes the value of the D0 bit, and the values of the D0 to D6 bits so far become the values of the D1 to D7 bits, respectively.
An example is as follows.
Example 1)
When carry flag = “0” and C register = “00000000 (B)”,
C register = "00000000 (B)"
Becomes
Example 2)
When carry flag = “0” and C register = “00000001 (B)”,
C register = "00000010 (B)"
Becomes
Example 3)
When carry flag = “1” and C register = “00000000 (B)”,
C register = "00000001 (B)"
Becomes
Example 4)
When carry flag = “1” and C register = “00000001 (B)”,
C register = “0000011 (B)”
Becomes

In the next step S2257, the address of the RWM 53 of the total game number counter corresponding to the number of repetitions “2” is set. This process is a process of storing, in the HL register, an address “F26D (H)” at which the data of the least significant digit is stored among the addresses of the total game number counter.
Next, the flow advances to step S2258 to determine whether or not the number of repetitions has been completed. In this process, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether the B register value is “0”. If it is "0", it is determined that the repetition has been completed.
In the first step S2251, "2 (H)" is set as the B register value, so the first time is "No" in step S2258, and the process returns to step S2253. By this processing, the upper limit of the total payout (total) counter is checked at the repetition number “1”, and the upper limit of the total game number counter is checked at the repetition number “2”. Note that the address of the RWM 53 of the total game number counter is also set in step S2257 at the repetition number “2”. However, since the repetition number “2” is “Yes” in the determination of step S2258, the upper limit of the total game number counter is not checked again.

If it is determined in step S2258 that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2259. In step S2259, the count upper limit flag is stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored in the C register at the address indicated by the HL register value.
By this processing, the data of the count upper limit flag is updated.
When the D0 bit of the count upper limit flag is “1”, it indicates that the total game number counter has reached the upper limit value.
When the D1 bit of the count upper limit flag is “1”, it indicates that the total payout (cumulative) counter has reached the upper limit value.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the number-of-games count (S_GAME_CNT) in step S2237 in FIG.
First, in step S2271, the address of the RWM 53 of the game number counter is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F26D (H)) at which the total game number counter is stored in the DE register.
In a next step S2272, an addition value "1" is set. This process is a process of storing “1” in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2273 to perform count up (S_CNT_UP). This process is not limited to the number of games count according to the present flowchart, but may include other count processes (advantage section game count (S_ATGAME_CNT), payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT), payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET), and bonus item count ( S_BNSPAY_CNT) and the number of consecutive bonus article payouts (S_RBPAY_CNT)).
This count-up is a process of determining whether or not the count upper limit has been reached and, if it has been determined that the upper limit has been reached, generating an upper limit buffer (FIG. 194 described later). By the count-up in step S2273, the total game number counter value is incremented by "1". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the count-up (S_CNT_UP) in step S2273 and the like in FIG. 193.
This process is executed by storing the address of the RWM 53 to be added in the DE register, and storing the added value “1”, the medal payout number buffer, or the payout number upper limit buffer in the A register. Under the circumstances.
First, in step S2281, lower 2 bytes are added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the C register.
(2) The data at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the B register.
Note that even if the process of (2) is executed, the DE register value is the same value as in (1).
In addition, the lower two bytes of data are stored in the BC register by the processes (1) and (2).
(3) Add the A register value to the BC register value.
Here, the A register value differs depending on which module is called. When the digits overflow due to the addition processing, the carry flag is set to "1".
(4) Store the BC register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2282, and it is determined whether there is any carryover. In this process, when the carry flag = “1” as a result of the calculation in step S2281, it is determined that there is a carry. When it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2283, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2283, upper one byte addition processing is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the data of the upper byte when an overflow occurs in “addition of lower 2 bytes” in step S2281. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value obtained by adding “1” to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) The value obtained by adding “1” to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
That is, the DE register value becomes “+2” by the processes (1) and (2).
In other words, of the data composed of 3 bytes, data indicating the address where the data of the upper byte is stored is stored in the DE register.
(3) "1" is added to the data at the address indicated by the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value to update the data at the address.
When overflow occurs due to this addition, the upper 1 byte value is “0” (FF (H) +1 (H) = 0 (H), zero flag = “1”).

  In the next step S2284, it is determined whether the count has exceeded the upper limit value. Here, when the zero flag is set to "1" in step S2283 (at the time of digit overflow), it is determined that the count upper limit value has been exceeded. If it is determined that the count has exceeded the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S2285, and if it is determined that the count has not exceeded the upper limit value, the process of this flowchart ends.

In the count-up during the counting of the number of games in FIG. 193, it is not determined in step S2284 that the count has exceeded the upper limit value.
In the count-up of the number of games, "1" is added for each game until the number of games reaches 3 bytes. Until the three-byte full is reached, it is determined as “No” in step S2284, so that the processing after step S2285 is not executed.
Then, in the case where the total game frequency counter value becomes 3 bytes full in the game frequency count of the game, in the next game ratio setting process (FIG. 191), the game frequency upper limit flag is stored in the count upper limit check in step S2235. You. Then, in the next step S2236, it is determined that the number-of-games upper-limit flag is ON, and thus steps S2237 and S2238 are not executed.

In step S2285, the upper one byte is subtracted. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value and updating the data at the address.
That is, this is a process of performing “0” − “1” and storing “FF (H)”.
In the next step S2286, a payout number upper limit buffer is generated.
Here, the "payout number upper limit buffer" is a storage area for storing a value to be added to the total payout (total).
Hereinafter, description will be given by taking an example.
Example 1)
When the total payout (cumulative) is “000010 (H)” and eight winning combinations are awarded (paid out), even if “8 (H)” is added to the total payout (cumulative), “ Since “FFFFFF (H)” (3 bytes full) is not reached, “8 (H)” is stored in the payout amount upper limit buffer.
Example 2)
When the total payout (cumulative) is “FFFFFE (H)” and eight winning combinations are awarded (paid out), when “8 (H)” is added to the total payout (cumulative), “FFFFFF ( H) ”. Specifically, an overflow occurs, and the result is “000006 (H)”.
In such a case, “1 (H)” is stored in the payout amount upper limit buffer so that the value after the addition becomes “FFFFFF (H)”.

The payout number upper limit buffer generation executes the following processing.
(1) A value obtained by subtracting “1” from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) A value obtained by subtracting “1” from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
By the processes (1) and (2), the address of the least significant byte of the data composed of 3 bytes is stored in the DE register.
(3) Add “1” to the C register value.
The process in step S2286 is performed when it is determined in step S2284 that the count has exceeded the upper limit value, that is, when the data composed of 3 bytes exceeds “FFFFFF (H)”. At this time, the value that has overflowed from “FF (H)” is stored in the C register by the arithmetic processing in step S2281. Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1)
When the A register value (for example, “08 (H)”) is added when the C register value is “FE (H)”, the C register value becomes “06 (H)”. Then, since “1 (H)” is added to the C register value by this processing, the C register value becomes “07 (H)”.
Example 2)
When the A register value (for example, “08 (H)”) is added when the C register value is “F9 (H)”, the C register value becomes “01 (H)”. Then, since “1 (H)” is added to the C register value by this processing, the C register value becomes “02 (H)”.

(4) The C register value is subtracted from the A register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the A register. Thus, the A register value becomes data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1)
When the A register value is "08 (H)" and the C register value is "07 (H)", "01 (H)" is stored in the A register.
Example 2)
When the A register value is “08 (H)” and the C register value is “02 (H)”, “06 (H)” is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2287, the lower 2 byte upper limit value is stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) “FFFF (H)” is stored in the BC register.
(2) Store the BC register value at the address indicated by the DE register.
By these processes, the data of the RWM 53 composed of 3 bytes becomes “FFFFFF (H)”.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section game number count (S_ATGAME_CNT) in step S2238 in FIG.
First, in step S2291, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section. Here, the address (F020 (H)) of the game section flag is stored in the DE register, and when the bit (D0) corresponding to the advantageous section is determined to be “1” in the data stored at the address, Is determined to be in the advantageous section. If it is determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S2292. If it is determined that the vehicle is not in the advantageous section, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In addition to the above, as a method of determining whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section, a method using an advantageous section counter (F024 (H)) can be considered.
As described above, the advantageous section counter is composed of 2 bytes (“F024 (H)” and “F025 (H)”) and stores data of “0” to “1500 (D)”.
Here, the advantageous section counter is a counter that is updated at least after the processing of the advantageous section game number count, and can be either an addition method or a subtraction method.
At this time, when the advantageous section counter is not “0”, it can be determined that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.
In the addition method, the advantageous section counter is updated from “0” to “1” before the start switch 41 is operated in the game that has been won in the advantageous section or in the next game of the game that has been won in the advantageous section. In the game in the advantageous section, “1” is added for each game. When the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization processing).

In the subtraction method, the advantageous section counter is updated from “0” to “1500” before the start switch 41 is operated in the game that has been won in the advantageous section or in the next game of the game that has been won in the advantageous section. In addition, the game in the advantageous section subtracts “1” for each game. When the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization processing).
Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, whether or not the vehicle is in the advantageous section can be determined from the lighting state of the advantageous section display LED 77, so that the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 indicates “1” / off “0”. It is also possible to judge from the value of the storage area for storing data.

In step S2292, the address of the RWM 53 of the advantageous section game number counter is set. In this process, the DE register stores the address “F270” storing the data of the least significant digit of the advantageous section game number counter (F270 (H)).
In the next step S2293, the above-described count-up (S_CNT_UP) is performed.
When the count-up is executed, the A register stores the added value “1” set by the game count (S_GAME_CNT). By counting up in this step S2293, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is incremented by "1". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in step S2239 in FIG.
At the time when this flowchart is executed, the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register.
First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the payout amount upper limit flag is on. In this process, when the D1 bit of the data stored at the address (F28B (H)) indicated by the HL register value is “1”, it is determined that the payout amount upper limit flag is on.
If it is determined that the payout amount upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2305. If it is determined that the payout amount upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is a process of storing, in the DE register, an address (F27C (H)) storing the data of the least significant digit among the addresses of the total payout (total) counter.
In the next step S2303, a payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET) is executed. This process is a process of FIG. 197 to be described later, and is a process of acquiring the number of payouts in the game and adding it to a total payout (cumulative) counter. By this processing, the payout number or the payout number upper limit buffer value is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter value.
The A register value may fluctuate due to the count up (S_CNT_UP) during the payout number setting.
In the next step S2304, the payout number upper limit buffer is set. This process is for storing the A register value in the payout number upper limit buffer (F28C (H)). Here, in the processing of step S2303, if the number of payouts in the game does not exceed the upper limit (3 bytes full) of the total payout even when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, the number of payouts in the game is paid out It is set in the number upper limit buffer. On the other hand, when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, if the total payout exceeds the upper limit, the added value for the total payout (cumulative) counter value to become 3 bytes full is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer. set.

Next, in step S2305, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing, in the DE register, the address (F213 (H)) storing the lower-order digit data among the addresses of the RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer 0.
In the next step S2306, a ring buffer set (S_RINGNO_SET) is executed. This process is a process of FIG. 198 described later, and is a process of acquiring a ring buffer number and the like.

Then, the process advances to step S2307 to set the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (6000 times) counter. This process is a process of storing, in the DE register, the address (F273 (H)) that stores the data of the lower order digit among the addresses of the total payout (6000 times) counter. Next, the process proceeds to step S2308 to execute the above-described count up (S_CNT_UP). By the processing in step S2308, the A register value is added to the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Note that the A register value here is the value (medal payout of the address “F041 (H)”) set in the payout number set (step S2333 in FIG. 198) in the ring buffer set (FIG. 198 described later) in step S2306. The number buffer value, for example, when a small win is won in the game, the payout number corresponding to the winning of the small win).
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As is apparent from FIG. 196, when the upper limit flag of the number of payouts is on, the total payout (cumulative) counter is not updated, but the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated.
Similarly, in FIG. 199 which will be described later, when the upper limit flag of the number of payouts is on, the update of the bonus (payment) counter is not performed, but the counter of the bonus (6,000 times) is updated.
Further, similarly, in FIG. 200 described later, when the upper limit flag of the number of payouts is on, the continuous bonus article payout (total) counter is not updated, but the continuous bonus article payout (6000 times) counter is updated. .

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the payout number set (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in step S2303 and the like in FIG. 196.
First, in step S2321, the value of the medal payout number buffer is obtained. This processing is for storing data stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) in the A register.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2322 to perform a count-up (S_CNT_UP), and thereafter, ends the processing according to the present flowchart.
Therefore, during the counting of the number of payouts in FIG. 196, if the number of payouts is set in step S2303, the total payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the ring buffer set (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2306 and the like in FIG. 196.
At the time of execution of this flowchart, the DE register has the address (F213 (H)) of the total payout ring buffer 0, the address (F231 (H)) of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer 0, or the address of the bonus payout ring buffer 0. (F24F (H)) is stored.
First, in step S2331, a ring buffer number is obtained. This process is a process of acquiring data from the address (F212 (H)) where the ring buffer number is stored and storing the data in the A register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2332 to set the address of the RWM 53 of the corresponding ring buffer. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The A register value and the A register value are added, and the added result is stored in the A register. That is, the process is to double the ring buffer number. The reason for doubling is that each ring buffer is composed of 2 bytes.
(2) The A register value is added to the DE register value, and the result of the addition is stored in the DE register. By this processing, the address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored in the DE register.
Therefore, the address of the ring buffer 0 is set first, and the address of the corresponding ring buffer is obtained using the ring buffer number as an offset value.

For example, when the data stored in the DE register is “F213 (H)” and the data stored in the ring buffer number is “8 (H)”,
F213 (H) +8 (H) +8 (H) = F223 (H)
The address (F223 (H)) of the RWM 53 corresponding to the total payout ring buffer 8 is stored in the DE register.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S2333 to perform a payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET). This processing corresponds to the processing in FIG. 197 described above. With the payout number set, the payout number for the game is added to the corresponding ring buffer set in step S2332. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the count of the number of payouts of the accessory in step S2240 in FIG. 191 (S_BNSPAY_CNT).
Note that the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when this process is executed.
First, in step S2341, it is determined whether the accessory is in operation. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the operation state flag (F010 (H)) is stored in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and “00001000 (B)”, and when it is “0”, it is determined that the accessory is not operating. In this embodiment, only the RB is provided as the accessory, so when the RB is operating (D3 bit is “1”), it is determined that the accessory is operating, and otherwise, the accessory is not operating. to decide.
If it is determined in step S2341 that the accessory is in operation, the flow advances to step S2342. If it is determined that the accessory is not in operation, the payout number when the accessory is activated does not need to be counted (updated). Is completed.

In step S2342, it is determined whether the payout amount upper limit flag is on. This processing determines whether or not the D1 bit of the data stored in the address (F28B (H)) indicated by the HL register value, that is, the address of the count upper limit flag is “0”. When it is determined, it is determined that the payout amount upper limit flag is ON.
If it is determined in step S2342 that the payout amount upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2346. If it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2343.
As described above, if it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2343 and the subsequent steps to update the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value, and to execute the steps in and after step S2346 to be described later. Proceeding to the processing, the relevant accessory payout ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2342 that the number-of-payouts upper limit flag is ON, the value of the bonus (paid) counter is not updated. The buffer value is updated.

In step S2343, the address of the RWM 53 of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter is set. In this process, the address “F282 (H)” at which the data of the least significant digit is stored in the address of the accessory payout (cumulative) counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2344, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. This process is a process of storing data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer (F28C (H)) in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2345 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). Here, the processing shown in FIG. 194 is executed. By this process, the accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2346, the address of the RWM 53 in the accessory payout ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F24F (H)) of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 in the DE register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2347 to perform a ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET). Here, the processing shown in FIG. 198 is executed.
As a result, the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) is added to the corresponding accessory payout ring buffer.

The A register value after the completion of the ring buffer setting becomes the value of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)).
The reason is that even if the count-up is executed, no carry-up is caused by the “lower 2 byte addition” processing in step S2281 in FIG. 194.
More specifically, since the address of one RWM 53 in the ring buffer can store data of 2 bytes (0 to 65535), even if there are 15 payouts in all 400 games, “15 × 400 = 6000” Because it does not exceed 2 bytes.

In the next step S2348, the address of the RWM 53 of the accessory payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the least significant digit address (F279 (H)) of the address of the accessory payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the DE register.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2349 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). The A register value at the time of executing the count-up becomes the value of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) as described in step S2347. The count-up updates the value of the counter for paying out the bonus (6000 times). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the count of the number of consecutive bonus articles to be paid out (S_RBPAY_CNT) in step S2241 in FIG.
Note that the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when this process is executed.
Note that the process of FIG. 199 described above is a process for an accessory, whereas the process of FIG. 200 is a process for a continuous accessory and is a similar process.
First, in step S2361, it is determined whether the RB operation is being performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the operation state flag (F010 (H)) is stored in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and “00000100 (B)”, and when it is “0”, it is determined that the RB is not operating.

As described in step S2341, the D3 bit of the operation state flag indicates the RB state. Therefore, by determining whether the bit is “1”, it is determined whether or not the continuous accessory is operating. Can be determined.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive payouts” refers to the “number of payouts during RB operation”, and includes the time of RB operation during one type of BB game.
If it is determined that the RB is operating, the process proceeds to step S2362, and if it is determined that the RB is not operating, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2362, it is determined whether the payout amount upper limit flag is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the address (F28B (H)) indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D1 bit of the data stored at the address of the count upper limit flag is “0”, and not “0”. In this case, it is determined that the payout amount upper limit flag is ON.
If it is determined in step S2362 that the payout amount upper limit flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S2366. If it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S2363.
As described above, when it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2363 and the subsequent steps, where the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated, and step S2366 and later described , The corresponding consecutive accessory payout ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2362 that the number-of-payouts upper limit flag is ON, the continuous-acquisition payout (cumulative) counter value is not updated. The payout ring buffer value is updated.

In step S2363, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous accessory payout (total) counter is set. Here, the address “F27F (H)” storing the lowest order data among the addresses of the continuous accessory payout (total) counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2364, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. Here, the data stored in the payout amount upper limit buffer (F28C (H)) is stored in the A register. The A register value (payout number upper limit buffer value) is the value of the number of payouts itself and the value corrected so that the total payout (cumulative) counter value does not exceed 3 bytes full as described above. With the case.
In the next step S2365, a count up (S_CNT_UP) (the processing in FIG. 194) is performed. By this process, the continuous accessory payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2366, the address of the RWM 53 in the continuous accessory delivery ring buffer is set. Here, the address (F231 (H)) of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 is stored in the DE register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2367 to perform a ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET). As a result, the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) is added to the corresponding consecutive accessory payout ring buffer.
The A register value after the execution of step S2367 is the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)).
The reason for this is similar to the above description, but it will be described again that, even if the count-up process is executed, no carry occurs due to the “lower 2 byte addition” process of step S2281 in FIG. 194. is there. This is because the address of one RWM 53 in the ring buffer can store 2 bytes of data, so that even if there are 15 payouts in all 400 games, it becomes "15 × 400 = 6000" and does not exceed 2 bytes. .

  In the next step S2368, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the address of the least significant digit “F276 (H)” of the address of the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to step S2369 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). As described in step S2349, the A register value at the time of executing the count-up is data of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)). By this count-up, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Next, the ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 in FIG. 191 will be described. This ratio calculation process is a process for calculating the five ratios (the ratios that need to be displayed due to rules) shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, for the advantageous section ratio, each game and calculation are performed.
As for the other ratios, addition to the ring buffer (total payout ring buffer, continuous accessory payout ring buffer, and accessory payout ring buffer) is exactly 400 games, and is added in the current game. When the ring buffer number to be added is “N” and the ring buffer number to be added from the next game is “N + 1” (however, when N = 14, “N + 1” = 0), the continuous character ratio (6000) ), The ratio of the accessory (6000 times), the ratio of the continuous accessory (cumulative), and the ratio of the accessory (cumulative).

First, the address table of the RWM 53 and the storage area of the ROM 54 used in the ratio calculation processing will be described.
FIG. 201A is a diagram showing a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 4B is a diagram showing a specific storage area (address and data) of the ROM 54.
As shown in FIG. 201A, the address table includes five tables starting with “DEFW”. The five address tables are address tables for the advantageous section ratio, the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), the bonus ratio (6000 times), the continuous bonus ratio (total), and the bonus ratio (total), respectively.
Each address table has a first group, a second group, and a third group.
The first group is a storage area for storing dividend data, the second group is a storage area for storing divisor data, and the third group is a storage area for storing ratio data.
Here, the relationship among the dividend, the divisor, and the ratio will be described again.
“Dividend” means a number that is divided when calculating a ratio, and “divisor” means a number that is divided when calculating a ratio. That is,
Dividend / divisor = ratio.

Then, for the five address tables, the data of the first to third groups are stored as shown in FIG. 201 (B).
As shown in FIG. 3B, the head address is “230B (H)”, and the addresses “230B (H)” to “2310 (H)” are storage areas for data of the advantageous section ratio. Addresses “2311 (H)” to “2316 (H)” are storage areas for data of the continuous character ratio (6000 times)..., Addresses “2323 (H)” to “2328 (H) ) "Is a storage area for the data of the accessory ratio (cumulative).
In each of these five storage areas, the storage areas of the first group (dividend) (for example, “230B (H)” and “230C (H)” in the advantageous section ratio) and the second group (divisor ) (For example, “230D (H)” and “230E (H)” for the advantageous section ratio), and the storage areas for the third group (ratio) (for example, “230F (H)” and “230F (H)” for the advantageous section ratio) “2310 (H)”).

Since the address of the RWM 53 is expressed by two bytes (for example, “F270 (H)”) and the address of the ROM 54 can store only one-byte data, the two addresses of the ROM 54 can be used. Is stored.
For example, in the address of the first group (dividend) of the advantageous section ratio, the data (F2 (H)) stored in “230C (H)” is higher, and the data (70) stored in “230B (H)” is higher. (H)) can be expressed as “F270 (H)”, which is a lower order.
In the RWM 53, the data outside the used area is an address starting from “F2 (H)”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 201B, the data corresponding to the upper part of the address is all “F2 (H)”.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 of FIG.
First, in step S2381, the number of calculations is set. This process is a process of storing “5” in the B register. Here, the number “5” is for executing five ratio calculation processes, and is decremented by “1” each time a process corresponding to one ratio calculation process ends.
After step S2381, the BC register value is saved in the stack area to protect the B register value, although not shown in this flowchart.

In the next step S2382, a calculation number is obtained. This processing is to store the B register value in the A register. That is, the calculation number = the number of calculations.
Here, the relationship between the calculation number (the number of calculations) and the corresponding ratio is as follows.
Calculation No. “5”: Ratio of bonuses (cumulative)
Calculation number "4": Consecutive character ratio (cumulative)
Calculation number "3": ratio of accessory (6000 times)
Calculation number "2": Ratio of continuous accessory (6000 times)
Calculation number "1": Advantageous section ratio

Next, the flow advances to step S2383 to determine whether or not the obtained calculation number is an advantageous section ratio calculation number. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the A register value (calculation number), and if the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that the number is the advantageous section ratio calculation number.
If it is determined in step S2383 that the number is an advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2385. If it is determined that the number is not an advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2384.
In step S2384, it is determined whether 400 games have elapsed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The 2-byte data stored in the 400 game counter (F210 (H)) is stored in the DE register.
(2) When the DE register value is “0”, it is determined that 400 games have elapsed.
If it is determined in step S2384 that 400 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2385, and if it is determined that 400 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2407. That is, only when it is determined that 400 games have elapsed (once every 400 games), the four ratios other than the advantageous section ratio are calculated.

In step S2385, a ratio calculation RWM address table is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) The HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting “6 (H)” from the head address (230B (H)) of the ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) in the ROM 54. That is, “2305 (H)” is stored in the HL register. This address is also referred to as a reference address because it becomes an address that becomes a reference for the subsequent program processing (arithmetic processing).
(3) The value obtained by multiplying the A register value by 6 is stored in the A register.
Here, any of “5 (H)”, “4 (H)”, “3 (H)”, “2 (H)”, and “1 (H)” is stored in the A register. This operation is performed in the state. Therefore,
6 times “5 (H)” → 1E (H)
6 times “4 (H)” → 18 (H)
"3 (H)" 6 times → 12 (H)
6 times “2 (H)” → C (H)
"1 (H)" 6 times → 6 (H)
Becomes

(4) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the first HL register value is “2305 (H)”. Therefore, the A register value obtained in (3) is added to “2305 (H)” and stored in the HL register. By this processing, the address of the ROM 54 in which the first group of addresses is stored is stored in the HL register.
In particular,
When 6 (H) is added → 230B (H)
When C (H) is added → 2311 (H)
When adding 12 (H) → 2317 (H)
When adding 18 (H) → 231D (H)
When adding 1E (H) → 2323 (H)
Becomes

Next, the flow advances to step S2386 to set a dividend RWM address. This processing is for storing the corresponding first group RWM address in the DE register from the HL register value. After this processing, the HL register value is updated to the address of the ROM 54 in which the address of the second group is stored.
Specifically, the following processing is performed in step S2386.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the result of the addition in the HL register.
(3) The data (F2 (H)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the D register.
By this processing, the following data (address) is stored in the DE register.
In step S2385, when “6 (H)” is added → F270 (H)
In step S2385, when “C (H)” is added → F276 (H)
In step S2385, when "12 (H)" is added → F27C (H)
At the time of adding "18 (H)" in step S2385 → F282 (H)
In step S2385, “1E (H)” is added → F288 (H)
(4) Add "1" to the HL register value and store the result of the addition in the HL register.
Here, the address of the ROM 54 in which the second group of addresses is stored is stored in the HL register. For this reason,
At the time of “230B (H)” before addition → “230D (H)” is stored in the HL register.
When “2311 (H)” before addition → “2313 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
When “2317 (H)” before addition → “2319 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
When “231D (H)” before addition → “231F (H)” is stored in the HL register.
When “2323 (H)” before addition → “2325 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Although not shown in the flowchart, a process of saving the HL register value in the stack area is executed to protect the HL register.

In the next step S2387, the lower two bytes of the dividend are obtained. Here, a process is executed in which the data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the C register, and the data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the DE register value is stored in the B register. As a result, the lower two bytes of data are stored in the BC register.
In the next step S2388, the highest one byte of the dividend is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add “1” to the DE register value and store the result of the addition in the DE register.
(2) Add “1” to the DE register value and store the result of the addition in the DE register.
That is, a process of setting the DE register value to “+2” is executed.
As a result, the DE register value becomes
F270 (H) → F272 (H)
F276 (H) → F278 (H)
F27C (H) → F27E (H)
F282 (H) → F284 (H)
F288 (H) → F28A (H)
Becomes
In other words, an address indicating the upper digit of each 3-byte data is stored.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
From the above, regarding the dividend,
The first digit of the 3-byte data is stored in the C register,
The second digit of the 3-byte data is stored in the B register,
The third digit of the 3-byte data is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2389, a calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) (FIG. 203 described later) is performed. In this process, in order to calculate the ratio, the dividend is multiplied by 10 and the divisor is obtained.
When calculating the ratio, when the divisor (the value of the denominator) is “0”, the divisor (the value of the denominator) is set to “0” when terminating the calculation value set so as not to execute the subsequent calculation processing. ", The zero flag is set to" 1 ".
In the next step S2390, it is determined whether or not there is a divisor. Here, as described above, when the zero flag = "1" in step S2389, it is determined that there is no divisor. When it is determined that there is no divisor, the process proceeds to step S2401, and when it is determined that there is a divisor, the process proceeds to step S2391.
Note that if the process proceeds to step S2391 (perform ratio calculation) without determining whether or not the divisor is included, an infinite loop is formed.

In step S2391, ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) (FIG. 204 described later) is performed. In this process, an operation is performed using each register set in the calculated value set in step S2389, and a tens value of the ratio is calculated based on the operation result.
Further, when it is determined from the result of this calculation that no carry-down is possible (the upper two bytes of the number to be divided are "0"), the zero flag is set to "1".
In the next step S2392, it is determined whether or not the carry-down is impossible, that is, whether or not the zero flag = "1" is obtained by the calculation in step S2391. When the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that the carry-down is impossible. When it is determined that the carry is not impossible, the process proceeds to step S2397, and when it is determined that the carry is not impossible (zero flag ≠ “1”), the process proceeds to step S2393.

In step S2393, an operation of adding the divisor lower order to the dividend lower order is executed. Here, the DE register value is added to the BC register value, and the result of the addition is stored in the BC register. When an overflow occurs due to the addition processing, the carry flag is set to "1".
This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring an amount that has been excessively subtracted in the operation of the lower digits by executing the ratio calculation. For example, in the process of subtracting the DE register value from the BC register value by executing the ratio calculation,
BC register value: 10 (H)
DE register value: 20 (H)
, The BC register value becomes “F0 (H)” by this processing.
When the ratio calculation process is completed in this state,
BC register value (F0 (H)) + DE register value (20 (H)) = BC register value (10 (H)
By doing so, the BC register value can be restored.

In the next step S2394, it is determined whether there is a carry in the calculation in step S2393. In this processing, when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of adding the DE register value to the BC register value, it is determined that there is a carry. When it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2395, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S2396.
In step S2395, “1” is added to the upper two bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value.

Next, the flow advances to step S2396 to add the upper divisor to the higher dividend. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and storing the result of the addition in the HL register. This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring an excessively subtracted value in the operation of the upper digit by executing the ratio calculation (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process proceeds to step S2398.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2392 that no carry-down is possible, and the process proceeds to step S2397, the lower divisor is added to the lower dividend. This process is a process of adding the DE register value to the BC register value and storing the result of the addition in the BC register. This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring an amount that has been excessively subtracted in the operation of the lower digits by executing the ratio calculation (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process proceeds to step S2398.

In step S2398, the calculation result buffer is converted to the upper digit. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the L register value in the A register.
(2) The address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer is stored in the HL register.
(3) The upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value are exchanged. By this processing, the value executed in the ratio calculation processing is stored in the upper 4 bits. That is, in the calculation result buffer, bits D0 and D4, bits D1 and D5, bits D2 and D6, bits D3 and D7 are exchanged.
Specifically, when the data stored at the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value before the operation of (3) is “00000101 (B)”, the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are changed. After replacement, the HL register value becomes “01010000 (B)”.

  In this process, the value stored in the calculation result buffer (so-called tens value of the ratio) is stored in the upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) in step S2391 of the ratio calculation process. The value of the tens place becomes a value in the range of “00000000 (B)” to “000000010 (B)” when expressed in a binary number (the same applies to the value of the ones place). Therefore, the value falls within the range of 4 bits. Then, step S2400 (one's place ratio calculation) is executed while the value of the tens place of the ratio obtained by the processing of step S2391 is not cleared and stored in the calculation result buffer. Then, in step S2400, the first digit value of the calculated ratio is added to the value (tenth digit value of the ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer. As a result, in the calculation result buffer value, the upper 4 bits become a value indicating the tens place and the lower 4 bits become a value indicating the ones place. In addition, by adopting the above method, the same processing can be performed in the calculation of the tens place (step S2391) and the calculation of the ones place (step S2400).

Although not shown in the flowchart, the following processing is executed.
(1) A process for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area is executed.
(2) In order to protect the HL register value again, a process of saving the HL register value to the stack area is executed.

Next, in step S2399, a calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) is executed in the same manner as in step S2389, and in the next step S2400, a ratio calculation (S_CAL_EXE) is executed in the same manner as in step S2391. The first place of the ratio is calculated by the processing of steps S2399 and S2400. The first place of the ratio is stored in the lower 4 bits of the address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer.
In the next step S2401, a calculation result buffer is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In the next step S2402, the calculation result buffer is initialized. In this process, “0” is stored in the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
Here, although not shown in the flowchart, a process for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2403, a ratio data RWM address is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(3) The data at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
By this processing, the address of the ROM 54 storing the third group of addresses is stored in the HL register.
The process advances to step S2404 to determine whether the calculated ratio is “100%”. In this processing, the processing of subtracting “A0 (H)” from the A register value is performed, and when there is a carry (carry flag = “1”), it is determined that the ratio is not “100%”. When it is determined that the ratio is “100%”, the process proceeds to step S2405, and when it is determined that the ratio is not “100%”, the process proceeds to step S2406. In other words, when the value of the A register is “A0 (H)”, it indicates that the calculation result (ratio) is 100%.

In step S2405, “99%” is set as the ratio. In this process, the value of the A register is updated (stored) from “A0 (H)” to “99 (H)”.
When the winning section is won, the advantageous section starts from the next game, so that the advantageous section ratio does not actually become 100%. On the other hand, the other four ratios may be 100%. However, if the (same) program in FIG. 202 including the calculation of the advantageous section ratio is used, the program for the ratio setting process can be reduced to one.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2406, where the ratio data is stored. This processing is to store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. As described above, one of the addresses of the third group is stored in the HL register value at this time. Specifically, when the advantageous section ratio is calculated, “F285 (H)” is stored in the HL register, when the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times) is calculated, “F286 (H)” is stored in the HL register. When calculating the accessory ratio (6000 times), the HL register indicates “F287 (H)”. When calculating the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the HL register indicates “F288 (H)”. When the ratio (cumulative) is calculated, “F289 (H)” is stored in the HL register. In other words, the process stores the ratio data at the target RWM address.
Although not shown in the flowchart, a process for restoring the BC register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2407, it is determined whether or not the calculation has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
When the BC register value stored in the stack area is restored, the BC register value becomes a value saved after step S2381.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is not “0”, it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed.
If it is determined that the number of calculations has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is ended. If it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed, the process returns to step S2382.
Through the above processing, when the vehicle is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is calculated. In addition, even though it is not in the advantageous section, when 400 games have elapsed, four ratios of a continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), a bonus ratio (6000 times), a continuous bonus ratio (total), and a bonus ratio (total) are calculated. (Steps S2382 to S2407 are repeated four times).

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) executed in steps S2389 and S2399 in FIG.
In this calculated value set, although not shown in this flowchart, first, the data (ratio calculation RWM address table) currently stored in the HL register is saved in the stack area to protect it.
Also, in the following description, the description overlaps with the above description, but when described again,
Dividend: number divided by division (so-called numerator value)
Divisor: Number to divide by division (so-called denominator value)
1st byte of dividend: 1st digit (least significant digit) (C register)
Dividend 2nd byte: 2nd digit (B register)
Third byte of dividend: Third digit (most significant digit) (A register)
Point to.
In this calculated value set, a process of increasing the dividend to be calculated by a factor of 10 and a process of setting the divisor are performed.
Here, as a specific example, a description will be given below assuming that "FE (H)" is stored in the C register, "40 (H)" is stored in the B register, and "01 (H)" is stored in the A register. Note that this numerical value is expressed in decimal notation.
254 (D) +16384 (D) +65536 (D) = 82174 (D)
Is equivalent to

In step S2411, a process of multiplying the third byte of the dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the third byte of the dividend is stored in the A register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the A register value by 10 and store the result of the multiplication by 10 in the HL register.
(2) Exchange the HL register value and the DE register value.
As a result, data obtained by multiplying the data of the third byte by 10 is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, “000A (H)” obtained by multiplying “01 (H)” by 10 is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, “00 (H)” is stored in the D register, and “0A (H)” is stored in the E register.
In the next step S2412, a process of multiplying the second byte of the dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the second byte of the dividend is stored in the B register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) Multiply the A register value by 10 and store the result of multiplication by 10 in the HL register.
In the above example, “0280 (H)” obtained by multiplying “40 (H)” by 10 is stored in the HL register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the H register, and "80 (H)" is stored in the L register.

In the next step S2413, a process of multiplying the first byte of the dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the first byte of the dividend is stored in the C register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the C register value in the A register.
(2) Exchange the HL register value and the BC register value.
Here, as a result of the processing in step S2412, data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register. As a result, data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the BC register.
In the above example, “0280 (H)” is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, “02 (H)” is stored in the B register, and “80 (H)” is stored in the C register.
(3) Multiply the A register value by 10 and store the result of multiplying by 10 in the HL register.
Here, the A register value before this processing is the data of the first byte of the dividend. Therefore, by this processing, data obtained by multiplying the data of the first byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register.
In the above example, “09EC (H)” obtained by multiplying “FE (H)” by 10 is stored in the HL register.
More specifically, “09 (H)” is stored in the H register, and “EC (H)” is stored in the L register.

Proceeding to the next step S2414, the carry value of the first byte is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the H register value in the A register.
(2) Perform an operation of adding the BC register value and the A register value, and store the operation result in the BC register.
In the above example, an operation of adding “0280 (H)” and “09 (H)” is performed. Therefore, “0289 (H)” is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, “02 (H)” is stored in the B register, and “89 (H)” is stored in the C register.
In the next step S2415, the carry value of the second byte is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the B register value in the A register.
(2) An operation of adding the DE register value and the A register value is performed, and the operation result is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, an operation of adding “000A (H)” and “02 (H)” is performed. Therefore, “000C (H)” is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, “00 (H)” is stored in the D register, and “0C (H)” is stored in the E register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2416 to perform lower digit adjustment. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the C register value in the B register.
(2) Store the L register value in the C register.
In the above example, “89 (H)” is stored in the B register, and “EC (H)” is stored in the C register.
By these processes, the data after the dividend is multiplied by 10 becomes 4-byte data at the maximum. Then, the lower 2 bytes data multiplied by 10 are stored in the BC register, and the upper 2 bytes data multiplied by 10 are stored in the DE register.
In the above example, “89EC (H)” is stored in the BC register, and “000C (H)” is stored in the DE register.
If this value is expressed in decimal number,
35308 (D) +786432 (D) = 821740 (D)
Becomes
Therefore, “82174 (D)” exemplified first is ten times as large.
Although not shown in the flowchart, the HL register stored in the stack area is restored.

Next, the flow advances to step S2417 to set a divisor RWM address. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
Here, the address of the ROM 54 in which the second group of addresses is stored is stored in the HL register. By this processing, the head address of the second group of RWM addresses is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S2418 to acquire the upper byte of the divisor. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “2” to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.

In the next step S2419, the lower 2 bytes of the divisor are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the L register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is stored in the H register.
(3) Exchange the HL register value with the DE register value.
As a result, the upper one byte of the divisor is stored in the A register, and the lower two bytes of the divisor are stored in the DE register.
The value originally stored in the DE register (the upper 2 bytes after multiplying the dividend by 10) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2420, it is determined whether or not the lower two bytes of the divisor are “0”. Here, it is determined whether or not the DE register value is “0”. When the DE register value is “0”, it is determined that the lower two bytes of the divisor are “0”. When it is determined that the lower two bytes of the divisor are not “0”, this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower two bytes of the divisor are “0”, the flow advances to step S2421.
In step S2421, the upper byte of the divisor is checked. In this process, an OR operation is performed on the A register value and the A register value, and when the operation result is “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”.
With the above calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET)
The lower 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 are stored in the BC register.
The upper 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 are stored in the HL register.
The upper one byte of the divisor is stored in the A register,
The lower two bytes of the divisor will be stored in the DE register.
When it is determined that the divisor is “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”.

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) executed in steps S2391 and S2400 in FIG. Before this ratio calculation is performed, the calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) described above is performed, and as described above,
BC register: Lower 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 HL register: Upper 2 bytes of the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 10 A register: Upper 1 byte of the divisor DE register: Executed with the lower 2 bytes of the divisor stored You.
In the execution of the ratio calculation, as described above, the divisor (X) is subtracted from the dividend (10 × Y) multiplied by 10, and if the divisor can be subtracted from the operation result, the divisor is subtracted again. By repeating that,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R) <X
"R" that satisfies is calculated.
Then, “R (the number of repetitions of subtraction (the ratio in that digit))” is stored in the calculation result buffer.

First, in step S2431, the lower divisor is subtracted from the lower dividend. In this process, the DE register value is subtracted from the BC register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the BC register. When a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, the carry flag becomes "1".
In the next step S2432, it is determined whether or not there is a borrow in the subtraction in step S2431. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that there is a carry. When it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2433, and when it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In step S2433, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the dividend are “0”. Here, it is determined whether or not the upper two bytes of the dividend are “0” by determining whether or not the HL register value is “0”. When it is determined that the upper two bytes of the dividend are “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. At this time, the process ends after storing the zero flag = “1”. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper two bytes of the dividend are not “0”, the flow advances to step S2434.
In step S2434, “1” is subtracted from the upper two bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
Next, the flow advances to step S2435 to subtract the upper divisor from the higher dividend. In this process, the A register value is subtracted from the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored in the HL register. If there is a carry as a result of this subtraction, the carry flag is set to "1".

The process advances to step S2436 to determine whether the calculation is completed. When the carry flag becomes “1” in step S2435, it is determined that the calculation is to be ended, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation is not to be ended (when the carry flag is “1”), the process proceeds to step S2437.
In step S2437, “1” is added to the calculation result buffer. This process is a process of adding “1” to the calculation result buffer (address “F28A (H)”). Then, the process returns to step S2431.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2244 of FIG. 191.
First, in step S2441, it is determined whether 400 games have elapsed since the previous 400 games have elapsed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the 400 game counter (address “F210 (H)”) is stored in the HL register.
(2) When the HL register value is “0” (when the second zero flag is “1”), it is determined that 400 games have elapsed.
When it is determined that 400 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2442, and when it is determined that 400 games have not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, the ring buffer updating process is executed once every 400 games.

In step S2442, the number of ring buffers is set. This process is a process of storing “3” in the B register. This “3” indicates that the number of ring buffers to be updated is three (total payout ring buffer, continuous handout payout ring buffer, and handout payout ring buffer).
In the next step S2443, the ring buffer number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address in which the ring buffer number is stored, that is, “F212 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This addition is an addition (ICPLD) that circulates from “0” to “14 (D)”. For example, if “14 (D)” is stored, adding “1” results in “0”. ".

After the process, although not shown in the flow chart, the following stack area is saved.
(1) To protect the current B register value (the number of ring buffers), the BC register value is saved in the stack area.
(2) In order to protect the current HL register value (ring buffer number), the HL register value is saved in the stack area.

In the next step S2444, the number of ring buffers is set. This processing is to store the B register value in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2445 to generate an offset of the corresponding ring buffer. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the A register value by “30 (D)” and store the result of the multiplication in the A register.
(2) The A register value is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the added result is stored in the A register.
(3) The A register value is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the added result is stored in the A register.
By these operations, an offset value for calculating the RWM address of the ring buffer can be obtained.
Note that the multiplication number “30” in the above (1) indicates “the number of ring buffers (15) × the number of bytes per ring buffer (2)”. Further, as shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are provided with consecutive addresses. .
Thus, the offset values corresponding to the total payout ring buffer, the continuous accessory payout ring buffer, and the accessory payout ring buffer can be obtained by the same processing through the above operations (1) to (3).

Specific examples are as follows.
Example 1) When the ring buffer number is "0" and the number of ring buffers is "3"
Processing of (1): 3 × 30 = 90 (A register)
Process (2): 0 (ring buffer number) +90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Process (3): 0 (ring buffer number) +90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Example 2) When the ring buffer number is "1" and the number of ring buffers is "2"
Processing of (1): 2 × 30 = 60 (A register)
Processing of (2): 1 (ring buffer number) +60 (A register) = 61 (A register)
Processing of (3): 1 (ring buffer number) +61 (A register) = 62 (A register)
Example 3) When the ring buffer number is "10" and the number of ring buffers is "1"
Processing of (1): 1 × 30 = 30 (A register)
Processing of (2): 10 (ring buffer number) +30 (A register) = 40 (A register)
Process (3): 10 (ring buffer number) +40 (A register) = 50 (A register)
Becomes

Next, the flow advances to step S2446 to set the RWM address of the corresponding ring buffer. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) “F1F5 (H)” is stored in the DE register.
(2) The A register value is added to the DE register value, and the result of the addition is stored in the DE register.
A specific example of the above processing is as follows.
Example 1) When “90 (D) (5A (H))” is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 5A (H) = F24F (H)
As a result, the leading address of the accessory payout ring buffer 0 is obtained.
Example 2) When “62 (D) (3E (H))” is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 3E (H) = F233 (H)
As a result, the leading address of the continuous bonus delivery ring buffer 1 is obtained.
Example 3) When "50 (D) (32 (H))" is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) +32 (H) = F227 (H)
Thus, the head address of the total payout ring buffer 10 is obtained.
That is, the address “F1F5 (H)” becomes the reference address, and the value obtained in step S2445 becomes the offset value.

In the next step S2447, the RWM address of the payout (6000 times) counter is set. This processing is performed for the total payout (6000 times) counter (F273 (H)), the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter (F276 (H)), or the accessory payout (6000 times) counter (F279 (H)). This is a process of calculating any address. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store “F270 (H)” in the HL register.
(2) Store the B register in the A register.
Here, the number of ring buffers (any of “1” to “3”) is stored in the B register.
(3) Store data in the A register which is three times the value of the A register.
(4) Add the A register value to the HL register value and store the result of the addition in the HL register.

In the next step S2448, the lower 2 bytes of the payout counter are acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the C register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the B register.
In the next step S2449, the upper byte of the payout counter is obtained. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “2” to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
By the above processes (1) and (2), the lower two bytes of data are stored in the BC register and the upper one byte of data is stored in the A register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2450 to subtract the corresponding ring buffer from the lower 2 bytes of the payout counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and the HL register value. With this process,
DE register: Start address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter RWM address HL register: Stores the start address of the corresponding ring buffer.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the address stored by adding “1” to the HL register value are subtracted from the BC register value (lower 2 byte data of the payout (6000 times) counter). If a carry occurs as a result of the subtraction, the carry flag is set to "1".

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2451, and it is determined whether or not there is a carry. In the process of step S2450, when the carry flag becomes "1", it is determined that there is a carry.
If it is determined that there is a borrow, the process proceeds to step S2452. If it is determined that there is no borrow, the process proceeds to step S2453.
In step S2452, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the payout counter. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the A register value.

In the next step S2453, the corresponding ring buffer is cleared. In this process, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored at the address obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value are cleared.
That is, in step S2453, the information indicated by the address indicated by the DE register value and the information stored at the next address are cleared, and the information relating to the next game and thereafter is stored. Before clearing these information, the total payout (6000 times) counter (F273 (H)) and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are performed based on the information before clearing in steps S2448 to S2452. (F276 (H)) or the information of the accessory payout (6000 times) counter (F279 (H)).
In this way, when calculating the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter value, all of the 15 ring buffer values are added. It is only necessary to subtract the corresponding ring buffer value from the 6000 times counter value up to that point, instead of performing the calculation. Therefore, the processing time for calculating the counter value 6000 times can be reduced, and the program can be simplified.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2454, and the payout (6000 times) counter is stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and the HL register value. With this processing, the DE register stores the head address of the corresponding ring buffer, and the HL register stores the head address of the RWM address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter.
(2) Store the C register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
(3) Store the B register value at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value.
(4) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “2” to the HL register value.
Then, after this processing, although not shown in this flowchart, the following processing is executed in order to restore the value saved in the stack area to the original value.
(1) Perform processing for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area.
(2) A process for restoring the BC register value stored in the stack area is performed.

Next, the flow advances to step S2455 to determine whether or not the number of ring buffers has been reached. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the value of the B register is “0”, it is determined that the processing has been completed for the number of ring buffers.
When it is determined that the ring buffer numbers for the number of ring buffers have been updated, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing has not been completed for the number of ring buffers, the process returns to step S2444.
The processing up to the above is the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of FIG. 190 (interrupt processing).
First, in the stack pointer evacuation in step S2461, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address “F293 (H)”).
As described above, since the ratio display preparation is a program executed outside the used area, when the program outside the used area is executed, the stack pointer used in the first program is saved, and When returning to the used area (first program), the stack pointer is restored.

In the next step S2462, a stack pointer (out of the used area) is set. This processing is to store “F400 (H)” in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, the flow proceeds to step S2464, where a blinking request flag is generated (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 207 described later, and is a process of updating the blinking request flag (address “F28D (H)”).

In the next step S2465, a rate display timer is updated (S_RATE_TIME). This process is a process shown in FIG. 209 described later, and includes a blinking switching flag (address “F28F (H)”), a display switching time (address “F290”), and a blinking switching time (address “F292 (H)”). This is the process of updating.
In the next step S2466, a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 210 described below, and is a process of actually displaying (lighting or extinguishing) the ratio in the interrupt process. In the twentieth embodiment and the like, the ratio display processing in a case where the blinking is not considered has already been described (FIG. 135, etc.).

Next, the flow advances to step S2467 to restore the register. This process is a process of restoring the various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the stack pointer is restored. In this process, the stack pointer saved in step S2461, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 is stored in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the process causes the stap pointer to indicate an address in the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the blinking request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 in FIG. 206.
First, in step S2481, the number of repetitions and an initial value are set. This process is a process of storing “5 (H)” in the B register and “0” in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions “5” is a value for determining whether or not the ratio segment of five items blinks (see FIG. 184).
In the next step S2482, the address of the blinking / non-applicable item determination value table is set. This process stores the start address of the blinking / non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a blinking / non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). In this table, a predetermined value is defined for each of the ratios of the five items. For example, the advantageous section ratio of “70” means that when the advantageous section ratio is “70” or more, the display blinks (see FIG. 184).
Further, as shown in FIG. 208, the head address of this table is “2500 (H)”. Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

The “non-applicable item” indicates that the item does not have the performance of displaying the corresponding ratio. For example, when the gaming machine does not have an advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is not displayed. As described above, when there is a non-applicable item, “−−−” is displayed in the ratio segment of the advantageous section ratio.
In the present embodiment, since the advantage section and the continuous character are provided, the ratios of all the five items are displayed. Stores “DE (H)”.
For example, when the gaming machine does not have the advantageous section, “DE (H)” is stored in the address “2504 (H)” instead of “70 (H)” in FIG.
As described above, even if a gaming machine has no advantageous section (for example, a so-called A type or a so-called A + ART), the lighting control of the management information can be performed only by correcting a part of the data of the table. The control processing which enables is performed. Therefore, the control program can be easily applied to other products.
Note that, as described later, the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to “DE (H)”.

In the next step S2483, the RWM address of the ratio data is set. This process is a process of storing an address (F289 (H)) at which the accessory ratio (cumulative) data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2484 to acquire a blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) "1" is subtracted from the A register value.
In the next step S2485, it is determined whether or not the item value is not applicable. In this process, “DD (H)” is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In other words, when the item is a non-applicable item, as described above, since “DE (H)” is stored in the blinking / non-applicable item determination value table, “1” is subtracted from “DE (H)”. After that, if “DD (H)” is further subtracted, the value becomes “0”, and the zero flag becomes “1”.
When a predetermined value other than “DE (H)” is stored as a value corresponding to the non-applicable item, for example, “predetermined value−1− (predetermined value−1)” is calculated, and the calculation result is “0”. If (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
The "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the advantageous section, the ratio of the bonus (cumulative), and the ratio of the bonus (6000 times). In the case of the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), a value exceeding “60 (H)” may be used.
If it is determined that the value is not a non-applicable item, the process proceeds to step S2487. If it is determined that the value is not a non-applicable item, the process proceeds to step S2486.

In step S2486, ratio data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the ratio data or the non-corresponding item value is stored. This process stores the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This processing has the following meaning.
If there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the RWM in which the ratio data is stored before the storage processing. For example, when there is no advantageous section, “00 (H)” is stored in the advantageous section ratio data (address “F285 (H)”). Although details will be described later, when the ratio is displayed on the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored at the address. At this time, if “00 (H)” is stored in the advantageous section ratio data, “00” will be displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 when displaying the advantageous section ratio. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register (“DD (H)” in the present embodiment) acquired in step S2485 is stored as ratio data, whereby “−−” is displayed. Specifically, when the offset value is “D (H)”, the display data is “−” as shown in FIG. 127.
The program processing is set up so that a gaming machine having non-applicable items and a gaming machine having no non-applicable items can also be used in common.
In the next step S2488, a blink determination is made. This process is a process of subtracting the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a carry is found as a result of the calculation, the carry flag is set to "1".
As will be described later in detail, when the carry flag is set to “1”, it means that the item is lit without blinking when the item is displayed. When the carry flag is set to “0”, This means that the item is turned on in a blinking manner when the item is displayed.
Next, the flow advances to step S2489 to generate a blinking request flag. In this process, an arithmetic process for rotating the carry flag and the C register value to the left is performed.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is “CY” and the C register value is “D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0”,
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
To
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Is performed.
For example, if the C register value is the initial value “00000000 (B)” as shown in step S2481, and if the carry flag is “1” in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
To
“0”, C register value “00000001 (B)”
Is performed. Therefore, the C register value is “00000001 (B)”. This C register value finally becomes a blink request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking / non-applicable item determination value table. (Storage area).

In the next step S2490, the RWM address of the next ratio data is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. For example, the HL register value in the first flashing determination is “F289 (H)” (accessory ratio (cumulative) data) as described above. Here, when “1” is subtracted, the HL register value becomes “F288 (H)” (continuous character ratio (total) data), which is the object of the second flicker determination.
In the next step S2491, the address of the next blinking / non-applicable item determination value table is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" is stored as the DE register value first, the value becomes "2501 (H)" by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 208, the address is set in the order of the accessory ratio (cumulative), the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the accessory ratio (6000 times), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), and the advantageous section ratio. Blinking / non-applicable item determination values are stored in “2500 (H)” to “2504 (H)”.
Thereby, the initial value of the address (DE register value) of the blinking / non-applicable item determination value table is set to "2500 (H)", and "1" is added when the next blinking / non-applicable item is determined. (S2484 to S2492), the target address can be specified, so that the processing can be simplified.

Next, the flow advances to step S2492 to determine whether or not the repetition has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is not “0”, it is determined that the repetition has not been completed.
Here, since the B register value is set to “5” in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is “5”. If it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493. If it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, the blinking determination of five items is performed.

When the determination of the blinking of the five items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the total game number counter value is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the lower 2 bytes of the total game number counter (address “F26D (H)”) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the upper 1 byte of the total game number counter (address "F26D (H)") is stored in the A register.
As described above, the total game number counter is composed of 3 bytes, and “F26D (H)” is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
“F26E (H)” is a storage area for storing the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Further, “F26F (H)” is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, it is determined whether or not the upper one byte of the total game number counter is “0”. In this process, it is determined whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is “0”. If it is determined that the value is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, it is determined whether 6000 games have elapsed. In this process, “6000 (D)” is subtracted from the HL register value (lower 2 byte data of the total game number counter). As a result of the calculation, if there is a carry, the carry flag is set to "1". If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the 6000 game has not elapsed, and the flow advances to step S2497.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the 6000 game has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the flashing request flag data is updated. This process is a process of setting the D5 bit of the C register to “1”. Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the blinking request flag of the address “F28D (H)” (however, at this time, the bit is in an inverted state). Therefore, when the 6000 game has elapsed, a process of setting the D5 bit to “1” is executed.
In the next step S2497, it is determined whether or not the upper one byte of the total game number counter is “2” or more. Here, a process of subtracting “3” from the A register value is performed. If there is no borrow in this subtraction, carry flag ≠ “1”. When the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that the upper one byte of the total game number counter is “2” or more.

This is done by first comparing the upper one byte with “3” to determine whether or not the game has reached 175,000 games. Here, since “175000 (D)” is “2AB98 (H)” in hexadecimal, it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds “2” (A register value is “3” or more). Specifically, it can be seen that the value of the total game number counter exceeds “175000 (D)”.
If the carry flag is “1” in step S2497, it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total game number counter exceeds “2”, and the flow advances to step S2500. If the carry flag is “1”, the total It is determined that the upper one byte of the number-of-games counter does not exceed "2", and the flow advances to step S2498.

In step S2498, it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter is “2”. In this process, “2” is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that the value is not “0”, it is determined that the value of the total game number counter is not “2”. When it is determined that the total game number counter value is not “2”, the process proceeds to step S2501, and when it is determined that the total game number counter value is “2”, the process proceeds to step S2499.
In step S2499, it is determined whether 175,000 games have elapsed. In this process, "AB98 (H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and as a result of the operation, if a carry-down occurs, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500. If it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the flashing request flag data is updated. This process sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1". The D6 bit of the C register corresponds to the D6 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag at the address “F28D (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.
In step S2501, a blink request flag is generated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store “01111111 (B)” in the A register.
(2) The exclusive OR operation (XOR) of the A register value and the C register value is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S2501, “0” is stored in the blinking item (bit) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when 175,000 games have elapsed, the D6 bit is “1” as described above, in other words, when the 175,000 games have not elapsed, it is “0”.
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, the blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes “1”.
In the next step S2502, the blink request flag generated in step S2501 is stored. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the blink request flag (“F28D (H)”) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value (“F28D (H)”).
As a result, the item that blinks is “1”, and the item that does not blink is “0”. As described above, information corresponding to each bit is represented by “1” or “0”, and blinking request flags for seven items including whether to blink are stored in the address “F28D (H)”. .

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing update of the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
First, in step S2511, the display switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) In the HL register, an address storing the display switching time (“F290 (H)” which is the head address) is stored.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between “0” and “2144 (D)” when the display switching time is expressed in decimal.
Therefore, if the process is performed when the display switching time is “0”, “2144 (D)” (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
When “0” is set, the process is performed. When “2144 (D)” (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes “1”.
Since the interrupt process is performed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from “0” to “2144 (D)” approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes “1”.
As a result, the ratio display contents are switched about every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, it is determined whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is for determining whether or not the carry flag has been set to "1" in the process of step S2511. When the carry flag is set to "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513. If it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.
In step S2513, the blink switching time is stored. In this process, “134 (D) (86 (H))” is stored in the address (flashing switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding “2” to the HL register value (ie, “F292 (H)”).
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is stored. A time of “2.235 × 134 = 299.49 (ms)” is stored as the blinking switching time.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2514 to turn off the blinking switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (“F28F (H)”) of the blink switching flag in the HL register.
(2) “0” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switching flag is “0”, the data is turned on, and when the data is “1”, the data is turned off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes “0” (lighting).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515 to update the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 (“F28E (H)”) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In this process, a cyclic addition process for circulating the ratio display number between “0” to “5” is executed. Therefore, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is “5”, “0” is stored as the ratio display number. If the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than “5”, the carry flag becomes “1”.

In the next step S2516, it is determined whether or not the updated ratio display number is “0”. Here, when the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, when the ratio display number is “5”, the process of step S2515 is executed, and when the ratio display number becomes “0”, it is determined that the ratio display number is “0”.
If it is determined in step S2516 that the updated ratio display number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2517. If it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the ratio display number is corrected. This process is a process of adding “1” to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, when “0” is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to “1”. Thus, the ratio display number circulates from “1” to “5”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed, and the process advances to step S2518, the blink switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (“F292 (H)”) of the blinking switching time in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at the address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between “0” and “134 (D)” when the blinking switching time is represented by a decimal number.
Therefore, if the process is performed when the blinking switching time is “0”, “134 (D)” (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time.
When “0” is set, the process is performed. When “134 (D)” (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag is set to “1”.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2519, and it is determined whether or not the blinking switching time has elapsed. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1”. When the carry flag is “1”, it is determined that the blink switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520, and if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the processing in this flowchart ends.
In step S2520, the blink switching flag is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address (“F28F (H)”) of the blink switching flag in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the added result at the address.
In this process, a cyclic addition process for circulating the blinking switching flag between “0” and “1” is executed. Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching flag is “1”, “0” is stored as the blinking switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
In the twentieth embodiment to the twenty-fourth embodiment, the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in a case where the blinking is not considered has been described (FIGS. 135, 141, 150, and 159).
The twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 210 is a flowchart based on FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment. The difference from the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135) is that an underline is added below the step number in FIG. I'm pulling. The processing of the step numbers without underlining is the same as in the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135).

In FIG. 210, first, in step S1471, an LED display counter is obtained. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter and storing the value in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter value stored in the D register and “11111000 (B)”. If the result of the AND operation is not “0”, it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to the present flowchart ends. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is “0”, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the flow advances to step S1473.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter value stored in the D register is “0”. If it is determined to be “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1474, and if it is not “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (single digit) display request is set. As described in the twentieth embodiment, when the LED display counter is "00000000 (B)" (when the digit 9 signal is on), the D3 bit is assigned to the D3 bit to allocate the digit 9 signal. The digit data "00001000 (B)" set to "1" is created. In step S1474, this process is executed, and the digit data “00001000 (B)” is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.

In the next step S1475, a ratio display number (address “F28E (H)”) is obtained. In this process, a process of acquiring the ratio display number, storing it in the A register, and storing the A register value in the E register is executed.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of blinking bit inspections described later is determined. For example, an example is as follows.
Example 1)
The ratio display number is “1”: the number of times of the blinking bit inspection of the advantageous section ratio is acquired.
Example 2)
The ratio display number is “2”: the number of blinking bit inspections of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) is acquired.
Example 3)
The ratio display number is "5": The number of times of blinking bit inspection of the accessory ratio (total total) is acquired.
Further, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blink bit inspection number table is set. In this process, an address obtained by subtracting “1” from the head address of the blinking bit inspection count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) is stored in the HL register.
FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a blink bit inspection count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). As shown in FIG. 211, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the advantageous section ratio is “7 (H)”) is stored for each ratio.
The head address is “2510 (H)”. Therefore, “250F (H)” is stored in the HL register.

The “number of times of flashing bit inspection” is a value indicating how many bits ahead of the D0 bit in the flashing request flag of the address “F28D (H)” reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 211, “7 (H)” is stored in the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative). This is a value for determining whether the value of the seventh D6 bit counted from the eye is “1”. The D6th bit is a flag that is set to “1” when the total number of games has not reached 175000 times. When the D6th bit is “1”, as shown in FIG. The identification segments of the ratio, the continuous accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (total) are blinking targets.
In FIG. 211, “6 (H)” is stored in the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times). This is a value for determining whether or not the sixth D5 bit value is “1”. The D5th bit is a flag that is set to “1” when the total number of games has not reached 6000. When the D5th bit is “1”, as shown in FIG. The identification segments of the object ratio (6000 times) and the accessory ratio (6000 times) are to be blinked.

In the next step S2532, the number of times of identification segment blinking bit inspection is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is “3”,
250F (H) +3 (H) = 2512 (H) (= HL register value)
6 (H) (= B register value)
Becomes
In other words, “250F (H)” is the reference address, the address stored in the blinking bit inspection table is calculated using the data stored in the ratio display number (address “F28E (H)”) as the offset value, and stored in the address. It is possible to acquire the data that has been set.
In the above example, “6 (H)”, which is information for determining whether or not to blink the identification segment at the accessory ratio (6000 times) stored at the address “2512 (H)”, is acquired. Is done.
Next, the flow advances to step S1476 to set an identification segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the identification segment offset table (“TBL_SEGID_DATA” in FIG. 127) in the HL register. Although not shown in FIG. 127, the head address is “2520 (H)” in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and a value (251F (H)) obtained by subtracting “1” from this address is stored in the HL register. .

In a next step S1277, an identification segment offset value is obtained. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as an offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Thus, for example, when the ratio display number is “1”, “2520 (H)” obtained by adding “1 (H)” to “251F (H)” is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. The data “7A (H)” is stored in the A register. When the ratio display number is “2”, “2521 (H)” obtained by adding “2 (H)” to “251F (H)” is stored in the HL register, and the data stored in the address is stored. "6B (H)" is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1478, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request of digit 6) for the ratio (1000 digits). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value (LED display counter value) stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that a display request has been made. If there is a display request for the ratio (1000 digits), the flow proceeds to step S1482; otherwise, the flow proceeds to step S1479.

  In step S1479, it is determined whether there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits) (a display request for digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits), the flow proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, the flow proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the number of times of ratio segment blinking bit inspection is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, the A register, and the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. The process proceeds to step S1480 when there is no display request for the ratio (1000 digits) and the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no display request for the identification segment (when the ratio segment is displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is acquired.
In this step S1480, a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is obtained. For example, when the E register value is “00000001 (B)” corresponding to the ratio display number “1”, the advantageous section ratio data is acquired.

The specific acquisition of ratio data is as follows.
(1) The value (“F284 (H)”) obtained by subtracting “1” from the address (“F285 (H)”) of the RWM 53 storing the advantageous section ratio data is stored in the HL register.
(2) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the RWM address in which the ratio data is stored is calculated (designated) using “F284 (H)” as the reference address and the ratio display number as an offset value, and the data stored in the RWM address is stored in a register (storage area). Can be obtained (stored).
By this processing, the A register stores the advantageous section ratio data, the continuous character ratio data (6000 times), the character ratio data (6000 times), the continuous character ratio data (cumulative), and the character ratio data (cumulative). An offset value for displaying one of the ratios is stored. Note that this offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the flow advances to step S1481 to determine whether there is a display request for the ratio (one digit) (display request for digit 9). This process is to determine whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. If there is a display request for the ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1482.
Note that when there is no display request for the ratio (one digit) in step S1481, it means that there is a display request for the ratio (10 digits).

By the above processing, when there is a display request of the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a display request of the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, an upper digit offset is set. When the process proceeds to step S1482, the upper digit of the identification segment or the ratio segment is turned on. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1479) or the ratio data (step S1480). Then, here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register are exchanged.
For example, when the data before the replacement is “0011/1001 (B)” (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are replaced. And "1001/0011 (B)".
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and “000011111 (B)”, and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process masks the upper 4 bits (sets it to “0”) in order to use the lower 4 bits of the A register as the offset value.
As described above, of the one-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the one-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper four bits correspond to the upper digit offset value, and the lower four bits correspond to the lower digit. It corresponds to the offset value. Therefore, by performing the above-described processing, an offset value for acquiring the upper digit segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This processing is for storing the head address of the ratio display segment data table in FIG. 127 in the HL register.
Although the address is not shown in FIG. 127, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, since the head address is “2530 (H)”, “2530 (H)” is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S1484 to acquire segment output data. In this processing, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (head address of the ratio display segment data table), and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is stored in the E register. Processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; head address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
If
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
Becomes

Next, the flow advances to step S1485 to determine whether or not the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when the digits 6 to 9 are displayed, the segment P (dot) of the digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a display request of the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that the segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a display request for the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no display request for the segment P.
Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. If it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, and if it is not “1”. Judge that there is no display request for the segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store “00000010 (B)” in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the LED display counter value stored in step S1471), and when the calculation result is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P.

If it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2534.
In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since the segment P corresponds to D7 bits of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 is OR-operated with "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, a blink request flag is obtained. This process stores the data of the blinking request flag (address “F28D (H)”) in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2535 to perform a blink bit inspection. In this process, the A register is shifted to the right by “1”, and the result of the shift is stored in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the “1” shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the “1” shift is “0”, the carry flag = “0”, and if the value of the D0 bit before the “1” shift is “1”, the carry flag = “1”. Become.

In the next step S2536, it is determined whether the inspection has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is subtracted from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is “0”, it is determined that the inspection has been completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537. If it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the blinking request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the overflow result is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blinking request flag is “01000000 (B)” (the 175000 times blinking flag of the D6 bit is on) and the B register value is “7 (H)”,
First time: “01000000 (B)” → “00100000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
2nd time: “00100000 (B)” → “00010000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Third time: “00010000 (B)” → “00001000 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (H)
4th time: “00001000 (B)” → “00000100 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (H)
Fifth time: “00000100 (B)” → “00000010 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Sixth time: “00000010 (B)” → “00000001 (B)”, carry flag = “0”
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
7th time: “00000001 (B)” → “00000000 (B)”, carry flag = “1”
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
Becomes

  In step S2537, it is determined whether the blink request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the blinking request flag is on. If it is determined that the blinking request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538; if it is determined that the blinking request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, it is determined whether the blink switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the blinking switching flag (address “F28F (H)”) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is “0” (second zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the blinking switching flag is not on.
When it is determined that the blinking switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
Note that from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blinking request flag is off (“No” in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so that the light does not turn off even if the blinking switching flag is on.
b) Even if the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537), if the blinking switching flag is off (“No” in step S2538), the lamp is turned on.
c) If the blinking request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537) and the blinking switching flag is on (“Yes” in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, and is turned off.

In step S2539, the segment data is cleared. This processing is to store the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed. Therefore, this process is a process of setting “0” to the E register. That is, when the blinking request flag is on (“1”) and the blinking switching flag is on (“1”, that is, off), the display to be lit is turned off in the interrupt processing. In order to set the data (E register value) to “00000000 (B)”, the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, a segment signal is output from the output port 3 and a digit signal is output from the output port 4 to output a digit signal and a segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value and the HL register value.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. The E signal stores a segment signal. And
Swap the data stored in the D register and the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This allows
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
The L register stores a segment signal.
(2) The L register value is output to the output port 3 and the H register value is output to the output port 4.
Thus, the process according to this flowchart ends, and the flow advances to step S2467 in FIG.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment>
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, during the main process in FIG. 188, the ratio setting process is executed in step S2193, and in the ratio setting process (FIG. 191), the ratio calculation process is executed in step S2243.
On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, one item is calculated by one interrupt for the update of the ratio of five items and the ring buffer number (total of six items). In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the term “ratio calculation” including the update of the ring buffer number is referred to.

  Here, it is of course possible to execute the ratio calculation of six items at one interruption. However, since various kinds of processing are included in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 190), it is desired to minimize the time required for calculating the ratio. Thus, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the ratio calculation of one item is executed by one interruption process.

As a twenty-seventh embodiment, three examples (1) to (3) will be described. The processing corresponding to each embodiment is as follows.
a) Twenty-seventh embodiment (1)
Main processing (M_MAIN): same as in the 26th embodiment Ratio setting processing (S_RATE_SET): FIG. 212
Preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY): FIG. 213
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): FIG. 214 (process unique to the 27th embodiment)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): FIG. 215
Update ring buffer number (S_RONGNO_SET): same as 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): same as the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

b) Twenty-seventh embodiment (2)
Main processing (M_MAIN): FIG. 216
Ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET): FIG. 217
Preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY): same as in the 26th embodiment (FIG. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): same as in the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 214)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): same as in the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 215)
Update ring buffer number (S_RONGNO_SET): same as 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): same as the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

b) Twenty-seventh embodiment (3)
Setting change processing (M_RANK_SET): FIG. 218
Power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON): FIG. 219
Main processing (M_MAIN): FIG. 220
Ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET): same as in the 27th embodiment (2) (FIG. 217)
Preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY): same as in the 26th embodiment (FIG. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): same as in the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 214)
Ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET): same as in the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 215)
Update ring buffer number (S_RONGNO_SET): same as 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): same as the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

<Twenty-seventh embodiment (1)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), ratio calculation is performed during interrupt processing.
FIG. 212 is a flowchart illustrating the rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) of the 27th embodiment (1), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 191 of the 26th embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), during the main process (M_MAIN) in FIG. 188, step S2550 in FIG. 212 is executed instead of step S2193.
In the description of the twenty-seventh embodiment, steps that execute the same processes as in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be given the same step numbers, and descriptions thereof will be omitted. Steps different from those in the twenty-sixth embodiment are underlined below the step numbers.

As shown in FIG. 212, in the ratio setting process, after the 400 game counter is updated in step S2242, the process proceeds to step S2551, and the number of calculations is set. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a storage area called “number of calculations” is provided in the RWM 53. Then, in a step S2551, "6" is set in the storage area of the "number of calculations". The storage area of the “number of calculations” is set so as to be outside the range cleared when the setting is changed. By doing so, the power is turned off before the calculation of the following six items is completed, and the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch is turned on (the setting change mode transition condition). Even when the RWM clear is executed (when is satisfied), the calculation can be executed from the middle without executing the calculation from the beginning. Also, “6” is the interrupt processing of six times, and the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (6000 times), the character ratio (6000 times), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio (cumulative) ) Means that the calculation of six items of updating the ring buffer number is executed.
Note that if the storage area of the “number of calculations” is cleared at the time of transition to the setting mode, there is an inconvenience that some ratios are not calculated. For example, when the number of calculations is "4", the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and if the number of calculations is cleared, the ratio after "3" is not calculated (the relationship between the number of calculations and the ratio is not described. See below). More specifically, the latest ratio data is obtained for the accessory ratio (cumulative) and the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative). However, the accessory ratio (6000 times), the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), the advantageous section ratio, And the ring buffer number will not be the latest ratio data.
Therefore, even when the mode shifts to the setting change mode, the storage area of the “number of calculations” is not cleared.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the following ratio is calculated according to the number of calculations.
Number of calculations after update (when “1” is subtracted) “5”: Ratio of bonuses (cumulative)
Number of calculations after update (when "1" is subtracted) "4": Continuous accessory ratio (total)
Number of calculations after update (when “1” is subtracted) “3”: Ratio of prize (6000 times)
Number of calculations after update (when "1" is subtracted) "2": Continuous accessory ratio (6000)
Number of calculations after update (when "1" is subtracted) "1": Advantageous section ratio Number of calculations after update (when "1" is subtracted) "0": Update ring buffer number Number of calculations before update "0": No calculation In the ratio setting process of FIG. 212, unlike the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 191), the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) of step S2243 and the update of the ring buffer number (S_RINGNO_SET) of step S2244 are provided in FIG. Absent. These processes are performed in the interrupt process.

FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in the 27th embodiment (1), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 206 in the 26th embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), during the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 190, step S2560 in FIG. 213 is executed instead of step S2221.
In the ratio display preparation in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in step S2561 is performed between the saving of the register in step S2463 and the generation of the blinking request flag (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 (FIG. 214 described later). Execute The other points are the same as those of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206).

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in step S2561 in FIG. 213.
First, in step S2571, the number of calculations is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the number of calculations of the RWM 53 described above. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the number of calculations is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) "1" is subtracted from the A register value.
(4) Store the data stored in the A register at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S2572, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations before the update in step S2571 is “0”. For example, when the A register value in the above (2) is “0”, it is determined that the number of calculations before updating is “0”. When it is determined that the number of calculations before the update is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is executed, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the flow proceeds to step S2573.
In step S2573, it is determined whether the number of calculations after the update in step S2571 is "0". For example, when the A register value after the subtraction in (3) is “0”, it is determined that the number of calculations after the update is “0”. When it is determined that the number of calculations after the update is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2575 (ring buffer number update), and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2574 (ratio calculation process).

In step S2574, a ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 215) is executed, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, in step S2575, a ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET; FIG. 205) is executed, and the processing in this flowchart ends.
As described above, when the number of calculations before update is not “0” and the number of calculations after update is not “0”, one of the five ratios illustrated in FIG. 181 is calculated once. I do. If the number of calculations before the update is not “0” and the number of calculations after the update is “0”, the ring buffer number is updated.

FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2574 of FIG. 214. In FIG. 215, the points different from the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202) are underlined in the step numbers as described above.
First, in the process of FIG. 215, unlike the process of FIG. 202, the processes of step S2381, step S2382, and step S2407 in FIG. 202 are not performed. This is because the number of calculations in the ratio calculation process is one, as described above.
After the ratio calculation RWM address table is set in step S2385, the process advances to step S2581.

In step S2581, a count upper limit flag (address “F28B (H)”) is obtained. Next, the flow advances to step S2582 to check whether or not to execute the ratio calculation. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when it is determined from the count upper limit flag that the number of games has reached the count upper limit value, it is determined that the advantageous section ratio is not calculated. When it is determined from the count upper limit flag that the number of payouts has reached the count upper limit value, it is determined that the accessory ratio (6000 times and the total) and the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times and the total) are not calculated.
In this respect, the twenty-seventh embodiment is different from the twenty-sixth embodiment. (In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, without determining whether or not the count upper limit value has been reached, the ratio is uniformly determined. Calculated.).
Next, the flow advances to step S2583 to determine whether or not to execute the ratio calculation process. For example, in this interrupt processing, when calculating the advantageous section ratio, if the game number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is “0”, it is determined that the calculation of the advantageous section ratio is executed. On the other hand, when the game number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is “1”, it is determined that the calculation of the advantageous section ratio is not executed.

Also, for example, in the present interruption processing, when calculating the accessory ratio (total), when the number-of-payouts upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is “0”, it is determined that the calculation of the accessory ratio (total) is executed. . On the other hand, when the payout number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is “1”, it is determined that the calculation of the accessory ratio (total) is not executed.
If it is determined in step S2583 that the calculation is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2386 and the subsequent steps. If it is determined that the calculation is not to be performed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment (2)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), similar to the twenty-sixth embodiment, the ratio is calculated during the main processing.
FIG. 216 is a flowchart illustrating main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 188 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), a setting change flag is provided as a flag stored in the RWM 53. When the setting change flag is on, it means that the setting can be changed, and when it is off, it means that the setting cannot be changed.
In FIG. 216, after the game start set in step S2172 ends, the flow advances to step S2591 to turn on the setting change flag. When the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2178, the setting change flag is turned off in the next step S2592. As a result, during game standby (before the game starts (before the start switch 41 is operated)), the setting can be changed, and after the game starts (after the start switch 41 is operated), the setting cannot be changed.

The reason for this setting is to calculate the ratio of one item in one interrupt process in the twenty-seventh embodiment. More specifically, since the ratio calculation (ratio setting process in step S2593) is performed after the medal is paid out during the main process, the process proceeds to the setting change process before all calculations (six times) are completed, and the clearing process of the RWM 53 is performed. When the ratio is displayed by interrupt processing after that, the calculation is completed for one ratio, but the calculation is not completed for another ratio, and the update of the ring buffer number is performed normally. A setting change prohibition section is provided to prevent occurrence of an abnormality such as not being performed.
In the example of FIG. 216, the section from the start of the game to before the operation of the start switch 41 is a section where the setting can be changed, and the section after the operation of the start switch 41 and before the start of the game of the next game is the section where the setting cannot be changed. Therefore, even if the power is turned off during the loop of steps S2190 to S2594, the process does not shift to the setting change process.

  In addition, since the calculation is performed six times after the payout of the medals, if an interrupt is permitted after the ratio setting process in step S2593 (step S2195), the process advances to step S2594 to determine whether the number of calculations is “0”. If it is not "0", the flow returns to step S2190 to execute an interrupt waiting process. Then, when the interruption process is performed thereafter, the ratio setting process (one ratio calculation) is executed again in step S2593. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2594 that it is "0", the flow advances to step S2196 to execute a game end check process.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart illustrating the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), which is the process of step S2593 in FIG.
In the 27th embodiment (1), the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed in the ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET; FIG. 212), and the ratio calculation is performed in step S2561 in the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in FIG. Management (S_CAL_CTL) was executed.
In contrast, in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is executed in the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) of FIG. 217 (step S2603). Therefore, the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed during the ratio display preparation. As described above, the ratio display preparation in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) is the same as that in the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206).

In FIG. 217, after the process in step S2234, the process advances to step S2601 to determine whether the number of calculations is “0”. If it is determined that the number of calculations is not “0”, the flow proceeds to step S2603 (ratio calculation management). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of calculations is “0”, the flow proceeds to step S2235 (count upper limit check).
Further, the point that the process proceeds to step S2602 after the process of step S2242 and sets the number of calculations ("6") is the same as in the 27th embodiment (1) (step S2551 in FIG. 212). Therefore, when it is determined in step S2601 that the number of calculations is "0", the number of calculations is set to "6" in step S2602.

<Twenty-seventh embodiment (3)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation is performed during the setting change processing and the main processing.
FIG. 218 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the 27th embodiment (3), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 186 in the 26th embodiment.
The setting change process in FIG. 218 is different from the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 186) in that when the initialization (out of the used area) is completed in step S2131, the power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in step S2611 is executed. . In this power-on ratio calculation, the ratio calculation of six items is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S2133 to start an interrupt. In the 27th embodiment (3), ratio calculation is not performed in the interrupt processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in step S2611 in FIG. 218.
First, in step S2621, the stack pointer is saved. In this process, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address “F293 (H)”).
As described above, the ratio calculation is a program executed outside the used area. Therefore, when a program outside the used area is being executed, the stack pointer is evacuated and stored in the used area (first program). Restore the stack pointer on return.
In the next step S2622, a stack pointer (out of the used area) is set. This processing is to store “F400 (H)” in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2623, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, the flow advances to step S2624 to set the upper address of the RWM 53 in the Q register. This process is a process of storing “F2 (H)” in the Q register.

In the next step S2625, ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is executed. This ratio calculation management is the same processing as in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 214). Then, in the next step S2626, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations has become “0”. When it is determined that the number of calculations is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2627, and when it is determined that the number of calculations is not “0”, the process returns to step S2625 to execute the ratio calculation.
Then, when the calculation of the ratio of the six items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2627, the register is restored. This process is a process of restoring the various registers saved in step S2623.
In the next step S2628, the stack pointer is restored. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2621, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 27th embodiment (3) (in FIG. 218, shifting after the end of the setting change process), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 188 of the 26th embodiment. .
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation (the ratio setting process in step S2641) is performed during the main process, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment. This ratio setting process is the same process as in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 217). That is, the ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) (FIG. 214) is executed until the number of calculations becomes “0”.
Also, each time the ratio setting process is executed once, the process proceeds to step S2642, and it is determined whether or not the number of calculations is “0”. If it is determined that the value is not “0”, the process returns to step S2190 to execute the ratio setting process (step S2641) again.
In the main processing of the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), the ratio calculation is performed in both the setting change processing and the main processing, and the ratio calculation is performed before the interruption processing in the setting change processing. There is no need to provide a setting change disable period as in the main process (2) in FIG. 216.

As described above, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described. However, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments are not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the following various modifications are possible. .
(1) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191, each game performs a count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK). Therefore, the count upper limit flag is updated every game.
On the other hand, it is also possible to update the count upper limit flag only in games in which the number of games or the number of payouts reaches the upper limit value.
In this case, in FIG. 192, the value of the count upper limit flag is determined first (before step S2251), and when the D0 and D1 bits are “1”, the process of the count upper limit check is ended. .
Also, without providing a count upper limit flag, it is determined whether or not the total number of games counter and the total payout (total) counter are 3 bytes full, and when the total is 3 bytes full, it is determined that the count is upper limit. Is also possible. This method includes, for example, the following a) first method and b) second method.

a) First Method Each of the total game number counter and the total payout (total) counter is composed of 3 bytes. Here, the most significant byte is the A byte, and the lower two bytes are the B byte and the C byte (the least significant byte is the C byte).
Then, whether or not all of the A, B, and C bytes are full (3 bytes full (“FFFFFF (H)”)) is calculated as follows.
First, an AND operation is performed on the A byte and the B byte. Next, “FF (H)” is subtracted from the result of the AND operation. As a result, when it becomes “0” (zero flag = “1”), the processing shifts to the next operation. If the zero flag is "1", it is determined at this point that it is not 3 bytes full, and the calculation is terminated.
In the next operation, an AND operation is performed on the A-th byte and the C-th byte. Next, “FF (H)” is subtracted from the result of the AND operation. As a result, when it becomes “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that three bytes are full, and when zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that it is not three bytes full.

In the above operation, if AND operation is performed on “FF (H)” and “FF (H)”, the operation result becomes “FF (H)”, and this “FF (H)” is changed to “FF (H)”. Is subtracted, the zero flag becomes “1”.
If the zero flag is "1" as the operation result of the A-byte and the B-byte, and the zero flag is "1" as the operation result of the A-byte and the C-byte, the A-byte and the B-byte , And C-th byte are both “FF (H)”.
In addition, the above is applied not only to the total game number counter but also to a total payout (cumulative) counter.

b) Second Method Of the counter composed of 3 bytes, the lower 2 bytes, the B byte and the C byte, are stored in, for example, an HL register. Then, “1” is added to the HL register value. When the carry flag becomes “1” by this addition, the process proceeds to the next operation, and when the carry flag ≠ “1”, the operation is terminated at this point. Carry flag $ “1” means that the HL register value is not “FF”.
When the carry flag becomes “1”, the A-th byte, which is the upper byte, is stored in the A register. Then, the carry flag = “1” is added to the A register. As a result, when the carry flag = “1”, it is determined that the data is three bytes full, and when the carry flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the data is not three bytes full.
By performing the above calculation, it is necessary to perform the calculation each time it is determined whether or not the data is full of three bytes.

(2) In the above embodiment, the ratio display switching time “about 5.0 seconds” is set to the number of interrupts “2144 (D)”, and the blinking switching time “about 0.3 seconds” is set to the number of interrupts “134”. (D) ". Thus, when the identification segment or the ratio segment is blinkingly displayed, the ratio display content can be switched at the timing of switching from off to on.
However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display switching time may be set to the number of interrupts closest to “about 5.0 seconds”, and the blinking switching time may be set to the number of interrupts closest to “about 0.3 seconds”. .
For example, the number of interrupts for counting the display switching time is set to “2237 (D)” (2237 × 2.235 ≒ 499.696 ms).
Note that the number of interrupts closest to “about 0.3 seconds” at the time of switching the blinking is “134 (D)”, which is the same as in the twenty-sixth embodiment.

In the case of setting in this way, it is conceivable that the display switching time reaches “5.0” seconds immediately after the identification seg or the ratio seg is switched from off to on. Then, for example, when the display is switched to the next display immediately after switching from the unlit state to the illuminated state, the display contents are switched after a momentary lighting.
In order to prevent this from happening (to improve the appearance and not to think that it may have failed), for example, when the time to switch from on to off, and the time to switch from off to on, When it arrives, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined, and when the remaining time is, for example, “0.3” seconds or less, the blink switching timer is not updated.

  As a specific example, for example, when the identification seg or the ratio seg is blinking, when the remaining time of the display switching time becomes, for example, “0.3” seconds or less, the current time is kept until the display switching time comes. The light-on or light-off state in is maintained (extended) as it is. Then, when the display switching time comes, the display is switched to the next ratio display (at this switching point, the blinking switching time is reset). Here, when the display switching time becomes “0” while maintaining the light-off state, when the next ratio display blinks, it may be started from the light-on state. On the other hand, when the display switching time becomes “0” while the lighting state is maintained, the next ratio display may be started from the light-off state to blink the next ratio display.

(3) Contrary to the above example, the display switching time may be varied based on the blinking switching time. For example, as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the blinking cycle is set to “0.6” seconds (lighting “0.3 seconds”, light-off “0.3” seconds).
Then, when switching from lighting to extinguishing and when switching from extinguishing to lighting, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined. Terminating the ratio display and starting the next ratio display (resetting the display switching time).
Here, when the ratio display is switched, if the next ratio display also satisfies the blinking condition, it may be started from either lighting or extinguishing. Further, when the previous ratio display ends with turning off, the next ratio display may start with lighting, and when the previous ratio display ends with turning on, the next ratio display may start with turning off.

(4) The clear (initialization) range when the RWM error occurs / does not occur after the power is turned on described in the twenty-sixth embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this.
For example, first, when the power is turned on, the address of the RWM 53 relating to calculation and display (for example, “F210 (H)” to “F289 (H)”) is cleared as the RWM clear range when it is not determined that the RWM is abnormal. Instead of setting the range, the address of the RWM 53 relating to the timer or the like (for example, “F28A (H)” or later) may be set to the clear range. In this case, the display is started from the advantageous section ratio after the RWM is cleared. The display time of the advantageous section ratio is an initial set value (about 5 seconds).
Secondly, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 addresses relating to calculation, display, and timer (for example, “F210 (H)” to “F292 (H)”) are used as the RWM clear range when it is not determined that the RWM is abnormal. ) May not be set in the clear range, and other addresses of the RWM 53 (for example, “F293 (H)” and later) may be set in the clear range. In this case, the display does not always start from the advantageous section ratio after the RWM is cleared. Specifically, the display is started from the display item that was displayed when the power was turned off. The display time of the display item is not always displayed for about 5 seconds. For example, when the power is turned off after the elapse of “T” seconds after the display of the accessory ratio (6000 times) is started, after the RWM clear, the display starts with the display of the accessory ratio (6000 times), and , And the display time is “5-T” seconds.

(5) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the medal payout number data (F040 (H)) and the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) are provided as storage areas of the RWM 53. On the other hand, without providing a medal payout number buffer, the payout number can be counted using only the medal payout number data.
As described above, the medal payout number data is decremented by “1” each time the stored number of ones is added or the one-medal payout process is executed once.
Therefore, every time the processing of adding one stored number or one payout of one medal is executed, “1” may be added to the storage area for storing the number of paid out sheets for ratio calculation.

(6) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET), the tens and ones dividends are each multiplied by 10 (calculated value set (S_CAL_SET)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the dividend may be multiplied by 100, and the divisor may be repeatedly subtracted until it becomes “0” or more and less than the divisor.
Specifically, in the calculation of “Y (dividend) / X (divisor)”,
a) Calculate “100 × Y” by multiplying “Y” by 100.
b) By subtracting “X” from “100 × Y” and, when the value after the subtraction is equal to or more than “X”, repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (100 × Y−X × R) <X
A method of calculating “R” (ratio) that satisfies

(7) In the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET), a method other than the method shown in FIG. 202 is possible as a method of setting 99%.
FIG. 221 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the processing after step S2400 in FIG. 202. In FIG. 221, processes different from those in FIG. 202 are underlined below step numbers.
In FIG. 221, after performing the first place ratio calculation (S_CAL_EXE) in step S2400, the process advances to S2651 to set 99% as the ratio. Specifically, a process of storing “99 (H)” in the RWM address corresponding to the calculated ratio is executed.

In the next step S2652, it is determined whether or not the calculated ratio is “99” or more. If the calculated ratio is “99” or “100”, the result is “Yes”. If it is determined that the calculated ratio is “99” or more, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it is determined that the calculated ratio is not “99” or more, the process proceeds to step S2401. In step S2401, the calculation result buffer is acquired as described above. Therefore, when the calculated ratio is “99” or more, the ratio “99” set in step S2651 is maintained, and the process proceeds to step S2402 without performing step S2401 (acquisition of the calculation result buffer) to store the calculation result buffer. initialize. Subsequent processing is the same as in the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202).
Also, FIG. 221 (however, the processing in step S2407 is not performed) can be applied to the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 215).

(8) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, for example, as shown in step S2390 in FIG. 202, when the divisor (the value of the denominator) is “0”, the ratio calculation is not executed. Here, in the calculation value set in step S2389, the zero flag is set to "1" so that the ratio calculation processing is not executed when the divisor is "0".
However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the calculated value set in step S2389 (FIG. 203), before step S2411, it is determined whether or not the dividend (numerator value) is “0” and is determined to be “0”. When it is determined, the zero flag may be set to "1". (When it is determined that the dividend is "0," the processing of this flowchart is terminated without executing the processing after step S2411. ). Thus, at the end of the calculation value set, if either the divisor or the dividend is “0”, the zero flag becomes “1”. Then, the flow advances to step S2390 in FIG. 202 to determine whether any of the divisor and the dividend is “0”, and when either is “0” (that is, when the zero flag is “1”). May perform the step S2407 without performing the ratio calculation after the step S2391.

(9) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the ratio calculation process (FIG. 202), in step S2404, a process of subtracting “A0 (H)” from the calculated ratio is performed. % ".
On the other hand, before executing the ratio calculation process, it is possible to determine whether the ratio is 100%, and when it is determined that the ratio is 100%, the ratio calculation process may not be executed. . For example, the dividend (the number to be divided) and the divisor (the number to be divided) are compared to determine whether or not they match, and when it is determined that they match, the ratio can be determined to be 100%. However, it is determined whether at least one of the dividend and the divisor is “0”, and when it is determined that at least one of the dividend and the divisor is “0”, it is determined that the ratio is not 100% (the dividend or the dividend). When at least one of the divisors is “0”, the ratio is 0%.)
Therefore, when starting the ratio calculation processing of FIG. 202, the following processing is provided before the processing of step S2381.

a) The dividend (the number to be divided) and the divisor (the number to be divided) are compared to determine whether they match. If it is determined that they match, the procedure proceeds to b) below. If it is determined that they do not match, the process advances to step S2381 in FIG.
b) It is determined whether or not the dividend is “0”. When it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to c) below, and when it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing the ratio calculation.
c) It is determined whether or not the divisor is “0”. When it is determined that the dividend is not “0”, the dividend and the divisor match, and both the dividend and the divisor are not “0”. In FIG. 202, the process proceeds to step S2405 to set 99%. On the other hand, if it is determined to be “0”, the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing the ratio calculation.
Note that the above processing includes determination as to whether or not the divisor is “0”, so that the processing in step S2390 in FIG. 202 is unnecessary.

  (10) In the present embodiment, the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing the number of games (for example, the total number of games counter at the address “F26D (H)”) stores “1” every time the number of games is consumed by “1”. Was added. Similarly, “1” is added to the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing the number of payouts (for example, a total payout (cumulative) counter of the address “F27C (H)”) every time one medal is paid out. Thus, the number added to the number of games and the number of payouts is set to the same value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, every time the number of games is consumed by “1” and / or one medal is paid out, for example, “2”, “10”, etc. It is also possible to store a value other than "1". For example, in the number of advantageous section games of the first embodiment, “100 (D)” is added each time the advantageous section is consumed by one game. Thus, the number of games or the number of payouts and the value added to the RWM 53 do not necessarily have to be the same value. Therefore, when adding the number of games, a value corresponding to the number of games may be added, and when adding the number of payouts, a value corresponding to the number of payouts may be added. In the following, for example, in the initial invention 52 and the like, the “corresponding value” means this.

  (11) Instead of the storage area (address “F290 (H)”) for storing the display switching time, a display switching counter (1-byte storage area) may be provided. In this case, when the blinking switching time has elapsed, updating of the blinking switching flag (address “F28F (H)”) and updating of the display switching counter (addition of “1”) are performed. For example, the display switching counter is an increment counter that circulates from "0" to "15 (D)". When "1" is added when "15 (D)" is stored, the ratio display counter is displayed. Control to update the number. Further, when “1” is added while “15 (D)” is stored in the display switching counter, control is performed so that “0” is stored. It should be noted that such control is performed because “flashing switching time × 16 = display switching time”. With such a configuration, the storage area of the RWM can be reduced. Further, the blink cycle and the display information can be synchronized.

(12) In the ratio setting process (for example, FIG. 191 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, FIG. 212 in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and FIG. It is also possible not to provide a determination as to whether or not the game frequency upper limit flag is ON.
Further, in the count-up of FIG. 194, it is also possible not to execute the processing after step S2284 (if “Yes” in step S2282, execute step S2283 and then end the processing in this flowchart). is there.
In the case of controlling as described above, the processing is executed as follows.
First, in the game frequency count of FIG. 193, before the processing of step S2271, it is determined whether or not the game frequency upper limit flag is ON (substantially the same processing as step S2236). Then, when it is determined that the game number upper limit flag is ON, the game number counting is ended.

In addition, in the game count of FIG. 193, after executing step S2273, it is determined whether the carry flag is “1”. When the carry flag is not “1”, the game number counting ends. On the other hand, when the carry flag is “1”, the D0 bit (game number upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (address “F28B (H)”) is set to “1”. Here, the case where the carry flag becomes “1” means that when the total game number counter is at the upper limit value (FFFFFF (H)), “1” is added in step S2273 (count up) in FIG. 193. It is time. In this case, a process of correcting the total game number counter to a specific value (here, “FFFFFF (H)”) is executed. Then, the game number counting ends.
Here, the reason why the total game number counter is corrected to the specific value is to determine whether or not to blink the identification segment according to whether or not 6000 or 175000 games have been executed. This is because the game number counter is referred to. Therefore, the specific value stored in the total game number counter does not necessarily need to be “FFFFFFF (H)”, but a value that only needs to be known to have reached 175,000 times, for example, “F00000 (H)” (in decimal notation) 15728640 (D)).

In the counting of the number of times of the advantageous section game in FIG. 195, when it is determined to be “Yes” in step S2291, it is determined whether or not the game number upper limit flag is on. When the counting is completed and it is determined to be off, the process proceeds to step S2292 and subsequent steps.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the value of the advantageous section game number count from being added from when the total game number counter exceeds the upper limit value.

Furthermore, in the payout number counting of FIG. 196, it is possible not to provide the payout number upper limit buffer set in step S2304.
In this case, in FIG. 196, after executing the count-up in step S2322 in FIG. 197, in the payout number set in step S2303, it is determined whether the carry flag is “1” and the carry flag is set to “1”. If the carry flag is set to "1", the payout number setting is ended, and if the carry flag is "1", the D1 bit (payout number upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (address "F28B (H)") is set to "1" and then the payout is performed. The number setting is completed. Here, the case where the carry flag becomes “1” means that the upper limit value (“FFFFFF (H)”) is obtained when the payout number is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter value in the count-up in step S2322 in FIG. ) Is exceeded.
For example, it is assumed that when the total payout (cumulative) counter value at the time of the “X” game is “FFFFFE (H)”, the small payout of eight payouts wins. At this time, “000006 (H)” is stored in the total payout (cumulative) counter by the count-up in step S2322. At this time, the carry flag becomes "1". In this case, the consecutive bonus item payout (cumulative) counter and the bonus item payout (cumulative) counter after the game item including the “X” game item are not updated.
In addition, when configured in this way, the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data of the “X−1” game and the bonus ratio (cumulative) data are data including the “X” game and subsequent data. Becomes This can be realized by executing the same processing as the processing of steps S2581 to S2583 described in FIG. 215 of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1).
Note that the count upper limit flag needs to be stored in a storage area that is not cleared even when the mode shifts to the setting change mode.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, the winning probability (including single winning and overlapping winning with other roles) of the special role (in the first embodiment, 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB)) is different from the normal section and the advantageous section. Is set to the same value, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to set different winning probabilities between the normal section and the advantageous section (during the advantageous section, the performance of the accessory is improved).
Specifically, the winning probability of the special role in the normal section (indicating the combined value including the single winning and the overlapping winning with other roles. The same applies to (11) and the description of (12) described below). For example, it is set to “1/250” (hereinafter also referred to as “normal probability” in the description of (11) and (12)). Then, in the normal section, the winning probability ratio (hereinafter, referred to as BR ratio) of 1BB and RB (newly provided) is set to, for example, "1: 6" (RB is easier to win). It is assumed that the expected payout number in the 1BB game exceeds the expected payout number in the RB game.
After winning the special role in the normal section and ending the special game, the game shifts to the advantageous section (either non-AT or AT). Then, in at least a part of the advantageous section, the winning probability of the special role is set higher than the normal probability (for example, it may be set to about “1/30”. Hereinafter, (11) and (12) ) Is also referred to as “high probability”).

In this case, firstly, the winning probability of the special role is set to a high probability throughout the advantageous section.
Second, during the advantageous section, the winning probability of the first special role is set to the high probability A, the winning probability of the second special role is set to the high probability B (B <A), and the third The winning probability of the special role is set to a high probability C (C <B) (hereinafter, similarly, A>B>C>D>...).
Thirdly, the following method is available.
When the special combination is won during the normal section, the special section is shifted to the advantageous section and the first specific RT (finite RT) after the end of the special game. In the first specific RT, the BR ratio is set to “2: 1” (1BB is easier to win). When the number of games of the first specific RT is exhausted without winning the special combination in the first specific RT, the process is shifted from the first specific RT to the second specific RT. In the second specific RT, the BR ratio is set to, for example, “1: 4”. This makes it easier for the RB to win, so that the expected value of the number of paid-out medals is lower in the second specific RT than in the first specific RT. On the other hand, when the special combination is won during the first specific RT and the game shifts to the special game, after the end of the special game, the number of games of the first specific RT is reset and the first specific RT is started.
In addition, a so-called loop rate (probability of winning a special role before the game frequency of the first specific RT is exhausted) is determined from the finite number of games of the first specific RT and the probability of winning the special role during the first specific RT. Can be set.

Further, when the special combination is won during the second specific RT and the special game is completed, the process is shifted to the first specific RT on condition that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not satisfied. With this setting, for example, if the special role is won during the advantageous section, the process can shift to the first specific RT again.
In both the first specific RT stay and the second specific RT stay, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, for example, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the first specific RT or the second (2) Terminate the specific RT and shift to the normal section (RT for the normal section). The winning probability of the special role is also assumed to be the normal probability. When the process shifts to the RT for the normal section, the initialization of all the parameters related to the advantageous section is the same as in the third embodiment (for example, steps S445, S446, S447, and S471 in FIG. 44D). .

Furthermore, during the regular section, if the transition to the advantageous section is made without winning the special role (without passing through the special game) due to the rare role being won, etc., the first stay RT may be set as the first specific RT. Alternatively, the second specific RT may be used.
Further, as described above, when the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability in the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section and during the non-special game (when the accessory is not operated), the payout rate is set to “1”. ”, It is possible to set the rate of increase of payouts in the advantageous section with respect to the normal section to a lower value. However, it goes without saying that “advantage section = AT” as in the third embodiment.

Further, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made, it is also possible to vary the winning probability of the special combination in the advantageous section depending on the timing of the transition. For example, in the normal section, it is relatively easy to shift to the advantageous section by the winning of the special combination (for example, as described above, the probability of “1/250”). On the other hand, in the normal section, the probability of winning the rare role (rare cherry, rare replay, etc.) and shifting to the advantageous section without going through the special game is set to, for example, “1/16384” (extremely low probability). I do. Then, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the special combination, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability. On the other hand, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the rare role, a transition is made to a special RT, and the winning probability of 1BB is set to, for example, “1/20” (extremely high probability). Is also possible.
Further, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is triggered by the winning of the special role, the game after the end of the special game is set to non-AT, and the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is triggered by the rare role being won. Is set to AT from the first game in the advantageous section.

Further, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed and the winning probability of the special role is set to a high probability, a) the winning probability of the AT is also set to the high probability only during the period when the winning probability of the special role is high. B) during the period in which the special part winning probability is high, set the AT winning probability to the normal probability; c) regardless of the period in which the special part winning probability is set to the high probability, And setting the winning probability.
Further, when the special section winning probability is set to a high probability after shifting to the advantageous section, an upper limit (limiter) may be set to the number of special section winnings in the advantageous section. For example, after transitioning to the advantageous section, the winning probability of the special role is set to a high probability. However, when the special role is won, for example, five times, the special role is won in the normal section even after the next time during the advantageous section. It may be set to be about the same as the probability or slightly higher.
Here, after shifting to the advantageous section, the winning probability of the AT is set to the normal probability while the winning probability of the special role is high, and after the period in which the winning probability of the special role is high, the AT Is set to a high probability. Alternatively, conversely, when the game shifts to the advantageous section, the winning probability of the AT is initially set to a high probability, and when the number of winnings, the number of games, and the number of payouts exceed the predetermined threshold, the AT May be set as the normal probability, and the winning probability of the special role may be set to a high probability.

(14) In the modification of (13) described above, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability during the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a combination of the normal section / advantage section and the winning probability of the special combination (normal probability / high probability) may be provided. For example,
Advantageous section and special high probability winning section (section 1)
Advantageous section and special role normal probability winning section (section 2)
Normal section and special role high probability winning section (section 3)
Normal section and special role normal probability winning section (section 4) (so-called normal medium)
Can be provided.
Then, for example, during a normal section, when 1BBA in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is solely won, if the number of “20” is won, the process shifts to the advantageous section, but the number of “10” is Does not shift to the advantageous section when winning. In this case, when the number is "20", the game after the end of the special game is set to the section 1 or the section 2, and when the number is "10", the special game is ended. Setting a later game in section 3 or section 4 can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when shifting to the advantageous section, various conditions can be set for the transition condition from section 1 to section 2 and the transition condition from section 2 to section 1. For example, there are winning or winning of a promotion (fall) role, RT shift, digestion of a predetermined number of games, promotion (or fall) lottery performed for each game.

(15) In the flowcharts described in the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings. Is also possible.
Further, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments and the above-described various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Twenty-eighth embodiment>
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the presence / absence of a failure of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digit 3, digit 4) on which the push order instruction information is displayed and the presence / absence of a failure of the signal line transmitting a signal to the acquisition number display LED 78 can be confirmed. It was done.

That is, in the situation where the number of obtained medals is displayed, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the obtained number is displayed in digit 3, and the LED display counter value is “01000000”. In (B), the lower digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 4 in the interrupt processing.
Further, in the situation where the push order instruction information is displayed, “=” which is a part of the push order instruction information is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, one of “1” to “3”, which is another part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed on the digit 4.

Further, in a situation where the set value can be changed (during setting change), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, seven segments A to G of digit 3 are turned on ( In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", seven segments A to G of digit 4 are turned on ("8" is displayed in digit 4). Is displayed).
As described above, during the setting change, by turning on the seven segments A to G included in the digits 3 and 4, the digits 3 and 4 in which the push order instruction information is displayed in the instruction game section are not broken. , And a signal line for transmitting a segment signal to the digits 3 and 4 can be confirmed to be free from failure.

During the setting change, for example, seven segments A to G of digit 3 are turned on, and among the seven segments of digit 4, six of segments A and C to G are turned on. When segment B does not light, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 has a possibility of failure.
Furthermore, during the setting change, for example, six of the segments A to E and G of the digit 3 are turned on, but the segment F is not turned on and the six of the segments A to E and G of the digit 4 are turned on. If the segment F is turned on but the segment F is not turned on, there is a possibility that not only the segment F of the digits 3 and 4 has failed, but also that the signal line for transmitting the segment signal to the segment F has a fault. Then you can judge.

Hereinafter, the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described in more detail.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, digits 1 to 5 and a circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as those in the twentieth embodiment.
Here, although the contents partially overlap with those of the twentieth embodiment, digits 1 to 5 and a circuit configuration for lighting them will be described.
As shown in FIG. 125 (A), a stored number display LED 76 composed of digits 1 and 2, an acquired number display LED 78 composed of digits 3 and 4, and a set value display LED 73 composed of digit 5 Have.
As shown in FIG. 126, digits 1 to 5 have seven segments A to G.

Furthermore, output ports 2 and 3 are provided on the main control board 50.
Further, as shown in FIG. 128, a digit 1 to 5 signal indicating which digit to light is output from output port 2, and segment A indicating which segment to light is output from output port 3. To G signals are output.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 129, IC2 and IC3 are provided on the main control board 50.
Further, the IC 2 is an IC related to control of the digit 1 to 5 signals, and has an output port 2 composed of D0 to D7 output terminals.
Further, the IC 3 is an IC for controlling the segment A to G signals, and has an output port 3 including D0 to D7 output terminals.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the digit 1 signal line is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and is connected to the digit 1 drive signal line.
Similarly to the digit 1 signal line, the digit 2 to 5 signal lines also exit from the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 2 to 5, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the segment A signal line is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and connected to the segments A of the digits 1 to 5.
Similarly to the segment A signal line, the segment BG signal lines also exit from the D1 to D6 output terminals of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and are connected to the segments BG of the digits 1 to 5, respectively.
As a result, in the digits 1 to 5, the segments A to G are also used.

  For example, when the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2, the segments A to G of the digit 3 can be turned on. At this time, for example, when the segment B signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 3 and the segment C signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 3, the segments B and C of the digit 3 are turned on. As a result, “1” is displayed on the digit 3.

In the interrupt processing, it is set so that only one of the digits 1 to 5 can be turned on. The digit to be turned on is sequentially switched for each interrupt processing executed at a period of 2.235 ms. To go. That is, dynamic lighting is performed.
In particular, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, by outputting the signal “00001000 (B)” from the output port 2, the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. The signal is output and digit 1 can be turned on.

Similarly, digit 2 can be turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, and digit 3 is turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. It becomes possible.
Digit 4 can be turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", and digit 5 can be turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "10000000 (B)". Becomes

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the LED display request flag is “01111111 (B)” during normal operation, is “11100000 (B)” during setting change, and is “11111000 (B)” during setting confirmation. ".
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134, an AND operation is performed on the LED display counter and the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the operation result is turned on.

FIG. 222 is a diagram showing addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 222 is for use in the description of the twenty-eighth embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
As described in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the set value is “N”, the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) stores the set value data “N−1”.
In the present embodiment, there are set values “1” to “6”. Therefore, any one of the set value data “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Further, the set value display LED 73 displays “N”, which is obtained by adding “1” to the set value data “N−1” stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), as a set value.

The address “F010 (H)” is a stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “50” is stored as the stored number data.
For example, when 50 medals are stored, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT).

Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit of the value (stored number) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is digit 1 (of the stored number display LED 76). (High-order digit).
In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value (stored number) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is displayed in digit 2.

The address “F011 (H)” is an acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In the present embodiment, the acquired number data, the setting change display data, or the pressing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
At the time of payout of medals, any one of “0” to “9” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as acquired number data.

While the setting is being changed, “88” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the setting change display data.
Furthermore, when the pressing order is instructed (when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 that is advantageous to the player is notified in the indicated game section), the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) has the pressing order instruction number as Any value of “A0 (H)”, “A1 (H)”, “A2 (H)” or “A3 (H)” is stored.

  For example, when the nine-copies win and nine medals are paid out, first, “0” is stored in the obtained-copies data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the obtained coupon data. Thereafter, each time one medal is paid out, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). That is, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is updated in accordance with the payout of medals, such as “0” → “1” → “2” → “3” →. Go. Then, when the ninth medal is paid out, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) becomes “9”.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) becomes digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the acquired number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 3, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. The value of "8" indicating that there is is displayed in digit 3, and if the pressing order instruction number is stored, the pressing order indicating information (indicating that it is the pressing order indicating information) "=" is displayed in digit 3. Is done.

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if the acquired number data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4, and if the setting change display data is stored, the setting is being changed. The value of "8" indicating that there is a key is displayed on digit 4, and if the push order instruction number is stored, any of the values of the push order instruction information (indicating the push order) "0" to "3" is displayed. Displayed on digit 4.

The address “F012 (H)” is an LED display counter value storage area (_CT_LED_DSP), and every time interrupt processing is performed, “00000001 (B)” → “00000010 (B)” → “00000100 (B)” → ... → “10000000 (B)” → “00000000 (B)” → “00000001 (B)”.
The address “F013 (H)” is an LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), and as shown in FIG. 222, stores a value corresponding to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address “F014 (H)” is an error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When no recoverable error has occurred, “00 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When a recoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of the generated recoverable error is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In the present embodiment, ten types of errors shown in FIG. 222 are detected as recoverable errors. Note that the recoverable error is not limited to these.
Further, the value of the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is maintained until the error is released, and when the error is released (after returning from the error), “00 (H)” is again stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). Is stored.

  For example, when an HP error (medal jam error) occurs, “0E (H)” (“14” in decimal) is stored as an error number in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this case, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the character “H” is displayed at digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing at the time of "B)", the character "P" is displayed on digit 4 (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78). That is, from the value of “0E (H)” stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), an offset value for displaying the character “H” in digit 3 and displaying the character “P” in digit 4 Is calculated.

The address “F040 (H)” is a medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL), and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “9” is stored as medal payout number data.
In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals to be paid out in one game is nine, the data of the number of medals to be paid out is from “0” to “9”. The medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

The address “F041 (H)” is a medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). In the present embodiment, like the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address “F040”, “0” to “9” are used. Is stored.
When the winning determination is made, the values of both the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) are updated. At this time, the same value is stored in both addresses. For example, when a nine-prize winning is made, "9" is stored in both addresses.

Thereafter, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is reduced by "1" each time one medal is paid out, and becomes "0" at the end of the medal payout. In other words, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) varies according to the payout of medals, such as "9" → "8" → "7" → ... "2" → "1" → "0". Will be updated.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated by the payout of medals, but is maintained until it is updated at the time of the next game winning determination.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the in-use area data table of FIG. 127 in the twentieth embodiment. .
In FIG. 223, the point that “0101110 (B)” is displayed as “d” display data in the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) is different from the data table in the use area of FIG. Same as data table.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing addresses of respective data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 stored in the use area of the ROM 54.
In the LED segment table 1, the head address is set to “1811 (H)”, and the data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811 (H)”.
In the LED segment table 2, the head address is set to "1817 (H)", and the data of the LED segment table 2 is stored in order from "1817 (H)".
Further, the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 are stored at consecutive addresses.

Thus, when “1811 (H)” is specified as the head address, each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1811 (H)”.
When “1817 (H)” is specified as the head address, each data of the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the head address “1817 (H)”.

For example, when a H0 error (abnormality of the payout sensor) occurs, the start address “1811 (H)” of the LED segment table 1 is designated. Further, from the error number “10 (H)” (decimal “16”) of the H0 error, “1” is calculated as an upper digit offset value, and “6” is calculated as a lower digit offset value.
Then, by reading the address obtained by adding the offset value “1” of the upper digit to the leading address “1811 (H)”, that is, the data of “1812 (H)”, “H” can be displayed on the digit 3. .
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower-order offset value “6” to the head address “1811 (H)”, that is, the data of “1817 (H)”, “0” can be displayed on the digit 4. it can.

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the addresses of the push order instruction number table stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and corresponds to FIG. 19 of the first embodiment in which the addresses are inserted.
In the pressing order instruction number table, the head address is set to “1900 (H)”, and the pressing order instruction numbers corresponding to the condition device numbers “0” to “30” are stored in order from “1900 (H)”. ing.

For example, when the small device B1 of the condition device number "11" is won, the condition device number "11" is set as the offset value, and the offset value "11" is set to the head address "1900 (H)" of the pressing order instruction number table. By reading the added address, that is, the data of “190B (H)”, it is possible to obtain the pressing order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the condition device number “11”.
The pressing order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small part A and the pressing order instruction number (* 2) at the time of winning the small parts E1 and E2 are the same as those in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described.
When the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the main control board 50 executes a program start process.
Also, in the program start processing, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front door is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 is turned on. Is turned on (the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) shown in FIG. That is, when the power switch 11 is turned on while the setting key switch 12 is turned on, the mode shifts to a setting change mode (setting change mode).

Furthermore, in the program start processing, when it is determined that the signal of the door switch 15 is off, the signal of the setting door switch is off, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is off, the power-off recovery data is output. It is determined whether it is a normal value.
Then, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to the power-recovery process. In this power-recovery process, after the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is started, the main process (M_MAIN) shown in FIG. Proceed to).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error (power-off recovery error) occurs and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG.

Further, when an “E1” error occurs and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed. . Then, when an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by an unrecoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. Specifically, the process of displaying "E" on digit 3 and the process of displaying "1" on digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals.
Further, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off once. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. Thereby, in the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) described later, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the “E1” error is released.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process (M_RANK_SET).
First, in step S2121, a “predetermined range” is stored in a register as an initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53 (“F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and is an initialization in which at least the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) is not initialized. The range is referred to as a “predetermined range”.
Note that, in addition to the set value data, a game state (for example, an RT state) and an initialization range in which all or some of the winning flags are not initialized may be set as a “predetermined range”.

Next, proceeding to step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S2121 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process advances to step S2123.
In step S2123, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range within the use area including the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) is set as the initialization range. Set.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2124 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2126.

  In step S2126, the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved. Note that the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but the AF register is saved for the sake of instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S2127, where a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53 (after “F200 (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally, and is, for example, after the address “F28E (H)” or after “F293 (H)” (initialization). (The range varies depending on the specifications, etc.).

  In the next step S2128, similarly to step S2122, it is determined whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2130, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S2127 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the flow advances to step S2129.

In step S2129, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power interruption is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address “F200” is set as the initialization range. Therefore, in this case, the initialization is performed including the ring buffer and the like.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2130, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (out of the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S2130 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, activation setting of interrupt processing is performed. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process, and therefore, a process for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds to the process. Then, after the process of step S2133, an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that interrupt processing is not executed before “interruption activation”.

In the next step S2134, an output request set at the start of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 of the start of the setting change process.
Note that the “output request set” is also executed in the processing described below. However, similar to step S2134, the processing for setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the register is performed. means. Further, the control command here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also means a command that is a source of a command to be actually transmitted.
Next, proceeding to step S2135, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command (a control command set in a register) to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores the standby time in the BC register (a pair register composed of a B register and a C register each capable of storing 8-bit data (1 byte data)). In the present embodiment, the number of interrupt processes “224” (about 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of the setting change. Next, the process advances to step S2137 to execute a wait process (wait process) for 2 bytes for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, the process waits until the number of interrupt processes “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted each time an interrupt process is performed, and the set number of interrupt processes becomes “0”). During this standby time (during the 2-byte time wait processing), the setting change processing does not proceed, but the interrupt processing is executed.

  As described above, the wait process (wait process) for two bytes is performed on the main control board 50 side in step S2137 because the initialization process of the RWM 83 on the sub control board 80 takes time. In particular, this is because the main control board 50 cannot know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, when the initialization process is still being performed on the sub-control board 80 side, the processing proceeds on the main control board 50 side, and the progress of the control processing of the main control board 50 and the progress of the control processing of the sub-control board 80 are not performed. Synchronization can be prevented from being lost.
That is, after execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83, so that a time sufficient for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as the wait time. There is a need to. As a result, after the sub-control board 80 has completed the initialization processing of the RWM 83, the main control board 50 can proceed to the processing after step S4001.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 can execute interrupt processing even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137. It is transmitted to the control board 80. However, while the waiting process for two bytes is being executed in step S2137, the process does not proceed to the processes after step S4001 (the setting change process does not proceed).

After the 2-byte waiting process in step S2137 ends, the process advances to step S4001 to store “88” (binary “01011000 (B)”) indicating that the setting is being changed in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Remember.
Next, the processing proceeds to step S4002, and “11100000 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

By the process of step S4002, when the interrupt process is performed after the process, the digits 3 to 5 (the acquired number display LED 78 and the set value display LED 73) can be turned on.
Specifically, in the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4002, “8” can be displayed on each of digits 3 and 4 (“88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and digit 5 (set value display) can be displayed. The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
Since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) have been initialized by the initialization processing in the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2124, the values before step S4001 are “ 0 ".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2139 to execute an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until an interrupt process is performed (elapse of 2.235 ms). The reason for providing this processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether an operation of setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting switch 13 is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port including the setting switch 13. If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141. If it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S2142.

In step S2141, the set value (set value data) is updated. Specifically, the value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. When the interrupt processing is executed after the update of the set value, the set value after the update is displayed on the set value display LED 73.
As described above, when the set value is “N”, the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) stores the set value data “N−1”.
Therefore, when the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), “N” obtained by adding “1” to the set value data “N−1” is set as the set value. It is displayed on digit 5 (setting value display LED 73).

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above processing, step S2139 (interrupt waiting processing) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting switch 13.
For example, when the process of step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on, the set value is updated in step S2141 and the start switch 41 is not on in the next step S2142. If the answer is YES, the process advances to step S2140 to determine whether the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON.

  After it is determined in step S2140 that the switch is on, if the interrupt processing is performed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is ON. As a result, the set value keeps increasing by 2 or more only by operating the setting switch 13 once. Therefore, in step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off, the process advances to step S4003 to clear the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) (set the value to "0").
Next, the process advances to step S4004 to store “01111111 (B)” corresponding to the normal state in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

By the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S4003, the display of the digits 3 and 4 (the acquired number display LED 78) is changed from "88" to "00".
Further, “0” is displayed on each of the digits 1 and 2 (“00” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S4004. Thus, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) becomes “0000”. Also, digit 5 (set value display LED 73) turns off.
The digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) may be turned off.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2145, and similarly to step S2134, an output request set at the end of setting change is performed. This process is a process of ending the setting change process and setting a control command for informing the sub-control board 80 of the determined set value.
Next, proceeding to step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process proceeds to step S2147 to shift to a main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing.
In step S2171, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer indicates an area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, and the like) at the time of power failure when a power failure occurs. Is a process for setting a register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S2172, a game start set process is performed. This processing is processing such as generation, update, and storage of an operation state flag.
In the next step S4011, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, it is assumed that the number of medals paid out in the previous game (the number of acquired medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4). In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4011.

In the next step S2173, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet at the present time.
In the next step S2174, it is determined whether or not there is a bet medal based on the bet number read in step S2173.
If it is determined in step S2174 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2176. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform a medal insertion waiting process, and then proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process in step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on. If the setting key switch 12 is on, a process of shifting to a setting check (setting check mode) is performed.

In step S2176, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the medal has been cleaned, determining whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, a process of updating soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1”) a processing random number (soft random number) for processing (arithmetic processing) into a built-in random number (hard random number) used by the role lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented during interrupt processing) to a value before update may be executed.

  In the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2179. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2173. Even if the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the specified number of the game, "No" is determined in the step S2178.

In step S2179, the process at the time of receiving the start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change disable flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, setting the number of times a medal insertion signal is output, and the like.
In step S2180, the role lottery means 61 executes the role lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value (hard random number random number value) at the time of the lottery lottery is obtained in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, the random number value of the processing random number is added to the obtained random number value, and whether or not the added random number value is a random number value corresponding to one of the winning combinations is determined by using the role lottery table. Then, the judgment is performed.

In the next step S4012, a pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) is executed.
In this processing, when a game having an advantageous pressing order (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B) in the indicated game section, the pressing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. It is a process to perform the same.
When the process proceeds to step S4012, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. Although details will be described later, in a game having an advantageous pushing order, pushing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by an interrupt process executed after this process. Is done.

In the next step S2181, a reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of the reel 31. In the next step S2183, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal has been received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the lottery of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185.
In step S2185, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S4013. If it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S4013, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, it is assumed that a game having an advantageous pushing order is performed in the designated gaming section, and pushing order indication information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes “00” due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4013.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00011111 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), or “OFF” display data (00000000B) is provided instead of “0” display data. Is also good.

In step S2186, a symbol display determination (winning determination) is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred, and if it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to non-recoverable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), and if a display error has not occurred. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S4014.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is performed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol that should not be originally displayed (a kicking symbol) is displayed on the activated line, it is determined that the symbol is abnormal (“E5” error), and the return shown in FIG. 136 is performed. Execute impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

If it is determined in step S2187 that a display error has not occurred, the process advances to step S4014 to execute a medal payout number update process. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the next step S4015, the payout means 67 executes a medal payout process by winning. This process is a process of paying out medals corresponding to a winning combination (small combination). When the stored number is less than “50”, the process of adding the stored number is performed until the stored number reaches “50”. When the stored number is equal to or more than "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to control the hopper 35 to pay out medals to the player. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2190 to perform an interrupt waiting process. This processing is the same as the processing in step S2139 in FIG.
In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited. By the processing in steps S2190 and S2191, interrupt processing is prohibited immediately after interrupt processing.
In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This processing is the same as the processing in step S2126 in FIG.

Next, the flow advances to step S2193 to execute a ratio setting process. This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the used area.
In the ratio setting process, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) displays the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (6000 times), the character ratio (6000 times), the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the character ratio. In order to display (accumulated), this is a process of executing various counter value update processes, ratio calculation processes, and the like.

  Then, in step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and in the next step S2195, interruption is permitted (restarted). In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited before the execution. The prohibition of interrupt processing during the execution of the ratio setting processing is that if an interrupt processing is executed when executing a program outside the used area in the main processing, the program inside the used area and the program outside the used area are mixed. This is because the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the flow advances to step S2196 to perform a game end check process. In this process, a condition device flag (winning flag, winning flag) is cleared. The process advances to step S2197 to perform an output request set at the end of the game and a control command set 1 in the next step S2198. These processes are the same as steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 226, and are the processes for setting the control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
When the process in step S2198 ends, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 of FIG.
In step S4021, it is determined whether or not it is the designated game section (AT).
Here, when it is determined that it is the designated game section, the process proceeds to the next step S4022.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the designated game section, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In this case, since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) has been cleared in step S4011 of FIG. 227 and step S4026 is skipped, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) remains "0". Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) remains "00".

In step S4022, a condition device number is set. The condition device number determined in the role lottery process in step S2180 in FIG. 227 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) and the accessory condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the RWM 53. In step S4022, the value of the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) is stored in the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S4023 to set a pressing order instruction number table. In step S4023, the head address “1900 (H)” of the pressing order instruction number table shown in FIG. 225 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value becomes “1900 (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S4024.

In step S4024, designated address data is set. In step S4024, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the pressing order instruction number table is obtained.

For example, when the small lottery B1 is won in the lottery process of step S2180 in FIG. 227, the condition device number “11” of the small role B1 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR). Therefore, after the process in step S4022, the A register value becomes “11”.
Further, the A register value "11" is added to the HL register value "1900 (H)" after the processing in step S4023 to obtain a new HL register value "190B (H)". In this way, it is possible to calculate the address of the storage area of the pressing order instruction number of the small win B1.
Then, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the address “190B (H)” of the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register. Thus, the A register value after the processing in step S4024 becomes “A1 (H)”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S4025, and the pressing order instruction number is stored in the RWM 53. That is, the A register value is stored in the storage area of the pressing order instruction number in the RWM 53.
As described above, by performing the arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value, the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number is calculated and stored in the RWM 53. be able to.

In the next step S4026, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) in step S4026 in FIG. 228, the push order instruction is given to the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by interrupt processing executed after this processing. Information is displayed.
For example, suppose that “A2 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as a pressing order instruction number. In this case, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134 calculates “10” as the upper digit offset value and “2” as the lower digit offset value from the pressing order instruction number “A2 (H)”. I do.

Then, by reading the address obtained by adding the offset value “10” of the upper digit to the head address “1817 (H)” of the LED segment table 2, that is, the data of “1821 (H)”, “=” is input to digit 3. indicate.
Similarly, by reading the address obtained by adding the lower-order offset value “2” to the head address “1817 (H)” of the LED segment table 2, that is, the data of “1819 (H)”, “2” is added to the digit 4. Is displayed.
In this way, the push order instruction information “= 2” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number update processing in step S4014 of FIG. 227.
First, in step S4031, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination (winning determination) in step S2186 in FIG. 227, the number of medal payouts corresponding to the combination of symbols is read from a data table or the like.

In the next step S4032, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is saved (stored) in the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is "0" at the time of the processing of step S4031, a process of newly writing data is executed. For example, when winning one copy, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”.
When a winning combination having a medal payout is not won, whether or not to perform the processing of step S4031 is optional. For example, there are a method of skipping step S4031 and a method of executing the process of step S4031 and writing a data value “0”.

In the next step S4033, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is stored (stored) in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value written in the previous game remains in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), the medal payout number data (“0” when there is no medal payout) in the game is written (overwritten) processing. Execute
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In the above-described medal payout number updating process of FIG. 229, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4032 is thereafter decremented by "1" each time one medal payout is performed. At the end, it becomes "0".
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4033 is maintained until the next game is updated, that is, until the process of step S4033 is performed in the next game. Absent).

FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process by winning (MS_WIN_PAY) in step S4015 in FIG. 227.
First, in step S4041, medal payout number data is acquired. This processing is to store the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53 in the A register. As a result, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S4042, and it is determined whether or not medals are paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (A register value) of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value is “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a payout of medals, the process proceeds to step S4043.

In step S4043, the stored number of sheets is read. Specifically, the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 is obtained.
Next, the flow proceeds to step S4044, and it is determined whether or not the number of stored medals has reached a limit value. Specifically, when the stored number data obtained in step S4043 is "50", it is determined that the stored number has reached the limit value, and the flow advances to step S4083 to determine whether the obtained stored number data is less than "50". If there is, it is determined that the number of stored sheets has not reached the limit value, and the flow advances to step S4045.

In step S4045, the standby time at the time of adding the stored medals is set. In the present embodiment, the number of interrupt processes “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = approximately 100 ms) is set in order to set approximately 100 ms as the wait time. Therefore, “00000000 (B)” is set as the B register value, and “00101110 (B)” is set as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S4046 to execute a waiting process for a 2-byte time. In this process, the value of the BC register is subtracted for each interrupt process, and the process waits until the value becomes "0".

When the two-byte waiting process in step S4046 ends, the flow advances to step S4047 to execute a one-by-one addition process of the number of stored sheets. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53. Then, the display of digits 1 and 2 (reserved number display LED 76) is set to "+1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4047. For example, the display of the stored number display LED 76 changes from “08” to “09”.
Upon completion of the process in the step S4047, the process advances to a step S4049.

  When the process proceeds from step S4044 to step S4048, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. By the above processing, the stored number is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number is the limit, a process of paying out the actual medals from the hopper 35 is executed.

  In step S4049, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. The display of digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) is set to "+1" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4049. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from “02” to “03”.

In the next step S4050, “1” is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
In step S4050, only the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated.

  Next, the flow proceeds to step S4051 to determine whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the updated medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) has become “0”. When it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends, and when it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is not “0”. Returns to step S4043.

In the above-described payout processing, when performing the payout in which one storage number is added, a standby time of about 100 ms is set by the processing of steps S4045 and S4046. Thereby, it is possible to show to the player that the display of the stored number display LED 76 is counted up. For example, when the display of the stored number display LED 76 before the storage addition is “08” and eight medals are stored and added thereto, “display“ 08 ”→ 100 ms weight processing → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms ... → 100 ms wait processing → display “16”. On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when adding the number of stored sheets to one, it looks as if the display is instantaneously changed from "08" to "16".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when the number of stored sheets is added, by executing a waiting process for two bytes for each one-sheet addition, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side (“Plurule ...”) ) And the count of the number of stored sheets can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the stored number exceeds the maximum number of “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the process of step S4048, the waiting process of two bytes in steps S4046 and S4047 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. As a result, the payout time per one medal is about 100 ms. Therefore, when paying out the actual medals, the waiting process for the 2-byte time is not provided. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a waiting process for a 2-byte time.

FIG. 231 (1) is a diagram showing a state in which “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during setting change (seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4 are lit, respectively). is there.
As described above, in step S4001 of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 226, “88 (D)” (in binary notation) indicating that the setting is being changed is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. 0101000 (B) ”), and in the next step S4002,“ 11100000 (B) ”corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53. Then, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

Here, when “88 (D)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S147 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is changed to “88 (D)”. D) ”is obtained and stored in the A register.
In step S1450 in FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “88 (D)” by “10 (D)” is performed, and the quotient “8 (D)” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value. The remainder “8 (D)” is stored in the C register as a lower digit offset value.

  Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “8 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By the addition, “8” display data (address “181F (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed in digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, similarly to the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the LED of FIG. By adding the lower digit offset value “8 (D)” to the start address of the segment table 2, “8” display data is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In this way, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change.
The display of “88” is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process in FIG. 226. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is changed from “88” to “00” by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

FIG. 231 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which “= 1” is displayed on the acquired number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4) as the push order instruction information in the instruction game section.
As described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 227, when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is established in the designated game section, the RWM 53 The pressing order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Then, when the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by interrupt processing executed after this processing. You.

For example, it is assumed that the pressing order instruction number “A3 (H)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, in step S147 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, “A3 (H)” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register.
In step S1450 in FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “A3 (H)” by “10 (D)” is executed, and “A (H)” (“10 (D)” is used as the upper digit offset value. )) Is obtained and stored in the A register, and “3 (H)” (“3 (D)”) is obtained as the lower digit offset value and stored in the C register.

  Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “10 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By the addition, “=” display data (address “1821 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "=", which is a part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed on digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, in step S1455 in FIG. 134, the lower digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By the addition, “3” display data (address “181A (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "3", which is another part of the pressing order instruction information, is displayed on digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78).

In this way, when a game having an advantageous pushing order is achieved in the designated gaming section, pushing order indication information “= 3” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display of the pressing order instruction information “= 3” is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4013 of the main process in FIG. When the obtained number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) is changed from "= 3" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after this processing. .

FIG. 231 (3) shows a state in which a “dE” error (opening of the front door), which is one of the recoverable errors, is detected and “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). FIG.
When the front door is opened, the door switch 15 turns on. At this time, if it is detected that the door switch 15 has been turned on in the input port reading process of step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133, "dE" is stored as an error number in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53. "35 (H)" corresponding to the "error" is stored (FIG. 222).

Then, when “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) indicates “dE error” by interrupt processing executed after this processing. dE "is displayed.
Here, when “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), in step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. 134, the error number “35 (H)” is read from the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). Is obtained and stored in the B register.

In step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is being displayed (“Yes”) because the B register value is not “0”. In the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register and the LED is set. The head address of the segment table 1 is set in the HL register.
Further, in step S1450 in FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “35 (H)” (“53 (D)”) by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “5 (D)” is higher. The A register stores the digit offset value, and the remainder “3 (D)” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “5 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. By the addition, “d” display data (address “1816 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "d" is displayed in digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. By the addition, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed at digit 4 (the lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78).

In this way, when a “dE” error occurs, “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Further, the display of "dE" is not canceled only by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15, but continues until the error is cleared.
When the door key is inserted into the keyhole of the front door and rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, the reset switch 14 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected that the reset switch 14 has been turned on by the input port reading process of step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133, the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53 indicates that there is no error data. 00 (H) "is stored (FIG. 222).

As a result, the error is released. Then, by the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) returns from "dE" to the original display (for example, the acquired number "09").
As described above, when a recoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover from the error by removing the cause of the error and operating the reset switch 14 without turning on / off the power switch 11. .
The “dE” error may be canceled by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15.

FIG. 231 (4) shows an “E1” error (an error indicating that it is determined that the return from the power-off is not normal), which is one of the unrecoverable errors, and “E1” is the acquired number display LED 78 (digit). It is a figure which shows the state displayed on 3 and 4).
In the program start processing executed when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, if it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs and the non-recoverable error processing shown in FIG. Go to 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

When the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 1, the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed.
When an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by the non-recoverable error processing 1.

Here, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred, before shifting to the unrecoverable error processing, the L register stores segment data for displaying the lower digits of the occurred unrecoverable error.
If it is determined in the program start processing that an “E1” error has occurred, a segment for displaying the lower-order digit “1” of the “E1” error in the L register before shifting to the non-recoverable error processing 1 The data “00000110 (B)” is stored.

In step S1491 of FIG. 136, digit data “01000000 (B)” for lighting digit 4 is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, in step S1492 of FIG. 136, digit data “00100000 (B)” for lighting digit 3 is stored in the D register, and the upper digit “E” of the “E1” error is displayed in the E register. Segment data “01111001 (B)” is stored.

Then, in step S1497 of FIG. 136, the data (digit signal) stored in the D register is output from the output port 2, and the data (segment signal) stored in the E register is output from the output port 3. As a result, “E” is displayed on digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In step S1501 of FIG. 136, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. In the next step S1502, the data stored in the D register is output from the output port 2 as in step S1497. 3 outputs the data stored in the E register. As a result, "1" is displayed on digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Thereafter, the process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 and the process of displaying “1” on the digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly executed until the return process is performed.
In this way, when an “E1” error occurs, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off once. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating it clockwise by 90 degrees, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared by the initialization process in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 226, and the return process is performed.

FIG. 231 (5) shows a state in which the stored number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) displays the stored number “50” and the obtained number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displays the obtained number “09”. FIG.
When the number of stored medals is 50, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53.
When the number of medals to be paid out (the number of players acquired) is 9, the acquired number data "9" is finally stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53.

  Further, when the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), in step S1443 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, the stored number data “_NB_CREDIT” 50 "is obtained and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, an operation of dividing the A register value “50” by “10” is executed, the quotient “5” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value, and the remainder “0” is stored in the lower digit. Is stored in the C register as an offset value for use.

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “5” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. As a result, display data “5” (address “181C (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, “5” is displayed in digit 1 (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 76).

In addition, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “0” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, “0” is displayed in digit 2 (the lower digit of the stored number display LED 76).
In this way, “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76.

  When the acquired number data “9” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S147 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134, the acquired number data “ 9 "is obtained and stored in the A register. Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “9” by “10” is executed, the quotient “0” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value, and the remainder “9” Is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, in step S1455 in FIG. 134, the upper digit offset value “0” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, “0” is displayed in digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “9” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. As a result, display data “9” (address “1820 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, “9” is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In this way, “09” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the operation information of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is important information relating to whether or not medals are paid out.
However, if the segments of the acquisition number display LEDs 78 (digits 3 and 4) are out of order or if the signal lines for transmitting signals to these segments are faulty, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is acquired. There is a possibility that the number is not correctly displayed on the number display LED 78, which may cause disadvantage to the player.

Here, it is assumed that in the designated game section, the small role B5 is won. At this time, if none of the segments has failed and no failure has occurred in any of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segment, the acquired number display LED 78 shows “= 2” indicating the middle first stop. Should be displayed (FIGS. 19 and 20).
However, for example, assume that segment E of digit 4 has failed or that a signal line for transmitting a signal to segment E has failed. In this case, in the designated game section, if the small win B5 is won, the digit 4 is in a state where the segments A, B, D and G are turned on and the segments C, E and F are turned off. In this case, whether "= 2" indicating the middle first stop is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 or "= 3" indicating the right first stop is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, Is indistinguishable.

  Then, the player who saw the digit 4 with the segments A, B, D, and G turned on and the segments C, E, and F turned off, guessed that "3" was displayed on the digit 4, and It is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of the first stop. In this case, the number of obtained medals of the player is one or zero (FIG. 14), and if "= 2" indicating the middle first stop is correctly displayed on the obtained number display LED 78, it could have been obtained. The player cannot acquire nine medals.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, during the setting change, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, seven segments A to G of digit 3 are turned on (“8” is assigned to digit 3). Is displayed), and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", seven segments A to G of digit 4 are turned on ("8" is displayed on digit 4).

  As described above, during the setting change, by turning on the seven segments A to G of the digits 3 and 4, the digits 3 and 4 for which the push order instruction information is displayed during the indicated game section do not fail. It can be confirmed that no trouble has occurred in the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to the digits 3 and 4.

  Also, during the setting change, for example, seven segments A to G of digit 3 are turned on, and among seven segments of digit 4, six of segments A and C to G are turned on. If segment B does not light, it can be determined that segment B of digit 4 has a possibility of failure.

  Furthermore, during the setting change, for example, six of the segments A to E and G of the digit 3 are turned on, but the segment F is not turned on and the six of the segments A to E and G of the digit 4 are turned on. When the segment F is lit but the segment F is not lit, not only may the segment F of the digits 3 and 4 be out of order but also the signal line transmitting the segment signal to the segment F may have a failure. Then it can be determined. In particular, since the setting change is performed by the hall clerk before the opening of the hall, the clerk of the hall can check whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line before the opening of the hall, The player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an error “dE” occurs, “d” is displayed in digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing at the time of "B)", "E" is displayed on the digit 4.

Here, when "d" is displayed on the digit 3, the segments B, C, D, E and G of the digit 3 are turned on. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to these segments.
When "E" is displayed on the digit 4, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 4 are turned on. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to these segments.

  Further, in the digits 3 and 4, the segments A to G are also used. Therefore, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E, and G of the digit 3 are lit and that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 4 are lit, the segment A to G signals It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in a portion of the line common to digits 3 and 4.

Note that, of the segment A to G signal lines, the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 is a branching unit where the signal line branches from the output port 3 (D0 to D7 output terminals of the IC 3) to the digit 3 and the digit 4. Means up to.
Further, among the segments A to G signal lines, a portion common to the digits 3 and 4 includes a harness and a connector for connecting the main control board 50 and the display board 75.
Therefore, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E and G of the digit 3 are turned on and that the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 4 are turned on, the display from the main control board 50 is performed. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal to the substrate 75.

In particular, when the hall clerk opens the front door in order to supply medals to the hopper 35 before or during the opening of the hall, for example, the door switch 15 is turned on, and “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Is displayed. Accordingly, before or during the opening of the hall, the clerk of the hall can check whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.
During the setting confirmation, unlike the setting change, “88” is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. However, if the front door is open, the door switch 15 remains on, and the acquisition number display LED 78 "DE" continues to be displayed. Thereby, the clerk of the hall can check whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line, and it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the player.

  Further, when the setting is confirmed, the menu display, which is one of the screens for the clerk of the hall, is displayed on the image display device 23. On the menu screen, items such as "volume setting" and "setting change history", "current volume" and "date and time of last setting change" are displayed. Then, by operating the cross key 24 to select the item of “setting change history” and operating the menu button 25 in this state, a “setting change history screen” is displayed on the image display device 23. On the setting change history screen, the "date and time of setting change" and "set value after change" can be confirmed a plurality of times.

As described above, during the setting check, the set value can be checked while looking at the image display device 23 provided on the front side of the front door. Therefore, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 also provided on the front side of the front door. It is easy to confirm whether or not is displayed correctly.
However, it is not preferable to display the set value on the image display device 23 in a situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23. Therefore, when the setting is confirmed during the setting check, the image display device 23 first displays the setting value. The menu screen where no value is displayed is displayed.
In a situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23, the clerk of the hall may confirm the set value with the set value display LED 73 provided inside the slot machine 10.

In addition, in order to change the setting or confirm the setting, there is a case where a fraudulent act of opening the front door without permission of a store clerk is performed. Further, in order to prevent the clerk in the hall from noticing that such misconduct has been performed, misconduct such as breaking the sub-control board 80 or cutting off the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is performed. May be done.
If the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 do not operate, so that an error is notified using them. Disappears.

Here, if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 do not operate. Notification is not performed.
However, in the present embodiment, since the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, even if the sub-control board 80 is broken or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, it is possible for a person who commits an improper act. Is known for an advantageous pushing order.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when opening of the front door is detected, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Thus, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub-control board 80 is cut off, the clerk at the hall can know that the front door has been opened.
When the acquired number display LED 78 is destroyed, “dE” is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the pressing order instruction information is not displayed. In this case, even a wrongdoer cannot know the advantageous pushing order. For this reason, the destruction of the acquisition number display LED 78 can be suppressed by displaying the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78.
That is, by displaying both the error information and the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, even if the sub-control board 80 is destroyed, the destruction of the acquired number display LED 78 is suppressed while displaying the error information. can do.

  In the present embodiment, when an “E1” error occurs, no interrupt processing is executed, but a digit signal is output from the output port 2 and a segment signal is output from the output port 3 so that “E” is displayed on the digit 3. And a process of outputting a digit signal from the output port 2 and outputting a segment signal from the output port 3 alternately and repeatedly so as to display “1” on the digit 4.

Here, when "E" is displayed on the digit 3, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 3 are turned on. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to these segments.
When "1" is displayed on digit 4, segments B and C of digit 4 are turned on. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines transmitting the segment signals to these segments.

Further, since segments A to G are also used in digits 3 and 4, segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 3 are turned on, and segments B and C of digit 4 are turned on. By confirming this, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the portions common to the digits 3 and 4 in the segment A to G signal lines.
That is, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75.

In particular, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, it is determined in the program start processing that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value. Therefore, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, an “E1” error always occurs, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) in FIG.
When an "E1" error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off once, and then the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. To Thereby, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the “E1” error is released.

As described above, when the power switch 11 is first turned on after the factory shipment, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. When an operation for canceling the “E1” error is performed, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), and “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Thus, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the clerk in the hall can check whether there is a failure in the segment and whether there is a failure in the signal line, so that no disadvantage is given to the player. be able to.
In particular, when transporting from a factory to a hall or installing in a hall, a failure may occur in a harness and a connector for transmitting a digit signal and a segment signal. Therefore, when the power switch 11 is first turned on, it is effective to confirm that “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 in order to confirm that no failure has occurred in the harness and the connector. It is.

  In the present embodiment, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing of (1), the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 2. Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.

  Here, if it can be confirmed that a numerical value from "0" to "2" is displayed in digit 1, it is confirmed that segments A to G of digit 1 have not failed and that segment A to G signals are transmitted to digit 1. It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted. This is also true for digits 2 to 4.

  Since the segments A to G are also used in the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 1 are turned on. It is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred for the common part in FIG. That is, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75.

Here, when the player inserts medals through the medal slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is 0, the first three medals are bet for the game without being stored (credited) (betting). )) The fourth and subsequent medals are stored.
Therefore, for example, when the player inserts five medals from the medal insertion slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is 0, two medals are stored, so the stored number display LED 76 (digit 1) And the display of 2) changes as "00" → "01" → "02". As a result, numerical values from "0" to "2" are sequentially displayed on the digit 2 (lower digit of the stored number display LED 76), and when the player confirms this, the segments A to G of the digit 2 are displayed. Can be confirmed that there is no failure, and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines for transmitting the segments A to G in the digits 1 to 4.

  In a hall where 50 medals can be borrowed for 1,000 yen, when a player borrows 50 medals and inserts all of them through the medal slot 43 at the start of the game, the number of stored medals becomes 47. . At this time, since the numbers from “00” to “47” are sequentially displayed on the stored number display LED 76, when the player confirms this, the segments A to G of the digits 1 and 2 have failed. It can be confirmed that there is no failure, and that no failure has occurred in the signal lines for transmitting the segments A to G in the digits 1 to 4.

<29th embodiment>
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, no digit 5 is provided. Then, in a situation where the number of acquired medals is displayed, the acquired number is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquired number display LED 78), and in a situation where the pushing order instruction information is displayed, the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the digits 3 and 4. Is displayed, and the set value is displayed on the digit 4 when the set value can be changed.
Also, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, similarly to the twenty-eighth embodiment, when an “dE” error occurs, “dE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when an “E1” error occurs, “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. Is displayed.

Here, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the digits 1 to 4 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twenty-first embodiment.
That is, as shown in FIG. 138, the output port 3 outputs the digit 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals, and the output port 4 outputs the segment A to G signals. Also, the segments A to G signals are shared by the digits 1 to 4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000001 (B)”, digit 1 can be turned on, and when the LED display counter value is “00000010 (B)”. In the interrupt processing of (2), digit 2 can be turned on. Digit 3 can be turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”, and digit 4 can be turned on in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. Becomes
In this way, the digit to be turned on is sequentially switched for each interruption process. That is, dynamic lighting is performed.

FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 222 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the setting change display data (“88”) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during the setting change. However, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the setting change display data is used instead of the setting change display data. , Set value display data (any value of “1” to “6”).
The storage of the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) is the same in the twenty-eighth embodiment and the twenty-ninth embodiment, but the value of the LED display request flag is set in the twenty-eighth embodiment. And the 29th embodiment.
Except for the above, it is the same as FIG. 222 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a relationship among the set value data, the set value display data, and the set value display.
As described above, the setting value data is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
The set value display data is data obtained by adding “1” to the set value data, and is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during the setting change.
When the set value is “N”, the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) stores the set value data “N−1”. The set value display data “N” is stored in (_NB_PAYOUT), and the set value “N” is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 226 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the flowcharts described below, steps for performing the same processes as those in the twenty-eighth embodiment are given the same step numbers, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. Steps having contents different from those in the twenty-eighth embodiment are underlined in step numbers.

Step S4101 is a step corresponding to step S4001 in FIG. 226. Here, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
The next step S4102 is a step corresponding to step S4002 in FIG. 226. Here, “000001100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
By the processing in step S4102, the digits 3 and 4 (the acquired number display LED 78) can be turned on. Then, the current setting value is displayed on digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) by an interrupt process executed after the process of step S4102.

In step S4103, similar to step S4101 described above, set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Note that a step corresponding to step S4103 is not provided in FIG.
The next step S4104 is a step corresponding to step S4004 in FIG. 226. Here, “11111111 (B)” corresponding to the normal state is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
Then, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78) becomes “0000” by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4104. The stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off.
Except for the above, it is the same as the flowchart in FIG. 226 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the setting value display data setting processing in steps S4101 and S4103 of FIG.
First, in step S4111, set value data is obtained from the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), and in the next step S4112, “1” is added to the set value data to generate set value display data. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S4413.
In step S4113, the setting value display data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 236 (1) is a diagram showing a state where set values "1" to "6" are displayed on digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78) during setting change.
As described above, in step S4101 of the setting change process in FIG. 234, the set value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and in the next step S4102, the LED display request flag storage area ( _FL_LED_DSP), the LED display request flag “000001100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored. Then, the set value is displayed on the digit 4 by the interrupt processing executed after this processing.

  Here, it is assumed that, for example, “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the set value display data. In this case, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, in step S1449, the set value display data “6” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register. In step S1450, an operation of dividing the set value display data “6” stored in the A register by “10” is performed, and the quotient “0” is stored in the A register as an upper digit offset value. “6” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “6” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. As a result, display data “6” (address “181D (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "6" is displayed in digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

  If the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 of FIG. 234, the process proceeds to step S2141 where the setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated, and in the next step S4103, the setting Value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the updated set value is displayed on digit 4 by an interrupt process executed after this process.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S2140 in FIG. 234, the processes in steps S2140 to S4103 are repeated until the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142. This causes the display of digit 4 to be switched in the order of “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1” →... As shown in FIG. 236 (1).
In this way, the setting value is displayed on digit 4 while the setting is being changed.
The display of the set value is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process in FIG. 234. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of digit 4 is changed from the set value (any value of “1” to “6”) by an interrupt process executed after this process. It becomes "0".

FIG. 236 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which the pressing order instruction information “= 1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in the instruction game section. The processing for displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is the same as that in FIG. 231 (2).
FIG. 236 (3) is a diagram illustrating a state in which the acquired number “09” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The process for displaying the acquired number on the acquired number display LED 78 is the same as that in FIG. 231 (5).

As described above, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, during the setting change, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. I do.
During the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. Switch to →.

Here, if it can be confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4" is displayed in the digit 4, for example, it is confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not out of order, and the segment A to the G signal It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line transmitting the signal.
In addition, since the segments A to G signals are also used in the digits 3 and 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, the digits 3 and 4 of the segment A to G signal lines are checked. It is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred for the common part in FIG. That is, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control board 50 to the display board 75. In particular, since the clerk of the hall can confirm the change of the set value before the opening of the hall, there is no disadvantage to the player.

<Modifications of Twenty-eighth and Twentieth Embodiments>
As described above, the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and for example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the indicated game section, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is set, the digit 3 is pressed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. “=” Which is a part of the instruction information is displayed, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, “1” to “4” which is another part of the pushing order instruction information in the digit 4 are displayed. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(2) In the circuit configuration according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is performed in the designated game section, the digit processing is performed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. May be displayed with push order instruction information "1" to "3".
Regarding digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, or not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). ).

(3) In the circuit configuration according to the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3 when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” during the setting change. In the interrupt process, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
As a result, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 have not failed, and that the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 3 has not failed.

(4) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lit).
Accordingly, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are turned on, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 in the segment A to G signal lines.

(5) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, a numerical value from “0” to “2” may be displayed on the digit 3. .
Even in this case, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are not out of order and that the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 3 is not out of order.

(6) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, when the “dE” error occurs, the LED display counter value is set to “00100000 (B)”. , "D" may be displayed on digit 3 and "E" may be displayed on digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)".
Thus, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E and G of the digit 3 are turned on and that the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 4 are turned on, the segment A to G signals It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in a portion common to the digits 3 and 4 in the line.

(7) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, a process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 when an “E1” error occurs. And the process of displaying “1” on digit 4 may be alternately and repeatedly executed.
Thus, by confirming that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are turned on, and that the segments B and C of the digit 4 are turned on, the digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines is changed. 4 and 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the common part.

(8) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” is performed. The upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G are turned on for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no failure has occurred in the portion common to the digits 1 to 4 in the segment A to G signal lines. it can.

  (9) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is performed in the designated game section, the digit 3 is set in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. Is displayed or digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off), and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the push order instruction information " “1” to “3” may be displayed.

(10) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lit).
As a result, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed, and that the signal line for transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digit 4 has not failed.

(11) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” during the setting change. In the interrupt process, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are turned on, it is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(12) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, a numerical value from “0” to “2” may be displayed on the digit 4. .
Even in this case, it can be confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are not out of order and that the signal lines for transmitting the segments A to G in the digit 4 are not out of order.

(13) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, when the "dE" error occurs, the LED display counter value is set to "00100000 (B)". , "D" may be displayed on digit 3 and "E" may be displayed on digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)".
Thus, by confirming that the segments B, C, D, E and G of the digit 3 are turned on and that the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 4 are turned on, the segment A to G signals It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in a portion common to the digits 3 and 4 in the line.

(14) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, a process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 when an “E1” error occurs. And the process of displaying “1” on digit 4 may be alternately and repeatedly executed.
Thus, by confirming that the segments A, D, E, F, and G of the digit 3 are turned on, and that the segments B and C of the digit 4 are turned on, the digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines is changed. 4 and 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the common part.

(15) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the interruption processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” is performed. The upper digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored number is displayed in digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed in digit 4.
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G are turned on for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no failure has occurred in the portion common to the digits 1 to 4 in the segment A to G signal lines. it can.

  (16) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous push order is performed in the designated game section, the push order is switched to digit 3 by interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”. “=” Which is a part of the instruction information is displayed, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, “1” to “4” which is another part of the push order instruction information are added to the digit 4. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(17) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is performed in the designated game section, the digit processing is performed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”. May be displayed with push order instruction information "1" to "3".
For digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, or not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). ).

(18) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 3, when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on digit 4 in the interrupt processing.
During the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. Switch to →.

Then, if it is confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4" is displayed in the digit 4, for example, it is confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and the segment A to G signals are transmitted to the digit 4. It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted.
Also, since the segments 3 to 4 share the segment A to G signals, it is confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are turned on. It is possible to confirm that no failure has occurred in the common part.

(19) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is performed in the designated game section, the digit 4 is interrupted when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”. May be displayed with push order instruction information "1" to "3".
Regarding digit 3, “0” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”, or may not be displayed (segments A to G are turned off). .

(20) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)” during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on digit 4 in the interrupt processing.
During the setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (set value) of the digit 4 is changed from “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1”. Switch to →.
Then, if it is confirmed that a numerical value from "2" to "4" is displayed in the digit 4, for example, it is confirmed that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and the segment A to G signals are transmitted to the digit 4. It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted.

  (21) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) during the setting change. At this time, for the digit 3 (higher digit of the acquisition number display LED 78), “0” may be displayed, “_” may be displayed (only segment D is lit), or non-display (segments A to G may be turned off).

  (22) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 225, as the advantageous pushing order, there are three types of left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop, There are four types of push order instruction numbers, "A0 (H)" to "A3 (H)", and four types of push order instruction information, "= 0" to "= 3". However, it is not limited to this.

(23) As shown in FIG. 237, nine types of advantageous pressing orders are provided, including a pressing order of 123 (left center right) and the like, in addition to a pressing order of three selections such as the first left stop. Ten types of “A0 (H)” to “A9 (H)” may be provided as the pressing order instruction numbers, and ten types of “= 0” to “= 9” may be provided as the pressing order instruction information.
Also in this case, by storing the push order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information “= 0” to “= 9” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). can do.

(24) In FIG. 237, the push order instruction number corresponding to the first left stop is “A1 (H)”, and the push order instruction information is “= 1”. The instruction number may be “A1 (H)” and the pressing order instruction information may be “= 1”.
Similarly, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the first left stop may be “A7 (H)”, and the pressing order instruction information may be “= 7”.
As described above, the relationship between the advantageous pressing order, the pressing order instruction number, and the pressing order instruction information can be set as appropriate.

Specifically, for example, the pressing order instruction numbers may be “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on digit 3 as the pressing order instruction information. At this time, digit 4 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). In this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data “00000000 (B)” instead of “=” display data.
Further, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on digit 4 as the push order instruction information. At this time, digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). Also in this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data “00000000 (B)” instead of “=” display data.

  Further, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be "1" to "9", and "01" to "09" may be displayed on digits 3 and 4 as the push order instruction information. “10” to “90”, and “10”, “20”, “30”,... “80” or “90” may be displayed on the digits 3 and 4 as the pressing order instruction information. The order designation numbers are “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, and the digits 3 and 4 are “1 =”, “2 =”, “3 =”. Alternatively, “9 =” may be displayed.

  (25) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, when there is no advantageous pushing order (the pushing order designation number “A0 (H)”) in the designated game section, the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) Although the pressing order instruction information “= 0” is displayed, the acquired number display LED 78 may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off) without displaying “= 0”.

(26) When a game having an advantageous pressing order is made in the indicated game section, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), and digit 4 (the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed). Information indicating the next stop switch 42 to be operated (next operation instruction information) may be displayed at the lower digit.
Of course, on the contrary, the next operation instruction information may be displayed on the digit 3 and the pressing order instruction information may be displayed on the digit 4.

Here, regarding the push order instruction information, “left center right” is “1”, “left and right middle” is “2”, “middle left and right” is “3”, “middle right left” is “4”, “Right and left middle” is “5”, and “right and left middle” is “6”. Also, “left first stop” is set to “7”, “middle first stop” is set to “8”, and “right first stop” is set to “9”.
Furthermore, regarding the next operation instruction information, “left” is set to “1”, “middle” is set to “2”, and “right” is set to “3”. Further, when there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information is set to “0”.

In this case, when the advantageous pressing order is “middle left / right” and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is “middle”, “3” is displayed on the digit 3 as the pressing order instruction information, and the next digit is displayed on the digit 4 “2” is displayed as the operation instruction information. At this time, “32” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When the advantageous pressing order is “middle left / right” and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is “left”, “3” is displayed as the pressing order instruction information on the digit 3 and the next operation is performed on the digit 4 “1” is displayed as the instruction information. At this time, “31” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).

Furthermore, when the advantageous pressing order is “right first stop” and the next stop switch 42 to be operated is “right”, “9” is displayed on the digit 3 as the pressing order instruction information, and the digit 4 is displayed. "3" is displayed as the next operation instruction information. At this time, “93” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Further, when the advantageous pressing order is "right first stop" and there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, "9" is displayed on the digit 3 as the pressing order instruction information, and the next operation instruction is displayed on the digit 4. "0" is displayed as information. At this time, “90” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information may be set to “4” instead of “0”. Further, the digit on which the next operation instruction information is displayed may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off).

(27) In the indicated game section, when a game having an advantageous pushing order is established, the condition number may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (segments 3 and 4).
For example, in the instructed game section, when the player wins the small role B2 of the condition device number “12”, digit 3 (higher than the acquired number display LED 78) is executed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” "1", which is the high-order digit of the condition device number "12", and digit 4 (the low-order digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)". ), “2” which is the lower digit of the condition device number “12” is displayed.

Further, when the player wins the replay B3 of the condition device number “4” in the designated game section, “0” is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the condition device number "3" is displayed on the digit 4.
As described above, when the condition device number is a single digit, “0” may be displayed on the digit 3, but the digit 3 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off).

Furthermore, when the condition device number “0” is not won in the designated game section, “0” may be displayed on each of the digits 3 and 4, and both the digits 3 and 4 are not displayed (segment). A to G may be turned off).
Further, in the designated game section, when a condition device without an advantageous pressing order such as a replay A (condition device number "1") or a small role F (condition device number "29") is obtained, the digit 3 and the digit 3 are used. 4, the condition device number may be displayed, "0" may be displayed in each of the digits 3 and 4, and both the digits 3 and 4 may be hidden (the segments A to G are turned off).

(28) In the indicated game section, when a game having an advantageous pressing order is obtained, the pressing order instruction number is determined by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). May be displayed in a binary number.
In this case, the pressing order instruction numbers are not “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)” but “1” to “9”.
Note that, instead of the digit 4, the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed in a binary number by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G included in the digit 3.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the relationship between segments A to G and bits 0 to 6.
As shown in FIG. 238, segment A corresponds to bit 0 and segment B corresponds to bit 1. Similarly, segments C to G correspond to bits 2 to 6, respectively.
When the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is represented by a binary number, if bit 0 is “0”, segment A of digit 4 is turned off, and if bit 0 is “1”, digit 4 is turned off. Is turned on. The same applies to the segments B to G.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the display data, the display of the digit, and the advantageous push order.
As shown in FIG. 239, the pressing order instruction number “1 (D)” is represented by a binary number “00000001 (B)”, which is used as display data (segment output data) of segments A to G of digit 4. When used, segment A of digit 4 can be turned on and segments B to G can be turned off.
As described above, the push order instruction number is represented by a binary number, and can be displayed in a pattern of lighting or extinguishing the segments A to G of the digit 4. In this case, the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are not used. The same applies to the push order instruction numbers “2 (D)” to “9 (D)”.

For example, it is assumed that in the designated game section, the small role B12 is won. The advantageous pushing order corresponding to the small role B12 is “right first stop”, and the pushing order instruction number is “3 (D)”.
In this case, in the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF), the push order instruction number “3 (D)” (binary “00000011 (B)”) corresponding to the winning small win B12 is assigned to the push order of the RWM 53. It is stored in the number storage area. Further, the pressing order instruction number is not stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
In the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is on), the push order stored in the push order instruction number storage area of the RWM 53. The instruction number “00000011 (B)” is acquired as display data (segment output data), and is output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

Thus, segments A and B of digit 4 can be turned on, and segments C to G can be turned off.
In this way, the numerical value corresponding to the pressing order instruction number can be displayed in binary by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4.
When the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed in a binary number on the digit 4, the digit 3 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information is displayed in a binary number. You may.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the relationship between the next operation instruction information, the display data, the display of the digit, and the stop switch 42 to be operated next.
As shown in FIG. 240, when the stop switch 42 to be operated next is on the left, the next operation instruction information is “1”, which is “00000001 (B)” in binary. Therefore, when the next operation instruction information "1" is displayed on the digit 3 in a binary number, the segment A of the digit 3 is turned on and the segments B to G are turned off. The same applies to the next operation instruction information “2” to “4”.
Note that the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed not in digit 4 but in digit 3 in a binary number. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in a binary number.

(29) In the indicated game section, when a game having an advantageous pushing order is achieved, the condition device number is set by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). It may be displayed in binary.
FIG. 241 is a diagram exemplifying a relationship between the condition device number, the display data, the display of the digit, and the advantageous pressing order for the small wins B1 to B12.
As shown in FIG. 241, the condition device number of the small win B1 is "11", which is "00001011 (B)" when represented by a binary number. Therefore, when the condition device number “11” is displayed on the digit 4 in binary, the segments A, B and D of the digit 4 are turned on, and the segments C and E to G are turned off. The same applies to other condition device numbers.

Specifically, in the designated game section, when the small device B1 with the condition device number “11” is won, the condition device number “11” (binary “00001011 (B)”) is won and replayed by the RWM 53. It is stored in the condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR).
Then, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is ON), the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) of the RWM 53 is stored. The acquired condition device number “00001011 (B)” is acquired as display data (segment output data), and is output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

Thus, the segments A, B, and D of the digit 4 can be turned on, and the segments C and E to G can be turned off.
In this way, the condition device number can be displayed in a binary number by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4.

When the condition device number is displayed on the digit 4 in a binary number, the digit 3 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off) or the next operation instruction information may be displayed in a binary number.
Further, the condition device number may be displayed in digit 3 instead of digit 4 in a binary number. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in a binary number.

  (30) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the digits that can be turned on are different depending on the LED display counter value in the same interrupt processing. For example, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the same interrupt processing, digit 3 can be turned on when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, and when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”. And digit 4 can be turned on. However, the display control of the LEDs including the digits 3 and 4 is not limited to the case of executing the same interrupt processing.

  For example, the interrupt process A is executed, and the interrupt process B is executed independently of the interrupt process A. That is, a plurality of interrupt processes are executed. In the interruption process A, the display of the digit 3 is controlled, and in the interruption process B, the display of the digit 4 is controlled. In this way, the display of the LED including the digits 3 and 4 may be controlled by a plurality of independent interrupt processes.

(31) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the display of the digits 3 and 4 is controlled by the non-recoverable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. However, the display control of the LED at the time of the unrecoverable error is not limited to this.
For example, an interrupt process may be executed even at the time of a non-recoverable error, and the display of the LEDs including the digits 3 and 4 may be controlled by the interrupt process.
In this case, when an unrecoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of the unrecoverable error that has occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.

Specifically, when an “E1” error occurs, the error number “25 (H)” of the “E1” error is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.
In step S1439 of the LED display control in FIG. 134, the error number “25 (H)” is acquired from the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) and stored in the B register.
Further, in step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is being displayed (“Yes”) because the B register value is not “0”, and in the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register. The head address of the LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register.

Further, in step S1450 in FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “25 (H)” (“37 (D)”) by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “3 (D)” is ranked higher. The value is stored in the A register as the digit offset value, and the remainder “7 (D)” is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.
In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit offset value “3 (D)” is added to the leading address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. By adding, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed in digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “7 (D)” is added to the start address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. By the addition, “1” display data (address “1818 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as the segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "1" is displayed at digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).
In this way, when an “E1” error occurs, “E1” can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the interrupt processing. The same applies to other non-recoverable errors.

(32) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) while the setting is being changed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the setting is being changed, “88” may be displayed on the stored number display LEDs 76 (digits 1 and 2) in addition to the acquired number display LED 78. That is, while the setting is being changed, “8888” may be displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4).

Specifically, for example, in the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), “88 (D)” (binary “01011000 ( B))) is stored.
While the setting is being changed, “11111000 (B)” is stored as an LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53.
Then, “8888” is displayed on the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) by the interrupt process executed after these processes.

Further, for example, the stored number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) are dynamically lit, and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is statically lit. While the setting is being changed, “01111000 (B)” is output from the output port 2 as a digit signal and “01111111 (B)” is output as a segment signal from the output port 3 for each interrupt process. As a result, while the setting is being changed, “8” can be simultaneously displayed on digits 1 to 4 for each interrupt process.
In the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), “01111000 (B)” may be output from the output port 2 as a digit signal, and “01111111 (B)” may be output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. .

  (33) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 of FIG. 234, the setting value data (the value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated in step S2141, and in step S4103. The setting value display data is generated from the updated setting value data and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in a modification of the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 234 of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
In the flowcharts described below, the steps that execute the same processes as in the twenty-ninth embodiment are given the same step numbers, and duplicate descriptions are omitted. Steps having contents different from those in the twenty-ninth embodiment are underlined in step numbers.

First, in FIG. 242, step S4121 is provided instead of steps S2141 and S4103 in FIG. In step S4121, the set value display data (the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT)) is updated.
For example, if the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 while the set value display data “1” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S4121, the acquired number data storage area ( _NB_PAYOUT) to store the set value display data “2”.
If the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 while the set value display data “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S4121, the acquired number data storage area ( _NB_PAYOUT) to store the set value display data “1”. Then, the process proceeds to the next Step S2142.

In FIG. 242, a new step S4122 is provided between steps S2142 and S2143. In step S4122, the setting value data (the value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated.
For example, if the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142 while the set value display data “1” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the set value display data “1” is set in step S4122. “0” obtained by subtracting “1” from “1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) as set value data.
If the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142 while the set value display data “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the set value display data “6” is set in step S4122. "5" obtained by subtracting "1" from "" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) as set value data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2143.

(34) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N−1” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the set value is “N”, the set value data “N” may be stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK). In this case, the set value display data can be used without adding “1” to the set value data. That is, when the set value data is “N”, the set value display data is also “N”.

(35) In the flowcharts described in the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the order of the processing is not limited to the order shown in the drawings. If the order of the processing can be changed, the order of the processing is changed. Is also possible.
(36) The twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<30th embodiment>
Subsequently, a thirtieth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating a storage area of the RWM 53 described in the thirtieth embodiment.
In FIG. 243, the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section, a standby section, or an advantageous section. This advantageous section type flag is substantially the same as the game section flag (address “F020 (H)”) shown in FIG. 182 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the advantageous section type flag, the value is “0000000000 (B)” when the section is a normal section, and the D0th bit is “1” when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. When shifting from the normal section to the standby section, the D1 bit becomes “1”. Further, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, "1" of the first bit is shifted right by one. Further, when shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, the D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0”.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is “0” during the normal section and the standby section (it will be “FFFF (H)” for a moment, as will be described in detail later), and shifts to the advantageous section. At this time, "1500 (D)" is set as an initial value (specific value). In addition, the advantageous section flag counter is set so that “1” is subtracted for each game, not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section or the standby section. However, the minimum value is “0”. For this reason, when the advantageous section clear counter (before the subtraction) is “0” in the normal section or the standby section, if “1” is subtracted, the digit is decremented (although “FFFF (H)”). , If a carry-down occurs, it is set to “0”. Therefore, during the normal section and the standby section, “1” is subtracted for each game, but “0” is maintained. In other words, when “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section or a standby section (non- advantageous section).
During the advantageous section, “1” is subtracted for each game. For example, as described above, when “1500 (D)” is set as the initial value (specific value), in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes “1499 (D)”.
The advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at the maximum, and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD) is “0” during the normal section and the standby section. Then, when the slot machine is shifted to the advantageous section and the slot machine first wins the push order bell capable of obtaining the maximum payout number (when the instruction function is operated so as to obtain the maximum payout number (the correct push order is displayed). )) Becomes “00000001 (B)”.
Here, taking the first embodiment as an example, the pressing order bell in which the maximum payout number in the first embodiment can be obtained is the time of winning the small role B (see FIGS. 14 and 15; 9 sheets in the correct answer pressing order). Payout). Therefore, when the small section B is won and the instruction function is activated after the shift to the advantageous section, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1” at a predetermined timing.

  Therefore, for example, when the small combination C is won in the first embodiment (in the order of the correct answer, the number of payouts is 3), it does not correspond to the “maximum payout” here. Further, for example, even if an advantageous pushing order is displayed at the time of replay overlapping winning, it does not correspond to the “maximum payout” here. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, for example, an effect that wins the small role F (10 payouts) and the small role G (9 payouts) and suggests the winning of the small role F and the winning of the small role G, respectively, is provided. Even if output, it does not correspond to "maximum payout" here.

This maximum payout notification flag is
a) winning the condition device having an advantageous mode of operation of the stop switch 42,
b) Among the condition devices having the advantageous operation mode, the winning condition device is the condition device with the largest payout number when the stop switch 42 is operated in the advantageous operation mode;
c) When the indicating function is activated, such as during an AT (when displaying the pressing order indicating information)
Is one of the conditions for updating from “0” to “1”.

In addition, the maximum payout notification flag may be “1” even when an advantageous operation mode for maximum payout is not displayed.
Examples of this include the following.
a) Wins a special role that has no difference in setting (including the duplication of a special role and another small role or replay), and based on the winning of that special role (the special role wins from the time of winning the special role) In the case of shifting to the advantageous section, before the special role is won, the special role is won at a predetermined timing (from the time the special role is won at the time when the special role is won until the special role is won). At the start of a special game, during a special game, at the end of a special game, etc.), the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1”. That is, when shifting to the advantageous section based on the special combination winning, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1” based on the special combination winning.
b) After winning the rare small role (for example, the small role D and the small role E1 in the first embodiment) and shifting to the advantageous section, the special role (the special role having a setting difference or having no setting difference) If the special combination is won, then the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1".
In the case of a) or b), the timing at which the maximum payout notification flag becomes “1” is set at the time of winning the special combination in the thirtieth embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of winning a special role, at a predetermined timing from the time of winning the special role to the time of winning, during a special game, at the end of a special game, or at a predetermined timing after the end of the special game. You may.

The maximum payout notification flag is a flag that is referred to when determining whether or not the advantageous section can be ended. When the maximum payout notification flag is “1”, the advantageous section can be ended. Therefore, after the shift to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the winning of the small payout B with the maximum payout, and the advantageous section can be ended when the maximum payout notification flag becomes “1”.
Further, as described above, when the maximum payout notification flag is set to “1” based on the winning of the special combination, it is possible to end the advantageous section without operating the instruction function once. .

When the maximum payout notification flag is “0”, the advantageous section cannot be ended in principle. After shifting to the advantageous section, the apparatus waits until the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1”, and then ends the advantageous section.
However, when the maximum payout notification flag remains “0” and the game reaches the upper limit game number of the advantageous section “1500”, that is, during the advantageous section of the 1500 game, the player wins the small role B once. If not, even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0", the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section "1500" is given priority, and the advantageous section can be ended.
Further, when the maximum payout notification flag becomes “1” after shifting to the advantageous section, it is updated to “0” at the end of the advantageous section (based on the end of the advantageous section). In the present embodiment, the timing from “1” to “0” corresponds to the initial RWM in step S2746 during the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET; FIG. 246) in step S2724 in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET; FIG. 245) described later. (M_RWM_CLEAR; FIG. 248) (these processes will be described later). The maximum payout notification flag may be updated to “0” in a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (described later) executed for the last game in the advantageous section, for example.

The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag that is “0” during a normal section or a standby section (that is, when the section is not an advantageous section), and is “1” when the section is an advantageous section. When the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, and when the advantageous section display LED flag is “0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.
Here, in the thirtieth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (the twenty-second embodiment), the advantageous section display LED 77 starts from the segment 1P (decimal point (DP)) of the digit 4a (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) It shall be configured.
The transition to the advantageous section and the setting of the advantageous section display LED flag from “0” to “1” are performed in the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). The end of the advantageous section and the change of the advantageous section display LED flag from “1” to “0” are performed by RWM initialization (M_RWM_SET) during the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). . Details of these processes will be described later.

The AT game number counter (_CT_ART) is a decrement counter for counting the number of games in AT (including ART), and is similar to the AT counter of the third embodiment (for example, FIG. 43).
Note that, unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when it becomes “0”, counting (subtraction) thereafter is stopped.
The AT game frequency counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT immediately after the start switch 41 is operated during the main processing (step S2702 in FIG. 244 described later).

In this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed “255 (D)”, a 2-byte counter is used. When the number of AT games is at most "255 (D)" or less, a 1-byte counter may be used.
When starting the AT (or when shifting to during AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like at the time of winning the AT. After the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to “0” without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when it is determined that the number of AT games is to be added during the AT (such as when an additional lottery is won), the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game number counter.

Further, FIG. 243 does not show the address of each data.
F020 (H): Advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): Advantageous section clear counter F023 (H): Maximum payout notification flag F024 (H): Advantageous section display LED flag F025 (H) and F026 (H) ): It is arranged in the storage area of the RWM 53 like the AT game number counter.
Also, some or all of the addresses need not be consecutive addresses. For example,
F020 (H): Advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): Advantageous section clear counter F030 (H): Maximum payout notification flag F031 (H): Advantageous section display LED flag F032 (H) and F033 (H) ): An arrangement such as an AT game number counter may be used.
However, in the case of a storage area composed of 2 bytes, such as the advantageous section clear counter and the AT game number counter, the storage area of the upper digit and the storage area of the lower digit are continuous for convenience of calculation. It is preferably an address.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the thirtieth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 244, the same processes as those in FIG. 188 are denoted by the same step numbers, and different or added processes are denoted by different step numbers, and the step numbers are underlined.
In FIG. 244, the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701 is a process corresponding to step S2172 in FIG. 188 (the twenty-sixth embodiment). In the game start set, at the end of the advantageous section, a process of clearing data (data shown in FIG. 243) relating to the advantageous section is executed. This processing will be described later.

After the start switch is received in step S2179, the process advances to step S2702 to update the AT game number counter. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the above-described AT game number counter during the AT. Therefore, this processing is not executed in the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section during non-AT.
Whether or not to increase the number of AT games during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery result of the role lottery process in step S2180. For example, when the rare role is won, the number of additional games to be added to the AT is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the processing of step S2180 (not shown in FIG. 244).
In the present embodiment, after the start switch is received (step S2179), the AT game number counter is updated in step S2702. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed after the role lottery process in step S2180.

After the winning combination drawing process in step S2180, the process advances to step S2703 to update the advantageous section type. This process is a process illustrated in FIG. 249 described later, and is a process of updating the value of the above-described advantageous section type flag according to any of the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section.
Next, the flow advances to step S2704 to perform a pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF). This process is a process corresponding to the pressing order instruction number set of the twenty-eighth embodiment shown in FIG. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. The push order instruction number set is a process of generating push order instruction data and displaying the push order when operating the instruction function in the game. Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the above-described maximum payout notification flag may be updated during this processing.

  The game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK) in step S2705 is processing corresponding to step S2196 in the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 188. In the thirtieth embodiment, in the game end check processing, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section is to be ended, and when the advantageous section is to be ended, preparation for terminating the advantageous section is performed. Details of this processing will be described later (FIGS. 252 and 253).

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701 in FIG.
Note that 1BB in the thirtieth embodiment is a special role having no setting difference. In addition, when 1BB is won, the game shifts to the advantageous section after the end of the 1BB game. That is, at the same time as the 1BB winning, the advantageous section is also won.

  First, in step S2711, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 53). In the present embodiment, a “26846” interrupt ($ 60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in this step S2701, the value is decremented by "1" for each interruption process from this point.

When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the acquired number data is cleared in step S2175 (medal insertion wait) in FIG. 244. This processing is for clearing the storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the acquired number data at the address “F011 (H)” shown in FIG. 222 (the twenty-eighth embodiment).
As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is “9” and the player has settled the game by operating the adjustment switch 46 and ended the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. This has the effect that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize the vacant space, thereby reducing the vacant space.
It is to be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) is not limited to displaying “00” on the acquisition number display LED 78, and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off and the lower digit may be turned off. May display "0". In any case, a display may be executed so that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize the vacant stand.

Next, the flow advances to step S2712 to execute a process of initializing the push order instruction number. This process is a process of clearing the storage area of the push order instruction number stored at the address of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2713, data of the symbol combination display flag is obtained. In this processing, a symbol combination (data of a symbol combination display flag (not shown) provided in the RWM 53) on the activated line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game is acquired.

In the next step S2714, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, when the bit corresponding to 1BB in the symbol combination display flag data is “1”, it is determined as “Yes”, and when it is “0”, it is determined as “No”. When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2715, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2719.
Each bit of the symbol combination display flag is set to correspond to each bit of the operation state flag. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), since the D2 bit of the operation state flag of the address “F010 (H)” is a bit corresponding to 1BB, the bit corresponding to 1BB of the symbol combination display flag is set. Is also D2 bits.

In step S2715, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the standby section. In this determination, the value of the advantageous section type flag in FIG. 243 is determined, and when the D1 bit is “1”, it is determined that the section is a standby section. If it is determined that it is the standby section, the process proceeds to step S2716, and if it is determined that it is not the standby section, the process proceeds to step S2718.
In step S2716, the bit of the advantageous section type flag is shifted “1” to the right. That is,
Before shift: 00000010 (B)
After shift: 00000001 (B)
Becomes
Thereby, the advantageous section type flag is updated from the value indicating the standby section to the value indicating the advantageous section.

Next, the process advances to step S2717 to store (store) “1” in the maximum payout notification flag. That is,
Before storage (memory): 0000000000 (B)
After storage (memory): 00000001 (B)
Becomes
As a result, the value of the maximum payout notification flag changes from the non-reported state to other values, as shown in FIG.
Note that when the maximum payout notification flag is already “1” and the process proceeds to the process of setting the maximum payout notification flag to “1” (for example, when the process proceeds to step S2812 in FIG. 251 described later), the maximum payout notification is performed. "1" is overwritten on the flag.
Through the above steps S2716 and S2717, based on the winning of 1BB, the advantageous section type flag is updated (updated from the standby section to the advantageous section) and the maximum payout notification flag is updated (updated from unreported to other).

In step S2718, the obtainable number at the time of 1BB operation (at the time of 1BB game) is stored. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of obtainable 1BB games in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2719.
In the next step S2719, an operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. This operation state flag is the same as that shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment (address “F010 (H)”) in FIG. 182. In step S2719, the value of the operating state flag is generated based on the symbol combination display flag.
In a next step S2720, the operation state flag is saved (stored). This process is a process of storing the generated operation state flag (at this point, for example, stored in the A register) at the address “F010 (H)” of the RWM 53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S2720.
For example, when a symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from “0” to “1”.

  In the next step S2722, it is determined whether the RB operation has started. In this embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or at the time of winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1"), it is set to "1" in this game start set. If it is determined in step S2715 that the RB operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S2723. If it is determined that the RB operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S2724.

  In the next step S2723, the number of games and the number of winnings during the RB operation are stored. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored (stored) in a storage area (not shown) of the game number counter at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided in the RWM 53. This is processing for storing (storing) “2 (H)” in a storage area (not shown) of the winning number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S2724.

  Note that both the game number counter at the time of RB operation and the winning number counter at the time of RB operation are both set to “2 (H)” as initial values, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by “1”, respectively. Is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial values of these counter values are set to “0”, and each time the number of games or winnings increases by “1”, the counter value is incremented by “1”, and these counter values become “2 ( H) ”may be determined.

In the next step S2724, an advantageous section is set (M_ADV_SET). This process is a process shown in FIG. 246 described below, and updates the advantageous section clear counter.
Here, the advantageous section clear counter is a counter that is decremented by "1" every game, not only during the advantageous section, but also in all game sections (all of the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section). This is different from the counter that counts only during the advantageous section, like the advantageous section counter shown in the third embodiment in FIG.
In step S501 shown in FIG. 46 (e), the advantageous section counter value is updated ("1" is added). However, since this processing is executed only during the advantageous section, before this processing, It is necessary to determine whether or not the game is an advantageous section this time. However, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1" for each game without determining whether or not the section is an advantageous section, so that the processing can be simplified accordingly. Thus, the program capacity can be reduced (the storage capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced).
In any game section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is “0” if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is a normal section and a standby section, even if the value of the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by “1” in each game. Becomes
Further, when the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to “1500 (D)”, and if the value is other than “0”, the value of each game and the previous game is “1”. Is updated to the value obtained by subtraction.
Then, when it becomes “0” by subtracting “1”, it can be determined that the advantageous section end condition has been satisfied.
Also, when there is a borrow by subtracting “1”, it can be determined that the previous game is a normal section or a standby section.
In this way, program processing can be reduced (simplified).

  In the next step S2725, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination is displayed (whether or not the replay has won). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2716, and when it is determined that the combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals previously bet in the game. Next, proceeding to step S2727, automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of updating the data in the automatic bet number storage area provided in the RWM 53 (to store “3 (H)”).
Next, the flow advances to step S2728 to set an output request for an operating state. In the next step S2729, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated or that the 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724 in FIG. 245.
First, in the advantageous section clear counter RWM address set in step S2741, the address of the advantageous section clear counter shown in FIG. 243 is stored. Here, the advantageous section clear counter is composed of 2 bytes, and stores data of a lower byte. Therefore, when the address of the advantageous section clear counter is, for example, “F021 (H)” and “F022 (H)”, the address of the lower byte (F021 (H)) is specified. Then, the data of the lower byte is stored in the HL register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2742 to execute a 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN). Here, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the advantageous section clear counter is executed. The details will be described later (FIG. 247).
In this two-byte countdown, when the operation result is “0” (that is, when the value before the operation is “1”), the zero flag becomes “1”.
Also, in the 2-byte countdown, when a carry occurs as a result of the operation (that is, when the value before the operation is “0”), the carry flag becomes “1”.

Here, the zero flag and the carry flag will be described.
An F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in the present embodiment. The F register is composed of D0 to D7 bits, like the other registers. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The carry flag executes an arithmetic operation (for example, an addition operation, a subtraction operation, a logical AND operation, an OR operation, an exclusive OR, etc .; the same applies hereinafter), and overflow or underflow occurs due to the operation result. Sometimes it is "1". On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is performed and the result of the arithmetic operation does not cause overflow or borrow, the value becomes “0”.
The zero flag is set to “1” when the arithmetic processing is performed and the arithmetic result is “0”. On the other hand, when the calculation processing is executed and the calculation result does not become “0”, the value becomes “0”.

Next, the flow proceeds to step S2743, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is “0”. When the carry flag becomes “1” after the two-byte countdown operation, it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the operation is “0”, and when the carry flag is not “1”. Determines that the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is not “0”.
When it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2747, and when it is determined that the counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2744. Here, “the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is“ 0 ”” indicates that the previous game is a normal section or a standby section (non- advantageous section).

In step S2744, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter after the calculation of the 2-byte countdown is “0”. In this determination, after the calculation, when the above-described zero flag becomes “1”, it is determined that the calculated advantageous section clear counter is “0”, and when the zero flag is not “1”, the calculated advantageous section clear counter is not. It is determined that the section clear counter is not “0”. Here, “the calculated advantageous section clear counter is not“ 0 ”” indicates that the previous game and the current game are advantageous sections.
When it is determined that the calculated advantageous section clear counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2745, and when it is determined that the counter is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart ends. Here, "the calculated advantageous section clear counter is" 0 "" means that the previous game was an advantageous section, but the current game is a normal section (non-advantaged section) (from the advantageous section to the normal section). Migration).
In step S2745, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set. In this process, the total value of the number of initialized bytes is stored in the B register. For example, when the number of initialization bytes is 20 (H), “20 (H)” is set in the B register value.

  Next, the flow advances to step S2746 to execute RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR). This initialization is performed when the advantageous section clear counter value becomes “0” after subtracting “1” (that is, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied). Is a process of initializing (clearing). Therefore, for example, data (counter, flag, etc.) as shown in FIG. 243 is cleared. RWM initialization will be described later (FIG. 248).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2747 to determine whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “1”. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag is “1”. If the D0 bit is “1”, “Yes” is determined. If not, “No” is determined. . In other words, this process determines whether or not the condition for transition from the normal section or the standby section (non-advantaged section) to the advantageous section is satisfied.
If it is determined that the gaming section type flag is “1” (satisfies the condition for shifting to the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S2748, and if it is not “1” (the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is not satisfied). When it is determined, the process according to the flowchart ends.

In step S2748, the initial value is stored (stored) in the advantageous section clear counter. The initial value of the present embodiment is set to “1500 (D)”. Therefore, “DC (H)” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and “5 (H)” is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value. Since “F021 (H)” is stored in the HL register in step S2741 described above, the HL register value indicates the address of the lower bit of the advantageous section clear counter at the time of step S2748.
Therefore,
F021 (H) (lower byte of advantageous section clear counter): DC (H)
F022 (H) (upper byte of advantageous section clear counter): 5 (H)
Becomes
Note that “5DC (H)” = “1500 (D)”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2749 to store (store) “1” in the advantageous section display LED flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. If "1" is stored in the advantageous section display LED flag in step S2749, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit when the digit 4a is lit in the interrupt processing executed thereafter.
Here, the LED display control for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 will be described. The LED display control of the thirtieth embodiment can be described using the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 149 (the twenty-second embodiment).

  In FIG. 149, when the interrupt process corresponds to the interrupt “2” in FIG. 148 (A), the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is reached. Therefore, even if the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", the lighting process of the advantageous section display LED 77 is actually executed only when the interruption is "2" by dynamic lighting, and the interruptions "1" and "3" are performed. 149, the step S1552 in FIG. 149 is not executed.

In the thirtieth embodiment, when the process proceeds to step S1552 in FIG. 149, it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”. When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, it is determined whether or not the digit to be lit in the current interrupt processing is digit 4. If the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, it is determined that digit 4 is being turned on. In this case (when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1” and the digit 4 is lit), the data obtained by performing an OR operation on the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and “10000000 (B)” is output. Set as segment 1 data for port 3. As a result, data that can turn on the segment 1P of the digit 4a (that is, the advantageous section display LED 77) is set.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not “1”, the above-described OR operation is not performed, or the segment 1 data set in step S1551 and the “00000000 (B)” are OR-operated. Data is set as segment 1 data for output port 3.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742 in FIG.
In the 2-byte countdown, the 2-byte data subtraction in step S2761 is performed. This process is performed as follows.
When proceeding to step S2761, as described above, in step S2741 of FIG. 246, the HL register stores the lower digit address of the advantageous section clear counter. Therefore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is the data of the lower digit of the advantageous section clear counter. Also, the value stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is the data of the upper digit of the advantageous section clear counter.
When the carry flag becomes “1” as a result of subtracting “1” (Example 4 described later), “0” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and “1” is stored in the HL register value. "0" is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "." That is, “0” is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter, and “0” is stored in the lower byte.

Specific examples are as follows.
(Example 1)
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): DC (H)
When subtracting “1”,
Data stored at the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): DB (H)
And the carry flag = “0” and the zero flag = “0”.
(Example 2)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 01 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
When subtracting “1”,
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): FF (H)
And the carry flag = “0” and the zero flag = “0”.

(Example 3)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 01 (H)
When subtracting “1”,
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
And the carry flag = “0” and the zero flag = “1”.
(Example 4)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
When subtracting “1”,
Data stored at the address of the HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored at the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
And the carry flag = “1” and the zero flag = “0”.

  In this example 4, when “1” is actually subtracted, a borrow occurs at that point (upper digit “FF (H)” and lower digit “FF (H)”), but as described above, “0” is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and “0” is stored at the address indicated by adding “1” to the HL register value. As a result, both the data (low order digit) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the data (high order digit) stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value are “0”. Becomes

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746 in FIG.
Before this RWM initialization is executed, the number of bytes to be initialized is stored in the B register in step S2745 of FIG. 246. In the above example, “20 (H)” is set in the B register value. The address of the lower byte of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register in step S2741 of FIG. 246. In the above example, “F021 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
In FIG. 248, in step S2771, RWM initialization data is set. In this process, a process of performing an XOR operation on the A register value and the A register value and storing the operation result in the A register is executed. By this operation, the A register value becomes “0 (H)”.

Next, the flow advances to step S2772 to initialize the RWM. This processing is to store the A register value (that is, “0 (H)”) at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, the data of “F021 (H)” to be initialized first becomes “0”.
Next, the flow advances to step S2773 to change the RWM initialization address. This process is a process of adding “1” to the HL register value.
In the next step S2774, it is determined whether or not the RWM initialization has been completed. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, it is determined whether the B register value after the subtraction is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the RWM initialization is terminated. I judge it.
When it is determined that the initialization of the RWM is to be terminated, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. If it is determined that the initialization of the RWM is not to be ended (B register value ≠ “0”), the process returns to step S2772 to continue the initialization.

According to the above flowchart, the number of bytes corresponding to the number set in the B register is initialized. The initialization is performed in the order of addresses. Therefore, if the address of the RWM to be initialized is successively arranged at the end of the advantageous section, the smallest address is specified first, and the number of bytes to be initialized is set in the B register. All data that needs to be initialized can be initialized.
Here, all five data shown in FIG. 243 are data to be initialized by this RWM initialization.
On the other hand, regardless of whether or not the advantageous section has ended, data used continuously in the next game after the end of the advantageous section, for example, set value information (“F000 (H)” in the example of FIG. 182), RT The state number, the stored number data, the LED display counter (“F018 (H)” in the example of FIG. 182), and the like are not targets for initialization.
The data to be initialized by the RWM initialization is limited to the data in the used area shown in the twentieth and twenty-sixth embodiments, and the data outside the used area is not to be initialized.

  In the example of the RWM initialization shown in FIG. 248, at the end of the advantageous section, the addresses of the data relating to the advantageous section to be initialized are continuously arranged, and the address to be initialized by "1" is updated in step S2773. I made it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the addresses of the data to be initialized are not continuous, a program that can individually specify the addresses of the data to be initialized is set up, so that the advantageous section to be initialized can be specified. Data can be initialized.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section type update in step S2703 in FIG. 244.
First, in step S2781, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section has been won. The winning of the advantageous section may be in any of the embodiments described above. For example, taking the first embodiment as an example, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case in which an advantageous section is won at the same time as a particular condition device is won. Alternatively, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (role), an advantageous section lottery may be performed after the lottery of step S2180 in FIG. 244, for example. If the lottery of the advantageous section is based on, for example, the first embodiment, the condition is that there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value.

If it is determined in step S2781 that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S2782. If it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2782, it is determined whether to shift to the standby section. When winning in the advantageous section, whether to shift to the advantageous section or to the standby section before the start of the next game can be arbitrarily set. For example, taking FIG. 23 of the first embodiment as an example, in FIG. 23, as shown in “Timing 1”, when an advantageous section is won based on the rare role winning without winning the special role, the standby section It is determined that a transition to an advantageous section is made without passing through.

On the other hand, in FIG. 23, when the special section (1BBA) is won and the advantageous section is won as in “Timing 2”, it is determined that the operation is shifted to the standby section.
If it is determined in step S2782 to shift to the standby section, the process proceeds to step S2783. If it is determined that the mode does not shift to the standby section (shift to the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S2784.
In step S2783, the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to “00000010 (B)”. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, in step S2784, the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to “00000001 (B)”. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In the above, when the process proceeds to step S2783 and the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to “00000010 (B)”, as described above when the process proceeds from step S2714 and step S2715 to step S2716 in FIG. Is shifted to the right by “1”.
By this step S2716, the advantageous section type flag becomes
Before update: 00000010 (B) (indicates standby section)
After update: 00000001 (B) (indicating an advantageous section)
Becomes

On the other hand, in the above, the process proceeds to step S2784, and when the advantageous section type flag is updated (stored) to “00000001 (B)”, the value of the advantageous section type flag is maintained until the advantageous section ends thereafter. .
When the advantageous section is ended, if the RWM initialization is executed in step S2746 in FIG. 246 described above, the advantageous section type flag is also initialized at this time. As a result, the advantageous section type flag becomes “00000000 (B)”, and is updated to a value indicating a normal section.

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the pressing order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704 in FIG.
The push order instruction number set has been described in FIG. 228 (28th embodiment), but will be described again in the 30th embodiment.
First, in step S2791, it is determined whether or not the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied in the game. In the present embodiment, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is won during an AT or the like, it is determined that the operating condition of the instruction function is satisfied.
Here, it is determined whether or not an AT is in progress by reading the value of the AT game number counter. As a method of determining whether or not an AT is in progress, besides determining the value of the AT game number counter, for example, an RWM address for storing a main game state is provided, and the value of the main game state is determined to be AT. If the value is equivalent to "inside", it may be determined that AT is in progress.
Further, as in the third embodiment, when “advantageous section = AT”, the AT is in progress when the advantageous section clear counter is a value other than “0” (satisfies the operating condition of the instruction function). May be determined.

Furthermore, not only during the AT, but also in a state during the advantageous section and before the start of the AT (AT sign, AT preparation, etc.), or in a state in which it is not yet decided to start the AT (AT gas sign, CZ, etc.) It may be determined that the operation condition of the indicating function is satisfied. For example, there is a case where the maximum payout notification flag is “0” after shifting to the advantageous section. In such a case, the instruction function is activated when the first small win B group is won, and the maximum payout notification flag is set to “1” as soon as possible. This is because the advantageous section can be ended thereafter when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, when the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied in step S2791,
(1) When the AT is selected and the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is won. (2) When the RT is in the advantageous section and the RT needs to be promoted (for example, the replay B of the first embodiment). When you win the group)
(3) After shifting to the advantageous section, if the maximum payout notification flag is “0” in a state where the AT has not yet started (AT sign, AT preparation, AT gaseous sign, CZ, etc.), the small win B When a group is elected.

During the AT, even if the maximum payout notification flag is already "1", when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied.
On the other hand, when the maximum payout notification flag is still “0” in the advantageous section but the AT has not been executed yet (such as the above-mentioned AT sign, AT preparation, AT gaseous sign, CZ, etc.) It is determined that the operating condition of the instruction function is satisfied at the time of winning the small role B group. On the other hand, when the maximum payout notification flag is “1”, it is determined that the operating condition of the instruction function is not satisfied even at the time of winning the small part B group.
If it is determined in step S2791 that the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, the process advances to step S2792. If it is determined that the condition for activating the instruction function is not satisfied, the process in this flowchart ends.

In step S2792, a condition device number is set. When the role lottery is performed in step S2180 in FIG. 244, the condition device number won in the game is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, in this step S2792, the value stored at this address is stored in the A register.
In the example of this flowchart, it is assumed that in FIG. 14, the small unit B1 of the condition device number “11” has been won. Therefore, “11 (D)”, that is, “B (H)” is stored in the storage area of the condition device number of the RWM 53 and the A register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2793 to update the maximum payout notification flag. This processing will be described later.

In the next step S2794, a pressing order instruction number table is set. This process is, for example, in the case of the twenty-eighth embodiment of FIG. 225, a process of storing the head address “1900 (H)” of the pressing order instruction number table in FIG. 225 in the HL register.
Next, the flow advances to step S2795 to set designated address data. In step S2795, the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.

That is, the data of the condition device number stored in the RWM 53 is used as an offset value, and data corresponding to an address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the pressing order instruction number table is obtained.
Therefore, since the HL register value at this point is “1900 (H)” as described above, the A register value “B (H)” is added to this value, and the new HL register value “190B ( H) ".
Then, as shown in FIG. 225, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the address “190B (H)” of the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register.

Next, the flow advances to step S2796 to store the pressing order instruction number in the RWM 53. That is, the A register value is stored in the storage area of the pressing order instruction number in the RWM 53.
In the next step S2797, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area. In the example of FIG. 222 (the twenty-eighth embodiment), it is stored at the address “F011 (H)”. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  In step S2797, when the push order instruction number is stored in the storage area of the acquired number data, in the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the push order instruction is given to the acquired number display LED 78 at the lighting timing of the digit 3a and the digit 4a. Information is displayed. For example, when the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” is stored as described above, “=” is displayed on the digit 3a during the interrupt processing for turning on the digit 3a, and the interrupt processing for turning on the next digit 4a is performed. Sometimes, "1" is displayed on digit 4a.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2791 that the operation condition of the instruction function is not satisfied, and the processing according to the present flowchart is terminated, the storage area of the acquired number data is cleared in the game start set in step S2701 in FIG. Therefore, the value of the storage area of the acquired number data remains “0”. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3a and digit 4a) remains "00".

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing updating of the maximum payout notification flag in step S2793 in FIG.
First, in step S2811, it is determined whether or not the small game B (one of B1 to B12) has been won in the game. Before proceeding to this processing, in step S2792, since the condition device number won in the game is stored in the A register, the A register value is changed to the condition device numbers “11 (D)” to “22 (D). )) (“0B (H)” to “16 (H)”). If it is determined that the small win B has been won, the process proceeds to step S2812, and if it is determined that the small win B has not been won, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2812, “1” is stored (stored) as the maximum payout notification flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

From FIGS. 250 and 251 described above, the maximum payout notification flag is not set to “1” even if an AT is in progress and the small combination B is not won. For example, even if the player wins the small role C during the AT and the correct answer pressing order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the maximum payout notification flag does not become “1”.
In addition, after the start of the AT, the maximum payout notification flag is set to “1” when the first small win B is won. For this reason, during the subsequent AT, the maximum payout notification flag “1” may be overwritten each time the small win B is won, or after the maximum payout notification flag is once set to “1”, During step 250, step S2793 may be skipped.
Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the small win B is first won during the AT, the maximum payout is substantially stored before the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data (step S2797 in FIG. 250). The notification flag is updated to “1”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum payout notification flag may be updated to “1” after the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data, that is, after the push order instruction information is substantially displayed. Good.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705 in FIG. 244.
In the various embodiments described above, when the AT is ended, the advantageous section is ended at the same time (for example, the third embodiment), and even when the AT is ended, the advantageous section end conditions are set for the advantageous section. (For example, FIG. 61 (fifth embodiment (example 2) shown in a9)) in which the advantageous section is terminated at the same time when the AT is terminated. It is assumed that
First, in step S2821, it is determined whether the number of AT games is “0”. This process is performed by determining whether or not the AT game number counter is “0”. When it is determined that the number of AT games is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2822, and when it is determined that the number of AT games is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2822, it is determined whether the maximum payout notification flag is “1”. If the maximum payout notification flag is "1", the advantageous section can be ended, but if it is not "1", the advantageous section cannot be ended (however, there are some exceptions as described later).
In step S2822, when it is determined that the maximum payout notification flag is “1”, the flow proceeds to step S2823, and when it is determined that it is not “1”, the flow proceeds to step S2824.
In step S2823, preparation for end of advantageous section (M_ADVEND_STNBY) is executed. Details of this processing will be described later (FIG. 253).

  In step S2824, a process of clearing the flag of the condition device is performed. This process is a process of clearing the condition device other than the special combination, and when it is determined that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the activated line, a process of clearing the condition device of the special combination is executed. In the next step S2825, a process of turning off the replay display LED is performed. This process corresponds to a process of setting a bit (for example, D3 bit) corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, the flow proceeds to step S2826 to clear the replay operation flag. This process is, for example, not shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 182, but is a process of setting the bit to “0” when the operating state flag has a bit corresponding to the replay.

  In the next step S2827, 1BB operation management is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the 1BB game end condition is satisfied during the 1BB game. In the next step S2828, it is determined whether or not the RB operation is being performed. This processing is performed when it is determined whether or not the D4 bit is “0” in the operating state flag shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 182 and is not “0” (zero flag ≠ 1) (RB operation). If it is determined that it is time), the process proceeds to step S2829 to execute RB operation management, and if it is determined to be “0” (not during RB operation), the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG.
In FIG. 253, in step S2841, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This processing executes the following processing.
(1) Store “1 (H)” in the HL register. Thus, the H register value becomes “0 (H)” and the L register value becomes “1 (H)”.
(2) Next, the L register value “1 (H)” is stored in the lower address of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value “0 (H)” is stored in the upper address.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends. From the above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is “00000000 (B)” and the lower byte is “00000001 (B)”.

  This advantageous section end preparation is executed at the time of the game end check as described above, but when returning to the game start set (FIG. 245) in the main processing (FIG. 244), the advantageous section is set in step S2724 (FIG. 245). Is executed. In the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246), since “1” is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter value in steps S2741 and S2742, “Yes” is determined in the determination in step S2744. Accordingly, the process proceeds to steps S2745 and S2746, and the RWM initialization of the data relating to the advantageous section is executed.

When shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to “1500 (D)” as an initial value (specific value), and thereafter, is decremented by one for each game.
In the thirtieth embodiment, since the advantageous section is ended at the same time as the end of the AT, preparation for terminating the advantageous section is performed when the number of games played by the AT becomes “0”. For example, when shifting to the advantageous section, shifting to the AT of the game “100” after the game “50”, the counting is performed as follows. The following numerical values are all shown in decimal.
a) At the time of transition to the advantageous section Advantageous section clear counter: "1500"
AT game counter: "0"
b) At the time of AT transition, advantageous section clear counter: "1450"
AT game counter: "100"
c) At the end of AT AT game frequency counter: "0"
Advantageous section clear counter: Updated from "1350" to "1" d) At the start of game after c) above AT game number counter: "0"
Advantageous section clear counter: "0"

By storing “1” in the advantageous section clear counter by the above-described advantageous section end preparation, it becomes unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the advantageous section end condition is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, the capacity of the RWM 53 will be reduced accordingly.
Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, a process of storing data indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 is required. Further, it is necessary to perform a process of reading data stored at the predetermined address in each game and determining whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the program capacity is required accordingly, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is reduced.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the advantageous section end preparation, and the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" in the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246) executed thereafter. Therefore, the process at the end of the advantageous section (the process of clearing the RWM 53) can be executed.

In FIG. 252, the determination in step S2821 is that the determination of “Yes” is made when the AT game frequency counter changes from “1” to “0” in the game (step S2702 in FIG. 244). I assume. Therefore, when the AT is not in the first place, it is possible not to execute the processing of steps S2821 to S2823 in FIG.
However, even in the normal section, the process of step S2821 in each game shown in FIG. 252 may be performed, and the process may proceed from step S2821 to step S2822, and may proceed to step S2824 when “No” is determined in step S2822.

In the flowchart of FIG. 252, when the maximum payout notification flag remains “0” and the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the continuation upper limit “1500”, the following is performed.
After shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1" in the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246) in each game and game start set. Then, when the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0” as a result of the subtraction in the game, since “Yes” is determined in step S2744 in FIG. 246, the RWM is initialized. As a result, the game shifts to the normal section at the start of the game.
Therefore, in such a case, the advantageous section ends without going through the advantageous section end preparation shown in FIG. 253.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications as described below are possible.
(1) Although the subtraction of the game section clear counter was executed at the time of starting the game, immediately after the start switch operation (for example, after step S2178 in FIG. 244), after stopping all the reels (after step S2187 in FIG. 244), The game may be executed at any timing such as a game end check process (step S2705 in FIG. 244).
(2) The value set in the advantageous section clear counter when shifting to the advantageous section is set to “1500 (D)” in the present embodiment. This is based on the fact that the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section is “1500” and that “1” is subtracted per game in the advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value set in the advantageous section clear counter is not necessarily limited to "1500 (D)", and may be a value less than "1500 (D)" or a value exceeding "1500 (D)". It may be. For example, “3000 (D)” may be set as an initial value in the advantageous section clear counter, and “1” may be subtracted each time one medal is paid out.

Further, the present invention is not limited to subtracting “1” per game, and may be, for example, subtracting “10 (D)” per game for convenience of calculation. In this case, for example, "15000 (D)" is set as the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter.
It is necessary to set the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter when shifting to the advantageous section after the subtraction timing of the advantageous section clear counter.
That is, when the value of the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction processing is “0” and the advantageous section type flag is “1”, the initial value is set to the advantageous section clear counter.

  (3) In the advantageous section end preparation (FIG. 253), “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This is because the advantageous section clear counter is set to “0” in the game start set executed thereafter, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined at the time that the advantageous section (and AT) is to be ended after the game “10”, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to “10 (D)” at that time. It is also possible to update to "." As described above, in the advantageous section end preparation, it is not a condition that the value of the advantageous section clear counter is always set to “1”, and an arbitrary value can be set.

  (4) In the present embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter value in the standby section is “0”, and when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter value is set to “1500 (D)”. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the advantageous section is won in the normal section, the advantageous section clear counter value is set to “1500 (D)”, and when the normal section shifts to the standby section, the standby section is set. During the section, control may be performed such that the advantageous section clear counter value “1500 (D)” is maintained throughout. For example, during the standby section, the value of each game, the advantageous section clear counter value is decremented by "1", but only during the standby section, a process of adding "1" is added. Thus, when the advantageous section is won in the normal section, the advantageous section clear counter value can be uniformly set to "1500 (D)" at that time.

(5) In the present embodiment, even if the maximum payout notification flag is “0” after winning the advantageous section, the advantageous section may be ended when 1BB is won. Here, when a special combination is won, whether or not the maximum payout notification flag is “0” and the advantageous section may be ended may be set in various ways.
For example, with respect to 1BB, RB, and 2BB (MB), when any of these wins, it is set that the advantageous section may be ended even if the maximum payout notification flag is “0”. Can be
On the other hand, for SB (Single Bonus) and CB (Challenge Bonus), even if they win, it is set that the advantageous section cannot be ended unless the maximum payout notification flag is “1”. .
Even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0", when the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0", in other words, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (the number of games played is 1500, or the number of payouts is 3000). Can end the advantageous section.

  (6) Although the advantageous section display LED flag is provided in the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED flag may not be provided. For example, when the advantageous section clear counter is "0", control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, and when the advantageous section clear counter is not "0" (however, "1" is subtracted from "0"). At the time of the carry-down at the time (except for “FFFF (H)”), control is performed so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

When set as described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit after the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 4a after the advantageous section clear counter is updated from "0" to "1500 (D)". Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 246, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the interrupt processing for turning on the digit 4a after step S2748.
In addition, since it is step S2742 in FIG. 246 that the advantageous section clear counter changes from "1" to "0" after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section in the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 4a after step S2742. The display LED 77 turns off.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on based on the advantageous section display LED flag as in the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the interrupt processing for turning on the digit 4a after step S2749 in FIG.
In addition, since it is step S2746 in FIG. 246 that the advantageous section display LED flag changes from "1" to "0" after shifting to the advantageous section, the digit 4a after step S2746 is turned on in the same manner as described above. In the interrupt processing to be performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.

(7) The advantageous section type flag is set to "00000000 (B)" for a normal section, "00000010 (B)" for a standby section, and "00000001 (B)" for an advantageous section. However, the value is not limited to these values, and may be set to any value as long as the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section can be determined. For example, "10 (D)" is set for a normal section, "11 (D)" is set for a standby section, and "12 (D)" is set for an advantageous section.
Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, a process (shift command) of shifting the bit of the advantageous section type flag to “1” to the right is executed. However, when the value of the standby section or the advantageous section is set to an arbitrary value as described above in the advantageous section type flag, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, the shift instruction is not used and the shift to the advantageous section is performed. What is necessary is just to execute the processing instruction in which the corresponding value is stored.

  (8) The maximum payout notification flag is set to “0” when not notified, and set to “1” for other (notified etc.). However, it is not limited to these values. For example, the value of “not notified” of the maximum payout notification flag may be set to “1 (H)”, and the value of “other (notified etc.)” may be set to “FF (H)”. In other words, any value may be used as long as data capable of determining whether or not the advantageous section can be ended is stored.

  (9) In the RWM initialization (FIG. 248) according to the present embodiment, a head address is specified in an address range to be initialized, and initialization is performed in ascending order of the addresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to specify the last address in the address range to be initialized, and subtract “1” by address update (initialize in descending order of address).

  (10) In the example of updating the advantageous section type shown in FIG. 249, first, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in step S2781, and then it is determined whether or not to shift to the standby section. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to collectively update the advantageous section type flag to the standby section or the advantageous section based on the winning condition device. For example, in FIG. 17, when it corresponds to “winning including 1 BBA”, the advantageous section type flag is updated to the standby section (00000010 (B)), and “the number of small wins D“ 50 ”” or “the small wins E1 When the number “250” is won, the advantageous section type flag is updated to the advantageous section (00000001 (B)).

(11) In the flowchart shown in the thirtieth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and if the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. is there.
(12) The thirtieth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Thirty-first embodiment>
Subsequently, a thirty-first embodiment will be described.
In the description of the flowcharts of the thirty-first embodiment, the flowchart of the thirtieth embodiment will be mainly described as an example, but the flowchart of the thirty-first embodiment is limited to the flowchart of the thirtieth embodiment. It does not do.
The thirty-first embodiment includes a difference counter, and when the value of the difference counter (hereinafter, simply referred to as “difference counter value”) becomes a value that satisfies the condition for terminating the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated. Is what you do. In particular, in the following embodiment, control is performed so that the advantageous section ends when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” (960 (H)).

Therefore, in the thirty-first embodiment, the advantageous section ends when either the game has been consumed 1500 times or the number of payouts reaches 3000 or the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”. . In other words, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, even if the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached 1500 games or the number of payouts has not reached 3,000, the advantageous section To end.
Although details will be described later, the difference number counter value “2400 (D)” and the difference number “2400 sheets” in the advantageous section have a case where they match and a case where they do not match.

Hereinafter, the meaning of the terms in the thirty-first embodiment will be described.
The “number of bets” is the number of bets when starting a game, and may be referred to as a “specified number” (see FIGS. 7 to 12) or a “inserted number”. However, even if a medal is "inserted", if the medal is stored without being betted, the medal is not included in the bet number.
The “auto bet” indicates that the same number as the bet number in the game is automatically bet for the next game based on winning of the replay. Therefore, an automatic bet is one of the bets.
The “number of payouts” indicates the number of profits given to the player when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination stops on the activated line. The term “payout” means that medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 by the medal payout device, and the number of stored medals is added by credit.

As will be described later, when the replay wins and the automatic bet processing is executed, the difference counter is updated by assuming that the same number of medals as the number of bets in the game in which the replay has won are paid out. And the difference counter is updated assuming that there is no medal payout in the game.
For example, if the specified number of the current game is “3”, a replay wins in the current game, and the specified number of the next game is “2”, the bet number “3” of the current game is maintained. Instead of this, the specified number “2” of the next game may be automatically bet. Similarly, if the specified number of the current game is “2”, a replay wins in the current game, and the specified number of the next game is “3”, the bet number of the current game is maintained at “2”. Instead, the predetermined number “3” of the next game may be automatically bet.
Therefore, when an automatic bet is made based on the winning of the replay, the same number of bets as the current game may not be bet.

  The “difference number” has the same meaning as the “difference number” described in “0045” of the first embodiment, and is a value calculated by “payout number−bet number”. For example, when “payout number> bet number” such as the payout number “9” and the bet number “3”, the difference number is a positive value (“+6” in this example). Further, for example, when “payout number = bet number” as in the payout number “3” and the bet number “3”, the difference number is “0”. Furthermore, when “payout number <bet number” such as the payout number “0” and the bet number “3”, the difference number is minus (“−3” in this example).

In the thirty-first embodiment, the term "difference number" is used, but the term "difference number" does not mean that the game medium is limited to medals. The same applies to “number of bets” and “number of payouts”.
In the thirty-first embodiment, the "bet number" in the first embodiment is referred to as "bet number", and the "payout number" in the first embodiment is referred to as "payout number".

As described above, the difference number may be negative. However, in the calculation inside the main CPU 55, a negative calculation result results in a carry down.
For example, in 1-byte data, the value obtained by subtracting “3 (H)” from “0 (H)” based on the difference number being “−3” is “FD (H)”.
Thus, for example, when the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, “−3” is the difference number, and “FD (H)” is the difference number data. Therefore, “difference number ≠ difference number data”.

In the thirty-first embodiment, a difference counter for storing a value corresponding to the accumulated value of difference data is provided.
Here, the difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number data itself, but stores a “corresponding value” to the accumulated value of the difference number data. For example, as described above, when the difference number data has a value corresponding to a negative value, the value is corrected to “0 (H)” (this point will be described later). Therefore, “accumulated value of difference number data ≠ difference number counter value”.
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the difference data in the advantageous section has exceeded “2400 (D)”. For this reason, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference number counter only needs to count at least the accumulated value of the difference number data in the advantageous section, and need not count in the non-advantage section (for example, the normal section).
Here, when the difference number counter value is updated on the condition that the game is an advantageous section, a process for determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section is required for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the difference number counter value is updated even during a non-advantage section, for example, during a normal section. This makes it possible to update the difference counter value without determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section in each game, thereby simplifying the processing.

Further, even when the difference number becomes negative in the current game and the difference number data becomes a carry-down data, the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value to update the difference number counter value. However, if the result of the calculation indicates that the difference number counter is carry-down data, correction is performed to set the difference number counter value to “0”.
For example, when the difference counter until the previous game is “01 (H)” and the difference data in the current game is “FD (H)” (difference = “− 3”), When the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value, the result becomes “FE (H)”. This value is data having a carry-down. Then, if the data has a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to “0”. A method of determining whether a carry-down has occurred will be described later.

  By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the payout number is larger than the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when the payout based on the winning of the small role is performed. If is less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

To give a specific example (the difference counter value before the first game is set to “0 (H)”),
First game: difference number “−3”, difference number counter value “FD (H)”, difference number counter “0 (H)” after correction when bet number “3” and payout number “0”
Second game: difference number “+6”, difference number counter value “6 (H)” when bet number “3” and payout number “9”
Third game: when the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference number is “−3” and the difference number counter value is “3 (H)”.
Fourth game: when the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “1”, the difference number is “−2” and the difference number counter value is “1 (H)”.
Fifth game: when the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference number is “−3”, the difference number counter value is “FE (H)”, and the corrected difference number counter is “0 (H)”.
Will be updated as follows.
Even if the difference number counter value of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference number counter value of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference number counter value reflecting the difference number of the game concerned Is calculated again, and such a case also corresponds to “update” of the difference number counter value.
If the result of calculating the difference number data is “0 (H)”, the updating of the difference number counter value can be omitted.

FIGS. 254 are diagrams (slump graphs) for explaining the concept of the difference number counter value, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. In FIG. 254, the horizontal axis is the number of games, and the vertical axis is the difference number.
Example 1 shows an example in which the difference number first goes in the minus direction with the progress of the game, but the difference number starts to rise in the middle, for example, due to the start of the advantageous section (AT). Then, the difference counter value is counted as “0” when the difference number becomes the minimum value in the course of the game, so that the range indicated by the arrow in the drawing is determined by the difference number counter as the increase amount of the difference number. Be counted. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, the advantageous section ends (the next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

The determination as to whether or not the difference counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 and making a determination. Judgment of the stored difference counter value is also included (the same applies hereinafter).
When it is determined whether or not “2400 (D)” has been exceeded based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that “2400 (D)” has not been exceeded, The difference number counter value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, control is performed so that the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is not stored in the RWM 53 and the difference counter value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

  In Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number progressed in the minus direction with the progress of the game, but the number of difference started to increase in the middle, for example, due to the start of the advantageous section (AT). Is shown. In Example 2, when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section ends. . That is, regardless of the accumulated value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, counting from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value, the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a game in the normal section).

When the difference counter value is updated during the normal section, the difference counter value may exceed “2400 (D)” even during the normal section. For example, if a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated, such a situation may occur. In such a case,
(1) a method of updating the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts,
(2) When the value exceeds “2400 (D)”, a method of temporarily resetting the difference number counter value to “0” at that point is used.
For example, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section, when the difference number counter value is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, the processing is performed during the advantageous section. If the processing is executed regardless of whether or not the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section, the processing is cleared.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter value is a process unique to the advantageous section, the difference value counter value is not cleared even if the difference value counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section. .
When the advantageous section is started (the first game in the advantageous section), the difference counter value is cleared (the initial value “0” is set). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the difference counter value before the start of the advantageous section.
When the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section, or when the number of games reaches 1500 games, or when the number of payouts reaches 3000 pieces, the termination condition of the advantageous section is set. When the condition is satisfied and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference number counter value is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference number counter value is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent data (value) relating to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section ends and the game is shifted to the normal game. The clearing of the difference number counter value is executed, for example, in step S2746 in FIG. 246 (the thirtieth embodiment).

FIG. 255 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the advantageous section, where (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases with the progress of the game, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section is started (“A” in the figure) to the time that the game proceeds to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. Note that the AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the CZ, the precursor, and the AT are being prepared at the beginning of the advantageous section. In the case of a specification that starts from the midway of waiting for the replay to win), the difference number may decrease even after the advantageous section is started. Also, even when the AT is started, the difference number may decrease if a situation in which the order of the bell in the pushing order does not win is continued.

Since the difference number counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, the difference counter value is maintained at “0” in a situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference number counter value remains “0” from the point “A” to the point “B”.
Also, an example is shown in which the difference number has started to increase from the point “B”. As a result, the difference counter value also increases. When it is determined that the difference number counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” (when the point “C” is reached in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Move to normal section).

  In this way, instead of the difference number from the start of the advantageous section, positive counting by the difference number counter is started from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section. No medal is given to the player beyond the range where the number of balls has increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 255 (a)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling of the player from being upset.

The above points will be described more specifically with numerical values as examples.
For example, if the AT is started by lottery after the start of the advantageous section, the difference may decrease with the progress of the game if the AT is an advantageous section and non-AT.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is abandoned when the difference number becomes “−200”.
Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts a game with the gaming machine, the AT is won when the difference number becomes “−50”, and the AT is started. Then, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued after the start of the advantageous section until the difference number exceeds “+2400”, the player Y can acquire a medal of “2400 + 250 = 2650”. .
Therefore, as described above, after the advantageous section is started, by setting the end condition as “from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value to exceeding“ +2400 ””, for example, the other player's fit To prevent them from being able to get them, so as not to frustrate their ambitions.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 255 (b) shows an example in which the number of differences decreases in the normal section, the point "D" in the middle turns positive, and the advantageous section starts from the point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive immediately before “E” in the figure. However, at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure), the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to "0").
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from “D” to “E”) is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be counted up from the point "E", and the advantageous section ends when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)".

  FIG. 256 is a diagram illustrating a storage area of the RWM 53 related to the thirty-first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 182 of the twenty-sixth embodiment (partly, the contents overlap with FIG. 182). In the thirty-first embodiment, other storage areas are provided in addition to the storage areas shown in FIG. 256, but the description is omitted.

In FIG. 256, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address “F010 (H)” is of the same type as that shown in FIG. However, in FIG. 182 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), the operation state flag is set for the operation of the accessory, but in the thirty-first embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit in order to determine the operation state of the replay (see FIG. 182). In the operation state flag of 182, MB and CB are deleted.)
This operation state flag is updated in the game start set process in step S2701 in FIG. 244 (step S2720 in FIG. 245). For example, in step S2719 of FIG. 245, the D0 bit of a symbol combination display flag described later is read (same processing as in step S2725), and when it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped. The D0 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S2826 during FIG. 252 (game end check processing).
The operating state flag of the accessory is cleared in step S2827 (1BB flag) or step S2829 (RB flag) in FIG. 252 (game end check processing).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address “F030 (H)” is an area for storing the symbol combination stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. . That is, the replay and 1BB bits of the symbol combination display flag are respectively assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag.
For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped at the activated line (when a winning has been achieved), the D0 bit is set to “1”. The symbol combination display flag is updated in step S2186 (display determination) in FIG.

In step S2186 of FIG. 244, the winning determination unit 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
Then, in the next game, for example, in the game start set process of FIG. 245, a symbol combination display flag is obtained (step S2713), and the operation state flag is updated (step S2720).
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, for example, at step S2179 in FIG.

The automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) at the address “F031 (H)” is an area for storing data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of a replay winning, and in the present embodiment, “2” or “3” is stored. Is done.
The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address “F032 (H)” is an area for storing bet number data in the game, and in the present embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored. Is done.
The automatic bet number data is set, for example, in step S2727 in FIG.

Here, the processing of steps S2725 to S2727 of FIG. 245 will be described again.
In step S2725, based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay is displayed (whether or not the replay has won). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been displayed, the process proceeds to step S2726, and when it is determined that the symbol combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

  In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals previously bet in the game, and reads the value of the bet number data. Next, proceeding to step S2727, automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of storing the value of the bet number data in the previous game in the automatic bet number data.

In FIG. 256, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address “F040 (H)” and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address “F041 (H)” are medal payout in the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 182). It is the same as the number data and the medal payout number data buffer.
The payout number data and the payout number data buffer are updated, for example, in FIG. 244 of the thirtieth embodiment in the medal payout number update in step S2188. The processing for updating the number of payout medals is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 189 (a) (the twenty-sixth embodiment).
The payout amount data is updated (subtracted) in step S2189 in FIG. 244. On the other hand, the payout amount data buffer is not updated until the medal payout number update process of step S2188 in FIG. 244 is executed in the next game.

That is, for example, even if the small win wins in the game and the payout number data is updated in step S2188 in FIG. ) Is done.
Here, the medal payout process by winning in step S2189 will be described in more detail.
In the medal payout process by winning, first, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. Before this processing, the payout number data is stored in a predetermined register, “1” is subtracted from the predetermined register value (payout number data), and it is determined whether or not the value after the subtraction is “0”. . When it is "0", it is determined that there is no medal payout, and when it is not "0", it is determined that there is medal payout.

  When it is determined that there is a medal payout, next, the stored number is read. This process is a process of reading the value of stored number display data (address “F043 (H)”) described later. Next, it is determined whether or not the stored number has reached the limit value based on the read stored number display data. When the value of the read storage number display data is “50”, it is determined that the storage number has reached the limit value, and when it is less than “50”, it is determined that the storage number has not reached the limit value. .

When it is determined that the stored number is less than “50”, a process of adding “1” to the stored number is executed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the stored number display data at the address “F043 (H)”.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored number is “50”, the drive control of the hopper motor 36 is performed to execute a payout process of “1” medals for actually paying out one medal.
After the addition of the stored number “1” or the payout of “1” medals, the acquired number display is set to “+1”. This process is a process of adding “1” to the acquired number data of the address “F042 (H)” described later.

  Next, a process of subtracting “1” from the payout number data at the address “F032 (H)” is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the updated number-of-payouts data has become “0”. When it is determined that the payout number data is “0”, the medal payout process by winning is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not “0”, the process returns to the reading of the stored number described above.

By repeating the above processing, when the small prize is won, the acquired number data is incremented by "1" and the payout number data is decremented by "1". Therefore, in FIG. 244, the payout amount data is “0” at the time of the game end check processing in step S2705. Therefore, when reading the payout number of the game when updating the difference counter value in the game end check processing, the value is read from the payout number data buffer.
However, if the difference counter value in the game can be updated before the payout number data is subtracted, the payout number of the game can be read by reading the value of the payout number data. For example, in FIG. 244, if the difference number counter value is updated between step S2188 and step S2189, the payout number can be read from the payout number data. In other words, the difference number counter value can be updated without reading the value from the payout number data buffer.

  In FIG. 256, the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) at the address “F042 (H)” is an area for storing the acquired number data. When the small role wins and the medal is paid out, the acquired number is stored in the acquired number data. The display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled based on this data. For example, when the acquired number data is "1", this data "1" is read, and "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, as the payout number data at the above-mentioned address “F040 (H)”, for example, “9” is stored when the nine-copies wins, and “9” is stored when the medal is paid out (including addition to the credit). This counter is decremented according to the number of payouts, such as "→" 8 "→" 7 "→ ... →" 0 ".
On the other hand, the acquired number data of the address “F042 (H)” is, for example, “0” → “1” → “2” → “3” →. Is a counter that is added according to the medal payout.
The display by the acquired number display LED 78 is performed using the acquired number data.

The stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT) at the address “F043 (H)” stores data for displaying the stored number at that time on the stored number display LED 76.
Here, in the present embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal value (H), but a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed is “29”, the value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F043 (H)”. Thus, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F043 (H)” are used to indicate the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are It is stored as data for displaying the upper digit (“2” in this example) of the stored number. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of storages is “50 (D)”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the stored number data itself is not provided, but the stored number display data is provided as the display data of the stored number display LED 76. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

Next, the specific update contents of the bet number, the payout number, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value will be described.
As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay stops on the activated line, an automatic bet is made, and a re-game can be executed. The number of automatic bets at this time may be considered as the number of payouts, or not.
FIG. 257 is a view for explaining the update contents of the payout number, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value.
Example 1 of (a) shows a concept that the automatic bet number is not used as the payout number of the game and the automatic bet number is not used as the bet number of the next game.
Example 2 of (b) shows the idea that the number of automatic bets is the number of payouts of the game and the number of automatic bets is the number of bets of the next game.
In FIG. 257, the value of the difference counter before the first game is “0 (H)”. Also, in each of Example 1 and Example 2, it is assumed that the replay wins in the first game and the four small wins win in the second game.

In Example 1, the bet number is obtained by reading the bet number data. For example, assuming that a game is started with three bets in the first game, since "3" is stored in the bet number data, this value is read and the bet number is set to "3".
Then, at the end of the first game, the number of payouts in the game is read from the payout number data buffer. At the time of the replay winning, the payout number data buffer is “0”, and thus the payout number in the game is “0”.
Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 0
Than,
Difference = -3
So,
Difference data = FD (H) (carry down)
Becomes

The difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + FD (H) = FD (H)
Is updated.
If the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the calculation is "1" (details will be described later), it is determined that a borrow has occurred, and correction is performed to return to "0 (H)".
This allows
Difference counter value (before correction): FD (H)
Difference counter value (after correction): 0 (H)
Is calculated (updated).

Next, in the second game (current game), when the replay is won in the first game (previous game) and the specified number of current games is "3", the automatic bet amount data is "3". , And the bet number data of the current game is “3”. Therefore, when the bet number is read from the bet number data in the current game, it is “3”, but by determining whether the D0 bit of the operation state flag is “0” or “1”, the replay has won in the previous game. It is determined whether the current game is a replay operation or not. If it is determined that a replay has been won in the previous game, the bet number is calculated as "0" in the current game.
By determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag set at the end of the game is “0” or “1”, it is determined whether or not the replay has won in the previous game (the current game is a replay operation). Or not), and when it is determined that the replay has won in the previous game, the number of game bets this time may be calculated as “0”. In other words, the number of bets for the current game is calculated as “0” or the number of bets actually bet (in this example, “ 3 ").

When four small wins are won at the end of the game, the payout amount data buffer becomes "4".
Therefore,
Number of bets = 0
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference number = +4
So,
Difference number data = 4 (H)
Becomes
The difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + 4 (H) = 4 (H)
Is updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the calculated difference number counter value is “0”, no correction is performed as described above.

In FIG. 257, (b) Example 2 is a calculation method in which the number of payouts in a game in which a replay has been won is the bet number of the game, and the bet number of the next game is the actual bet number.
First, the bet number is read as bet number data, and the value is used as the bet number at the time of updating the difference counter value. Note that it is also possible to read in automatic bet amount data instead of bet number data.
Note that the first game in Example 2 assumes that a game has been started with a bet number of “3”, and shows an example in which a replay wins in the first game.

At the end of the game, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. When the D0 bit is “1” (at the time of replay winning), a value stored in the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the game is read, and the value is read as the difference number in the game (first game). This is the number of payouts when updating the counter value. In this example, at the end of the first game, “3” is stored in the bet amount data or the automatic bet amount data, so the payout number when the difference counter value is updated is “3”.
When the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is “0” (when no replay is won), the value stored in the payout amount data buffer is read, and the value is read as the difference counter value in the game (first game). Is the number of payouts at the time of updating.

  That is, by determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag set at the end of the game is “0” or “1”, it is determined whether or not the replay has been won in the current game, and the replay is performed in the current game. When it is determined that a prize has been won, the number of payouts is calculated as "the number of bets placed in the current game". In other words, the number of payouts is calculated using the value of the “number of payouts data buffer”, or the value betted in the current game (this In the example, it is determined whether the calculation is performed using “bet number data”).

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 3
Than,
Difference = 0
So,
Difference number data = 0 (H)
Becomes
The difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) +0 (H) = 0 (H)
Is updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the calculation is “0”, no correction is performed.

Next, in the second game, similarly to the first game, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read, and the value is set as the bet number of the second game.
For example, when the prescribed number of the second game is “3”, the bet number is “3”.

  Then, at the end of the second game, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. In this example, since the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is determined to be "0", the value stored in the payout number data buffer is read. Since "4" is stored in the payout number data buffer, this value is read and the payout number of the second game at the time of updating the difference counter is set to "4".

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference = +1
So,
Difference number data = 1 (H)
Becomes
The difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) +1 (H) = 1 (H)
Is updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the calculation is “0”, no correction is performed.

It is clear from Examples 1 and 2 that, depending on whether the number of automatic bets at the time of a replay prize or the number of bets bet on a game at the time of a replay prize is the payout number, the second game (the number of The difference counter value of the next game is different. This is because the difference counter value is corrected to “0 (H)” even if the difference number becomes “−3” in the first game in Example 1. .
The method of calculating the difference counter value may be any of Example 1 and Example 2. However, if the difference number counter value is updated by the method of Example 2, an increase in the difference number counter value based on the replay winning can be prevented.
On the other hand, if the difference number counter value is updated by the method of Example 1, it is not necessary to read the operating state flag and the symbol combination display flag when reading the bet number and the payout number, so that the calculation is simplified and the program capacity is reduced. be able to.

  Note that in Example 2 of FIG. 257, the value of the symbol combination display flag was read when the number of payouts for updating the difference counter value was acquired. However, it is also possible to read the value of the operating state flag and obtain the number of payouts for updating the difference number counter value. In the thirtieth embodiment, the operation state flag is updated at the time of the game start set of the next game of the game in which the replay has won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to update the operation state flag for the next game during the game after the replay has won. In this case, after the operation state flag is updated, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the operation state flag is “1” or “0”, and the number of payouts for updating the difference number counter value is acquired. What is necessary is just to update the difference number counter. In other words, based on the information that can determine whether or not the replay has won in the current game, in the game in which the replay has not won, the value stored in the payout number data buffer is used as the payout number of the current game. In the game in which the replay has been calculated and won, it is determined whether the calculation is to be performed using the number of bets bet (in this example, “3”).

FIG. 258 is a view for explaining the update timing of the difference counter value. FIG. 258 shows Example 1 and FIG. 258 shows Example 2.
In the following description, the difference counter value is indicated by 2 bytes, and the input number and the payout number are indicated by 1 byte. Replays will not be awarded.
In Example 1, when the start switch 41 is operated, the difference number counter value is updated based on the bet number, and further, at the end of the game, the difference number counter value is updated based on the payout number. Therefore, the difference counter value is updated twice in one game.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the difference counter value is not updated when the start switch 41 is operated, and the difference counter value is updated at the end of the game based on the bet number and the payout number in the game.
In the example 1 of FIG. 258 (a), as a specific timing for updating when the start switch 41 is operated, for example, after FIG. Before and after the update of the AT game frequency counter. The reason why the start switch 41 is operated is to update the difference counter value after the bet number in the game is determined.

  In the update at the time of operating the start switch 41, “the difference counter value = the difference counter value−the bet number” is updated. The bet number is read from the bet number data or the automatic bet number data. For example, in a normal game, the bet number is “3”, and when the difference counter value before the calculation is “0000 (H)”, the difference counter value is subtracted by “03 (H)”. Becomes “FFFD (H)”.

Next, as a process (1) at the end of the game, a process of adding the payout number to the difference counter value is executed. As the timing of this processing, in FIG. 244 (main processing of the thirtieth embodiment) described above, the “difference counter value updating processing based on the payout number” is provided in step S2705 (game end check processing). .
This process is a process of reading the number of payouts from the number-of-payouts data buffer and adding the number to the difference counter value.

  Next, as the process (2) at the end of the game, when the difference counter value is a value corresponding to a negative value, a correction to “0” is performed. By adding the payout number to the difference number counter value before the payout number is added, the difference number counter value does not become negative. However, since the bet number is subtracted from the difference counter value at the start of the game, the bet may be negative at this time, and may be negative even after the payout number is added.

  Whether the difference number counter value is negative or not is determined by determining whether the most significant bit of the 2-byte data of the difference number counter value is “1”. When the most significant bit is “1”, it is determined that the difference counter value is negative. For example, when the difference counter value is “FFFD (H)”, it is “11111111/11111101 (B)” (“/” is indicated between the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits). Therefore, the most significant bit (leftmost bit) of the 16 bits is “1”.

Note that, in order for the most significant bit to be “1” when the difference counter value is a positive value, the difference counter value must be “32768 (D)”. Absent. When the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, the advantageous section ends and the difference counter value becomes “0”, and the special game continues during the normal section. Is increased at the beginning of the advantageous section even if increases.
Accordingly, when the most significant bit of the difference number counter value is “1”, the difference number counter value is a value when a borrow occurs and can be said to be a negative value.
When it is determined that the difference counter value is negative, the difference counter value is corrected to “0 (H)”. Then, the corrected difference number counter value is stored.

  258, which is different from Example 1, is that the difference counter value is not updated when the start switch 41 is operated. In Example 2, the difference counter value is updated only at the end of the game. When the difference number counter value is updated only at the end of the game, the process is performed, for example, in step S2705 (game end set processing) in FIG.

The processing procedure at that time is as follows.
In the process (1), the number of bets is subtracted from the number of payouts, and difference data in the game is calculated. The bet number is read from the bet number data, and the payout number is read from the payout number data. In order to store the difference number data calculated at this time, a dedicated storage area (RWM53) may be provided. However, if there is a register that is vacant at the time of this processing, it may be stored in that register. Good.
Next, the difference counter value is read from the RWM 53, and difference data (calculated above) is added from the difference counter value. Then, the addition result is used as the difference counter value.
Next, in the process (2), similarly to Example 1, it is determined whether or not the difference counter value is negative, and when it is negative, the difference counter value is corrected to “0 (H)”. . Then, it is stored in the RWM 53.

In Example 2, “number of payouts−number of bets (= difference data)” was calculated first, and then difference data was added to the difference counter value. However, not limited to this,
(1) The payout number is added to the difference counter value. Next, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter value.
Or
(2) The bet number is subtracted from the difference counter value. Next, the payout number is added to the difference counter value.
May be performed in this order. In this way, there is no need to temporarily store the difference number data.

In the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is “3”, the above-mentioned “1” addition processing is performed rather than adding “3” to the difference number counter value at one time. Similarly to the above, it is simplified as a program to repeat adding "1" to the difference counter value. In this case, the “difference counter value updating (addition) process” may be executed in step S2189 (medal payout process for winning) in FIG. 244.
In the method of Example 2, it is necessary to read the bet number at the end of the game.
Here, if the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are not cleared at the time of the difference number counter value update processing at the end of the game, by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data, the game is terminated at the end of the game. (The bet number used for updating the difference counter value) can be read.
On the other hand, if the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are cleared at the time of the difference number counter value update processing at the end of the game, when the game starts, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is stored in a register or the like. What is necessary is just to memorize | store and hold | maintain until the update process of a difference number counter value.

Next, the relationship between the calculation of the difference counter value and the number of bytes of each data will be described.
As described above, each of the bet number data, the automatic bet number data, and the payout number data buffer includes one-byte data. This is for counting the range of “0 to 15 (D)”. On the other hand, the difference number counter consists of 2-byte data to count the range of “0 to 2400 (D)”. Therefore, the operation between one byte can be executed without any problem. However, when the operation is performed on two bytes and one byte, correction may be required in some cases.

FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the calculation of the difference counter value and the number of bytes of each data.
Example 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 259 is an example of a case where the calculation is performed as in Example 1 of FIG. When the start switch 41 is operated, “difference counter value−bet number” needs to be calculated, but the difference counter value is 2 bytes and the bet number is 1 byte. Here, for example, when the difference counter value before the calculation is “0000 (H)” and the bet number is “03 (H)”, the difference counter value is calculated by “difference counter value−bet number”. Becomes “FFFD (H)”. Therefore, no correction is required in this case.

Next, when calculating “difference counter value + payout number” at the end of the game, for example, the difference counter value before calculation is “FFFD (H)” and the payout number is “01 (H)”. At this time, the difference counter value becomes “FFFE (H)”.
Then, as described above, when the difference number counter value is negative, it is corrected to “0”. Therefore, the correction is made from “FFFE (H)” → “0 (H)”.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 259 (b) is an example in which the difference counter value is updated only at the end of the game, as in Example 2 of FIG. 258.
First, “payout number−bet number” (difference number data) is calculated. In this case, since both are 1-byte data, they can be calculated as they are. For example, when the payout number is “0” and the bet number is “3”, “payout number−bet number” becomes “FD (H)”.
Next, the calculation result of “number of payouts−number of bets” is converted into 2 bytes.
First, when the upper 1 byte of the operation result is “0”, the 1-byte data of “0x (H)” is converted into “000x (H)” of 2-byte data. When the upper 1 byte of the operation result is “1”, such as “Fx (H)”, the result is converted into “FFFx (H)” of 2-byte data.

Next, “the number of payouts−the number of bets” (corrected 2-byte data) is added to the difference counter value (2-byte data), and the updated difference counter value (2-byte data) is calculated.
For example, when the difference counter value before the calculation is “0” and the corrected “payout amount−bet number” is “1”, the difference counter value becomes “1”.
When the difference counter value before the calculation is “0” and the corrected “payout number−bet number” is “FFFD (H)”, the difference counter value is “FFFD (H)”. Become.
Next, when the difference counter value is negative (when the most significant bit is “1”), it is set to “0” by correction.
In the above example, when the difference number counter value is “1”, it is not corrected and remains at “1”. On the other hand, when the difference counter value is “FFFD (H)”, it becomes “0” due to the correction.

As described above, in the method of Example 1 in FIG. 259 (Example 1 in FIG. 258), it is necessary to update the difference counter value between the time when the start switch 41 is operated and the time when the game ends (two times in one game). . However, since the process of converting 1-byte data to 2-byte data is not required, the operation time can be reduced.
On the other hand, in the method of Example 2 of FIG. 259 (Example 2 of FIG. 258), the difference counter value can be updated only at the end of the game, so that one operation can be performed for one game, and the program can be simplified. Can be achieved. However, it is necessary to convert 1-byte data into 2-byte data.

In the thirty-first embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (AT) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can display the total acquired number during the AT on the image display device 23 (hereinafter, this display is referred to as “sub-display”). In this case, when the total acquired number displayed on the image display device 23 is an odd value, the difference number counter value may exceed “2400 (D)”. Therefore, even if the total number of acquisitions displayed on the image display device 23 is an odd value, the advantageous section (AT) may be forced to end.
Specifically, “difference counter value ≧ total acquisition number by sub display” is satisfied.

FIG. 260 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the difference counter value and the sub display.
Example 1 and Example 2 in FIG. 260 show an example in which the AT is not immediately started when the transition to the advantageous section is made, and the transition is made to a CZ (chance zone) of several games (for example, about 5 games). Then, an example is shown in which AT is started after the end of CZ. In such a case, the instruction function may or may not be operated in the CZ. In addition, it is conceivable that the pressing order bell is won during CZ and that it is not won. Therefore, both cases where medals increase and decrease during CZ are considered.
Further, even after the shift to the AT, the difference number does not always increase from the beginning of the AT. For example, when it is difficult to win the pushing order bell, the difference number may decrease even during the AT.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 260 (a), a slump graph [1] shown by a solid line shows an example in which the difference number decreases during CZ and increases from the time when AT is started. In this case, since the lowest value of the difference counter is at the start of the AT, the difference counter value matches the total number acquired by the sub display.
On the other hand, a slump graph [2] indicated by a dashed line shows an example in which the number of differences decreases until the point of “A” after the start of AT, and then increases.
Here, in the sub-display, since the total number of acquisitions since the start of the AT is displayed, the total number of acquisitions including the decrease in the difference from the start of the AT to the point of "A" is displayed. The display of the total number of acquisitions from the start of the AT to the time "A" includes a method of displaying a minus value and a method of displaying the value as "0" but calculating internally as a minus value.

In the case of the slump graph [2], the minimum value of the difference number counter is at the time “A”. Therefore, the difference counter value becomes positive from the time “A”. As a result, the difference counter value differs from the total number acquired by the sub display.
For example, when the difference number from the start of the AT to the time “A” is “−15”, the total number of acquisitions by the sub display when the difference number counter value reaches “2400 (D)” is “ 2385 sheets ". Therefore, the advantageous section (AT) ends before the total number of acquired sub-displays reaches “2400”.

In the thirty-first embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits a difference counter value to the sub-control board 80 for each game (for example, by processing the control command set 1 in step S2198 in FIG. 244). Therefore, the sub-control board 80 can determine how far to end the advantageous section (AT). This makes it easier for the sub-control board 80 to adjust the start and end timings of the ending effect.
Therefore, when it is determined that the advantageous section (AT) ends before the total number of acquired sub-displays reaches “2400”, the sub-control board 80 uses the image display device 23 to notify the player to that effect. It is preferable to notify. The contents of the notification include, for example, the following method.

(1) As in the above example, when the advantageous section (AT) is scheduled to end when the total acquired number in the sub display exceeds “2385 sheets”, for example, the display of the total acquired number is “2365 sheets”. Is displayed, "AT ends with 20 more sheets" is displayed to notify the end timing of the advantageous section (AT).
(2) At a predetermined timing during the AT, for example, it is notified that "the current AT ends when the total number of acquired pieces reaches 2385."

(3) For example, when the total obtained number exceeds “2300”, the display of the total obtained number by the image display device 23 is set to “????” and the accurate total obtained number is not displayed. .
Further, when "????" is displayed, an effect is output as if the end lottery of the AT is being performed every game. For example, an effect is output in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other. Then, when the difference number counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, there is a method of outputting an effect such that the hero character defeats (or wins) the enemy character and ends the AT.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 260 (b) is an example in which the number of differences increases during CZ after the start of the advantageous section. In this case, since the start of the advantageous section (CZ) is the lowest value of the difference counter in the advantageous section, the difference counter value becomes positive from the start of the advantageous section.
On the other hand, the total number of acquisitions by the sub display starts at the same time as the start of the AT. Therefore, also in this case, similarly to Example 1, the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” before the total acquired number in the sub display reaches “2400”. Therefore, the same effect as in Example 1 is output.
If the number of medals increases during CZ, the increase may be included in the total number of acquisitions in the sub display during AT. With this setting only when the number of medals increases during the CZ, the difference counter value (decimal number) matches the total number of acquisitions in the sub display, so that the total number of advantageous sections (AT) is "2400". The advantageous section (AT) can be ended when the number of “sheets” is exceeded.

Next, a description will be given of a new game property when the advantageous section (AT) is ended based on the difference counter value.
As in the thirty-first embodiment, in the case where the advantageous section is ended when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, in the case where the advantageous section (AT) is ended with the smallest possible number of games (hereinafter, “ Case 1) and a case where the game is exhausted to near 1500, which is the continuous upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, while the difference counter value does not exceed “2400 (D)” (hereinafter, “Case 2”). ").

Here, in the case where the game does not shift to the advantageous section without passing through the winning of the special role (special game) (for example, in the first embodiment, when the winning of 1 BBA becomes a condition for starting the advantageous section. Hereinafter, it is referred to as “specification 1”). ), And when it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only by winning the rare role (rare small role, rare replay) without winning the special role (for example, in the first embodiment, it is advantageous to win the small role E1) When it is possible to shift to a section, hereinafter referred to as “specification 2”).
Here, in the case of the specification 1, the progress of the game by the case 2 is more advantageous.

  Specifically, when the advantageous section is ended as soon as possible and the next special role is to be won, it is necessary to wait for the special role to be won in the normal section (game state in which the difference number decreases). On the other hand, after starting the advantageous section (AT), the difference number counter value is quickly increased to near “2400 (D)”, and thereafter, the difference number is substantially increased until the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games. This is because, if the current status is maintained, it is possible to wait for the special role to be won without reducing the difference.

On the other hand, when the specification is 2, it is not clear which of the cases 1 and 2 is more advantageous. This is because, in the situation where the difference number is currently maintained while the advantageous section (AT) is maintained as in Case 2, the second advantageous section (AT) is not won.
However, as described above, in the gaming machine of the specification 1, it is more advantageous to wait for the special role to be won while increasing the number of games in the advantageous section (AT). I will provide a.

FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification mode is changed in the thirty-first embodiment.
In (a) of the figure, when the advantageous section (AT) is started, when the push order bell is won, the indicating function is activated, and the push order indicating information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (FIGS. 20, 26). Further, the correct answer pressing order is displayed on the image display device 23 (FIG. 26).
Then, the above-described notification is executed until the difference counter becomes close to “2400 (D)” (until it reaches “2350 (D)” in the example of FIG. 261). The notification by the sub-control board 80 in this case is referred to as “notification mode A”. The notification mode A is a notification mode similar to the notification described in the first embodiment.

Then, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2350 (D)”, the notification mode such as the correct push order (notification by the sub-control board 80) displayed on the image display device 23 is changed from the notification mode A to the notification mode B. (Notification mode B ≠ notification mode A). For example, the notification mode B is different from the notification mode A in that the image display area in the correct answer order is smaller, the color when the correct answer order is notified is different, and the position on the image display device 23 that notifies the correct push order. Are different, and the volume of the speaker 22 when outputting the correct answer pressing order is low.
However, in each of the notification modes A and B, the correct answer pressing order itself to be notified is the same (the pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order cannot be notified).
In any of the notification modes A and B, the operation of the instruction function executed on the main control board 50 side is the same, and the same pressing order instruction information (“display content” in FIG. 20) is used. 1)) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the notification of the correct answering order in the notification mode B indicates that the difference number counter value has approached “2400 (D)”, that is, if the difference number increases as it is, the advantageous section (AT) ends. To inform. Accordingly, when the player changes from the notification mode A to the notification mode B, the difference counter value slightly exceeds “2400 (D)” (the advantageous section (AT) ends soon). You can know.
In the example of FIG. 261, when the difference counter value reaches “2350 (D)”, the notification mode is changed from the notification mode A to the notification mode B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The threshold value can be variously set, for example, when it exceeds "2300 (D)" or when it exceeds "2380 (D)".

For a player who wants to end the advantageous section (AT) early, in any of the notification modes A and B, if the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the notified correct answer pressing order, the shortest advantageous section (AT) can be obtained. AT) can be terminated.
On the other hand, for the player who wants to make the number of games in the advantageous section (AT) as long as possible, after the notification mode B is notified, the pressing order different from the correct answering order is intentionally performed, so that the high-order small role is achieved. Can be intentionally performed without winning the prize.

In the first embodiment, the high-order small role at the time of winning the push order bell is nine, so, for example, when the correct push order is notified in the notification mode B, the correct push is performed approximately once every four times. If the stop switch 42 is operated in this order and the others are operated in the incorrect push order (a push order different from the notified correct push order), it is considered that the difference number can be maintained almost as it is.
In the first embodiment, in the case of the wrong answer in the push order bell winning order, one winning combination wins with a probability of "1/4" and the role is missed with a probability of "3/4". The expected value of the difference number in the game is “−2.75”.

Therefore, for the player who wants to make the advantageous section (AT) as long as possible, by operating the stop switch 42 as described above, the difference number counter value is maintained at "2400 (D)", while the game proceeds. The game can be advanced without reducing medals until the game reaches the upper limit number of times of the advantageous section of 1500 games. In other words, it is possible to wait for the special role (BB) to be won while the difference number counter value is kept before “2400 (D)” (while maintaining the medal as it is).
Note that a penalty may not be imposed on the player for not operating the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order instruction information displayed by the operation of the instruction function and the correct pressing order displayed on the image display device 23. The absence is as described above ("0020").

Also, when the special role is won and the game is shifted to the special game, the difference number increases. For example, in the example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, since 1BBA game is payout of 150 sheets and 1BBB game is payout of 200 sheets, the difference number counter value is maintained at "2400 (D)". Sometimes, when 1BB is won and the game shifts to 1BB game, the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”. Therefore, the advantageous section (AT) ends during the 1BB game.
In (a) of FIG. 261, the notification in the notification mode B is performed, the BB is won in a situation where the difference number counter value is almost at the current position near “2350 (D)”, and the difference number is determined during the BB game. An example is shown in which the counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” and the advantageous section (AT) ends.

On the other hand, FIG. 261 (b) shows an example in which, after the notification in the notification mode B is performed, the BB is not won even if the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games. In this example, for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1480 games, the mode is switched from the notification mode B to the notification mode A again. Switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A informs the player that the number of games in the advantageous section has approached 1500 games.
Then, when switching to the notification mode A, the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct answer order in the subsequent pushing order bell win. As a result, in most cases, the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, and the advantageous section (AT) ends.
The “1480 game” for switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A is a guide, and various settings such as 1400 games, 1450 games, and 1470 games can be set.

Although the thirty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications as described below are possible.
(1) The difference counter is an increment counter that counts up from an initial value “0 (H)”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, a decrement counter that counts down from a predetermined value, for example, “2400 (D)” may be used.
In this case, for example, when updating the difference number counter from the start of the advantageous section, "2400 (D)" is set at the start of the advantageous section. When the difference counter value falls below “0 (H)”, that is, when a borrow occurs, it is possible to determine that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
Also, in the case where the difference counter value is counted down from “2400 (D)”, the game and difference counter values may be updated for each game including the normal section. In this case, in the normal section, the method of updating the difference number counter value as it is, and in the normal section, determining whether or not each game is "2400 (D)" and determining that it is not "2400 (D)" A method of setting an initial value “2400 (D)”.

(2) In the thirty-first embodiment, the condition for terminating the advantageous section based on the difference number counter value is set to 2400 difference numbers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various settings such as 2000 sheets, 2200 sheets, and 2500 sheets can be made.
In the thirty-first embodiment, the number is set to 2,400 according to the following standard.
In recent years, there is a tendency that “the payout rate does not exceed 150% in 1600 games”. In this case, assuming that the number of games and the number of bets are “3” in 1600 games,
1600 × 3 = 4800 (the total number of bets in 1500 games)
Becomes
Therefore, the payout number when the payout rate is 150% is
4800 × 1.5 (150%) = 7200 sheets.
Therefore,
7200 (payout number)-4800 (bet number) = 2400 (difference number)
Becomes
That is, that the difference number does not exceed 2400 means that the payout rate does not exceed 150% in 1600 games.

(3) After starting the advantageous section, the difference number counter value is set to “0 (H)” when the difference number becomes the minimum value, and the advantageous section can be continued until it exceeds “2400 (D)”. And
However, after the advantageous section is started, the point in time when the difference number becomes the minimum value may be set to “F6A0 (H)” corresponding to “−2400 (D)”, and counting up from that point. Then, when a carry occurs and exceeds “0000 (H)”, it may be determined that the advantageous section is ended.

(4) In the thirty-first embodiment, it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”. When it has reached (when it has reached), it may be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
When the difference counter is a decrement counter, the initial value is set to “2400 (D)”, and when the value falls below “0 (H)” (when a borrow occurs), the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. May be determined, or it may be determined that the condition for terminating the advantageous section is satisfied when the value becomes equal to or less than “0 (H)”.

(5) In the thirtieth embodiment, the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to “1500 (D)”, and the countdown is performed. The advantage section clear counter is set in this way only at the start of the advantage section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and thereafter, the game continues to be decremented by "1", and "1" to "0". Is determined, it is possible to simplify the program (FIG. 246).
On the other hand, in the thirty-first embodiment, the initial value of the difference number counter is set to “0”, and counting is performed until the difference counter exceeds “2400 (D)”. When correcting the difference counter value, correcting the value to “0” simplifies the program, and for that purpose, counting up is more convenient.
However, the advantageous section clear counter is not limited to counting down, and the difference counter is not limited to counting up.

(6) The timing for setting the initial value (for example, “0”) in the difference number counter can be variously set at the time of the game end check processing or the like, but the initial value “1500 (D)” is set in the advantageous section clear counter. It is preferable that the initial value “0” is set in the difference counter at a timing close to the setting timing. This is for minimizing the period in which the difference between the value of the advantageous section clear counter and the value of the difference counter occurs.
For example, after the process of step S2748 in FIG. 246 in the thirtieth embodiment, the initial value “0” may be set in the difference counter.

In the thirtieth embodiment, the update of the advantageous section clear counter (subtraction of “1”) was executed at the start of the game (step S2724 in FIG. 245; step S2742 in FIG. 246). However, if the updating of the advantageous section clear counter is performed at the start of the game, and the updating of the difference number counter value is performed at the end of the game (for example, the game end check processing in FIG. 244), the update timing of both counters Will be different. Specifically, the update timing of the difference number counter value is the end of the game of the game, and the update timing of the advantageous section clear counter is the start of the game of the next game.
Therefore, the update timing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed, for example, in the game end check processing, and the update of the advantageous section clear counter (subtraction of “1”) and the update processing of the difference number counter are performed in successive steps. More preferred.

(7) In the sub-display during AT, the total acquired number during AT is displayed as an image. However, in addition to this, the difference counter value received from the main control board 50 may be displayed together with the total acquired number. For example, "the total number of acquired XX sheets, the difference number xx" or the like. Then, when an effect or the like indicating that the advantageous section (AT) ends based on the difference number (difference counter value) is output, it is considered that the misunderstanding of the player is reduced. When the difference counter value is displayed, it may be displayed when the difference counter value exceeds a specific value (for example, the remaining “100”) or when the difference counter value exceeds the specific value.
Further, a difference indicator (for example, similar to the management information display LED 74) electrically connected to the main control board 50 is provided so as to be visible from the outside, and a difference counter value is displayed on the difference indicator. It is also possible.

  (8) In the example of FIG. 261, the image display by the image display device 23 is different between the notification mode A and the notification mode B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification mode may be the same, and the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 may be different, and / or the sound sound from the speaker 22 may be different. Further, it is also possible to change the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 and / or the sound sound from the speaker 22 at the same time as making the image display by the image display device 23 different.

(9) In the thirty-first embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is continued until the difference counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For each start of an advantageous section, the difference number serving as an end condition in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like.
In addition, when the transition to the advantageous section is performed when the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied (for example, at the time of winning 1BBA in the first embodiment), the transition to the advantageous section is performed when the advantageous section start condition B (≠ advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied. At this time (for example, at the time of winning the small win E1 in the first embodiment), it is also possible to make the difference number which is the end condition in the advantageous section different.

(10) In the thirty-first embodiment, a storage area for storing the difference counter value is provided. On the other hand, for the difference number data calculated by subtracting the bet number from the payout number, the storage area may or may not be provided in the RWM 53. When the storage area for storing the difference number data is not provided in the RWM 53, it may be stored in the register after calculating the difference number data and before calculating the difference number counter value.
In FIG. 258, in the calculation of Example 1, the process of subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter value and the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value are performed. Since the difference number data is not calculated, it is not necessary to store the difference number data.

  In the calculation of Example 2 in FIG. 258, difference data is calculated from “payout number−bet number”, and when adding the difference data to the difference counter value, the calculated difference data is stored. Is required. However, in Example 2, if "difference counter value = difference counter value + payout number" is calculated and "difference counter value = difference counter value-bet number" is calculated, the difference number data is calculated. Is not required.

(11) In Example 1 of FIG. 258, when the difference counter value is calculated when the start switch 41 is operated, and the difference number counter value is calculated again at the end of the game, the difference value is calculated when the start switch 41 is operated. After the calculation, the difference number counter value may be stored in the RWM 53. If the calculated difference number counter value can be stored in the register until the end of the game, the difference number counter value is stored until the end of the game (RWM53). May not be stored). Then, when the calculation of the difference counter value is completed at the end of the game (when the difference counter value is corrected to “0 (H)”, the corrected difference counter value is stored in the RWM 53. It may be.
Similarly, after the calculation of the difference counter value is completed, before the difference number counter value is stored in the RWM 53, the difference counter value is stored in the register and the difference number counter value is set to an advantageous section end condition. It may be determined whether or not the value satisfies the condition, and thereafter, the difference counter value may be stored in the RWM 53 (if necessary, the corrected difference counter value may be stored in the RWM 53).
If the difference number counter value calculated when the start switch 41 is operated is stored in the RWM 53, a process of re-reading the value occurs at the end of the game (when executing the process of adding the payout number to the difference number counter value). This is because the processing increases.

(12) In the thirty-first embodiment, a slot machine is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a casino machine or an enclosed gaming machine (medalless gaming machine).
(13) The thirty-first embodiment and the above-mentioned various modifications (including the contents of the first to thirtieth embodiments) are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combinations. It is.

<Appendix>
The inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification and the like of the present application include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 75. The means for achieving this and the effects of the present invention are as follows. However, the invention described in this specification does not mean that the invention is initially limited to inventions 1 to 75.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded. In such a case, it is required to perform appropriate control.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from having an impression that the player can play beyond the upper limit when extending the designated game section (AT) and exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section. is there.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 1 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (third embodiment; example 2 in FIG. 55) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
In the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition of extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) relating to the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the designated game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, predetermined information regarding the extension of the designated game section (AT remaining game after addition) Number)
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section is When determined, specific information (such as “celebration” or “congratulations”) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means,
As the predetermined information, information capable of grasping how long the designated game section has been extended is displayed (specific number of games is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to grasp that some decision regarding the extension of the designated game section has been made, but to display information that cannot grasp the degree of extension of the designated game section. do not do)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section is extended, it will exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is determined, the predetermined information relating to the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, thereby preventing the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 2 Same as the first invention.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 2 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 3 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
In the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition of extending the designated game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) relating to the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the total number of AT games is 1500 games), the designated game section is changed to the advantageous section It is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that indicates that the continuation upper limit is approaching.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the initial invention, an effect indicating that the indicated game section is approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section is output, so that the indicated game section continues beyond the upper limit of the advantageous section. The player can be notified that he / she will not do so.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 3 Same as Initial invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 3 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; example 1 in FIG. 55)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
In the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) relating to the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means,
Based on the information received from the game control means, if the designated game section is extended but the advantageous section continuation upper limit is not exceeded, information on the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after addition) is displayed. ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the extension of the indicated game section is When it is determined, information on the extension of the designated game section (the number of remaining AT games after addition) is not displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when the indicated game section is extended, it will exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section continuation, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, When the extension is determined, the information regarding the extension of the designated game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 4 Same as Initial invention 1.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 4 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (third embodiment; example 4 in FIG. 55) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
A game control means (main control board 50) for controlling start and end of the advantageous section and start and end of the designated game section;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for outputting an effect relating to the designated game section,
The game control means,
In the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, when the condition for extending the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section can be extended,
Transmitting information (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) relating to the designated game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means displays game information indicating that the designated game section will not be executed beyond the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section (such as "the game will end in 10 more games").

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means is based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the indicated game section exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, or after the indicated game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section When the extension of the designated game section is determined, the game information is displayed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the designated game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when an upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT. Need to be eliminated.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the designated game section (AT, etc.) from exceeding the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 5 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
After the advantageous section is started, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game) is reached (for example, when “Yes” in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to determine whether to extend the designated game section,
When it is determined that the designated game section is to be extended, and the designated game section has reached the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section before the extension is determined (for example, “Yes” in step S451 of FIG. 44), It is characterized by clearing the decision on the extension.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the initial invention, even if it is decided to extend the designated game section, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section has been reached, the decision result relating to the extension is made. Since the game is cleared, it is possible to prevent the designated game section from exceeding the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, when the upper limit (for example, the upper limit number of games) is set in the advantageous section, as a result of adding the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it difficult for the designated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 6 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
After starting the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (1500 games), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the designated game section is satisfied, the designated game section is started,
In the designated game section, it is possible to determine whether to extend the designated game section,
An extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the designated game section,
The extension determination table,
at least,
A first extension determination table (a lottery table A in FIGS. 47 to 49);
A second extension determination table (in FIG. 47 to FIG. 49, a lottery table B) having a smaller expected value of the degree of extension (addition number) determined than the first extension determination table;
Until the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), the extent of extension is determined using the first extension determination table. Is reached, the degree of extension is determined using the second extension determination table.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold, the extension degree is determined using the extension determination table having a small expected value of the extension degree. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section.

7. Initial Invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by Initial invention 7 Same as Initial invention 6.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 7 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
A role lottery means (61) for performing a role lottery,
Based on the winning combination in the lottery of the role by the role lottery means, it is possible to determine whether to extend the indicated game section,
The degree of extension (number of additions) determined when the first role (for example, small role E1) is won in the lottery of the role by the role lottery means than when the second role (for example, small role D) is won. The expected value of
If the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000 games), and the first role is won, the extension of the designated game section is performed based on the winning of the first role. The degree is determined (step S541 in FIGS. 50 to 52),
In the case where the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second role is won, the extent of the designated game section is determined based on the winning of the second role,
In the case where the designated game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold, when the first combination is won, the extent of the designated game section is determined in the same manner as when the second combination is won (FIG. 50). ~ Step S543 in FIG. 52)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, when the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold, the extension of the designated game section is reduced so that the expected value of the determined degree of extension becomes smaller. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the designated game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
An external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT, and an external signal indicating the special game is output during the special game. However, these external signals are output when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent the timing of turning on / off the external signal from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the on / off of the external signal indicating the designated game section and the external signal indicating the special game from becoming unnatural when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 8 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
And external signal transmission means (70).
Performing a special game based on winning the special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is finished, the second external signal is turned off,
When the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section and not during the special game, the first external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57),
If the special role is won during the designated game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game is completed (FIG. 57). Example 2)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
An advantageous section display device (advantage section display LED 77) for indicating an advantageous section;
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, the first external signal indicating the designated game section can be turned off at a natural timing even when the special game straddles the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
An external signal indicating the AT is output during the AT. However, when the AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the problem is how to control the external signal indicating the AT. Becomes
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately control an external signal indicating the designated game section when the designated game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 9 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIG. 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes an external signal transmission means (70),
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
When the continuous upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section, the predetermined external signal is turned off.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, it is possible to match the timing when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
During the AT, an external signal indicating the AT is output. However, since the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the arrival at the upper limit of the advantageous section are mixed, the external signal is output. It is necessary to prevent the timing of turning on / off from becoming unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent unnaturalness in reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, starting and ending the special game, and turning on / off the external signal indicating the designated game section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 10 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means,
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game);
And external signal transmission means (70).
Performing a special game based on winning the special role by the role lottery means,
The external signal transmitting means,
When the designated game section is started, a predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the designated game section is turned on, and when the designated game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (Example 1 in FIG. 57). ,
When the upper limit of the continuation of the advantageous section is reached during the designated game section and not during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the designated game section and the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game is finished (Example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the initial invention, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, when the special game ends, and when the predetermined external signal indicating the designated game section is turned off is matched. Can be.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed.
When such an advantageous section is provided, there is a problem as to when to start the AT and when to end the AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable a wide range of game design by giving a characteristic to the start and end timings of the designated game section in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 11 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section, and the start and end of the designated game section,
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state (RT) in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (for example, RT5) and a second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the designated game section can be executed,
In the designated game section and the first lottery state, when the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied (50 games have been completed) and a transition is made to the second lottery state, both the advantageous section and the designated game section are ended. Features.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, the transition to the lottery state can be used to start or end the advantageous section or the designated game section. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

12. Original Invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 Same as Initial Invention 11.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 12 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The state controlled by the game control means includes at least a first control state (a precursor, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal),
It is possible to shift to the first control state (a precursor) on condition that it is an advantageous section,
In the first control state (AT), the designated game section starts,
In the advantageous section and the first control state (AT withdrawal period, CZ, CZ withdrawal period), when the condition for shifting to the second control state (normal) is satisfied, the state shifts to the second control state and the advantageous section ends. It is characterized by doing.
The second solution is the first solution,
In the first control state, which is the designated game section, when the condition for shifting to the second control state is satisfied, the control section shifts to the second control state and ends both the advantageous section and the designated game section. .

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, the transition of the control state can be used as an opportunity to start or end an advantageous section or a designated game section. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

13. Original Invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 Same as Initial Invention 11.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 13 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
A game state (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means includes at least a first game state and a second game state,
In the first game state (RT5 and AT), an advantageous section is executed, and a designated game section can be started.
The instruction game section is started in the first game state, and when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted, the game apparatus shifts to the second game state (RT2 and normal) and ends the instruction game section.

The second solution is the first solution,
When the predetermined number of games has been exhausted in the designated game section in the first game state, the game mode shifts to the second game state and ends both the advantageous section and the designated game section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be started or ended with the transition of the gaming state. As a result, a wide range of gaming design is possible.

14． Original invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and further provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit number of games) in the advantageous section.
However, a game that ends only when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not enough to differentiate from other models.
A problem to be solved by the invention at first is to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section by enabling the advantageous section to be executed intermittently even in the advantageous section having the upper limit.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 14 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
A first solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means is a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different. )
In the indicated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the indicated game section Ends both,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (the “1/32” lottery is executed).
In the normal section in the second lottery state, when a specific condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the “1/32” lottery is won), the section shifts to the advantageous section and shifts to the advantageous section. Instructed game section can be started based on
In the normal section in the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the advantageous section, but the designated game section is not started based on the shift to the advantageous section.

A second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch,
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the designated game section;
The game control means includes role lottery means (61) for performing lottery of a role,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (non-RT) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different. )
In the indicated game section in the first lottery state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied before the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached (when replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the indicated game section Ends both,
In the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to start the normal section and shift to the advantageous section (the “1/32” lottery is executed).
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games have been completed), the state shifts to the third lottery state,
In some cases, the state shifts to the third lottery state without passing through the second lottery state,
In the normal section of the third lottery state that has shifted without passing through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section,
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, then the designated game section can be started,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without passing through the second lottery state, the designated game section is not started.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the designated game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the designated game section, and then to the advantageous section again. Since it is possible and the designated game section can be started, it is possible to execute a game that is not restricted by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition (in the first solving means, satisfying a specific condition in the second lottery state, in the second solving means, passing through the second lottery state) that can start the designated game section, It can be suppressed that the designated game section is more easily executed than necessary.

15. Original Invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. It has also been proposed to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, it is desired that the expectation of the player is not reduced even during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to enable the player to keep giving expectations even during the special game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 15 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that the section is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of special roles is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
When a special combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the game shifts to a special game,
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends when the special game ends (Example 1 or Example 2 in FIG. 64) or continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65). Example 3) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect over a plurality of games with respect to continuation of an advantageous section during a special game.

The second solution is the first solution,
The continuous effect is an effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Original Invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. It has also been proposed to display to the player that the section is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, it is desired that the expectation of the player is not reduced even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable the player to keep giving the expectation even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 16 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is:
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantageous section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that the section is an advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of special roles is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning a special role,
When a special combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the game shifts to a special game,
The advantageous section started based on the winning of the special role ends when the special game ends and ends with a predetermined number of games (5 games) (Example 4) and when the special game continues beyond the predetermined number of games (Example) 5) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

The second solution is the first solution,
The predetermined effect is an effect that indicates whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give the player an expectation as to whether or not the advantageous section will continue even after the end of the special game.

17． Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section based on the winning of the special combination. In this case, simply starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special combination cannot achieve the skill of the player.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make the profit related to the advantageous section different depending on the skill of the player when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special role.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 17 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (ninth embodiment (FIG. 67))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a specific winning (1BBA + small role E1),
The specific winning is a winning including a special role (1BBA) that carries over the winning to the next game until the symbol combination stops, and a predetermined role (small role E1) that does not carry over the winning to the next game,
The winning probability of a specific winning is the same for all set values,
In the case where it is determined that the game will be shifted to the advantageous section in the game (“N” game item) that has been specially won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role does not stop, and the special role is carried over to the next game. In addition, the advantageous section is started from the game (the “N + 2” game item) in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination that has been won can be stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the initial invention, in the first game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination can be stopped, the symbols corresponding to the special combination are A difference can be provided in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who stopped the combination and the player who could not stop the combination. Thereby, the profit obtained in the advantageous section can be varied depending on the skill of the player.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed. Here, the addition of the AT can be performed based on the winning of the special role having no setting difference, but the addition of the AT cannot be performed based on the winning of the special role having the setting difference. ing.
However, in this case, there is a problem that when a special combination having a setting difference is won during the AT, the player cannot be expected to add the AT to the player.
A problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to allow an additional designated game section (AT) to be added even when a special combination having a setting difference is won.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 18 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the tenth embodiment (FIG. 22))
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
When a special combination is won and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped, the game shifts to a special game,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When the special game is transferred to the special game during the designated game section, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state after the end of the special game. age,
During the designated game section, when the state is shifted from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without shifting to the special game, the designated game section is not extended based on the transition.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, the designated game section can be extended when the special lottery is executed and the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state. . Thereby, regardless of whether or not the winning special combination has a setting difference, it is possible to extend the designated game section after the end of the special game. Further, it is possible to set so that the designated game section is not extended by merely shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without passing through the special game.

19. Original Invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is desired to provide new playability using the instruction function operation game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to provide a new playability by using the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 19 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (small role E1) is won,
The winning probability of the predetermined role is the same for all set values,
When the predetermined lot is won in the lottery of the role by the lottery means, the next game shifts to the advantageous section,
The advantageous section that shifts based on the winning of the predetermined role,
A first advantageous section (Example 1 in FIG. 68) in which the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed;
A second advantageous section (example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the designated game section;
The effect control means outputs a continuous effect in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of the predetermined combination.

The second solution is the first solution,
The effect control means starts the continuous effect after one instruction function operation game is executed.
The third solution is the first or the second solution,
The continuous effect is an effect that indicates whether it is a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, the instruction game section is executed even if the game shifts to the advantageous section, and the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being limited to the gaming ability in which the transition to the advantageous section / no transition.

20. Original Invention 20
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 20 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit in the advantageous section. On the other hand, it is conceivable that even if the transition to the advantageous section is made, the condition device (role) having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to balance the condition for ending the advantageous section (including the upper limit) with the execution of the instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 20 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 69)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined role (small role E1) is won,
The winning probability of the predetermined role is the same for all set values,
When the predetermined lottery is won in the lottery of the role by the lottery means, there may be a transition from the next game to an advantageous section,
In the advantageous section, when a predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is terminated,
In the advantageous section, if there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until the predetermined end condition is reached, the advantageous section is ended until at least one instruction function operation game is executed. However, if there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantage is obtained without executing the instruction function operation game. End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 20 According to the initial invention, in the advantageous section, "execute at least one instruction function operation game", and "when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section ends." And balance things.

21. Initial Invention 21
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 21 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit in the advantageous section. Further, it is conceivable that the special role is won during the advantageous section and the game shifts to a special game. In this case, if the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that point, and the player may feel uncomfortable.
A problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during execution of a special game.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 21 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (twelfth embodiment; FIG. 70)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Effect control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
The effect control means,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is approached), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit (1500 game) of the advantageous section is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous effect is terminated, and the specific effect is terminated,
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect and the game is shifted to the special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is terminated, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is completed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is terminated, but the output is performed during the advantageous section until the special game is completed. Continue the specific production. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from suddenly ending in the middle of the special game, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

22. Original Invention 22
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a slot machine provided with a plurality of lottery states in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine for shifting an RT (lottery state) to execute an AT is known.
In the related art, it is known that the RT shift is performed by, for example, winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that the easiness of transition of the RT may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make the transition of the RT difficult to be influenced by the set value.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 22 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71) is as follows.
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
As the lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT2), a second lottery state (RT3), and a third lottery state (RT4) in which the winning probability of at least one replaying game is different. Prepare,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a specific role (replay B group) is won.
When a specific combination is won in the first lottery state and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
The winning probability of the specific role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a special role (for example, 1BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBB game) is won,
If the special combination is won in any of the lottery states and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special combination does not stop, the process proceeds to the third lottery state,
It is characterized in that the probability of winning a special role varies depending on the set value.

The second solution is the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
An instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch in the advantageous section;
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When the special combination is won during the designated game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state in order to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game,
After the end of the special game, the designated game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
The instruction game section can be executed in the third lottery state,
When the designated game section is in the third lottery state, the designated game section is not extended.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, since the winning probability of the specific combination which is the trigger for transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all the set values, the first lottery state is changed. The transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Original Invention 23
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 23 Same as Initial Invention 22.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 23 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function operation game is always executed or the execution frequency is increased in the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
And a lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role.
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT3) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The role lottery means performs a role lottery so as to have a case where a specific replay role (replay group C) is won in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, the player wins a specific replay, and when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped, the state shifts to the first lottery state,
The winning probability of a specific replay in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined replay role (replay A) is won,
In the second lottery state, even if the player wins the predetermined re-game combination and the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined re-game combination stops, the game does not shift to the first lottery state,
In the second lottery state, the winning probability of the predetermined replaying game is different depending on a set value.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of the specific replaying game which is the trigger of the transition to the lottery state is the same for all the set values, so that the ease of the transition to the lottery state is equal to the set value. Is not affected. Further, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of the predetermined replaying game which does not trigger the transition to the lottery state is made different according to the set value. For example, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate in the designated game section. can do.

24. Original Invention 24
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 24 Same as Initial Invention 22.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 24 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 71) is as follows.
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of the plurality of setting values,
The lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means includes a first lottery state (RT1) and a second lottery state (RT2) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replaying game are different,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first lottery state, the state shifts to the second lottery state,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role such that a first role (small role B group) having a possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition may be won,
The winning probability of the first role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role such that a second role (small role D) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition may be won.
The winning probability of the second role in the first lottery state varies depending on the set value,
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a third role (small role E1) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the third role in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped is D1 (9), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped is D2 (15), and the third combination is When the maximum payout when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped is D3 (two),
D2>D1> D3
It is characterized by satisfying.

The second solution is the first solution,
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections.
When the third lottery is won in the lottery selection by the lottery means during the normal section, there is a possibility of shifting to the advantageous section.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, since the winning probability of the first role having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is the same for all set values, the first lottery state , The ease of transition to the second lottery state is not affected by the set value.
Further, since the winning probability of the second winning combination having the largest payout is made different according to the set value, the payout rate can be largely changed according to the set value.

25. Initial Invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to change the end condition of the advantageous section after starting the advantageous section. In addition, it is considered that it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at an intended timing while making it possible to change the end condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 25 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 72)
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which at least one instruction function operation game needs to be executed in the game section.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is made,
When a predetermined condition (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied during the advantageous section, the end condition (30 games) of the previous advantageous section is changed (50 games are added),
After executing at least one instruction function operation game in the advantageous section and changing the end condition of the advantageous section based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the instruction function operation game is changed to 1 after the end condition is changed. The advantageous section can be ended without executing it twice (example 1 in FIG. 72),
If the end condition of the advantageous section is changed based on satisfying the predetermined condition before executing the first instruction function operation game after shifting to the advantageous section, at least one time after the end condition is changed, Unless the instruction function operation game is executed, the advantageous section cannot be ended even if the end condition is satisfied (Example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 25 According to the initial invention, after the advantageous section is started, the end conditions of the advantageous section up to that point can be changed, so that the advantageous section end conditions are not fixed, and the advantageous section is not fixed. Can be prevented from becoming monotonous. In addition, while the end condition of the advantageous section can be changed, even though the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is not executed at any time because the instruction function operation game is not executed at the intended timing. It is possible to suppress that it cannot be completed.

26. Original Invention 26
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 26 The initial invention relates to a slot machine having an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch can be executed.
In a conventional slot machine, it is known that the AT is managed by a main control board in addition to the management of the AT by a sub-control board (for example, see JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed. Here, it is conceivable to execute a freeze at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, the player may be uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately execute the freeze at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 26 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode,
In the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed among the game sections.
When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is made,
The end condition of the advantageous section includes at least two types of first end condition and second end condition,
The advantageous section of the first end condition has a larger expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section than the advantageous section of the second end condition,
Freeze control means for controlling a freeze for temporarily stopping the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section under the second end condition (the end condition of CZ), and does not execute the freeze when ending the advantageous section under the first end condition (the end condition of AT). It is characterized by performing.

The second solution is the first solution,
During the freeze, a display related to the profit obtained during the advantageous section is performed.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when the freeze is executed according to the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By providing a case where the freeze is not executed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is small), the freeze can be appropriately executed at the end of the advantageous section.

27. Original Invention 27
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 27 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed, and shifts to this advantageous section. This is related to a slot machine that determines the effect on the main control board side.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a hand on a main control board side and determines whether to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881). Reference).
Here, when the main control board determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, data and a program for performing the processing related to the determination are required, and the memory and the memory of the main control board are accordingly required. Requires capacity.
On the other hand, the memory capacity of the main control board has a certain limit.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function actuating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be executed, and to shift to the advantageous section, the main control board side In the slot machine determined by (1), the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section is appropriately performed within a certain memory capacity range.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 27 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that the winning is a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storing means, the value is stored in the predetermined storing means. Is maintained (if “No” in step S1044 of FIG. 89, step S1045 is skipped);
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means, the value stored in the predetermined storing means can be updated. (If “Yes” in the step S1044 in FIG. 89, the process proceeds to the next step S1045 to store the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53.)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
A specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than a specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storing means. Is stored, the value stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (if “No” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “ Even if "0", the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 27 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value is maintained; When the predetermined value is stored, the value can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the transition to the advantageous section is determined, so that the transition to the advantageous section is performed within a certain memory capacity. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

28. Initial Invention 28
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 28 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 28 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that the winning is a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In a case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the second storing means, the value is stored in the first storing means. (If “No” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, skip steps S1044 to S1046 to maintain the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a predetermined value is stored in the second storing means, the value stored in the first storing means can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to step S1044. If “Yes” at this time, the process proceeds to step S1045, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the first storing means, a predetermined value is stored in the second storing means. Is stored, the value stored in the first storage means is maintained ("Yes" in step S1043 in FIG. 89, and if the process proceeds to step S1044, but "No" in step S1044, step S1045). Is skipped, so that the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 28 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the first storage means The stored value is maintained, and when the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means, the value stored in the first storage means can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section.

29. Original Invention 29
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 29 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 29 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a special winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storing means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storing means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit is updated (after updating the value of “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045, “ _NB_CND_BNS "is updated)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution (the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that the winning is a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (for example, small role D),
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the information stored in the first storing means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storing means. (If “Yes” in step S1043 of FIG. 89 and “Yes” in step S1044, the process proceeds to step S1045 to update the value of “_NB_CND_AT”)
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit and the third storage unit is updated (after the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1045) , The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1046, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1047)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 29 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A process for updating information is executed, and thereafter, information stored in the second storage unit is updated.
Thus, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been determined.
Further, it is possible to determine whether a special role has been won in the current game or a special role has been won before the previous game without having a flag indicating whether or not the winning information of the special role is carried over.
Therefore, the processing relating to the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the fixed memory capacity.

30. Initial invention 30
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 30 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 30 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a special winning number (for example, “43”) indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) is won and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over,
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage means is updated based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means being the specific winning number (when "Yes" in step S1073, In step S1074, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated),
After executing the process related to updating the information stored in the second storage unit, if a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is deleted. (Step S1073 determines whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” and updates the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” in Step S1074, and then stores “0” in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in Step S1078. If so, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is updated in step S1079.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that the winning is a specific winning (for example, 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and that a transition to an advantageous section is made,
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a special role (for example, small role D),
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) that can store the winning information of the special role;
A third storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over;
A fourth storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage means and the fourth storage means is updated based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means being the specific winning number ("Yes" in step S1073). ), The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1074, and the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated in step S1075.)
After executing a process related to updating the information stored in the second storage unit and the fourth storage unit, when a predetermined value is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is deleted. (Step S1073 determines whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, updates the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” in Step S1074, and updates the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” in Step S1075. If “0” is stored in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in step S1078, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079.
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
If the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, and a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storing means, the value is stored in the second storing means. The characteristic value is maintained.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 30 According to the initial invention, a process for updating information stored in the second storage means is executed based on the determination of the winning number as the specific winning number, and thereafter, When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won and whether or not the transition to the advantageous section has been decided. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the determination to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, after executing the processing related to updating the information stored in the second storage means, the register storing the special combination winning information can be used for other processing.

31. Initial invention 31
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 31 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 31 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value ("0") is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1114 of step S99, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so that the two-stage lottery is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
A predetermined storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, if a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery may be executed. And maintaining the value stored in the predetermined storage means.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 31 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the process proceeds to the advantageous section. Do not execute the transfer lottery to determine whether or not.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the transition to the advantageous section is determined, so that the transition to the advantageous section is performed within a certain memory capacity. Processing related to the determination can be appropriately performed.

32. Initial invention 32
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 32 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 32 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
A special storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special role (for example, 1BBA);
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the specific storing means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. If “No” in step S1113 of step S99, steps S1114 to S1116 are skipped, so that the two-stage lottery is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “42”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
A first storage unit (a storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53) that can store information regarding transition to an advantageous section;
A second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special role (for example, 1BBA),
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the second storage means, the transfer lottery may be executed. , The value stored in the first storage means is maintained.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 32 According to the initial invention, if the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, and if a value other than the specific value is stored in the specific storage means, whether to shift to the advantageous section? Do not execute the transfer lottery to determine whether or not.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number for which the transfer lottery can be executed. Can appropriately be performed.

33. Initial invention 33
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 33 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 33 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
A predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
In some cases, the transfer lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40", If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116).
After executing the process relating to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means (after performing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1117).
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) and the specific role (small role D) have been repeatedly won,
A predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role;
Specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific combination,
The transfer lottery may be executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be “39” or “40”, If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-stage lottery is executed in step S1116.)
After executing the process related to the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the winning information of the specific combination is stored in the specific storage unit (after executing the two-stage lottery in step S1116, (In step S1117, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated, and in step S1119, the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” is updated.)
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (step S1113 in FIG. 99). If “No”, steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery of step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by the following.

The fourth solution is the first to the third solutions,
An advantageous section information storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, if the information on the shift to the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means, the transfer lottery is not executed (FIG. 99). If "No" in step S1114, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 33 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the transfer lottery can be executed. Then, after executing the process regarding the transfer lottery, the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means.
As a result, even if there is no flag indicating whether or not the winning information of the special role has been carried over, it is determined whether the special role has been won in the current game or the special role has been won before the previous game, and the transition is performed. It can be determined whether or not to execute a lottery.
Therefore, the processing relating to the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within the range of the fixed memory capacity.

34. Initial invention 34
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 34 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 34 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (a modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As the winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “38” to “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery without setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that a special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
A second storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the winning information of the special role is carried over,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated (the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40". If it is, the result is “Yes” in step S1153 in FIG. 103, and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is updated in step S1154)
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where the transfer lottery is not executed (if “No” in step S1158 in FIG. 103, the process proceeds to step S1116 to execute the two-stage lottery. (If “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
A winning number determining means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and a lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) capable of executing a shift lottery (two-stage lottery in FIG. 100 and a lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) and the specific role (small role D) have been repeatedly won,
When a special role is won, carry over the special role winning information until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role stops,
A first storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special role,
A second storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special role winning information is carried over;
A third storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific role,
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means and the third storage means is updated (the winning number is "38" to "38"). When the number is determined to be "40", "Yes" is determined in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1154, and the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated in step S1155).
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where the transfer lottery is not executed (if “No” in step S1158 in FIG. 103, the process proceeds to step S1116 to execute the two-stage lottery. (If “Yes” in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-stage lottery in step S1116 is not executed.)
It is characterized by the following.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when the winning information of the special role is stored in the first storing means, the information stored in the first storing means is maintained. (If “No” in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained by skipping step S1154.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 34 According to the initial invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. Then, there is a case where the transfer lottery is executed and a case where it is not executed based on the information stored in the second storage means.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special combination has been won, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number for which the transfer lottery can be executed. Can appropriately be performed.
In addition, after updating the information stored in the first storage means, the register storing the winning information of the special combination can be used for other processing.

35. Initial invention 35
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 35 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 35 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the eighteenth embodiment; FIGS. 105 to 108) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
A lottery data table (all RT common lottery table (8) in FIG. 105 to all RT common lottery table (11) in FIG. 108) used to determine the winning number;
The lottery data table is
Winning number data (for example, “$ BBA” = “38”) indicating a winning number, probability data (for example, “10”) indicating a winning probability, and advantageous section data (for example, “$ LT_AT1”) indicating that a transition to an advantageous section is to be made. )) (For example, 1BBA condition device lottery data in FIG. 106);
A second data group (for example, the 1BBA condition device lottery in FIG. 105) in which the winning number data (for example, “$ BBA” = “38”) and the probability data (for example, “10”) are associated and the advantageous section data is not associated Data) and,
The first data group and the second data group define the same winning number data.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 35 According to the initial invention, the same winning number is determined when using either the first data group or the second data group. However, when the first data group is used, Is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and when the second data group is used, it is determined not to shift to the advantageous section.
Thus, by performing the lottery using one lottery data table, it is possible to determine the winning number and to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. Thus, it is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

36. Original Invention 36
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 36 Same as Initial Invention 27.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 36 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Random number generating means;
Based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means, a lottery means for performing a lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (for example, replay A) (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Shift lottery means (advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121) for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means;
A first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning the predetermined combination in the lottery by the lottery means;
The transfer lottery means executes the transfer lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied (not when the accessory is in operation ("No" in step S1323 in FIG. 120)) and not in the inside ("Yes" in step S1324). )) And when it is not an advantageous section (“Yes” in step S1325), the process proceeds to step S1326 to execute an advantageous section shift lottery).
In the transfer lottery, when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section (when the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 2 If the random number belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 1).
When the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, the winning combination by the combination lottery means is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “344”, In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116, the condition device to be won is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by the following.

A second solution (a modification of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function operation game for activating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode (displaying push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78);
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function operation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function operation game can be executed,
Random number generating means;
Based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means, a lottery means for performing a lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (for example, replay A) (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120). )When,
Shift lottery means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantageous section based on the random number value obtained from the random number generating means (advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121) and a predetermined storage means capable of storing information relating to shifting to an advantageous section (The storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53).
A first game state (for example, RT1) and a second game state (for example, RT2) having different probabilities of winning the predetermined combination in the lottery by the lottery means;
The shift lottery means decides to shift to the advantageous section when the random number value belongs to the predetermined range (if the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, shifts to the advantageous section 2). Is determined, and when the random number value belongs to the range of “178” to “344”, it is determined to shift to the advantageous section 1),
When the transfer lottery is executed under the condition that the specific condition is satisfied, the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained (when the accessory is activated (“Yes” in step S1356 in FIG. 123). When the internal medium flag is ON (when “Yes” in step S1357 in FIG. 123) and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (when “No” in step S1358 in FIG. 123), In this case, even if the advantageous section shift lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained by skipping step S1338 in FIG. 121). ),
When the random number value belongs to the predetermined range, the winning combination by the combination lottery means is the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number value belongs to the range of “0” to “344”, In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) in FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) in FIG. 116, the condition device to be won is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 36 According to the initial invention, the lottery of the combination is performed by the lottery means based on one random number value obtained from the random number generation means, and the transition to the advantageous section is performed by the transition lottery means. It is determined whether or not to make it. Then, when the shift lottery means determines to shift to the advantageous section, the same lottery is won in the first game state and the second game state by the role lottery means.
As described above, it is possible to perform the lottery of the hand using one random number value and determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, so that the advantage area can be determined within the fixed memory capacity range. It is possible to appropriately perform the processing related to the decision to shift.

37. Initial invention 37
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 37 The initial invention relates to a technology for outputting a digit signal and a segment signal of an LED from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it has been studied to mount 7-segment capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with 7-segment for displaying the stored number, 7-segment for displaying the acquired number, and the like.
When the number of 7-segments increases as described above, how to design the digit signal and the segment signal of each 7-segment and the output port becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to appropriately design digit (drive) signals, segment signals, and output ports, and to execute efficient signal output processing.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 37 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (20th embodiment; FIG. 128) is as follows.
A display unit having a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to P), and displaying predetermined information (the number of stored items, the acquired number, error information, the push order instruction number, the game state, or the set value) by lighting the segments. First display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73) having one or more (digits);
A second display means (management information display LED 74) having at least one display unit,
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means,
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a drive signal to the display unit of the second display means,
A third output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display section of the first display means and the second display means,
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 134) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the third output port;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 135) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the third output port;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process of outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port (steps S1431 and S1432 in FIG. 134) Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1458) is "t1", and the output of the clear signal is the second output. When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the process (the time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1487) is “t2”, the process is performed such that “t1 <t2”. And

The second solution is the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 132) updated at a predetermined timing;
When the display counter has a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. I do.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 37 According to the initial invention, since the segment signal is output using the output port common to the first display means and the second display means, the IC cost can be reduced and the drive signal (digit) can be efficiently reduced. Signal) and a segment signal.
Also, when the first display means is a display means visible to the player and the second display means is a display means invisible to the player, the output processing of the first display means is performed before the second display means. Thus, it is possible to give priority to the flicker prevention of the first display means.
Further, according to the second solving means, it is possible to execute output processing to the first display means and output processing to the second display means using one display counter.

38. Initial invention 38
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 38 Same as Initial Invention 37.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 38 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 138) is as follows.
A display unit (digits) having a plurality of segments (segments A to P) that can be turned on and displaying predetermined information (the number of stored, the number of acquired, the error information, the push order instruction number, or the game state) by lighting the segments. First display means having one or more (a stored number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, or a status display LED 79);
A second display means (management information display LED 74) having at least one display unit,
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display unit and the display unit of the second display unit;
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display unit of the first display unit and the segment of the display unit of the second display unit;
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 140) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the second output port;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 141) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the second output port;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process of outputting a clear signal from the first output port and the second output port (Step S1531 in FIG. 140) is performed.
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1531 to step S1534) is "t1", and the drive in the second output process is performed from the output timing of the clear signal. When the time until the output timing of the signal and the segment signal (the time from step S1531 to step S1487) is “t2”, the processing is executed such that “t1 <t2”.

The second solution is the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 139 (B)) updated at a predetermined timing;
When the display counter has a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. I do.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 38 In addition to the effects of Initial Invention 37, the number of output ports can be reduced because the number of output ports for drive signals and the number of output ports for segment signals can be reduced to one. it can.

39. Original Invention 39
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 39 Same as Initial Invention 37.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 39 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (22nd embodiment; FIG. 144) is as follows.
A display unit having a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to P), and displaying predetermined information (the number of stored items, the acquired number, error information, the push order instruction number, the game state, or the set value) by lighting the segments. First display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more (digits);
A second display means (management information display LED 74) having at least one display unit,
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display unit and the display unit of the second display unit;
A second output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a segment signal (segment 1A to 1P signal) to a segment of the display section of the first display means;
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal (segment 2A to 2P signal) to a segment of the display unit of the second display means;
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 149) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the second output port;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 150) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the third output port;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process of outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port (steps S1541 and S1542 in FIG. 149); Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1554 and step S1555) is defined as “t1”. When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (the time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1561) is “t2”, the process is performed such that “t1 <t2”. It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 148) updated at a predetermined timing;
When the display counter has a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. I do.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 39 Same as Initial Invention 37.

40. Initial invention 40
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 40 Same as Initial Invention 37.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 40 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the 24th embodiment; FIG. 154) is as follows.
A display unit having a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to P), and displaying predetermined information (the number of stored items, the acquired number, error information, the push order instruction number, the game state, or the set value) by lighting the segments. First display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73) having one or more (digits);
A second display means (management information display LED 74) having at least one display unit,
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the first display means,
A second output port (output port 6) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display section of the second display means,
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display section of the first display means,
A fourth output port (output port 7) capable of outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display section of the second display means,
A first output process (LED display control; FIG. 158) for outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display section of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the third output port;
A second output processing (ratio display processing; FIG. 159) for outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display section of the second display means and outputting a segment signal to the segment from the fourth output port;
Before the first output process and the second output process, a clear signal output process of outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, the third output port, and the fourth output port (step S1571 in FIG. 158) And step S1572) and
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output process (the time from steps S1571 and S1572 to steps S1576 and S1577) is set to “t1”. When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (time from step S1571 and step S1572 to step S1581) is “t2”, the process is performed such that “t1 <t2”. It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 156) updated at a predetermined timing;
When the display counter has a first value, a first output process is executed, and when the display counter has a second value (second value ≠ first value), a second output process is executed. I do.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 40 Same as Initial Invention 37.

41. Initial invention 41
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 41 The initial invention relates to a technology for outputting a digit signal and a segment signal of an LED from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7-segment) has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it has been studied to mount 7-segment capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with 7-segment for displaying the stored number, 7-segment for displaying the acquired number, and the like.
As described above, when the number of 7-segments increases, the program becomes more complicated to control the lighting of each of the 7-segments.
A problem to be solved by the invention at first is to efficiently store and execute a program for controlling the lighting of the LED.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 41 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
A display unit having a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to P), and displaying predetermined information (the number of stored items, the acquired number, error information, the push order instruction number, the game state, or the set value) by lighting the segments. First display means (stored number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or set value display LED 73) having one or more (digits);
A second display means (management information display LED 74) having at least one display unit,
A first program (LED display control) for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display unit and outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display unit of the first display unit. A drive signal (digit signal) to one storage area (in the use area of the ROM 54) and the display section of the second display means, and a segment signal to a segment of the display section of the second display means. Storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside the use area of ROM 54) storing a second program (ratio display processing);
After executing the first program, execute the second program,
A drive signal is output to the display unit of the first display unit, and a clear signal is output to the first display unit and the second display unit before outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display unit of the first display unit. A clear signal output process (for example, during LED display control in FIG. 134, steps S1431 and S1432) is provided.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 41 According to the initial invention, the programs of the first display means and the second display means are separately stored, and the second program is executed after the execution of the first program. And execution can be performed efficiently.
Further, since the clear signal output processing is executed when the first program is executed, an afterimage can be prevented.

42. Initial invention 42
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 42 The initial invention relates to a technology for outputting a digit signal and a segment signal of an LED from an output port in a gaming machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a seven-segment display has been known (for example, JP-A-09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
Recently, it has been considered to mount a 7-segment (management information display LED) capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio or the like on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, although the 7-segment is composed of segments A to G, a segment P (also referred to as a segment DP) which is a dot segment may be further provided.
When the management information display LED has a dot segment, how to use the dot segment becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to display specific information using dot segments.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 42 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution is
A first display unit (digit 7) and a second display unit (digit) that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to P) and that display predetermined information (management information such as an advantageous section ratio) by turning on the segments. 6, 8, 9),
And a display counter (LED display counter) updated at a predetermined timing.
When it is time to turn on the first display unit by the display counter, the segments including the specific segment (segment P) are turned on,
At any timing of the display counter, the specific segment of the second display unit is not turned on,
When a specific error (unrecoverable error 2) occurs, the update (interruption) of the display counter is stopped and a specific error process (irrecoverable error process 2) for turning on the specific segment of the second display unit is performed. It is characterized by performing.

The second solution is the first solution,
The specific error process executes a process of lighting the specific segment of all the display units including the first display unit and the second display unit.
The third solution is the first or the second solution,
A first storage area (in the used area of the ROM) for storing a program (for example, a main processing) for executing a game control processing, and a storage area separated from the first storage area, wherein the specific error processing is executed. A storage means (ROM) having a second storage area (outside the use area of the ROM) for storing the program (unrecoverable error processing 2).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 42 According to the initial invention, different information can be displayed in the specific segment of the first display unit and the specific segment of the second display unit. In particular, by turning on a specific segment on the first display unit, a break in information can be displayed. On the other hand, the occurrence of the specific error can be notified by lighting the specific segment of the second display unit.

43. Original invention 43
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 43 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side instructs the transition to this advantageous section. It concerns the slot machine to be determined.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a combination on a main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). Reference).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section in which an AT can be executed, and to display an advantageous section display device when a transition to the advantageous section is made.
Here, when the rare role is won, when the transition to the advantageous section and when not to transition to the advantageous section are provided, the game which has won the rare role is shifted to the advantageous section according to the display contents of the advantageous section display device. The player knows whether or not to do so. In this case, it is not possible to maintain the player's expectation of performing the AT by winning the rare role.
On the other hand, if the AT is always executed when the rare role is won, the rare role winning means the AT execution, and the game becomes monotonous.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is that, when a lottery result (rare role winning) in which a specific combination of symbols can be stopped is reached, a sense of expectation for shifting to the designated game section (AT) is provided for a plurality of games. To give to others.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 43 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (25th embodiment) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
In the advantageous section, an instruction game section (AT) in which the instruction function is always operated or the operation frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
An advantageous section display device (advantage section display LED 77) indicating an advantageous section;
A predetermined symbol combination (combination of symbols in which "watermelon" is aligned with a straight line diagonally upward to the right) becomes a lottery result (small role D winning) in which a stop is possible, and a specific symbol combination (left reel) And a lottery means (lottery means 61) for performing a lottery so as to have a lottery result (small role E1 winning) in which the "cherry" stops at the middle left stage when the stop of 31 is made. Prepare,
When a lottery result is obtained in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped by the lottery means, a transition is made to an advantageous section, and when the advantage section display device indicates that the section is an advantageous section, Does not shift to, and when the advantageous section display device does not indicate that it is an advantageous section,
When a lottery result is obtained in which the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped by the lottery means, always shift to an advantageous section, and display that the section is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device,
When a lottery result is obtained in which the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped by the lottery means, a transition to an advantageous section is made, and when the advantage section display device indicates that the section is an advantageous section, an instruction game section And when the game does not shift to the designated game section.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 43 According to the initial invention, when a lottery result is obtained in which a specific combination of symbols can be stopped, it always shifts to an advantageous section and is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device. Show that. In this case, since there is a time when the game shifts to the designated game section and a time when the game does not proceed to the designated game section, when the lottery result that the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped is reached, the shift to the designated game section is performed. Can be given to the player over a plurality of games.

44. Initial invention 44
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 44 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side informs the user that the transition to the advantageous section is to be made. It concerns the slot machine to be determined.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a combination on a main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). Reference).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed.
Here, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is changed, or when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, the normal section changes to the advantageous section. If there is a difference in the ease of shifting to the game, there is a risk that the fairness between players will be impaired.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is that every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed. That is, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made equal.

(B) Means for solving the problem of invention 44 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
A first solution (25th embodiment) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
First storage means (a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53) for storing information on the advantageous section;
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Second storage means (setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on RWM 53) for storing setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a re-game role;
A plurality of lottery states (RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4)) in which the winning probabilities of at least one replay role are different,
When the advantageous section ends, the first initialization processing (initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section) is executed,
When the set value stored in the second storage means is changed, a second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed,
In the first initialization process, the state shifts to the normal section while the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section is maintained,
In the second initialization processing, the state shifts to a predetermined specific lottery state (non-RT) and shifts to a normal section,
In the first initialization processing and the second initialization processing, by clearing the information on the advantageous section stored in the first storage means, when the first initialization processing is executed and when the second initialization processing is executed When the execution is performed, a transition is made to a normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 44 According to the initial invention, information on the advantageous section is cleared by both the first initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization processing executed at the time of changing the setting. Thereby, each time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same. Also, when the advantageous section ends and the set value is changed, the normal Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among players can be ensured.

45. Initial invention 45
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 45 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side instructs the transition to the advantageous section. It concerns the slot machine to be determined.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a combination on a main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). Reference).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which an AT can be executed.
Here, in a slot machine, it is common that the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning a special role.
However, if the transition to the advantageous section is enabled when the special combination is won, the difference in the advantage of the player between the low setting and the high setting may be too large.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the difference in the advantage of the player between the low setting and the high setting from becoming too large.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 45 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (25th embodiment) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
Means (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13, etc.) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role so as to have a case where a first special role (1BBA) and a second special role (1BBB) are won as a special role (1BB) for shifting to a special game; Prepare,
When the first special combination is won by the combination lottery means, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section,
When winning the second special role by the role lottery means, does not shift to the advantageous section,
The winning probability of the first special role is set the same for all set values,
Since the winning probability of the second special role is set to increase as the set value increases, the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning the special role (sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) is It is characterized in that it increases as it decreases.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 45 According to the initial invention, the winning probability of the first special role that can shift to the advantageous section is the same for all set values, and the winning probability of the second special role that does not shift to the advantageous section is , Increases as the set value increases. As a result, the winning probability of the special role (the sum of the first special role and the second special role) increases as the set value increases, and the probability of transition to the advantageous section at the time of winning the special role has a low set value. Since the higher the value, the higher the setting, the difference in the advantage of the player between the low setting and the high setting can be prevented from becoming too large.

46. Original Invention 46
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 46 The initial invention has an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and the main control board side instructs the transition to the advantageous section. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional slot machine, there is known a slot machine that performs a lottery of a combination on a main control board side and determines whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344). Reference).
Recently, it is possible to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be operated, and further to provide an instruction game section in which the instruction function is always activated or the operation frequency is increased in the advantageous section. Proposed.
Here, an advantageous section having the designated game section and an advantageous section not having the designated game section can be provided. From the viewpoint of payout design, as many game media as possible are provided in the advantageous section having the designated game section. In order to pay out, it is preferable to minimize payout of game media in an advantageous section having no designated game section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to minimize payout of game media in an advantageous section having no designated game section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 46 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
A first solution (25th embodiment) is as follows.
A game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (42) (the order of pushing the correct answer) (for example, a game at the time of winning the small role group B);
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game section, a normal section in which the instruction function is not activated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
A role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of a role so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA or 1BBB) for shifting to a special game;
When the indicating function is operated at least once in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended,
In the advantageous section, when the special lottery is won by the role lottery means before the first instruction function is activated, the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function,
After the transition to the advantageous section, until the specific condition is satisfied (satisfies the one-time instruction operation condition: 15 games are completed), the instruction function is not activated even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch. It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 46 According to the initial invention, the instruction function is not activated even after the transition to the advantageous section, even if the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until a specific condition is satisfied. The probability of winning the special role before the first instruction function is activated can be increased. As a result, the probability that the advantageous section can be ended without activating the instruction function can be increased, and the payout of the game medium can be suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section without the instruction game section. .

47. Original Invention 47
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 47 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technique is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game, and for example, relates to the payout balls and the like. It was not possible to determine whether the predetermined ratio was within a predetermined design value range.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to display game information from which it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to payouts or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Further, in displaying the information, it is necessary to prevent the user from erroneously recognizing that a failure has occurred.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 47 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
A plurality of types (five items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), bonus ratio (6000 times), continuous bonus ratio (total), bonus ratio (total)) are stored for a predetermined time ( Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds).
In the display of the game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is lighted and displayed (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the number of games is “175000” or more and the ratio is less than “70”). And when at least a part of the game information is blinkingly displayed (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, if the number of games is less than "175000" times, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed, and the ratio is displayed). When it is "70" or more, the ratio segment is blinked and displayed).
When at least a part of the game information is blinkingly displayed, the lighting and the turning off are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds).
After displaying the game information for the predetermined time, when displaying the next game information, when blinking and displaying at least a part of the information of the next game information, the count of the predetermined time (the number of interruptions “2144” 209) (step S2511 in FIG. 209) and the counting of the specific time (counting of the number of interrupts “134”) is started (step S2518 in FIG. 209).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 47 According to the initial invention, the timing of switching the display of game information to the next game information can be made to coincide with the flashing start timing when the game information is flashed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the game information from being turned on for a moment or the game information from being turned off for a moment, thereby preventing the display unit from being erroneously recognized as having failed.

48. Initial invention 48
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 48 Same as the first invention 47.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 48 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
A plurality of types (five items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), bonus ratio (6000 times), continuous bonus ratio (total), bonus ratio (total)) are stored for a predetermined time ( Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every 5 seconds).
In the display of the game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is lighted and displayed (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, the number of games is “175000” or more and the ratio is less than “70”). And when at least a part of the game information is blinkingly displayed (for example, when displaying the advantageous section ratio, if the number of games is less than "175000" times, the identification segment is blinkingly displayed, and the ratio is displayed). When it is "70" or more, the ratio segment is blinked and displayed).
When at least a part of the game information is blinkingly displayed, the lighting and the turning off are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds).
Interrupt processing (FIG. 190) can be executed at regular intervals (2.235 ms),
When the number of interrupts becomes “Y” (2144), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (“Yes” in step S2512 in FIG. 209), and
When the number of interrupts becomes “X” (134), it is determined that the specific time has elapsed (“Yes” in step S2519 in FIG. 209),
Y = 2 × n × X (“n” is a natural number) (2144 = 2 × 8 × 134)
Is set to satisfy
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 48 Same as Initial Invention 47.

49. Original invention 49
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 49 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technique is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game, and for example, relates to the payout balls and the like. It was not possible to determine whether the predetermined ratio was within a predetermined design value range.
An object of the invention to be solved at first is to provide a display capable of judging whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to a payout or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, an appropriate process for displaying game information is executed when a normal power is turned on and when a transition is made to a setting change state.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 49 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
Plural types (5 items) of game information (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), “3” bonus ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous bonus ratio (total) , "5" character ratio (cumulative)) in a predetermined order ("1" → "2" →... → "5" → "1" → "2" → ...) for a predetermined time (approximately 5 Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second),
A counter (a display switching time of an address “F290 (H)”) for counting the predetermined time,
The power is turned off during the display of the “n” (n ≧ 2) th game information (for example, when “n = 2”, the display of the continuous character ratio (6000 times)), and the setting key switch When the power is turned on in a state where is off (initialization of the unused area in step S2158 in FIG. 187), the display of the “n” th game information and the counting of the predetermined time can be restarted,
When the power is turned off while the “n” th game information is displayed and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is on (when the process proceeds to the setting change process in FIG. 186), After clearing the value (step S2130 in FIG. 186), the display of the first game information (“1” advantageous section ratio) is started (step S2517 in FIG. 209), and the counting of the predetermined time is started. (Step S2511 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 49 According to the initial invention, the counter value is not initialized at the time of normal power-on (start-up) without shifting to the setting change state, so that the game information is displayed from the state immediately before the power-off. Can be resumed. On the other hand, when the state is shifted to the setting change state, the value of the counter is cleared, so that it is possible to start from the display of the first game information. As described above, the processing for displaying the game information can be appropriately performed at the time of the normal power-on and at the time of the transition to the setting change state.

50. Initial invention 50
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 50 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technique is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game, and for example, relates to the payout balls and the like. It was not possible to determine whether the predetermined ratio was within a predetermined design value range.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to display game information from which it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to payouts or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, in the case of shifting to the setting change state, an appropriate process for displaying game information is executed depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 50 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
Plural types (5 items) of game information (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), “3” bonus ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous bonus ratio (total) , "5" character ratio (cumulative)) in a predetermined order ("1" → "2" →... → "5" → "1" → "2" → ...) for a predetermined time (approximately 5 Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second).
The game information has identification information (identification seg) and numerical information (ratio seg),
Numerical information storage area for storing numerical information in the game information (advantageous section ratio data at address "F285 (H)" to accessory ratio (cumulative) data at address "F289 (H)");
A counter (a display switching time of an address “F290 (H)”) for counting the predetermined time,
The power is turned off during the display of the “n” (n ≧ 2) th game information (for example, when “n = 2”, the display of the continuous character ratio (6000 times)), and the setting key switch When the power is turned on while the power is on, the power supply is turned on under a condition that satisfies a specific condition (in FIG. 185, when the checksum in step S2104 is normal and the power recovery is normal (see FIG. 185). 186, when "Yes" in step S2128)), the display of the "n" th game information and the counting of the predetermined time are performed based on the value stored in the numerical information storage area and the value of the counter. (Without initializing the ratio display number of the address “F28E (H)” and the display switching time of the address “F290 (H)”),
When the power is turned off while the “n” th game information is displayed and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is turned on, under a situation where a specific condition is not satisfied (step 185 in FIG. 185). If the checksum in S2104 is abnormal and / or the power-off recovery is abnormal ("No" in step S2128 in FIG. 186), the value stored in the numerical information storage area is used. After clearing the value of the counter (steps S2129 and S2130 in FIG. 186), the display of the first game information with the numerical information as an initial value is started (step S2517 in FIG. 209) and the predetermined time (Step S2511 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 50 According to the initial invention, when shifting to the setting change state, the processing for displaying game information is appropriately performed depending on whether or not the situation satisfies a specific condition. Can be done. In addition, even in a situation where the specific condition is not satisfied, the display of the first game information with the numerical information as an initial value is started, so that it is not displayed that the specific condition is not satisfied (error). It is possible to immediately shift to the display of game information.

51. Initial invention 51
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 51 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of game information.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technique is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game, and for example, relates to the payout balls and the like. It was not possible to determine whether the predetermined ratio was within a predetermined design value range.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to display game information from which it is possible to determine whether or not a predetermined ratio relating to payouts or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Further, when it is necessary to blink the game information, an appropriate process for blinking the game information is executed according to a situation when the power is turned on.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 51 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
A plurality of types (five items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), bonus ratio (6000 times), continuous bonus ratio (total), bonus ratio (total)) can be displayed. A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
When the game information is lit and displayed, or when at least a part of the game information is blinked and displayed (see FIG. 184. For example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, when the number of games is less than “175000” times, Blinking the identification segment).
When at least a part of the game information is blinkingly displayed, the lighting and the turning off are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds).
A counter for counting the specific time (flashing switching time of the address “F292 (H)”);
The power is turned off when at least a part of the specific game information is blinking and the at least part of the information is turned off, and the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch is on. At the time (at the time of shifting to the setting change state), the counting of the specific time is started, and the at least part of the specific game information is blinked so that the at least part of the information starts from lighting. (The address “F292 (H)” of the RWM 53 is initialized in step S2130 in FIG. 186, and the initial value “134 (D)” is set in step S2520 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
A plurality of types (five items) of game information (advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), bonus ratio (6000 times), continuous bonus ratio (total), bonus ratio (total)) can be displayed. A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
The game information has identification information (identification seg) and numerical information (ratio seg),
When both the identification information and the numerical information are lit and displayed, and when at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is blinked (see FIG. 184. For example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the number of games is “175000”). If the number is less than the number of times, the identification seg blinks, and if the ratio is "70" or more, the ratio seg blinks).
When at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is blinkingly displayed, lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds).
A counter for counting the specific time (flashing switching time of the address “F292 (H)”);
When the power is turned off when at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is blinking and at least one of the information is turned off, and the power is turned on in a situation where the setting key switch is on. (At the time of transition to the setting change state), the counting of the specific time is started, and at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is blinked and displayed such that the at least one of the information starts from lighting (FIG. 186). In step S2130, the address “F292 (H)” of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the initial value “134” is set in step S2520 in FIG. 209.)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 51 According to the initial invention, game information can be confirmed more quickly. Further, the count of the specific time before the power is turned off is taken over to the setting change state, and when the display of the game information is started in the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the light from being turned on for a moment and then turned off. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the display unit from being erroneously recognized as having failed.

52. Initial Invention 52
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 52 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that stores a total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in a predetermined game section.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. Thus, the ratio (ratio) of the number of games in a predetermined game section cannot be determined.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of games in a predetermined game section to the total number of games. Further, when the ratio is calculated, the ratio is controlled so as to be a correct value.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 52 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
A first storage area for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games (total number of games counter at address “F26D (H)”);
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of games in a predetermined game section (advantage section) (an advantageous section game number counter at an address “F270 (H)”);
Count upper limit flag in a third storage area (address “F28B (H)”) that stores information indicating whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF (H))) Bit D0) and
It is determined whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192),
When the value stored in the first storage area reaches the specific value, information indicating that the value has reached the specific value is stored in the third storage area (Step S2256, Step S2259),
When information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (in FIG. 191, when "Yes" is determined in step S2236), even when the predetermined game section is being executed. Does not update the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area (the processing in steps S2237 and S2238 is not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
The second solution is the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit (“FFFFFF (H)”) of a storage capacity (3 bytes) that can be stored in the first storage area.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 52 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the first storage area can be exceeded, and the value can be prevented from being updated even after overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value, the value in the second storage area is not updated, so that useless updating can be eliminated. Furthermore, by updating the value of the second storage area when overflow occurs in the first storage area, it is possible to prevent the number of games in a predetermined game section from being correctly calculated with respect to the total number of games. can do.

53. Initial invention 53
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 53 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that stores a total number of games and a value corresponding to the number of games in a predetermined game section.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts (payout balls) of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play the game. Thus, it was not possible to determine the ratio of the number of payouts during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of payouts during special games to the total number of payouts of game media. Further, when the ratio is calculated, the ratio is controlled so as to be a correct value.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 53 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter at address “F27C (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of game media;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game mediums to be paid out during a special game (when a character is operated or a continuous character is operated) (a continuous character payout (cumulative) counter at an address “F27F (H)”; Or, a cash-out (cumulative) counter at address "F282 (H)";
Count upper limit flag in a third storage area (address “F28B (H)”) that stores information indicating whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF (H))) D1 bit) and
It is determined whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192),
When the value stored in the first storage area reaches the specific value, information indicating that the value has reached the specific value is stored in the third storage area (Step S2256, Step S2259),
When information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area, the information is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area even if the game medium is paid out during the special game. The value is not updated (in FIG. 196, if “Yes” is determined in step S2301, the processes in steps S2302 to S2304 are not performed. In addition, if “Yes” is determined in step S2342 in FIG. 199, , The processing of steps S2343 to S2345 is not performed.)
It is characterized by the following.
The second solution is the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit (“FFFFFF (H)”) of a storage capacity (3 bytes) that can be stored in the first storage area.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 53 According to the initial invention, the storage capacity of the first storage area can be exceeded, and the value can be prevented from being updated even after overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value, the value in the second storage area is not updated, so that useless updating can be eliminated. Furthermore, when overflow occurs in the first storage area, updating the value of the second storage area prevents the number of payouts during the pertinent game from being correctly calculated with respect to the total number of payouts. be able to.

54. Initial invention 54
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 54 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of reading out the number of game media to be paid out at a necessary timing in a control process.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
A method of merely updating the cumulative value of the number of payouts of game media as in the above-described conventional technique is easy in terms of control.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine, when a small win is won, the payout number corresponding to the small win is stored in the RWM, and the payout number of the RWM is decremented by "1" every time one payout (including one-store addition) is performed. May be performed.
In such a control, when all the game media have been paid out, the payout number stored in the RWM becomes “0”. Therefore, after the payout of the game medium is completed, the number of payouts in the game cannot be read. For this reason, after the payout of the game medium is completed, there is a problem that the payout number in the game cannot be read and the ratio or the like relating to the payout number of the game medium cannot be calculated.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable calculation processing such as a ratio relating to the number of game media to be paid out even after the payout of game media is completed.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 54 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
A first storage area (medal payout number data at address "F040 (H)") and a second storage area (medal payout number at address "F041 (H)" for storing the number of payouts of game media when the small role wins Buffer)
The payout number stored in the first storage area is subtracted with the payout of the game medium,
The payout number stored in the second storage area is maintained without being subtracted by the payout of the game medium (FIG. 189, step S2213),
After the payout of the game medium (step S2189 in FIG. 188), a predetermined calculation relating to the game is performed using the payout number of the game medium in the game (step S2193 in FIG. 188, and steps S2239 to S2241 in FIG. 191). , S2243) can be executed,
When executing the predetermined calculation, the payout number stored in the second storage area is used (FIG. 197).
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 54 According to the initial invention, when executing a predetermined operation after the payout process, the payout number stored in the second storage area is used. It can be executed at different timings. Further, even when the predetermined calculation is executed, the payout process is not affected.

55. Initial invention 55
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 55 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that displays a payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play a game. Could not be determined.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to display a payout ratio capable of determining whether or not the payout ratio is within a predetermined design value range. Further, when the payout ratio is calculated, for example, when the calculated payout ratio becomes a value that cannot be displayed, the calculated payout ratio can be corrected.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 55 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter at address “F27C (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of game media;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game mediums to be paid out during the special game (for example, an accessory payout (total) counter at an address “F282 (H)”);
Based on the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, it is possible to calculate a payout ratio indicating a payout number of game media during the special game with respect to a total payout number of game media,
A third storage area for storing a value corresponding to the calculated payout ratio (for example, an accessory ratio (cumulative) data at an address “F289 (H)”);
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying a payout ratio based on the value stored in the third storage area;
As a result of calculating the payout ratio, when the payout ratio becomes a specific value (100%), the specific value is changed to a correction value (99%) (Step S2405 in FIG. 202), and the correction value is stored in the third storage area. The payout ratio is stored on the display unit based on the correction value stored in the third storage area (step S2406).

The second solution is
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter at address “F27C (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of game media;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game mediums to be paid out during the special game (for example, an accessory payout (total) counter at an address “F282 (H)”);
If the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area is not “0”, the third storage area ( For example, a correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the accessory ratio (cumulative) data at the address “F289 (H)”, and the payout ratio is displayed based on the correction value stored in the third storage area. It can be displayed on the screen.

The third solution is
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9));
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter at address “F27C (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of game media;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game mediums to be paid out during the special game (for example, an accessory payout (total) counter at an address “F282 (H)”);
When it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and that the value stored in the second storage area is not “0”, the third storage area ( For example, a correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the accessory ratio (cumulative) data at the address “F289 (H)”, and the payout ratio is displayed based on the correction value stored in the third storage area. It can be displayed on the screen.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 55 According to the initial invention, the payout ratio indicating the payout amount during the special game with respect to the total payout number is displayed, so that it is easy to determine whether or not the payout ratio is an appropriate value. be able to.
Further, when the calculated payout ratio is a specific value, the payout ratio is changed to the correction value, so that the payout ratio can be set to a value suitable for display.
Further, according to the second or third solving means, when the value stored in the first storage area or the second storage area is “0”, it is prevented from being changed to the correction value. be able to.

56. Initial invention 56
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 56 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that stores a value from which a payout ratio of game media can be calculated.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play a game. Could not be determined.
In addition, the cumulative value of the number of payouts cannot be stored indefinitely, and the storage capacity of the RWM is limited, so that it eventually reaches the upper limit. However, if no processing is performed when the upper limit value is reached, digits overflow in the storage area, and a correct value cannot be stored.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to store a value capable of calculating a payout ratio capable of determining whether or not the payout ratio is within a predetermined design value range. It is another object of the present invention to allow a more correct value to be stored even after reaching the upper limit value, depending on whether the stored number of payouts has reached the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the storage area. .

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 56 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The initial invention (26th embodiment)
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter at address “F27C (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of game media;
A second storage area for storing a value corresponding to the number of game mediums to be paid out during the special game (for example, an accessory payout (total) counter at an address “F282 (H)”);
When the payout of the game medium is performed during the special game, the values of the first storage area and the second storage area are updated,
If the value stored in the first storage area does not exceed the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area even when a value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game is added, the value corresponds to the number of payouts in the game. The value is added to the value stored in the first storage area (in FIG. 197, when the process proceeds to step S2322, the process proceeds to FIG. 194. In FIG. 194, when “No” in step S2282 or “No” in step S2284, Finish counting up),
When adding the value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game to the value stored in the first storage area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area (in FIG. 194, "Yes" in step S2284). Calculates the correction value (the payout number upper limit buffer value in step S2286 in FIG. 194) that becomes the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area when the value is added to the value stored in the first storage area. The correction value is added to the first storage area and the second storage area (Step S2287)
It is characterized by the following.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 56 According to the initial invention, since the total payout number and the value corresponding to the payout number during the special game are stored, the ratio of the payout number during the special game to the total payout number is calculated. And display. When the value corresponding to the total number of payouts exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area, the upper limit value is stored, thereby preventing overflow of the first storage area and storing a more correct value. Can be kept.

57. Initial invention 57
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 57 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that displays a payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play a game. Could not be determined.
Furthermore, even if only the graph showing the transition of the total value of the number of payouts, even if the number of payouts is an abnormal value between a specific number of games, it cannot be easily determined.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to store a value capable of calculating a payout ratio which can determine whether or not the payout ratio is within a predetermined design value range during a predetermined number of games.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 57 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment) is as follows.
"X" (400) a first payout number storage area (total payout ring buffers of addresses "F213 (H)" to "F22F (H)") for storing a value corresponding to the payout number of game media during the number of game times; ,
A second payout number storage area for storing a value corresponding to the payout number of the game medium in the special game during the number of “X” games (for example, the accessory payout at addresses “F24F (H)” to “F26B (H)”) Ring buffer),
A third payout number storage area (total payout (6000 times) counter at address "F273 (H)") for storing a value corresponding to the payout number of game media during "X * Y" (6000) game times;
A fourth payout number storage area for storing a value corresponding to the payout number of the game medium during the special game during the number of “X × Y” games (for example, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter at the address “F279 (H)”) )When,
Payout ratio storage area for storing a value corresponding to a payout ratio indicating the number of payouts of game media in a special game with respect to the total number of payouts of game media (for example, data of an accessory (6000 times) at address "F287 (H)") ) And,
Each of the first payout number storage area and the second payout number storage area is provided as “Y” (15),
The value corresponding to the number of game medium payouts during the "X" game times is set to an "n"("n" = 1 to Y) first payout storage area (for example, total payout ring buffer 0) and a second payout storage. When stored in the area (for example, the accessory payout ring buffer 0), the value corresponding to the payout number of the game medium during the next “X” game times is “n + 1” (where “n” = Y Is stored in the first payout storage area (for example, the total payout ring buffer 1) and the second payout storage area (for example, the accessory payout ring buffer 1).
For each “X” number of games, the number of payouts during the special game with respect to the total number of payouts between “X × Y” games based on the values stored in the third payout number storage area and the fourth payout number storage area The value corresponding to the payout ratio is calculated (steps S2385 to S2400 in FIG. 202), and the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated based on the calculation result (step S2406).
In the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated after the “X × Y” game,
a) The number corresponding to the number of payouts during the number of “X” games from “X × Y−1” before the game (5999 before the game) to “X × YX” before the game (5600 before the game) is stored. The value stored in the third payout number storage area is obtained by subtracting the value “Z1” in the one payout number storage area from the value stored in the third payout number storage area (steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205). Is updated (step S2454),
b) A value corresponding to the number of payouts during the number of “X” games from “X × Y-1” (before the 5999 game) to “X × YX” before the game (before the 5600 game) The value stored in the fourth payout number storage area by subtracting the value “Z2” in the second payout number storage area from the value stored in the fourth payout number storage area (Steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205). Is updated (step S2454).
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution is the first solution,
In the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated after the “X × Y” game, the value “Z1” in the first payout number storage area and the value “Z2” in the second payout number storage area are cleared. (Step S2453 in FIG. 205)
After the “X × Y” game, between the “X” game times starting from the next game of the game whose value stored in the payout ratio storage area has been updated,
a) storing a value corresponding to the payout number of the game medium in the first payout number storage area in which the value “Z1” is cleared;
b) The value corresponding to the payout number of the game medium during the special game is stored in the second payout number storage area in which the value “Z2” is cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 57 According to the initial invention, the “X × Y” game times are used for each “X” game times by using “Y” first storage amount areas and second storage areas. The payout ratio can be stored. Thus, by reading the payout ratio, the payout ratio can be displayed.

58. Original Invention 58
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 58 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that displays a payout ratio of game media.
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (a so-called slump graph) indicating a transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-described conventional technology is used by a player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to determine whether or not to play a game. Could not be determined.
Similarly, it is not possible to determine whether the so-called AT is within the range of the predetermined design value for the AT section with respect to all the game sections.
On the other hand, when calculating a ratio by which it is possible to determine whether the number of payouts or the AT is within a predetermined design value range, if a single-chip microprocessor specific to a gaming machine is used, the calculation may take a long time. If the operation time is long, there is a problem that other processes may be affected.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to calculate a ratio that can easily determine whether or not it is within a predetermined design value in a short time using a one-chip microprocessor unique to a gaming machine. It is.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 58 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-sixth embodiment, etc.)
A first storage area for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games (total number of games counter at address “F26D (H)”);
A second storage area (an advantageous section game number counter at an address “F270 (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the number of games in a predetermined game section (advantage section),
The value stored in the first storage area is “X”,
The value stored in the second storage area is “Y”
And when
a) Calculate “10 × Y” by multiplying “Y” by 10 (calculated value set in step S2389 in FIG. 202 (steps S2411 to S2413 in FIG. 203)),
b) By subtracting “X” from “10 × Y” and, when the value after the subtraction is equal to or more than “X”, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
"R1" that satisfies is satisfied (step S2391 in FIG. 202 (FIG. 204; execution of ratio calculation)),
c) When “10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′”, “10 × Y ′” is calculated by multiplying “Y ′” by 10 (in FIG. 202, the calculated value set in step S2399 (FIG. 203) Medium, steps S2411 to S2413)),
d) By subtracting "X" from "10 * Y '" and, when the value after the subtraction is equal to or more than "X", repeatedly subtracting "X" from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y′−X × R2) <X
"R2" that satisfies is satisfied (step S2400 (FIG. 204; execution of ratio calculation) in FIG. 202),
e) A specific ratio is calculated in which the tens place is “R1” and the ones place is “R2” (step S2401 in FIG. 202).
It is characterized by the following.

The second solution (the 26th embodiment and the like)
A first storage area for storing a value corresponding to the total number of games (total number of games counter at address “F26D (H)”);
A second storage area (an advantageous section game number counter at an address “F270 (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the number of games in a predetermined game section,
The value stored in the first storage area is “X”,
The value stored in the second storage area is “Y”
And when
a) Calculate “10 × Y” by multiplying “Y” by 10 (calculated value set in step S2389 in FIG. 202 (steps S2411 to S2413 in FIG. 203)),
b) By subtracting “X” from “10 × Y” and, when the value after the subtraction is equal to or more than “X”, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
"R1" that satisfies is satisfied (step S2391 in FIG. 202 (FIG. 204; execution of ratio calculation)),
c) When “10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′”, when “Y ′ = 0”, the specific ratio of setting the tens place to “R1” and the ones place to “0” It is characterized by calculating.

The third solution is the first or the second solution,
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying the calculated specific ratio;
When the specific ratio is calculated to be a specific value (100%) ("Yes" in step S2404 in FIG. 202), the specific value is changed to a correction value (99%) (step S2405). The correction value can be displayed on the display unit as a specific ratio.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 58 According to the initial invention, the ratio can be calculated by a method of repeating the subtraction for each of the tens place and the ones place. As a result, since a maximum of 20 subtractions can be performed, the calculation time (processing time) can be reduced, and the calculation can be simplified.

59. Initial invention 59
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 59 The initial invention relates to a slot machine that includes a display unit having a plurality of segments and displays operation information of a stop switch that is advantageous to a player on the display unit. .
In the conventional slot machine, the main control board determines whether or not to notify the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, and when the notification is determined, the operation information is connected to the main control board. There is known a slot machine for displaying on a 7-segment display (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150881).
Here, the operation information of the stop switch, which is advantageous to the player, is important information relating to whether or not medals are paid out.
However, if the segment of the 7-segment display is broken or the signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment is faulty, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is not correctly displayed on the 7-segment display. Thus, there is a risk that the player will be disadvantaged.
Therefore, an object to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to provide a slot machine having a display unit (7-segment display) having a plurality of segments and displaying operation information of a stop switch which is advantageous to a player on this display unit. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in a segment and whether or not there is a failure in a signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment.

(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 59 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-eighth embodiment) is as follows.
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that have at least seven segments (segments A to G) that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
Under the condition of displaying the information on the number of game media obtained (the number of obtained medals) (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) The first digit (upper digit) of the information related to the number of game media acquired is displayed on the first display unit in the interrupt processing when is "00100000 (B)", and the second interrupt processing (when the LED display counter value is The second digit (lower digit) of the information related to the number of game media acquired is displayed on the second display unit in the interruption process for “01000000 (B)”,
In a situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Displaying at least a portion of the operation information on a first display unit in a first interrupt process;
In a situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed (when the process proceeds to steps S4001 and S4002 in the setting change process of FIG. 226), at least the first interrupt unit has at least 7 It is characterized by lighting up segments.

The second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have at least seven segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing,
In a situation in which the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, a segment signal is output so that at least seven segments of the second display unit are turned on in the second interrupt processing. And

The third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have at least seven segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in a first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in a second interrupt process. The second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in at least the second interrupt processing,
In a situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the second display unit are turned on in the second interrupt processing.

The fourth solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have at least seven segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
Under a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing,
In a situation in which the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, a segment signal is output so that at least seven segments of the first display unit are turned on in the first interrupt processing. And

The fifth solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have at least seven segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in a first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in a second interrupt process. The second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interruption processing, and the other operation information is displayed in the second interruption processing. Is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation in which the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the first display unit are turned on in the first interrupt process, and the second display unit is provided in the second interrupt process. At least seven segments are lit.

(C) Effects of the first invention 59 According to the first invention, the first display unit is checked by checking whether or not the seven segments of the first display unit are turned on under the condition that the set value can be changed. Of the seven segments included in the first display unit, and the presence or absence of a failure in the signal lines transmitting signals to the seven segments included in the first display unit.

60. Initial invention 60
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 60 Same as Initial Invention 59.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 60 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
A first solution (29th embodiment) is as follows.
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to G) and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
Under the condition of displaying the information on the number of game media obtained (the number of obtained medals) (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) In the interrupt processing when the number is "00000100 (B)", a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit, and the second signal is output. In the interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”), the segment signal is displayed on the second display unit so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the second display unit. And output
In a situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed (when the process proceeds to steps S4101 and S4102 in the setting change process in FIG. 234), at least information regarding the set value (set value “ (1) to (6) are displayed on the second display unit, and a segment signal is output.

The second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in a first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in a second interrupt process. The second digit of the information on the number of acquisitions is displayed on the second display unit,
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in at least the second interrupt processing,
In a situation in which a set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least information on the set value is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing.

The third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
In a situation in which the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interruption processing, and the second interruption processing is performed. Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
In a situation in which the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, a segment signal is output so that at least information on the set value is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing. .

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 60 According to the initial invention, the first display unit and the second display unit share the segment signal. Therefore, by checking whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are turned on, the first display line of the signal lines transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit is checked. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a portion common to the unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the first display unit, it is possible to check whether the segment of the first display unit is turned on or not, thereby to determine whether the segment of the first display unit has failed. , And the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

61. Original invention 61
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 61 Same as Initial Invention 59.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 61 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The first solution (the twenty-eighth embodiment) is as follows.
A first display unit (digit 1), a second display unit (digit 2), and a third display unit (digit) that have a plurality of segments (segments A to G) that can be lit and display predetermined information by lighting the segments. 3) and a fourth display unit (digit 4),
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, a segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is to be lighted is also used,
In a situation where information regarding the number of stored game media (the number of stored medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the main process in FIG. 227), at least the first interrupt process (when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”) In the interrupt processing at the time of (1), a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of stored game media is displayed on the first display unit, and the second interrupt processing (LED display counter value Output a segment signal so that the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of stored game media is displayed on the second display unit in the interruption process when "00010000 (B)" is displayed.
In a situation where information on the number of game media obtained (number of obtained medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least the third interrupt process (LED display) In the interrupt processing when the counter value is “00100000 (B)”, a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the third display unit. In the interrupt processing of No. 4 (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the second digit (lower digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the fourth display unit. Output segment signal,
In a situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least In the third interruption process, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the third display unit.

The second solution is
A first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section, each of which has a plurality of segments that can be turned on and displays predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information on the number of game media stored is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information on the number of game media stored on the first display unit is displayed in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal such that a second digit of information relating to the number of stored game media is displayed on a second display unit in a second interrupt process;
In a situation in which information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display a second digit of information on the number of game media obtained in a fourth interrupt process on a fourth display unit;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, outputting the segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the fourth display unit in at least the fourth interrupt processing. It is characterized by.

The third solution is
A first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section, each of which has a plurality of segments that can be turned on and displays predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information on the number of game media stored is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information on the number of game media stored on the first display unit is displayed in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal such that a second digit of information relating to the number of stored game media is displayed on a second display unit in a second interrupt process;
In a situation in which information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display a second digit of information on the number of game media obtained in a fourth interrupt process on a fourth display unit;
In a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt processing. In the interrupt processing of No. 4, a segment signal is output so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the fourth display unit.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 61 According to the initial invention, the segment signals are shared in the first to fourth display units. For this reason, by confirming whether the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit are turned on, the first display line among the signal lines transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit is checked. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a common part among the units to the fourth display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the third display unit, it is possible to check whether the segments of the third display unit are lit or not, and thereby to determine whether the segments of the third display unit have failed. , And the presence or absence of a failure in a signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment of the third display unit.

62. Initial invention 62
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 62 Same as the original invention 59.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 62 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the twenty-eighth embodiment) is as follows.
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to G) and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
Under the condition of displaying the information on the number of game media obtained (the number of obtained medals) (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) In the interrupt processing when the number is “00100000 (B)”, a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit, and the second signal is output. In the interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)"), the segment signal is displayed such that the second digit (lower digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the second display unit. And output
In a situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where specific error information (“E1” error) is displayed (when an unrecoverable error occurs), a part of the specific error information is displayed on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process. 136, a process of outputting a segment signal so as to perform the process (the error upper digit display output process of step S1497 in the non-recoverable error process 1 in FIG. 136) and another part of the specific error information are displayed on the second display unit. Thus, the process of outputting the segment signal (the error lower digit display output process of step S1502 in the non-recoverable error process 1 of FIG. 136) is repeatedly executed.

The second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
Under a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing,
A process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process in a situation where the specific error information is displayed; And outputting the segment signal so that another part of the segment signal is displayed on the second display unit.

The third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
In a situation in which the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interruption processing, and the second interruption processing is performed. Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
A process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display unit without executing an interrupt process in a situation where the specific error information is displayed; And outputting the segment signal so that another part of the segment signal is displayed on the second display unit.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 62 According to the initial invention, the first display unit and the second display unit share the segment signal. Therefore, by checking whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are turned on, the first display line of the signal lines transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit is checked. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a portion common to the unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information on the number of game media obtained and a part of the specific error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether the segment of the first display unit is turned on or not. It is possible to confirm whether there is a failure in the segment of the first display unit and whether there is a failure in the signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

63. Original invention 63
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 63 Same as Initial Invention 59.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 63 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The first solution (the twenty-eighth embodiment) is as follows.
A first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on (segments A to G) and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal (segment A to G signal) indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
Under the condition of displaying the information on the number of game media obtained (the number of obtained medals) (when the process proceeds to the medal payout process by winning in step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) In the interrupt processing when the number is “00100000 (B)”, a segment signal is output so that the first digit (upper digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit, and the second signal is output. In the interrupt processing (interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)"), the segment signal is displayed such that the second digit (lower digit) of the information on the number of game media obtained is displayed on the second display unit. And output
In a situation where the operation information (pressing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pressing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing;
In a situation where predetermined error information (“dE” error) is displayed (when a recoverable error occurs), a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. , Outputting a segment signal so as to display another part of the predetermined error information on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing.

The second solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
Under a situation where the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt processing,
In a situation where the predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the predetermined signal is output in the second interrupt processing. And outputting a segment signal so that another part of the error information is displayed on the second display unit.

The third solution is
A first display unit and a second display unit that have a plurality of segments that can be turned on and that display predetermined information by lighting the segments;
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is turned on is also used,
In a situation where information about the number of game media obtained is displayed, a segment signal is output so that the first digit of the information about the number of game media obtained is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing. Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information on the number of game media obtained on the second display unit in the interrupt processing of step 2;
In a situation in which the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interruption processing, and the second interruption processing is performed. Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
In a situation where the predetermined error information is displayed, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt processing, and the predetermined signal is output in the second interrupt processing. And outputting a segment signal so that another part of the error information is displayed on the second display unit.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 63 According to the initial invention, the segment signals are shared in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, by checking whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are turned on, the first display line of the signal lines transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit is checked. The presence or absence of a failure can be confirmed for a portion common to the unit and the second display unit.
Also, by displaying the first digit of the information on the number of game media obtained and a part of the predetermined error information on the first display unit, it is possible to confirm whether the segment of the first display unit is turned on or not. It is possible to confirm whether there is a failure in the segment of the first display unit and whether there is a failure in the signal line for transmitting a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

64. Initial invention 64
(A) Problems to be Solved by Invention 64 Initially, in the conventional technology, a counter is required to count the advantageous modes. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether or not the game (current state) is in the advantageous mode, and a process of updating the counter when determining that the game is in the advantageous mode.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to simplify the information processing by updating the advantageous section counter without determining whether or not the section is an advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 64 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (30th embodiment)
Advantageous mode display means (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) in which the advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means cannot be displayed;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
With an advantageous section counter (advantage section clear counter),
When starting an advantageous section, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
Regardless of whether or not the section is an advantageous section, "1" can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing based on the progress of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246),
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section is ended (step in FIG. 246). S2746),
As a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the indicated information is not stored ("No" in step S2747 in FIG. 246), the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0".

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 64 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether or not the section is an advantageous section.

65. Initial invention 65
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 65 Same as Initial Invention 64.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 65 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (30th embodiment)
Advantageous mode display means (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) in which the advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means cannot be displayed;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
With an advantageous section counter (advantage section clear counter),
Regardless of whether or not the section is an advantageous section, "1" can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing based on the progress of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246),
As a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the indicated information is stored ("Yes" in step S2747 in FIG. 246), the specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section is terminated.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 65 Same as Initial Invention 64.

66. Initial invention 66
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 66 Same as Initial Invention 64.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 66 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
A first solution (30th embodiment) is as follows.
Advantageous mode display means (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) in which the advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means cannot be displayed;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, a standby section that can be shifted before shifting to the advantageous section,
Standby section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating the standby section (the D1 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
With an advantageous section counter (advantage section clear counter),
When starting an advantageous section, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
Regardless of whether or not the section is an advantageous section, "1" can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing based on the progress of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246),
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section ends,
As a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, if a carry occurs, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the standby section is stored in the standby section information storage means. When the indicated information is stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0"("No" in step S2747 in FIG. 246).
It is characterized by the following.
The second solution is the first solution,
An advantageous section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
As a result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter, when a carry occurs, “0” is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the indicated information is not stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from “0” (“No” in step S2747 in FIG. 246).
It is characterized by the following.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 66 Same as Initial Invention 64.

67. Initial invention 67
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 67 Same as Initial Invention 64.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 67 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (30th embodiment)
Advantageous mode display means (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) in which the advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means cannot be displayed;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
With an advantageous section counter (advantage section clear counter),
When starting an advantageous section, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
Regardless of whether or not the section is an advantageous section, "1" can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing based on the progress of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246),
When the result of subtracting “1” from the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (“Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), at least the information stored in the advantageous section information storage unit is cleared ( In FIG. 246, step S2746) ends the advantageous section.
(C) Effect of Initial Invention 67 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether or not the section is an advantageous section. Further, the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at an appropriate timing when the advantageous section ends.

68. Initial invention 68
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 68 Same as Initial Invention 64.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 68 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
Initial invention (30th embodiment)
Advantageous mode display means (acquired number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) in which the advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means cannot be displayed;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantageous section information storage means (RWM53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag);
With an advantageous section counter (advantage section clear counter),
When starting an advantageous section, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
Regardless of whether or not the section is an advantageous section, "1" can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing based on the progress of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246),
Before the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”, there is a case where an end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied,
If the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”, “1” is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2823 in FIG. 252), and then the advantageous section “1” is subtracted from the advantageous section counter based on the execution of the game (step S2742 in FIG. 246), and the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (“Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246). , At least the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means is cleared (step S2746 in FIG. 246), and the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effects of Initial Invention 68 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section counter can be updated without determining whether or not the section is an advantageous section. Further, even when the advantageous section ends when the advantageous section counter is not "0", the advantageous section counter can be set to "0" and the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at an appropriate timing.

69. Initial invention 69
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 69 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of terminating an advantageous section based on the value of a difference counter.
2. Description of the Related Art In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of providing an advantageous section and terminating the advantageous section when a maximum of 1500 games or payouts are reached (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6112524).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, when the advantageous section is set to a maximum of 1500 games or payouts of 3000 sheets, the advantageous section becomes uniform.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is to provide a gaming machine capable of terminating an advantageous section based on the number of game media in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 69 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
A normal section in which the advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch (42) cannot be notified;
An advantageous section that may notify an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between a bet number of game media and a payout (including addition to credit),
Regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
Based on the start of the advantageous section, the value of the difference counter is set to an initial value (0 (H)),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section reaches a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 69 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
Also, regardless of whether the section is a normal section or an advantageous section, the value of the difference number counter can be updated, and the value of the difference number counter is set to an initial value based on the start of the advantageous section. It is not necessary to update the value of the difference counter after determining whether or not there is, and it is possible to simplify the processing and reduce the program capacity.

70. Initial invention 70
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 70 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 70 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between a bet number of game media and a payout (including addition to credit),
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the payout number is set to “0” and the difference counter is updated ((a) example 1 in FIG. 257).
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game, the difference counter is updated by setting the bet number of the game medium to “0” in the current game ((a) example 1 in FIG. 257).
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section reaches a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 70 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
Further, the value of the difference counter is updated by setting the number of payouts in the game in which the replay has been won and the number of bets in the next game to "0", so that the calculation can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced.

71. Initial invention 71
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 71 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 71 at first (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between a bet number of game media and a payout (including addition to credit),
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference counter is updated with the bet number or the automatic bet number in the game as the payout number ((b) example 2 in FIG. 257),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed in the previous game, the difference number counter is updated with the automatic bet number based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay as the bet number of the current game ((FIG. 257) b) Example 2),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section reaches a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 71 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be terminated based on the value of the difference number counter. Therefore, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games)" At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the value of the difference counter is updated based on the winning of the replay by updating the value of the difference counter using the bet number or the automatic bet number in the game as the payout number. It is possible to prevent the value from increasing.

72. Initial invention 72
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 72 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of the invention 72 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
Payout number storage means (payout number data buffer) for storing the number of payouts (including addition to credits) of game media in this game
When,
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between a bet number of game media and a payout (including addition to credit),
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, the payout number is stored in the payout number storage means,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated based on the bet number of the game medium and the payout number stored in the payout number storage means (FIG. 257),
When updating the difference counter based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination, the difference counter is incremented by "1" for each "1" payout of the game medium,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a predetermined flag (symbol combination display flag) is updated based on the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference counter is updated based on the bet number of the game medium and the predetermined flag ((b) example 2 in FIG. 257),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section reaches a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 72 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be terminated based on the value of the difference number counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
Further, since the value of the difference counter is updated based on the predetermined flag related to the winning of the replay, the value of the difference counter can be correctly updated even when there is no payout due to the winning of the replay.

73. Initial invention 73
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 73 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 73 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which the advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between a bet number of game media and a payout (including addition to credit),
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
When the specific bit (most significant bit) of the calculated difference counter value is “1”, the difference counter value is set to an initial value (0 (H)) (FIG. 258).
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 73 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
When setting the value of the difference counter to an initial value, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the most significant bit is “1”, so that the program can be simplified.

74. Initial invention 74
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 74 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 74 at the beginning (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which a notification game for notifying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be executed;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between the bet number of the game medium and the payout (including addition to credit);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect.
In the advantageous section, the main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
The difference number counter counts so that it becomes positive from the time when the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the lowest value in the advantageous section,
The main control means enables the value of the difference counter to be transmitted to the sub control means,
The sub-control means can display the total number of game media acquired based on satisfying a predetermined condition relating to the execution of the notification game (AT) (FIG. 260),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 74 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be terminated based on the value of the difference counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
In addition, the difference number counter counts so that it becomes positive from the time when the accumulated value of the difference number becomes the lowest value during the advantageous section, so that the value of the difference number counter and the game medium It may differ from the total number acquired. However, since the main control means transmits the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, the sub-control means determines an appropriate value (for example, It is possible to output a display or the like (not to give).

75. Initial invention 75
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 75 Same as Initial Invention 69.
(B) Means for solving the problem of Invention 75 initially (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses)
The original invention was
An advantageous section in which a notification game (AT) for notifying an advantageous operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be executed;
A difference counter for storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference data indicating a difference between the bet number of the game medium and the payout (including addition to credit);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game,
And sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect.
In the advantageous section, the main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
The main control means enables the value of the difference counter to be transmitted to the sub control means,
In the notification game, the sub-control means can change the notification mode when notifying the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference counter (FIG. 261),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value that satisfies the condition for ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated.

(C) Effects of the Initial Invention 75 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be terminated based on the value of the difference number counter, so that the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) At the same time or when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets) ", it is possible to end the advantageous section irrespective of the end condition of the advantageous section.
Further, the sub-control means can change the notification mode when notifying the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference counter. When the value approaches the value that satisfies the condition, it is possible to output a notification or the like that calls attention to the player.

Reference Signs List 1 base unit 10 slot machine 11 power switch 12 setting key switch 13 setting switch 14 reset switch 15 door switch 16 board case 16a caulking unit 17 display window 21 effect lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 cross key 25 menu button 31 reel 32 motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37 Payout sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Medal slot 43a Passage sensor 44 Input sensor 45 Blocker 46 Payment switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main control board (50A, 50B) Main control means)
51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 role lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 pushing order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 winning determination means 67 payout means 68 RT control means 69 advantageous section control means 69a advantageous section counter 69b upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Number of stored LEDs
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d game start display LED
79e Input LED
79f Replay display LED
79g effect indication LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External centralized terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

As a game section,
A first section that does not notify the player of an advantageous operation mode;
A second section having a case of notifying the player of an advantageous operation mode,
Having a predetermined storage means capable of storing a value regarding total difference number in the second section,
In predetermined game of the second section, the values for difference numbers in the predetermined game ( "value related to the difference between the number of" and. Or less identical to the value obtained by subtracting the bet number of game media from the grant number of game media in one game when.) and the predetermined result obtained by adding the values for the total difference numbers stored in the storage means is a positive value, stored in the predetermined storage means based on the value relating to the difference between the number of predetermined game a value for the total difference between the number is set to be updated,
In particular game of the second section, when the result obtained by adding the values for the total difference number stored in the predetermined storage unit with the value relating to the difference between the number of specific game negative value, the predetermined storage the prescribed value is set to be stored in the unit,
Based on the value relating to the total difference number in the second section, a game machine, characterized in that to enable completion of the second section.

Images